-J
oC
THE PHILIPPINE
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE
ALVIN J. COX, M.A., Ph.D.
GENERAL EDITOR
Section D
general biology, ethnology,
and anthropology
EDITED WITH THE COOPERATION OF
M. L. MILLER, Ph. D. ; R. P. COWLES, Ph. D. ; C. S. BANKS, M. S.
ALVIN SEALE, A. B. ; C. F. BAKER, A. M.
RICHARD c. McGregor, a. b.
Volume IX
1914
With 56 Plates, and 46 Text Figures
180429
MANILA
BUREAU OP printing
1914
CONTENTS
No. 1, February, 1914
Page.
Seale, Alvin. Preservation of commercial fish and fishery products
in the tropics 1
Two plates.
Day, Artemas L. The osseous system of Ophiocephalus striatus
Bloch 19
Nineteen plates and 7 text figures.
Worcester, Dean C. Note on the occurrence of a flying crustacean
in the Philippine Islands 57
Seale, Alvin. Pishes of Hongkong 59
Two plates.
Kerremans, Ch. Buprestides recueillis aux iles Philippines par C. F.
Baker, I 83
Une figure dans le texte.
SCHULTZE, W. Notes on the Malay pangolin, Manis javanica Des-
marest ...- 93
Two plates.
No. 2, April, 1914
Christie, Emerson B. Notes on irrigation and cooperative irrigation
societies in Ilocos Norte 99
One plate.
Christie, Emerson B. Notes on the pottery industry in San Nicolas,
Ilocos Norte 117
Three plates.
Cain, Andrew W. History of the Spanish normal school for men
teachers in Manila, 1865-1905 123
Four plates.
Melichar, L. Neue Homopteren von den Philippinen 173
Eine Tafel.
Kieffer, J. J. Nouveaux cynipides des Philippines 183
Day, Artemas L. Two new cyprinoid fishes of the genus Barbus
from Lake Manguao, Palawan, P. 1 187
One plate.
No. 3, June, 1914
Light, S. F. Some Philippine Scyphomedusse, including two new
genera, five new species, and one new variety 195
Sixteen text figures.
iii
285804
iv Contents
Pagre.
Light, S. F. Notes on Philippine Alcyonaria. Part II: Lemnalioi-
des kiikenthali, a new genus and species of Alcyonaria from the
Philippines and a discussion of the systematic position of the new
genus 233
One plate and 8 text fii?ures.
WiLEMAN, A. E. Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera and their larvae:
Part I 247
Three colored plates.
Meuchar, L. Neue Fulgoriden von den Philippinen: I. Theil 269
Eine Tafel.
KiEFFER, J. J. Enumeration des serphides (proctotrupides) des lies
Philippines avec description de genres nouveaux et d'especes nou-
velles 285
SCHULTZE, W. Notes on a nesting place of Crocodilus palustris
Lesson .-. 313
One plate.
No. 4, August, 1914
COWLES, R. P. Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 319
Three plates and 1 text figure.
Banks, Charles S. A new Philippine malaria mosquito 405
No. 5, September, 1914
Baker, C. F. Studies in Philippine Jassoidea: I. Some remarkable
Tettigoniellida 409
Eleven text fij?ures.
BiCKHARDT, H. Philippinische Histeriden: 1 423
Eine Tafel.
Melichar, L. Neue Fulgoriden von den Philippinen : II 433
Eine Tafel.
Fleutiaux, Ed. Elateridae des lies Philippines 441
Rapfray, a. Catalogue des pselaphides (coleopteres) des iles Philip-
pines 451
Crawford, J. C. New Philippine Hymenoptera 457
No. 6, November, 1914
Robertson, James A. The Igorots of Lepanto 465
Nine plates and one map.
McGregor, Richard C. Description of a new Prionochilus from the
highlands of Luzon 531
One colored plate.
Grouvelle, a. Nitidulidae des Philippines recoltes par C. F. Baker.... 535
Index 543
THE PHILIPPINE
Journal of Science
D. General Biology, Ethnology,
AND Anthropology
Vol. IX FEBRUARY, 1914 No. 1
PRESERVATION OF COMMERCIAL FISH AND FISHERY
PRODUCTS IN THE TROPICS
By Alvin Seale
{From the Section of Ichthyology, Biological Laboratory, Bureau of
Science, Manila, P, L)
Two plates
PRESERVING BY DRYING AND SALTING
Almost every country has its own methods for drying and
salting fish due to local conditions.
In the provinces of the Philippine Islands almost all of the
fish for home consumption are simply sundried with but a
sprinkling of salt or without salt. This economy of salt is
probably due to the difficulty of securing it and to the fact that
the fish are not to be kept for a great length of time. However,
in some places, like Sitanki Island, where the salting of fish is
the most important industry and the work is chiefly in the
hands of Chinese, the following method is employed: The
fish are caught by the Moro fishermen who clean them promptly,
usually while still on the fishing ground. The fish is placed in
front of the operator with the belly uppermost and the head
inward ; a cut is made along the side of the backbone from the
base of the tail to near the head. The fish is then turned over,
and a similar cut is made on the other side of the backbone to
the tip of the snout, the skin on the belly alone remaining intact.
The fish is then opened by cutting the upper or head end of the
123716
2 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
backbone and the posterior end of the body cavity. This enables
the operator to spread the fish out flat in three united sections,
the backbone constituting one section. If the fish is very large,
two gashes are cut in the thickest part of the flesh on each side
so that the salt may penetrate more quickly. The entrails are
then removed. The entire operation requires less than half a
minute by an experienced Moro using a bolo. The fish are then
sold to Chinese, who place them at once in a large vat of brine
sufficiently strong to float a potato. About 1 sack of salt to 3
picules of fish (418.5 pounds) is used, but this brine is too
weak. The fish are usually left in these vats for three or four
days ; then they are placed on platforms to dry ; each evening, or
when rain threatens, they are gathered up and piled in kenches.
This process is continued until they are thoroughly dry and ready
for the market. Dried fish from Sitanki are said to spoil very
readily. I believe this to be chiefly due to the lack of care in
keeping the brine sufficiently strong and the vat sanitary.
In Manila, where a very large quantity of small fish is cured,
especially sardines and young herring, the process is as follows :
The fish are washed in sea water when they are removed from
the boat, placed in strong brine for from two to three hours,
and spread on flakes until thoroughly sundried (Plate I).
They are then ready for packing and shipping. These fish are
dried in the round, and are covered each night and during
showers. Owing to the fact that frequently fish of from 20 to
22 centimeters were included in the lot, they were not cured
properly. Consequently, a city ordinance was passed requiring
the evisceration of fish of more than 15 centimeters in length,
when they were to be sundried. This was purely a sanitary
measure.
During the dry months in the Philippines, it is much better to
depend upon sundrying with a minimum amount of salting for
preserving fish. On the Grand Banks of the Newfoundland
coast, the fish are stored in kenches on shipboard. About 11.4
hectoliters (1.5 bushels) of salt for 45.30 kilograms (100 pounds)
of fish are used for these. When the fishermen reach the shore,
however, they cure the fish by pickling or by a combination of
drying and pickling.
PICKLING
In pickling fish it is customary to use either a rectangular
trough or a large hogshead which will hold about 193.05 liters
(51 gallons). This is called a butt. A thick layer of salt is
sprinkled on the bottom of the butt, then the fish are placed in
ix,D, 1 Seale: Fish and Fishery Products 3
the butts in layers, the split surface up. Salt is sprinkled
over each layer so that all parts of the fish are well covered,
and a half bushel of salt is placed on top to make a strong pickle.
The amount of salt required for each hogshead is from 1.4 to
2.5 hectoliters (4 to 6 bushels). When the fish settle, they are
covered with strong brine, and in this condition they will keep
until needed.
When the fish are taken from the butts, they are carefully
stacked in piles from 0.9 to 1.2 meters (3 to 4 feet) high called
kenches. This is to allow the brine to drain oflf. With the
exception of the lower layer, they are stacked with the cut side
down. At the end of from twenty-four to forty-eight hours
they are put out to dry on bamboo racks about a meter from the
ground, being spread cut side up. After one day of drying they
are replied or kenched for from twenty-four to forty-eight
hours and then dried again for two days or until perfectly dry.
I strongly advise that they then be packed in large cooking bags
or oilpaper, made up into neat packages, and stored in a dry
place. Fish prepared in this manner will keep in good condition
in the Philippines for months.
Regarding the quantity of salt used in curing iced or fresh
fish in the United States, A. W. Bitting writes: ^
About half a pound of salt is used to the pound of iced fish in the regular
course of curing the full salted fish; for export fish about three-eighths of
a pound is used, and for slack salted one-fourth of a pound. As the cured
fish contains only from 14 to 20 per cent of salt, it is evident that about
33 per cent of the amount used serves as a preservative while the remainder
acts as a drying agent, and it would seem that improved methods might
effect a marked saving in this part of the process, * ♦ ♦ sufficient
drying and retention of that dryness under varying weather conditions will
assist in preventing spoilage.
It is in this connection that we urge the use of oilpaper or
large cooking bags for packing fish, as this tends to prevent the
entrance of dampness which would cause the fish to mold — and
this is the greatest difficulty we have to contend with in pre-
serving dried fish in the Philippines.
SALTED SHRIMPS OR PRAWNS
At certain times of the year very young prawns from 2 to 3
centimeters in length are sold in the Manila markets. These
are preserved by being mixed with a liberal quantity of coarse
salt and then placed in kerosene tins. They find a ready sale.
'Bull U. S. Dept. Agr., Bur, Chem. (1911), 133, 27, 29.
4 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
SALTED CRABS
During the rainy season, great quantities of small crabs are
caught in the brackish waters of the esteros near Manila. They
are usually lightly sprinkled with salt and offered for sale the
next morning in the Manila markets. This crab, Varuna lit-
ter ata (Fabr.), is apparently not taken in large numbers at any
other season.
MULLET ROES
There are at least 16 species of mullets or banak found in
Philippine waters. They are good food fishes and usually abun-
dant in all parts of the Islands. Several thousands have been
caught at one haul of a big seine. The roes of these fish are a
great delicacy, but I am not aware that they are conserved in
any manner in the Philippines. The following is an abstract
of one method ^ for preparing mullet roes :
The fish are split open and the roes removed, care being taken to avoid
breaking the roe bags or bruising the eggs. They should be separated
carefully from the surrounding viscera. The roes are placed in tubs with
holes in the bottom so that the water can run off. The roes, still in the
roe bags, are then placed in boxes or kegs with fine salt sprinkled over
and between them. An excess of salt must be avoided as it will cause the
egg sacs to break. About 1 peck of Liverpool, or any fine, salt should be
used to 160 pounds of eggs.
On removal from the salt, the roes are spread on boards and exposed to
the sun for about one week, being covered at night. They are turned over
each morning and protected from rain. Sometimes, after one day's exposure,
other boards are laid on top of the roes to compress them slightly. When
properly cured they are from 4 to 8 inches long, from 2 to 4 inches wide,
and from one-half to two-thirds of an inch thick. They vary in color from
yellowish to dark red. These are now ready to be packed in small boxes
and marketed.
In Italy the hard roes of mullet are converted into cakes termed
bolarge or bolargo, which are prepared by washing and sprin-
kling with salt and pressing between two boards. They are then
smoked or sundried, and are a good appetizer in that they
promote thirst. In India these roes are considered excellent for
curries.
BAGOOSe
Bagoofig is the most common fish preparation in the Philip-
pines. In almost every native home it is more or less of a staple.
It is prepared by mixing 2 parts of young or small fish — anchovies
'Bull, U. S. Fish Comm. (1898), 18, 546.
IX.D.1 Seale: Fish and Fishery Products 5
preferred — with 3 parts of salt. This is placed in stone jars,
covered to exclude flies and dirt, and allowed to ferment for one
month. It is then ready for use, the liquid portion being used
as a sauce and the solid fried or mixed with rice. Care should
be taken to prevent flies from depositing their eggs in this
mixture as otherwise it becomes filled with larvae and is most
unappetizing. However, it is sometimes eaten in this condition.
PRESERVING BY SMOKING
In its simplest form, the preservation of fish by smoking is
as follows: The fish are first dressed. If large, they are split
down the belly from head to tail so that they lie flat. The head
and most of the backbone are removed. Usually the flesh is
gashed in several places to allow the salt to penetrate. The
fish are next placed in vats or barrels with 22.66 kilograms
(50 pounds) of No. 2 salt and from -2.27 to 4.54 kilograms
(5 to 10 pounds) of granulated sugar to 91 kilograms (200
pounds) of fish. On the second day, brine made by dissolving
13.61 kilograms (30 pounds) of salt in 18.9 liters (5 gallons)
of water is added. After the fifth or sixth day, the fish are
removed and soaked in fresh water for three hours. They are
trussed out flat, hung on sticks or bamboos, and permitted to
dry for from two to three hours in the open air. They are then
hung in the upper part of the smokehouse away from the heat,
but not so high as to be in the hot air which accumulates at the
top. The smoking is continued for from eighteen to thirty-six
hours, twenty-four of which are usually required to complete the
process. When low smokehouses are used, in which the fish are
hung within from 2.5 to 3 meters (8 to 10 feet) of the fire, the
smoking is usually completed in less time than this. The smoke
must be even throughout and with little fire. When sufficiently
smoked, the fish are permitted to cool and are then packed with
paper wrapped about them. The price in the United States for
fish prepared in this way is usually from 36 to 40 centavos per
pound.
The smokehouse may be of almost any shape or size, from an
inverted barrel to the elaborate brick house with outside fur-
naces. A common form is one with three or four chambers,
ranged side by side, from 1.83 to 4.27 meters (6 to 14 feet)
high, 1.22 to 1.52 meters (4 to 5 feet) wide, and 1.83 to 3.66
meters (6 to 12 feet) deep. Hardwood or hardwood sawdust
is used for producing the smoke.
6 The Philippine Journal of Science i^h
Variations from the above method are innumerable, and depend
largely upon the variety of smoked product to be prepared, and
the size and variety of the fish to be smoked must be taken into
consideration.
For the smoking of small fish such as young herring or sar-
dines, the Chinese of Manila have very extensive smokehouses
and drjring yards, and a large business is carried on by them.
This business has increased wonderfully within the past six
years. In 1909 there were but 14 houses and yards for drying
and smoking fish; in 1911 I counted 36 such establishments all
owned by Chinese, who were preparing the fish, not only
for local consumption, but for export to China as well. In
1912 almost all of these establishments were destroyed in the
great Tondo fire, but at this date (1913) many have resumed
operations.
The method of their operation, which is effective and eco-
nomical although rather crude, is as follows: The fish — usually
herring or sardines — are landed at Tondo beach (Plate I).
They are dipped in salt water and washed, but not eviscerated.
They are then put in strong brine for from two to three hours
(very small or young fish for less time) and then dipped in
boiling water for a few moments (Plate II). For the latter
purpose, large kettles over a crude earthen furnace are used.
The fish are then drained and spread in the sun for about one
hour to dry (Plate I). They are next placed in round baskets
about 40 centimeters in diameter, 100 fish to the basket
(Plate II). These baskets are placed over one of the openings
in the furnace to smoke. The furnace (Plate II) is usually
constructed of stone or cement, and is about 1 meter high
and 1 meter wide, while the length usually is limited only
by the length of the house. There may be two or more rows of
these furnaces in each house. The furnaces are supplied with
holes in the top about 50 centimeters apart for the smoke to pass
out; otherwise they are entirely closed. A smoke of hardwood
sawdust is started, and the basket of fish is placed over one of the
holes of which there are from 5 to 40 in each furnace. Usually
several baskets are placed one above another, and over the top
basket is always placed a tightly woven basket cover (Plate II) .
After smoking for ten hours the lowest basket in shifted to
the top and the smoking is continued until the fish are properly
cured. The length of time necessary for this process depends
largely upon the size of the fish. The fish intended for sale in the
local markets are usually smoked for twenty-four hours. Small
ix,D,i Seale: Fish and Fishery Products 7
fish require less smoking, export fish more. These baskets retail
for 60 centavos each.
If the fish are placed at a distance from the fire so that the
temperature is never above 26°. 7 C, the product is called **cold
smoked," but if the fish are hung very near the fire and are more
or less cooked it is called **hot smoked.*' The latter method
requires only about two hours, but the product will keep but a
very short time.
The "cold smoked" is the better product. The smoking may
last from a few hours to two or three weeks, depending upon
the product desired. Hardwood or hardwood sawdust makes
the best smoke, but I have succeeded in making a very good prod-
uct by using half-dry and green coconut husks.
I have conducted a number of experiments in smoking fish,
using the following, all of which are very common in the Phil-
ippines: Barracuda, sea bass, mullets, cavalla, snappers, and
porgies. The fish were thoroughly cleaned and washed, and the
backbones removed. Some of the larger ones were cut in strips.
They were put in strong brine for one day, allowed to drain and
dry two days in the sun and wind, and then transferred to the
smokehouse and smoked slowly for fourteen days, after which
they were placed in the sun for half a day. Finally, they were
wrapped in oilpaper and were sealed in tin boxes. After nine
months in Manila, these fish were eaten and pronounced excellent.
A very appetizing fish product was made by cutting the flesh
of large fish in rather small strips, which were placed in brine
for one hour and transferred to spiced vinegar for three days,
then sundried and slow smoked nine days. When wrapped in
oilpaper and packed in tin boxes, these kept in good condition
in Manila for four months. The following is an abstract of a
method which the United States Bureau of Fisheries ^ recom-
mends for preparing a choice fish product for warm climates:
The fish, after being smoked, are cooled and placed in layers in wooden
barrels. Between each layer of fish a layer of dry salt is placed in the
proportion of about 6 pounds of salt to 100 pounds of fish. The barrels,
after being filled, are kept in a cool place until the fish have become com-
pletely hard, which will require from three to fifteen days, depending upon
the kind and size of the fish. The barrels are then filled with brine and
closed by a tight-fitting cover. The brine must be carefully prepared in
the following manner: Filtered water is boiled with salt to a saturated
solution, cooled, skimmed, and as much drawn off as appears fully clear
and fine. If the brine is not carefully prepared, the fish will not keep for
'Bull. U. S. Fish. Comm. (1898), 18, 477.
8 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
any length of time, which will likewise be the case if the process of hardening
has not completely taken place.
Fish prepared in this manner will keep for many months and can be
sent to hot climates without danger of spoiling.
SMOKED HERRING
The ordinary hard-smoked herring is prepared by pickling it
in a tank of about 842 liters' (225 gallons') capacity. This tank
is first partially filled with weak pickle made by adding 0.53
hectoliter (1.5 bushels) of salt to 100 gallons of water. From
about 379 to 568 liters (100 to 150 gallons) of fish are then placed
in the pickle, after which half a bushel of salt is put over them,
and a third more of the fish is added. A second layer of salt,
about 0.53 hectoliter (1.5 bushels), is laid on, and enough fish
are then added to fill the tank which is finally covered with from
1.06 to 1.8 hectoliters (3 to 5 bushels) of salt. Each tank when
filled contains 4 hogsheads of fish and from 2.11 to 3.17 hecto-
liters (3 to 5 bushels) of salt, the quantity of salt depending
upon the size of the fish and the condition of the weather.
When the salt has struck, the time for which will require from
twelve to forty-eight hours depending upon the size of the fish,
the fish are dipped out and strung on sticks. They are then
dipped in a trough of clean salt water and allowed to drain and
dry for about one hour, after which they are hung in the smoke-
house and the fires are started. The fish are smoked from three
to five weeks. The sticks should be shifted so that a regular
smoking is insured. It is best to fill the smokehouse gradually.
BLOATERS
The following is an abstract^ of the method of preparing
the popular fish product known as bloater.
Fresh herring are used and are pickled as soon as received, 1 bushel of
salt being used to 1 barrel of fish. After remaining in the pickle for from
two to three days they are removed, drained, and placed on sticks for
smoking. In order to "bloat," the herring must be thoroughly moist. After
they have commenced to dry in the smokehouse, the heat must be increased.
If they hang for from ten to twelve hours without heat, they will not
"bloat.*' The smoking continues for from two and one-half to six days,
when the fish are usually sufficiently cured. Bloaters will keep but a short
time, unless put in cold storage.
KIPPERED HERRING
To kipper herring, the fish are cleaned and salted like the
bloaters, except that they are not kept in pickle so long. They
'Bull U. S. Fish Comm. (1898), 18, 485.
IX, D, 1 Seale: Fish and Fishery Products 9
are then hung up to dry for a few hours and smoked for from
six to eight hours at temperatures of from 26°.7 to 29°.4 C,
the fish being hung in such a way as to keep the abdomen open.
They are then ready for cooUng and packing.
"Kippered herring differ from bloater herring principally in
that they are split and eviscerated before smoking." These
will not keep well in the Philippines unless put in cold storage.
SMOKED CAT FISH
Cat fish may be smoked in the same manner as herring.
However, if they are very large, they should first be cut into
strips.
SMOKED EELS
The following is an abstract of a method used in Germany for
smoking eels, from the United States Bureau of Fisheries:^
The head, skin, tail, and viscera are removed, and the eel is split open
the entire length, tha^ backbone and many of the smaller bones attached
to it are removed. It is then laid in strong salt brine for six hours and
is then wiped dry with a towel and covered with the following preparation
which has been pounded in a porcelain mortar; One large anchovy, 1 ounce
fine salt, 8 ounces of su^ar, 1 ounce saltpeter, and sufficient butter to make
a paste of the ingredients. The eel, thoroughly cured with this preparation,
is rolled up tightly in the form of a disk, beginning at the tail end, tied
with a cord to hold it in position, and then sewed up in a linen cloth,
which covers the disk and allows the end to project. These disks are
next suspended in an ordinary smokehouse and smoked for from five to
six days, then allowed to cool and become firm, when they are ready for
the table.
MARINATING FISH
The method of conserving fish in spiced vinegar known in
Europe as marinating has never been practiced to any extent in
the Philippines. However, I believe that fish put up in this man-
ner would meet with a favorable reception from consumers.
For this purpose young herring, sardines, or anchovies are most
desirable, although almost any small food fish may be used.
Good firm fish, however, should be selected. The fish should
be cleaned, washed, and dried for from half an hour to one
hour in the air, then boiled or fried in hot oil (in Italy they
are dipped in flour before frying), and put out to cool and to
let the oil drain off. They are then packed in barrels, kegs,
or glass jars, and spiced vinegar sufficient to fill the containers
is poured in. After allowing them to stand a short time, the
'Bull U, S. Fish Comm. (1898), 18, 505.
10 The Philippine Journal of Science ish
bung is driven in or the cans sealed up. An excellent account
of the method of marinating eels as practiced in Italy is given
by James Hornell.^
CANNING SARDINES AND OTHER FISHES IN THE PHILIPPINES
I believe that there is a good opening for a moderate amount
of capital in the canned fish industry in the Philippines. This
is especially true if the fish cannery is operated in conjunction
with some allied industry; for instance, a tomato-catsup fac-
tory. These two could easily be combined. Excellent tomatoes
are grown in the vicinity of Manila, and a good market would
stimulate additional planting. Oriental people prefer sardines
put up in tomato sauce, so a portion of the output could be used
for that purpose. The refuse of the fish cannery could readily
be ground and pressed for chicken feed or fertilizer. There-
fore, in a properly organized cannery there would be three prod-
ucts to put on the market — sardines, tomato catsup, and **bone
meal" or fertilizer. Satisfactory labor at a r^sonable rate could
be readily secured. Taking into consideration the large quanti-
ties of fresh sardines landed each morning at Tondo beach, it is
surprising that some local capitalist has not opened a cannery.
In brief outline, the method of preparing sardines is as fol-
lows:
Catch the fish.
Rinse the fish well in salt or fresh water.
Spread on tables or a clean floor and sprinkle with a little salt.
Clean by removing heads and entrails.
Place the fish in brine of sufficient strength to float a potato, where they
should remain until the salt "strikes in." This will take from one-half
to one hour.
Rinse rapidly in two waters to remove scales, dirt, and excess of salt.
Dry in the open air by placing the fish, tails up, in shallow wire baskets,
so that water will run out of the abdominal cavity. In good weather
one hour or even less is sufficient for drying. In bad weather, dry
indoors. The wire baskets full of fish should be hung up so the air may
circulate freely through them.
Cook the fish in oil by immersing these wire baskets with the fish in them
in boiling peanut or olive oil. They should remain in the oil about two
minutes or until the tail fin breaks easily.
Hang up the baskets so that the oil will drain off, and leave until the fish
are cool.
Pack the fish in tins.
Fill the packed tins with olive oil, tomato catsup, or whatever is desired;
a few cloves, small peppers, or thyme may be used.
Solder or clamp the covers so that they are absolutely air-tight.
^ Bull. Madras Fisheries Bureau (1911), 2, No. 6, 50.
IX. D, 1
Scale: Fish and Fishery Products
11
Immerse the cans of fish in boiling water for two hours. This cooks the fish
and softens the bones.
Remove the cans from the water, allow them to cool, and rub them in dry
sawdust to remove all oil from the outside.
The sardines are then ready for the market.
Using the above method, I prepared 100 tins of Philippine
sardines to be used as an exhibit and afterward to be sent to
various packing associations in order to interest them in the
subject. The letters received in reply to these samples of sar-
dines were in most cases very satisfactory. Owing to imperfect
soldering, the oil leaked from some of the tins and the contents
spoiled.
Dr. David Starr Jordan, president of Stanford University,
wrote :
I had the can of the Philippine sardines you sent me served at the table.
I consider them equal to the European sardines.
A member of the firm of Messrs. Castle Bros.-Wolf & Son, one
of the largest commercial houses in Manila — now the Pacific
Commercial Company — wrote :
I consider the quality of the sardines you sent us very good and see no
reason why, eventually, the canning of these fish should not be an important
industry.
According to the decision of the pure food experts of the United
States Bureau of Agriculture, any small clupeoid fish may be put
up in oil and labelled sardine, provided that the name of the
country where the fish were caught and the kind of oil used in
the tins are printed on the label.
This practically includes the entire family Clupeidae. The
following species of this family are found in Philippine waters,
several of them in great abundance.
Species of clupeoid fishes found in Philippine waters.
Stolephorus gracilis (Temm. and Sardinella gibbosa {Bleeker) .
Schleg.).
Stolephorus delicatulus (Bennett).
Ambly g aster sirm (Riippell).
Ambly g aster clupeoides (Bleeker).
Ambly gaster perforatum (Cantor).
Dussumieria acuta Cuv. and Val,
Dussumieria elopsoides Bleeker.
Dussumieria hasseltii Bleeker.
Sardinella moluccensis (Bleeker).
Sardinella sundaica (Bleeker).
Sardinella fimbrata (Cuv. and Val.).
Sardinella longiceps (Cuv. and Val.).
Sardinella vancibris (Jordan and
Snyder) .
Sardinella m,elanostica (Schleg.).
Sardinella klunzi (Bleeker).
Sardinella zunazi (Bleeker) .
Ilisha hoevenii (Bleeker).
There are in addition a large number of anchovies, family
Engraulidse, and a number of fishes of the mackerel family
12 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
found in the Philippines that could undoubtedly be canned with
profit and sold on their merits.
However simple the process of canning sardines seems to be,
I strongly advise against anyone entering the business without
first securing the services of an experienced canning operator;
otherwise failure would probably result.
In this connection, the following note is of special interest : ^
The sardine packers of France have of late, as a consequence of the
very poor catch in the last few years, decided to close all their factories
along the coast of Brittany and Vendee.
This decision is partly due to the poor catch owing to the lack of fish
and the antiquated fishing implements used by the Britton fisherman. It
is noticed that in past years the fish which abounded along the coast
of Brittany seem to have almost disappeared therefrom, or at least the
sardine shoals are no longer to be found close to the shore as formerly
and seem to be now in the offing. The fishermen being poorly equipped
can not go too far off from the coast, and the consequence is that their
catch is very trifling. They are unable to supply the factories with a
sufficient quantity of fish, and when they secure a good catch try to sell
it at very high prices. The manufacturers claim that the Spanish and Por-
tuguese fish caught in large quantities are, on the contrary, sold at very
low prices, and thus the Spanish and Portuguese manufacturers are en-
abled to favorably compete with French manufacturers.
Over 100 factories were closed on January 1, 1913, and many others,
it is said, will close before the end of January, 1914. It is also said that
several manufacturers will reestablish their works in Spain and Portugal.
It is, however, hoped that their decision is not irrevocable, and that if
the fishermen are enabled to improve their fishing implements the closed
factories may perhaps be reopened before the next fishing season.
The manufacturers' decision affects quite a number of industries, such
as tin-can factories, olive-oil manufacturers, etc., and in Brittany alone over
50,000 people will thus be put out of employment. If the matter is not
arranged between the canners and the fishermen, French sardines will be
very scarce in the markets of the world.
PRESERVING FISH BY LOW TEMPERATURE OR REFRIGERATION
The preserving of fish and fish products in the tropics by
means of cold is of sufficient importance to merit the most care-
ful scientific observation. The subject is one of primary
importance not only to the people of Manila, but also to the
inhabitants of every city situated within the tropics and to all
transoceanic vessels.
It has no doubt been the experience of almost every one who
has traveled by sea that on some vessels all of the fish and fre-
quently the meat and game from the cold storage were as dry as
^ Daily Consular & Trade Rep., Washington (1913), 523.
ix.D,i Seale: Fish and Fishery Products 13
chips and almost as tasteless, while on others they were all that
could be desired.
I venture to state that this difference in the cold-storage foods
was due almost entirely to a lack of understanding on the part
of the engineer in charge of the refrigeration, a condition en-
tirely inexcusable, considering the amount of information avail-
able and the numerous good books that have been published on
the subject of cold storage. With the exception of salmon, hali-
but, and perhaps two or three other species, fish should never be
frozen if it can possibly be avoided. A fish that has been fully
frozen has a good appearance, and it is only when it is thawed
out and cooked that its poor condition is revealed, the flesh
being woolly in appearance, dry, and devoid of flavor. This is
explained by the fact that fish flesh is largely made up of loosely
bound, pale, muscular fibers which rupture very easily when
frozen in contrast to the firmly bound red muscles of beef or
mutton. Also, fish contain a much larger percentage of water
than beef or mutton; therefore, freezing has a more disastrous
effect.
Regarding the proper degree of cold at which fish should be
kept, there is considerable difference of opinion among experts.
The Director of the Insular Cold Storage plant recommends a
temperature of — 9°.4 C. for fish in Manila. The director of the
Philippine Cold Stores states as a result of his experience that
fish keep nicely in Manila at a temperature of from —6°. 7 to
— S'^.O C. This is also the opinion of the manager of the Inter-
national Cold Stores. On the other hand, Mr. Heron, who has
large cold stores and steam trawlers operating for the London
trade, says:
I am firmly of the opinion that if fish is required to be kept for a
considerable period it must not be frozen, as the tissues cannot stand the
freezing as in the case of beef and mutton.
He fully agrees with Anderson ^ who states in his recommen-
dations to the Fishery Board of Scotland that —
he found that from 0 degrees centigrade to —3 centigrade (32 degrees
Fahrenheit to 25.6 degrees Fahrenheit) will prevent the action of most
bacteria of putrification and at the same time maintain the fish in a con-
dition of rigor, and thus preserve the fish for a considerable time in a
comparative fresh condition, and with little deterioration in the tissue.
My own experience indicates that in Manila a round fish with
the ordinary market handling, if placed in the refrigerative
^ Proc. Cold Storage & Ice Assoc. England (1909), 9, 81.
14 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
room and kept at a temperature of from —0° to —3° C, will keep
for from ten to fourteen days only. If the fish is carefully
handled and gutted, the gills removed and the inside wiped with a
dry cloth, and the fish wrapped in oilpaper, it will keep in sweet
condition and retain its flavor for three weeks.
Herring and mackerel stand freezing better than most other
Philippine fishes. Many people who have cold storage, espe-
cially Americans, believe the best way to preserve fish is to
freeze them, then immerse in water, and ref reeze or glaze. This
method is extensively used in the Canadian and American
fisheries.
There is also a method of freezing fish in ice while they are
still alive, using oxygen to reduce the amount of water necessary
to be frozen, but this method is still in the experimental stage.
It is difficult to predict its future.
For ordinary transportation of fish from the fishing grounds
to the market, it is usual for the vessel to carry a cargo of ice
in the bins. This should be between decks in the coolest part
of the ship and be as well insulated as possible. When the fish
are caught, they are cleaned and washed at once. A layer of
cracked ice from 7 to 10 centimeters thick is placed on the floor
of one of the bins. A layer of fish is placed over this and
covered with chiseled ice, grading into cracked ice to the size of
a walnut. Alternating layers of fish and ice are put in until the
bin is full, when a layer of ice 15 centimeters or more thick is
placed over the top. If the room is kept at freezing point, these
fish will remain from twelve to fourteen days or longer in sweet
condition. If possible, and there need be no great difficulty if
the fishing is along shore, the fish should be chilled before they
are packed in the above manner, as they will keep longer and
not require so much ice in shipping.
Great strides have been made in the shipping of iced fish in
the past few years, and it is well demonstrated that careful
handling and packing will amply repay the additional expense
and trouble.
PREPARING FISH FOR SHIPMENT
A number of complaints have been received by the Bureau
of Science that the dried fish put up in certain places in the
Islands will not keep and that as a matter of fact quantities have
to be thrown away because they are spoiled. This, undoubtedly,
in the cases examined, resulted from slack salting and storage
in damp bodegas. The only remedy for this is to spread the
ix,D. 1 Seale: Fish and Fishery Products 15
fish in the sun for half a day and to keep the brine up to full
strength. Shippers should see to it that the fish are absolutely
dry — a simple matter in a country where the moisture evaporates
as rapidly as it does in the Philippines.
Any firm that would take the slight additional trouble of put-
ting up selected fish in smaller packages and wrapping these
packages in oilpaper and then sacking them (instead of merely
packing them in gunny sacks as is now the custom) would
soon build up a most profitable trade.
With the exception of a few marketable fish brought from
one or two southern ports, there are practically no fish shipped
in fresh condition anywhere in the Philippine Islands. This is
to be regretted and should be remedied as soon as possible, as
there are a number of places in the Islands where large quan-
tities of excellent food fish are caught which could easily be
shipped to Manila. I believe there has been but one serious
attempt to ship a large quantity of fresh fish, and that resulted
disastrously, chiefly because of a lack of cooperation among the
people handling the fish. A sailing ship with a quantity of
ice was sent to bring a cargo of fresh fish from Mindoro.
Owing to lack of ice, fish sufficient to make the voyage profitable
could not be carried, although the fish shipped (alces or gray
snappers) arrived in Manila in excellent condition. There is
absolutely no reason why with proper care quantities of fine
fresh fish could not be sent to Manila from numerous places
such as Mindoro and Lingayen.
The results of some very interesting experiments in ship-
ping fish have been published by the United States Bureau of
Fisheries.^ The results of these experiments show :
(a) That fish spoil more rapidly if the viscera are not removed.
(6) Free access of air retards putrefaction.
(c) Drainage of blood retards putrefaction.
(d) That if the intestines and head are removed and the fish is suspended
by the tail so that the blood drains out, the fish will keep a con-
siderable time without ice.
In 1908 a valuable paper ^^ was presented to the Inter-
national Fishery Congress regarding an improved method of
packing fish. This method consisted in cleaning the fish thor-
oughly by removing the viscera and gills as soon as the fish
' Tower, Ralph W., Improvements in preparing fish for shipment, Bull.
U. S, Fish Comm, (1899), 19, 231.
*• Soiling, A., An improved and practical method of packing fish for
transportation, Bull U. S. Bur. Fish. (1908), 28, pt. 1, 297.
16 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
were caught. They were then washed in salt water so that
all the blood was removed. The water was then allowed to
drain off, and the fish were wrapped in vegetable parchment
called fish-wrapping paper. It is probable that the paper bags
used for cooking in the United States could be used for this
purpose where the regular fish-wrapping paper is not obtain-
able. It was found that the fish wrapped in this paper and
put between layers of cracked ice (the pieces being about the
size of a walnut) would retain their flavor and keep in sweet
condition for a month or more, much longer than the fish pre-
pared in the ordinary way. As the paper keeps the water
out and prevents the fish from coming in direct contact with the
ice, this system from a sanitary standpoint alone is to be strongly
commended. It will be found that the fish keep and look so
much better that they readily sell for a sum sufficient to pay
for the paper and extra care.
ILLUSTRATIONS
Plate I
Fig. 1. Landing fish at Tondo beach, Manila.
2. Fish spread on flakes for drying.
Plate II
Fig. 1. Furnace for dipping sardines and herring.
2. Smoked herring, showing furnace and baskets in which the fish are
smoked and the basket covers.
128716 — 2 17
Seale: Preservation of Fish.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 1.
Fig. 1. Landing fish at Tondo Beach, Manila.
Fig. 2. Fish spread on flakes for drying.
PLATE I.
THE OSSEOUS SYSTEM OF OPHIOCEPHALUS STRIATUS
BLOCH
By Artemas L. Day
(From the Department of Zoology, College of Liberal Arts,
University of the Philippines)
Nineteen plates and 7 text figures
In working out the internal skeleton of Ophiocephalus striatus
Bloch, several specimens were dissected, although for the most
part bones of a single individual have been used for purposes of
illustrating the disarticulated bones. The bones of the skeleton
of the fish represented in Plate I have been illustrated in this
plate only, with the exception of a certain few, as for example
anterior dorsal radials (85,115) shown in text fig. 2, the dorsal
ray and internal spine, and the anal ray and interhaemal spine
shown in text fig. 5.
In a few other instances bones of other individuals have
been used; as, for instance, the glossohyal (65) shown in text
fig. 7, the top of the skull, disarticulated, and a part of the
suspensorium at the top of Plate VII.
The fish from the skeleton of which the illustrations of the
disarticulated bones were made, with the exception of the few
just named, was 50 centimeters long. Several smaller fish
were also dissected, and the number of bones was found to vary
considerably in specimens of different sizes. In several large
individuals the total number of ribs varied from 41 to 45, the
double ribs from 12 to 15, the vertebrae from 50 to 51, the
interneural spines from 40 to 42, and the interhaemal spines
from 23 to 25.
The character of certain bones in the larger specimen is very
different from that of the bones of smaller fish. In small
specimens the supraethmoid (75) and the glossohyal (65) are
cartilaginous, and even in the largest specimen dissected the
latter was found to be somewhat ossified in the central portion
only. The partially ossified region is indicated in text fig. 7.
With few exceptions the nomenclature of Starks ^ is here
followed.
^Proc. Wash, Acad. Sci. (1901), 3, 507.
19
20 The Philippine Journal of Science i»i4
Plate I is taken from the left side of the whole skeleton of
a fish 49.5 centimeters long. The numbers used in this plate
to mark the bones are the same as are used in the individual
descriptions throughout the paper.
I. THE SKULL AND ORBITALS
PLATES I, II, III, IV, AND V, AND PLATE VI, FIG. 1
The nasals (16) are somewhat rectangular, rather flat bones,
with curved edges. Sensory canals pass from posteriorly ante-
riorly from the frontals (36) opening on the dorsal side a short
distance from the anterior end. They articulate posteriorly
with the frontals (36) and prefrontals (76), with the orbital
(18 ^) outside, with the ethmoid (81) and supraethmoid (75)
inside, with each other in front, and with the premaxillaries
(1) below and anteriorly. Their curved interior sides form
an opening through which project the dorsal side of the ethmoid
(81) and the dorsal processes of the premaxillaries (1) . (Plates
I and II.)
The supratemporals (26) are somewhat right-triangular with
the outward right angle slightly rounded off. They are per-
forated throughout the whole length by sensory canals. They
lie above the articulation of the pterotics (38) and epiotics
(79), and articulate with the parietals (37) anteriorly, while
the posterior portion articulates with the base of the sl^prt
spine of the posttemporals (27). (Plate II.)
The posttemporals (27) have a comparatively large oval body
posteriorly, and anteriorly are widely forked, the larger branch,
inside, articulating with the epiotics (79) and the shorter with
the process of the pterotics (38). The posterior oval portion
covers a part of the space between the opercles (14) and the
epiotics (79). (Plates I and II.)
The supraoccipital (35) is situated between the parietals
(37), about half of the upper surface extending anterior to
them, and to which they are joined by broad flat condyles.
The V-shaped anterior end is articulated with the frontals
(36). Posteriorly it is joined to the exoccipitals (72) and
the epiotics (79). Below it is joined to the prootics (78).
The wide flat lateral processes form a part of the roof of
the accessory branchial chamber. (Plate II; Plate IV, fig. 1;
Plate V, fig. 1.)
The frontals (36) are somewhat rectangular, and twice as
long as broad. They are extensively tunneled by sensory canals.
The ventral side has an oblique ridge for articulation with
IX. D, 1 Day: Ophiocephahis' striattis 21
the basisphenoid (83) and the parasphenoid (66). They also
articulate anteriorly with the nasals (16) and the prefrontals
(76), outwardly laterally with the sphenotics (39), and with
the ethmoid (81) anteriorly. Posteriorly they articulate with
the pterotics (38). Just posterior to the ventral processes of
the frontals, and lying close to them, the alisphenoids (122)
are found. The oblique ridge-like ventral process of the fron-
tals is continuous with the alisphenoids (122), and the some-
what flattened dorsal portion of the alisphenoids (122) lies
against the flat ventral side of the frontals, posterior to their
processes. In Plate II the frontals are seen from the dorsal
side in the articulated top of the skull. In Plate III, dis-
articulated, the right is seen from the ventral side and the
left from the dorsal. In Plate IV, fig. 2, the right frontal
is seen from the right margin as also in Plate VI, fig. 1. In
Plate V, fig. 1, they are seen in the articulated skull, from the
ventral side. The left frontal is seen in Plate I.
The parietals (37) are roughly pentagonal in form, being
almost flat — slightly convex above — and very thin. They artic-
ulate with the frontals (36) anteriorly, the supraoccipital (35)
inside, the pterotics (38) outside, the epiotics (79) posteriorly,
and form a part of the roof of the accessory branchial chamber.
In Plate II the parietals are seen in the articulated skull from
the dorsal side. In Plate III they are disarticulated, the right
being seen from the ventral side and the left from the dorsal.
The pterotics (38) are somewhat rectangular in form, but
with a spine-like process on the posteroextemodorsal side. The
lower side has a ridge in the form of an arc, which bounds the
portion serving as a part of the roof of the accessory branchial
chamber. They articulate with the sphenotics (39) anteriorly,
the parietals (37) inside, the epiotics (79) internally, and with
the head of the hyomandibulars (10) below. The interno-
posteroventral portion of the pterotics articulates with the
externoanterior portion of the opisthotics (123). The pterotics
are seen in Plate II from the dorsal side in the articulated
skull. In Plate III they are disarticulated, the right being
shown from the ventral side and the left from the dorsal side.
The left is seen in Plate I. In Plate VI, fig. 1, the right pterotic
is seen from the right side. In Plate V, fig. 1, the pterotics are
seen from the ventral side in the articulated skull.
The sphenotics (39) are somewhat triangular and flat above,
with a ridge below, slanting inward, which unites with the
prootics (78). Internally and anteriorly the articulation is with
22 The Philippine Journal of Science im
•
the frontals (36), and posteriorly with the pterotics (38). On
the ventral side there is a fossa for the articulation of the
anterior limb of the head of the hyomandibular (10). They
are perforated throughout the whole length by the large sensory
canals passing from the frontals (36). On the ventral side
they articulate internally with the alisphenoids (122). In Plate
I the left is seen. In Plate II both are viewed in position,
from the dorsal side. In Plate III they are disarticulated, the
right having the ventral surface in view, while the left, the
dorsal surface. In Plate IV, fig. 2, the right is seen from
the right side, as also in Plate VI, fig. 1. In Plate V, fig. 1, both
are seen from the ventral side.
.The parasphenoid (66) extends from about the median dorsal
portion of the vomer (67) to almost the posterior portion of
the basioccipital (69). It sends out lateral laminae in the region
of the prootics (78), and on the sides, in the region ventral
to the basioccipital (69), are the posterior openings and grooves
from the myodome. Ventrad to the basisphenoid (83) and
anteriorly is another thin lamina on each side, which, together
with the central ''stock'' or ''rib,'' help to form the brain cavity.
Anteriorly, the articulation is with the vomer (67) and the
ethmoid (81), between which this portion lies. In Plate III
the parasphenoid is seen from the dorsal side, disarticulated;
in Plate IV, fig. 2, in the articulated skull from the right side;
in Plate V, fig. 1, in the articulated skull from the ventral; and
in Plate VI, fig. 1, in the articulated skull from the right side.
The vomer (67) anteriorly is broad with 2 triangular patches
of teeth. Just back of this "head," there is a horizontal thin
portion with a median rib, the latter extending to the posterior
end. The dorsal outline is clearly shown in Plate III. It artic-
ulates with the ethmoid (81) dorsally, laterally with the pre-
frontals (76), and posteriorly with the parasphenoid (66). In
Plate II the anterior end of the vomer is seen in the articulated
skull; in Plate III the dorsal side in the disarticulated skull;
in Plate IV, fig. 2, from the right side; in Plate V, fig. 1, in
the articulated skull, from the ventral; and in Plate VI, fig. 1,
in the articulated skull from the right side.
The basioccipital (69) forms the centrum of the condyle
for the attachment of the atlas (70). There is a longitudinal
suture separating it from the exoccipitals (72), and anteriorly
a vertical suture separating the basioccipital and exoccipitals
(72) from the prootics (78). The longitudinal suture between
the basioccipital and exoccipitals (72) passes through the middle
IX, D, 1 Day: Ophiocephaliis striatus 23
of the auditory capsule. The dorsal side borders the foramen
magnum. In Plate IV, fig. 1, it is seen from the dorsal side;
in Plate IV, fig. 2, from the right side, articulated; in Plate
V, fig. 1, in the articulated skull from the ventral side; and
in Plate V, fig. 2, in the articulated skull from the posterior.
The exoccipitals (72) border the foramen magnum on the
dorsal and internal side. A short distance within the foramen
they unite as a narrow bridge of bone just dorsad to the
bassioccipital (69), which latter forms the ventral side of the
foramen at the posterior opening. The lateral portions extend
outward and upward, articulating with the epiotics (79) later-
ally, with the supraoccipital (35) anteriorly above, with the
prootics (78) anteriorly ventrally, and with the bassioccipital
(69) below. The median portion of the dorsolateral process
articulates with the ventral margin of the opisthotics (123).
The exoccipitals are seen from the dorsal side of the articulated
skull in Plate II; in Plate IV, fig. 1, disarticulated from other
bones, from the dorsal ; and in Plate V, fig. 2, in the articulated
skull from the posterior. In Plate IV, fig. 2, and Plate VI,
fig. 1, the right shows from the right side.
Otoliths (73). In a fish 50 centimeters in length, these are
18 millimeters long, 10 millimeters wide, and 3 millimeters
thick. They are irregularly oval, somewhat curved, and on
the convex side is a somewhat S-shaped groove over the whole
length. In color they are like milky quartz, and there are
concentric lines running about them like the rings of growth
in the shell of the Pelecypoda. In Plate II the left, and in
Plate III the right, is seen from the side fitting against the
outer margin of the prootic (78), while in the same plates
the other is seen from the inside or concave surface.
The supraethmoid (75) is a light, spongy bone, which in
very young forms is cartilaginous. It is thickest posteriorly.
The general form from the dorsal side can be seen very well
in Plates II and III. It is situated dorsad to the anterior por-
tion of the ethmoid (81) and the posterior portion of the head
of the vomer (67). It is partly ventrad and partly posterior
with respect to the dorsal processes of the premaxillaries (1).
The supraethmoid, together with the dorsal processes of the
premaxillaries, extend dorsally through the opening between
the curved sides of the nasals (16).
Lying laterally to the ethmoid (81) and anteriorly to the
frontals (36) are the prefrontals (76), somewhat wing-like
laterally, and perforated anteriorly posteriorly by a large sen-
24 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
sory canal. In Plate II they are seen articulated from the dorsal
side; in Plate III from the dorsal, disarticulated; and in Plate
V, fig. 1, articulated, from the ventral side. In Plate IV, fig.
2, and Plate VI, fig. 1, the right is seen, articulated, from the
right side. In Plate I the left is dimly seen.
In Plate V, fig. 1, the ventral side of the prootics (78) is
shown in position. In Plate III the left is shown from the
dorsal side, and the right from the ventral. In Plate IV,
fig. 2, and Plate VI, fig. 1, the right is seen laterally. They
articulate with the parasphenoid (66) ventrally and internally,
the sphenotics (39) laterally, the alisphenoids (122) latero-
dorsally, the basisphenoid (83) interodor sally, the exoccipitals
(72) posterodor sally, the basioccipital (69) posteriorly, and
contain within them the otoliths (73). The form is shown in
the illustrations. The myodome or chamber for the insertion
of the rectus muscle of the eye is formed by projecting shelves
of bone from the internal sides of the prootics, and is separated
from the brain cavity by them. The basioccipital (69) also
assists here. It is concave on the ventral side, forming a cavity
with the parasphenoid (66), This cavity opens to the exterior
by an opening on either side from above the posterior end
of the parasphenoid (66).
The epiotics (79) articulate with the pterotics (38) on the out-
side, with the exoccipitals (72) on the inside, and internoante-
riorly with the supraoccipital (35) and parietals (37). The
main portion is somewhat pyramidal, with the base turned ante-
riorly and outwardly. Posteriorly and obliquely toward the spi-
nal column is a broad expanse of thin bone about the same length
as the main portion of the bone. This is somewhat fan-like with
concentric rings. This thin expanse stands at almost a right
angle to the body of the bone. As illustrated in Plate V, fig. 1,
they articulate with the opisthotics (123) which overlie the
posterolateral portion of the ventral surface of the epiotics.
They are seen in Plate II, articulated, from the dorsal side; in
Plate V, fig. 1, the posterior fan-like expanse from the ventral
side; and in Plate V, fig. 2, is the posterior view. In Plate IV,
fig. 1, the right is displayed from the dorsal side, while the left
has the ventral side uppermost. In Plate IV, fig. 2, the right
side of the posterior portion of the right bone is visible.
The ethmoid (81) is somewhat oval above, with two lateral
processes dorsally which articulate with the nasals (16). Lat-
erally it articulates with the prefrontals (76), posteriorly with
the frontals (36), and ventrally with the parasphenoid (66) and
IX, D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus strmtus 25
the vomer (67). Anteriorly are 4 cartilaginous projections,
2 in front and 1 at each side, and posteriorly 1 cartilag-
inous projection, which aid in articulation. These projections
are shown in the illustration. Ventrally the ethmoid is a much
narrower oval, and the thin median ventral portion overlies the
median paras phenoid (66) anteriorly. The whole bone is very
porous, especially the laterodorsal portions. It is visible from
the dorsal side, articulated, in Plate II, and disarticulated in
Plate III.
The basisphenoid (83) has rather thick lateral wing-like pro-
cesses, which are slightly wider anteriorly than posteriorly, and
there is a short spinous portion posteriorly that fits into a longi-
tudinal slit-like fossa in the dorsal side of the parasphenoid (66).
The lateral portions articulate with the ventral ridges of the
frontals (36) and the alisphenoid (122) and slightly with the
anterior portions of the prootics (78). Plate III shows it from
the dorsal side; Plate IV, fig. 2, shows the anterior process of
the right side; and Plate V, fig. 1, the anterior process of the
left side — that of the right side not being visible here.
The alisphenoids (122) articulate with the frontals (36),
laterally and dorsally, interoventrally with the basisphenoid
(83), posteroventrally with the prootics (78), and laterally
with the sphenotics (39). They lie close against the ventral
side of the frontals, and closely posterior to their ventral process.
On the dorsal side there is a flange supporting them against the
ventral side of the frontals (36). They are porous and some-
what perforated with sensory canals. They are shown in posi-
tion in Plate V, fig. 1, from the ventral side, while in Plate III
that of the right side is shown from the ventral side, disarti-
culated, with the outer margin toward the inside of the plate.
The opisthotics (123) articulate with the exoccipitals (72)
and pterotics (38), overlying the space between the two bones
named and covering the epiotics (79) on the ventral side.
They are seen in Plate IV, fig. 1, the right being shown from the
dorsal side, while the left is shown from the ventral side. In
Plate V, fig. 1, both are seen from the ventral side in position,
and in Plate V, fig. 2, the view is from the posterior. In Plate
VI, fig. 1, the right is seen from the right side. They are
somewhat triangular, porous, and perforated by sensory canals.
These, together with parts of the epiotics (79) , inclose a small
cavity in the ventral side of the latter.
Suborbitals and preorbitals, 18 ^-^. The suborbitals are 18 %
18*, 18«, 182, and 18^ ; and 18« is the preorbital. These are all
26 The Philippine Jotirnal of Science 1914
shown in Plate VI, fig. 2. At the right in the top line all are
shown united, while at the left in the same line the bones are
shown separately, with the 4th suborbital, 18^, seen from the
posterior side showing the flange that forms the posterior side
of the orbit. Those in the lower row are seen from the left side
and from the outer — lateral — side. All of the orbitals are per-
forated by sensory canals almost continuously and with various
openings to the exterior. Anteriorly and posteriorly the artic-
ulation is with the frontals (36), while 18^-18% inclusive,
closely overlie the maxillaries (5). Those at the right, united,
are from a somewhat smaller fish than those disarticulated.
They are also illustrated in Plate I.
II. SUSPENSORIUM AND OPERCULAR APPARATUS
PLATES VII AND VIII
The palatines (2) articulate anteriorly with the vomer (67),
with the pterygoids (80) posteriorly, and the mesopterygoids
(71) dorsally. The anterior process of the palatines passes
dorsally over the maxillaries (5), articulating with them. The
palatines are continuous with the pterygoids (80) and the quad-
rates (7). The posterior portion of the palatines lies interior
to the maxillaries (5). The exterior side is shown in Plate VII
and the interior side in Plate VIII.
The quadrates (7) are almost right-triangular in form, the
right angle being ventral. Anteriorly there is a broad, flat-
tened portion, articulating with the pterygoids (80) and the
mesopterygoids (71) and dorsally with the metapterygpids (8).
The posterior portion, which is in the form of a broad flat spine
at right angles to the anterior portion, projects posteriorly into
a fossa in the lower anterior portion of the preopercles (11).
On the inside, between the anterior and posterior parts, is a
groove, at the bottom of which is a fossa into which the lower
spinous portion of the symplectics (9) fits. The wide portion
at the right angle articulates with the posterior end of the an-
gulars (12). Plate VII shows the quadrates from the exterior
side both articulated and disarticulated, while Plate VIII ex-
hibits them from the internal side.
The metaptery golds (8) articulate with the mesopterygoids
(71) anteriorly, the quadrates (7) ventrally, the symplectics
(9) posteriorly, and with the hyomandibulars (10), the frontals
(36), and the sphenotics (39) dorsally. From the center of the
posterior somewhat square portion there arises an oblique ridge
ix.D, 1 Day: Ophioeephalus striatits 27
on the inside, which passes along the inside of the hyomandi-
bulars (10). The outside of the right bone is shown in Plate
VII and the inside in Plate VIII. The left is also included in
Plate I.
The symplectics (9) consist of a somewhat curved central
triangular portion with the base upward, and anteriorly and
posteriorly from this extends a wing-like process. They articu-
late with the metaptery golds (8) anteriorly, while the pointed
ventral portion becomes ankylosed with the inside of the quad-
rates (7). They are little more than laminate in the central
triangular portion only. The outside of the bone on the right
side is shown in Plate VII, and the inside of the bone on the
left side of the head is shown in Plate VIII. The left is also
included in Plate I.
The hyomandibulars (10) consist of a somewhat columnar
head or dorsal portion, from which there projects a ventral
lamellar portion, reenforced in the middle region by a thickened
triangular area similar to that of the symplectics (9) with
which this portion of the hyomandibular articulates. From this
lateral part of the bone there projects, at right angles, into
the region of the accessory branchial chamber, a lamellar por-
tion, internally, which assists in supporting the membranes
there. The anterior portion of the head of the hyomandibulars
fits into a groove on the ventral surface of the sphenotics (39),
the posterior portion fits into a similar but shallower fossa
on the ventral surface of the pterotics (38), while the posterior
end of the head fits into the socket on the inner, anterior, upper
portion of the opercle (14). Ventrally they articulate with the
symplectics (9) and the metapterygoids (8), with the interhyals
(21) internally, and with the preoperculars (11) posteriorly.
They are perforated with canals continuous with those of the
preoperculars (11). The outside of the bone of the right
side is shown in Plate VII, and the inside of the bone on the
left side is shown in Plate VIII, while the left is seen in Plate I.
The outline of the preopercles (11) is clearly shown in the
plates. Plate VIII shows the inside of the bone on the left
side, and Plate VII the outside of the bone on the right side.
They articulate with the hyomandibulars (10), the symplectics
(9), and the quadrates (7) anteriorly, with the operculars (14)
posteriorly, and the interoperculars (40) on the inside pos-
teriorly. On the inside they articulate with the interhyals
(21), which lie vertically on the preopercles (11). They are
perforated throughout the whole length by sensory canals.
28 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
The subopercles (13) articulate with the opercles (14) dorsally,
the angle following the lower margin of the same and over-
lapping slightly on the inside. Ventrally and anteriorly they
articulate with the interopercles (40), and the anterior dorsal
process lies on the inside of the median portion of the preopercles
(11). They are lamellar throughout except for a slight per-
forated thickening anteriorly and dorsally, and are convex on
the outside. The inside of the bone on the left side is shown
in -Plate VIII, and the outside of the bone on the right side is
shown in Plate VII. In. Plate VI, fig. 1, the posterolateral
margin of the left is seen from the inside. In Plate I the
left is shown from without.
The opercles (14) are roughly right-triangular with the right
angle anterior and dorsal, and are convex outwardly. They are
thickly lamellar with reenforcements along the anterior margin,
dorsoanteriorly, and with a ridge running anteriorly posteriorly
about one-third of the distance from the dorsal margin, along
the inside. This ridge continues anteriorly in a large expanse,
concave anteriorly, which serves for the socket of the posterior
end of the head of the hyomandibular (10). The opercles
appear to be made up of a considerable number of concentric
rings like the shell of the Pelecypoda, with the center, corre-
sponding to the umbo of the shell, just inside the socket for the
articulation of the posterior end of the head of the hyoman-
dibulars (10). The inside of the bone on the left is shown
in Plate VIII, and the outside of the bone on the right side
is shown in Plate VII. In Plate VI, fig. 1, a part of the inner
surface of the left is in view. The left is also seen in Plate I.
In Plate VIII the left interoperculum (40) is shown from the
interior and in Plate VII the right from the exterior. In Plate
VI, fig. 1, the inner ventral margin of the left may be seen,
and in Plate I the left is viewed. The interopercula overlie the
branchiostegal rays (22) and a portion of the epihyals (20), and
also posteriorly they overlie the anterior margin of the sub-
opercles (13). The dorsoanterior portion lies internally with
respect to the ventral part of the preopercles (11), with which
they articulate. The dorsal process overlies the epihyals (20).
Posteriorly the interopercles are somewhat lamellar, while the
anterior portion, as also the dorsal process, is somewhat
thickened. Anteriorly they articulate with the posterior portions
of the angulars (12) and the articulars (4).
The mesoptery golds (71) are thin wing-like bones, somewhat
convex on the outside, and about twice as long as broad. They
IX, D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatus 29
articulate forward and on the outside with the palatines (2),
on the lower side with the pterygoids (80), posteriorly and
ventrally with the palatines (2), on the lower side with the
pterygoids (80), posteriorly and ventrally with the quadrates
(7), and posteriorly with the metapterygoids (8). They are
about as long as the palatines and about three-fourths as long
as the frontals (36). The outside of that of the right side is
represented in Plate VII and the inside of the left in Plate VIII.
In Plate VIII the interior side of the left pterygoid (80) is
shown, and in Plate VII the exterior of the right. They artic-
ulate with the palatines (2) anteriorly, the posterior ends of
which extend into the anterior fossa in the pterygoids. The
posterior end lies inside of, and articulates with, the anterior
portion of the quadrates (7). The ventral margin of the meso-
pterygoids (71) lies internally to, and articulates with, the in-
terior and dorsal margin of the pterygoids. The anterior spinous
portion lies along the dorsal side of the palatines (2). At the
top of Plate VII the pterygoid is seen still articulated.
III. MANDIBLE
PLATE IX
The premaxillaries (1) are curved and tapering from the
middle region posteriorly, where they are cartilaginous and
almost spinous. At the anterior end is a dorsal process divided
into two parts, the more anterior being the higher. The shorter
sets just below the nasals (16), while the longer passes dorsally
through the opening between the nasals (16) and anteriorly to
the supraethmoid (75). The teeth anteriorly on the ventral
side are moderately large, while those posteriorly are very fine.
On the inside margin of the posterior two-thirds is a ridge of
cartilage which is continuous with a short ridge-like process
of bone, originating a short distance posterior to the dorsal
process. The premaxillaries articulate with the maxillaries (5)
anteriorly and posteriorly, lying ventrad to them. They articu-
late with each other anteriorly, and the higher dorsal process at
the anterior end of each overlies the anterior surface of the supra-
ethmoid (75). They lie laterad of the palatines (2) and the
pterygoids (80), and the anterior end of each overlies the vomer
(67). (Plate I; Plate VI, fig. 1; and Plate IX.) In Plate IX
the dorsal side of the left and the central side of the right are
exposed. The left is also seen in Plate I.
The left and right dentaries (3) are shown from the dorsal
side and the outer lateral side, respectively. They dovetail
30 The Philippine Journal of Science im
into the articular (4) posteriorly, and articulate with each
other in front. There is a deep fossa extending anteriorly
into the dentaries, opening toward the inside posteriorly, into
which the outer longer portion of the articular (4) extends.
There is also a canal on the inside of the furrow, leaving two
openings anteriorly, one on the ventral side and the other
forward on the outside.
There is a single row of large conical teeth extending for a
part of the length of the dentaries but not continuing either
entirely anteriorly or posteriorly, while posterior to these large
teeth are some smaller conical teeth. Anteriorly is a mass of
cardiform teeth. Also on the outside of the large teeth is a
row of the very small conical teeth, and some of them have
still smaller teeth at their bases on the inside. (Plate I and
Plate IX.)
The articular s (4) articulate anteriorly with the dentaries
(3) and with the quadrates (7) and with the angulars (12)
posteriorly. They form an obtuse angle at the outer lower mar-
gin, with a high dorsal process at the outer posterior part.
Anteriorly are two processes, the outer being the longer and
sharper. These two articulate with the dentary (3), the outer
and longer process extending into the fossa of the dentary (3)
and the other lying along the inside of the dentary (3). The
sensory canal in the dentaries (3) is continuous with a similar
canal in the articulars. In the depression continuous with that
formed by the union of the two anterior processes is a small
scale-like bone, the intra-articular (86). (Plates I and IX.)
The maxillaries (5) extend inside the suborbitals (18) just
above the premaxillaries (1), articulating with them anteriorly
and posteriorly, and the dorsal process fits in between the dorsal
processes of the premaxillaries (1) and the anterior processes of
the palatines (2). Posteriorly they extend as far as the pos-
terior end of the articulars (4) and the dorsal angle of the
quadrates (7). The dorsal view of the left is shown in Plate
IX, as is also the ventral view of the right, and in Plate I the
left is displayed.
The angulars (12) articulate closely with the posterior inner
end of the articular sl (4) and with the inter opercles (40) pos-
teriorly. The dorsal side of the left is shown disarticulated
from the articular (4) and the right still articulated. (Plate
IX.)
These **intra-articulars'' (86) lie in the angle of the articulars
(4). In Plate VI that of the right side is seen detached, from
IX, D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatits 31
the dorsal side, and the left is seen still lying in the angle of the
left articular (4). The ventral side is flattened, while the dor-
sal is somewhat conical. They lie with the median portion
opposite the attachment of Mackel's cartilage with the articulars
(4). This name is here given because of the location.
IV. PECTORAL AND PELVIC GIRDLES
PLATE X
At the left of Plate X is the left clavicle (62), with the dorsal
portion of the postclavicle (77), the hypercoracoid (15), and
the hypocoracoid (30) attached, and seen from the inside. To-
ward the right is the right clavicle, seen from the outside, and
disarticulated. The two clavicles articulate together forward
and ventrally, then pass posteriorly diagonally toward the dorsal
side, and lie along the interior side of the interopercles (40),
the subopercles (13), and the opercles (14). The dorsal por-
tion of the clavicles is articulated with the supraclavicles (28).
(Plates I and X.) The dorsal end of the clavicles, which is seen
toward the bottom of the plate, is somewhat lamellar, but is
reenforced posteriorly by a considerable thickening, continuous
with the thickening of the middle part of the bones passing
upward from the ventral expanded condyles. From the middle
portion extends a somewhat lamellar portion, convex anteriorly
and concave posteriorly. Within this concavity the hypercora-
coid (15) and the hypocoracoid (30) are articulated. _ The
anterodorsal spinous process extends interiorly to the posterior
end of the supraclavicles (28). The posterior expanse or wing
of the right clavicle, which aids in the articulation of the hyper-
coracoid (15) and the hypocoracoid (30), is seen a short dis-
tance from the dorsal end.
The interior side of the left supraclavicles (28) is shown on
the left of Plate X, while that of the right side is seen from the
outside. The anterior end articulates with the ventral side of
the body of the posttemporal (27). The supraclavicles extend
backward along the inside of the opercles (14) and along the
outside of the dorsal portion of the clavicles (62) with which
they articulate. Along the inside at the dorsal margin there is
a fossa which looks as if formed by the rolling over of the dorsal
margin. The condyle at the anterior end is somewhat hooked
externally, as is shown especially in the bone of the right side.
The left is also indicated in Plate I.
Postclavicles, lower part (6). These, as well as the upper
part of the postclavicles (77), are lamellar. The upper one-
32 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
third of the lower part lies over or outside of the upper part
(77). The form is well shown in Plate X. On the right side
of the plate the upper part (77) and lower part lie separately.
On the left side of the plate the parts of the left postclavicle
overlie the inside of the clavicle (62), the hypercoracoid (15),
and the hypocoracoid (30).
The postclavicle, upper part (77), articulates with the pos-
terior upper expanse of the clavicles (62), and lies almost
parallel with it. The lower end articulates with the lower part
of the postclavicle (6). This part of the postclavicle also is
lamellar, and the form can be readily seen in Plate X.
On the left side of Plate X the inside of the bases of the
pectoral rays (29) of the left side is shown, whil^ on the right
side of the plate are the pectoral rays of the right side. These
articulate with the actinosts (31) in each fin. In Plate I the
left pectoral is present. The number of rays articulating with
each of the actinosts may be determined from the plate.
The pelvic rays (33) are attached to the pelvic girdle (32),
and are shown in Plate X and, also, in Plate I.
The hypercoracoids (15) are somewhat roughly quadrangular
bones, articulating with the actinosts (31), the hypocoracoids
(30), and the clavicles (62). In Plate X the left is shown
articulated with the hypocoracoid (30) and the clavicle (62),
while on the right side it is isolated. Each is pierced by a
large foramen. The edge articulating with the actinosts (31)
is much thickened, while the remainder is very thin, being
thinnest around the foramen. The dorsal portion of the hypo-
coracoids extends inward at an angle to conform to the interior
of the clavicles (62). The left is indicated in Plate I.
The hypocoracoids (30) are articulated with the clavicles (62)
anteriorly by two processes, with the two ventral actinosts (31)
posteriorly, and with the hypercoracoids (15) dorsally. In Plate
X the left hypocoracoid is seen at the left side, internally, with
the ventral portion of the postclavicle (6) lying over it, and
articulated with the hypercoracoid (15) and the clavicle (62).
On the right side the right hypocoracoid is shown from the
outside. Interiorly the ventral portion has an angular furrow,
at the bottom of which is the prolongation of the ventral process
seen at the top in the plate. The sides of the furrow are
lamellar. The dorsal portion is lamellar with a considerable
thickening at the region of articulation with the actinosts (31).
In Plate I the posterior and ventral portions are to be seen.
The actinosts (31) are 4 in number on each side. The most
rx, D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatiis 33
ventral articulates anteriorly with the hypocoracoid (30), the
next articulates with the hypocoracoid (30) and the hyper-
coracoid (15), and the 2 dorsal ones articulate with the hyper-
coracoid (15), while posteriorly all articulate with the pectoral
rays (29). The condyles are much thickened, being about 1.5
millimeters, while between them the bones are about 0.5 milli-
meter. The epicondyle of the ventral actinost is very thin.
The actinosts are found in Plate X, and are shown from within,
the left actinosts being at the left side. The right actinosts
are represented from the outside. The left actinosts- may also
be seen in Plate I.
The pelvic girdle (32) is united anteriorly with the ventral
portions of the clavicles (62) by ligaments, and is separated
from them a distance about two-thirds its length. The posterior
condyles of the two parts of the girdle are much thickened to
articulate with the anterior ends of the pelvic rays (33). The
right and left parts are shown from the dorsal side in Plate X,
and the left part from the left side in Plate I.
Fig. 1. Caudal vertebra, the last but 2 (131 ) , anterior view. X 2.
V. VERTEBRA, RIBS, AND HYPURALS
PLATES XI AND XII
The first 3 vertebrae have no transverse processes (46, 47).
From the 4th to the 8th they grow longer and extend farther
laterally, although they immediately begin to slant ventrally,
so that a little posterior to the median abdominal region they
are almost vertical. The fossae of the transverse processes of
the 3d, 4th, and 5th ribs are turned dorsally, then in the suc-
ceeding ribs they begin to turn more and more posteriorly,
until in the 18th vertebra they face posteriorly.
The first 2 vertebrae, atlas and axis, receive the articulation
of a pair of single ribs, the succeeding 15 vertebrae the articula-
tion of a pair of double ribs, and the remainder, except the last
5 vertebrae, have a pair of single ribs articulated.
In Plate XI the atlas (70) is seen from the posterior side
and slightly tilted posteriorly, showing the centrum, neural
arch, and neural spine. It is seen also in text fig. 2.
The axis (87) is seen from the posterior, showing the centrum,
123716 3
34 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
neural arch (126), and neural spine (43). (Plate XL) This
is seen also in text fig. 2.
The 5th vertebra (88) of the spinal column is here seen pos-
teriorly. It shows the neural spine (43), neural arch (126),
centrum, and transverse processes (46). The last are here
horizontal, and receive the articulation of a pair of double ribs.
(Refer to Plate XI.) The neural spine of this vertebra may be
seen in Plate I.
The 6th vertebra (89), 6th of the spinal column, seen from the
left side shows the neural spine (43), while the transverse
processes are over the body of the vertebra. Prezygapophyses
(127) and small postzygapophyses (128) are seen. This is
shown in Plate XI from the left side, and the neural spine is
indicated in Plate I.
Fio. 2. Atlas (70) ; axis (87) ; 3d, 4th, and 5th vertebrae; interneural spines; dorsal rays;
and anterior dorsal radials (85 and 115). Natural size.
The 7th vertebra (90) (42 in Plate I) is seen from the
anterior side, showing the neural spine (43), the transverse
processes (47), the neural arch, and the centrum (97). This
is indicated in Plate XI and, also, in Plate I.
The 20th vertebra (91), from the posterior side in Plate XI,
shows the transverse process (49), the neural spine (43), the
neural arch, and the centrum (98). Transverse processes are
here passing toward the vertical. Plate I also shows this ver-
tebra from the left side.
The 21st vertebra (92) is viewed from the left side. It
shows the prezygapophysis (127), the postzygapophysis (128),
neural spine (125 and 43), and the transverse process (49).
The transverse processes approach more nearly the vertical.
Plates I and XI illustrate this vertebra.
The 22d vertebra (93) shows the neural spine (43), centrum
IX. D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatits 35
(99), and transverse process (49). It is viewed from the an-
terior side in Plate XI. In Plate I the left side is shown.
The 7th vertebra (94) from the last, in Plate XI, is viewed
from the posterior side showing the neural spine (43), neural
arch (126), and centrum (100). It is also seen, articulated,
from the left side in Plate I.
The 6th vertebra (95) from the last shows the neural spine
(43, 125), prezygapophysis (127), and postzygapophysis (128).
This is viewed from the left side. Plate XI represents it from
the left side disarticulated, and Plate I, articulated.
The 5th vertebra (96) from the last is viewed from the ante-
rior side in Plate XI, showing the centrum (101), the neural
spine (43), and the neural arch. Also, Plate I shows it, articu-
lated, from the left side.
The last caudal vertebra but 4 (129) illustrated in Plate XII,
fig. 2, shows a neural spine (51), haemal spine (52), prezyga-
pophysis, postzygapophysis, anterior ventral process, and lat-
eral foramina, being seen from the left side.
The last caudal vertebra but 3 (130) in Plate I and Plate XII,
fig. 2, shows the same parts as 129, but with much longer neural
(51) and hsemal (52) spines.
The last caudal vertebra but 2 (131) in Plate I and Plate XII,
fig. 1, shows the same structures as number 129, but the neural
and hsemal spines arise from the middle and anterior portion of
the centrum of the vertebra. Also, there is a dorsal process on
the hsemal spine a short distance from the centrum. This pro-
cess on the dorsal side of the hsemal spine (52) helps to artic-
ulate with the detached hsemal spine (52) of the last caudal
vertebra but 1 (132). The anterior side is illustrated in text
fig. 1.
The last caudal vertebra but 1 (132) bears the neural spine
(51), prezygapophysis, and hsemal spine (52), the last being
detached. This last contains the hsemal arch within itself. In
Plate I this is seen in the articulated skeleton, and in Plate XII,
fig. 1, it is disarticulated, with the hsemal spine (52) detached.
The hypural vertebra (34) is the last vertebra, and articulates
with all of the hypurals except 102 and 103, dorsally, posteriorly,
or ventrally. Anteriorly it articulates with the next vertebra.
The posterior dorsal process receives the condyles of the
hypurals (53) in its deep ventral fossa. It bears prezyga-
pophyses (?) which extend dorsally, and the posterior ventral
process is at the extreme posterior ventral margin. Plate I and
36 The Philippine Journal of Science isu
Plate XII, fig. 1 (the articulated skeleton), illustrate this
vertebra from the left side.
Suspended above the anterior end of the spinal column are the
two -anterior dorsal radials (85, 115). In Plate I, as also in text
fig. 2, they are represented in their natural positions. It will
be observed that the convex side of the first (85) is dorsal,
overlying the neural spine of the axis, while the concave side
of the second (115) is dorsal, and overlies the neural spine
of the third vertebra.
Neural spine 41 is somewhat posterior to the median abdom-
inal region.
Neural spine 43 is the spine of the 7th vertebra, bearing
Nos. 42 and 90 in Plate I, while in Plate XI it represents the
neural spines of all the vertebrae illustrated.
Neural spines 51 are shown in Plate I and in Plate XII, fig. 1 ;
the latter are the neural spines in the caudal region. In Plate
XII, fig. 1, the vertebrse are disarticulated, while Plate I shows
them articulated.
Neural spines 125 are of vertebrae 92 and 95. Other neural
spines are No. 43. These are illustrated in Plates I and XL
The neural arch (126) is of the vertebra that is the last
but 7, No. 94, and of the 2d and 5th vertebrae, Nos. 87 and 88,
in Plate XI.
Haemal spines (52). In Plate I the vertebrae are articulated,
and in Plate XII, fig. 1, they are disarticulated. It will be noted
that the haemal spine of the last vertebra but 1 is disarticulated
from the centrum.
Transverse process (46). This number indicates the trans-
verse process of the 5th vertebra, No. 88. Plate XI.
Transverse process (47). This is on the 7th vertebra, Nos.
90 and 42. Plate XL
Transverse process (49). This number indicates the trans-
verse process on the 21st vertebra, No. 92; and on the 22d
vertebra, No. 93 ; and also in Plate I it indicates the transverse
process on the 25th vertebra. (Plate XL)
The prezygapophyses (127) are illustrated in Plate XI, the
21st vertebra being No. 92; and in the last vertebra but 6,
No. 95.
The postzygapophyses (128). These are designated in Plate
XI in the 6th vertebra. No. 89; the 21st vertebra. No. 92;
and in the last vertebra but 6, No. 95.
The anterior ventral process (134) and the posterior ventral
IX, D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatus 37
process (135) are used in Plate XI in describing the last ver-
tebra but 6, No. 95.
The hypurals (53) articulate anteriorly with the hypural
vertebra (34) and posteriorly with the caudal rays (54, 55).
The second from the ventral has its anterodorsal processes
designated No. 60. No. 124 lies over the anterior end of the
dorsal broad hypural articulating with it, joining this hypural
with the dorsal surface of the hypural vertebra (34). The
second broad hypural from the dorsal side articulates with the
posterodorsal process of the hypural vertebra (34), the next
3 hypurals with the posterior surface of the hypural vertebra
(34), while the last broad hypural, or that bearing the process
No. 60, articulates with the posterior surface of the hypural
vertebra, the two anterodorsal processes passing dorsally at
the sides. Lying along the most dorsal broad hypural is the
narrow hypural (102) , and below the most ventral broad hypural
is also a narrow hypural ( ?) (103) , very similar to 102. (Plates
I and XII.)
The anterodorsal processes (60) of the most ventral wide
hypural (53) pass off from the anterior dorsal surface of the
most ventral wide hypural, extending laterally around the
hypural and hypural vertebra (34) lying dorsally, and really
forming the haemal arch. The dorsal tips of these processes
lie at a considerable distance from the hypurals (53) above,
embedded in the muscle. (Plate I and Plate XII, fig. 1.)
Hypural (?) No. 102 articulates with the anterior portion
of the most dorsal broad hypural (53) and with the neural
spine of the vertebra that is the last but one. It is of a form
similar to the neural spines of the four vertebrae anterior to
the hypural vertebra, but in thickness, color, and certain other
characteristics it resembles the other hypurals (53) although
being narrower. It lies between 124 and the body of its hypural
(53) and the neural spine of the vertebra that is the last but
one, and articulates with them. In Plate I it lies in articulation,
while in Plate XII, fig. 1, it is disarticulated.
Hypural (?) No. 124 is the anterior detached portion of
the most dorsal wide hypural (53). This bone receives, in the
fossa on the ventral side, the anterior dorsal portion of the
first broad hypural (53) and articulates with the hypural ver-
tebra (34) ventrally and with the neural spine (51) lying in
front. With the neural spine (51) just in front, it forms an
arch dorsad of the body of the hypural vertebra (34). Plate
38 The Philippine Journal of Science lau
I illustrates it still articulated, while Plate XII, fig. 1, represents
it detached.
Rays of caudal fin No. 54 articulate with the posterior ends
of the hypurals (53) clasping around them and on the dorsal
side with the neural spines (51) of the 2 vertebrae immediately
preceding the hypural vertebra (34). On the ventral side they
articulate with the haemal spines (52) of 3 caudal vertebrae
immediately preceding the hypural vertebra (34). (Plate I.)
No. 55 is used in Plate I to indicate the caudal rays at the dorsal
side. These are short, those in the median region being the
longest, the fin being homocercal.
RIBS
Articulated with the atlas and axis is a pair of single ribs.
Posterior to these are about 15 pairs of double ribs, while pos-
terior to these there is a pair of single ribs articulated with each
of the vertebrae except the last 5 in the caudal region. In the
last 4 pairs of double ribs the more dorsal is articulated to the
transverse process, not at the place with the ventral, but slightly
proximally, and so may be designated epipleurals. The last 3
double ribs in Plate I show this condition.
Rib 48 is in the anterior abdominal region in Plate I.
Rib 50 is attached to the 28th vertebra as shown in Plate I.
Rib 56 is in the posterior abdominal region, and is articulated
with the 38th vertebra. (Plate L)
Ribs 59 are the ventral of the first 3 double ribs, those of the
right side lying above. They are articulated with the 3d, 4th,
and 5th vertebrae, respectively.
Ribs 61 are the dorsal of the first 3 double ribs. These are
articulated with the 3d, 4th, and 5th vertebrae. (Plate XII,
fig. 2.)
The 13th upper double rib (104). All of these ribs at the
bottom are of the left side of the body, and those at the top
of the right side. Plate XII, fig. 2.
The 13th lower double rib (105) is seen in Plate XII, fig. 2.
The 14th upper double rib (106) is seen in Plate XII, fig. 2.
The 14th lower double rib (107). Anteriorly to this point,
the dorsal ribs have been the longer. (Plate XII, fig. 2.)
The 15th upper double rib (108). Here the lower instead
of the upper double rib is the longer. (Plate XII, fig. 2.)
The 15th lower double rib (109) is in Plate XII, fig. 2.
The 25th rib (110) of the trunk is a single rib, and is il-
lustrated in Plate XII, fig. 2.
ix,D. 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatus 39
The 26th rib (111) of the trunk is shown in Plate XII, fig. 2.
The 39th rib of the trunk (112), a single rib, is illustrated
in Plate XII, fig. 2.
The 40th rib (113) is shown in Plate XII, fig. 2.
The 41st rib (114) is represented in Plate XII, fig. 2.
VI. HYOID APPARATUS
PLATE XIII
Plate XIII shows the hyals from the outside, except the
urohyal (68), which is seen from the ventral side. On the
left side of the plate the hypohyal (84) , the ceratohyal (19) , and
the epihyal (20) are shown articulated, while on the right side
they are shown disarticulated.
The ceratohyal (19) is shown in the natural size, the anterior
end being 4.5 millimeters in thickness and the posterior end 3
millimeters. Along the exteroventral margin is a fossa for the
articulation of the branchiostegals (22).
The flange on the ceratohyal is seen not to be continuous with
that of the epihyal (20). The first and second branchiostegals
(22) are articulated with the ceratohyal, and the end of the
third is opposite the V-shaped opening on the ventral side
between the pterygoid (80) on the outside and the urohyal (68)
on the inside. The ends are much splintered, especially the
posterior end. These are also seen from the dorsal side in
Plate XV.
The outHne of the epihyals (20) is clearly seen in Plate XIII.
The ventral side has a wide flange similar to that on the cera-
tohyals (19) for the articulation of the branchiostegals (22).
The posterior end has a condyle 4 millimeters thick. The
anterior end is splintered with a very large process or "splinter''
on the ventral side, which fits into a fossa in the posterior end
of the ceratohyal (19).
The end of the third branchiostegal ray overlies the V-shaped
interruption between the ceratohyals (19) and the epihyals on
the ventral side, and the 4th and 5th rays articulate with the
flange of the epihyals. Dorsally, at the extreme posterior end,
the epihyals articulate with the ventral end of the interhyals
(21). The epihyals he opposite the posterior end of the quad-
rates (7), the ventral end of the preopercles (11), and the
dorsal anterior portion of the interopercles (40). The dorsal
portion of the extreme posterior end lies at the side of the
40
The Philippine Journal of Science
ceratobranchials (63) of the first branchial arch. In Plate
XIII the exterior side of the bones is shown at the right and
left sides. They are also seen from the dorsal side in Plate XV.
In Plate XIII the anterior side of the interhyals (21) lies in
view. The condyle of the ventral end is larger than that of
the dorsal end, and articulates with the glenoid fossa of the
epihyals (20). The epicondyle, which here lies below, in its
natural position is toward the interior. That of the left side
is indistinctly seen in Plate XV.
The branchiostegals (22) are seen from the exterior and are
curved as shown in Plate XIII. The anterior two articulate
with the ceratohyals (19), the 3d lies over the V-shaped in-
FlG. 3. Hypohyals (84), ceratonyals (19), epihyals (20), and branchiostegal rays (22).
"Teeth" are found on some of the rays. Natural size.
terval between the ceratohyals (19) and the epihyals (20), and
the 4th and 5th articulate with the epihyals (20). They lie
opposite the inner surfaces of the interopercles (40), the sub-
opercles (13) , and the opercles (14) . In one specimen examined,
the 2d and 3d branchiostegals on the right side are seen to
be notched or toothed as shown in text fig. 3, and on the left
side the third is of like structure. In Plate XI the branchios-
tegals are in position, and the extended epibranchials (64) and
superior pharyngeals (23) are underneath the posterior ends.
Plate VI, fig. 1, shows those of the left side from the interior.
From the ventral side the urohyal (68) presents a flat, sgme-
what oval surface, with a posterior spinous portion. However,
ix.i>.i Day: Ophiocephalus striatits 41
the median line and the seeming posterior portion indicate the
presence of a dorsal lamellar flange at right angles to the part
shown. The anterior view shows the urohyal to be somewhat
like an inverted t seen in text fig. 4. Anteriorly, both the
horizontal and vertical lamellae are thickened, so that the anterior
end is of the shape shown in the figure. It articulates by the
anteroventral fossa with the ventral side of the second basi-
branchial (17). Laterally and anteriorly it lies between, and
articulates with, the hypohyals (84) and continues posteriorly
between the ceratohyals (19) and the branchiostegals (22).
(Plates VI and XIII.)
The hypohyals (84) articulate with each other just anterior
to the urohyal (68) and with the anterior portion, both hori-
zontal and vertical, of the urohyal. Poste-
riorly they articulate with the ceratohyals
(19) . Dorsally they articulate with the first
basibranchial (17) and also with the ventral
vertical ridge of the same. On the left side
the hypohyal is still articulated with the
ceratohyal (19), while on the right side the
right hypohyal is disarticulated. These are
seen from the outer side. In Plate XV the ^^"teriortw'' xT'
posterodorsal condyles articulate with the
second basibranchial (17) internally. The hypohyals are per-
forated with sensory canals. These are illustrated in Plate VI,
fig. 1, and Plates XIII and XV.
VII. DORSAL RAYS AND INTERNEURAL SPINES AND ANAL RAYS
AND INTERH^MAL SPINES
The interneural spines and the interhsemal spines articulate
with the dorsal rays and anal rays, respectively, by ball-and-
socket joints. Between the two lateral parts of the rays at the
proximal ends are situated small spherical bodies (cartilaginous
nodules) which fit into the sockets at the distal ends of the
spines. In Plate XIV one of those posteriorly in the anal fin
is seen disarticulated and others in both fins are plainly visible.
Certain of the rays in both dorsal and anal fins present the
posterior view, which shows the two lateral parts of the rays,
their partial separation at the proximal end, and the cartilag-
inous nodules lying between their proximal ends.
All of both the interneural and interhsemal spines are repre-
sented from the left side, the left side of the plate being anterior.
The posterior dorsal rays are not represented.
42
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
The form, outline, and articulation of the dorsal rays and
the interneural spine, as well as the same characters of the anal
rays and interhsemal spines, are shown in text fig. 5.
The interneural spines (44) of the anterior abdominal region
are illustrated in Plate I, and in Plate XIV they are disarticulated.
Dorsal ray (45) . In Plates I and XIV this number indicates
the 8th dorsal ray, shown from the left side.
' Dorsal ray (116). This is the second, and is seen in Plates
I and XIV.
The 6th ray of the dorsal fin (121) is indicated in Plates I
and XIV. In the latter plate it is exposed from the posterior
side, while in Plate I it is
still articulated and is in
the natural position.
The interhsemal spine
(57) is in the posterior
abdominal region. The first
spine in this series is
almost straight, with a
condyle at its ventral ex-
tremity to articulate with
the anal ray. In the others
there is an anterior vertical
fossa, while the posterior
portion is lamellar. No.
117. This is illustrated
in Plates I and XIV. In-
terhsemal spines (117).
The 19th and 20th spines are indicated by this number in Plates
I and XIV, being situated in the posterior abdominal region.
Rays of the anal fin (58). This number in Plates I and XIV
represents one of the anal rays from the posterior side, showing
the two lateral portions and the cartilaginous nodule between
their distal ends.
Interneural spines (82) , The spines indicated by this number,
82, in Plates I and XIV are in the posterior abdominal region.
In Plate XIV the dorsal rays in this region are not represented,
but they are present in Plate I.
Anal ray (118). The 3d anal ray in Plates I and XIV bears
this number.
The 24th anal ray is labeled 119 in Plates I and XIV.
Anal rays 4 to 11 are indicated by number 120 in Plates
I and XIV. Those in Plate XIV are viewed from the posterior
FiQ. 5. Dorsal ray, interneural spine, anal ray,
interhaemal spine, and cartilaginous nodules. The
nodules are seen between the rays and spine.
X1.5.
ix,D. 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatus 43
side, except the 5th, which presents the left side and shows no
cartilaginous nodule. They lie opposite the corresponding inter-
haemal spines.
VIII. BRANCHIAL APPARATUS
PLATES XV AND XVI
Basibranchials (17). These are clearly illustrated in Plates
XV and XVI, in the former articulated, and in the latter dis-
articulated, but contiguous to those bones with which they are
articulated.
The 1st is thickest at the posterior end, where it is not quite
as thick as wide. A slight ridge extends from the anterior to
the posterior end on the ventral side.
The 2d is seen from the dorsal side, but, as the bone is
rather deep, a profile drawing from the left side is shown in
text fig. 6.
The 3d is about two-thirds as thick as broad, and has fossae
at the articulations of the hypobranchials (24) of the second
branchial arch and also at the posterior end.
The 4th basibranchial has a shaft posteriorly, becomes thinner,
and just posterior to the middle widens out into 2 thin lateral
flanges. Anteriorly, it is broadly wedge-shaped.
Hypobranchials (24) of the first arch. The outline of the
hypobranchials of the first arch is shown in Plate XVI, except
the epicondyle of the interior end. The dorsal portion of the
interior end articulates with the lateral fossa of the 3d basi-
branchial (17). The epicondyle passes to the ventral side of
the 3d basibranchial (17) and forward, articulating with the
posterior ventral portion of the 2d basibranchial (17). The
anterior process is almost lamellar. Laterally and distally these
hypobranchials articulate with the ceratobranchial (63). The
anterolateral margin is covered with small detachable plates of
cardiform teeth (133) which take the place of gill rakers.
Hypobranchials of the 2d arch. These bones articulate distally
with the ceratobranchials (63). Proximally the articulation is
with the fossae of the 4th basibranchial (17), the posteroventral
margin of the 3d basibranchial, and with the anteroventral
process of the hypobranchials of the 3d branchial arch. They
are convex anterodorsally and concave posteroventrally. The
ventral anterolateral epicondyle is lamellar. The anterolateral
surface is covered with detachable plates of cardiform teeth.
Hypobranchials of the 3d arch. The outline is clearly seen
in Plate XVI. Medially and posteriorly they articulate with
44 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
the ceratobranchials (63) of the 4th arch, the posterodorsal por-
tion of the 4th basibranchial (17), and the hypobranchials of the
3d arch on the opposite side. Distally they articulate with the
ceratobranchials (63) of the 3d arch. The anterior process
articulates with the proximal ventral epicondyle of the hypo-
branchials of the 2d branchial arch and with the anterior process
of the hypobranchials of the 3d arch on the opposite side.
Unlike other hypobranchials, those of the 3d arch have areas
of cardiform teeth on the posterodorsal side which are firmly
fixed and not detachable. Also, these areas are much larger than
the detachable areas of the other hypobranchials and modified
epibranchials (74) of the 1st branchial arch. There are no
hypobranchials in the 4th branchial arch.
In Plate XV the hypobranchials are still articulated, and
are shown from the dorsal side.
Upper or superior pharyngeals (23). These are designated
by 23^ 23^ 23*, referring to the different branchial arches,
232 articulates with the epibranchial (64) of the 2d arch, 23^
articulates with the epibranchial (64) of the 3d arch, and 23*
articulates with the epibranchial (64) of the 4th arch. In
Plates XV and XVI the upper pharyngeals are shown moved
outwardly and posteriorly, together with the epibranchials (64),
on the articulation of the epibranchials and the ceratobranchials
(63) as a hinge. In the latter plate they are not articulated,
while they are in the former. In their natural position the
upper pharyngeals lie dorsad of the inferior pharyngeals (25),
so that their toothed surfaces lie together. The upper pharyn-
geals of the 2d and 3d arches and the epibranchials (64) of
the 2d arch articulate with the ventral side of the basioccipital
(69).
In some specimens examined, certain of the teeth of the
superior pharyngeals of the 4th arch were seen to be growing
from the sides of large sockets, presumably of larger, more
mature teeth already shed.
Lower or inferior pharyngeals (25). These are articulated
anteriorly and laterally with the ceratobranchials (63) of the
4th branchial arch, the posterodorsal portion lying interior to
the ceratobranchials (63). As seen in Plate XVI, they are
provided with teeth which increase in size posteriorly. They
are very small anteriorly and very large posteriorly. Along
the posterior margin small teeth are seen in large sockets —
the same condition existing as is described in No. 23. Plate
VI, fig. 1, and Plates XV and XVI illustrate these.
ix,D, 1 Day: Ophiocephalus striatus 45
Ceratobranchials (63). These are concave below and convex
above. The condyles or glenoid surfaces of the proximal ends
are much larger than those of the distal ends. All are at least
slightly concave. Those of the 1st, 2d, and 3d branchial arches
articulate with the hypobranehials (24) proximally and distally
with the epibranchials (74) of the 1st branchial arch and (64)
of the 2d and 3d branchial arches. As there are no hypo-
branehials (24) of the 4th branchial arch, the ceratobranchials
of this arch articulate proximally with the hypobranehials (24)
of the 3d branchial arch, the 4th basibranchial, and the proximal
end of the inferior pharyngeals (25). Distally the articulation
is with the distal end of the epibranchials (64) of the 4th
branchial arch. All of the ceratobranchials are covered, on the
convex surface, with detachable patches of cardiform teeth, the
same as are spoken of in the descriptions of the hypobranehials
(24) and the epibranchials (74) of the 1st branchial arch.
The margins of the concavity on the ventral side of each of
the ceratobranchials are fringed with branchial lamellae. (Plates
XV and XVI.)
Epibranchials (74) of the first branchial arch. These bones
form a part of the accessory branchial apparatus. Each con-
sists of a dorsal vertical portion, about two-fifths of the total
length, which articulates dorsally with the margin of the flat
ventral portion of the pterotic (38), where the pterctic forms
a part of the roof of the accessory branchial chamber. Contin-
uous with the dorsal spinous portion and at the internal angle
of the more ventral lamellar part is a thickening or reenforce-
ment which becomes thicker at the ventral end where this epi-
branchial articulates with the ceratobranchial (63) of the first
branchial arch. The lower portion is lamellar, with a broad
internal more ventral part at an angle of about 60 degrees to an
external lateral portion, which extends farther dorsally into the
accessory branchial chamber. Ventrally the broad edge of the
posterior portion and the narrow ventral part of the flange at
an angle are continuous with the posterolateral end of the first
ceratobranchial (63), helping to form the first branchial arch.
The whole ventral margin and, also, the ventral part of the in-
terior angle are provided with the detachable patches of cardiform
teeth (133), as in the ceratobranchials (63) and the hypobran-
ehials (24). In Plate VI, fig. 1, the right is seen from the outer
side, in Plate XVI both are seen from the inner side, disarticu-
lated, and in Plate XV the left is but indistinctly seen.
Epibranchials (64) of the 2d branchial arch. These artic-
46
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
ulate distally with the ceratobranchials (63) of the 2d bran-
chial arch and with the ventrolateral region of the basioccipital
(69) and the superior pharyngeals (23 ^) of the 2d branchial
arch internally and ventrally, respectively. Because of being
66
17
17
Fig. 6. Glossohyal (65) ; basibranchials (17) of the 1st, 2d, and 3 branchial arches from the
left side ; the basibranchial of the 2d arch in detail. X 2.
extended, the ventral instead of the dorsal surface is shown.
The dorsal surface is concave, with the outside of the curve, the
region of the epicondyle, lying anteriorly and dorsad of the cera-
tobranchials (63) and the anterior portion of the inferior pha-
ryngeals (25). The proximal or internal condyle or that which
articulates with the basioccipital (69) is much larger than that
which articulates with the ceratobranchials (63) of the 2d
branchial arch.
Epibranchials of the 3d branchial arch. These bones also
are seen from the ventral side. The articulations distally are
with the ceratobranchials of the 3d branchial arch and proxi-
mally with the superior pharyngeals (23^) of the 3d arch. The
two epicondyles shown at the top in Plate XVI lie dorsad in posi-
tion against the anterior surface of the epibranchials of the 4th
arch. The large condyle articulates with the
dorsal surface of the superior pharyngeals (23 *)
of the 4th branchial arch.
The epibranchials are seen in Plates XV and
XVI.
Glossohyal (65). The more solid central por-
tion of the glossohyal is shown articulated with
the anterior end of the first basibranchial (17).
The complete outline is shown in text fig. 7, the
central, more solid portion being indicated. The
glossohyal in small specimens is entirely carti-
laginous, with the anterior and lateral margins
much softer than the central portion. The draw-
ing is the actual size of the glossohyal from a different fish from
that of Plate XVI. In Plate XV the glossohyal has been re-
moved. (Plate XVI.)
This number (133) in Plate VI, fig. 1, and in Plate XV in-
Fig. 7. Glossohyal
(65), dorsal view,
showinsT the more
solid central por-
tion. X 1.5.
IX, D, 1
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus
47
dicates detachable plates of cardiform teeth found on the
branchial arches.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Bridge, T. W. Fishes. Cambridge Natural History. Macmillan and Co.,
London (1904), 7, 141-537.
Parker, T. Jeffery, and Haswell, Wm. A. A Text-book of Zoology.
London (1910).
Goodrich, E. S. Vertebrata Craniata (First fascicle: Cyclostomes and
Fishes). A Treatise on Zoology edited by Ray Lankester. Adam and
Charles Black, London (1909), Part IX.
Cuvier, Georges, and Valenciennes, Achille. Histoire naturelle des
Poissons. Paris, F. G. Levrault (1828), 1-2, and Plates I-III.
Starks, Edwin Chapin. Synonymy of the fish skeleton. Proc, Wash,
Acad, Sci, (1901), 3, 507-539.
Idem. The osteological characters of the genus Sebastolobus. Proc. Cal.
Acad. Sci., Zool. (1897-1899), III, 1, 361-370.
WiEDERSHEiM, ROBERT. Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates. Adapted by
W. N. Parker, 3d ed. Macmillan and Co., London (1907).
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Actinosts, 81.
Alisphenoid, 122.
Anal ray, 3d, 118.
24th, 119.
4th to 11th inclusive, 120.
Angular, 12.
Anterior dorsal radials, 85, 115.
ventral process, 134.
Articular, 4.
Atlas, 70.
Axis, 87.
Basibranchials, 17.
Basioccipital, 69.
Basisphenoid, 83.
Branchiostegals, 22.
Caudal fin-rays, 64, 65.
Cardiform teeth, patches of, 133.
Centrum of the 7th vertebra, 97.
20th vertebra, bearing No.
91, 98.
22d vertebra, bearing No.
93, 99.
vertebra, the last but 7, bear-
ing No. 94, 100.
Centrum of vertebra, the last but 5, bearing
No. 96, 101.
Ceratobranchials, 63.
Ceratohyal, 19.
Clavicle, 62.
Dentary, 3.
Dorsal rays, 45.
Dorsal ray, the 2d, 116.
the 6th, 121.
Epibranchial, 64.
modified,
arch, 74.
Epihyal, 20.
Epiotic, 79.
of Ist branchial
Ethmoid, 81.
Exoccipital, 72.
Frontal, 36.
Glossohyal, 65.
Hsemal spine, 52.
Hyomandibular, 10.
Hypercoracoid, 15.
Hypocoracoid, 80.
Hypobranchial, 24.
Hypural, 63, 102, 108.
anterior part of most dorsal,
broad, 124.
vertebra, 34.
Hypohyal, 84.
Inferior or lower pharyngeals, 25.
Interhaemal spine, 57.
of 19th and 20th verte-
brae, 117.
Interhyal, 21.
Intemeural spine, 44, 82.
Interopercular or interopercle,
Intra-articular, 86.
Lower or inferior pharyngeals.
Maxillary, 5.
Mesopterygoid, 71.
Metapterygoid, 8.
Naaal, 16.
Neural arch on vertebrse bearing Nos. 87, 88,
and 94, 126.
spine, 41, 43, 51, 125.
spines of vertebras bearing Nos. 92
and 95, 126.
Operculum, 14.
Opisthotic, 123.
Otolith, 73.
Palatine, 2.
Parasphenoid, 66.
Parietal, 37.
40.
25.
48
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
Patches of cardiform teeth, 133.
Pectoral rays, 29.
Pelvic fin, 33.
girdle, 32.
Pharyngobranchial (see Inferior pha-
ryngeals ) .
Postclavicle, upper part, 77.
Postclavicle, lower part, 6.
Posterior ventral process, 135.
Posttemporal, 27.
Postzygapophyses, 128.
Prefrontal, 76.
Premaxillary, 1.
Preopercle, 11.
Preorbital, 18.
Prezygapophyses, 127.
Prootic, 78.
Pterotic, 38.
Pterygoid, 80.
Quadrate, 7.
Rib, second single or 19th, 48.
11th and 12th single, 50.
22d and 23d single, 56.
lower of double ribs, 59.
upper of double ribs, 61.
upper double, the 13th, 104.
lower double, the 13th, 105.
upper double, the 14th, 106.
14th double, 107.
15th upper double, 108.
15th lower double, 109.
25th, 110.
26th, 111.
39th, 112.
Rib, 40th, 113.
41st, 114.
Sphenotic, 39.
Spine on lowest wide hypural, 60.
Subopercle, 13.
Suborbitals, 18.
Superior or upper pharyngeals, 23.
Supraclavicle, 28.
Supraethmoid, 75.
Supraoccipital, 35.
Supratemporal, 26.
Symplectic, 9.
Transverse process, 46, 47, 49.
Upper or superior pharyngeals, 23.
Urohyal, 68.
Ventral process, anterior, 134.
posterior, 135.
Vertebra, the 2d, 87.
hypural, 34.
the 5th, 88.
the 6th, 89.
the 7th, 90 in Plate XI; 42 In
Plate I.
the 20th, 91.
the 21st, 92.
the 22d, 93.
the last but 7, 94.
the last but 6, 95.
the last but 5, 96.
the last but 4, 129.
the last but 3, 130.
the last but 2, 131.
the last but 1, 132.
Vomer, 67.
NUMERICAL INDEX
1. Premaxillary.
30.
2. Palatine.
81.
3. Dentary.
32.
4. Articular.
33.
5. Maxillary.
34.
6. Postclavicle, lower
part (see 77).
85.
7. Quadrate.
36.
8. Metapterygoid.
37.
9. Symplectic.
38.
10. Hyomandibular.
39.
11. Preopercle.
40.
12. Angular.
41.
13. Suboperculum.
42.
14. Operculum.
15. Hypercoracoid.
43.
16. Nasal.
44.
17. Basibranchials.
45.
18. Orbitals.
46.
19. Ceratohyal.
47.
20. Epihyal.
48.
21. Interhyal.
49.
22. Branchiostegals.
50.
23. Upper or superior
pharyngeals.
51.
24. Hypobranchials.
52.
25. Lower or inferior pharyngeals.
53.
26. Supratemporal.
54.
27. Posttemporal.
65.
28. Supraclavicle.
56.
29. Pectoral rays.
Hypocoracoid.
Actinosts.
Pelvic girdle.
Pelvic fin.
Hypural vertebra.
Supraoccipital.
Frontal.
Parietal.
Pterotic.
Sphenotic.
Interoperculum.
Neural spines.
Seventh vertebra in Plate I. (In Plat«
XII this vertebra is No. 90.)
Neural spines.
Interneural spine.
Dorsal rays.
Transverse process (see 47 and 49).
Transverse process (see 46 and 49).
Rib, 19th.
Transverse process (see 46 and 47).
Ribs, 11th and 12th single.
Neural spine.
Haemal spine.
Hypural.
Caudal rays.
Caudal rays.
Rib, posterior abdominal, 22d and 23d
single.
IX, D, 1
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus
49
57. Interhsemal spine.
58. Anal rays.
69. Ribs, Plate XII, ventral of double ribs.
60. Spine on lowest wide hypural.
61. Dorsal of double ribs, Plate XII.
62. Clavicle.
63. Ceratobranchials.
64. Epibranchials.
65. Glossohyal.
66. Parasphenoid.
67. Vomer.
68. Urohyal.
69. Basioccipital.
70. Atlas.
71. Mesopterygoid.
72. Exoccipital.
73. Otoliths.
74. Epibranchial modified of let branchial
arch.
75. Supraethmoid.
76. Prefrontal.
77. Postclavicle, upper part.
78. Prootic.
79. Epiotic.
80. Pterygoid.
81. Ethmoid.
82. Interneural spines.
83. Basisphenoid.
84. Hypohyals.
85. Anterior dorsal radial.
86. Intra-articular.
87. Vertebra, the 2d, axis.
88. Vertebra, the 5th.
89. Vertebra, the 6th.
90. Vertebra, the 7th in Plate XI and
No. 42 in Plate I.
91. Vertebra, the 20th.
92. Vertebra, the 21st.
93. Vertebra, the 22d.
94. Vertebra, the last but 7.
95. Vertebra, the last but 6.
96. Vertebra, the last but 5.
97. Centrum of vertebra, the 7th, bearingr
No. 90.
123716 4
98. Centrum of vertebra, the 20th, bearingr
No. 91.
99. Centrum of vertebra, the 22d, bearingr
No. 93.
100. Centrum of vertebra, the last but 7,
bearing No. 94.
101. Centrum of vertebra, the laat but 5.
bearing No. 96.
102. Hypural (?)
108. Hypural ( ?)
104. Upper double rib, the 13th.
105. Lower double rib, the 13th.
106. Upper double rib, the 14th.
107. Lower double rib, the 14th.
108. Upper double rib. the 15th.
109. Lower double rib, the 15th.
110. Rib, the 25th.
111. Rib, the 26th.
112. Rib, the 39th.
113. Rib, the 40th.
114. Rib, the 41st.
115. Anterior dorsal radial.
116. Second dorsal ray.
117. 19th and 20th interhsemal spines.
118. 3d anal ray.
119. 24th ray of anal fin.
120. Anal rays, 4th to 11th inclusive.
121. 6th ray of dorsal fin.
122. Alisphenoid.
123. Opisthotic.
124. Upper anterior part of hypural.
125. Neural spines of vertebrae bearing Nos.
92 and 95.
126. Neural arch of vertebwe bearinflr Noe,
87, 88, and 94.
127. Prezygapophyses.
128. Postzygapophyses.
129. Last vertebra but 4.
130. Last vertebra but 3.
131. Last vertebra but 2.
132. Last vertebra but 1.
183. Patches of cardiform teeth on brainchial
arches in Plate XVIL
i34. Anterior ventral process.
135. Posterior ventral process.
ILLUSTRATIONS
Plates from photographs by Day and Martin; text figures from drawings by Espinosa. The
species represented in all of the plates and the text figures is OphiocephaluM atriatug
Bloch.
Plate I
The whole skeleton, articulated; from the left side.
Plate la
Anterior part of skeleton, natural size.
Plate lb
Middle part of skeleton, natural size.
Plate Ic
Posterior part of skeleton, actual size.
Plate II
The top of the skull from the dorsal side.
16, nasal. 67, vomer.
26, supratemporal. 72, exoccipital.
27, posttemporal. 73, otoliths.
35, supraoccipital. 75, supraethmoid.
36, frontal. 76, prefrontal.
37, parietal. 79, epiotic.
38, pterotic. 81, ethmoid.
39, sphenotic.
Plate III
A part of the disarticulated skull.
16, nasal, from dorsal side.
36, frontals, left from dorsal side and right from ventral.
37, parietals, left from dorsal side and right from ventral.
38, pterotics, left from dorsal side and right from ventral.
39, sphenotics, left from dorsal side and right from ventral.
Q6, parasphenoid, from the dorsal side.
67, vomer, from the dorsal side.
73, otoliths, left from the inside and right from the outside.
76, prefrontals, from the dorsal side.
78, prootics, left from dorsal side and right from ventral.
. 81, ethmoid, from the dorsal side.
83, basisphenoid, from the dorsal side.
122, alisphenoid, right from the ventral side.
51
52 The Philippine Journal of Science i^u
Plate IV
Fig. 1. Posterior portion of disarticulated skull. The left side of the figure
is anterior.
35, supraoccipital, from the dorsal side.
69, basioccipital, from the dorsal side.
72, exoccipitals, from the dorsal side.
79, epiotics, left from ventral side and right from dorsal.
123, opisthotics, left from ventral side and right from dorsal.
2. Top of skull from right side.
36, frontal. 72, exoccipital.
38, pterotic. 76, prefrontal.
39, sphenotic. 78, prootic.
66, parasphenoid. 79, epiotic.
67, vomer. 83, basisphenoid.
69, basioccipital.
Plate V
Fig. 1. Ventral side of top of skull.
35, supraoccipital. 72, exoccipital.
36, frontal. 76, prefrontal.
38, pterotic. 78, prootic.
39, sphenotic. 79, epiotic.
66, parasphenoid. 83, basisphenoid.
67, vomer. 122, alisphenoid.
69, basioccipital. 123, opisthotic.
2. Posterior view of top of skull.
35, supraoccipital. 72, exoccipital.
38, pterotic. 79, epiotic.
69, basioccipital. 123, opisthotic.
Plate VI
Fig. 1, Right side of skull with suspensorium and jaws removed.
1, premaxillary. 65, glossohyal.
13, suboperculum. 66, parasphenoid.
14, operculum. 67, vomer.
16, nasal. 68, urohyal.
22, branchiostegals. 70, atlas.
25, lower or inferior pha- 72, exoccipital.
ryngeals. 74, epibranchial, modified of Ist
26, supratemporal. branchial arch.
27, posttemporal. 76, prefrontal.
36, frontal. 78, prootic.
38, pterotic. 84, hypohyal.
39, sphenotic. 123, opisthotic.
40, interoperculum. 133, patches of cardiform teeth.
2. Orbitals.
18* to 18", suborbitals; 18^ of top row from the posterior side.
18", preorbital from outside.
IX, D. 1 Day: Ophiocephalus atriatus 53
Plate VII
Suspensorium, opercles, and palatine. All the bones of the right side are
seen from the outside. Those at the top — articulated — are from a
smaller specimen than those below.
2, palatine. 13, suboperculum.
7, quadrate. 14, operculum.
8, metapterygoid. 40, interoperculum.
9, symplectic. 71, mesopterygoid.
10, hyomandibular. 80, pterygoid.
11, preoperculum.
Plate VIII
Suspensorium, opercles, and palatine. The bones of the left side seen
from the inside.
2, palatine. 13, suboperculum.
7, quadrate. 14, operculum.
8, metapterygoid. 40, interoperculum.
9, symplectic. 71, mesopterygoid.
10, hyomandibular. 80, pterygoid.
11, preoperculum.
Plate IX
The mandible.
1, premaxillaries, left from dorsal and right from ventral side.
3, dentaries, left from dorsal and right from outer side.
4, articulars, left from dorsal and right from outer side.
5, maxillaries, left from dorsal and right from ventral side.
12, angular, right from outer side.
86, intra-articulars from dorsal side.
Plate X
The girdles.
6, postclavicles ; lower part, left from inside, right from out-
side.
15, hypercoracoid ; left from inside, right from outside.
28, supraclavicles ; left from inside, right from outside.
29, pectoral rays ; left from inside, right from outside.
30, hypocoracoid ; left from inside, right from outside.
31, actinosts; left from inside, right from outside.
32, pelvic girdle; from dorsal side.
33, pelvic rays; from dorsal side.
62, clavicles; left from inside, right from outside.
77, postclavicle ; upper part, left from inside, right from outside.
54
The Philippine Journal of Science
Plate XI
Anterior and median abdominal vertebrae.
43, neural spine. 97,
46, transverse process.
47, transverse process. 98,
49, transverse process.
70, atlas. 99,
87, axis.
88, 5th vertebra. 100,
89, 6th vertebra.
90, 7th vertebra. 101,
91, 20th vertebra.
92, 21st vertebra. 126,
93, 22d vertebra.
94, vertebra, the last but 127,
seven. 128,
95, vertebra, the last but 134,
six. 135,
96, vertebra, the last but
five.
centrum of vertebra, the 7th
bearing No. 90.
centrum of vertebra, the 20th
bearing No. 91.
centrum of vertebra, the 22d
bearing No. 93.
centrum of vertebra, the last
but seven bearing No. 94.
centrum of vertebra, the last
but five bearing No. 96.
neural arch of vertebra, bear-
ing Nos. 87, 88, and 94.
prezygapophyses.
postzygapophyses.
anterior ventral process.
posterior ventral process.
Plate XII
Fig. 1. Caudal vertebrae and hypurals.
34, hypural vertebra.
51, neural spine.
52, haemal spine.
53, hypural.
60, anterodorsal spine of
hypural.
102, hypural.
2. Ribs.
59, ventral of double
ribs.
61, dorsal of double ribs.
104, upper double rib ; the
13th.
105, lower double rib; the
13th.
106, upper double rib; the
14th.
103, hypural.
124, upper anterior part of hypural.
129, last vertebra but four.
130, last vertebra but three.
131, last vertebra but two.
132, last vertebra but one.
107, lower double rib ; the 14th.
108, upper double rib; the 15th.
109, lower double rib; the 15th,
110, rib; the 25th.
111, rib; the 26th.
112, rib; the 39th.
113, rib; the 40th.
114, rib; the 41st.
Plate XIII
Hyoid apparatus.
19, ceratohyals, from
outside.
20, epihyals, from out-
side.
21, interhyals, from out-
side.
22, branchiostegals, from outside.
68, urohyal, from ventral side.
84, hypohyals, from outside.
IX, D. J
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus
55
Plate XIV
Interneural spines and dorsal rays and interhaemal spines and anal rays.
44, interneural spine, an- 117, 19th and 20th interhaemal spines.
terior abdominal.
45, dorsal rays.
57, interhaemal spine.
58, anal rays.
82, interneural spines.
116, second dorsal ray,
from left side.
118, 3d anal ray.
119, 24th ray of anal fin.
120, 4th to 11th anal rays.
121, 6th ray of dorsal fin, from pos-
terior end.
Plate XV
Branchial arches, articulated.
17, basibranchials.
19, ceratohyal.
20, epihyal.
21, interhyal.
22, branchiostegals.
23, upper or superior
pharyngeals.
24, hypobranchials.
25, lower or inferior pharyngeals.
64, epibranchials.
74, epibranchials, modified of 1st
branchial arch.
84, hypohyal.
133, patches of cardiform teeth on
branchial arches.
Plate XVI
Branchial arches, disarticulated.
17, basibranchials.
23, upper, or superior
pharyngeals.
24, hypobranchials.
25, lower or inferior
pharyngeals.
63, ceratobranchials.
64, epibranchials.
65, glossohyal, central, more solid
portion.
74, epibranchial, modified of 1st
branchial arch.
text figures
Fig. 1. Caudal vertebra, the last but 2 (131), anterior view.
2. Atlas (70) ; axis (87) ; 3d, 4th, and 5th vertebrae; interneural
spines; dorsal rays; and anterior dorsal radials (85 and 115).
3. Hypohyals (84), ceratohyals (19), epihyals (20), and branchios-
tegal rays (22). "Teeth" are found on some of the rays.
4. Urohyal (68), anterior view.
5. Dorsal ray, interneural spine, and ray, interhaemal spine, and carti-
laginous nodules. The nodules are seen between the rays and
spines.
6. Glossohyal (65) ; basibranchials (17) of the 1st, 2d, and 3d bran-
chial arches from the left side; the basibranchial of the 2d arch
in detail.
7. Glossohyal (65), dorsal view, showing the more solid central
portion.
I-
<
<
-I
Q.
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 1.
PLATE II. THE TOP OF THE SKULL FROM THE DORSAL SIDE.
3
<
_J
O
I-
<
<
Q.
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 1.
Fig. 1. Posterior portion of disarticulated skuli.
Fig. 2. Top of skull from the right side.
PLATE IV.
Day: Ophiocrphalus striatus.1
[Phil. Journ. Scl, IX, D, No. 1.
Fig. 1. Ventral side of top of skull.
Fig. 2. Posterior view of top of skull.
PLATE V.
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus.1
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 1.
Fig. 1. Right side of skull with suspensorium and jaws removed.
Fig. 2. Orbitals.
PLATE VI.
55
O
DC
U
Q.
O
oc
o
Q.
CO
>
UJ
I-
<
-J
Q.
X
<
Q.
0.
O
s
QC
O
UJ
-J
m
Q
z
<
UJ
I
»-
<
Q.
Q
QQ
O
Q
m
<
<
Q
UJ
Q
Z
<
O
(T
UJ
Z
<
<
Day: Ophiocephalus striatus.]
[Phil. Journ. Sri., IX, D, No. l.
Fig. 1. Caudal vertebrae and hypurals.
or "7 i.i
Fig. 2. Ribs.
PLATE XII.
D
<
<
Q.
Q.
O
>-
X
<
Q.
PL,
>-
<
<
Q
<
>-
<
QC
CO
O
Q
<
QC
Z
I-
<
D
O
<
I
O
DC
<
<
I
<
_i
Q.
NOTE ON THE OCCURRENCE OF A FLYING CRUSTACEAN IN
THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS
By Dean C. Worcester
{Manila f P. L)
While fishing along the base of a limestone cliff in Bacuit Bay,
Palawan, during the month of December, 1912, I saw close to
my launch what I at first mistook for a peculiarly formed flying
fish of some species which I had never previously observed. It
was translucent, rose from the water somewhat sharply, and
**flew" not more than two or three rods before dropping into
the water again.
The more I pondered on what I had seen the more it seemed
to me that the creature could not be a fish. It had looked more
like a crayfish or shrimp, with one or two pairs of much flat-
tened legs directed forward and others curving backward, the
legs and the lobes of the tail making the supporting planes.
On the evening of August 15, 1913, when trolling off the edge
of the shoal extending in a southeasterly direction from East
Island near the coast of Palawan, I again saw the same sort of
a creature, and this time there was no mistaking it. It rose
close to the boat, mounted into the air rapidly, then held a level
course for a short distance, and dropped suddenly into the water
again. It was unquestionably a very transparent crustacean,
from 15 to 20 centimeters in length.
On the morning of August 17, when trolling off the shoal on
the north side of Lumbucan Island, I saw a third specimen, and
later in Malampaya Sound I saw a fourth. At this place Mr.
W. Schultze, of the Bureau of Science, also saw one, and there
remains no doubt of the existence in the Philippines of a marine
crustacean, from 15 to 25 centimeters in length, which has the
power of rising rapidly from the water and "flying,'* after
the fashion of a flying fish, for several rods.
The specimens observed by me invariably rose against the
wind.
57
FISHES OF HONGKONG
By Alvin Seale
(From the Section of Ichthyology, Biological Laboratory, Bureau of
Science, Manila, P. I.)
Two plates
The following notes are based on a collection of fishes secured
by me from the markets in Hongkong during the month of Au-
gust, 1910. The native names of the fishes are copied from the
Hongkong Official Market Report of April 28, 1910. With but
few exceptions the species here listed are used as food by the
people of Hongkong.
The measurements given are: 1, length of head in length of
fish without caudal; 2, greatest depth in length to last caudal
vertebra ; 3, length of head, exclusive of opercular flap, in length
of fish without caudal. The scale count is from head to last
caudal vertebra; total length is taken from tip of snout to tip
of caudal fin. The numerals given at the end of each description
are the numbers of the specimens in the collection of the Bureau
of Science, Manila.
ENGRAULID^. (Anchovies)
Anchovia dussumieri Cuv. and Val.
This species is characterized by the elongate posterior exten-
sion of the maxillary which ends on a line with the anterior
third of the ventral fins. (6398.)
Anchovia indica (Van Hasselt).
Engraulis russelli Gunther.
Dorsal, 15; anal, 19; length, 5.5 to end of vertebra; 3 or 4
elongate spines on belly in front of ventrals. (6393, 6394, 6397,
6399, 6400, 6401, 6402, 6403, 6404, 6405, 6407.)
SYNODONTID^. (Lizard fishes)
Trachinocephalus myops (Forster).
One specimen. (6595.)
Synodus japonicus (Houttuyn).
(6573, 6590, 6592, 6615, 6653, 6665.)
59
60 The Philippine Journal of Science isu
CYFRINID^. (Carp, li yu)
Cyprinus carpio (Linn.).
Six specimens of the common carp were secured. This fish
is extensively cultivated in Canton and brought alive to the
Hongkong markets where it is kept in large fresh-water tanks.
The Chinese seem to be very fond of the soft flesh of this species
(6472, 6538, 6539, 6540, 6542, 6547).
SILURID^. (Catfishes, chik yu)
Ariiis falcarius Richardson.
Three specimens; length, 150 to 160 millimeters. (6587, 6627,
6659.)
PLOTOSID^. (Naked catfishes)
Plotosus arab (ForskM).
Seven specimens. Color brown with 2 longitudinal white
bands. Length, 50 to 200 millimeters. (6570, 6591, 6597, 6617,
6619, 6628, 6825.)
BELONID^. (Gar fishes, fa paw poong)
Tylosurus caudimaculatus (Cuvier).
Head, 2.90 to end of caudal vertebra ; snout, 4.30 ; eye slightly
less than the interorbital space; dorsal, 14; anal, 17. (6475.)
EXOCCETID^. (Flying fishes)
Cypsilurus simus (Cuv. and Val.).
Dorsal, 12; anal, 8; ventrals reaching middle of anal base;
pectorals uniform dark blue, neither banded nor spotted. (6529,
6534, 6545.)
Hemiramphus cantoris Bleeker. (Half beak)
Head, 2.3 to end of caudal vertebra; snout beyond end of upper
jaw, 2.25 in length; eye slightly less than interorbital space;
dorsal, 15; anal, 14; upper lobe of caudal strongly tipped with
black, lower lobe yellowish. Length, 195 to 225 millimeters,
(6473, 6487, 6514, 6517, 6525, 6537.)
ATHERINID^. (Silversides)
Atherina forskilii Riippell.
Length, 51 to 60 millimeters. (7687, 7688.)
Atherina bleekeri Giinther.
Length, 65 millimeters. (6406.)
IX, D, 1 Scale: Fishes of Hongkong 61
MUGILID^. (Mullets, chal yu)
Mugil longimanus Gunther.
Scales, 32-12 ; dorsal, IV, 8 ; anal. III, 9. A dark spot in axil
of pectorals ; tip of caudal dusky ; tip of soft dorsal dusky ; max-
illary completely hidden; adipose eyelid well developed; origin
of dorsal over the anterior third of anal ; pectorals equal to length
of head ; origin of spinous dorsal midway between end of caudal
vertebra and origin of ventrals. (6270, 6273, 6274, 6276, 6278,
6279, 6282, 6283, 6284, 6286.)
Mugil cephalus Linn. (Striped mullet.)
Mugil oeur ForskAl.
Mugil macrolipidotus Richardson.
Dorsal, IV, 8; anal. III, 8; scales, 38-40; head, 3.90; depth,
4; eye about equal to snout; a dusky stripe on center of each
series of scales on upper half of body; a large dusky blotch on
base of pectorals, adipose eyelid present and covering all of eye
except pupil. Maxillary hidden except at tip. (6280, 6285.)
Mugil planiceps Cuv. and Val.
Greenish brown above, each series of scales with a darker
line; pectorals short, equal to length from center of eye to
posterior margin of opercles ; adipose eyelid narrow, of greatest
width posteriorly, scarcely covering half of iris ; no spot in axil
of pectorals; maxillary showing at tip. (6281.)
SPHYR.3ENID.E. (Barracudas)
Sphyrsena obtusata Cuv. and Val.
Head, 3; depth, 6; eye, 5.5; opercle ending in a single point.
Length, 120 to 375 millimeters. (6452, 6492, 6496, 6498, 6507.)
Sphyraena jello Cuv. and Val. (Banded barracuda.)
One specimen, length, 175 millimeters. This species is charac-
terized by the 16 dark bands over the back, the very small
scales, and the 2 points on the opercle. (6448.)
POLYNEMID^. (Threadfins)
Polydactylus tetradactylus Shaw.
Four pectoral appendages ; tip of dorsal black ; pectorals usually
with a grayish wash. (6341, 6360, 6361, 6362, 6364.)
62 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Polydactylus plebeius (Broussonet).
Young with 5 pectoral appendages, some of them of greater
length than the pectorals; a black spot above origin of lateral
line; tip of dorsals dusky; caudal lobes elongate, grayish at
tip. (6368.)
FISTULARIID^. (Cornet fishes)
Fistularia serrata Cuv.
Two specimens were secured, length, 320 and 410 millimeters,
respectively ; a young, probably of this species, has the scutes less
developed, and is also characterized by some darker bars over
the back. (6494, 6530.)
HOLOCENTRID^. (Soldier fishes)
Holocentrus ruber Lacepede.
This beautiful species is very common in Hongkong. Length,
160 to 210 millimeters. (6395, 6396.)
SCOMBRID^. (Mackerels, chi yu)
Scomberomorus guttatum (Bloch) .
This is one of the best flavored fishes of the Hongkong market.
Length, 223 millimeters. (7757.)
CARANGID^. (Cavallas)
Trachums trachurus Linn.
This species is characterized by the plates which extend the
entire length of the lateral line ; opercular spot, black. Length,
135 to 137 millimeters. (7759, 7765.)
Scomberoides lysan (Forsk&l).
Length, 130 millimeters. (7769.)
Caranx ophthalmotsenia (Bleeker).
Length, 75 to 120 millimeters. (7760, 7766, 7770, 7771.)
Caranx malabaricus (Bloch and Sch.).
Length, 120 millimeters. (7764.)
Caranx boops Cuv. and Val.
Length, 80 to 90 millimeters. (7763, 7772.)
Caranx calla Cuv. and Val.
Length, 150 millimeters. (7762.)
Caranx djeddaba (Forskal).
Length, 200 millimeters. (7761.)
ix,D.i Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 63
STROMATEID^. (Butterfishes)
Stromateus niger Bloch. (Black pomfret, hak chong.)
The dorsal and anal rays are elongate and extend to a line
with base of caudal; the ventrals extend to origin of anal. In
specimens 10 centimeters in length, the ventrals and dorsal are
considerably shorter and there is but a slight trace of a keel on
the caudal peduncle. The very young are marked with indistinct
dusky bands, and there is a dusky spot at the base of each lobe
of caudal. (5405, 6289, 6291, 6299, 6315, 6317, 6318.)
Stromateus argenteus Bloch. (White pomfret, pak chong.)
Young. — No ventrals; no spines before dorsal or anal, the
lobe of caudal not elongate, color white. (6311, 6312, 6320.)
EQUULID^. (Slip mouths)
Equula insidiator (Bloch).
Length, 90 to 107 millimeters. Ten specimens. (6575, 6586,
6621, 6636, 6638, 6639, 6642, 6657, 6663, 6672.)
Equula ruconia (Hamilton-Buchanan) .
One specimen, length, 56 millimeters. (6676.)
Leiognathus edwardsi Evermann and Seale.
Length, 60 to 170 millimeters. (6558, 6582, 6601, 6631, 6632,
6637, 6658, 6669, 6670.)
Leiognathus virgatus Fowler.
Length, 60 to 67 millimeters. (6551, 6584, 6645, 6655, 6673.)
Leiognathus daura (Cuvier).
Tip of snout and a portion of nape, dark. Length, 90 to 95
millimeters. (6565, 6599, 6662, 7394.)
APOGONICHTHYID^. (Cardinal fishes)
Amia elizabethae Jordan and Seale.
Length, 42 millimeters. (6335.)
Amia bifasciata (Riippell). (Yang sun ko.)
Amia trimaculatus Richardson.
Yellowish with a dusky vertical strip from the origin of
spinous dorsal downward, another from the anterior portion of
soft dorsal; a round spot at base of caudal; ventrals dusky;
dorsal, caudal, and anal grayish. (6287, 6288, 6295, 6307,
6308.)
64 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
Amia marginatus Doderlein.
Color in alcohol yellowish ; top of head and nuchal region with
fine black specks; top of dorsals black, a black band through
middle of soft dorsal; tips of anal and caudal dusky. (6290,
6294, 6302, 6348.)
Amia doderleini Jordan and Snyder.
Color in alcohol yellowish; a blackish stripe from snout
through eye to the round distinct caudal spot ; a dark line from
above eye to near the upper margin of the caudal spot, another
from subopercle to just below the caudal spot, another (fre-
quently obliterated) on sides of belly, and another (often oblit-
erated) along the base of the dorsal fins; a black line through
bases of anal and soft dorsal; tips of caudal, soft dorsal, and
anal grayish. (6266, 6292, 6298.)
Amia semilineatus (Schlegel).
Color in alcohol yellowish white; a jet black caudal spot;
a black line from tip of snout through eye to posterior margin
of opercle, another from snout over interorbital space to below
origin of soft dorsal, and a third on median line of nuchal
region; tip of spinous dorsal black. (6304.)
Amia lineatns (Schlegel).
Color in alcohol yellowish white, with a silvery wash on sides;
about 11 or 12 vertical dark bars on each side, scarcely as wide
as interspaces; tip of spinous dorsal and tip of caudal grayish.
(6345, 6353.)
Amia kiensis Jordan and Snyder.
This is undoubtedly the species discovered and figured by
Jordan and Snyder, but I suspect that it is A. frsenata of Valen-
ciennes; it is most certainly the species figured by Day as A,
frsenata. All of our specimens are without the caudal spot,
the dark line from tip of snout extends to tip of caudal, the
second dusky line is from tip of snout above eye to upper
margin of caudal peduncle; the most persistent marking in all
ages is the dusky tip to ventrals which is present in all speci-
mens. There is a dark line through base of anal and soft dorsal.
(6296, 6297, 6300, 6301, 6310, 6325, 6327, 6328, 6329, 6333,
6334, 6336, 6338, 6339, 6340, 6343, 6351, 6354, 6357, 6359.)
ix.D,i Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 65
AMBASSID^. (Wharf fishes)
Priopis urotaenia (Bleeker).
Color yellowish white; a silver stripe from head to caudal;
membrane between 2d and 3d dorsal spines dusky; 2 rows of
scales on cheeks. (6323, 6324, 6326, 6330, 6331, 6332, 6337,
6342, 6346, 6347, 6352, 6355, 6356.)
SERRANID^. (Garoupa, sek pan)
Cephalopholis boenack (Bloch).
One specimen, length, 180 millimeters. (7776.)
Epinephelus moara (Schlegel).
This species is characterized by the 7 bands of dark brown
over the back, the 2 or 3 anterior ones extending forward on to
the head. This fish is well figured by Jordan and Seale.^ Fif-
teen specimens. (7712, 7722, 7724, 7725, 7780, 7781, 7790.)
Epinephelus septemfasciatus Thunb.
Thirteen specimens of this species were secured. Length, 60
to 210 millimeters. This species is characterized by the 8 black
vertical bands over the body; there are some enlarged teeth
at the angle of the preopercle. (7778, 7779, 7782, 7783, 7791-
7799.)
Epinephelus boenack (Bloch) .
One specimen, this fish resembles somewhat E. septemfasciatits,
but it has less distinct bands on the sides and the preopercular
angle is distinctly rounded, with the teeth scarcely enlarged
at angle. Length, 120 millimeters. (1784.)
Epinephelus merra Bloch.
This is a food fish of considerable importance in Hongkong.
One specimen, length, 176 millimeters. (7715.)
Epinephelus dermopterus (Temm. and Schleg.).
Head, 3; depth, 2.55; eye slightly less than interorbital, 5 in
head; snout slightly longer than diameter of eye; maxillary ex-
tending to a line with anterior margin of pupil ; posterior margin
of preopercle almost straight, some enlarged teeth at angle.
Dorsal, XI, 21; anal, IH, 10; about 135 rows of scales from
head to end of caudal vertebra; caudal rounded, body covered
^Proc. Davenport Acad. Sci, (1905), 10, PI. 5.
123716 5
66 The Philippiyie Journal of Science 1914
with minute ctenoid scales ; teeth in 2 or more rows ; 2 enlarged
curved canines anteriorly.
Color uniform brown, fins all darker, being almost black pos-
teriorly; length, 111 to 185 millimeters. (7756, 7757.)
Epinephelns gilberti Richardson.
Color yellowish brown, with round darker brown spots the
size of pulpil, over body. Two specimens, length, 235 to 270
millimeters. (7795, 7797.)
LUTIANID^. (Snapper, lap yu)
Lutianus annularis (Cuv. and Val.).
Luiianus erythropterus Day.
This species is distinguished by the black stripe from snout
to origin of dorsal; the black saddle over the caudal peduncle
bordered anteriorly and posteriorly with white; dark lines on
body; ventrals tipped with black. Six specimens, length, 75
to 120 millimeters. (7704, 7705, 7706, 7707, 7708, 7709.)
Lutianus monostigma (Cuv. and Val.).
One specimen, length, 104 millimeters. (7753.)
Lutianus erythropterus Bloch.
This species resembles L. vitta, but is without the dark line
on sides. Length, 67 to 180 millimeters. (7732, 7748, 7749,
7752, 7754, 7755.)
Nemipterus japonicus (Bloch).
Length, 98 to 115 millimeters. (7750, 7751.)
Diploprion bifasciatum (Kuhl and Van Hasselt) .
This species is characterized by the 2 broad black bands which
are very distinct even in alcoholic specimens. Length, 185 to
190 millimeters. (7773, 7774.)
THERAPONID^. (Grunts)
Scolopsis vosmeri Bleeker.
This species is easily distinguished by the silvery white saddle
over the neck and the black spot in upper axil of pectorals.
Length, 140 millimeters. (7726.)
Therapon cuvieri (Bleeker).
Six specimens, length, 105 to 127 millimeters. The dark
stripes terminate at the caudal, the markings below the median
line of the side are almost obliterated. (7728, 7730, 7731, 7734,
7736, 7737.)
IX.D, 1 Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 67
Therapon theraps (Cuv. and VaL).
Four small specimens, length, 95 to 105 millimeters. A com-
mon food fish of Hongkong. (7727, 7729, 7733, 7735.)
Therapon jarbua (Forskal).
Length, 51 to 72 millimeters. (7679, 7680, 7681, 7682, 7683,
7684, 7685.)
H^MULID^
Prlstapoma hast a Bloch.
Six young specimens (6562, 6671, 7689, 7690, 7691, 7692)
have the bands over the back; length, 65 millimeters. In the
large specimen (7697) these bands are broken up into black
spots; length, 170 millimeters.
SPARID^. (Porgies)
Lethrinus mahsenoides Ehrenberg.
All of these specimens show the round black spots below the
lateral line above the middle of pectorals. Length, 100 to 120
millimeters. (7693, 7694, 7695, 7696.)
Spams datnia (Hamilton).
A food fish of importance. Length, 100 to 115 millimeters.
(7744, 7746, 7747.)
Sparus berda Forskal.
Length, 110 to 142 millimeters. (7738, 7739, 7740, 7741, 7742,
7743, 7745.)
GERRID^. (Moj arras)
Xystaema punctatum (Cuv. and Val).
Length, 67 to 100 millimeters. (6564, 6572, 6667.)
MULLID^. (Surmullets) .
Upeneus displurus Playfair.
Color yellowish, with a slight brownish wash above. A yellow
stripe from eye to below second dorsal, a second yellow stripe
from upper lip through lower border of eye to below second dor-
sal; these give the appearance of a brown stripe to the area
between the two yellow lines ; a yellow saddle over free portion
of tail, a brown stripe down sides of snout. In old specimens the
first dorsal is clouded with brown and the second dorsal and
the anal are indistinctly barred with pale brown; in young
specimens the fin markings are indistinct. (6444, 6457, 648S,
6506, 6512, 6513.)
68 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
XJpeneus bensasi (Temm. and Schleg.)-
No yellow band on sides (in alcohol), the dorsal with dusky
bands; teeth of vomer very distinct — ^those of the palatine in
an interrupted band. (6429, 6442.)
Upeneoides sulphureus (Cuv. and Val.).
One specimen. (6244.)
Upeneoides moluccensis Bleeker.
Head, 3.75; depth, 3.5; eye, 3.75; snout, 2.60; interorbital,
3.50 ; depth of caudal peduncle, 2.75 ; scales, 34 to end of caudal
vertebra; villiform teeth in jaws, vomer, and palatines; dorsal,
VIII, 1, 8; anal, 1, 6. The palatine teeth form a continuous
band on each side ; the vomerine teeth consist of a minute patch
on the head of the vomer, easily overlooked. Length of the
spinous dorsal is 1.20 in the depth of the fish. Color in alcohol
pale yellowish brown above, yellow below, a bright orange band
from eye to caudal; spinous dorsal, soft dorsal, and upper lobe
of caudal with about 4 cross bars; tip of spinous dorsal dusky.
It is probable that U, moluccensis Bleeker will be found to be
synonymous with U. bensasi Temminck and Schlegel as these
specimens partake of the characters ascribed to each of these
species, with a predominance of those ascribed to U. moluccensis.
(6420, 6423, 6425, 6431, 6436, 6441, 6445, 6458, 6460, 6488,
6526.)
Upeneoides tragula (Richardson).
This fish is known to the Chinese as yang tswan or yeung tsun.
It is a common food fish in the Hongkong market. The color
is yellowish white with a dusky stripe along the middle of side
from eye to caudal. The body is thickly dotted with small
brownish spots. The caudal has 4 oblique dusky bars. The
dorsal fins are marked with blackish. Length, 20 centimeters.
(6440.)
SCIu^NID^. (Croakers)
Sciaena diacanthus (Lacepede).
Corvina catalea Richardson.
Dorsal, IX, I, 20; anal, II, 7; scales about 52 in lateral line.
Color in alcohol grayish yellow, dark spots on back and sides,
pectorals and anal dark, remaining fins spotted, caudal very
acute; teeth of upper jaw rather large, teeth of lower jaw
large, upper jaw overhanging. Length, 50 to 70 millimeters.
(6344, 6358, 6426, 6428, 6491, 6516, 7710.)
ix,D. 1 Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 69
Scisena aneus Bloch.
Length, 60 to 125 millimeters. (6349, 6350, 6415, 6456, 6461,
6467, 6481, 6490, 6497, 6520, 6544, 6674.)
Sciaenoides biauritus Cantor.
Length, 150 to 165 millimeters. (6421, 6476.)
SILLAGINID^. (Whitings)
Sillago sihama (Forskal).
One specimen, length, 165 milHmeters. (6480.)
Sillago maculata Quoy and Gaimard.
Two specimens, length, 141 to 165 centimeters. (6471, 6532.)
CEPOLID^. (Bandfishes)
Acanthocepola krusensternii (Temm. and Schleg.).
A narrow dark margin on anal and posterior portion of dorsal.
Length, 130 to 140 millimeters. (6550, 6583, 6596, 6661, 7387,
7389.)
CIRRHITID^. (Sea goldfishes)
Cirrhitities aureus (Temm. and Schleg.).
When alive these fish were golden in color, but in alcohol 5 or
more very indistinct dusky vertical bands are visible on the
body. It is probable that C. oxycephalus of Bleeker and C
aureus Temminck and Schlegel are the some species. These
specimens have teeth on vomer and palatine. One specimen
has the first dorsal ray prolonged into a filament. (6585, 8654.)
LABRID.gE. (Wrasse fishes, wong fa yu)
Duymaeria flagellifera Cuv. and Val.
Duymasria aurigaria Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. (1862), 4, 121.
Duymxria flagellifera Jordan and Snyder, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.
(1902), 24, 623.
This species exhibits a large variety of color patterns, and
shows great diversity in the length of the dorsal filaments. All
of our specimens show the black tip to opercle. (6563, 6567,
6569, 6600, 6609, 6641, 6651.)
Thalassoma lunare (Linn.).
Characterized by the longitudinal purple bar extending on to
the 4th to 8th pectoral rays. (6610.)
70 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
Stethojulis kalosoma Bleeker.
Color dull yellowish, lighter below; a dark, white-margined
stripe from slightly below eye to a line with origin of soft dorsal
fin; each scale on the lower posterior portion of body with a
round brown spot; no spot on caudal or dorsal. (6635.)
Halichoeres dussumieri (Cuv. and Val.).
Julis exomatus Richardson, Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci. for 1845
(1846), 258.
Halichceres nigrescens Bleeker.
(6568, 6578, 6584, 6605, 6614, 6647, 6652.)
Halichoeres javanicus Bleeker.
Color in alcohol yellowish, with 6 irregular purplish bands
over the back, these being made up of purplish spots; dorsal
with yellowish rings; anal with yellowish rings, almost obliter-
ated in one specimen and entirely faded out in another; head
with yellowish violet specks; a blue spot behind orbit and in
axil of pectorals. (6580, 6589, 6626.)
Halichoeres poecilopterus (Schlegel).
One specimen, length, 170 millimeters. (6648.)
Choerops ommopterus Richardson.
Dorsal spines, 12; scales of lateral line, 30; color in alcohol
dull greenish, almost all the scales on the side showing a short
vertical blue mark; on the caudal peduncle the blue marks are
longitudinal instead of vertical, these form a'bciut 5 blue stripes
on each side of the caudal peduncle; a blue stripe from angle
of mouth to margin of opercle ; a blue circle on base of pectoral ;
a darker line from eye along sides of snout to upper jaw; some
blue lines on upper opercle; a jet-black spot below the base
of the last dorsal spines. No yellowish area behind this spot
as in C. schoenlieni Bleeker. Anal fin with blue lines and spots ;
ventrals yellowish, with slight markings of blue; none of the
fins elongate. Length, 22 centimeters. (6571.)
SCARICHTHYID.E. (Parrot fishes, kai kung yu)
Callyodon limbatus (Richardson) .
(6555, 6556, 6557, 6558, 6559.)
Callyodon dubius Bennett.
Pseudoscarus aeruginosa Gunther.
Color in alcohol pale greenish brown, 3 white stripes on sides
of belly; lips wide, 3 rows of scales on cheeks, the lowest row
of 2 scales. (6603, 6611.)
IX, D, 1 Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 71
EPHIPPID^. (Indian spade fishes, ying kung)
Ephippus orbis (Bloch).
Color yellowish with round blackish spots, usually larger than
eye. The young have a dark ocular band, with the addition
of a second dusky band on the shoulders. (6303, 6306, 6316,
6322.)
DREPANIDuE. (Spade fishes)
Drepane punctata (Gmelin). (Ke lung tsang.)
Drepana punctata Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. (1860), 2, 62;
Richardson, Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci. for 1845 (1846), 244,
One specimen. (6277.)
CH^TODONTID^. (Butterfly fishes)
Chaetodon aureus Temm. and Schleg.
Ocular band about equal in width to eye and with a broad
yellowish white area in front and back of eye; ventrals yellow;
the brownish lines on the rows of scales are almost longitudinal,
except on shoulders where they are decidedly oblique ; the caudal
has a terminal margin of white and a narrow black line at a
short distance from the margin. To this species belong C
collaris Jordan and Fowler ^ and C. aureus Gunther both of which
are from Japan. Evidently Richardson suspected that C aureus
Temminck and Schlegel and C. collaris Bloch might be the same,
for he says that, "they agree tolerably well,*' which makes it
certain they did not agree fully ; therefore, he was not warranted
in uniting them.
Chxtodon reticulatus Cuvier and Valenciennes is quite distinct
from both C, aureus Temminck and Schlegel and C. collaris Bloch,
and is characterized by the broad black ocular band, which in
most of its length is of much greater width than the eye; the
lower portion of the ocular band extends backward to the origin
of the ventrals and covers a large part of the thorax ; the ventrals
are yellow; the caudal has a very narrow margin of white with
2 black intermarginal lines separated by a yellow band ; the base
of caudal is jet black. Chxtodon prMextatus Cantor seems to
be a valid species most nearly related to C. collaris of Bloch,
being characterized by the dusky ventrals, wide ocular band,
and black tip to the opercles; Gunther, who has specimens of
both C. prsetextatus and (7. collaris, regards them as being
different.
'Proc. U. S. Nat Mus. (1902), 25, 534.
72 The Philippine Journal of Science i^u
Cheetodon collaris Bloch.
Chastodon collaris Day, Fishes of India, Atlas (1878), PL 27, fig. 6;
Sleeker, Atlas Ichth. (1877), 9, PL 23, fig. 2; Gunther, Cat.
Fishes Brit. Mus. (1860), 2, 21; Jordan and Evermann, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus. (1903), 25, 356.
This species, which is without doubt C. collaris of Day, of
Bleeker, and of Gunther, is characterized by the dark ventrals,
comparative narrow ocular band which does not extend to the
origin of the ventrals, and the color of caudal which is broadly
margined with white with a broad black bar near its center.
Chsetodon collans Giinther ^ is possibly a variety of C. reticulatus
Cuvier and Valenciennes with the black ocular band extending
backward on the thorax to the origin of the ventrals ; it certainly
has but slight resemblance to Bloch's type of C collaris. The
species described by Jordan and Evermann * is probably distinct
and should be described as such.
Chaetodon modestus Temm. and Schleg.
Chsetodon desmotes Jordan and Fowler, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1902),
25, 539.
This species is related to C. rafflesii Bennett which is, however,
probably a valid species. (6293.)
Chaetodon bella-maris Scale, sp. nov. Plate I, fig. 1.
Head, 3.10 in length without caudal; depth, 1.45; eye, 3.15 in
head; snout slightly greater than diameter of eye; interorbital
space slightly greater than snout; dorsal, XII, 23; anal. III, 21;
lateral line strongly curved, ending at axil of soft dorsal, pores
46 ; scales in 34 series between head and end of caudal vertebra,
23 in a vertical series; head covered with fine scales; mouth
small; teeth setiform; gill rakers low and pointed, about 17 on
lower arch; spinous dorsal fitting into a scaled sheath at base,
the 4th, 5th, and 6th spines the longest; soft dorsal rounded,
no rays prolonged, length of longest ray but slightly less than
head; caudal 1.35 in head, its margin almost straight; anal
similar to soft dorsal; ventrals equal to length of head without
opercular flap; a large axillary scale; pectorals equal to head
with opercular flap.
Color in life yellowish, a black ocular band which is slightly
greater than width of eye above the eye and slightly less than
width of eye below; this band is continuous above, and extends
to margin of subopercular below the eye; the band is margined
• Giinther, Fische der Sudsee (1873-75), Heft II, Taf. 31 A.
* Jordan and Evermann, Proc, U. S. Nat. Mus. (1903), 25, 356.
ix,D, 1 Scale: Fishes of Hongkong 73
anteriorly and posteriorly with white; snout yellow; the tip of
upper jaw black; a large black wedge-shaped mark on shoulder
from spinous dorsal to the white border of the ocular band ; this
black area has a narrow prong of black extending from its pos-
terior margin to upper tip of opercle ; a narrow black margin to
dorsal; a wide submarginal black band on posterior half of
caudal; tip of caudal white; 12 to 14 rather wide, indistinct,
brownish lines extending obliquely forward and downward on
rows of scales; anal yellowish, with a marginal brown band;
ventrals and pectorals yellowish.
This species is related to C, lunula Lac^pede (C. fasciatus
Bleeker), but differs in lacking the second black area on the
shoulders and the semilunar band of black on soft dorsal, our
specimen being without any black on the caudal peduncle, which
according to Gunther is present in C. lunula at all ages.
Type is No. 6321, Bureau of Science collection, collected in
the Hongkong market by Seale, 1910.
Microcanthus strigatus (Cuv. and Val.).
Microcanthus strigatus Cuv. AND Val., Hist. Pcis. (1831), 7, 25, PI.
120; Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. (1880), 11, 34; Jordan and
Fowler, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1902), 25, 541.
Color in alcohol yellowish with about 5 or 6 longitudinal,
slightly inclined, brown stripes, about the width of the eye.
Spinous dorsal blackish, stripes on body projected into anal fin,
ventrals with dusky tip ; pectorals and caudal yellowish. (6313.)
SIGANID^. (Siganids)
Siganus oramin (Bloch and Schn.).
Scattered white spots over body, caudal indistinctly barred,
upper margin of eye serrated ; a distinct shoulder spot. Length,
from 80 to 205 millimeters. (6417, 6442, 6446, 6451, 6482, 6483,
6518, 6574, 6604, 6606, 6613, 6618, 6620, 6622, 7392.)
MONACANTHID^. (File fishes, hih pe yang)
Monacanthus chinensis (Bloch).
Monacanthus chinensis Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. (1870), 8,
236; Richardson, Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci. for 1845 (1846), 201.
(6566, 6634.)
Monacanthus setifer Bennett.
Monacanthus setifer Gunther, Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus. (1870), 8, 239;
Schlegel, Fauna Japonica (1842), 290, PI. 130, fig. 1 (good).
Dorsal, 32 ; anal, 32. The second dorsal ray produced. Color
in alcohol brown with obscure blackish spots or streaks.
74 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
Monacanthus lineolatus Richardson.
Color in alcohol dirty light brown with from 6 to 8 fine dark
lines on the body from head to near caudal. A dark spot below
anterior half of soft dorsal, a dark blotch on opercles, margin
of ventral membrane black, caudal with 2 dusky bands. This
species is well described by Richardson.^ (6629.)
TETRAODONTID^. (Puffers)
Spheroides spadiceus (Richardson).
This fish is believed to be poisonous. (6366, 6367, 6370, 6373,
6374, 6375, 6376, 6377, 6378, 6380, 6381, 6382, 6384, 6385.)
ELEOTRID.^.^ (Eleotrids)
Bostrychus sinensis (Lacepede).
This species is very common in Hongkong. It is distinguished
by the black ocellus on the upper base of the caudal rays. Length,
110 to 150 millimeters. (6414, 6424, 6427, 6450, 6465.)
Butis butis (Hamilton-Buchanan).
Length, 117 millimeters. (6433.)
Butis caperata Cantor.
Distinguished from B, butis by the shorter head, shorter snout,
and larger eye. Length, 65 millimeters. (6495.)
GOBHD^. (Gobies)
Boleophthalmns chinensis (Osbeck).
Gobius pectinirostris Gmelin.
Boleophthalmns boddaerti Schlegel.
Length, 90 to 110 millimeters. (6410, 6413, 6454, 6466, 6468,
6469.)
Boleophthalmus glaucus Day.
Length, 67 millimeters. (6531.)
Rhinogobius hongkongensis Seale, sp. nov. Plate I, fig. 2.
Head, 4; depth, 5.60 without caudal; eye, 3.1 in head; snout
equal to eye; interorbital space a narrow ridge; dorsal, VI, 12;
anal, 11; scales 25 to end of vertebra, 8| in a vertical series;
• Rep. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci. for 1845 (1846), 201.
•It seems advisable to advance the subfamily of Eleotrinse to the posi-
tion of a family characterized by the separate ventrals, and thus in part
separating the cumbersome family Gobiidae.
ix.D, 1 Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 75
no scales on cheeks or opercles, nape fully scaled to posterior
margin of eyes, 10 series anterior of spinous dorsal; snout
rounded, jaws equal; maxillary extending to anterior margin
of eye, teeth of lower jaw small, sharp pointed, in several rows —
the outer row being enlarged curved teeth resembling canines;
an extra large recurved canine on each side, upper jaw with a
single series of strong sharp teeth; tongue truncated or but
slightly rounded ; gill openings wide, but not extending forward ;
body fully scaled, the scales on posterior half of body somewhat
larger ; no free silk-like rays at the origin of pectorals.
Spinous dorsal with the 2d, 3d, and 4th rays longest; soft
dorsal and anal similar in form and of about equal height, their
posterior rays being about 1.50 in head. The origin of soft
dorsal is on a line with anal pore; origin of anal below the 2d
dorsal ray ; ventrals firmxly united for entire length, the basal cup
deep, length of the fin equal to distance from nostril to posterior
margin of opercle ; pectoral slightly greater than length of head ;
caudal rounded, 1.20 in head.
Color in alcohol pale wood brown with a series of about 14
small, more or less complete, circles of darker brown (sepia)
along the median line of sides, margin of scales on upper half
of body also slightly shaded with sepia, 1 or 2 narrow lighter
longitudinal lines above the row of median circles; a black line
from posterior margin of eye to upper base of pectoral fin,
4 or 5 blue spots on opercles and irregular brown blotch on
cheeks below eye; 2 brownish blotches on base of pectoral;
dorsals marked with about 4 longitudinal brownish lines; tip of
spinous dorsal dusky ; anal shading into slaty gray on outer third ;
caudal marked with whitish spots; pectorals and ventrals pale
yellowish brown, the ventral with a slight grayish wash.
Three specimens from Hongkong market, August 9, 1910.
Type is No. 6474, Bureau of Science collection ; length, 70 centi-
meters ; cotypes are Nos. 6489 and 6541.
Gobius poecililicthys Jordan and Snyder.
Dorsal, VI, 10; scales about 35, upper pectoral rays silk-like;
tongue truncate. Length, 57 to 60 millimeters. (6408, 6523.)
Glossogobius giuris (Hamilton-Buchanan).
Length, 74 to 78 millimeters. (6409, 6463, 6477, 6504.)
Oxyurichthus cristatus (Day).
Length, 85 millimeters. (6484.)
76 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Oxyurichthus amabalis Seale, sp. nov. Plate II, fig. 1.
Head, 4 without caudal; depth, 6; eye, 4 in head; dorsal, VI,
13; anal, 14; scales, 50; enlarged scales on posterior half of
body; 21 scales in vertical series; snout 3.30 in head; interor-
bital space a mere ridge; mouth large, the lower jaw slightly
the longer; maxillary extending to below middle of eye; upper
jaw with a single series of rather strong sharp teeth, lower jaw
with a single row of similar but smaller teeth ; tongue rounded ;
head naked except on the occiput which is finely scaled; no
tentacles ; about 24 scales in front of dorsal ; anterior anal spine
longest, 1.25 in head; soft dorsal and anal similar, origin of
anal under 1st ray of soft dorsal; caudal long and acuminate,
2.60 in length of fish without caudal; ventrals scarcely equal
to length of head, their origin is anterior to the origin of dorsal,
their tip scarcely reaching to anal pore; length of pectorals, 3.5
in body without caudal; no silk-like rays.
Color a very light brown, white on chin and thorax, fins with
a slight grayish wash, anal blackish.
Type is No. 6432, Bureau of Science collection, secured in
Hongkong market by Seale ; length, 130 millimeters ; 3 cotypes,
Nos. 6411, 6438, and 6453.
Gobiichthys tentacnlaris (Cuv. and Val.) .
Length, 75 to 110 millimeters. 6500, 6501, 6505, 6510, 6515,
6519, 6523, 6524.)
Cryptocentrus filifer (Cuv. and Val.).
Length, 105 to 130 millimeters. (6412, 6430, 6447, 6449, 6470,
6478.)
Cryptocentrus venustus Seale, sp. nov. Plate II, fig. 2.
Head, 3.75; depth, 5.50; dorsal, VII, 10; anal, 11; scales on
anterior portion of body very small, becoming larger posteriorly,
about 90 in lateral series from posterior border of opercle to end
of caudal vertebra, about 27 in a vertical series; mouth large,
the maxillary ending slightly posterior to eye; teeth in several
series, some slightly enlarged ones in the outer row of upper
jaw and in the inner row of lower jaw, no recurved canines;
no posterior canines; tongue truncate; gill rakers rather blunt,
14 on lower arch; head naked, without filaments or barbules;
eye rather small, 4.5 in head, and about equal to length of
snout; interorbital space very narrow, being equal to pupil;
anterior dorsal rather high, its longest spine being equal to
length of head, the 6th spine is located a considerable space
from the 5th ; origin of soft dorsal midway between end of caudal
ix.D. 1 Seale: Fishes of Horigkong 77
vertebra and posterior margin of eye, the soft dorsal is similar
to anal; caudal rather pointed, its length 3.25 in fish without
caudal; origin of anal below 3d ray of soft dorsal; ventrals
united and long, almost equal to caudal, the tip extending to
anal pore, the cup at the base very deep; origin of ventral
midway between tip of snout and origin of anal ; pectoral slightly
less than length of head, its base rather muscular.
Color in alcohol, a wide dark-brownish saddle over back
at the spinous dorsal which extends downward on sides of belly ;
there is a similarly colored area above the anal fin along the
middle of sides, remaining area lighter brown ; a brownish area
on head back of eyes and on cheeks, about 15 small scattered
blue spots on cheeks; spinous dorsal, ventral, and anal dark
purplish ; soft dorsal dark with several lighter longitudinal lines,
caudal and pectorals uniform brown.
One specimen, type No. 6419, Bureau of Science collection,
from Hongkong; length, 103 centimeters. Collected by Seale
and Canonizado.
Trypauchen vagina Bloch and Schn.
Color yellowish while. Length, 60 to 75 millimeters. (6493,
6527, 6543.)
Tridentiger bifasciatus Stindachner.
Outer row of teeth trifid, the middle cusp the longest, 2 black
bands on sides, the one on middle of sides very wide and distinct,
the other at base of dorsal much less distinct. Length, 40 to 55
millimeters. (6486, 6502, 6535, 6536, 6549.)
Apocryptes bato (Hamilton-Buchanan).
Dorsal, V-1, 13; anal, 14; length, 110 to 140 millimeters.
(6418, 6439.)
SCORP^NID^. (Scorpion fishes)
Sebastopsis marmorata (Cuv. and Val.).
The dark bands over the back and spots on caudal, dorsal,
and anal fins distinguish this species. Length, 100 to 130 milli-
meters. (7723, 7758.)
PLATYCEPHALID^. (Flatheads)
Platycephalus insidiator (Forskal).
This fish is very common in the Hongkong markets. It is
easily distinguished by the black and yellow stripe of the caudal
fin. Length, 30 centimeters. (6593.)
78 'J'he Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Thysanophrys neglectus (Troch.).
This species is characterized by the spinate lateral line, the
dusky spinous dorsal, and the dusky bars over back. (6559,
6623, 6630, 6664, 6675.)
Thysanophrys bataviensis (Bleeker) .
Lateral line, 57; dorsal, caudal, pectorals, and ventrals with
rows of black dots. (6656.)
CEPHALACANTHID^. (Flying gurnards)
Cephalacanthus orientalis Cuv. and Val.
One young specimen, length, 65 centimeters. (6499.)
PLEURONECTID^. (Plaice, pan us)
Psendorhombns misakius Jordan and Starks.
Pseudorhombus misakius Jordan and Starks, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.
(1904), 31, 173.
Color light brown, mottled with darker brown; a black spot
at branching of lateral line; dorsal, 80; anal, 63. (6579, 6581.)
Pseudorhombus russellii (Gray).
Yellowish, clouded with brown, some darker spots on back.
Scales, 92; anal, 58; dorsal, 78. (6588.)
Pseudorhombus olegolepis Bleeker.
Two young specimens, scales 48. (6560, 6607.)
Tephritis sinensis (Lacepede).
Body with fine black spots, some of which are ocellated ; fins,
except pectorals and ventrals, marked with black. (6633.)
SOLEID.E. (Soles, yat sa yu)
Cynoglossus melanopterus Richardson.
Two lateral lines on left side, scales 60, fins dusky. (6577.)
Cynoglossus abbreviatus Gray.
Three lateral lines on left side, fins gray, lighter at tip, 120
scales in lateral line. (6646.)
Synaptura orientalis Bloch and Schneider.
Soles faleacea Richardson.
Synaptura pan Bleeker.
Brown with darker blotches and narrow black bands crossing
the lateral line; posterior half of pectorals black. (6624.)
Solea ovata Richardson.
This seems to agree in all essential respects with Richardson's
description. ( 6561. )
ix,D, 1 Seale: Fishes of Hongkong 79
PTEROPSARID^. (Pterosparids)
Parapercis pulchella (Temm. and Schleg.).
The figure of this species given by Temminck and Schlegel
is excellent. It is a common species in Hongkong. Length, 160
millimeters. ( 6363-6371. )
Parapercis cylindrica (Bloch) .
Body with narrow dark bands below and 5 wide bifurcated
bands above ; white and dark spots on throat and chin ; a brown
band from eye to throat, a dark spot at base of pectorals and
on upper base of caudal; spinous dorsal black; soft dorsal and
anal with yellowish spots; ventrals yellow. Length, 93 centi-
meters (6649) ; length, 82 centimeters (8503).
Percis sexfasciatus Temm. and 'Schleg.
Five bifurcated dusky bands over the back; a brown ocellus
on the upper base of caudal ; some dark dots at base of dorsal.
Length, 85 millimeters. (6660.)
CALLIONYMID^. (Dragonels)
Callionymus curvicornis Cuv. and Val.
I very much doubt if this species is synonymous with C.
valenciennesi Schlegel, as in our specimen, as well as in the
specimens Giinther had from China, the preopercular spine is
nearly as long as the orbit and is curved upward ; it terminates
in 4 hook-like processes, one of which is directed backward;
a 5th process at the base of the spine points forward. The
posterior of spinous dorsal, which is fin shaped, has a large black
spot surrounded by white. The anal fin is white with dusky
blotches near its tip. (6612.)
Callionymus hindsii Richardson.
This fish is characterized by the alternating vertical lines
of jet black and pure white of the spinous dorsal, the black lines
being somewhat crooked and of greater width in some places
than in others. The preopercular spine ends in 4 recurved
claws, with a fifth at the base of the spine directed forward.
The anterior dorsal has S rays, the posterior has 10. In alcohol
the fish is indistinctly speckled with very pale brown on the
back, the caudal fin is indistinctly barred with brown and white ;
some indistinct light specks in soft dorsal, otherwise fins
colorless, except the spinous dorsal. Length, 8.5 centimeters.
(6650.)
ILLUSTRATIONS
(Drawings by T. Eepinosa)
Plate I
Fig. 1. Chsetodon bella-maris Seale, sp. nov.
2. Rhinogobius hongkoyigensia Seale, sp. nov.
Plate II
Fig. 1. Oxyurichthus amahalis Seale, sp. nov.
2. Cryptocentrus vemistus Seale, sp. nov.
123716 6 81
Seale: Fishes of Hongkong.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci.. IX, D. No. 1.
Fig. 1. Chaetodon bella-maris Seale, sp. nov.
Fig. 2. Rhinogobius hongkongensis Seale, sp. nov.
PLATE I.
Seale : Fishes of Hongkong,]
[Phil. Journ. Sri., IX, D, No. 1.
Fig. 1. Oxyurichthus amabalis Seale, sp. nov.
Fig. 2. Cryptocentrus venustus Seale, sp. nov.
PLATE II.
BUPRESTIDES RECUEILLIS AUX tLES PHILIPPINES PAR
C. F. BAKER, I ^
Par Ch. Kerremans
(Brussels, Belgium)
Une figure dans le texte
Acmaeodera luzonica Nonfr., Berl. Ent. Zeitschr. (1895), 40, 302.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Epidelus wallacei Thorns., Arch. Ent. (1857), 1, 109.
Luzon, Mt. Maquiling.
Chrysodema eximia Cast, et Gory, Monogr. Bupr. (1835), 1, 8, PI.
2, fig. 9.
Luzon, Los Baiios.
Chrysodema adjuncta Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London (1874), 310.
Luzon, Mt. Maquiling.
Dicercomorpha argenteoguttata Thoms., Typ. Bupr., App. (1879), 13.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Philanthaxia lata sp. nov.
Long. 8 ; larg. 3 mm. Oblong ovale, elargi au tiers posterieur,
entierement bronze obscure, un peu mat, avec les angles poste-
rieurs du pronotum d'un bronze plus clair, legerement pourpres ;
dessous plus noir, pattes bronzees, tarses et antennes noirs, le
1^^ et le 2® article de celles-ci bronzes.
Tete plane ; front vaguement deprime ; la surface couverte de
points fins, confluents. Pronotum en trapeze, faiblement bisinue
en avant et tronque en arriere, les cotes obliques et a peine ar-
ques, la surface couverte d'une ponctuation fine, tres egale, sem-
blable a celle de la tete, mais presentant sur le disque de fines
rides sinueuses. Ecusson triangulaire, presque deux fois aussi
large que long. Elytres legerement elargis au tiers posterieur,
finement denteles sur les cotes de la jusqu'au sommet; celui-ci
etroitement tronque ; la surface couverte de stries lineaires, plus
rapprochees sur les cotes que sur le disque, les interstries aplanis,
subrugueux, tres egalement et densement ponctues. Dessous
moins rugueux que le dessus, la ponctuation de Tabdomen aci-
' Proof read by C. F. Baker.
83
84 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
culee, et simulant de tres fines ecailles, couvert d'une pulveru-
lence blanche.
Luzon, Mt. Maquiling.
Chrysobothris bistripunctata H. Deyr., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. (1864),
8, 111.
Luzon, Los Bafios.
Belionota fallaciosa H. Deyr., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. (1864), 8, 84.
Luzon, Mt. Maquiling.
Melibseus bakeri sp. nov.
Long. 4; larg, 1 mm. Petit, etroit, assez convexe, attenue en
avant et en arriere, entierement bronze obscur et brillant, la par-
tie anterieure du front verte.
Tete etroite, convexe avec une legere depression longitudinale
au dessus de Tepistome. Pronotum grand, convexe, faible-
ment bisinue en avant et en arriere; les cotes deprimes, la de-
pression prolongee le long de la base, la marge laterale arquee,
anguleusement rentrante en arriere tout pres de la base ; la sur-
face assez rugueuse, couverte de petites rides sinueuses et trans-
versales. Ecusson petit, triangulaire. Elytres impressionnes
de part et d'autre a la base avec le calus humeral saillant; les
cotes sinues a hauteur des hanches posterieures, attenues en arc
depuis le milieu, celui-ci separement arrondi et inerme; la sur-
face couverte de rugosites simulant de tres fines ecailles entre
des rides sinueuses. Dessous moins rugueux que le dessus, men-
tonniere du prosternum bilobee.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Melibseus seneifrons H. Deyr., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. (1864), 8, 134.
Luzon, Mt. Maquiling; Los Baiios.
Sambus auricolor Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London (1874), 322.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Sambus lugubris Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London (1874), 323.
Luzon, Mt. Maquiling; Los Baiios.
Cryptodactylus philippinensis Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London
(1874), 321.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Agrilus luzonicus sp. nov.
Long. 6.5-7; larg. 1.7 mm. Voisin de VA. acutus Thunb., mais
different de celui-ci par une serie de caracteres constants. Tou-
jours plus petit et moins ventru, Timpression m^diane de la base
IX, D, 1 Kerremans: Biiprestides, I 85
du pronotum moins profonde et moins large, Tepine terminale
des elytres tou jours moins longue et plus grele, moins elargie a
la base et montrant, sur le cote externe, une fine dentelure bien
marquee, tandis qu'elle est moins nette et moins aigue chez
Vacutus, la coloration constante, d'un bronze verdatre clair,
rarement bleuatre; enfin, Taspect general plus lisse et plus
brillant.
Luzon, Los Baiios.
Agrilus nigTocinctus Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London (1874), 325.
Luzon, Los Baiios.
Agrilus discicollis H. Deyr., Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg. (1864), 8, 189.
Luzon, Los Bafios.
Agrilus vilis Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London (1874), 327.
Luzon, Los Bafios.
Agrilus bakeri sp. nov.
Long. 8-8.5 ; larg. 2 mm. Allonge, legerement elargi au tiers
posterieur, attenue en arriere, tete, cotes du pronotum et extre-
mite des elytres cuivreux pourpre ainsi que le dessous, le pro-
notum et les elytres bleu verdatre, ceux-ci ornes de part et
d^autre de deux taches pubescentes et blanches. Tune au milieu,
Tautre vers le tiers posterieur; le dessous convert d'une pulve-
rulence blanche.
Tete forte, de la largeur du pronotum, sillonnee sur toute sa
longueur, et couverte de rides sinueuses bien marquees. Pro-
notum un peu plus large que long et aussi large en avant qu'en
arriere, faiblement bisinue en avant, plus fortement en arriere,
les cotes paralleles, a peine arques, sans carene posterieure
distincte, la carene laterale oblique et a peine sinueuse, rappro-
chee de Tinferieure; une vague impression lineaire et arquee
longe tout le milieu; la surface couverte de rides sinueuses.
Ecusson cuivreux, large, transversalement carene. Elytres peu
convexes, impressionnes a la base, plans sur le disque, declives
sur les cotes, legerement elargis au tiers posterieur, denteles et
separement arrondis au sommet, la surface couverte de tres fines
rugosites regulieres et simulant de petites ecailles. Dessous
plus finement rugueux que le dessus; mentonniere du proster-
num forte, echancree au milieu; pattes mediocres.
Luzon, Los Baiios.
Agrilus monticola sp. nov.
Long. 7; larg. 1.8 mm. Moins allonge et plus robuste, plus
convexe en dessus que le precedent, le sillon transversal du pro-
86 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
notum beaucoup plus large, plus profond et situe plus en arriere
vers la base, le sommet des elytres plus largement arrondi,
subtronque et plus f ortement dentele, la region suturale deprimee,
entierement bleu indigo fonce, verdatre sur les elytres, avec, de
chaque cote de ceux-ci, deux monchetures pubescentes et blanches
superposees, Tune apres le quart posterieur, Tautre a Fapex.
Tete assez forte, un peu plus etroite que la base du pronotum,
le vertex convexe et profondement sillonne, la surface ponctuee,
moins f ortement ridee que chez le precedent; antennes courtes
et epaisses. Pronotum plus large que long, un peu plus etroit
en avant qu'en arriere, bisinue en avant et en arriere, le lobe
median de Tavant tres arque ; les cotes obliques et a peine arques,
la carene posterieure ne rejoignant pas la marginale, celle-ci
oblique et sinueuse, Tinferieure parallele a celle-ci en avant et
sinueuse; le disque transversalement impressionne en avant et
largement sillonne en arriere du milieu, le sillon remontant sur
les cotes au dessus de la carene posterieure; la surface couverte
de tres fines rayures sinueuses et trans ver sales. Ecusson
triangulaire, plus large que haut et carene transversalement.
Elytres deprimes de part et d'autre a la base, sinues sur les cotes,
ensuite elargis au tiers posterieur ou ils laissent a decouvert une
etroite portion de la region dorsale des segments abdominaux,
attenues obliquement jusqu'au sommet, celui-ci assez largement
tronque et assez f ortement dentele; region suturale tres legere-
ment declive; suture saillante en arriere; la surface assez ru-
gueuse et couverte de rugosites simulant des ecailles. Dessous
moins rugueux que le dessus, couvert d'une pubescence tres
courte, regulierement espacee sur I'abdomen; mentonniere du
prostemum large, subsinueuse et tronquee en avant; pattes peu
robustes.
Luzon, Mt. Maquiling.
Agrilus fontanus sp. nov.
Long. 5; larg. 1 mm. Allonge, subparallele sur les cotes, en-
tierement noir en dessus, la moitie interne des elytres couverte
d'une courte pubescence grisatre peu visible, le dessous d'un noir
plomb6, entierement couvert d'une courte pubescence grise.
Tete forte, aussi large que la base du pronotum, convexe,
faiblement sillonnee sur le vertex, couverte de tres fines rides
transversales et sinueuses. Pronotum presque carre, plus large
que long, aussi large en avant qu'en arriere, la marge anterieure
plus fortement bisinuee que la posterieure, avec un large lobe
median avance; les cotes subparalleles, a peine arques; carene
posterieure grande, arquee, rejoignant la marginale en avant
IX, D, 1 Kerremans: Buprestides, I 87
du milieu; carene laterale subsinueuse, visible en dessus, Tin-
ferieure assez eloignee d'elle en avant; le milieu du disque avec
une tres vague fossette en avant et une autre plus nette, au
dessus de Tecusson; la surface couverte de rides sinueuses et
transversales bien marquees. Ecusson petit, plus large que long,
carene transversalement. Elytres couvrant entierement Tab-
domen, transversalement deprimes k la base, legerement le long
de la suture, celle-ci elevee et lisse sur presque toute sa longueur,
sauf a la base ; le sommet separement arrondi et a peine dentele ;
la surface egalement couverte de rugosites simulant de tres
fines ecailles. Dessous plus clair et un peu plus luisant que
le dessus; mentonniere du prosternum grande, largement lobee;
pattes assez robustes.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Agrilus balnearis sp. nov.
Long. 4.5; larg. 0.7 mm. Ecourte, assez convexe, attenue
en arriere, entierement bleu brillant, avec, sur les elytres, une
large bande bleu d'acier fonce et glabre, tandis que le reste des
elytres et du dessous sont converts d'une tres courte pubescence
gris blanchatre, plus dense sur la region post6rieure des elytres,
apres la bande noire.
Tete forte, avec les yeux epais et tres saillants en dehors,
sillonnee longitudinalement au milieu, et entierement couverte
de rides sinueuses. Pronotum bisinue en avant, aussi large en
avant qu'en arriere, sa plus grande largeur au milieu, les cotes
arques; carene posterieure grande, sinueuse et rejoignant la
marginale en avant du milieu; carene marginale plus sinueuse
que rinferieure; le milieu du disque a peine deprime transver-
salement au dessus de Tecusson; la surface couverte de rides
sinueuses et transversales identiques a celles de la tete. Ecusson
mat, transversalement caren6. Elytres legerement elargis au
tiers posterieur, impressionnes a la base, tronques et tridentes
de part et d'autre au sommet; la suture finement corboree du
tiers posterieur a Tapex; la surface couverte de rugosites simul-
ant de tres fines ecailles. Dessous plus lisse et plus brillant
que le dessus ; mentonniere du prosternum assez grande et lob^e ;
pattes peu robustes.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Agrilus atomus sp. nov.
Long. 3.5; larg. 0.7 mm. Subparallele, un peu plus large en
avant qu'en arriere, entierement bronze verdatre, le front vert
88 The Philippine Jourmal of Science i9i4
et mat, les elytres et le dessous couverts d'une courte pubescence
grise, rare.
Tete etroite en avant et large en arriere, le front aplani, le
vertex bombe et sillonne. Pronotum un peu plus long que large
et un peu plus large en avant qu'en arriere, la marge anterieure
bisinuee avec un large lobe median avance et arque; les cotes
l^gerement courbes et convergents vers la base; celle-ci faible-
ment bisinuee, carene posterieure sinueuse et allongee, rejoignant
la marginale en avant du milieu ; celle-ci oblique, presque droite,
en entierement visible en dessus, Tinferieure arquee; le milieu
du disque sillonne, le sillon elargi en arriere ; la surface couverte
de rides sinueuses et transversales. Ecusson petit, carene.
Elytres largement et peu profondement deprimes a la base,
couverts de rugosites simulant de petites ecailles, separement
arrondis et inegalement denteles au sommet. Dessous plus
f once et plus luisant que le dessus ; mentonniere du prosternum
grande et arquee; pattes peu robustes.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Aphanisticus bodongi sp. nov.
Long. 3.5 ; larg. 0.7 mm. Appartient au groupe des Aphanis-
ticus allonges et cylindriques de TEurope. Entierement noir,
tres legerement bronz6, brillant. Tete forte, finement pointill^e,
sillonnee profondement sur toute sa longueur. Pronotum un
peu plus large que long, a peine plus etroit en arriere, lisse et
brillant comme la tete et tres finement ponctue ; la marge ante-
rieure bisinuee; les cotes faiblement arques et un peu conver-
gents en arriere; le disque convexe, limite en avant par un
sillon longement la marge et en arriere par un autre sillon plus
large; une carene posterieure nette, etroite et perpendiculaire
k la base, la marge laterale tres oblique. Ecusson tres petit,
triangulaire. Elytres tres rugueux, couverts de rides transver-
sales, legerement deprimes le long de la suture, largement et
separement arrondis au sommet. Dessous beaucoup moins
rugueux que les elytres; marge anterieure du prosternum tron-
qu6e, sans mentonniere.
Luzon, Los Baiios.
Cette espece se retrouve dans Tlnde, a Simla.
Endelus bakeri sp. nov.
Du groupe des E. weyersi Rits. et modiglianii Kerrem. voisin,
pour la tete et le prolongement des tubes oculaires, de VE. diabo-
licus Kerrem., mais different de celui-ci par les impressions
^Ijrtrales et par la coloration generale.
ix,D. 1 Kerremans: Buprestides, I 89
Ecourte, pentagonal, entierement bronze plus ou moins clair
en dessus; dessous presque noir.
Tete large, profondement creusee; yeux tres saillants en
dehors, emergeant de tubes ecourtes ; la surface presque lisse et
tres brillante. Pronotum beaucoup plus large que long, ecourte,
tronque en avant avec les angles anterieurs aigus et avances;
les cotes largement arques en avant et sinues en arriere avec
les angles posterieurs obtus ; le milieu du disque avec deux larges
carenes transversales. Ecusson petit, triangulaire. Elytres
ecourtes, saillants a Tepaule, sinueux sur les cotes, attenues
obliquement en arriere, largement et separement arrondis au
sommet et tres finement denteles ; la surface gondolee et inegale,
avec de larges impressions laterales et discales, arrondies sauf
celles-ci longeant la suture, de chaque cote du sommet et qui sont
allongees. Dessous plus lisse et plus luisant que les elytres.
Long. 3.5-4; larg. 1.25-1.5 mm.
Luzon, Los Baiios.
Trachys dubia Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc. London (1879), 328.
Luzon, Los Baiios.
Trachys cornuta sp. nov.
Long. 3; larg. 1.6 mm. Remarquable par la forme toute par-
ticuliere des antennes dont le premier article, tres developpe,
a la forme d'une mandibule arquee en dedans et ^
cintree en dehors, comme le montre la figure ci (txixooax^
contre de Tantenne du cote droit, alors que les autres
articles sont presque moniliformes. Le seul speci- fig. i.L'antenne
men que j'aie sous les yeux est un male; il se peut ^^ Trachv»
done qu'il s'agisse d'un caractere sexuel, mais il est
si tranche qu'a premiere vue il semble que Tantenne soit im-
plantee sur une mandibule dirigee vers Texterieur.
Triangulaire, acumine en ligne presque droite en arriere, tete
et pronotum bronze presque noir, les cotes du second garnis
d'une pubescence pulverulente de blanc, les elytres bronze clair
avec une large postmediane noire, avec, en arriere de cette bande,
de chaque cote, une bande pubescente blanche en forme de V;
dessous noir.
Tete largement creusee avec le bord interne des yeux tranchant.
Pronotum trois fois aussi large que long, echancre en avant et
fortement bisinue en arriere, avec les cotes deprimes, largement
et obliquement arques, confluents en avant. Ecusson petit,
triangulaire. Elytres graduellement et regulierement attenues
sur les cotes depuis la base jusqu'au sommet, avec, de chaque
90 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
c6t6, une fine cote naissant du calus humeral et longeant la marge
laterale a une certaine distance de celle-ci; la surface finement
granuleuse, plus lisse sur la bande noire. Dessous luisant, plus
lisse que les elytres.
Luzon, Los Baiios.
Trachys bakeri sp. nov.
Long. 3 ; larg. 1.6 mm. Ressemble, pour le facies general, au
r. subbicornis Motsch., du Japon; entierement different de celui-
ci pour la coloration et pour le dessin elytral.
Ovo'ide, peu convexe, la tete et le pronotum bronzes, la
premiere, plus claire que le second, couverts d'une pubescence
couchee, rare et courte; elytres noirs couverts d'une dessin
lineaire pubescent de blanc forme par des cercles sur la moitie
anterieure et par deux lignes superposees et en zic-zac sur la
posterieure. Dessous noir.
Tete brillante, largement et peu profondement creusee en
triangle en avant, le bord des yeux non tranchant. Pronotum
a bords non aplanis, largement et peu profondement ^chancre
en avant; les cotes obliquement arques et convergents vers
Tavant ; la base f ortement bisinuee, la surface couverte de points
tres fins et acicules. Ecusson reduit a un point a peine visible.
Elytres regulierement attenues en arc despuis Tepaule jusqu'au
sommet, celui-ci conjointement arrondi; le calus humeral peu
saillant; la base deprimee contre le calus; la surface finement
granuleuse ; vus de profils, les elytres f orment une ligne sinuante
legerement bombee vers le sommet et declive ensuite. Dessous
moins rugueux que le dessus.
Luzon, Los Banos.
Trachys formosana Kerrem., Arch. f. Naturgesch. (1912), 209.
Luzon, Los Baiios.
Le type provient de Tile Formose.
ILLUSTRATION
Figure dans le texte
Fig. 1. L'antenne de Trachys comuta.
91
NOTES ON THE MALAY PANGOLIN, MANIS JAVANICA
DESMAREST '
By W. SCHULTZE
{From the Entomological Section, Biological Laboratory, Bureau of
Science, Manila, P. I.)
Two plates
During a recent trip to Palawan I had the opportunity to
observe a specimen of the pangolin, Manis javanica Desmarest,
in captivity for a period of about three weeks. The animal was
captured by a native boy who discovered it in the act of climbing
a tree. Previous to the capture of the animal, I had given some
attention to the collecting of specimens of termites or white ants.
The species that builds the roughly globose nests on the trunks
or branches of trees was fairly common about Taytay, and I had
observed that many of the nests had been destroyed or partly
destroyed. Generally, the disturbed nests had a round or ir-
regularly shaped hole in one side and all or part of the contents
of the interior had been removed. Some of the disturbed nests
still remained attached to the trunks or branches of trees, while
others had been broken off. I was at first inclined to attribute
the destruction of the nests to some species of bird, and thought
it possible that the bird was feeding on the termites or that it
utilized the hollowed nests as breeding places.
Upon receiving the pangolin, I offered it various species of
large true ants, but it paid no attention to them and refused to
eat. I then secured a fresh brood comb from a terrestrial
termite nest with its included termites, and the pangolin quickly
consumed all the insects. To supply the animal in this way with
sufficient food presented considerable difficulties, and remember-
ing the destroyed and partly destroyed nests of the arboreal
termites that I had observed in the forests the idea occurred to
me that the pangolin was probably responsible for their destruc-
tion and that these particular termites, to a large degree, sup-
^ Desmarest, Mammalogie (1822), 2, 377; Blandford, Fauna Brit. India,
Mammalia (1891) 599, fig. 199; Hollister, This Journal, Sec. D (1912),
7, 35.
93
94 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
plied the food of the animal. I accordingly secured several of
these arboreal termite nests, and placed them in the cage with the
animal. The pangolin commenced to break open a nest shortly
after dark. Its method of accomplishing this is very peculiar.
First, it is necessary to give some idea of the characters of the
nest in order better to understand how well the animal is adapted
to its food supply.
The termite nests are usually subglobose, sometimes being
rather irregular in shape, and from 20 centimeters to 50 centi-
meters in diameter. In color they are usually dark brown or
black, and externally have a rather flaky appearance. The outer-
most part of the nest is rather thin, and is brittle in texture.
The entire interior of the nest is made up of a somewhat porous
material that is more or less sponge-like in appearance, but not
at all sponge-like in texture, being very hard and somewhat
brittle. In the region where the queen chamber is located, the
surrounding material is still harder, and the passages or cells are
slightly smaller than in the external portions.
In opening the nest the pangolin at first removes the outer
layer from one side by means of its powerful claws. The animal
then commences working its way into the interior of the nest
by inserting its claws into the passages or qells and using them
as levers, thus breaking away, in small pieces, the very hard
material that makes up the interior of the nest. While doing
this work, the animal may assume any position — standing on
its hind legs or lying down on its side, on its belly, or even on its
back on the top or on the sides of the nest — depending on the
location of the nest. As soon as it has worked a short distance
into the interior, it reaches the regions inhabited by the termites,
and, while busily engaged with its claws in breaking down the
interior of the nest, it keeps its tongue constantly protruded,
licking up the termites that are disturbed or dislodged, in its
efforts to reach the interior of the nest. In this manner, the
pangolin hollows out the nest sometimes to such a degree that
only a thin crust or shell about 3 centimeters in thickness is left.
If the nest be very large, it is generally more or less broken up ;
small nests are rarely broken, but retain their original shape after
being hollowed out completely (Plate I). The pangolin under
observation consumed the contents of as many as four medium-
sized nests in one night. Very probably during the dry season,
the Palawan pangolin lives mostly on these arboreal termites.
In Palawan, the terrestrial termite nests or mounds are mostly
found in rather open brush or grass lands and are so hard that
the animal could not burrow into them during the dry season.
ix.D, 1 Schultze: Malay Pangolin 95
It probably uses them as food supply during the rainy season.
The pangolin seems to have poor eyesight, at least during the
daytime. However, its sense of smell is apparently very acute.
Its sense of direction is undoubtedly largely dependent on scent.
The animal under observation was repeatedly liberated, and soon
after being removed from its cage it raised its head and sniffed
in various directions. It then invariably turned toward the
nearest forest or thicket and walked away in that direction.
When it had decided upon a given course, no amount of turning
could deflect it, and after being turned about it always resumed
its original direction. Even lifting the animal by its tail and
quickly revolving it failed to confuse it. It never turned toward
open places or toward the sea. There is little doubt that it
depends largely upon its sense of smell in locating termite nests,
especially those that are placed high in the trees. If disturbed
when walking about, it quickly puts its head between its front
legs, turns a somersault, and rolls up into a ball (Plate II, fig. 2) ,
making a hissing noise when so doing. Its powerful tail (Plate
II, fig. 3), which has a horny pad on the end, is a great aid
to the animal in climbing and in hanging on branches of trees.
The animal has a very peculiar odor.
ILLUSTRATIONS
Plate I
(Photographs by Charles Martin)
Fig. 1. Arboreal termite nest hollowed out by Manis javanica Desmarest,
showing opening.
2. Opposite side of the termite nest shown in fig. 1.
Plate II
(Photographs by courtesy of Dean C. Worcester)
Fig. 1. Manis javanica Desmarest in walking position.
2. Manis javanica rolled up.
3. Manis javanica climbing.
Vol. VI 11, Sec. D, No. 6 of this Journal was issued May 25, 191^.
123716 — 7 97
Schultze: Malay Pangolin.]
[Phil. Journ. Scl, IX, D, No. 1.
Fig. 2. Opposide side of the nest shown in fig. 1.
PLATE I. ARBOREAL TERMITE NEST HOLLOWED OUT BY MANIS JAVANICA DESMAREST.
><
X
cc 2
THE PHILIPPINE
Journal of Science
D. General Biology, Ethnology,
AND Anthropology
Vol. IX APRIL, 1914 No. 2
NOTES ON IRRIGATION AND COOPERATIVE IRRIGATION
SOCIETIES IN ILOCOS NORTE ^
By Emerson B. Christie
(From the Museum, Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I.)
One plate
Reports of the Bureau of Public Works state that the Prov-
ince of Ilocos Norte has some 15,000 hectares under a fairly
satisfactory degree of irrigation. Besides this land, there is
a considerable area irrigated only during the season of trans-
planting and growing rice ; that is to say, the wet season.
Irrigation works of some sort are to be found in all the
municipalities in the province. Bangui and Nagpartian, the two
northernmost towns in the province, have together some 1,500
hectares of rice land under irrigation. About nine-tenths of
this land is under irrigation only during the wet season, owing
to the imperfection of the irrigation works. Neither town has
dams of a permanent nature. Diversions are made usually by
temporary dams of bamboo and rock from 0.5 meter to 3
meters high. These are crudely constructed, and are either
completely destroyed each year or require considerable repairing.
Some of the 27 ditches in these towns have no headgate nor
wasteway provisions, and as a consequence their channels have
been cut so deep as to leave portions of the lands they once
watered above water. The most ambitious irrigation work to
be seen in this part of the province is the heading of an old
canal which was destroyed about a generation ago. It had a
^ I am indebted to the courtesy of the Bureau of Public Works for the
data on the extent of irrigation in Ilocos Norte which appear in this article.
126083 99
100 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
solid masonry gate, and the heading is cut for some distance
through a rock cliff. There are 10 canals in Bangui-Nagpartian,
each 1 kilometer or more in length. The two longest are about
3 kilometers long.
The people of Pasuquin, south of Nagpartian, have exploited
the available water supply to a considerable extent. In the
northern part of the territory of this municipality, 4 small
rivers are made to irrigate about 1,000 hectares of rice land
during the wet season, and in the southern part of the town
about half as much land is watered from a lateral of the Paratong
canal, which draws water from the Bacarra or Bubuisan River.
An attempt is made to water these 500 hectares the year
around, but complaints made by the landowners indicate that
the supply of water is unreliable owing to certain imperfections
in the canal.
Laoag, the capital of the province, is badly off with regard
to irrigation. Certain works which formerly utilized the water
of one or two minor creeks for wet-season irrigation have been
destroyed in course of time, and according to the latest data
available only about 600 hectares of land in the municipality
are under irrigation. Of this land, about 100 hectares are
irrigated only during the wet season. The rest is watered by
a branch of the Kamungao canal, which draws water from
the Bacarra River. The people of Laoag who use this canal
complain of a shortage of supply during dry weather. This
shortage, in the opinion of an engineer of the Bureau of Public
Works, is due not to a failure of the supply in the river, but to
defects of an engineering order.
Laoag is situated on the largest river in the province. There
is a gauge record of a quarter of a million second liters for
this stream, and it is probable that this amount of water is ex-
ceeded at times. The want of irrigation work on this river is
sufficiently accounted for by the size and the difficulty of the
problem of utilization. The problem is further complicated by
the circumstance that the river bears a heavy raft-traffic in
rice which is floated from towns on the upper reaches to Laoag,
and any obstructions to this traffic would cause an uproar from
those interested in it.
San Miguel has 9 ditches which irrigate some 500 hectares
during the wet season.
Piddig is better supplied with irrigation than any town in
the province except the three dependent on the Bacarra River.
Nearly 2,000 hectares of land in the municipality are under
irrigation, more than half of it all the year around. The water
IX, D, 2 Christie: Irrigation in Ilocos Norte 101
is drawn from the Gisit River, a tributary of the Laoag. The
most important canal is provided v^ith a masonry headgate
and wasteway, and shows good maintenance. This canal irri-
gates some 800 hectares.
Dingras has a good deal of land under irrigation, but lacks
proper provisions for the control and distribution of water.
Batac has canals and other irrigation works. The Kiawit
River runs in an artificial channel which is said to have been
made for it as far back as 1760, under the direction of the Filipino
after whom it is named. In course of time, however, the bed
of this stream has become badly eroded, resulting in an inconven-
ient lowering of the water below the fields which it was
intended to irrigate. The water, both of this and other irriga-
tion works, is far from sufficient for the needs of the land
under present arrangements. It is worth noting that many
ditches in this municipality are provided with masonry diversion
weirs and headgates, with proper provision for varying the
openings.
Paoay has several old ditches in poor condition which are
inadequately supplied with water.
Badoc, the southernmost town of the province, has nearly
4,000 hectares of irrigated land. On the high land which
cannot be reached by canals, extensive masonry walls have been
constructed to catch the flood water and distribute it over areas
devoted to raising rice. Most of the ditches are small, and
belong to individual landowners.
The Badoc River runs through the municipality. Water is
diverted from this stream by low temporary dams of bamboo
and rock, which may last one or several seasons. The ditches
are well constructed, and show good maintenance. Masonry
headgates, checks, and other necessary structures have been
provided on most of the systems, and largely eliminate the
bad waste noticeable in other municipalities of the province.
The longest ditch is about 2 kilometers in length. Most of the
land irrigated is watered only during the wet or rice-growing
season.
Irrigation works in the municipalities of Bacarra and Bintar,
watered from the Bacarra or Bubuisan River, deserve special
mention, for they exemplify the fullest development of irriga-
tion practice to be found in the province. They cover some
7,000 hectares of land, most of which is supplied with water
all the year, and thus is enabled to raise two or three crops
a year.
Practically all the water used for irrigation in these towns
102 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
is drawn from the Bacarra or Bubuisan River. This stream
rises in the northeastern part of the municipality of Bintar,
and runs its entire course to the China Sea through this
municipality and that of Bacarra. From its source to the latter
town, the stream is made up of a series of rapids, a circumstance
which makes it easy to divert water for irrigation purposes.
The stream carries a fair amount of water even in the dry
season. According to a gauging made in April, 1909 — that
is, during a dry month — below the town of Bacarra and below
all points where water was diverted ther^ was a discharge of
3,300 second liters going to waste.
There are 8 canals which divert water from the Bacarra
River, covering from 200 to 1,800 hectares each, and some
35 small ditches, watering from 2 to 70 hectares each. All
of these ditches, it is said by the people of the towns, have
been built by the landowners and are maintained by them.
The larger ditches have been well constructed, and show fairly
good maintenance. Diversions are made by temporary dams
of bamboo and rock, which are either destroyed or require
considerable repairing each year. Rows of stakes are driven
into the bed of the stream, and the spaces between are filled with
stones and brush. Permanent headgates and wasteways above
the high-water mark have been provided on a number of the
larger ditches, reducing repair work on the ditches. Important
structures employed on the canals such as checks, drops, and
culverts are of a permanent nature, and are usually constructed
of cobblestones laid in lime mortar.
It would be beyond the scope of this article, which aims only
to convey a general idea of the degree of development of native
irrigation in Ilocos Norte, to give a detailed description of all the
irrigation works in Bacarra and Bintar. In order to illustrate
the utmost that has been done in this region, I shall give a
few facts regarding the two most ambitious works, the Paratong
and the Kamungao canals.
The former is the largest and most important canal in the
province. Heading just above the town of Bacarra, it extends
across this municipality and waters about 500 hectares in the
municipality of Pasuquin, besides nearly 850 hectares in Bacarra.
The main canal and the Bacarra and Pasuquin laterals are about
20 kilometers long. It is claimed, and I know of no evidence
to the contrary, that this canal was built by the landowners
without the assistance of any regular engineer. Many repairs
are necessary each year, and these are made by the landowners
benefited by the system. At one place, where the Pasuquin
IX. D, 2 Christie: Irrigation in Ilocos Norte 103
lateral heads, the water of the canal is carried across the Bang-
sirit estero in flumes. The Paratong canal has a capacity of
3,000 second liters.
The Kamungao canal is about 6 kilometers long, and serves
over 800 hectares. It heads opposite the tov^n of Bacarra,
and crosses the divide between the valley in which that town
is situated and Laoag, about 500 hectares of the land it serves
being situated in the latter municipality. The system is well
constructed, and is provided with masonry headgates and waste-
way. But conditions at the heading are such as to give rise
to some complaints from landowners on the Laoag side of the
shortage of water. The heading of the canal is at a bend in
the river; there is no diversion dam, and the channel is so high
that an inadequate supply of water is diverted.
The Bisaya ditch which irrigates certain lands in Bintar
is of interest as showing what the natives are capable of doing,
because for the greater part of its course of 3 kilometers down
the canon of the Bacarra River the waterway is formed by a
masonry wall at the foot of the rock cliffs.
All the irrigation done in this province depends on gravity.
No pumps, water wheels, or other mechanical devices are in use.
It is of interest to know how the foregoing works and others
similar to them have been built and are maintained. No very
large landed estates are found in this province.^ Even the
few landholdings of comparatively large extent are almost
invariably divided into several parcels separated from each other.
Hence, it is but seldom that any one man finds it to his interest
to build irrigation works of any considerable size for the use
of his land. Therefore, the necessary feed canals and other
works for bringing water from the rivers to the land must
be built by cooperation if they are to be built at all. This state
of things has given rise to a large number of irrigation societies.
These are of interest to a student of the Ilocano people for
two reasons; namely, their importance to the agriculture of
the region and their indication of the capacity of the people
for cooperative effort.
These societies of the Ilocano people are a marked charac-
teristic of the Province of Ilocos Norte. In the Ilocano Provinces
of Ilocos Sur and La Union, not very much irrigation from
rivers and springs is practiced. Of the irrigation situation among
'According to the Philippine census of 1903, the average size of farms
and other parcels of land under cultivation in Ilocos Norte is only 0.622
hectare. This is one of the lowest averages to be found in the Philippine
provinces.
104 ^''^^ Philippine Journal of Science leu
the Ilocano element of the population of Pangasinan, Zambales,
and Nueva Ecija, I am ignorant. In Cagayan Province, certain
Ilocano towns — for example, Claveria and Sanchez Mira — have
irrigation works of considerable extent. Claveria is said to
have more than 2,000 hectares of rice land under irrigation.
I suspect that these works have been built and maintained in
the same way as those in Ilocos Norte; that is, by popular
cooperative societies. But the total extent of irrigation works
built and maintained by Ilocanos in this province does not
reach that of the works existing in Ilocos Norte. In the latter
province, I have enjoyed good opportunities of observing the
working of a number of irrigation societies, and some details
about them may be of interest.
There are irrigation societies in all the municipalities of
this province, but owing to the local conditions these societies
play the most important role in the northern half of the province
and are of special importance in Pasuquin, Bacarra, Bintar, and
Piddig.
The members of each society are bound together by a written
agreement which prescribes the organization of the body and
the field of its operations, defines the duties of its members,
and provides penalties for disobedience which range from a
small fine to expulsion from the society and confiscation of a
member's share in the land irrigated. I have read a number
of these agreements as enforced in Bangi, Bintar, and Badoc.
There seems to be no standard or pattern for these documents,
for they differ widely one from the other. They range in preci-
sion and formality from agreements drawn up by lawyers and
composed of scores of paragraphs down to a simple statement
that *'the undersigned agree to undertake the irrigation of
such-and-such a piece of land under the leadership of So-and-so."
The majority of agreements occupy a middle ground between
elaborate precision and sketchy simplicity. They have been
drawn up in most cases by men who have local influence,
but no legal training. Some of them at least were drawn up
with a view to taking up and irrigating a piece of public land;
it is not easy otherwise to understand the provision for con-
fiscation of the holding of a member who does not fulfill his
obligations. This provision occurs in the following instrument
organizing an irrigation society in an outlying settlement of
Bintar. The agreement is given here because it is fairly typical
of many.
We, who sign our names or make a cross below, agree to make a canal to
bring water to the place called Gimamaga. There is no one compelling or
IX, D, 2 Christie: Irrigation in Ilocos Norte 105
coercing us; we are expressing our spontaneous desires, and we say the
following:
First. — We all equally agree to choose a chief to give us orders, to the
end that there may be order in our work on the said canal.
Second. — We also agree to choose foremen and designate them as assist-
ants to the said superintendent of construction.
Third. — We agree further that on being given an order by the said
chiefs we will not make objections, but will all equally obey the order,
and he who disobeys this provision of our agreement shall be given two
lashes to punish him for his disobedience, and if he is guilty a second time we
will confiscate his share of the property to punish him for his disobedience.
Fourth. — We agree further that when a day fixed upon for our work
arrives and our superintendent sounds his horn to call us, we will hasten
to present ourselves and will not wait for a third or fourth blowing of the
horn, and that that one of us who shall be the last to arrive shall be fined
six cuartos * as a punishment for his lateness, unless he has a reason.
Fifth. — We agree further that when the work on the said canal is begun
no one of us may go away or hide; and he who shall be caught hiding
shall be given five lashes to punish him for his disobedience, and his expla-
nations shall not be listened to.
Sixth. — We agree further that after the month of July arrives it shall
not be permitted to furnish a woman or a child as a substitute, especially if
our work consist in building dams, and he who contravenes this agreement
of ours shall be liable to a fine of an eighth of a peso, and his explanations
shall not be listened to.
Seventh. — As soon as our shares of work shall be allotted, whether the
work consist in canal digging or fencing, we will make haste to perform
the work, without waiting for the assistance of the whole society; and he
who disregards this provision of our agreement shall be fined an eighth of
a peso for his disobedience.
Eighth. — We agree also that the obligation of furnishing labor or mate-
rials, whether for excavation or for fencing, shall be equally distributed
among us.
Ninth. — We agree further that the cost of fenced ways for the passage
of animals, such as, horses, buffaloes, oxen, and pigs, shall be equally distri-
buted, and no one shall fail to conform to this rule.
Tenth. — We agree further that we shall be free to invite outsiders to
work with us for half a day or a day,*^ but' the superintendent shall not
have authority to make contracts without first submitting the matter to us
at a meeting.
* Literally, a man to serve as our father.
* About 4 centavos in Philippine currency or 2 cents in United States
currency.
^ In Ilocos Norte it is not unusual for country people to assist a neighbor
or relative for a short time without money payment, but on the under-
standing that they are to be given food and drink. If the work lasts only
about half a day, a few drinks of hasi are considered sufficient compensa-
tion; if the work lasts longer, it is incumbent on the man who has invited
the workers to regale them with unusually good food, including a meat or
fish element, as well as drink. It is in this way that houses are often built
and ditches dug without the expenditure of any cash.
106 "^h^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Eleventh. — Those who work against our agreement to exploit lands in
common shall receive five lashes from us for the first offense, and shall be
deprived of their rights for the second, as a punishment for their evil
custom, and we will not listen to their explanations.
Twelfth. — We shall have no right to disobey the orders of our superin-
tendent, when he assigns us work, whether the work consist of digging or
fencing, and he who acts contrary to this agreement shall be punished as
is set down in article seven for his first offense, and for the second he shall
be deprived of his share of land as a punishment for his disobedience.
Thirteenth. — It shall not be allowable to call us unexpectedly to a place
distant from these fields. If it is desired to call us to a distant place, we
must not be called unexpectedly but must be advised in advance.
Fourteenth. — We shall all leave our implements (i. e., in the places
where work is being done), whether plow or harnessing rope or harrow,
and none but the owners shall take the said implements, and he whom we
may catch in the act of taking articles belonging to another person shall,
for the first offense, be condemned by us to suffer a suitable penalty, and
for the second offense he shall have his share in these fields confiscated as
punishment for his disobedience, and no explanations shall be listened to.
All the above clauses of our most true agreement and convention for
cultivating the soil in common shall be strictly obeyed; no one is coercing
us nor causing us to be coerced, but of our own free will we make this
agreement in order to have discipline in our work, and in testimony of our
adhesion to this, our agreement and convention, those of us who know how
to write sign their names, and those who do not know how to write make
their mark and have their names written for them, now in the year eighteen
hundred ninety-four.
Dimamaga, sitio of Bintar, September 15, 1894.
[Twenty crosses (marks) and three signatures follow.]
There is a supplementary paragraph, dated March 24, 1911,
in which it is agreed to choose a new superintendent and to
substitute certain names for others.
In this case, the cabecilla, or chief, is also the maestro, or
superintendent of construction. But it is not at all uncommon
to find the office of chief of the organization and that of the
superintendent of construction divided. Most societies also have
a special officer known as the papelista,^ because he keeps the
papers ; that is, the accounts. His duties are those of a secretary-
treasurer. It is his duty, besides keeping the society's funds, to
keep account of the fines incurred by the members. Small
societies — I have seen the membership list of one which comprised
only about half a dozen names — may do without any officers
except a chief (cabecilla). On the other hand, a large society
may have in addition to all the above officers two or three
members who may be called a commissariat. These men, instead
of working on the canals and structures of the irrigation scheme,
•A Spanish word meaning one who has to do with papers.
IX. D, 2 Christie: Irrigation in Ilocos Norte 107
fish and cook for their fellow members while the latter are at
their labor.
Nominally the officers are elected, and may be deposed by
vote at any time. In other words, they are subject to the
recall. But as a rule, a society has one or more members whose
influence is preponderating because of property, shrewdness,
education, or past or present government oflSce, who constitute
the real controlling force. It must be borne in mind that a
very large proportion of the members cannot even read or write.
This fact is sufficiently evidenced by the long rows of marks
seen at the end of the agreements. The ignorance and humble
station in life of the mass of the members make it easy for a
local boss who gets to be the chief of an irrigation society
to keep control of its activities.
In the case of those societies whose constitutions I have
read, the land irrigated is divided into equal shares among
the majority of the members, with the stipulation, in the case
of many of the larger societies, of larger shares for one or more
of the officers. The chief is often thus favored, sometimes to
the extent of having twice as much allotted to him as the
ordinary members; the superintendent of construction and the
secretary-treasurer are also given an advantage sometimes;
the foremen have no advantage except that they do not do as
much manual labor as the ordinary members.
Landowners who do not belong to a given society frequently
want the association to bring water to their land, or wish to
enjoy water rights in some canal that passes their land, but
which they have not helped to build. In such cases, it is often
possible for them to secure the advantages desired by agreeing
to give the members of the society a part of the crop. The
payment demanded is usually high, amounting often to two-fifths
of the crop.
The danger of the chief of an irrigation society enriching
himself at the expense of the labor of the members is realized
by the Ilocanos, and the article found in the agreement quoted
above, forbidding the chief to enter into irrigation contracts
without first submitting the proposition to a meeting of the
society, is a very common one in instruments of this kind.
Another common provision is one expressly forbidding a
member to alienate his share of land without the consent of
the society. It is often provided that in case a member wishes
to sell he must give the first choice to a fellow-member. On
the death of a member, his rights and obligations in a society
descend to his heirs.
108 "T^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
A provision sometimes seen in the constitutions of irrigation
societies in Ilocos Norte is that disputes arising from the work
or the shares must be submitted for adjustment to a meeting
of the society, recourse to the courts being punished by expulsion.
Money for the purchase of building material, such as timber
or lime, is raised by a levy on all the members, or the material
may be furnished by members in lieu of work.
An omission which strikes one forcibly in reading the agree-
ments is the lack of any definite provision for dividing the
water supplies. This omission corresponds to one seen in the
irrigation works ; namely, the almost, though not quite, universal
lack of any system by which a definite amount of water can
be drawn from the main canals to the small ditches of the
individual fields. It seems to be assumed that there will be
water enough for all. If there is any system to insure rotation
and equality of supply, I am not aware of it. Doubtless, the
question of a square deal in this matter comes up and is acted
upon in meetings of the society.
These meetings take place in some societies at regular intervals.
In others, they are called from time to time by the chief.
As may be supposed, something is required to hold slack
members of the society to their work. For this reason, in
most agreements a definite fine is levied for each day's absence
from work when a call has been issued by the head of the
society. This fine is expressed in the agreements in terms of
money, but in fact is collected in kind at harvest time. It is
the principal duty of the secretary-treasurer to keep a record
of the number of day's absence of each man and to collect
the corresponding amount of fines. These go into the common
fund, which is mainly expended for food and drink for the
members.
There is a good deal of difference between societies in the
degree of strictness with which the payment of fines is enforced.
Some societies are evidently very slack in this regard ; in others,
there is a businesslike strictness.
I have heard of one or two cases of embezzlement on the
part of the treasurers, but the circumstances of the collection
of fines, namely, that it takes place under the eyes of so many
members of the society and that the fines are collected not
in money but in the form of bundles of rice, easily noted in
amount and rather difficult to get rid of secretly, serve as
deterrents to breach of trust.
Besides the ordinary irrigation societies composed of land-
IX, D, 2 Christie: Irrigation in Ilocos Norte 109
owners, I know of at least one society in Ilocos Norte organized
to do irrigation work for hire. The society comprises about
thirty men, who are said to own little or no land themselves,
but who hire themselves out to propietors in return for a share
of the crop. I have been informed that this society conducts
the irrigation work for land that produces about 5,625 hecto-
liters of unhusked rice. The collection is effected at harvest time
by the secretary-treasurer of the society. These men have a
recognized chief (cabecilla) at the head of their affairs. I do
not know what advantage in compensation, if any, is enjoyed
by the officers of this society.
It must not be supposed that the members of this society make
their entire livelihood by doing irrigation work. That work, as
conducted in Ilocos Norte, lasts only a few months of the year,
sometimes only a few weeks. During the rest of the year the
members are free to work at anything they can. In irrigation
work, as in other matters, it is unusual in Ilocos Norte to see
specialization.
All the irrigation societies with which I am acquainted hold
an annual feast at which they enjoy all the rice, meat, and
fermented sugar-cane juice that they can hold. The means to
do this come from the fines levied on sluggards ; often they are
eked out by the results of the chase. From twenty to forty men
with nets and dogs can usually get a deer or two or a wild
pig in Ilocos Norte, and a few men are commonly told off before-
hand to catch fish. The drink — basi — can be easily obtained in
exchange for rice. In case means are still lacking, the chief
levies a contribution of a few centavos on each member.
Most irrigation societies are placed under the patronage of
some particular saint, such as San Isidro Labrador (Saint Isidore,
the Ploughman or Farmer). But as the most opportune
time for holding the feast is at the conclusion of harvest, it
is not necessarily held on the day assigned to the patron saint
in the calendar.
A feast is preceded by religious ceremonies. Money is paid
to a priest by the society to celebrate mass on the preceding
Sunday. If all or most of the members are adherents of the
Aglipayan organization (the Independent Filipino Church), the
money goes to the local representative of that body. I have
known of cases where the members have been divided in their
allegiance and money has been paid for a mass to the local
Roman Catholic priest and also to the local head of the Aglipayan
society. The mass, I was always informed, is applicable to
110 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
the souls of the deceased members of the society and all those
persons from whom the members of the society may have
inherited their land.
But besides this and other Christian ceremonies, it is the
rule among the societies with which I am acquainted to perform
other rites which are not due to the teaching of the Christian
Church. One of these is performed at the annual feast just
mentioned. It consists of setting forth food and drink for
spirits, having in mind not only the ancestors of the members,
but spirits in general. I have been present several times at
the annual feast of irrigation societies, and once had the good
fortune to arrive at the scene early enough to see the offering
set out for the spirits and to hear the invitation extended to
them. The offering in this case consisted of plates of rice, of
two kinds, one of which was the sticky sort called diket. There
were also dishes of rice cooked with coconut milk (not coconut
water) and a little basi. These articles were set out on the
floor of a room in the evening and left untouched until early
morning. After everything was placed in order, a woman
went to each window of the room and invited the spirits in turn
in the words which I found to be, in Ilocos Norte, the commonest
formula of invitation to them, couched in such general terms
as to include not merely ancestors, but any other spirits that
might wish to come. These were the words :
Come now, come now, sirs, come, come all, all, let the lame have them-
selves carried, let the blind be led/
After this, the room was left empty till morning, when the
feast began.
This offering of food and drink to spirits at the annual
feast is in line with the practice of irrigation societies at other
times. An important ditch or canal is seldom opened without
certain preliminary ceremonies of a propitiatory nature. Those
related below show the practice in the northern two-thirds of
the province of Ilocos Norte, where I saw more land being
irrigated from streams than in any other part of the Ilocano
provinces. Minor details may differ in various towns, but on
the whole I found an unexpected degree of uniformity.
When a society has been formed for the purpose of digging
a canal and bringing a piece of land under irrigation, a cross
about a meter high is planted where the canal is to be opened.
Some basi is sprinkled on the ground. Now ensues a wait,
' Umaikayon Appo, umaikayon, umaikai amin amiriy dagiti pilai obhaenyo,
dagiti bulsek kibinenyo.
IX, D, 2 Christie: Irrigation in I locos Norte HI
which may extend from only one night to several days, to
see whether or not any unfavorable omen appears to any of
the members of the society, or a sangkabagi or other spirit
appears to warn against the proposed undertaking. If an
unfavorable omen or vision occurs, the place where it is proposed
to start the canal is abandoned; unless the spirit, if there is
one in the place, can be appeased by an offering. If a spirit
warns against beginning the work, an attempt is made to
learn what sort of propitiation it wants. In case a sacrifice
is requested, a chicken, for example, the society must learn
whether the animal is to be set free at the spot or is to be killed
and cooked. In a society with numerous members there is
usually at least one who is supposed to know more about spirits,
omens, etc. than the other members, and his observations and
advice are acted on. Various unfavorable omens are watched
for, perhaps the commonest being the falling down or removal
of the cross. If nothing occurs during the wait to contraindicate
the digging of the ditch, the work is begun, offerings being first
put on the platform or altar. These offerings ordinarily consist
of rice cooked with coconut, chicken, betel-nut for chewing,
tobacco, and basi. When the canal has been made, another
ceremony is commonly performed, especially if some difficulty
is met with in getting the water to run in the ditch. This
rite consists in killing an animal at the edge of the canal and
saying the words given below. The animal is usually a pig,
but I know of cases in which an ox has been sacrificed. The
animal is killed in such a position that the blood spurts into
the ditch, while the master of ceremonies recites the following :
Ditch, this blood is spurted into you in order that your current may be as
strong as the current of this blood.'
The body of the animal is then dragged along the bed of the
canal up to the land to be irrigated.
It is also a very common practice to sprinkle the route of
the canal with blood before starting to dig. The throat of
a pig or chicken is cut, and the animal is dragged along the
line of route for this purpose.
I know of an authentic case which occurred near Laoag,
Ilocos Norte, where a dog's blood was used for sprinkling a
piece of ground which was to be leveled to make a rice field,
the dog being eaten afterward. But in this case the workers
were not Ilocanos but Tingians working for an Ilocano. Whether
^ Kali naisuyat kenka daitoi a dara tapno Hi peggesna nga agwayawai
padaen kuma ti danuvimo iti pigsana nga agayus.
112 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Ilocano peasants sprinkle blood on the ground before leveling
or clearing ground I do not know positively, but such action
would be in line with their practice in canal digging.
I have heard frequently of Ilocanos burying an animal in
the masonry of the canal intakes or gates, but I am not able
to vouch for the existence of the practice except in one case
in which my information seemed thoroughly reliable. In this
case the man who had performed the act was an Ilocano living
in San Miguel. He informed me that he had buried a chicken
alive in the masonry on first constructing it, but on the gate
or intake being destroyed by a flood he had consulted a Tingian
as to what he should do. The Tingian recommended that a dog
should be buried alive when the gate was reconstructed. This
was done, and according to my informant the gate has stood
solidly ever since.
Before taking leave of the subject of irrigation in Ilocos
Norte, I wish to mention certain unsatisfactory features. One
is the danger of a local boss who initiates a canal-building
society or gets control of one already formed claiming the pro-
prietorship of the works. This is especially liable to be the case
after the lapse of time has eliminated the original constructors.
There are several factors which may favor his success in such
an attempt. As the chief, he controls the original of the
document organizing the society. It is not difficult to cause
this paper to disappear in a plausible manner; for example,
during one of the typhoons or fires which frequently destroy
the flimsy houses of a provincial town. The frequency of
destructive flres in the towns of Ilocos Norte during the time
covered by the memory of men still living is very striking. Even
if the documents were kept at the town hall, the danger would
be but little lessened. It would seem that papers of such
importance should be kept in the provincial building at the
capital, certified copies being furnished to the chiefs of the
various societies.
A point in which improvement is possible lies in the direction
of definite provision for an equitable distribution of water.
It may be that there are irrigation agreements in Ilocos Norte
in which such provision is made. I can only say that I have
seen none in the various agreements that I have read, which
were chosen at random in different sections of the province.
It seems to have been assumed by those who signed these
papers thai; the proposed works would supply sufficient water
to all concerned under any circumstances. In point of fact,
it happens with great frequency that there is not water enough
IX, D. 2 Christie: Irrigation in Ilocos Norte 113
to go around under the present haphazard way of distributing it.
It is probable in the extreme that there are also considerable
possibilities of improvement in some cases in the line of coordina-
tion of the work of the various irrigation societies operating in
a given region. The societies have been organized independently
of each other at different times to meet the problems of groups
of cultivators who have had an eye solely to their own needs.
The consequence has been that some effort has been expended
and some work accomplished which might have been either
avoided altogether or made to pay greater returns by coordination
of effort with other groups. It is, however, a merely academic
wish to desire such coordination at the present time. No sub-
stantial improvement in this direction should be expected as long
as the irrigation societies carry on their activities without
supervision by the Insular Government.
Finally, in cases where the Government takes action, such,
for example, as taking over existing systems of irrigation
during the process of creating new systems, it is necessary
to exercise great vigilance to protect the interests of the small
peasant. It is easily conceivable that in such cases a few
influential men might claim exclusive right to compensatory
water rights granted by the Government which ought in justice
to be divided among a large number of persons who helped
to build the old systems under a cooperative plan or whose
ascendants did so. The importance, in this connection, of a
scrutiny of the original papers organizing the local irrigation
societies is self-evident.
ILLUSTRATION
Plate I. Feed canal in the canon of the Bacarra River. (Photograph by
Cortes.)
126083 2 115
NOTES ON THE POTTERY INDUSTRY IN SAN NICOLAS,
ILOCOS NORTE
By Emerson B. Christie
{From the Museurriy Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I.)
Three plates
Pottery of some sort is in use in every household in the
Province of Ilocos Norte. The principal objects are cooking
pots, which are also used for carrying and storing water ; tobacco
pipes; hearths or stoves; extra large jars for molasses or basi
(a fermented drink made from sugar cane) ; various sorts of
bowls; linings for wells; and bricks. Pots, jars, pipes, and
stoves are in practically universal use. Thus, although the
money value of pottery used in any one house is small, the sum
total for the province amounts to a considerable investment.
Part of this money goes out of the province. The large
jars mentioned are not, as far as I know, made in Ilocos
Norte. Some come from Manila and a good many from Vigan,
Ilocos Sur, as containers of molasses or unrefined sugar. There
are in Vigan a number of Chinese who manufacture these
large jars.
The manufacture of bricks and pipes in Ilocos Norte is
diffused among several towns. Laoag, the capital, and San
Nicolas make bricks; Piddig and San Nicolas make pipes.
But the manufacture of by far the largest class of earthenware
used in the province, namely, cooking pots, is almost entirely
confined to San Nicolas. I venture to say that if statistics
on the subject were available they would show that four-fifths
of all the pottery made in Ilocos Norte, as reckoned in money
value, is produced in this town.
San Nicolas is a town of some eleven thousand inhabitants,
situated almost directly across the river from Laoag. Its lands,
as at present cultivated, do not suffice for the inhabitants, and
several hundred persons derive their means of subsistence in
whole or in part from the manufacture of pottery vessels,
especially those for cooking and for holding water.
Bricks are made to a limited extent, mostly for local use.
Those I saw were poorly molded, and seemed to be poorly baked
117
118 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
as well. The manufacture of bricks constitutes an industry
of scarcely any importance.
Linings for wells are made mostly by men, owing probably
to the fact that they are comparatively large pieces and require
some strength to manipulate. They are frequently made to
order, in which case their size, of course, depends on the diameter
of the wells for which they are intended. They are not cast
in molds, but are built up by hand in the open air by adding
one layer of wet clay to another. They are then left to dry
in the sun, after which they are covered, out of doors, with rice
straw and other combustibles which are fired. Before the
firing, they are commonly smeared with a mixture of red
earth and water which gives them a uniform bright red color.
These linings are usually about 30 centimeters in height. They
are superimposed one upon another in wells, the top one project-
ing above the well mouth and serving to keep dirt from falling in.
For making pipes and cigar holders, clay is dug, dried,
pulverized, and sifted. The clay is then mixed with considerable
water, and is left to stand. After a good deal of sediment
has settled at the bottom, the water is drawn off and left to
stand in another vessel. The sediment which sinks to the bottom
of this second vessel is necessarily the finer part of the original
clay.
The tools used in making pipes and cigar holders consist
of a knife, a few small pieces of bamboo, and one or two
slender metal rods (Plate III, fig. 2). The worker, who in
almost all cases is a woman, keeps a small dish of oil at hand
in which to dip her fingers or her tools from time to time,
to prevent them from sticking to the clay. In default of oil,
she may use perspiration from her forehead or nose. After
the clay has been well kneaded, the object is shaped with the
fingers, then trimmed off with the knife. The bowl of the
pipe is then cut out with the oblique cutting edge of one of
the bamboo instruments. A thrust or two with one of the
metal rods makes the opening for the smoke to pass through.
After this, the pipes or cigar holders are left to dry for a
time. Then they are placed in an earthenware bowl filled with
combustibles, usually consisting of rice straw. The straw is
set on fire and bakes the objects.
San Nicolas pipes and cigar holders are usually plain. A little
ornamentation is sometimes produced by incising the unbaked
clay with the edge of a piece of bamboo. Many of them are
blackened by being covered, while still very hot, with rice
IX, D, 2 Christie: Pottery Industry in San Nicolas 119
bran. The bran is imperfectly consumed, and leaves a black
deposit on the clay.
Undoubtedly the principal clay product manufactured in San
Nicolas is cooking pots. Thousands of them are made every
year. The clay is dug from open pits on the outskirts of the town,
dried, beaten into dust, and sifted. It is then moistened and
kneaded. Some sand from the river is mixed with the clay
to prevent cracking. Then the woman shapes the mixture into
the form of a short thick cylinder and lays it on a round
board. This board is laid on another board, but it is not
connected with it by a bearing pin. From time to time she
gives the upper board a turn with one hand while she works
the clay with the other. Thus she gets some of the effect
of a wheel. She has a dish of water at hand, and frequently
dips her fingers and her tools into it to prevent sticking. At
first she uses only her fingers to shape the vessel ; later she uses
a smooth stone which she holds against the inner surface of
the vessel with her left hand while working on the outside with
a paddle in her other hand. Her tools consist of a stone, a
shell, and paddles of various shapes and sizes. With the paddles
she beats the outside of the vessel, causing it to spread. When
the vessel is fairly well shaped, she lays it aside for a time
to set and partially to dry. After this, she starts working
with it again, giving the last touches. When the vessel is
completely formed, she smooths the outside with a shell. Then
she may give it a few strokes with an incised paddle to impress
on it a simple pattern. It is common for the worker to smear
the outside of the vessel with red earth mixed with water, in
order to give it a uniform red color. If she does not do
this, the clay, which is grayish brown before being fired, turns
a poor and irregular red color on being burned. As in the
case of pipes, it is often desired to give the pot a black color.
This effect is secured in the same way as with pipes.
A few hearths or stoves and bowls of various sizes and
shapes are also made. The bowls are made in the same way
as the cooking pots. The hearths or stoves are built up in
layers in the open air, and are then covered with straw and
other combustibles and burned.
Pottery making in San Nicolas is strictly a household industry.
To a large extent it takes the place in the family Economic
system which weaving by hand occupies in most other towns
of the province. A woman working steadily at making pottery
may earn from 25 to 30 centavos (12.5 to 15 cents United
120 r^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
State currency) a day, but in fact the work is taken up and
dropped according to the family convenience or needs and
according to the state of the weather. As all cooking pots
are burned out of doors, without shelter of any kind, the work
is interrupted by rainy weather.
Just as the manufacture of pottery is strictly a household
industry, so the distribution is usually a family affair. It is
true that some one occasionally buys a cargo of pottery from
the manufacturers in San Nicolas and takes it up or down
the coast in a sailboat. But speaking broadly, each family
that makes pottery sells it to the ultimate consumer. This
part of the work is also in the main the women's affair.
There are several towns within a few kilometers of San Nicolas.
Nearly every morning, if the weather is favorable, San Nicolas
women may be seen starting for the markets of these towns,
carrying on their heads large trays loaded with earthenware,
which ordinarily consists of cooking pots. The pots are kept
from falling off by a network of cords. The price at which
the women retail the pots at the markets varies from 1 to 5
centavos according to size. It often takes a whole day to dispose
of 50 centavos' worth of pots.
When the desired market is at a considerable distance from
San Nicolas, the men of the family often take charge of the
distribution. They do not use ox carts much for freighting
earthenware because of the danger of breakage, but sling the
vessels on the end of the carrying pole (pingga) borne on one
shoulder. If the load is too heavy for one man, it is slung
from the middle of the pole and two men take each one end
of the pole on a shoulder. At harvest time, which is, of course,
the best season for sales, San Nicolas men may frequently
be seen carrying their wares even in remote barrios of the
province. Sales at this time of the year frequently take the
form of barter, the purchaser of earthenware paying in unhusked
rice. At this time of the year, also, a considerable number
of people from all parts of the province go to San Nicolas to
trade their rice for pottery.
It is impossible to state accurately the value of the annual
production of San Nicolas pottery. Taking into account the
fact that this town practically supplies the whole Province of
Ilocos Norte, and even sends some wares to Cagayan, I think
that it amounts to a business of not less than 10,000 pesos
a year, and probably reaches from 40 to 50 per cent higher.
ILLUSTRATIONS
(Photographs by Cortes.)
Plate I
Fig. 1. Potters kneading clay.
2. Women shaping pottery.
Plate II
Fig. 1. Interior of potter's house.
2. Woman burning pottery.
Plate III
Fig. 1. Peddler of pottery.
2. Woman making pipes. The deep bowl on her left is for burning
the pipes.
121
Christie: Pottery Industry in San Nicolas.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 2.
Fig. 1. Potters kneading clay.
Fig. 2. Women shaping pottery.
PLATE I.
Christie: Pottery Industry in San Nicolas.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX. D, No. 2.
Fig. 1. Interior of potter's house.
'■■■ ■ .rji
Fig. 2. Woman burning pottery.
PLATE 11.
Christie: Pottkry Industry in San Nicolas.]
fPlIIL. JOURN. Sci., IX, D, No. 2.
Fig. 1. Peddler of pottery.
Fig. 2. Woman making pipes. The deep bowl on her left is for burning the pipes.
PLATE ill.
HISTORY OF THE SPANISH NORMAL SCHOOL FOR MEN
TEACHERS IN MANILA, 1865-1905*
By Andrew W. Cain
{From the Bureau of Education^ Manila, P. I.)
Four plates
CONTENTS
Introduction.
Preliminary Plans.
The Royal Decrees of 1863.
General plan of organization of the normal school.
Means of support.
The course of study.
Who were to be admitted as students.
Cost to pupils.
Interior regulations.
Certificates.
Responsibilities and privileges of graduates.
The Equipment of the Normal School.
The Founding of the Normal School, 1865.
Existing educational conditions.
The formal opening.
Early History of the Normal School.
Distribution of graduates.
Program of duties.
Outline of subjects in the course of study for elementary teachers.
Contemporary Comment.
Difficulties in the way.
Conditions confronting graduates.
Was the purpose of the school achieved.
Recollections of a graduate.
The Normal School is Elevated to the Grade of Superior.
Organization.
Support.
Curriculum.
Pensioners.
Regulations.
Teachers' examinations.
The Normal School Booth at the Exposition.
The Pedagogical Academy.
The First Pedagogical Contest in the Philippines.
The Normal School under the American Flag.
A statement to the patrons of the school.
A statement to the Philippine Commission.
The creation of the Department of Public Instruction.
A request for authority to continue the normal school.
The withdrawal of financial support and final closing of the normal
school.
Graduates of the Normal School from 1866 to 1905.
Bibliography.
*A thesis written to satisfy, in part, the requirements for the degree of
master of arts in the University of the Philippines.
123
124 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
INTRODUCTION
This study was undertaken for the purpose of determining
the extent to which the Spanish Government in the Philippine
Islands provided for the professional training of its public-school
teachers. It will be noted that prior to the promulgation of
the royal decrees of 1863 there was nothing in the Philippines
that could be termed public education. Previous royal orders
regarding education had been issued from time to time, but as no
provisions were made for putting these orders into effect they
all came to naught.
When educational reform was finally inaugurated in 1863, and
thereafter, the work was carried on largely through the Jesuits.
The Jesuits have a well-established reputation as a teaching
order. After an exile of nearly a century, they were permitted
to return to the Philippines in 1852 upon the conditions that their
missionary fields be limited and that they devote a part of their
time to the spread of education. The Jesuits gave Spain that
assistance which made possible the founding of a system of public
education in the Philippines. The normal school was to be
at the head of this proposed system of instruction. When
the plan for the establishment of the normal school was finally
completed, the school was given over to the Jesuits to be adminis-
tered as they thought proper. The part of the Government in the
undertaking was merely to pay the expenses.
This article is based largely upon original documents which
heretofore have not been published or translated into English.
Lack of space forbids my mentioning the names of many to
whom I am under obligations for assistance. Especial thanks
are due Father Marcial Sola, prefect of studies in the Ateneo
de Manila, for placing at my disposal the archives of the Ateneo ;
Father Miguel Marti, secretary of the Central Seminary of
St. Xavier, for courtesies extended in allowing me to examine the
registers and libraries of that institution; and finally to Mr.
Alexander E. W. Salt, instructor in history in the University of
the Philippines, for advice, helpful suggestions, and assistance
rendered throughout the preparation of this paper.
PRELIMINARY PLANS
On February 7, 1855, Don Manuel Crespo y Cebrian, governor-
general of the Philippine Islands (1854-1856), appointed a
commission to draft a set of resolutions for the schools of the
Philippines, in compliance with the royal order of November
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 125
3, 1839. This commission was given the following instructions
for guidance in its deliberations, and empowered :
1. To draft a course of study for the schools of both sexes, paying parti-
cular attention to the teaching of the Spanish language; and to provide
for uniform teaching in the schools.
2. To determine the number of men and women teachers necessary for
the service of the public schools, and to estimate the amount of revenue
required for their support.
3. To report upon the necessity of a normal school, the advantages to be
derived therefrom, the advisability of undertaking the establishment of such
a school, and to draft a plan for a school from which trained teachers
suitable for teaching in the provinces might graduate.
This commission held but few meetings, and accomplished
but little during the first five years of its existence. Governor-
General Ramon Maria Solano y Llanderal (1860), moved by
the tardiness of the commission, delegated an official from the
office of the executive secretary to draw up a plan for reform
along lines similar to those intrusted to the commission. Within
two weeks, this official had completed the work assigned him,
and his promptness had the effect of spurring on the commission
to the completion of its task.
The principal point of debate during the sessions of the
commission was the teaching of Spanish. The opposition was
led by Father Francisco Gainza, vice-rector of the University
of Santo Tomas, one of the most active and influential members
of the commission.^ His chief argument against the teaching
of Spanish was that if there was a uniform language in the
Philippines the door would be opened to Protestantism. It
was also pointed out by him that Russia and Prussia were
unable to force their respective languages on unhappy Poland,
and their failures were held up as examples and warnings
to Spain. The opponents of Spanish acted also from political
considerations. They hoped that by keeping alive and in op-
position the several language groups, they would isolate the
many separate sources of insurrection. The commission finally
voted to make Spanish obligatory.
A report was rendered in 1861, nearly six years after the
appointment of the commission,^ and two years later the Madrid
officials promulgated the famous royal decrees, which were
by far the most significant legislation ever produced by the
^ See No. 24 of the bibliography.
' For reports of other commissions and individuals, see Nos. 10 and 32
of the bibliography.
126 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Spanish Government for the cause of public education in the
Philippines.
THE ROYAL DECREES OF 1863
The royal decrees, promulgated by Queen Isabela II on
December 20, 1863, were the foundation of the system of state
education in the Philippines.^ A resume of those decrees which
relate to the Spanish Normal School for men teachers is given
in this chapter, as they form the basic legislation upon which
the school rested, and throw light upon its subsequent history.
In the opening article we read :
A normal school for primary teachers is to he established in the city of
Manila^ in charge of and under the direction of the fathers of the Society
of Jesus. The normal school is to serve as a seminary for religious,
obedient, and trained teachers for the management of schools of primary
instruction for the natives throughout the whole Archipelago.
GENERAL PLAN OF ORGANIZATION OF THE NORMAL SCHOOL
The decrees provided for a director, at least four teachers,
such brother coadjutors as might be necessary, one porter,
and indispensable subordinates.
The director was to be the official superior, and was to exercise
authority over all the teachers, employees, and students of the
school. He was to plan the education and direct the training
of students, to preside at all literary ceremonies, to visit the
rooms, to preserve discipline, to correct any infringement of
rules, and, when necessary, to expel pupils.
Of the four or more teachers, one was to be spiritual adviser,
teacher of sacred history, morals, and religion, and was to
preside at all religious ceremonies. Another was to be prefect
of manners, to accompany students in their walks, and to attend
to the general ceremonies incident to the interior life of the
institution. The remaining teachers were to handle the other
subjects of the curriculum.
MEANS OF SUPPORT
The royal decrees provided that the normal school should
be supported out of the central treasury of ways and means,
but as the latter was subsequently suppressed the normal school
was thereafter supported by a charge upon the local funds.*
^ See No. 14 in the bibliography.
* For an estimate of the amount of money necessary for the support of
the normal school, see page 150. For an account of the final withdrawal
of Government support, see page 166.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 127
THE COURSE OF STUDY
During the first four years after the opening of the normal
school, the course of study was to cover a period of two years.
Thereafter, the time was to be increased to three years. For
the purpose of perfecting their studies, graduates were to be
permitted to return to the school for a year of postgraduate work,
in case this did not interfere with the work of the undergraduate
students.
The decrees provided that the course of study should comprise
the following subjects: Reading, writing, arithmetic, music, rules
of courtesy, religion, morals, sacred history, Spanish geography
and history, practical agriculture, physical and natural science,
geometry, the Spanish language, and the elements of pedagogy.
The director of the normal school was to select a list of books
for use in the school. Upon the approval of the superior civil
government, these were to become the textbooks of pupils and
were to be used as the basis of the explanations given in the
schools. When necessary, these texts were to be revised in
such a way as better to meet educational conditions.
In the same locality as the normal school, but separated
therefrom, was to be a primary school composed of nonresident
boys. This was to be under the supervision of a teacher of
the normal school, and was to be used as a training school
for the students. As a requisite for graduation, each student
was to be required to do at least six months of practice teaching.^
Provision was made for a private examination at the end
of each month in each of the classes of the normal school and
also for an examination at the close of the first semester, cover-
ing all of the subjects studied up to that time. As a reward
for deportment, application, and progress, as well as a mark
of punishment for bad manners, laziness, and a lack of interest,
the ratings of all pupils were to be read monthly in the presence
of the students, the instructors, and the director. At the close
of each year, public examinations were to be held in the presence
of the government officials and other distinguished persons
of the capital. At the close of the examinations, the results
were to be announced and prizes were to be awarded.
WHO WERE TO BE ADMITTED AS STUDENTS
The decrees provided for regular resident students, who were
to be selected from the several provinces in proportion to the
° For a description of the manner in which the practice school was con-
ducted, see pages 147 to 149.
128 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
population, the total number to be determined by the superior
civil government, and for a limited number of day students, who
were to come from reputable families living in the capital or
in neighboring provinces and to be under the immediate care
of parents or guardians who would guarantee that the stu-
dents would complete their course and become an honor to the
institution.
The following were to be the requisite qualifications for
entering the normal school. The prospective student was
required: (1) To be a native of the Spanish dominions; (2) to
be 16 years of age;^ (3) to be free from contagious diseases and
of sufficient health to enable him to fulfill his duties as a teacher ;
(4) to possess certificates of good conduct; and (5) to be able
to speak the Spanish language, to know the Christian doctrine,
and to be able to read and write well.
COST TO PUPILS
The regular resident pupils, who were to be selected by the
council of the superior civil government, were to receive free
support, medical treatment, school equipment, and tuition, but
were to be required to furnish their own clothing.'^ The
supernumerary resident students — that is, those students not
selected by the government — were to pay 8 pesos per month
for board. In 1866 this amount was raised to 10 pesos per
month, in 1870 it was fixed at so much for each study pursued,
and at a still later date the price was raised to 140 pesos a
year.
Each student was required to provide himself with certain
specified articles of clothing. The total annual cost of his
clothing was reckoned at 40 pesos.
After leaving the normal school, the regular resident students
were required to serve the state for a period of ten years as
teachers in the public primary schools.
INTERIOR REGULATIONS
The royal decrees provided further that "special regulations
shall detail minutely the organization of the normal school." ^
• The minimum age limit was later reduced to thirteen.
' The government pensioners received an allowance of 10 pesos a month.
From this amount they paid a part or all of their expenses.
* The most important of these regulations are given on page 151 et seq.
The students' daily program of duties is given on page 136. For the details
of the student's conduct in and about the building, see No. 26 of the
bibliography.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 129
The decrees set aside the following holidays for the school:
Sundays, feast days, Ash Wednesday, All Saints' Day, the birth-
day anniversaries of the Spanish sovereigns, the day of the
patron saint of the superior civil governor, twelve consecutive
days beginning from Christmas eve, the three days preceding
Lent and those from Holy Wednesday until Easter Sunday.
The students were not to leave the institution during any of
these days. It was provided that there should be a long vacation
of one and one-half months during the period of greatest heat.
By a later decree, the vacation period was made to include
the months of April and May.
Regarding punishments, the decrees ran as follows:
The punishments shall be public censure, deprivation of recreation
and walks, banishment and separation from the other students, and if
these are not sufficient the definitive punishment shall be expulsion from
the school. Expulsion shall take place because of any contagious disease,
for notable laziness and lack of application, for serious lack of respect to
the teachers, and for bad conduct or depraved morals.
CERTIFICATES
It was provided in the decrees that students of the normal
school who successfully completed all the work of the three-year
course and passed the prescribed examination with a rating
of "excellent'' were to receive certificates showing their attain-
ments ^ and were to be regarded as eligible to teach in the
intermediate schools. Those who completed the work in like
manner and passed the examination with a rating of "good"
or "fair" were to receive certificates indicating their fitness
to teach in the primary schools. Students who completed all
of the work but failed of promotion on account of low ratings
in the examination were to be offered employment as assistant
teachers.
RESPONSIBILITIES AND PRIVILEGES OF GRADUATES
Regular resident students who received the benefits of the
normal school were to teach in the public school for ten years
at stations to which they might be assigned by the superior
civil government. Those who left the school of their own
accord or were taken from the school by their parents, as well
as those who were expelled for lack of application or for bad
conduct, were required to repay to the state the amount expended
on their education.
The teachers appointed from the normal school were not to
^ Facsimiles of certificates are given in the plates.
130 "^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
be discharged except for legitimate cause and by resolution of
the superior civil governor, after hearing the interested party.
The causes for which an action might be brought were faults
of religion, public or private immorality, lack of zeal in the
fulfillment of duty, and abandonment of the Spanish language
in the explanations or in the ceremonies of the school.
Teachers and assistants were to be exempt from personal
service as long as they discharged their duties as teachers, and
even after they ceased to perform these duties, provided they
had been in the teaching service for fifteen years.
After five years of service for teachers and ten years for
assistants, these persons were to become principales^^
It was provided that teachers who were disabled in the
discharge of their professional duties were to receive a pension,
subject to certain restrictions. The same rule was to apply to
those who reached the age of 60 in the teaching service. After
twenty years of service, all teachers were to receive a pension
equivalent to half the retiring salary. After thirty-five years'
service, the pension was to be three-fourths of the retiring
salary.
Teachers and assistants with certificates were to be preferred
for appointment to various government positions after ten and
fifteen years' service, respectively. No examination or other
test of fitness was to be required.
In addition to their regular salaries, teachers were to receive
quarters for themselves and their families and fees paid by
wealthy pupils.
THE EQUIPMENT OF THE NORMAL SCHOOL
A list of the equipment provided for the normal school throws
light upon the life of the student body, the kind of instruction
given, and the size and importance of the institution. Moreover,
it emphasizes the fact that the Spanish Normal School, like nearly
all of the other schools of the Philippines during this period, was
a combination of school, dormitory, and chapel. The following
is a list of the equipment with which the school was provided on
July 1,1866:^^
Reception hall. — Three sofas, 3 armchairs, 12 black chairs, 12 small
chairs, 2 small tables, 1 image of the Virgin of the Immaculate Conception
with bell, 1 picture.
'"The important people of the town. They enjoyed' social distinction,
and had a limited share in the administration of tlie government.
" See No. 9 of the bibliography.
IX. D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 131
Class rooms. — Sixteen writing tables with 16 railings, 4 extra tables, 1
small revolving table, 2 tables with low benches, 2 easy-chairs for the
teachers, 1 large blackboard mounted on 2 supports, 4 easels, inkwells,
blotting paper, pens, ink, chalk, and sponge.
Study hall. — Five large double tables, 5 dozen American chairs, 4 lamps,
maps with chains and frames, pictures, charts, and 1 wall clock.
Gymnasium and baths. — One trapeze, 2 ninepin sets, 6 large and 4 small
earthen jars, and bath towels.
Chapel and sacristy. — One box for ornaments, 1 cupboard for the sac-
risty, 2 confessional boxes, 1 crucifix, 1 laver, 6 coverings for the altar
together with 6 sets of small cloths, 1 tabernacle, 6 small brass candle-
sticks, 2 gilded candlesticks, 1 chalice, lamps, vinegar cruet, carpets, wax
tapers, and holy-water basin.
Students' dormitories. — Fifty iron bedsteads, 50 beds, canvas, thread, rope,
60 narra screens, 18 pieces of rough dimity, 50 chests and small cupboards
for the rooms, 20 pieces of coconut fiber for curtains, 45 commodes, and 17
dozen towels.
Rooms of director, fathers, and lay brothers. — Five bedsteads, 5 mos-
quito nets, 2 large tables, 2 small tables, 24 chairs, 7 washstands, 7 shoe
boxes, 4 writing desks, 6 easy-chairs, 6 commodes, and 3 cupboards.
Dining room. — Six large tables, 2 dozen chairs, 2 couches, 12 benches, 3
cupboards, 12 dozen plates, 8 dozen pieces of a dinner service, 8 large
spoons, 24 dozen serviettes, 8 dozen glasses, 8 dozen cups, 6 pepper shakers,
5 coffee sets, 20 water bottles, 5 servers, 8 soup tureens, 8 preserve dishes,
and table linen and oilcloth covers.
Kitchen. — One cooking range complete for more than 100 persons, 1
heater, 17 saucepans, 1 colander, 5 baking pans, 2 stewpans, 1 funnel,
2 coppers, 4 knives, 2 cleaners, 3 ladles, 3 skimmers, 2 heaters, 12 jars,
and 30 dishes.
Hospital. — One cupboard with glass doors, 1 large table with 10 drawers,
2 armchairs with stands, and 1 complete medicine chest.
Servants' room. — Eight bamboo beds, 8 pillows, 8 petates, 12 coverings,
4 small tables, 2 benches, 2 pairs of tongs, 2 zinc baskets, 2 benches, 6
clay filters, 2 large saucepans, 6 small tables, 8 baking pans, 8 frying
pans, 2 coffee pots, 2 milk jugs, 2 small basins and beaters, 1 bread grater,
2 sieves, 1 lantern, 3 cupboards.
Miscellaneous equipment. — Altar, cross, chalice, eucharist set, missal,
incense, bread, wine, rochets, 3 wardrobes, 2 bookcases, pictures for the
corridors, 1 clock, 40 flower pots, 9 bulletin boards, 6 curtains, 14 table
lamps, 4 copper candlesticks, 8 benches, brooms, and feather dusters.
The equipment was at this time valued at 6,000 Spanish pesos.
THE FOUNDING OF THE NORMAL SCHOOL, 1865
EXISTING EDUCATIONAL CONDITIONS
At the time of the founding of the normal school, primary
instruction was exceedingly meager. In most schools there was
no teaching except that of reading and writing, and in many
not even the latter. There were very few that gave even the
most elementary work in arithmetic, and fewer still that taught
126083 3
132 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
the rudiments of geography and history. Religious instruction
was superficial and flimsy, amounting to a mere repetition of
the catechism, and there was absolutely nothing taught in the
way of morals and manners.
No other state of affairs could be possible, as any one who
desired to teach was permitted to do so, even if he were prompted
only by the most audacious ignorance : teachers were often found
who could barely read and write.^^
To remedy this condition of affairs, the government proposed
to establish a normal school, and created a board composed of
some of the most respectable and competent men in Manila
to study conscientiously and in detail the manner and method
of instituting primary teaching. This board, after six months
of careful investigation and frequent discussion, submitted a
favorable report, setting forth a plan of elementary education
for the natives, to be conducted under the auspices of the normal
school. It was not the purpose of the board to provide a high
academic education which would not be necessary for the
teachers, but rather to provide an ordinary, elementary training,
suitable for the class of individuals for whom it was intended,
and at the same time to make the training adequate for those who
might afterward enter commercial life or take higher academic
work.
THE FORMAL OPENING
As we have already seen, the organization and management
of the normal school was intrusted to the fathers of the Society
of Jesus. Those who were to take charge of the school arrived
in the Islands late in June, 1864, having embarked at Cadiz,
Spain.13
After resting for a few days, these priests prepared for the
opening of the normal school in a building located on Calle
Palacio in the Walled City, Manila. The inauguration and open-
ing exercises of the school were held on January 23, 1865, the
Governor-General, Rafael de Echague of Biemingham (1862-
1865), presiding. Attending this function were the members
of the Superior Commission of Primary Instruction and many
other noted guests, all of whom showed their pleasure at being
present at the inauguration of the first normal school in the
Philippine Islands.
'' See No. 27 of the bibliography.
" Historla de la Escuela Normal de Manila, a ten-page MS. in the Ateneo.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 133
On the following day, Father Francisco Xavier was appointed
director of the school, the priests Jacinto Juanmarti and Pedro
Lacasas were appointed teachers, Gabriel Pujol and Segis-
mundo Berengueras taking charge of the domestic arrangements.
Classes were opened, and a number of pupils were matriculated.
On December 3 of the same year, the great apostle of the Indies,
San Francisco Xavier,^* was declared patron of the school.
EARLY HISTORY OF THE NORMAL SCHOOL
The first public examinations and the distribution of prizes
took place about the middle of January, 1866. These examina-
tions were presided over and prizes were awarded by the superior
commission of instruction, and were attended by persons of
religious distinction.
During the second year the attendance increased to such
an extent that additional teaching facilities had to be provided.
The course of study was also better organized, and the pupils
were required to pursue the various subjects in accordance with
the regulations.
In April and May the apartments on the ground floor of
the building were rearranged, in order that the practice school
of primary instruction provided for in the decrees might be
established. This department was maintained as a model school
for the benefit of third-year students in the normal school
proper. The classes in the training department were composed
of pupils ranging in age from 6 to 12 years and residing in
the vicinity of the school. The instruction included all the
subjects of a primary education, special attention and time being
given to the teaching of Spanish.
On the morning of December 3, the anniversary of the
patron saint of the school, solemn mass was held in the chapel.
The afternoon of the same day the hall was beautifully decorated
with little colored lanterns and the pupils sought relaxation
in a comedy and in a variety of games, accompanied by the
orchestra.
The pupils were not without spiritual instruction and admoni-
tion. They had daily exercises and instruction in offerings,
masses, spiritual lectures, and rosary, and were taught to confess
and receive the sacrament once a month.
" The name of Father Francisco Xavier, the first director of the normal
school should not be confused with that of San Francisco Xavier (1497-
1552), the apostle of the Indies.
134 T^h^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
The final examinations were held and prizes distributed
December 19 to 21, 1866. On this occasion, 14 pupils, who had
completed two full years' work, were granted the title of teacher
of primary instruction. This was the first class to graduate
from the normal school.
In April, 1867, the first examinations were held in the training
department, the pupils who had distinguished themselves in
studies and conduct being awarded prizes consisting of books
and medals.
In December of this year the general examinations for the
pupils in professional courses were held, and 25 students received
the title of teacher.
Early in 1868 the director and teachers formerly chosen
were assigned to other duties in the mission, and Father Alejan-
dro Zans was appointed director. Fathers Pascual Barrado,
Jose Casadovale, and Santiago Buntas were appointed teachers.
The number of pupils having increased, it was found necessary
to provide for 20 additional boarders.
At the end of the school year examinations were held and
27 students were granted certificates of graduation.
By the superior decree of March 22, 1869, the date for the
opening of the school year was changed from January to June,
for the greater convenience of pupils and teachers. During
this year 127 students were registered and 29 received the
title of teacher.
The year 1870 was uneventful except that the personnel of the
administrative and teaching staff was increased to 8 — 4 priests,
2 brothers, and 2 student assistants. A class of 39 students was
graduated.
In 1871 news came from Madrid of the publication of the
Moret decree transferring the charge of the normal school to
the secular clergy. This order was received in the Philippines
with great dissatisfaction by those who had been intrusted with
the work of the normal school. On the other hand, there were
those who welcomed the change, as they believed it signified
greater progress. Arrangements were finally made for the
withdrawal of the decree before the end of the year.
As the school year drew toward a close, examinations were
held in the two grades of the training department and in all
classes of the normal school. The director and other government
officials were well pleased with the results of the examinations.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 135
and on April 5 prizes were awarded and diplomas issued to
39 graduates.
At the opening of the school year in June 125 new pupils
were admitted and a considerable number turned away for lack
of accommodations.
Two material changes in the internal regulations of the school
were effected at this time. The first of these prescribed the
time and fnanner of making confessions by both boarders and
day pupils. The other pertained to the inspection of the
students in the evening. A priest was placed on duty as door-
keeper, and the passing in and out of the building after supper
was thus regulated.
The feast of San Francisco Xavier was celebrated with especial
joy. A comedy was given, two balloons were let go, and the
sky was brilliantly illuminated with hundreds of rockets.
In 1872 occurred the famous Cavite revolt, but the authorities
of the normal school were pleased to note that this did not
have any apparent effect upon the student body.
In 1874 the superior civil government of the Philippines
decreed that no petition for admission to the normal school
should be sent except through a provincial governor. During
the same year other decrees were issued fixing the number of
resident pupils.
On June 22, 1880, a royal order of the ministry of the colonies
set aside a permanent sum of money to be assigned in the
budget for the maintenance of the school. It was during the
same year that the building was destroyed by an earthquake.
The classes were for a few days accommodated at the Ateneo,
being held in hallways, corridors, and every other available
space large enough for a recitation. As it was impossible to
continue this arrangement for a long period and as no other
house sufficiently large could be found, the mission of the
company of Jesuits rented to the government for the use of
the school a building which it possessed in the neighboring
pueblo of Santa Ana. This was occupied by the school for a
period of six years. Meanwhile, seeing that no other means
were forthcoming for giving this school a suitably large building
and as the house at Santa Ana was inconveniently located, the
mission resolved to take under its care the enterprise of erecting
and equipping a new building. This structure, situated in the
district of Ermita, was the home of the normal school from
1886 until the institution finally closed its doors.
136
The Philippine Journal of Science
DISTRIBUTION OF GRADUATES
The following table shows the places of residence of the
graduates of the normal school from 1865 to 1887.
Peninsula teachers
Abra
Albay
Antique
Basilan
Bataan .\
Batanes
Batangas
Bohol
Bulacan
Cagayan
Calamianes
Camarines
Capiz
Cavite
Cebu
Cotabato
Ilocos Norte
Ilocos Sur
Iloilo
Infanta
Isabela
8
4
12
4
1
9
3
77
20
84
23
2
14
40
31
23
1
45
42
38
1
9
Laguna
Leyte
Manila
Mariano (Guam).
Masbate
Mindoro
Misamis
Morong
Negros
Nueva Ecija
Nueva Vizcaya ...
Pampanga
Pangasinan
Romblon
Samar
Surigao
Tarlac
Tayabas
Union
Zambales
Zamboanga
43
20
230
2
2
14
9
8
3
8
14
54
48
7
18
11
4
27
42
14
7
Total 1,076
PROGRAM OF DUTIES
The distribution of the time of resident students was as
follows ;
a. m.
p. m.
5.00 Rise.
12.30 Lunch, recess.
5.30 Mass.
1.45 Rest.
6.00 Bath, study.
2.15 Study.
6.55 Breakfast, recess.
2.45 Recess.
7.25 Recitations.
2.55 Recitations.
10.00 Recess.
5.00 Go out from the classes.
10.10 Drawing, music.
6.00 Rosary and spiritual lecture.
11.10 Study.
6.30 Study.
Tk
8.15 Supper, rest.
9.00 Inspection, retiring.
OUTLINE OF SUBJECTS IN THE COURSE OF STUDY FOR ELEMENTARY TEACHERS
The following is an amplification of the principal subjects
in the course of study for elementary teachers, and is also the
outline upon which the competitive examinations of teachers
were based.^^
" For an outline of the subjects required for the degree of superior
teacher, see No. 5 in the bibliography.
IX. D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 137
RELIGION AND MORALS
1. What is religion and in how many ways can it be considered? What
is the natural and what is the true one?
2. Who is God and what are his principal attributes? Why do we say
that God is eternal, omnipotent, immense, spiritual, wise, good, kind, and
just?
3. What is man? What is the human body? What is the soul and
what is the difference between the body and the soul?
4. Of what does the true religion consist? What is worship and in how
many ways is it exercised? What is internal worship? Is the internal
worship sufficient?
5. What is morality and how is it divided? What is duty? What are
good or meritorious actions? What are bad actions?
6. What is meant by moral order and what are its properties? What
are laws, natural law, divine law? Civil law?
7. What are punishments and what are rewards? What are natural
rewards, positive rewards? Positive punishment?
8. What is conscience? Virtue? Vice? What is the immediate conse-
quence of virtue and what is that of vice? Of what does happiness in
this and in the other life consist?
9. What duties have men to God and what is the greatest of them all?
How is a knowledge of our duty to God conceived?
10. What duties has man to himself? How should man take care of
his soul and his body?
11. Is man compelled to work? What is idleness and what bad effects
does it bring?
12. What is suicide? Is suicide licit? What is fame? Can we be in-
different to the acquiring of fame?
13. What duties has man to his equals? How can we contribute to the
conservation of our equals?
14. What are the chief duties of children to their parents? After the
parents who has the preference? To whom do we owe respect and sub-
mission?
15. What duties have the parents to their children? Duties of teachers
to their pupils and of the pupils to their teachers. Mutual duties between
masters and servants.
16. What is homicide? Is it licit? Do all the duties that we have
to our equals require equal accomplishment?
1. Definition and division of pedagogy. Education and its object.
2. Importance and necessity. Parts that it comprises. Its agents.
3. Difference between education and instruction. Principles of education.
4. Physical education. Importance of air, light, ventilation, clothes, and
exercise in physical education.
5. Physical education in the schools. Cleanliness in the school. Other
matters of sanitation that require attention.
6. The teacher as a model of cleanliness. How will he inculcate clean-
liness in the children? Care of the teacher with respect to air and light
in school and with respect to sick children.
7. Necessity of varying the school exercises. Care that the teacher
ought to exercise in order that the children may avoid undesirable places.
138 The Philippine Journal of Science i^u
8. Intellectual education. Of what does it consist? What is perception
and how is it developed?
9. Attention. Importance of this faculty and way of awakening it in
the children. How is it sustained and how cultivated?
10. Memory. What is it? How make it strong and active?
11. What is the use of imagination? What contributes to its develop-
ment and what things tend to mislead it?
12. Judgment. What is the importance of this faculty? What exer-
cises contribute to develop it?
13. Esthetic education. Esthetic sentiments.
14. What does a moral education include? What should the teacher do
in order that the children may receive a good moral education?
15. How is religious education inculcated? Fear of God. Obedience to
his commandments. Means of religious education.
16. Instruction. Purpose, means, and object of teaching.
17. What are methods of teaching? Explain the most important of
these.
18. Teaching of the Christian doctrine. Sacred and moral history.
19. Teaching of reading and grades that it comprises. General proce-
dure in this subject.
20. Teaching of writing. Its object. To what is this teaching reduced?
Correction of exercises.
21. Teaching arithmetic. Verbal and written exercises.
22. Teaching of Spanish language. Its object and importance. Teach-
ing of Spanish where another language is spoken.
23. Systems of teaching; advantages and inconveniences that each offers.
24. Organizations of the schools according to the existing legislation.
25. What is discipline? Its base. Prizes and punishments. Discretion
and judgment ought to be used.
SPANISH GRAMMAR
1. Definition of grammar; its division; object of each.
2. Names of the parts of speech. The noun and its various divisions.
3. The adjective and its division. Difference between the noun and the
adjective and rule for distinguishing them.
4. Number of nouns. How is the plural formed from the singular.
Gender and its division.
5. Declension. Use of each of the cases.
6. The pronoun, its various classes, declension, use.
7. The article, its division, declension, use, and way of distinguishing it
from the pronoun in the third person.
8. The verb, its division and accidents in grammar.
9. Moods of the verbs, tenses, ways of distinguishing them and of form-
ing them. Voice and conjugation.
10. Regular and irregular verbs, impersonal and defective. Conjuga-
tion of the most common.
11. The participle and its divisions. The way of distinguishing it from
the adjective. The verb and its various classes. Adverbial moods.
12. The conjunction. Its various classes. Figures of diction.
13. Syntax and its divisions. Concord and its various classes.
14. The cases of the noun and the rules for each case.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 139
15. The use of the transitive verb, of the preposition, and of the conjunc-
tion.
16. What is the accusative construction? The nominative? The rela-
tion of each to the verb.
17. Construction after the accusative. Construction of the verbs with
the pronouns.
18. The grammatical sentence and its various classes. Of what parts
is each made?
19. Syntax. Figures of speech. How many are there and of what does
each consist.
20. Prosody. Prosodial accent. Syllabication, diphthongs, triphthongs,
words accented on the last syllable, on the antepenult, or on the penult.
21. Rules of accents.
22. Orthography and its parts. Principles that will be used as standards
of good orthography with respect to the use of the letters. Spanish alphabet
and classification of the letters forming it.
23. Use of the letters b and v. Also of g, j, y, x, and h.
24. Use of i, y, and of m. Duplications of the letters. Use of the
capital letters. Punctuation and its signs. Cases in which the use of the
comma is common.
25. Use of the period and of the other signs used in orthography. Also
of the Roman numbers.
ARITHMETIC
1. Arithmetic, number, amount, and unit.
2. Entire numbers, fractions, mixed, abstract and concrete, homogeneous
and heterogeneous numbers.
3. Numeration and its division into oral and written. Base of a system
of numeration, and when is it called decimal? Units of first order, of second
order, etc.
4. Different orders of units in the decimal numeration.
5. Absolute and relative value of the cyphers. Modes of writing and
reading entire numbers.
6. Addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division. Different names
of the signs. The use of these in arithmetical operations.
7. Numbers that can be divided. Even and odd numbers. Prime num-
bers, numbers divisible by 2, 3, 5.
8. Decimal metric system. How is it distinguished from other systems.
Models used to express the multiples and divisions of the unit and way
of verifying them.
9. Unit of length, its multiples and divisors. Units of surface, their mul-
tiples and divisors and what relation each bears to the immediate higher
denomination.
10. Usual unit of volume and relation it bears to its divisors. Usual
unit of capacity, its multiples and divisors. Units of weight, their multiples
and divisors.
11. Fractions. Numerator, denominator, proper fractions, improper frac-
tions, way of writing them and reading them. How to reduce a mixed
number to a fraction.
12. Simplification of the fractions, reduction of the same to a common
denominator and way of valuing them.
13. Addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of fractions.
14. Decimal fractions. Nomenclature of the decimal units, place they
140 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
occupy. Way of reading them and writing them. When are they called
homogeneous?
15. Addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of decimal numbers.
16. Approximation of the quotient in an inexact division. Reduction of
ordinary fractions to decimal and from decimal to ordinary fractions.
17. Complex and simple numbers. Reduction of a complex number to
the simple form. Reduction. Way of making this reduction in the decimal
metric system. Reduction from a superior species to another and inter-
mediate.
18. Addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division of complex numbers.
19. Powers of numbers, roots, exponents. Way of indicating a power.
Names that the powers receive and how to form them.
20. Square root. Cube root. Way of indicating the extraction of roots.
Way of finding the square root of an entire number, of a decimal number.
21. Ratio of numbers, ways of indicating it. Proportion and its funda-
mental property. Way of finding one of the means.
22. Rule of three and its division. Way of solving it. When is it simple
and when is it compound?
23. Partnership. Three cases that may occur and way of solving them.
24. Rule of alligation. Mode of solving it. When is it direct and when
inverse? Interest, how to solve interest when simple and when compound.
25. Drafts. Different ways of negotiating them. How to find the real
value and the nominal value. Discount of a draft and how to find it.
PRINCIPLES OF GEOGRAPHY AND HISTORY OF SPAIN
1. Geography: Its divisions. Astronomical geography, heavenly bodies,
fixed and errant stars or planets.
2. Primary planets. What are they? Their double movement. Satel-
lites. Comets. Solar system and that of Copernicus.
3. The sun. Its diameter, volume, and distance from the earth. The
moon. Its diameter, volume, and distance from the earth.
4. The earth, its movements. Meridians, equator, tropics, polar circles,
and various zones. Horizon. Cardinal points.
5. Physical geography. Figure and dimensions of the earth. Continent,
island, peninsula, coast, cape, isthmus, mountain, mountain range, desert.
6. Spring, rivulet, river, torrent, lake, sea, gulf, bay, strait, currents,
tides.
7. Atmosphere and elements that constitute it. Meteors. Winds, clouds,
rain, lightning, thunder.
8. Political geography. Great divisions of the earth. Races of human
species. Government and its principal forms.
9. Europe, its population and location, seas that bound it, its capes, moun-
tains, volcanoes, rivers, islands, and principal straits.
10. Political divisions of Europe. States of the north and their respective
capitals.
11. States in central and southern parts of Europe and their respective
capitals.
12. Spain. Its population, its boundaries, climate, capes, mountain
ranges, and main rivers.
13. Territorial divisions of Spain. Capital of the monarchy. Ultrama-
rine possessions and population.
14. Population, extension, and location of the Philippine Islands. Moun-
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 141
tain ranges, rivers, lakes, and more important straits. Territorial divi-
sions. Location and capital of each of the provinces.
15. Asia, its population, location, straits, rivers, and principal mountains.
Political divisions and capital of each one of its states.
16. Location and population of Africa. Seas that bound its coasts and
large rivers. Political divisions and capital of each one of the states.
17. Location and population of America. Its mountain ranges and large
rivers. Political divisions and capitals of its states.
18. To what is the name "Oceania" given? Climate of Oceania, its divi-
sion, and islands that form each one of the three great divisions.
19. History of Spain. What is it and into how many periods is it di-
vided? First occupants of Spain, Phoenicians, Greeks, and Carthaginians.
Purpose that they had in entering Spain.
20. Who were the Romans? Divisions they made of Spain. Resistance
of the Spaniards and their glorious deeds.
21. Barbarians of the north who settled in Spain. Kings of that period
who are of greatest historical interest.
22. Arabian Spain. Who were the Arabs? Struggle of the Arabs with
the Christians. Who was the illustrious Caliph who was a warrior and
was feared by the Christians? Who conquered him and what memorable
event took place later?
23. Progress of the small monarchy of Peloyas and his brilliant victories.
Kings of greater historical importance in this period.
24. The house of Austria. Origin of this dynasty. Kings of this dy-
nasty and their notable deeds.
25. House of Bourbon. Origin of this dynasty. Kings of this dynasty
and their principal deeds.
PRINCIPLES OF GEOMETRY
1. Object of geometry, divisions of the subjects, kinds of figures.
2. Straight line, curved, broken, mixed.
3. Circumference, radius, diameter, arc, cord, secant, tangent.
4. Degrees in which the circumference can be divided and subdivisions
of these.
5. Angles, right, acute, and obtuse.
6. Adjacent angles and value of both angles.
7. Perpendicular, oblique, and parallel lines.
8. Divisions of the triangle because of its sides or angles.
9. Vertex, base, and altitude of a triangle. Value of angles of a tri-
angle.
10. What is a quadrilateral? How are quadrilaterals divided?
11. Parallelogram. In how many ways can it be placed?
12. The polygon and the different value it has according to the number of
its sides.
13. The circle, ring, sector.
14. Inscribed and circumscribed polygon.
15. Way of describing a circumference or drawing any triangle or regular
polygon.
16. Way of inscribing a regular hexagon in the circumference.
17. Method of finding the area of a parallelogram, triangle, square, and
trapezium.
18. How is the area of a regular polygon found, of an irregular polygon,
of a circle, of a circular sector?
142 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science isu
19. The more important equivalents of the plane figures.
20. Polyhedron, intersections, dihedral and polyhedral angles. Regular
and irregular polyhedrons.
21. How many and what are round bodies? How are they originated?
22. Volume of geometrical body and unit of volume.
23. Way of finding the volume of a pyramid, of a prism, and of a;
rectangular parallelogram.
24. How is the volume of the regular polyhedron, of the cylinder, and of
the sphere found?
25. Relation between two spheres of different radii.
NATURAL SCIENCE
1. Natural science and its division into physics, chemistry, and natural
history.
2. General properties of bodies.
3. Three states in which bodies can be found.
4. Movement and its different classes.
5. Anemometers and their use.
6. The barometer, its use, and the principle on which it is based.
7. The thermometer, its use, and the principle on which graduation is
based.
8. Instruments for measuring humidity, on what are they based, and
what are their uses? How is the electromotive force valued? How is it
named when it is of high pressure?
9. Light, how it is propagated, its velocity, and time required to pass
from the sun to us.
10. Reflection of the luminous rays, angles they form on falling on a
polished body. Refraction of the same.
11. Microscope, eyeglass, and telescope.
12. Lenses and especial property of the convex, of the concave. Who
uses the former? Who uses the latter?
13. Colors that a ray of the sun is composed of and how to decompose it.
14. Electricity. Its properties. How is it developed? Different ways of
developing it.
15. The magnets, the compass, and the electromagnet and their important
applications.
16. Simple and compound bodies. Metals and metaloids, properties of
the former and the latter.
17. Oxygen, hydrogen, and nitrogen and their principal properties.
18. Pure water and of what it is composed. The atmospheric fluid and
of what it is formed.
19. Minerals. How do they appear and into how many groups can they
be divided?
20. Vegetables. How do they appear, and of what are they composed?
Divisions.
21. Organs of nutrition and of reproduction of vegetables.
22. Functions of nutrition and functions of reproduction in the vegetable
kingdom.
23. Animals. How do they appear and of what are they composed?
24. Nutritive functions for the preservation of the animal.
25. Four great groups into which they are divided. Subdivisions of each
of them.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 143
ELEMENTARY AGRICULTURE
1. Agriculture, its object and divisions.
2. Purposes to which the agriculturist should aspire and conditions neces-
sary to his success.
3. Tillable soil, soil test, and means of improving the soil.
4. Climate for agriculture, its agents and composition of soil.
5. Improvements of the soil and how they are made.
6. How to prepare virgin soil for cultivation.
7. Fertilizer, its different classes and method of application.
8. Special advantages of mineral fertilizers. Plants that need chalk or
ashes.
9. Agricultural instruments, their division and the object of their use.
10. Object of agricultural labor, preparatory labor, and labor for cultiva-
tion.
11. Principal organs of the plant and parts of the flower.
12. Three ways of planting. Of what do they consist?
13. How many ways are there to water and how are they varied?
14. Time of harvesting and way of preserving the fruits.
15. Among the cereals, what is the richest fruit? How is it planted and
irrigated?
16. Two kinds of rice and way of cultivating and cleaning.
17. Planting of maize and cultivation of barley and buckwheat.
18. Cultivation of sugar cane and way of propagating the common
bamboo.
19. How are leguminous plants cultivated in the Philippine Islands?
20. Roots and tubercles used for food and how they are multiplied.
21. Preparation of tobacco seed-beds, how the plants are transplanted,
and way of harvesting.
22. Lawns. Plants that can form an artificial lawn.
23. Usefulness of animals to the farmer; work animals in the field and
their general characteristics.
CONTEMPORARY COMMENT
DIFFICULTIES IN THE WAY
The early years of the normal school were not without their
vicissitudes. The following were the most pronounced difficulties
that confronted the school :
A lack of competent teachers. — Father Luengo says: ''First
of all the normal school needs a sufficient and capable staff/' ^®
The Jesuit fathers, who had been previously banished from
the Islands, were allowed to return in 1852, upon the condition
that they devote their attention to higher education and to
the missionary fields of Mindanao. Great efforts were put
forth to extend the Christian faith to the new charge. A
zealous priest writing from Mindanao says:
By the mercy of God, the conquest of heathen people is continuing at
a tremendous rate, and I believe that, despite the lack of laborers, God is
" See No. 19 in the bibliography.
144 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
blessing our efforts so greatly that the day is not far distant when the com-
pany of Jesus will say to the Spanish Government: ''It is finished." To-day
there are many villages that we have settled with converted heathen where
we once reluctantly undertook the cure of souls."
This work drew away from the normal school every teacher
who could possibly be spared.
A lack of suitable textbooks in Spanish, — An observer voices
his complaint in these words:
Going along Calle Rosario on a holiday, we saw three book stalls which
we thought would be full of pious books. On stopping to examine them,
great was our surprise when at one alone we found 35 pamphlets and other
books of prose and verse, all in Tagalog. Not one of the three had a single
Spanish book. These books (that is, the books seen at the stalls) and cer-
tain novels, always in the local dialect, circulate through the villages after
twenty years of the most complete legislation as to primary education and
the diffusion of the official language.^^
It is evident that for these and other reasons the abandonment
of the normal school by the Jesuits was discussed, but it is equally
certain that there was an overwhelming sentiment against such
action. Father Francisco G. Martin Luengo, writing to Father
Juan Ricart from Surigao under date of January 25, 1881,
says:
We have seen the normal school sickening for several years for lack of
members of our own order who shall do their work ^perfectly and freely.
The question of abandonment was seriously considered at our conference in
Manila in 1877. In my opinion, it would be an irreparable mistake to give
up such an institution as the normal school, which is a strong and powerful
arm in protecting our power in these Islands. We ought to hold it more
strongly in order that it may not be torn from us, until the day comes when
we can place it in good hands, faithful to religion and to the throne of
Spain, zealous and able to defend our glory.
The same writer goes on to specify in detail why the normal
school should neither be abandoned to its fate nor turned over to
another religious order.
It would be to the great glory of God, the salvation of souls, and the
prosperity of the Spanish Crown in these Islands that it should continue
under our care, for through this means we shall advance the welfare of the
Islands, since well-trained teachers will be as apostles in their native villages.
We shall take our share in the spread of the Spanish language, whereby
new truths may be implanted in the souls of the people.
We shall secure a place on the education board of Manila, which will be
a great step toward advancement in the schools and will prevent certain
troubles which may harm them.
We shall obtain an influence in the villages, and we shall win the sym-
" Father Luengo.
^' See the document referred to in No. 27 of bibliography..
IX. D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 145
pathy of the people. Every schoolmaster who goes out will praise the
Jesuits, for which reason many persons, especially their relations, will seek
confession and discuss the affairs of the soul with the fathers of the society.
If the elementary schools are conducted by the third-year pupils of the
normal school, an immense good may be done. If possible, the school should
be situated in the outskirts of Manila. We should have far more children,
and our administration would have an open field.
Of the influence of the schoolmaster among the children in the provinces,
there can be no doubt, since they will be in accord with the teaching of the
fathers and the rule of the society.
Let us suppose that we transfer our school to others. Who will take
charge of it? Will they be religious? It is very doubtful. It is feared
that, considering the ideas of the century and the tendency which has shown
itself in Manila in various movements, instead of being religious men they
will be laymen, and laymen trained in Spanish normal schools, who in their
ignorance have spoken and still speak to the depreciation of the bishops, the
parish priests, and family life.
Let us suppose that the school falls into the hands of some other religious
order. Whoever they may be, I am doubtful if the normal school would be
as productive as the government and the country expect. If they belong
to the religious orders well known in this country, we have sufficient reason
to distrust their ideas. With regard to education and the spread of Spanish,
the normal school can show results in support of our arguments. Daily ex-
perience supports my contention — every day the attitude of the graduates
toward religion is evident.
If the school falls into the hands of the religious men of the orders, we
should be sorry for the results of their experience, as it is always essential to
have a knowledge of the nature and habits of those to be educated, especially
in the Philippines. It may be expected that before securing experience they
will make such serious mistakes as will bring to ruin the plan of primary
instruction in these Islands, which is one of the fairest jewels in the crown
of the illustrious and venerable Father Cuevas. Let us look forward to the
day when we can turn our attention from our parishes to the welfare of the
normal school.
CONDITIONS CONFRONTING THE GRADUATES
A contemporary writer gives an admirable summary of the
situation, indulging fully in his own opinions : ^^
After three years in the normal school, the prospective teacher comes
fresh from his studies to don the toga of the schoolmaster. He goes to a
village where he has secured a school. His youth and his inexperience do
not augur success. If the parish priest lives in isolation from municipal
affairs because of his character, his manner of life, and his belief that his
intervention in teaching should be confined to certain definite lines, the poor
teacher has recourse only to the petty governor who has no especial qualifica-
tions. It will be truly marvelous if he attains his end, introduces order into
the school and obtains anything he needs, which is everything.
In a majority of the villages the people look with absolute indifference
on the youth whose age is a slight recommendation, since knowledge and
authority in Malay villages are conceded only to maturity.
'' See No. 27 of the bibliography.
146 The Philippine Journal of Science vnA
New teachers who have recently left the normal school should spend two
or three years on probation, helping others w' : should be experienced and
well known for their behavior to the village and the local and provincial
inspectors. After this apprenticeship, the normal-school graduate would
enter upon his duties with greater care.
There ought to be established, under the presidency of the parish priest,
a board or committee composed of a certain number of resident parents
chosen for their possession of property and by other qualifications to take
their turn in looking after the school and giving the teacher moral support.
These municipal boards should assist the young teachers at the outset;
should second the watchfulness of the local inspector; and, if they did their
duty, they would render very difficult, if not impossible, the common fault
that, where the parish priest fails in his duty of inspection, the teacher does
as he wishes, and often behaves in a manner that is both reprehensible and
impossible to correct.
As for textbooks, their absence is almost unbelievable. We can look for
no remedy except on the part of the government; since they must be cheap,
and cheapness can only be obtained by publishing large editions by contract
and by distributing them wholesale through the provinces. Without text-
books, it is foolish to hope for the diffusion of Spanish.
WAS THE PURPOSE OF THE SCHOOL ACHIEVED
On this point let us hear the testimony of the director of
the normal school in a letter to the director of civil administra-
tion dated May 31, 1889:
The normal school entered upon its academic career and always kept its
purpose in mind until it could boast of having given the Archipelago over
1,100 teachers and assistants. As to the quality of the professional training
which they have received, the normal school has vigorously complied with
the government regulations, and has lately even done more by devoting
more attention than the government prescribes to certain subjects. Its
methods have never been unfavorably criticised, nor have any suggestions
been modified. On any occasion where the government officials have honored
the school with their presence, they have expressed themselves as thoroughly
satisfied with its labors on behalf of education, as happened this year when
Governor-General Weyler attended the commencement exercises.
Despite all this, there is a common complaint as to poor teachers and their
inability to speak Spanish. While there is much exaggeration on this
subject, due to the fact that modernism is always opposed to the religious
atmosphere of the normal school, it must be recognized that many of the
teachers are stupid and careless, that unless their minds are continually
sharpened they grow rusty as they grow old, and that private affairs usurp
the place of their studies and their professions.
But there are honorable exceptions. There are model teachers who carry
out in full the plan of instruction authorized by the government. And all
may reach this standard by strict inspection, continuous watchfulness, and
the stimulus of rewards and punishments.
There is a general reason why there are only a few good Filipino teachers,
but there are also many external causes which are partly excusable. The
most important one is that every year about 50 graduates leave the school.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 147
Of these, about a quarter secure positions as teachers, some go home satis-
fied with the education iiti dady obtained, some look for clerical positions,
some secure in a short time larger salaries with less work and responsibility
than would befall them as teachers, while some go on with their studies to
higher schools to secure a surveyor's or a commercial degree and thus rob
the schools of the^best educated teachers. These causes would cease if the
pay of teachers were increased; they now receive less than other employees
of much inferior education, although they have more work and greater
responsibility.
Another reason why Filipino teachers are not careful in the performance
of their duties is that they have little assistance. Some have no proper
schoolhouses and no suitable equipment and accommodations, while others are
confronted by the opposition of parents. Some spend most of their time
in lowering the standards of their profession and are unable to keep up the
position demanded of a teacher, until at last they possess little or nothing
but the name. If then there are poor teachers, this affords no reason why
the normal school should be characterized as useless.
We might make complaints on similar grounds to the effect that Spanish
is little spoken. Fifty per cent of this criticism is exaggeration. Those
who have spent some years in the country agree that in the last fifteen to
twenty years they have noticed a remarkable increase in the number of
those who speak Spanish in the provinces. To hope for universal Spanish is
to disregard history and linguistics. The Basque and Catalan provinces of
Spain, Alsace-Lorraine in Germany, and Roussillon in France are examples
of the fact that, after a lapse of many centuries under a more advanced
civilization and with more compulsion, primitive dialects have not been
superseded by the official language. On this account, then, there is no
charge against the normal school.
PwECOLLECTIONS OF A GRADUATE
Don Mariano Padilla, who graduated from the normal school
in 1888, furnishes the best description we have of the methods
of teaching practiced in the training department of the normal
school and in the public schools generally.^^
The practice school, supervised by a graduate of the normal school,
furnished the students an illustration of how to teach, as well as how to
organize and manage a large school. Each pupil of the third year was
required to attend this school two weeks before graduating. The method
of teaching was also studied in the class. The pupil teachers were not only
required to master the lessons and practical exercises assigned, but were
also expected to be able to present and explain each subject in such a way
that it could be understood by the children.
We studied four systems of teaching, which we called individual, simul-
taneous, mutual, and mixed. The individual system consisted in teaching
pupils one by one all the lessons they studied. This system was not appli-
cable to a large school, but for a few pupils it furnished excellent advan-
tages as the teacher could instruct according to the capacity and intelligence
of each.
"" See No. 21 in the bibliography.
148 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
The simultaneous system consisted in dividing the school into classes or
sections and teaching one after another of these. The size of sections
depended upon the number of pupils in the school and the ability of the
teacher to handle classes. This system was similar to that which is in
operation in the public schools at the present time. The system had its
advantages on account of the superior organization and supervision which
it made possible, but in the time of the Spanish government the general
adoption of this system was impossible on account of the scarcity of
teachers. Owing to a lack of funds in the public treasury, there were
seldom more than two teachers in a town, one male and the other female.
As boys and girls did not attend the same schools, one teacher was com-
pelled to give instruction in all classes and all subjects. In spite of the
many advantages of this system, it was not then applicable to any consider-
able number of schools.
The mutual system consisted in selecting the more advanced pupils of
the school and organizing them into groups of monitors, who were taught
at different hours by the regular teacher. The instruction of the monitors
included both subject matter and methods of teaching less advanced pupils.
While the monitors taught the several sections, the teacher went about the
room supervising the work of monitors, correcting errors, and keeping order
in the school. In the larger schools, this was the most practical system then
in vogue, but it was far from being perfect. As the teacher was often
overcome with fatigue on account of his arduous duties, it was impossible
for him properly to instruct the monitors.
The mixed system was a combination of the simultaneous and mu-
tual system. The teacher divided the school into sections of 15 pupils
each, grouping in the same section those pupils of equal knowledge. He
then formed, from the most advanced section, two groups of monitors, called
first and second monitors, whose instruction came direct from the teacher.
One first monitor and one second monitor were assigned to teach each
section by turns. The teacher divided his own time into three equal parts,
one of which was devoted to the instruction of the first monitors, one to the
second monitors, and the remainder was given to the general supervision
of the school. The chief merit of this system lay in the fact that it com-
bined direct supervision by the teacher with the aid rendered by monitors.
The training department of the normal school was organized under the
mixed system. The pupils of the third year were compelled to attend this
department for two weeks. Then the critic teacher in charge of the prac-
tice school submitted to the director of the normal school a report on the
work of the student teacher, together with his opinion as to the ability
of the student to direct a school.
The following may be said with reference to the movement of classes
when the practice school was in operation. The ringing of the bell an-
nounced the beginning of the classes. At once the monitors, one first and
one second, went to their respective sections. The teacher announced
in a loud voice what subject was to be taught; for example, Spanish
grammar. Upon the ringing of the second bell, the first monitors assem-
bled in an appointed place to receive the instruction of the teacher. At
the same time, the second monitors took charge of their respective sections.
The time for teaching grammar having been finished, the teacher rang two
bells, indicating a change in subjects. At once the whole school became
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 149
very quiet in order to hear what the teacher was about to announce. With
the ringing of another bell, the first monitors took charge of sections and
the second monitors went to their recitations. After the instruction of the
monitors was completed, the teacher spent the remainder of his time in
supervision.
THE NORMAL SCHOOL IS ELEVATED TO THE GRADE OF SUPERIOR
The fondness of the natives for instruction and ' the great
increase in educational interest since the founding of the normal
school led to the conclusion that the course of training offered
teachers should be prolonged and improved. Accordingly, on
November 10, 1893, the government of the Philippine Islands
drew up a proposed decree elevating to the degree of "superior''
the normal school for men teachers in Manila, and approving
provisionally the new regulations for that school. On December
15 of the same year another decree was issued with orders
supplementary to the superior decree and the regulations of
the normal school, approved November 10. In April of the
following year a royal order of the ministry of the colonies
confirmed the decrees which elevated the normal school to the
rank of ''superior.'' That part of the decrees and regulations
which in any way modified or extended previous decrees is in
substance as follows : -^
ORGANIZATION
Under the authority of the director, it is provided that there
shall be at least six teachers, besides one instructor in drawing,
one for vocal music, one for gymnastics, three assistants, and
the number of servants and dependents necessary for the school.
One of the teachers shall be spiritual instructor and have charge
of the religious ceremonies ; he shall also be instructor in sacred
history and ethics. Another shall discharge the special duties
of prefect of morals. The remaining instructors shall be
occupied in teaching other subjects.
SUPPORT
The salaries to be received by the director, instructors, assist-
ants, and dependents, as well as the expenses for equipment
and the rent of a building, shall be paid out of the local funds
of the Islands.
From a note furnished the director of civil administration
by the director of the normal school in May, 1889, we obtain
'^ See No. 14 in the bibliography.
150
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
the following estimate of the annual expenses of the normal
school :
Pesos.
A director and 4 teachers 4,000
Three assistant priests 1,200
One teacher in drawing 600
Fifteen positions, pupils in school 1,800
Servants' and waiters' services 600
Materials for teaching 1,000
Rent of the normal school building 4,000
Materials for drawing classes 120
Total
13,320
The normal school continued to receive similar support until
some years after the American occupation (page 166).
CURRICULUM
The course of study then included two grades, elementary
and superior. The work necessary for obtaining a certificate
as elementary teacher extended over a period of three years.
Pupils of the normal school who completed the course prescribed
for elementary teachers and passed all examinations with an
average of "excellent'' were entitled to become candidates for the
degree of superior teacher. Those who did not obtain the mark
of "excellent," but that of "good'' or "fair," were entitled to
receive a certificate as elementary teacher and to take charge of a
school of a lower grade.
The course of study for elementary teachers was as follows:
Subject.
Recitation.
First year.
Second year.
Third year.
Religion and sacred history
Religrion and morals
Spanish grammar
Arithmetic
Reading
Writing
Music, drawing, and calisthenics
Manners and right conduct
Geography
History of Spain and the Philippines.
Elementary geometry
Pedagogy
Elementary agriculture
Daily .
Daily .
Daily
do
do
Half hour daily.
Daily
Biweekly
Daily
do
do
Half hour daily
Daily
Biweekly
Alternate days _.-
do
Daily.
Do.
Daily.
Half hour daily.
Daily.
Alternate days.
Do.
Do.
The requirements for the degree of superior teacher were
a general average mark of "excellent" in the course prescribed
for elementary teachers and in addition thereto the following :
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 151
Advanced pedagogy, together with a knowledge of legislation
in force regarding primary instruction in the Philippines;
religion and ethics; universal history; algebra; industry and
commerce; the ordinary phenomena of nature.
\
PENSIONERS
No tuition was charged, the school being supported by the
government, but all boarders were required to pay for their
maintenance. Among the latter class were the government
pensioners. At one time there were 30 of these, but the number
was reduced to 20, at a later date to 15, and finally the system
was abolished altogether, as it was thought unnecessary. The
allowance of pensioners was 10 pesos per month.
REGULATIONS
At the end of each month a review was given covering all
the subject matter passed over during that month. A private
examination was given on the work of each quarter, and a
public final examination at the close of the year.
The holidays set aside for the normal school were the
following: Sundays, Thursdays, feast days. Ash Wednesday, All
Saints' Day, the birthdays of the Spanish sovereigns and of
the Prince of Asturias, the day of the patron saint of the
governor-general of the Philippine Islands, the Christmas holi-
days extending from Christmas Eve until January 2, and the
Day of the Three Kings. The long vacation extended from
the close of the examinations, about the last of March, until
the first of June.
The merit of pupils was recompensed with honorable marks,
which were entered in the book of the institution, and with
annual prizes whose solemn distribution took place at the close
of the final examinations.
The following internal regulations, governing the conduct of
the pupils, were promulgated on November 24, 1893, and in-
corporated in these decrees : ^^
1. Every pupil was required to be:
(a) A native of the Spanish dominions.
(b) At least thirteen years of age.
(c) Free from contagious diseases and in good health.
(d) Able to speak Spanish, understand the Christian doctrine, read
and write, and know something of arithmetic.
(e) Able to write to the director, giving his Christian name, sur-
name, birthplace, and age.
(/) Vaccinated.
"" See footnote 8.
152 I'f^^ Philippine Journal of Science i^h
2. The fees for all except government students were 140 pesos a year,
payable in two installments — on the day of entrance and on the 1st of
October. Ten pesos were paid as an entrance fee. For this, students re-
ceived instruction in all classes, including ornamentation and the use of all
scientific instruments and collections, as far as necessary.
3. Students were provided with iron bedsteads, beds, white bedclothes,
washstand, and table linen. They were given the free use of the infirmary,
dispensary, and the free services of the physician in cases of ordinary
illness.
4. If a student left the school before the end of the year, he had the
right to recover all that he had deposited, except for the unfinished part of
the month in which he left. For absences or late registration, no more
than a month's fee was deducted.
5. A prescribed uniform was required to be worn on certain days.^^
6. Every three months a report as to conduct, application, and improve-
ment in studies was sent to the parents.
7. A gentle and persuasive method of discipline was used, and every
effort was made to impress upon the mind of the youth the sentiments of
honor and noble rivalry.
8. Pupils were admitted only on the opening day, unless they justified
their absence on serious grounds.
9. Pupils were permitted to receive visits from their parents or per-
sons authorized by them, only once a week, and that during the recrea-
tion. In no case were they allowed to leave the school with friends or
write or receive letters without the consent of the director.
10. Every pupil was required to speak Spanish, even in private conver-
sation, and to write letters in Spanish only.
11. No student was allowed to possess money, but parents were permitted
to leave with the director an amount not to exceed 30 pesos. From this
fund, sons were granted a moderate weekly allowance to be spent on useful
or healthful objects or given to the poor.
12. There were no vacations except at the end of the school year, when
pupils were not allowed to remain longer in the school. No pupil was
permitted to leave during the year except in the case of poor health.
In accordance with the superior decrees of December 15, 1893, the follow-
ing regulations were set forth, prescribing the manner of holding written
and oral examinations:
WRITTEN EXERCISES
1. The applicant will sharpen the pencils and prepare the pens.
2. He will write an alphabet of capital letters and another of small
letters on ruled paper to be furnished him.
3. He will write from dictation a paragraph taken from a book.
^' The following clothing was prescribed : Two pairs of white pantaloons,
2 pairs of colored pantaloons, 2 white jackets, 1 black alpaca coat, 2 black
ribbons for the neck, 1 black cap, 2 pairs of shoes, 1 pair chinelas, 10 white
shirts, 2 colored shirts, 12 handkerchiefs, 12 pairs of socks, 4 pairs of
drawers, 1 mat, 1 pillow, 4 pillowcases, 4 sheets, 2 bed covers, the neces-
sary toilet articles. (See GrifoPs La Instruccion Primaria en las Islas
Filipinas, page 20.)
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 153
4. He will solve problems in arithmetic that have been approved by the
judges.
5. He will write a simple explanation of not less than half a sheet on his
choice of three pedagogical subjects drawn by lot.
6. The applicant will work in full all problems submitted to him and
leave all of the explanations on the paper to hand to the examiner. He
must also explain the pedagogical point involved in the problem.
7. The examinations will continue for such a time as the judges may
think fit, not to exceed two hours for writing and the solution of problems,
one hour for the explanation of pedagogical points, and another hour for
copying the work.
ORAL EXERCISES
1. Questions on some point of a subject drawn by lot, except pedagogy.
2. A reading exercise in printed letters and in handwriting.
3. A grammatical analysis of the words and sentences in a dictated
paragraph.
4. A simple lesson demonstrating how some part of the work of the
training school should be conducted.
The question or exercise upon which each student was expected
to recite in the oral test was determined in the following
manner :
The president of the board of examiners put into a box
50 balls, each bearing a number. The secretary drew out a
ball in the presence of the applicant and read the number. The
applicant was required to take the question or exercise of the
corresponding number and give an answer at once. The judges
listened to the recitation and gave the student a mark. The
judges were also permitted to ask suitable questions. The oral
examinations did not continue more than half an hour.
teachers' examinations
It was provided that examinations be held four times each
year for the benefit of those who desired certificates as assistants.
The examinations were conducted by the director and the teachers
of the normal school.
The general division of civil administration was empowered
to issue teachers' certificates upon the recommendation of the
director of the normal school.
When there was a vacancy in any of the better positions
of the teaching service, the place was filled by competitive
examination : any one who had a certificate as elementary teacher
was eligible to enter the contest. In case of a tie in the examina-
tion ratings obtained, consideration was given to the teacher
of most experience or to the one who had the best record in
the practice school.
154 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science i jh
THE NORMAL SCHOOL BOOTH AT THE EXPOSITION
The Philippine Territorial Exposition was held in Manila
in 1895. At this exposition was an exhibit by the Superior
Normal School. It is interesting to note the contrast between
that exhibit and those which are given at the present day by
the public schools at the Philippine Carnival.
In the center of the hall was a large booth surmounted by
the sign of the normal school. On the right-hand side hung
12 geographical and statistical maps, showing the condition
of public instruction in the Philippines. All of the villages in
which there were schools were shown, even the number of
grades in the various schools being given. These maps were
drawn by the pupils of the normal school under the direction
of their teachers. On the left side were the plans of the building
of the Superior Normal School and the observatory of Manila.
On each side were photographs of the pupils in their holi-
day, Friday, and ordinary uniforms. There were photographs
of the various rooms in the building, including the chapels
of the fathers and the students, the dining room, the study
hall, the upper classrooms, the baths, the garden, the basin,
and the gallery. ,
Below these plans were carefully colored maps of Spain
and the Philippines, surrounded by a collection of trophies
and prizes and by beautiful copy-book pages, the whole forming
an artistic and intricate pattern on a bright green ground,
surmounted by the normal-school shield. This was drawn by
the boys in the practice school.
In the center of the normal-school booth was a table with
drawers, and on its sides two pyramid-shaped stands on which
were placed the following agricultural implements in miniature :
A spade, a shovel, a hoe, a rake, a pick, a trowel, a mattock, a
hatchet, various instruments for cutting, a harrow, a combina-
tion pickaxe and hammer, a Coleman cultivator, a Scott cultivator,
a foot ruler, a Crasskill ruler, a Bochin seeder, a lawn mower, a
hay mower, a riddle, a Bochin straw cutter, a Bochin weeder, a
modern thrasher, a plow, a two-pronged fork, a small grape
vat, a coconut vat, a grape squeezer, a well, and a hydraulic
chain pump.
In the central cabinet were the following: Different prizes
given in the Normal School, consisting of medals, diplomas,
and recitation rewards; the Regulations in Force, as applied
in the schedule of the course for superior teachers ; the Elements
of Pedagogy, by Father Jose Murgadas; the three volumes of
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 155
Spanish grammar lately published by Father Santiago Mazo;
Yove's Sacred History, in three parts; Carderara's Industry
and Commerce, dedicated to the normal school. This cabinet
also contained the work of several provincial teachers, including
pedagogical and literary articles, and maps and charts of various
kinds.2*
THE PEDAGOGICAL ACADEMY
The pedagogical academy was an association of teachers for
the study of educational questions and the betterment of the
teaching profession. The academy was founded by the director
of the Superior Normal School on February 23, 1894. The
organic regulations according to which the academy was to
be governed were approved by the governor-general on July
20, 1894. These were in substance as follows :
1. The academy proposes to cultivate the pedagogical studies among the
teachers of the Philippines, to promote a love for these, and to devise suit-
able means for their development.
2. The board of directors shall be composed of the director of the normal
school as president, the dean of the academic classes as vice-president, two
councilors to be chosen by the president and vice-president, and a secretary
to be elected by the board.
3. There shall be three classes in the academy. The first class shall be
the superior teachers; the second class, the elementary teachers; and the
third class, the assistant and the substitute teachers.
4. In order to be admitted to the academy, it is required that: (a) An
application addressed to the board shall be filed with the president; (b)
the credentials of the applicant, together with a statement regarding his
profession or business, shall be submitted; (c) the applicant shall possess
a good name and an exemplary character.
5. Teachers living in the provinces may become members in the same
manner as others.
6. The members of the academy will meet fortnightly in the normal
school, at an hour previously appointed, for a literary performance. The
meetings will continue for two hours, and the following will be the order of
business: (a) Call to order; (6) reading of minutes of the last meeting;
(c) the subject to be discussed will be proposed by the president, and some
member named by him will talk on the point indicated. In lieu of this,
a lecture of not more than thirty minutes* duration will be given by a
member of the society; (d) remarks by the chairman; (e) adjournment.
On October 1, 1894, the governing board of the academy held
its inaugural session in the normal school. At this meeting
a librarian and a director of the pedagogical museum were
elected.
We can better understand the purpose of this association
^* Boletin Oficial de Magisterio Filipino, 1 , 34.
156 The Philippine Journal of Science 19 h
and more fully appreciate the work which it accomplished
by examining the following excerpt from a report of the sec-
retary. This report included a general review of the work of
the academy during the first two years of its existence.
The director of the Superior Normal School, cognizant of the necessity
of providing some means by which the teachers who graduate from the
normal school may develop, proposed the establishment of a pedagogical
academy. This association was the means of impressing upon the teachers
the dignity and honor of their profession, inspiring them with the desire
to spread morality and culture among their pupils, to carry intelligence
from province to province and from town to town, to awaken the families
to the call of necessity knocking at their doors, and to enkindle in the
minds of the common people the sentiments of virtue, knowledge, patriotism,
and Christianity; as these things insure more and more the moral and
material enlargement of the Archipelago.
Enough has been said to convince one of the utility and great impor-
tance of the pedagogical academy. It is filling a want which has been felt
throughout the history of these Islands, and is destined to remedy many of
the faults of the teaching profession.
In corroboration of what I have just said, let us take a look into the past.
Not long ago, the schools of the Archipelago were rated as woefully defi-
cient. This condition of affairs resulted from a lack of schoolhouses and
equipment, a lack of interior organization, poor attendance, the inexperience
of the teachers, and the want of pedagogical knowledge. It is not my pur-
pose to censure the Spanish Government nor reprove the teachers, but, with
my hand upon my heart, I am constrained to lament the fact that in spite of
the ardent fondness and powerful means put forth by the government of His
Majesty and the diligence of those in charge of education in this distant
region the results up to date cannot be compared with those achieved else-
where in the same time and with the same labor.
The academy tends to dissipate these difficulties. At first the effect may
be small, but it will become constantly greater as the fight goes on against
those things which restrain or annul teaching.
The academy has already given palpable proof of its vitality and use-
fulness in disentangling the difficulties that are opposing the instruction
and education of the Filipino youth. Evident proof of this truth lies in
the good results reported by the teachers who took part in the literary
sessions held periodically in the academy. In these meetings, they acquired
useful knowledge which was entirely new. Even the teachers in the prov-
inces who did not attend the sessions were benefited by those meetings,
accounts of which were published in the Official Bulletin for Filipino
Teachers.
Our academy has other effective means of instruction. These are the
pedagogical library and the museum which the academy has been forming
little by little from the beginning, in order to refresh and enrich the knowl-
edge of the teachers.^^
The following may further serve to show the character of the
work undertaken by the pedagogical academy.
^' See No. 5 in the bibliography.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 157
THE FIRST PEDAGOGICAL CONTEST IN THE PHILIPPINES
This contest was instituted by the Pedagogical Academy,
through its president, the director of the Superior Normal
School, for the purpose of stimulating interest in matters edu-
cational. The zest and enthusiasm with which the contestants
and the audience entered into the occasion show unmistakable
signs of an educational av/akening. The range of subjects dis-
cussed and the manner of treatment are not without significance.
Incidentally, the occasion was representative of the rather strik-
ing type of literary entertainments which characterized the
Spanish schools of that day and is still common in the better
private schools of the Islands.
This contest was held on December 3, 1895, exactly thirty
years after San Francisco Xavier was declared patron of the
normal school. We cannot do better than let the chronicler
of the time tell the story of the pedagogical contest in his own
way.-^'
The occasion was solemnly begun, and it took place in the chapel of the
Superior Normal School for teachers, the hall eloquent in its simple, but
fitting decoration. The top of the stage was protected by a curtain artis-
tically painted for the occasion. Under this artistic dais was placed a
presidential table which was occupied by the judges of the contest. Sitting
near this table was the honorary president, his excellency, the governor-
general of these Islands; on his right, the archbishop of the diocese; and,
on the left, the major-general of the naval squadron. On both sides, the
seats in the first row were occupied by the director-general of civil adminis-
tration, the president of the royal audiencia, and the fiscal and the governor-
general of Manila. The other seats were occupied by a numerous and
select audience.
A symphony executed with great precision opened the meeting. Then
followed a short opening address by the chairman of the judges of the
contest. The speech may be summed up as follows: The exordium con-
sisted in declaring the solemnity, importance, scope, and transcendency of
pedagogical contests, emphasizing the fact that this, the first to be cele-
brated in the Philippines, opened a new era and should be marked with
golden characters in the annals of primary education in the Islands.
The subject matter of the address was the following: The Greatness of
the Profession of the Primary Teachers, in which two principal arguments
were discussed and which formed the body of the address. These two argu-
ments were: The origin of the profession of teaching and the object of the
same. In the second argument was considered, in meaning words, the good
that it gives to individuals, as well as to the family and the community as
a whole. On the other hand were explained the evils that confront not
only the vicious teacher, but also the teacher who is negligent in the perform-
ance of his duties.
^^ This account is an abridgement of that which appears in Boletin
Oficial de Magisterio Filipino, 2, No. 1. See No. 23 of the bibliography.
158 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
The peroration of the speech contained an expression of gratitude to his
excellency, the governor-general, to the metropolitan archbishop, to the di-
rector-general of civil administration, to the superior of the Company of
Jesus, and to the director of the Superior Normal School, for their protec-
tion and patronage of the first pedagogical contest held in the Philippines
and for the prizes which they had offered to the winners of the five themes.
The speaker also thanked the teachers, who had rendered their services to
make the contest a success, praising those who were awarded prizes, giving
them his good wishes, and encouraging those who were less fortunate, so that
in future contests they may also wear the wreath of victory.
This was followed by the reading of a paper, containing the result of
the work done and the prizes obtained. The gist of the paper read was
as follows: Five compositions were awarded prizes for excellence, 28 others
were rated as "good," while 7 were rejected because the writers did not
observe the instructions. The paper whose subject was To the Progress
of the Philippines was unanimously considered by the judges as the best,
and therefore received first honors.
After the secretary had read the subject of this composition, the sealed
envelope containing the paper was brought on a silver plate to his excel-
lency, the governor-general, who announced the name of the author, Don
Catalino Sevilla, a teacher, by merit, of the first municipal school of Binondo.
The author having declined to read his paper, his emotions preventing him
from doing so, the task was undertaken by Senor Baldosano, whose excellent
reading helped to emphasize the beautiful thoughts of the composition.
Immediately after the reading, Senor Sevilla was called to the front to
receive from the hands of his excellency, the governor-general, the prize
offered by his excellency. It consisted of the works of Seiior Benor in
three volumes, Arquitectura de las Lenguas. The volumes were elegantly
bound in Russian leather; on the obverse was a monogram of the name of
Jesus, inlaid with silver; in the center was inscribed, in plated letters. First
Pedagogical Contest. Just below this was inlaid in silver the arms of the
city of Manila. On the back of each of the three volumes was the silver
inscription. First Prize, and in the lower part were the silver initials of
the governor-general, with the crown of a marquis.
In this paper, the writer expressed his sorrow at the scarcity of children
attending schools in most of the towns of the Philippines, and gave three
causes for this sad misfortune, with the corresponding remedies.
1. Lack of schoolhouses, materials, and furniture. — He proposed a rem-
edy to the effect that the municipalities should work out a plan for the
building of schoolhouses. He treated this point with practical wisdom,
praising all, without laying blame on anybody.
2. Internal organization of the schools. — He prescribed moderate treat-
ment. He divided the schools into three classes which might be subdivided
indefinitely, according to the number of children, and he also presented
the program of study for each of the sections. He insisted that a teacher
should prepare the lesson before going to the class and that his explanations
should be made simple in order to reach the understanding of the pupils.
He recommended the method of teaching by object lessons. He treated of
reward and punishment of pupils, citing opinions to substantiate his state-
ments and alluding to the fact that the Eternal Judge rewards the good
and punishes the bad. He concluded this argument by saying that prizes
are not sufficient to gain the love and good will of the pupils. He condemned
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 159
those teachers who cannot be respected by the pupils without resorting to
harsh punishment.
^. Administrative acts of local authorities. — He said that these should be
efficient and continuous, and finished his essay by quoting the words of
Governors Izquierdo and La Torre.
After this, the secretary proceeded to the consideration of the essays for
the second theme whose subject was A Treatise Concerning the Teaching of
Spanish in the Philippines. The envelope in which it was inclosed was
opened by the archbishop of Manila, and the author was found to be Don
Mariano Leuterio, superior teacher and secretary of the Pedagogical
Academy.
He divided his essay into three parts: Importance of the wide extension
of the Spanish language in all parts of the Philippine Archipelago; legis-
lative acts conducive to this end; and comments on the Spanish language,
showing the difference between language and grammar.
1. The author began with the statement that language is to the nation
as a mother is to her child, the home to the family, and society to the indi-
vidual. He went on to prove that the most effective means to spread
education, agriculture, industry, and commerce in the Philippines is through
the diffusion of the Spanish language everywhere.
2. This paragraph showed that the author had fathomed the depths of
legislation.
3. This paragraph marked the line between the study of the language and
the study of grammar and the methods to be pursued for the acquisition of
both.
After the reading, Don Mariano Leuterio was called to receive his prize
from his excellency, the prelate. It consisted of a magnificent geographical,
statistical, and historical dictionary of Spain and its domains. He received
an ovation from the audience as he took his seat, after receiving the prize.
The third theme was A Brief Treatise Concerning the Duties of Teachers
in the Philippine Islands. The prize was obtained by Don Pedro Serrano.
Sr. Baldosano read a part of this composition, which was greatly applauded
by the audience. The giver of the prize, Senor Bores, himself delivered
the prize, which was an elegantly bound edition of Monlau^s Rhetoric and
Poetry.
There were no papers presented for the fourth theme, and the prize,
offered by the superior of the Company of Jesus, was awarded to the essay
that got second place in the first theme, whose author was found to be
Don Florencio L. Gonzales, vice president of the academy, superior teacher,
and director of the College of the Immaculate Conception. The author
read a part of this essay, which was greatly applauded by the audience.
The prize, consisting of the works of Donosa Cortes, in four volumes, was
awarded by the governor-general.
The secretary then passed to the fifth theme. Discourse on Teaching by
the Object Method. Padre Isidoro de la Torre opened the envelope, and
the superior teacher and proprietor of the school in Quiapo, Don Pedro
Serrano, received the prize, consisting of a book, Heterodozos Espafioles, by
Don Marcelino Menendez Pelayo, from the hands of the governor-general.
After the reading of the records of the secretary was finished, the contest
was concluded by a hymn sung by the students of the Superior Normal
School. The press of Manila eulogized the great success of the first peda-
gogical contest; the director of the Superior Normal School, who had origi-
160 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
nated the contest; the Pedagogical Academy; and all the teachers who
contributed to this intellectual competition.
We cannot close this short description of the pedagogical contest without
quoting the words of El Comercio, which show the quality of our modest
celebration: We consider this contest of such importance, that we thought
to devote a special edition to it, thinking that the celebration of yesterday,
by its influence upon the culture and advancement of the Filipinos, in all
spheres of moral development, and the stimulus it gives to public education,
deserves more attention than the limited applause of a mere local and
passing comment.
And although the contest of yesterday has yet to show the public the
practical application of the varied activities discussed in the various essays,
yet the knowledge that there exist energy and talent among those most con-
cerned in primary education in these Islands, as shown in the recent contest,
namely, among bright young pedagogues, merits the decided help and protec-
tion of the government and of the public in general ; and these circumstances
are sufficient to make us dedicate our pen to the contest. It was indeed a
great lesson that was taught yesterday at the Superior Normal School for
teachers, which was not perhaps realized by all. As the sound that it pro-
duced in the atmosphere echoes and reechoes to unknown limits, as a stone
that falls on the surface of a lake causes the waters to move in concentric
circles away from it, until they reach the very shore of the lake itself, so
will the celebration of yesterday extend its undying influence over every
locality in the Archipelago. It will encourage the unpretentious teacher
in some dark corner of these Islands to carry on with greater efforts his
educational work and to live up to the heights of his noble profession; and
as his extraordinary talents and activities are placed before the eyes of the
public and receive its applause, his individual efforts will be more and more
encouraged, and will thus contribute greatly to the welfare of his country.
May God, in His infinite kindness, make this first pedagogical contest in the
Philippine Islands the beginning of a new era of progress for the education
of the Filipino youth.
THE NORMAL SCHOOL UNDER THE AMERICAN FLAG
A STATEMENT TO THE PATRONS OF THE SCHOOL
Soon after Spanish sovereignty came to an end in the Phil-
ippine Islands, the following circular letter was issued by the
authorities of the normal school :
This center of education, well known to the Filipino people as it now is
in the thirty-third year of its existence, has trained thousands of young
men for every province in the Archipelago, and still remains open to all
those who desire to avail themselves of its advantages.
The few fathers of the society, who conduct the school, will be obliged in
the future, as in the past, to give its pupils a sound, moral, and religious
education, so that they may fulfill the desires of the Filipino people, who are
Catholic and intend to remain so; and second the aims of the United States
Government in bringing about the welfare of the country.
Teaching will be given in Spanish, the only language in general use in
IX, D, 2 Cain: Histoi^y of the Spanish Normal School 161
the Archipelago, and indispensable now and for a considerable period in
the future. For this reason, three courses in Spanish are compulsory.
Three courses with a daily recitation in each will also be given in English,
since English has not only come to be of great value, but a knowledge and
use of this language are always necessary.
As a study of these two languages is somewhat difficult, it must occupy
a greater part of the time of pupils, to the reduction of other courses which
may be less important. These are preparatory courses essential to the
primary and secondary teacher.
The degrees conferred by the school have such a value that they will be
recognized by the American Government, and in any case will be sufficient
proof that the pupil is ready for any position.^^
In 1899, Father Pedro Torra, giving evidence before the
Philippine Commission regarding the educational conditions in
the Islands, furnished the following interesting statement
concerning the normal school and its graduates, which is given
in abstract: 2^
In order to be a teacher in an official school, a degree as master from
the normal school was exacted, but at times when there were no such
persons holding degrees substitutes were appointed, and only at such times.
Of those who have graduated from the normal school some have died.
Others have never cared to teach, having pursued the course only to learn
Spanish and get a general education. If they had all desired to teach,
there would have been no scarcity of teachers. The career of teacher is
an arduous one, involving a great deal of hard work, and they do not care
to undertake it. The salary which would be sufficient in an ordinary walk
of life is not sufficient for a teacher. It does not compensate him for the
amount of hard work he has to do to fit himself for his profession. Those
who have actually taken up their profession have done it either because
they have been encouraged to do so by the fathers, or as a simple matter of
honor. If it had not been for the fathers, hardly any of them would have
put their learning into practice. Then, too, it must be remembered that in
the towns there were other things which would bring them much more
remuneration than they would receive as teachers. For instance, they
could serve as interpreters for the petty governors, which, without the
hard work involved in exercising their profession, would bring them a very
much higher return. The way to induce them to exercise their profession
would be to give them better compensation, more privileges, and make the
profession more attractive for them.
Teaching was obligatory only for those to whom the government paid a
pension. These were required to teach for a period of ten years.
The school has no connection with the United States Government, except
that the latter has continued to pay us the amount the Spanish Government
gave us, and the courses are continuing. The amount of the endowment
is 8,880 pesos a year ; but in consideration of the fact that the necessaries of
life are a great deal more expensive now than formerly, an increase of this
amount has been asked for through the inspector of schools. An increase
^^ Copy in the Ateneo, Manila.
''Report of the Philippine Commission (1900), 2, 285.
162 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
equivalent to one-third of the present amount is necessary for the continu-
ance of the establishment.
The following year, a complete prospectus was issued, showing
the degrees offered by the school and the conditions necessary
to obtain these degrees, the entrance requirements of pupils,
the length of terms, and supplementary classes, and giving an
account of the practice classes, methods of discipline, terms and
accommodation offered to boarders, requirements in dress, and
the course of study.
The course of study as revised at the opening of the school
year in 1900 was as follows i^^
FIRST YEAR
Spanish language Recitation daily.
English language Recitation daily.
Arithmetic Recitation daily.
United States, general, and Philippine
geography Recitations on alternate days.
Catechism and sacred history Recitations on alternate days.
Writing Half an hour daily.
SECOND YEAR
Spanish language Recitation daily.
English language Recitation daily.
Arithmetic and elementary algebra Recitation daily.
United States and Philippine history Recitations on alternate days.
Explanation of the catechism Recitations on alternate days.
Writing Half an hour daily.
THIRD YEAR
Spanish Recitation daily.
English Recitation daily.
Elementary geometry and surveying Recitation daily.
Elementary pedagogy Recitation daily.
Elementary agriculture Recitation daily.
Religion and morals Recitations on alternate days.
Lectures on politeness Weekly.
The study of Spanish and English comprised all the grammar,
suitable exercises in reading, writing from dictation, analysis,
translation, composition, and speech making.
The requirement for candidates for the degree of superior
teacher was the possession of the degree of elementary teacher
with a rating of "excellent'' and in addition the following :
Advanced pedagogy.
Elements of physics, chemistry, and natural history.
Studies and literary exercises in Spanish and in English.
A study of certain religious, moral, and ethical questions of value.
^^ The prospectus mentioned in No. 25 of the bibliography.
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 163
Vocal and instrumental music.
Drawing of every kind.
Hygienic gymnastics.
' Meteorology and seismology.
General principles of fine arts.
In sending out the above-mentioned prospectus, Father Torra
inclosed the following circular letter:
The change that is taking place in the social and religious life of the
Philippines makes every day more necessary the maintenance and multipli-
cation of Catholic teaching centers of all kinds and grades, which may
deserve particular confidence. On the other hand, the attitude of the Gov-
ernment of the United States on the subject of education in this country is
unknown. We cannot tell how they will regard institutions that have not
been established by the Government, and are therefore unofficial, or what
value they will attach to the degrees won in these institutions, and what
requirements they will exact in the future.
The Jesuit fathers, who claim by the help of God to have done some little
good in the Islands, through the sound instruction and Christian education
which they have given for many years in the Superior Normal School, are
anxious to continue at work, if this is for the good of the country. They
hope that the Government will recognize the value of their work. Up to
the present, the great majority of those who have obtained the degree of
schoolmaster in the normal school have used their education both to teach
and to obtain dignified positions.
This being so, I am sending you the inclosed prospectus, in order that,
if you think fit, you may show it to all parents of your acquaintance, whom
you think may be interested, because the more pupils the normal school
obtains, the more consideration it will secure: it will be able to interest the
Government and the general public of these Islands, and more thoroughly
diffuse the Catholic faith.
A STATEMENT TO THE PHILIPPINE COMMISSION
In September, 1900, the director of the Superior Normal
School addressed to the Philippine Commission the following
exposition :
The object of this establishment is the creating of suitable teachers to
fill the position of schoolmaster in the public schools throughout the Phil-
ippine Archipelago. It was founded by the Spanish Government and in-
augurated on the 23d of January, 1865.
The course covered three years, and included all those subjects usually
taught in the primary schools. In 1893, an extra course was added to
amplify the knowledge of the teachers and equip them for giving superior
primary instruction. By virtue of this improvement, the school was raised
to the category of a superior normal school. Since the last course wa^
completed, the study of the English language has been added in all classes,
including those in the school of practice. This school of youth is associated
with the normal school, and in it the future masters are exercised in the
practice of teaching.
126083 5
164 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
The Spanish Government appropriately subsidized this school, and paid
the expenses of the material and furniture, and therefore the teaching was,
and still remains, entirely gratuitous. At the close of the Spanish dominion
in these Islands, the Government of the United States continued to give this
subsidy, and even made it somewhat larger, up to a little more than a year
ago.
The average number of pupils when conditions are normal is:
In the course for the degree of master 450-500
In the school of practice 150-200
Total 600-700
The present number of pupils is:
In the course of the degree of master 304
In the school of practice 201
Total 505
The total number of masters up to the present is 1,606
Annual average 53
Total number of assistants 340
Some of the above-mentioned pupils are boarders, and their number has
varied according to the capacities of the various buildings which the normal
school has successively occupied. In 1896, the boarders numbered 184; at
the present time there are 102. The unpeaceful state of the times in many
provinces of the Archipelago has been the reason that more pupils have not
entered.
The school being without suitable quarters, the Company of the Jesuits
erected in Ermita the building now occupied by the normal school. For
this undertaking, it was necessary for the mission to burden itself with a
considerable debt which it hoped to extinguish in a few years by the help of
the 4,000 pesos^ loan which the Spanish Government offered it, and the
economies it would be able to make. As it stands now, the structure has
cost more than 200,000 pesos and at the present could not be erected at three
times the cost. Therefore, we do not believe that we exceeded the bounds of
justice when we asked last year of the Government of General Otis an
increase of appropriation. Nevertheless our petition was rejected.
The increase of the endowment has become more necessary on account of
the notable increase in price which articles of actual necessity have reached.
Without claiming, then, any right by the sacrifice mentioned or the merits
of our teaching, the writer limits himself to submitting to the consideration
and wisdom of the Commission the necessity in which the normal school
finds itself for an increase in endowment, in order that with more ease and
better results it may continue its work in the future.
Besides this, in order that this institution may retain its reputed import-
ance and show a reason for existence, it is necessary that it should acquire
a special title for the granting of degrees to teachers. This has not been
done in the last two years.
It is necessary in the same way to recompense the masters well and to
stimulate their zeal by all possible inducements, otherwise the last of
IX, D, 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 165
them will withdraw from the occupation of teaching to seek more gain in
other employments or business which call for much less work and subjection.
The undersigned in the name of the corporation which he represents asks,
moreover, that if he inspires the Commission with sufficient confidence in his
corporation it will vouchsafe to leave it entire liberty in the election
of the teaching staff, texts, and methods of teaching, and above all in the
teaching and practice of the Catholic religion in the same way as this
liberty is understood and practiced in the Catholic colleges of the United
States.
Finally, as it is of the utmost importance to the teaching institutions
represented by me to know as soon as possible and with all possible cer-
tainty for future guidance and determination what is to be the future lot
of this normal school, I ask the Commission to have the kindness to manifest
to me, with loyalty and frankness-, its feeling and wishes regarding the
above-mentioned points and any other which may at the time affect the
well-being and prosperity of this establishment.
THE CREATION OF THE DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC INSTRUCTION
The Commission did not grant the foregoing petition. On
January 21, 1901, the Philippine Commission enacted the law
creating the Department of Public Instruction. This Act placed
all public schools under the immediate charge of the Director
of Education. Some of the duties assigned this official were
the general supervision of the entire Bureau, the fixing of a
curriculum for all public schools,. the prescribing of the attain-
ments necessary for teachers, the appointment of teachers, and
the fixing of a definite salary for each. The Act further provides
that no teacher or other person shall teach or criticize the
doctrine of any church, religious sect, or denomination, or shall
attempt to influence the pupils for or against any church or
religious sect in any public school.^^
In contemplation of the foregoing Act, the reasons for declining
the petition of Father Torra are obvious. While his request
was in perfect accord with the practices of the Spanish Govern-
ment, an institution endowed by the Government and managed
wholly as a private enterprise, without any direction or super-
vision by the Government, is very unusual under the American
flag.
A REQUEST FOR AUTHORITY TO CONTINUE THE NORMAL SCHOOL
On March 18, 1901, Father Torra wrote Brig. Gen. George
W. Davis, provost-marshal of Manila, as follows :
I have the honor to inform you that the school called the Superior Normal
School for Schoolmasters is about to be incorporated by law, but in the
meanwhile, according to the president of the Philippine Commission, it
^^' Act 74 of the Philippine Commission.
166 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
requires authorization to continue in the work of teaching. The name of
the school up to the present has been the Superior Normal School for
Schoolmasters and in the future will be known by this name.
I hope, sir, that you will be kind enough to grant written authority for
the continuation of this school on the same conditions as during the last two
years.
The following reply to the foregoing communication was
submitted by Dr. David P. Barrows, at that time city super-
intendent of schools for Manila :
This institution, although belonging to and under the direction of a reli-
gious order, was established by the Spanish Government as a factor in its
system of instruction, all salaries and expenses being paid from the public
funds. This arrangement continued after the American occupation by a
verbal order of the military governor authorizing the payment to this insti-
tution and to the Ateneo of 1,145 pesos every month for the salaries of the
teachers and 187.17 pesos for rent of the buildings used by the said religious
order. The normal school was also furnished material for its classes through
this department.
By a recent resolution of the Philippine Commission, this institution
ought not to receive any aid from the public funds after the present month.
This school will not henceforth form part of the public-school system, but
will be on the same footing as any other private school. In section 25 of
the law establishing the Department of Public Instruction we read: "There
shall be nothing in this law to prevent, hinder, or stop the formation and
continuation of private schools in these Islands." It appears that written
authority is not necessary for the continuation of this institution as a private
school, but there seems to be no reason why it shall not be given.
THE WITHDRAWAL OF FINANCIAL SUPPORT AND FINAL CLOSING OF THE NORMAL
SCHOOL
On March 30, 1901, Maj. Gen. Arthur McArthur promulgated
an order authorizing the Superior Normal School to continue
its work as a private institution, but withholding further financial
assistance.
Owing to the unsettled times incident to the war, the increase
in the cost of living, the withdrawal of financial support, the
discarding of Spanish as the language of the schools, and the
change in the- sovereignty of the Islands, the normal school
was never able to get fairly upon its feet after the American
occupation. However, it remained open and continued to turn
out small classes of graduates until 1905, when its doors were
finally closed after a useful career of forty years.'^^
^"^ The present Philippine Normal School is in no way an outgrowth of the
Spanish Normal School for Men Teachers. For several years the two insti-
tutions were located on adjoining campuses, but each managed its own
affairs and sent forth its graduates entirely independent of the other.
IX, D. 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 167
GRADUATES OF THE NORMAL SCHOOL FROM 1866 TO 1905
Graduates. Graduates.
1866 14 1887 46
1867 25 1888 59
1868 27 1889 50
1869''= 0 1890 39
1870 29 1891 40
1871 39 1892 46
1872 54 1893 51
1873 53 1894 111
1874 65 1895 32
1875 79 1896 39
1876 120 1897 26
1877 78 1898 26
1878 81 1899^^ 0
1879 66 1900 10
1880 55 1901 12
1881 51 1902 20
1882 50 1903 19
1883 29 1904 25
1884 33 1905 11
^^^^ ^^ Total 1,693
1886 49
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Barrantes, Vicente. La Instruccion Primaria en Filipinas desde 1595.
Madrid (1870). — In the Philippine Library.
2. Blair, Emma H., and Robertson, James A. The Philippine Islands,
1493-1898. The Arthur H. Clark Company, Cleveland (1904).— A
documentary history comprising accounts of explorations, military
expeditions, descriptions of the Islands and their peoples, and records
of the Catholic missions. 55 volumes.
3. Ba^es. — A code of regulations applicable to students of Mindanao who
desire to attend the Normal School. MS. in the Ateneo de Manila,
dated May 18 (1894).
4. Bases propuestas entre la Compania General de Tabacos y por la Com-
pafiia de Jesus. — This document is a preliminary agreement for the
erecting of the building in Ermita where the Normal School was
located from 1886 until 1905. MS. in the Ateneo.
5. Boletin Oficial de Magisterio Filipino. Manila (1895-1898), 1-3.— Co-
pies in the Philippine Library, the Ateneo, and the Central Seminary
of San Francisco Xavier.
6. Comision de Estudios. A statement dated May 3, 1866, giving the
names of the Commissioners of Instruction. MS. in the Ateneo.
'^ During the first few years of the history of the normal school, the
annual sessions closed in December; but in 1869 the time of closing was
changed from December until the following April; hence the lack of grad-
uates for 1869.
^ In 1899 no one took the examination on account of the war which was
then in progress.
168 The Philippine Journal of Science i^u
7. Communication to the Governor-General by the Director of the Superior
Normal School regarding the renting of a building at Santa Ana, dated
August 14, 1880. Reply of the Governor-General, dated October 30,
1880. Letters in the Ateneo.
8. Creacion Oficial del Observatorio de Manila y relaciolies de la misma
con la Escuela Normal (1884-1900).— MS. in the Ateneo.
9. Cuenta de Gastos de Instruccion de la Escuela Normal de Maestros de
Instruccion Primaria de esta Capital. — This is a statement of the
equipment, together with the cost of each article. MS. in the Ateneo.
10. CUEVAS, Jose Fernandez. Plan de Instruccion Primaria, April 20
(1861). Also, Instruccion Primaria, April 29 (1861).— MSS. in the
Ateneo.
11. Datos facilitados al Exmo. Sor. Director de Admon. Civil por el R. P.
Director de la Escuela Normal a fines de Mayo de 1889. — MS. in the
Ateneo.
12. El Seminario y Escuela Normal de San Xavier a Maria Imaculada en
el quincuagesimo aniversario de su Definicion Dogmatica (1904). —
MS. in the Ateneo.
13. Estados de la Escuela Normal. — A series of tables and outlines, giving
statistical and other information. In the Ateneo.
14. Grifol, Daniel. La Instruccion Primaria en las Islas Filipinas. — A
collection of school laws from 1863 to 1894. Manila, 1894. In the
Philippine Library, the Ateneo, and the Central Seminary of San
Francisco Xavier.
15. Historia de la Escuela Normal de Manila (1865-1872).— MS. in the
Ateneo.
16. Index of Examinations for the Degree of Teacher (1865-1905). — A
book in the Central Seminary of San Francisco Xavier.
17. Instruccion Primaria. Clippings from the Diario de Manila, September
19 and 20 (1883).— In the Ateneo.
18. Instruccion Primaria. — Clippings from La Oceania Espafiola, September
18 and 20 (1880). In the Ateneo.
19. Luengo, Francisco G. Martin. A letter to Father Juan Ricart, written
from Surigao, January 25 (1881). In the Ateneo.
20. Official Register, giving a digest of decrees, correspondence, and other
information relating to the Normal School. A book in the Central
Seminary of San Francisco Xavier.
21. Padilla, Mariano. San Carlos, Pangasinan, graduated 1888. A MS.
prepared by Mr. Padilla. It is in the possession of the author. Facsi-
miles of diplomas appear in the appendix.
22. Parrafo sobre las Escuelas Normales. — A general discussion on secular
normal schools. MS. in the Ateneo.
23. Primer Certamen Pedagogico de Filipinas. This is a book of about 100
pages comprising the proceedings and essays presented in the first
pedagogical contest. The book is No. 1 of volume 2 of the Boletin
Oficial de Magisterio Filipino. In the Ateneo.
24. Proyecto de Plan de Instruccion Primaria y de Establecimiento de una
Escuela Normal de Maestros en Manila redactado por la Junta nom-
brada al efecto en 1855, y Presentado al Gobernador General en 7 de
Marzo de 1861 seguido del voto particular del vocal P. Gainza, Domi-
nico, sobre Escuelas en idioma Castellano, al cual se opone. — MS. in
the Ateneo.
IX, D. 2 Cain: History of the Spanish Normal School 169
25. Prospectos y Reglamentos de la Escuela Normal de Manila (1900-
1901). —In the Ateneo.
26. Reglamento Interior de la Escuela Normal. — MS. in the Ateneo.
27. Relacion de la Fundacion, Regimen Interior, Desarrollo y Frutos de
la Escuela Normal de Maestros escrita en 1887. — MS. in the Ateneo.
28. Report of the Philippine Commission, 1900. Government Printing
Office, Washington (1900).
29. Education in the Philippines. Report of the United States Commis-
sioner of Education, 1902. Government Printing Office, Washington
(1903), 2.
30. Ricart, Father Juan. A letter written to the Director of Civil Admin-
istration, October 1, 1883, regarding the destruction of the normal
school building. In the Ateneo.
31. Reyes, Francisco. Comunicacion al Gobernador General por el Presi-
dente de la Comision de E studios. — MS. in the Ateneo.
32. Varios Proyectos de Planes de Estudios Redactados por las Comisiones
Nombrados al Efecto. Manila (1856-1866).— MSS. in the Ateneo.
ILLUSTRATIONS
Plates I and II. Certificates issued by the Spanish normal school.
Ill and IV. Indorsements on certificates issued by the Spanish normal
school.
171
o
o
I
o
<
DC
O
Q
UJ
<0
W
u
I-
<
o
L.
H
QC
UJ
O
UJ
<
_l
Q.
<
Q.
(f)
Ml
I
I-
>-
m
<
<
11^
\^^^
V
.^_^J * 1 >4^
^~n ^ ^ i ©' ?~ 4
^^
I-
<
O
I-
QC
O
Q
<
-I
Q.
Q
><
I-
<
o
Ll
X
o
u
V)
a:
o
Q
<
-J
>/
NEUE HOMOPTEREN VON DEN PHILIPPINEN
Von L. Melichar
(Briinn, Moravia, Austria)
Ein Tafel
DIETYOPHORIN^^
Orthopagus (Udugama, Anagnia) philippinus sp. nov. (Taf. I, Fig.
1 u. 2.)
Scheitel doppelt so lang wie zwischen den Augen breit,
zwischen den vorderen Augenecken eingeschniirrt, die Seiten-
rander gescharft und aufgerichtet, die Oberflache zwischen den
Augen zu einem kleinen schwarzen starkglanzenden Knopfe
erhoben, welcher mit dem ebenso kallosen glanzenden schwarzen
Hocker der Scheitelspitze zusammenhangt. Eine ebensolche
schwarze runde Schwiele befindet sich an der Basis der Stirne
am Ende des Mittelkieles, wahrend die Seitenkiele an der
Aussenseite von einer Reihe von schwarzen Makeln begleitet,
sich oberhalb der Schwiele mit einander verbinden. Die
Seitenkiele der langen Stirne konvergieren nach unten und
reichen bis zur Clypeusnaht. Der Clypeus in der Mitte und an
den Seiten gekielt, die untere Halfte dunkelbraun, das Labrum
an der Basis hellgelb; auf der Clypeusnaht 4 kleine dunkle
Punktchen die • inneren einander genahert, die ausseren am
Rande. In der oberen Wangenecke (zur Scheitelspitze) 3
schwarze Punkte, der 3. dicht am Rande, je eine kleine Makel
vor der Ocelle, der Fiihlergrube und am unteren Wangenrande.
Pronotum halb so lang wie der Scheitel, hinten stark stumpf-
winkelig ausgeschnitten, im Winkel selbst deutlich eingekerbt,
auf der Scheibe mit 2 eingestochenen Punkten, zwischen denselben
ein starker hellgelber Langskiel. Schildchen mit 3 Langskielen,
der Mittelkiel stark, und wie die Schildchenspitze hellgelb.
Die Fliigeldecken hyalin, glashell, glanzend, mit gelblich braunen
Adern, einer breiten halbmondformigen Langsbinde am inneren
Apikalrande ohne hyaline Randflecken, in welcher die Quernerven
hellgelblich sind, und eine das Stigma nach innen iiberragende
Langsmakel in der Mitte des Costalrandes. Stigma vierzellig.
Auf den Seiten der braunen Vorderbrust eine helle breite schrage
Binde. Der Bauch unregelmassig braun gefleckt. Die Vorder-
schenkel an der Unterkante erweitert, die Erweiterung vor der
173
174 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Spitze zahnformig abgesetzt, dunkel gefleckt und gebandert, die
Schienen an der Basis und Spitze und zwei Ringe in der Mitte
braun. Hinterschienen mit 6 schwarzen Dornen, an der Basis
derselben schrage schwarze Striche. Vordertarsen und die
Spitzen der hinteren Tarsenglieder braun.
Lange sammt Flugeldecken 12.5 mm. {$ , $ ) .
Luzon, Los Baiios, Mt. Maquiling (C. F, Baker).
Fiinf Exemplare erhalten.
CIXIIN.^
Dystheatias punctata sp. nov.
Schmutzig zitronengelb oder rostgelb, mit schwarzen Punkten
auf den Flugeldecken.
Scheitel quer viereckig, die Augen nicht uberragend, der
Hinterrand gerade, auf dem Scheitelrande 2 flache Eindrucke.
Stirne zum Clypeus verbreitert, in der Mitte ein deutlicher
Langskiel, welcher sich auf den Clypeus fortsetzt. Ocellen klein,
die 3. Ocelle nicht vorhanden, Fiihler kurz. Pronotum vorne
gerade, den Hinterrand des Scheitels beriihrend, hinten winkelig
ausgeschnitten. Schildchen von den Seiten zusammengedriickt,
oben flach mit 3 parallelen Langskielen, von welchen der Mittel-
kiel besonders eleviert erscheint. Flugeldecken stark vertikal
gestellt, nach hinten allmahlig verbreitert, hinten schief nach
vorne gerundet. Das Geader mit feinen farblosen Kornchen
ohne Harchen besetzt. Der aussere und innere Sektor ist im
ersten Drittel des Coriums gegabelt, der mittlere Sektor einfach.
Auf der Teilungsstelle der Clavusader, ein schwarzer Punkt, in
der Mitte des Coriums 2 solche in einer Querlinie stehende
Punkte, zuweilen treten noch am Costalrande 2 braunliche Plinkt-
chen auf; am Apicalrande an den Spitzen der Apicaladern
schwarze Punkte. Fliigel hyalin, nicht getriibt, die Unterseite
und Beine blass gelblich, zuweilen grlinlichgelb.
Lange 4-4.5 mm. ($ , $ ) .
Luzon, Los Bafios (C. F. Baker).
Dystheatias fuscovenosa sp. nov.
In der Form und Struktur der vorhergehenden Art gleich, nur
sind die Sektoren rostbraun und mit ebensolchen Kornchen
besetzt, das Geader im Apicalteile ist mit der Grundfarbe (blass
gelblich) gleich. Am Apikalrande dunkle Randpunkte.
Lange 4.5 mm. ( $ ) .
Luzon, Los Bafios (C F. Baker).
Die Gattung Dystheatias Kirk, steht den Gattungen Kirhyana
IX, D. 2 Melichar: Neiie Homopteren von den Philippinen 175
Melich. und Ptoleria Stal sehr nahe. Kirbyana unterscheidet sich
durch den winkelig ausgeschnittenen Vorderrand, Ptoleria durch
den in der Mitte des Coriums gegabelten mittleren Sektor der
Fliigeldecken von Dystheatias.
Genus BENNARIA novum
Scheitel sehr schmal, stark reduziert, als schmaler nach hinten
abfallender quer viereckiger Raum wahrnehmbar, so dass von
oben der grosste Teil der Stirne sichtbar ist. Die Stirne von
der Seite betrachtet gerundet, lang und schmal, die Rander
gescharft und aufgerichtet, die Stirnflache glatt, ohne Mittelkiel.
Clypeus kurz, in der Mitte und seitlich gekielt, an der Clypeusnaht
die 3. Ocelle deutlich sichtbar. Rostrum diinn, bis zur Mitte
des Hinterleibes reichend. Fuhler kurz. Pronotum sehr schmal,
hinten breit winkelig ausgeschnitten. Schildchen so breit wie
lang, mit 3 parallelen Langskielen. Fliigeldecken an der Basis
schmal, nach hinten verbreitert, hinten quer gestutzt, mit
abgerundeten Ecken. Verlauf der Adern wie bei Benna Walk.
An den Seiten der Brust ein nach aussen vorstehendes stielartiges
Organ, welches an der Spitze becherartig erweitert und mit
weissem Sekret bedeckt ist (wie bei Benna). Fliigel hyalin.
Beine massig lang, Hinterschienen ohne Dornen.
Von der Gattung Benna Walk, insbesondere durch die nicht
gekielte Stirne zu unterscheiden.
Typ. gen : Bennaria bimacida sp. nov.
Bennaria bimacula sp. nov. (Taf. I, Fig. 3.)
Braun, die Kiele des Schildchens schwarz. Fliigeldecken
gelblich braun, mit einer grossen runden schwarzen Makel auf
der Teilungsstelle des inneren Sektors. Das Geader und die
Costalrandader schwarzlich. Im Apikalteile 3 bogenformige
aus braunen Makeln zusammengesetzte Querbinden. Fliigel
rauchbraun, mit schwarzen Adern. Hinterleib dunkelbraun.
Beine braunlichgelb.
Lange 8 mm.
Luzon, Los Baiios (C. F, Baker).
TJgyops g^anulatus sp. nov.
Gelblichbraun. Scheitel klein, trapezoidal, die Basis der Stirne
von oben sichtbar, auf welcher die beiden Stirnkielaste in die
Ecken des Scheitels einmiinden. Stirne sehr lang, oben schmal,
zum Clypeus etwas wenig verbreitert und dann wieder verengt.
Die Rander fein gekielt. In der Mitte der Stirn ein Langskiel
176 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
welcher sich im unteren Drittel gabelig teilt, die Gabelaste,
dicht neben einander eine schmale Spalte bildend, mlinden in
die vorderen Scheitelecken. Clypeus halb so lang wie die
Stirne, in der Mitte und an den Seiten gekielt. Die Ftihler
lang, den Kopf weit uberragend, das 1. und 2. Fiihlerglied fast
gleich lang, die Fuhlerborste kurz. Pronotum etwas wenig
langer als der Scheitel, vorne gerade gestutzt, hinten sehr
schwach gebuchtet, fast gerade, oben mit 3 Kielen und 2
eingestochenen Punkten. Schildchen so breit wie lang, mit 3
Langskielen. Die Flugeldecken schmal, lang, 4 mal so lang
wie einzeln breit, nach hinten nicht verbreitert, hinten einfach
gerundet. Der aussere Sektor in der Mitte des Coriums gegabelt,
der aussere Gabelast vor der Queraderlinie nochmals geteilt,
der 2. Sektor einfach, der 3. Sektor hinter der Mitte geteilt.
Aus der Queraderlinie entspringen 9 Apikaladem, von denen die
3. (von aussen) gegabelt ist. Die Apicalzellen sind sehr lang
und schmal, der Apikalrand hat einen fein quergestrichelten
Saum. Im Clavus eine Gabelader, deren Schaft in den
Schlussrand mundet. Die ganze Coriumflache ist mit feinen
Kornchen besetzt, die auch zu beiden Seiten der Sektoren
liegen. Die rauchbraune Apikalmembrane ist nicht gekornt,
nur die Apikaladern fein granuliert, so dass sie bei schiefem
Lichte wie angenagt erscheinen. Fliigel rauchbraun. Unter-
seite und Beine blass gelblich, die nicht besonders langen
Hinterschienen mit 3 Dornen.
Lange 6 mm. ( 9 ) .
Luzon, Los Banos (C. F. Baker).
ACHILIN./E
Genus TANGINA Melichar
Tangina Melichar, Horn. Fauna Ceylon (1903), 44.
Eurynomeus Kirk, Bull. Haw. Sugar PI. Assoc. (1906), 1, 422.
Tangina qnadripunctulata sp. nov.
Blassgelb, die Unterseite heller. Auf der Scheitelspitze 2
schwarze Punkte, und auf dem Schildchen jederseits ausserhalb
der Seitenkiele ein grosser schwarzer Punkt. Die Augen grau,
am unteren vorderen Rande derselben eine schwarze Makel.
Die Stirne ist etwas gewolbt, mit starkem Mittelkiel, die Rander
fein gekiel. Flugeldecken hyalin blassgelb, der aussere Sektor
ist vor der Mitte des Coriums gegabelt, beide Gabelaste am
Ende bogenformig in die Costa einmiindend. (Auf. Taf. II,
Fig. 19b, Tangina hipunctata Mel. ist die Gabelung des 1. Sek-
IX, D, 2 Melichar: Neue Homopteren von den Philippinen 177
tors nicht eingezeichnet.) Hinterschienen mit einem Dorn vor
der Mitte.
Lange 3.5 mm.
Luzon, Los Banos (C. F. Baker).
Tangina quadrilineata sp. nov.
Scheitel quadratisch, nach unten geneigt, die Augen nicht
iiberragend, in der Mitte fein gekielt. Die Stirne wie bei T.
bipunctata Melich. gebildet, mit einem Mittelkiel, welcher sich
auf den Clypeus fortsetzt. Kopf und Pronotum gelblichweiss.
Schildchen gelb mit 2 schwarzen Punkten und zwar befindet
sich jederseits ein Punkt in der vom ausseren Kiele und dem
Schildchenrande gebildeten Ecke. Ein grosser schwarzer Punkt
auf den Seiten der Vorderbrust. Fliigeldecken hyalin, milch-
weiss, an der Basis mehr gelblich, mit 2 scharfen schwarzen
Langsstreifen, der aussere Streifen befindet sich auf dem ersten
Sektor und dem inneren Gabelaste derselben, der zweite nimmt
den Schlussrand ein. Apicalmembrane iibereinander geschla-
gen, rauchbraun. Flugel hyalin, milchig getriibt. Die Unter-
seite und Beine gelblichweiss. Hinterschienen mit einem kleinen
Dorn vor der Mitte.
Lange 4 mm. (s , ? ) .
Luzon, Los Banos (C. F. Baker).
Majella philippina sp. nov.
Der Scheitel die Augen iiberragend, schmal, nach vorne
verschmalert, die Seitenrander blattartig erweitert und auf-
gerichtet mit den gleichfalls blattartigen Randern der Stirne
in eine stumpfe Ecke zusammenstossend. In der Mitte der
Scheitelflache ein feiner Langskiel. Der Scheitel sowie die
blattartigen Rander derselben und der Stirne weiss, vor den
Augen an den Seiten des Kopfes 3 schwarze Striche. Die
Stirne dreieckig, oben einen scharfen Winkel bildend, nach unten
verbreitert, die Seiten abgerundet, die Flache schwarzbraun,
mit einer weissen dreieckigen Makel in der oberen Stirnecke.
Clypeus kurz, braun. Augen schwarz, Fiihler kurz, gelblich.
Pronotum sehr schmal, der Vorderrand zwischen den Augen
bis zur Mitte derselben vorgeschoben, dunkel gefleckt, Pronotum
so lang wie breit, mit 3 parallelen Langskielen, die Oberflache
schwarz und braun gefleckt, die hintere Partie zwischen den
Seitenkielen einschliesslich, diese und die Schildchenspitze weiss,
dasselbst 2 dunkle Punkte zwischen den Kielen und 2 braune
Stricheln vor der Spitze. An diese weisse Makel schliesst sich
ein schwarzer Langsstrich, der auf dem Mittelkiele liegt.
178 'J'he Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Flugeldecken langlich, hinten stark abschiissig, wie gebrochen,
und iibereinander geschlagen, braun, an der Costalseite mit
roten Kornchen, auf den dunklen Adern mit weissen Kornchen
dicht besetzt. Im Clavus am Schildchenrande ist ein kleiner
hyaliner Fleck mit schwarzem Punkte auf der weissen Cla-
vusader. In der rauchbraunen am Apikalrande schmal rot
gesaumten Apikalmembrane sind die Apikaladem und Queradern
weisslich, mit schwarzen Piinktchen besetzt. Am Stigma ein
schwarzer glanzender Punkt mit rotem Hofe in Form eines
Auges. Fliigel rauchbraun, Unterseite schwarz, die Beine braun,
die Schenkel schwarzlich, Hinterschienen mit einem kleinen
Dome in der Mitte.
Diese Art ist der australisehen M. majella Kirk, ahnlich, doch
nach der sehr kurzen Beschreibung Kirkaldy's lasst sich die
Identitat nicht feststellen.
Lange 3.5 mm.
Luzon, Los Baiios (C F. Baker).
Callinesia philippina sp. nov.
Gelblichbraun mit braunen Flecken gezeichnet. Scheitel etwas
wenig Ifenger als an der Basis breit, vorne gerundet, flach, die
Seiten fein gekielt, auf der Scheitelspitze beiderseits des durch-
laufenden Mittelkieles ein schwarzer Langsstrich. Stirne ziem-
lich breit, nach oben deutlich aber nicht stark verschmalert, in der
Mitte gekielt, die Rander fein gekielt und zum Clypeus gerundet.
Die Stirne gelblichbraun, der Clypeus dunkler. Das Gesicht
ist stark horizontal geneigt, der Scheitel nach unten abschiissig.
Ocellen gross, rot, Fiihler globulos. Pronotum halb so lang wie
der Scheitel, vorne gebogen, hinten gebuchtet, in der Mitte
gekielt, Schildchen hellgelb mit 3 hellen Langskielen, zwischen
denselben vorne und hinten und an den Seiten braun gefleckt,
Flugeldecken hyalin, mit zahlreichen braunen Flecken, welche 2
nach vorne und innen schrag laufende Binden bilden, am Costal-
rande mehrere schrage Striche und ein schwarzer Punkt an der
Basis der 2. Apikalzelle. Die Apicalmembrane rauchbraun. Die
Unterseite dunkelbraun, die Beine schmutzig gelblichbraun.
Lange 4.25 mm.
Luzon, Los Bafios (C. F, Baker).
Zu dieser Gattung gehort: C fimbriolata Melich., Hom. Fauna
Ceylon, s. 47 (Paratangia) .
Nysia alba sp. nov.
Etwas wenig grosser und breiter als N. atrovenosa Leth.
Cremeweiss, bloss das Schildchen blass gelb. Der Scheitelkiel
IX, D, 2 Melichar: Neue Homopteren von den PhiKppinen 179
parallel, gescharft und aufgerichtet in die ebenso gescharften
Seitenrander der Stirne bogenformig (Seitenansicht) iibergehend.
Die Stirne parallel, zwischen die Augen sehr unbedeutend
verschmalert, in der Mitte nicht gekielt. Clypeus klein dreieckig,
gewolbt, an den Seiten gekielt. Fiihler kurz, gelblich. Pronotum
sehr schmaL Schildchen gewolbt, mit einem deutlichen Langs-
kiel in der Mitte. Fliigeldecken milchweiss, opak, mit weissen
Adern, der aussere Sektor an der Innenseite, die aussere
Clavusader auf beiden Seiten gekornt. Verlauf der Adern wie
bei N. atrovenosa. Sechs Apikalnerven, der 2. und 3. von
aussen gerechnet gegabelt. Fliigel hyalin, milchweiss. Hinter-
leibsriicken schwarzlich. Die Unterseite und Beine blass gelb-
lichweiss. An der Hinterleibsspitze beim $ haufig weisses
flockiges Sekret.
Lange 6 mm., Breite 1.5 mm. ( ^ , $ ).
Luzon, Los Banos (C. F, Baker),
Lamenia flavescens sp. nov.
Kopf, Pronotum und Schildchen rotgelb, Fliigeldecken hyalin,
schwach gelblichbraun tingiert. Augen schwarz. Der Scheitel
ist quer viereckig. Die langliche Stirne in der Mitte nicht
gekielt, die Seitenrander gescharft. Augen verhaltnismassig
sehr klein, schwarz. Unter den Fuhlern eine deutliche lamellen-
artige Querleiste. Das Geader der Fliigeldecken dunkler, Flugel
graulichbraun, mit dunklen Adern. Der Mittelkiel des stark
gewolbten Schildchens ist stark, die Seitenkiele kaum angedeutet.
Vor der Schildchenspitze eine tief e Querf urche- Beine blassgelb.
Lange 4 mm.
Luzon, Los Banos (C F. Baker).
RICANIIN^^
Pochazia marginalis sp. nov. (Taf. I, Fig. 4.)
Pechschwarz, matt. Stirne schwarz, in der Mitte mit einem
feinen Langskiel versehen. Clypeus schwarz. Pronotum in der
Mitte gekielt, mit 2 eingestochenen Punkten. Schildchen mit 3
Kielen, die inneren Gabelaste der Seitenkielen mit dem Mittelkiel
vorne verbunden. Fliigeldecken breit dreieckig, der Costalrand
vor der Apicalspitze flach eingebuchtet, der Marginalrand konvex.
Die Fliigeldecken schwarz, ein langlicher Randfleck hinter der
Mitte des Costalrandes und der ganze Marginalrand weiss hyalin.
Die Costalrandader rostgelblich. Fliigel ranch braun. Die
Unterseite schwarz, Beine braunlichgelb.
Lange 13 mm. ; Spannweite 24 mm.
Luzon, Mt. Maquihng (C. F. Baker) .
180 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Pochazina bakeri sp. nov. (Taf. I, Fig. 5.)
Der P. handlirschi Melich. ahnlich, die Stirne, Unterseite und
Beine lehmgelb, die Oberseite braun, die Flugeldecken mit
griinlichem Schimmer auf der Diskalflache und kupferartig
glanzenden Impressionen am Costal- und Marginalrande. Hinter
der Mitte der Costa nur ein schmutzig gelblicher hyaliner
Keilfleck, in den Apikalecken und langs des Marginalrandes 3
kleine hyaline Punkte.
Lange 13 mm. ; Spannweite 24 mm.
Luzon, Los Banos (C. F. Baker).
TAFELERKLARUNG
Tafel I
Fig. 1. Orthopagus philippinus sp. nov. Kopf und Thorax von oben
gesehen.
2. Orthopagus philippinus sp. nov. Kopf von vorn.
3. Bennaria himacula gen. et sp. nov.
4. Pochazia marginalis sp. nov.
5. Pochazina hakeri sp. nov.
181
Melichar: Neue Homopteren.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 2.
Fig. 1. Orthopagus philippinus sp. nov. Kopf und Thorax von oben gesehen. 2. Orthopagus
philippinus sp. nov. Kopf von vorn. 3. Bennaria bimacula gen. et sp. nov. 4. Pochazia
marginalis sp. nov. 5. Pochazina bakeri sp. nov.
TAFEL I.
NOUVEAUX CYNIPIDES DES PHILIPPINES
Par J. J. KlEFFER
{Bitsch, Germany)
I. EUCCELIN^^
Genus PROMIOM(ERA Ashmead
Ashmead a donne une courte diagnose du genre Promiomcera,
mais il n'a pas decrit Fespece typique et jusqu'a present on
ne connaissait aucune espece qui put s'y rapporter. Meme
Tespece que nous allons decrire ne concorde pas entierement
avec la diagnose etablie par Ashmead, les antennes n'etant pas
filiformes, comme chez Fespece observee par Ashmead, mais
en massue.
Promiomoera rufithorax sp. nov. ( 9 .)
Noir, lisse et brillant ; thorax d'un roux clair, antennes, hanches
et pattes jaunes, massue antennaire noire. Les antennes se
composent de 11 articles, dont les deux premiers sont gros, le
2« globuleux, 3-5 tres minces, graduellement raccourcis, le 3^
deux fois aussi long que gros, les 6 suivants subitement grossis,
un peu plus longs que gros, le dernier en ovo'ide. Thorax aussi
haut que long; sillons parapsidaux nuls. Scutellum a fossettes
petites, cupule mediocre. Ailes ciliees, stigmatique droite, trois
fois aussi longue que la 3« partie de la sous-costale, un peu
plus courte que le radius, cellule radiale un peu plus longue
que large, ouverte a la marge dans sa moitie distale, areole
nulle. Abdomen avec une ceinture rousse a sa base, un peu
comprime, allonge, aussi long que le reste du corps.
Taille: 1 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (C. F. Baker).
Genus SCHIZOSEMA Kieffer
Schizosema cellularis sp. nov. ( $ -)
D'un roux marron; vertex noir, antennes et pattes d'un roux
clair. Front convexe, lisse et brillant comme tout le corps.
Antennes composees de 14 articles et non de 15 comme d'ordi-
naire, articles 3-14 subcylindriques, un peu plus longs que gros,
subegaux ; 3® article non excave ni grossi. Thorax pas plus long
que haut, sillons parapsidaux nuls. Scutellum avec une impres-
' sion transversale en avant, sans fossettes, cupule petite, elevee.
Ailes longues, ciliees, echancrees en arriere de Textremite alaire,
183
184 The Philippine Journal of Science i9X4
nervures pales, cellule radiale ouverte a la marge, exactement
semicirculaire, cubitus oblitere dans sa I®'* partie, bien marqu6
et percurrent dans la 2®. Abdomen sans ceinture a sa base,
a peine comprime, plus long que le thorax, moitie anterieure
plus sombre que le thorax, moitie posterieure plus claire que
le thorax.
Taille: 1.2 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling (C. F. Baker).
Genus COTHONASPIS Hartig
Cothonaspis (Hexaplasta) minima sp. nov. ( ? .)
Noir, lisse et brillant; articles antennaires 3-7 roussatres,
pattes d'un blanc brunatre. Antennes de 13 articles, dont les
6 demiers sont subitement grossis, deux fois aussi gros que
les precedents, presque deux fois aussi longs que gros, subcy-
lindriques et munis de quatre aretes percurrentes et depassant
un peu leur extremite, 13® article ellipsoidal, 3-8 beaucoup plus
minces que les deux premiers, subcylindriques et serres, le 3«
deux fois aussi long que gros, le 4® un peu plus long que gros,
5-7 pas plus longs que gros. Thorax tres convexe, subglobuleux.
Sillons parapsidaux nuls. Fossettes du scutellum petites, cupule
assez grande, elliptique, avec un point enfonce en avant et un
autre en arriere. Ailes hyalines, longuement ciliees, nervures
brunes, cellule radiale triangulaire, ouverte a la marge dans
les deux tiers distaux, un peu plus longue que large, 3® partie
de la sous-costale ponctiforme, radius un peu plus long que la
stigmatique, cubitus oblitere dans sa 1«^ partie, percurrent et
bien marque dans la seconde. Abdomen comprime, un peu plus
long que le thorax, ceinture etroite.
Taille: 0.8 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios (C F. Baker),
Genus EUCCELIDEA Ashmead
Euccelidea maquilingensis sp. nov. ( 9 .)
Noir, lisse et brillant; mandibules, hanches et pattes d'un
roux jaune. Tete transversale vue d'en haut, triangulaire et
plus haute que large vue de devant. Yeux allonges et glabres,
relies a la bouche par un sillon oblique. Joues egalant les deux
tiers de la longueur des yeux. Antennes de 13 articles, dont le
2« est globuleux, 3-13 filiformes, pubescents, graduellement
raccourcis, le 3® presque trois fois aussi long que gros, plus
mince que les autres, le 12® un peu plus long que gros, un peu
plus court que le 13®. Thorax aussi haut que long, tres convexe.
IX, D, 2 Kieffer: Nouveaux Cynipides des Philippines 185
Pronotum profondement decoupe en arriere. Mesonotum pas
plus long que large, sillons parapsidaux percurrents, profonds,
reunis un peu avant le bord posterieur, vers le i posterieur,
en une arete qui atteint le bord. Scutellum sans fossettes en
avant, tout le dessus etant occupe par la cupule qui est elliptique
et creusee en ellipse, surface posterieure perpendiculaire. Ailes
hyalines, depassant beaucoup Tabdomen, brievement ciliees,
nervures brunes, cellule radiale pointue, fermee, deux fois et
demie aussi longue que large, 3® partie de la sous-costale et
stigmatique tres obliques, la stigmatique de moitie plus longue
que la 3^ partie de la sous-costale, radius deux fois et demie
aussi long que la stigmatique, areole nulle, cubitus evanoui en
avant, percurrent dans sa 2^ partie. Petiole aussi long que gros ;
abdomen tres comprime, ayant sa plus grande hauteur en arriere,
ceinture nulle.
Taille: 1.8-2 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios et Mont Maquiling (C F.
Baker) .
II. LIOPTERONIN^^
Genus ALLOCYNIPS novum
S . Tete vue de devant trapezoidale, vue de dessus tres
transversale. Yeux gros, allonges, glabres, touchant le bord
occipital, d'un tiers plus longs que les joues. Vertex avec deux
aretes qui vont du cote externe de chaque scape jusqu^au bord
occipital, un espace triangulaire et releve, borde par une arete,
va en s'elargissant depuis les antennes jusqu'au bord occipital,
ou il renferme les ocelles disposes en triangle. Palpes maxil-
laires de 5 articles, les labiaux de 3. Antennes filiformes,
situees un peu avant le milieu des yeux, presque deux fois
plus distantes de la bouche que du bord occipital, composees
de 14 articles. Thorax deux fois aussi long que haut, peu
convexe. Pronotum decoupe en angle posterieurement, son
milieu presque ponctiforme et portant une spinule courte et
verticale, les lobes atteignent les ecaillettes. Mesonotum allonge,
pointu en avant, sillons parapsidaux percurrents. Scutellum
allonge, graduellement aminci en arriere, presque horizontal, avec
deux fossettes en avant. Metathorax en cone horizontal et
court, termine par un anneau auquel s'insere le petiole, comme
chez Aulacinus, Ailes pubescentes, cubitus ayant son origine
au-dessus du milieu de la basale, cellule cubitale unique et fermee,
cellule radiale fermee aussi au bord alaire. Tons les tarses
plus longs que les tibias, depourvus d'appendices, pattes poste-
186 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
rieures grossies, crochets tarsaux simples. Petiole aussi long
que gros, insere au-dessus des hanches posterieures, abdomen
aussi long que le thorax, graduellement grossi en arriere ou il
est obtus, non comprime, 2« tergite a peine plus long que le
3^ non ligulif orme quoique ses cotes soient graduellement retrecis,
3® et 4^ subegaux, 5® a peine plus court que le 4^, egal au
6% tous deux declives, 7® perpendiculaire et semicirculaire, les
3 derniers grossierement sculptes. Le type est Allocynips
ruflceps sp. nov.
Allocynips ruficeps sp. nov. ( S .)
Noir, lisse et brillant. Tete d'un roux clair, avec une ponctua-
tion grosse et dense. Palpes rouges. Antennes a peine plus
courtes que le corps, d'un noir brillant, scape le plus gros, de
moitie plus long que gros, 2^ article presque transversal, 3®
egalant les 2 premiers reunis, deux fois aussi long que gros, 4-14
graduellement amincis, trois a quatre fois aussi long que gros.
Prothorax d'un roux clair, lobes du pronotum a points gros,
ombiliques et denses. Mesonotum traverse par des aretes
transversales et assez denses, sillons parapsidaux profonds,
divergents fortement en avant. Scutellum reticule, a cellules
ombiliquees, les deux fossettes grandes et separees seulement
par une arete. Metathorax mat, grossierement ride, pubescent
de blanc. Ailes anterieures enfumees, cellule sous-costale,
mediane et sous-mediane presque hyalines, cellule radiale et
cubitale et une bande le long du bord en arriere de la cellule
radiale d'un brun noir, cellule cubitale etroite, deux fois aussi
longue que large, cellule radiale de moitie plus longue que la
cubitale, trois fois aussi longue que large, 2^ partie du radius
double de la 1^3® triple de la 2% presque droite, cubitus percurrent.
Ailes inferieures enfumees dans leur moitie distale, avec 3
crochets frenaux et la nervation ordinaire des Cynipides. Pattes
anterieures et intermediaires, y compris les hanches, d'un roux
clair, pattes posterieures a hanches deux fois aussi longues et
deux fois aussi grosses que les intermediaires, leur tibia et leur
tarse densement pubescent de gris, metatarse egalant les 4
articles suivants reunis, les articles 2-4 graduellement raccourcis,
5® egalant les 3 precedents reunis. Petiole avec 2 aretes con-
vergentes en avant, moitie anterieure du 5^ tergite, 6^ et 7^
tergite en avant couverts de points denses et tres gros; les
tergites se prolongent lateralement au-dela des sternites en forme
de lobes translucides.
Taille: 7.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquihng (C. F. Baker),
TWO NEW CYPRINOID FISHES OF THE GENUS BARBUS FROM
LAKE MANGUAO, PALAWAN, P. L
By Artemas L. Day
{From the Department of Zoology j College of Liberal Arts,
University of the Philippines)
One plate
During the long vacation at the end of the University year
1912-13, a joint expedition from the University of the Philip-
pines and the Bureau of Science was made to Palawan Island
in the interest of biological study. The party proceeded to
Taytay, a village of about 30 houses on a bay of the same
name. From the Coast and Geodetic Survey, I had learned
of the presence of a lake supposed to be southwestward of
Taytay. Exploration led to the location not only of one lake
near Taytay, but of two, one of them, however, being more of
a swamp full of grass than a lake except in the rainy season.
Lake Manguao is about 5 kilometers long from east to west
and from 2.5 to 3 kilometers wide from north to south. The
greatest depth discovered was 7 fathoms, a little to the south-
east of Bamboo or Cemetery Island, between the island and
the shore. There are very many islands in the lake, perhaps
as many as 25. These vary in size from a mere point of rock
to those having an area of perhaps 1 hectare.
Two trips were made to the larger of these lakes. Lake
Manguao, from which the new species of fishes, described in
this paper, were taken. With the exception of the shore along
the south side of the lake, which was mainly a sandy beach,
there was a shelving shore and small rock fragments, in many
places falling precipitously into the water. Some of the fishes
were taken from the extreme northeastern part of the lake
nearest to the town of Bantolan, but most were taken on the
western side near the site of the second camp. Many of the
larger fishes were readily caught with hook and line. The
smaller ones were taken in large numbers on a small net of
cheesecloth baited with cooked rice. This was placed in shallow
water and raised when a considerable number of fishes were
feeding above it.
In this paper, ''length of body'' is the distance from the
tip of snout to the end of the caudal vertebrae ; "length of head"
means from the tip of snout to the posterior margin of the
hard opercle; ''length of caudal peduncle'' covers the distance
from the posterior margin of anal to the uncovered ventral
margin of the caudal fin ; "length of snout" refers to the distance
187
188
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
from the median anterior point of the snout to the nostril;
"snout to occiput" covers the distance from the tip of the
snout to the posterior median dorsal line of the head; "height
of dorsal" and "height of anaF' refer to the distance from the
distal ends of the longest rays to their proximal ends, even
though they may be somewhat covered by scales at their proximal
ends.
Barbus bantolanensis sp. nov.
Length of head 2.85 to 3.2 in total length; depth of body
2.5 to 2.9 in total length; diameter of eye 5.3 to 5.8 in head,
that is, to the posterior margin of the hard opercle; diameter
of eye 1.84 to 2.06 in interorbital space and 1.08 to 1.35 in
snout; rostral barbel 1 to 1.3 in diameter of eye and % to % in
maxillary barbel.
Type, No. 2.
Measurements of 6 specimens of B, bantolanensis are given
in Tables I and II.
Table I. — Measurements of Barbus bantolanensis sp. nov.
Length of body
Length of head
Depth of body
Depth of caudal peduncle __
Length of caudal peduncle .
Length of snout
Diameter of eye
Interorbital width _.
Depth of head.-
Snout to occiput ._
Snout to dorsal
Snout to ventral
Length of dorsal base
Length of anal base —
Height of dorsal
Height of anal ___ —
Length of pectoral
Length of ventral
Length of caudal
Specimen No.-
Per cent J
b89
0.320
0.382
0.140
0.185
0.073
0.067
0.101
0.213
0.230
0.601
0.533
0.157
0.089
0.202
0.157
0.174
0.174
0.314
Per cent.^
bll8
0.313
0.377
0.152
0.169
0.080
0.059
0.122
0.228
0.245
0.601
0.533
0.156
0.084
0.199
0.165
0.177
0.169
0.305
Per cent.B.
bl02
0.352
0.352
0.137
0.171
0.088
0.063
0.122
0.230
0.240
0.607
0.578
0.151
0.088
0.215
0.156
0.215
0.186
0.343
Per cent.*
bl05
0.314
0.366
0.147
0.176
0.081
0.061
0.119
0.228
0.240
0.633
0.542
0.166
0.109
0.209
0.142
0.193
0.180
0.333
Per cent J
bl07
0.336
0.390
0.168
0.168
0.070
0.065
0.120
0.219
0.240
0.602
0.562
0.154
0.093
0.205
0.158
0.177
0.186
0.336
13
Per cent»
bll6
0.353
0.345
0.128
0. 176
0.088
0.061
0.123
0.247
0.256
0.626
0.566
0.154
0.079
0.207
0.163
0.216
0.190
0.347
Dorsal raysc _
Anal raysc
Scales in lateral line
Scales above lateral line..
Scales below lateral line.
Scales before dorsal
ni-8
ni-5
26
4i
4
9
in-8
ni-5
25
4i
4
III-8
in-5
25
4i
4
9
III-8
ni-5
26
4i
4
9
ni-8
ni-5
26
4i
4
III-8
ni-5
26
4i
4
10
« Referred to length of body, b Measurement in millimeters. <= Spinous and soft rays, respectively.
IX. D, 2 Day: Two New Cyprinoid Fishes 189
Table II. — Proportional measurements of Barhus bantolanensis sp. nov.
Proportional measurement.
Specimen No.—
Head in body
Depth in body
Eye in head —
Snout in head
Interorbital space in head-
Third dorsal spine in head.
3.06
2.61
4.83
4.14
3.22
1.70
Dorsal .
Anal---
Scales
Scales between lateral line and base
of ventrals
Distance from tip of snout to base
of dorsal in distance from tip of
snout to end of caudal vertebrae _..
Pharyngeals
b2-l
III-8
III-5
4
2i
0.601
5-3-2
3.05
2.62
5.42
3.45
2.81
1.94
III-8
III-5
2i
0.621
(?)
2.79
2.70
5.66
4.05
2.80
1.92
III-8
III-5
3.04
2.69
5.30
3.45
2.65
1.81
III-8
III-5
2i
0.607 0.628
2-5-3-2 I c 2-5-3-2
0.626
c 5-3-2
Origin of ventrals midwaybetweenoriginof pectorals and of anal.
a Type. Plate I, fig. 1.
^ 2. As some were missing, the arrangement could not be definitely determined.
c Another pharyngeal was found ; it was probably of the first row.
^ Several pharyngeals were missing.
^ Origin of ventrals is 0.474 of distance from origin of pectorals to origin of anal.
Barbus manguaoensis sp. nov.
Length of head 2| to 3 in total length; depth of body 2.5
to 2.7 in total length ; diameter of eye 4 to 6 in head ; interorbital
width 2i to 3i in head, that is, to the posterior margin of
the hard opercle; diameter of eye 1^ to 2f in interorbital
space and 1 to If in snout; posterior barbel 1^ times as long
as the diameter of eye and I of the length of the maxillary
barbel; third dorsal spine strong, strongly serrated, and 1^ to
2i in head; anterior side of the first dorsal spine 0.57 to 0.61
of the distance from the snout to the end of the vertebrae ; origin
of dorsal porterior to origin of ventral. A distinct large black
ocellus over the end of the caudal vertebrae, one above base of
anal, one above base of ventrals, and one elongated area above
posterior margin of opercle. These spots are more or less
connected by not very distinct broad black bands.
Type, No. 15.
Measurements of 6 specimens of Barbus manguaoensis are
given in Tables III and IV.
190 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Table III. — Measurements of Barbus manguaoensis sp. nov.
Length of body
Length of head
Depth of body
Depth of caudal peduncle. _.
Length of caudal peduncle _
Length of snout
Diameter of eye
Interorbital width
Depth of head
Snout to occiput
Snout to dorsal
Snout to ventral
Length of dorsal base
Length of anal base
Height of dorsal
Height of anal
Length of pectoral
Length of ventral
Length of caudal
Specimen No. and sex.
Dorsal raysc
Anal raysc
Scales in lateral line
Scales above lateral line..
Scales below lateral line .
Scales before dorsal
«9.
Per cent, i
bll7
0.350
0.401
0.153
0.179
0.098
0.059
0.126
0.239
0.269
0.640
0.575
0.153
0.094
0.192
0.141
0.205
0.179
0.324
nT-8
ni-5
27
4^
4
9
»?.
Percent.^
bl32
0.329
0.371
0.141
0.193
0.088
0.056
0.121
0.229
0.242
0.621
0.575
0.161
0.091
0.185
0.141
0.174
0.166
0.300 i
ni-8 !
ni-5 I
28 j
4^ I
'\
9 i
lod".
Percent.''
b89
0.325
0.387
0.142
0.172
0.084
0.067
0.101
0.224
0.235
0.634
0.550
0.162
0.108
0.191
0.146
0.207
0.179
0.337
II1-8
III-5
27
^l
4
9
26d".
Percent.^
b54
0.324
0.370
0.129
0.185
0.083
0.083
0.111
0.222
0.240
0.620
0.527
0.160
0.092
0.231
0.157
0.2a3 I
0. 185 '
0.342 I
in-8
III-5 ,
27 i
4i ,
4 !
9 :
29 9.
319.
Per cent. 3.
b52
0.317
0.384
0.157
0.182
0.076
0.076
0. 105 j
0.230 I
0.250 !
0.615
0.528
0.163
0.102
0.240
0.168
0.211
0.192
0.336
III-8
in-5
27
4i
4
9
Per cent. »^
b59
•0.336
0.364
0.142
0.184
0.089
0.084
0.117
0.226
0.260
0.630
0.637
0.168
0.084
0.218
0.159
0.210
0.184
0.325
ni-8
III-5
27
4i
4
^ Referred to length of body.
b Measurement in millimeters.
^ Spinous and soft rays, respectively.
Table IV. — Proportional measurements of Barbus manguaoensis sp.
Specimen No.—
Proportional measurement.
■
1
2 92
9
3 00
a 15 j
3 06 i
-« 1
— j-
3 000 '
29
31
Head in body _. .
3 150
2.83
2.79
4.66
Depth in body .
2.48
2.75
2 57
2 840 '
2 600
Eye in head
5.71
5.86
3.16 I
3.750 ;
4.125
Snout in head
3.32
4.00
3.56
4.030 ;
4.125
3.81
Interorbital space in head
2.76
2.66
3.16 1
2.916
2. 750
3.00
Third dorsal spine in head
2.27
2.20
1.74 1
1.520
1.540
1.75
a Type, Plate I, fig. 3.
IX, D, 2 Day: Two New Cyprinoid Fishes 191
Table IV. — Pr^oportional measurements of Barbus etc. — Continued.
Proportional measurement.
Dorsal.
Anal ._
Specimen No.—
Scales
Scales between lateral line and base
of ventrals
Distance from tip of snout to base I
of dorsal in distance from tip of ]
snout to end of caudal vertebra3 __
Pharyngeals |
Origin of ventrals j
III-8 i
III -5
2T:1
2i
0.662
b 5-3-2
III- 9
II1-5
•4
28:-
0.625
b 5-3-2
midway
III-8 I
III-5 j
4-i i
i
2i!
26
29
III-8
III-8
III-5
III-5
-t
-li
2i
2i
0.615
0.615
b 5-3-1- ?
b4-2
31
III-8
III-5
27:
0.603
b2-5-3-2
between origin of pectorals and origin
of anal.
a Type, Plate I, fig. 3.
b 2. As some were missing, the arrangement could not be definitely determined,
c Origin of ventrals, 0.532 of distance fro morigin of pectorals to base of anal.
In comparing these new species with Barbus ivis Seale and
B, Palawan ensis Boulenger, certain striking differences of body-
proportions are apparent. The length of head in body is much
less, the diameter of eye in depth of body is much greater,
the depth of head in body is less, the distance from snout to
occiput is much less, the length of base of dorsal in body is
more, the height of dorsal and of anal in body is more, and
the length of pectoral in body is more in B, ivis and B. pala-
luanensis than in the two new species here described.
In these two new species, not only are there three rows of pha-
ryngeals as stated by Giinther,^ but another row was discovered
consisting of three pharyngeal teeth, so that the pharyngeals are
3-5-3-2 instead of 5-3-2. The extra row of pharyngeals was
also found in specimens of Barbus ivis Seale and B. palawanensis
Boulenger.
Unfortunately, several specimens of the species here described
were dissected before the extra pharyngeals were discovered.
But because of the fact that they were definitely determined
in several specimens and because a part of the pharyngeals
of this extra row were seen in several other specimens, there
can be no doubt of the existence of the extra row, and it is
undoubtedly always present in both of these species. In some
of the fishes dissected, as in B. bantolanensis, No. 45, from which
the drawing of the pharyngeals was made, these pharyngeals are
very minute. The microscope is often necessary to identify them.
^Cat Fishes Brit. Mus. (1868), 7, 3 and 84.
192 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Those of the extra row differ from the other pharyngeals in being
not inserted in the bone, but embedded in the tissue surrounding
the bone. They may thus be easily detached and lost unless
great care is used in the dissection.
While working on the species of this paper, I had access to
the type specimen of Barbus ivis Seale, taken by Seale on Balabac
Island, August 11, 1908, and to other specimens of this species
and several specimens of Barbus palawanensis Boulenger, col-
lected by Seale at Puerto Princesa, Palawan, on August 20, 1909.
I wish to acknowledge the valuable assistance rendered by Mr.
Seale while I was working on these species and to express my
appreciation for the use of his private library on the Cyprinidse.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Gill, Theodore. Some noteworthy extra-European Cyprinids. Smith'
sonian Misc. Colls, (Quarterly Issue) Feb. 4 (1907), 48, 297-341.
Boulenger, G. A. List of fresh-water fishes collected by A. Everett on
Palawan and Balabac. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1905), VI, 25, 185-
188.
Jordan, David Starr, and Everman, Barton Warren. The Fishes of
North and Middle America. Part I. Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1896),
No. 47, 199-329.
Sydner, John O. The fishes of the streams tributary to Monterey Bay,
California. Bull. Bur. Fish. (1912), 32.
Seale, Alvin. New species of Philippine fishes. Phil. Journ. Sci., Sec. A
(1909), 4, 494-495.
Gunther, Albert. Catalogue of the Physostomi. Cat. Fishes Brit. Mus.
(1868), 7, 12-372 (Cyprinidae).
ILLUSTRATIONS
Plate I
Fig. 1. Barbus bantolanensis Day, sp. nov. No. 2. (Drawn by Rodolfo
Fajardo.)
2. Pharyngeal of B. bantolanensis, No. 45; A, the additional row of
teeth. (Drawn by Rodolfo Fajardo.)
3. Bo/rbus manguaoensis Day, sp. nov. No. 15. (Drawn by Jose
Santos.)
193
Day: Two New Cyprinoid Fishks.1
[Phil. Journ Sci., IX, D, No. 2.
Fig 2. Pharyngeal of No.
45, showing additional
row of teeth, A.
Fig. 1. Barbus bantolanensis Day, sp. nov. No. 2.
Fig. 3. Barbus manguaoensis Day, sp. nov. No. 15.
PLATE I.
THE PHILIPPINE
Journal of Science
D. General Biology, Ethnology,
AND Anthropology
Vol. IX
JUNE, 1914
No. 3
SOME PHILIPPINE SCYPHOMEDUSiE, INCLUDING TWO NEW
GENERA, FIVE NEW SPECIES, AND ONE NEW VARIETY
By S. F. Light
{From the Zoological Laboratory, College of Liberal Arts,
University of the Philippines)
Sixteen text figures
The Scyphomedusse described in this paper are in the museum
of the zoological department of the University of the Philip-
pines. Many of them were collected on the joint scientific
expeditions of the University of the Philippines and the Bureau
of Science, while others were collected at various times by
members of the zoological department. They are not the result
of a systematic collection of Philippine Scyphomedusse which,
judging from the percentage of new species in the Philippine
collections of the United States Bureau of Fisheries steamer Alba-
tross ^ and in the present collection, should produce many new
and interesting forms.
The collection includes medusae of 12 species in 11 genera,
and 1 doubtful immature form. All but three are new to the
Philippines, and 2 genera, 5 species, and 1 variety are new
to science. A list of the genera and species follows. Those
starred are reported from the Philippines for the first time.
The new genera and species are indicated by black-faced type.
7. Catostylus purpurus Mayer.
*8. Mastigias papua L. Agassiz.
*9. Acromitus maculosus gen. et sp.
nov.
*10. Lobonema mayeri sp. nov.
*11. Lobonemoides gracilis gen. et sp.
nov.
*12. Rhopilema visayana sp. nov.
13. Cassiopea poly poides Keller (?).
1. Chiropsalmus quadrigatus Hae-
ckel.
*2. Dactylometra quinquecirrha L.
Agassiz, "Chrysaora stage. ^*
3. Aurellia labiata Chamisso and
Eysenhardt.
*4. Cassiopea polypoides Keller var.
culionensis var. nov.
*5. Cassiopea medusa sp. nov.
*6. Cephea cephea (Forskal) Mayer.
^ Mayer, A. G., Medusae of the World, Pub. Carnegie Inst. Wash. (1910),
No. 109, 3.
124685 195
196 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
It will be noted that 8 of the species reported, including
all the new forms, belong to the suborder Rhizostomse. This
essentially tropical suborder seems to include the greater part
of the Philippine forms as 16 of the 29 species and varieties
reported from the Islands belong to that group. There are
undoubtedly many medusae new to science and others as yet
unreported from the Philippines to be found in the waters of
the Archipelago. While on launch trips, during May and June,
1913, along the coast of Palawan and the islands between Pala-
wan and Culion, I saw many medusae not found in this collection.
Most of them were Rhizostomse, but at least three species of
Pelagidse were common. Large Beroe-like ctenophores were also
very numerous, but attempts to preserve them were unsuccessful.
While I have attempted to give a fairly complete description
of new species and a sufficiently complete description of old
species for diagnostic purposes, I have not attempted detailed
anatomical discussions. In the diagnosis of old species, and
in matters of general classification, I have, folio wed very closely
Mayer's monumental work. The Medusae of the World. Full
synonymies of previously described species will be found in
that work.
Mayer describes 20 species and varieties of Scyphomedusse
which have been reported from the Philippines. The fact that
all but one of these were reported for the first time from the
Albatross collection made during the years 1908 to 1910 shows
how little attention has been paid to the collecting of Scyphome-
dusae in Philippine waters. The present paper adds 9 species and
varieties, making a total of 29 species and varieties of Scyphome-
dusae from the Philippines. A list of these, with localities when
known, follows.
1. Carybdea rastonii Haacke, Luzon and Mindoro [Mayer, 1910].
2. Carybdea alata Reynaud var. moseri Msiyer =Charybdea philippina
Haeckel [Semper, I860].
3. Chiropsalmus quadrigatus Haeckel, common [Mayer, 1910] [Light,
1914].
4. Periphylla hyacinthina Steenstrup forma dodecabostrycha (Haeckel)
Mayer [Mayer, 1910].
5. lAnuche aquila (Haeckel) Mayer, Mactan [Mayer, 1910].
6. Atolla bairdii Fewkes forma valdiviae Vanhoffen, Albatross station 5202
[Mayer, 1910].
7. Atolla wyvillei Haeckel, Albatross station 5201 [Mayer, 1910].
8. Pelagia panopyra Peron and Lesueur var. placenta (Haeckel) Mayer
[Mayer, 1910].
9. Dactylometra quinquecirrha L. Agassiz, **Chrysaora stage," Manila Bay
[Light, 1914].
10. Sanderia malayensis Goette, Sulu Sea [Mayer, 1910].
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 197
11. Discomedusa philippina Mayer, Catingan Bay [Mayer, 1910].
12. Aurellia labiata Chamisso and Eysenhardt, Masbate [Mayer, 1910],
Palawan and Manila Bay [Light, 1914].
13. Cassiopea polypoides Keller var. culionensis Light, Culion Bay, Culion
[Light, 1914].
14. Cassiopea medusa Light, Culion Bay, Culion [Light, 1914].
15. Cassiopea ornata Haeckel, Simaluc Islands, Subic Bay, Luzon and Samar
[Mayer, 1910].
16. Cephea cephea (Forskal) Mayer, Mariveles [Xiight, 1914].
17. Cephea octostyla L. Agassiz, Jolo [Mayer, 1910].
18. Catostylus purpurus Mayer, Manila Bay [Mayer, 1910] [Light, 1914].
19. Lychnorhiza bartschi Mayer, Jolo [Mayer, 1910].
20. Mastigias papua L. Agassiz, Mindoro and Palawan [Light, 1914].
21. Mastigias ocellata Haeckel [Mayer, 1910].
22. Versura maasi Mayer, Bohol [Mayer, 1910].
23. Lobonema smithii Mayer, Manila Bay [Mayer, 1910].
24. Lobonema mayeri Light, Malampaya Sound, Palawan and Manila Bay
[Light, 1914].
25. Lobonemoides gracilis Light, Palawan [Light, 1914].
26. Acromitus maculosus Light, Palawan [Light, 1914].
27. Thysanostoma thysanura Haeckel, Mindanao and Mindoro [Mayer,
1910].
28. Lorifera flagellata (Haeckel) Mayer, Albatross station D. 5226 [Mayer,
1910.]
29. Rhopilema visayana Light, Palawan [Light, 1914].
IMMATURE FORM
Cassiopea polypoides Keller (?), Port Galera Bay, Mindoro [Light, 1914].
Order CARYBDEID^
Genus CHmOPSAI]«[XJS L. Agassiz, 1862
Chiropsalmus quadrigatus Haeckel.
The bell is dome shaped and 4-sided, with an evenly rounded
aboral surface. Four laterally flattened, hand-shaped, inter-
radial pedalia arise from the sides of the bell a short distance
above the velar margin. Each bears from 5 to 9, typically
7, finger-shaped projections, each of v^hich gives rise to a very
long, slender, flexible, hollow tentacle banded with nematocysts.
There are 4 perradial sense clubs in covered notches in the sides
of the bell, a little above the level of origin of the pedalia.
A distinct velarium supported by a bracketlike, perradial f renulee
stretches partly across the mouth of the bell cavity. The
central stomach is short and wide, with 4 lanceolate lips with
simple margins. From each of the flattened perradial sides
of the stomach arises a pair of gastric saccules which project
downward into the bell cavity. Each saccule is laterally flattened
and cockscomb shaped with an irregularly notched margin.
198 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
This distinguishes the medusa from C. quadrumanits, the most
nearly related form, which has finger-shaped saccules.
This medusa was very abundant in Taytay Bay, Palawan,
and in Culion Bay, Culion, in May and June, 1913. Numerous
specimens were obtained, including many immature forms. They
agree exactly with Mayer's description of specimens collected
in Philippine waters by the Albatross. Much larger specimens
were seen than any as yet reported, some in Culion reaching
a diameter of at least 200 mm. There are 7 tentacles to each
pedalium in by far the greater number of specimens, and these
tentacles show in life narrow, lavender bands of nematocysts.
The tentacles are very long, slender, and flexible, reaching a
length of 1.5 meters or more. They are very delicate, and
usually break off and remain attached to the clothing or the
body when encountered in the water.
The sting of this medusa is very dangerous. One of the
women in the party of the expedition to Palawan, who was stung
while in bathing, was very seriously ill. I have described the
symptoms more in detail in another place.^ Swelling and in-
flammation began almost immediately in the areas which came in
contact with the tentacles, and later blisters formed along the
lines marked by contact with the tentacles. The lower limbs be-
came swollen, the heart action was impaired, respiratory spasms
and nervous twitchings of the muscles ensued, and the patient ex-
perienced intense general pain. The natives of Palawan reported
a number of deaths caused by the sting of this medusa.
Mayer reports this medusa in the Albatross collection from
Masbate, Luzon, and Mindanao, and I have found it plentiful
in Culion and Palawan, from which it may be seen that it has a
wide range in the Philippines.
Family PELAGID^
Genus DACTYLOMETRA L. Agassiz, 1862
Dactylometra quinquecirrlia L. Agassiz, ''Chrysaora stage.''
At certain seasons of the year, particularly in October and
November, this medusa is found in large numbers in Manila
Bay where it is a menace to bathers and fishermen who hold
it in great fear. While all the specimens which I have seen
have shown only 24 tentacles and 32 marginal lappets and
many of them are apparently sexually mature, this medusa agrees
so closely in every other respect with D. qidnquecirrha that I
have considered it as the ''Chrysaora stage" of that species,
' This Journal, Sec. B (1914), 9, 291.
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 199
corresponding to the similar ''Chrysaora stage" of the species
found in the bays of the Atlantic Coast of the United States.
The flatly rounded bell is from 70 to 100 mm. in diameter.
There are 24 marginal tentacles of about equal length. In life,
these reach a maximum length of almost a meter. In preserved
specimens, they are seldom perfect and are much contracted, not
usually exceeding a length of twice the bell diameter. There are
32 bluntly rounded marginal lappets, and the 2 next the sense
organs in each octant are usually about one-half as wide as the 2
between the tentacles. The sense organs are marked by shallow
notches in the margin. They are covered above by a shelf
of tissue nearly twice as wide as the length of the sense club.
Below they are exposed, but lie in deep narrow furrows. The
mouth arms are complexly folded, presenting along their edges
regular pairs of extended points. They are from two to three
times as long as the bell radius in preserved specimens and
many times as long in life. The umbrella is transparent white,
and is covered on the exumbrellar surface with tiny, semiopaque,
white spots. The 16 stomach pouches are semiopaque, the
dividing membranes entirely transparent, and the exumbrellar
radial muscle strands opaque white. The gonads are light yellow,
light brown, or yellow with a lavender tinge, the inner edges
of the oral palps are light transparent pink to light lavender
brown, and the tentacles are opaque white.
This medusa is known to be very dangerous. The natives
call it fosforo (''match'' in Spanish). This name is used by the
fishermen, because the long oral artns suggest the stick and the
bell the head of a match. I have heard of several cases of severe
poisoning from this medusa both among natives and Americans.
The native remedy is sugar solution taken internally and external
applications of vinegar.
Old ^ has reported a number of cases of poisoning from jelly-
fish in which there was a definite symptom complex differing
from that in the case of poisoning by Chiropsalmus quadrigatus
already mentioned. Mayer ^ cites Doctor Smith ^ as considering
that these cases of poisoning were due to the sting of Lobonema
smithii Mayer. It seems more probable that they were due
to Dactylometra, since it is so com^mon in the bay and is the
form commonly considered to be poisonous by the natives,
especially the fishermen. I have not seen L. smithii, but the
' This Journal, Sec. B (1908), 3, 329.
'Pub. Carnegie Inst. Wash. (1910), No. 109, 3, 690-691.
° Dr. Hugh M. Smith, deputy United States fish commissioner.
200 The Philippine Journal of Science im
sting of L. mayeri sp. nov., a closely related form, while unpleas-
ant is not dangerous. I hope to be able to report more fully on
this matter in the future.
Order SEM^OSTOME^
Genus AURELLIA Peron and Lesueur, 1809
Aiirellia labiata Chamisso and Eysenhardt.
The margin is divided into 16 velar lobes. The bell margin
projects downward from the subumbrellar side as a velumlike
membrane, forming a fold between each 2 sense organs. The
tentacles and marginal lappets have moved a considerable dis-
tance up the sides of the exumbrella. The subgenital ostia are
very small.
This seems to be a rather widely distributed form in Phil-
ippine waters, as Mayer reports it from Masbate from specimens
in the Albatross collection and we have specimens from Taytay,
Palawan, and Manila Bay. We have 4 specimens in our collec-
tion, 2 collected by Dr. R. P. Cowles in Taytay, Palawan, and
2 from Pasay Beach, Manila Bay. They all show the 16 notches
in the bell margin, the velumlike subumbrellar membrane mark-
ing the true margin, and the very small subgenital ostia which
characterize A. labiata, so I have considered them as belonging
to that species in spite of rather marked individual differences
and differences in proportion as compared with other specimens
whose measurements are given by Mayer.
The smallest specimen (D in the table) is relaxed, flabby,
and without definite shape. The bell is only 10 mm. thick at
the base of the mouth arms, and the whole medusa has the
appearance of having completely relaxed in death. The marginal
tentacles are very slender and flexible, and are from 12 to 15
mm. in length.
In another specimen (B in the table), the bell thickness at
the base of the mouth arms is 25 mm. The material of the
umbrella has a very solid, stiff consistency, and is thick up
to the tentacle zone. It appears to be in a state of contraction,
and nearly all the marginal tentacles are tightly contracted.
The velumlike margin is here represented only by a very slight
fold which has the appearance of a line connecting the sense
organs. The thick bell with a solid consistency and the rounded
genital pouches and small ostia give it a resemblance to A. solida
Browne. Owing to the condition of the specimen, it was impos-
sible to determine the arrangement of the sense organs, but
the 16 velar lobes show that the medusa is A. labiata.
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse
201
Measurements of Aurellia lahiata.
Specimen.
Diameter
of the
umbrella.
Diameter
across the
zone of
gonads.
Length of
each
mouth
arm.
A _ _
mm.
225
167
150
145
mvi.
107
86
65
50
TYitn,
1*00
71
B -
C- -
D
65
Order RHIZOSTOM^
RHIZOSTOMATA PINNATA Vanhoffen
Genus CASSIOPEA Peron and Lesueur, 1809
Cassiopea polypoides Keller var. culionensis var. nov. (fig. 1).
Type, — No. C. 2420, zoological collection, University of the
Philippines.
The disk is flat, from 120 to 150 mm. in diameter, with a
broad, shallow sucker cavity and a central thickened area. The
thickened outer margin of the sucker cavity
is from 15 to 20 mm. from the margin of
the bell, and the diameter of the sucker is
about two-thirds of the bell diameter. The
margin is thin and divided into from 16
to 20 parameres by as many sense organs.
There are twice as many radial canals as
sense organs, and there is no ring canal.
Each paramere has 5 blunt marginal lappets,
the lappet in the center of each paramere
being the largest, the 2 ocular lappets being
about one-half as wide as the 2 on each
side of this central lappet. The sense or-
gans show no pigment spot. The mouth
arms are from 1.25 to 1.5 as long as the
bell radius, and project considerably beyond
the bell margin. They are cylindrical or
somewhat dorsally flattened in their proximal portions and
higher than broad in their distal portions. The arms give rise
in their proximal portion to about 3 pairs of short, alternately
arranged lateral branches beyond which the arm divides to form
from 3 to 5 long branches which may in turn subdivide. There
are numerous, small, berrylike vesicles between the mouths over
the entire surface of the arms. In most specimens, there is
a central flattened appendage in the center of the arm disk
Fig. 1. Cassiopea poly'
poides Keller var.
culionensis var nov., a
sense organ from the
subumbrellar side.
Much enlarged.
202
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
surrounded by a whorl of smaller similar appendages. This
central appendage reaches a length of 30 mm. and a width
of 40 mm. The arms may have toward their distal ends a
number of ribbonlike or leaflike appendages, reaching a
length of 20 mm. and a width of from 8 to 15 mm. Of
the 27 specimens in the collection, 10 have the large central
appendage and a whorl surrounding it, 11 have a large central
appendage without a surrounding whorl, 3 have no enlarged
appendage, and 3 have enlarged appendages on the arms but
none in the center of the disk.
The central stomach is circular in outline, and is encroached
on from below by the 4 gonads. Twice as many radial canals
as sense organs originate from it and extend to the margin, giv-
ing off branches which form a very complex network of anas-
tomosing vessels. The rhopalar canals increase in size toward
the margin, while the interrhopalar canals become small distally.
In preserved specimens the umbrella is light olive green.
On close examination dull white bands may be seen running to
each sense organ. The mouth arms usually exhibit 3 color zones :
A central circular area which is yellow, a zone composed of the
portions of the arms projecting beyond the disk which is also
yellow, and between these zones a zone of green. The append-
ages are opaque white, and contain a network of canals, giving
them a leaflike appearance. The color of the live medusa is very
similar to that of the preserved specimens.
Measurements and numbers of sense organs and of marginal lappets to a
paramere of lA specimens from Culion.
Specimen No.
Diameter
of the
bell.
Diameter
of the
arm disk.
Length of
the mouth
arms
(from the
center of
the arm
disk).
Sense
organs.
Marginal
lappets
to a para-
mere.
1
mm.
121
129
120
128
145
130
130
143
151
145
145
154
118
150
mm.
50
58.5
55
58
57
58
60
50
79
62
63
68.5
60
60
mm.
95
89
90
99.5
104
112
99
102
145
120
114
176
95
120
20
20
16
20
19
17
20
19
17
17
16
19
18
16
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
2
3
4 -
6 — -
6
7
8.__
9
10
11. .
12
13 ._
14
IX. D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 203
The museum has 27 specimens of this new variety of C.
polypoides collected by Dr. L. E. Griffin and Mr. L. D. Wharton
in Culion Bay, in October, 1911. They were present in great
numbers in the bottom of a boat slip near the Leper Colony
pier. I found them in the same place in May, 1913, and Dr.
Ernest Clements, the superintendent of the Leper Colony, tells
me that they are nearly always to be found there. This boat
slip is from 1 to 2 meters deep, is protected from storms, and
has a sandy bottom; it seems to be an ideal habitat for the
medusae. They were all found lying with the exumbrellar
surface downward and looked, as Keller^ has remarked of
C. polypoides forma typica in the Red Sea, extraordinarily like
some large sea anemone. They are able to retain their hold
firmly by means of the sucker cavity. Indeed, when the pre-
served specimens are placed with the exumbrella down in a
glass dish, it is practically impossible to turn them over by
lifting on the arms and arm disk. The living medusae on
being turned over immediately begin to pulsate. At each con-
traction, the arms of one side are pulled farther in and bent
upward thus lifting the disk on that side. A final pulsation
causes it to fall over on the exumbrellar surface, the pulsations
cease, and the arms and margin are slowly adjusted.
This medusa resembles C. polypoides forma typica in general
appearance, in the number of lappets to a paramere, in the length
and branching of the mouth arms, in the canal system, and to
some extent in the coloring. While it differs in some particulars,
such as in the shape of the central stomach and the lack of
pigmentation in the sense organs, I do not consider these dif-
ferences sufficient to warrant the making of a new species in a
genus which contains so many intergrading forms, and so I have
considered it as a new variety of C. polypoides to which I have
given the name culionensis as Culion seems to be a constant
habitat of the medusa.
In coloration of the bell and in the arrangement of the
appendages of the mouth arms, this form approaches most
nearly to Keller's color variety "rosse."
Cassiopea polypoides Keller ( ?) .
One immature medusa collected in Port Galera Bay in May,
1912, differs from C polypoides var. culionensis in having
pigmented eyespots, in that the arms do not project beyond
the bell margin, and in the arrangement of the appendages
'Zeitschr, /. wiss, Zool (1883), 38, 634.
204 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
of the mouth arms. It has besides the berrylike vesicles a
small central appendage, surrounded by a double whorl of 8
appendages, 2 in the axil between each two arms supported
by the same interostial pillar. The appendages of the inner
whorl are smaller than those of the outer whorl. Near the
distal end of each arm is a large ribbonlike appendage reaching
a length of 15 mm. and a width of 4 mm., which is surrounded
by a number of similar but smaller appendages. Besides these,
there are scattered among the mouths a number of small leaf like
appendages.
The entire medusa is, in formalin, a dull grayish white.
Measurements of the specimen in millimeters: Diameter of
the bell, 55 ; diameter of the arm disk, 25 ; length of the mouth
arms (measured from the center of the disk) , 26. Number of
sense organs, 17; number of lappets to a paramere, 5.
While this is probably an immature individual of C. polypoides
forma typica, it is impossible to place it definitely, so I have
indicated it as a doubtful immature example of that species.
Cassiopea medusa sp. nov. (figs. 2 ^nd 3).
Type, — C. 2421, zoological collection. University of the Phil-
ippines, from Culion Bay, Culion.
The disk is flat with a broad, shallow sucking surface bounded
externally by a circular raised area and having a broad thickened
central disk. The disk measures 260 mm. in diameter, the suck-
ing surface 180 mm., and the raised central disk 115 mm.
The raised margin of the sucking surface is 15 mm. wide,
and its outer edge is 25 mm. from the bell margin.
There are 17 sense organs, and each paramere contains 7
irregular, very blunt marginal lappets which are often more
distinct as spaces between grooves in the exumbrella than as
actual lappets in the very thin and nearly smooth margin.
The sense organs are very small, slender clubs hidden in deep
clefts. They are covered above by a shelf of exumbrellar tissue,
but they are quite distinct from the subumbrellar side. They
are without pigmented eyespots. The 8 large mouth arms arise
from an 8-sided arm disk 114 mm. in diameter. They are
170 mm. in length, send off numerous small lateral branches
in their proximal portion, and divide distally into 3 main
branches, which are again subdivided. The mouths and branches
are much more scattered than in C. polypoides, and arising in
the axils of the branches and between the mouths from the
center of the disk to the distal ends of the branches are hundreds
of transparent appendages. These appendages are of two types
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse
205
which graduate into one another — a small, inconspicuous, ribbon-
like form and a large, very flexible form, cylindrical at the
base, flattened toward the outer end, and containing a broad
central canal. These reach a length
of 110 mm. and a diameter of 7.5
mm., giving the animal an appear-
ance remarkably suggestive of the
classical Medusa, hence the specific
name. The canal system consists, as
usual in the genus, of an equal num-
ber of ocular and interocular canals.
The former run to the sense organs
at the margin, while the latter break
up into branches some distance in-
side, which anastomose with those
from the ocular canals to form a net-
work of canals running out to the margin. The subgenital ostia
are small and considerably longer than broad as opposed to C.
polypoides.
Fig. 2. Cassiopea medusa sp. nov.,
a sense organ and the adjacent
canal system from the subum-
brellar side. Very much enlarged.
Fig. 3. Cassiopea medusa, a portion of a mouth arm, showing the scattered mouths and the
very typical appendages. X 1.
In the preserved specimen the disk is opaque white with a
slight grayish or greenish tinge. The mouths are light yellow,
the arms and appendages are transparent white, and the canals
are outlined in semiopaque white.
206 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
This very interesting and distinctly new Cassiopea is rep-
resented by a single specimen collected by Dr. L. E. Griffin
and Mr. L. D. Wharton in Culion Bay, where it was found
with C. polypoides var. culionensis. It is most nearly related
to C. polypoides and C xamachana, but it is differentiated from
them as from all other species by the numerous very large ap-
pendages, by its very large size, and by the combination in one
medusa of the following characteristics : 7 lappets to a paramere,
mouth arms longer than the bell radius, and an unpigmented
sense organ.
Owing to the extreme fragility of the specimen, it is impossible
to make as complete a description as might be desired.
RHIZOSTOMATA DICHOTOMA Vanhoffen
Genus CEPHEA Peron and Lesueur, 1809
Cephea cephea (Forskal) Mayer.
I have a single worn specimen of this widely distributed
species collected at Mariveles, Manila Bay, in January, 1912.
It is undoubtedly a form of Cephea cephea as shown by the
deep clefts of the sense organs and the high, heavily warted
central dome. The bell diameter is 220 mm., and the distance
from the lower surface of the arm disk to the top of the dome
is 120 mm. The 8 mouth arms arise in 4 pairs. Each arm is
shorter than the bell radius, and shows decided lateral compres-
sion in the proximal portion. The two outer branches are
considerably stouter than the inner branches. The mouths are
borne only on the faces of the main branches and their sub-
branches. Scattered among the mouth arms are numerous short,
ribbonlike, narrow appendages which when contracted have a
berrylike appearance. These reach a maximum length of 40
mm., most of them being from 10 to 20 mm. in length. There
is a very conspicuous set of folded ridges containing the radial
muscles and extending from the arm disk to the ring canal,
which is about 50 mm. from the margin. On these ridges are
numerous very small, flexible, cone-shaped projections. The
circular muscles which are also distinct folds lying between the
ring canal and the margin are interrupted, partially at least, in
the rhopalar radii. The canal system agrees with that given by
Mayer for Cephea cephea, except that the ocular canals are
considerably wider, in their distal portion at least, than are
the interocular canals. The subgenital ostia are small, half-
moon shaped, convex below, and concave above.
The central dome of the exumbrella is 80 mm. high and
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusde 207
about 70 mm. in diameter. It is covered at the bottom with
small granular warts. Toward the top, these increase in size,
reaching at the apex a length of 18 mm. and a diameter of
14 mm. They are irregular, and may be slender and pointed
or irregular and massive.
The margin is not in a good state of preservation, but there
are evidently 8 sense organs, which lie in deep notches, and
about 80 marginal lappets — 8 velar and 2 ocular between each
two sense organs. The lappets show very plainly as thicken-
ings of the gelatinous material, but are not distinct at the edge
where they are joined by a web. The dome is transparent rosy
pink, shading to light blue at the apex.
RHIZOSTOMATA TRIPTERA Vanhoffen sensu Maas
Genus CATOSTYLUS L. Agassiz, 1862
Catostylus purpurus Mayer.
The disk is somewhat flatter than a hemisphere in preserved
specimens, but more convex than a hemisphere in life. The ex-
umbrella is smooth. The 8 rhopalia are flanked by short, nar-
row, bluntly rounded lappets. In each octant there are 4 cleft
and 2 simple velar lappets ; in all, 10 velar terminal lappets to an
octant. In the whole bell there are 96 marginal lappets, 16
rhopalar, and 80 velar terminal lappets. In any octant the velar
lappets are arranged as follows : One cleft lappet, 1 simple lap-
pet, 2 cleft lappets, 1 simple lappet, and 1 cleft lappet.
The arm disk at the base is about half as wide as the bell
diameter, and is much smaller at the level of origin of the
mouth arms. The long, narrow genital ostia are nearly as
wide as the interostial pillars. They are constricted by a thick,
wide median projection which extends from the arm disk. A
long finger-shaped or swollen papilla is seen on the subumbrellar
surface. It arises on the outer margin of the ostia in the
line of the rhopalar canal. The subgenital porticus is unitary
and cruciform.
The mouth arms are from 0.75 to 1.25 as long as the bell
radius, and the mouths extend to the extreme tip of each arm.
In living specimens, particularly those that are immature, a
considerable part of the mouth arms is covered by edges of the
bell. In preserved specimens the bell is flattened and the edges
are turned in, leaving the mouth arms exposed.
The circular muscles extend uninterruptedly from the arm disk
to the margin, being most prominent between the circular canal
and the margin.
208 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Sixteen radial canals, 8 of which are rhopalar and 8 adradial,
leave the cruciform central stomach. The ocular canals extend
past the ring canal to the sense organs, while the adradial
canals end in the ring canal. The fine-meshed network of canals
outside the ring canal extends to the margin. The coarser
inner network is always connected with the adradial canals,
seldom with the ocular canals, and never with the stomach.
The sense organs have in life brilliant silver spots which
fade in preserved specimens. The size of these ocelli is in
inverse ratio to the size of the medusa.
The medusa is deep purplish brown in life, and fades to dull
brown in formalin.
This is the commonest medusa of Manila Bay. During the
months of November and December it is especially abundant on
the beach at Pasay just outside of Manila. The fishermen say
that these jellyfish are blown in by southwest winds which pre-
vail during these months. The largest specimen in the collection
measures 105 mm. in bell diameter, but I have seen many con-
siderably larger specimens. Mayer reports this species as living
on the bottom in shallow water. I hardly think this is the case,
as they are always to be seen on or near the surface in shallow
water along the beach and in the esteros (brackish water canals) ,
where they sometimes occur in countless numbers. The im-
mature medusae vary considerably. Some are transparent white,
and resemble in general appearance the immature forms of
Acromitus maculosus *gen. et sp. nov. which is described later
in this paper. The chief and most apparent difference is, of
course, the absence of appendages of any kind on the mouth
arms of Catostylus. Others resemble in general form the mature
medusae, but have such striking differences that I have thought
it worth while to give a short description of one of them.
Catostylus purpums Mayer, immature form.
The bell, which measures 27 mm. in diameter, is more con-
vex than a hemisphere when relaxed and much more so in con-
traction. The margin in life hangs down below the short mouth
arms, but in f ormahn is curved inward exposing the mouth arms.
There are 8 prominent rhopalia, which in life have a bright
silvery color. The exumbrellar sensory pit is broad and shallow
and dendritically grooved. The ocular lappets are roundly
pointed and longer than the velar lappets. There are typically
10, sharply pointed, narrow, velar lappets between each 2 ocular
lappets arranged as in the adult medusa.
The subgenital ostia are irregular in size and from once
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 209
to twice as wide as the interostial pillars. The genital porticus
is unitary and cruciform. The circular muscles extend uninter-
rupted from the outer end of the arm disk to the margin.
The arms are 6 mm. long. Each has a swollen area near
the base, culminating on the outside in a laterally projecting
point beyond which the arms are decidedly narrowed. The
mouths are on the lower and inner surfaces of the three branched
arms.
In life, the medusa is deep, rich plum; in formalin, it is pur-
plish brown.
This immature form was collected from a seine at Pasay
Beach, Manila Bay, October, 1913. It is particularly interesting,
because of the presence under the edge of the margin of several
small cyclopslike Crustacea, evidently leading a commensal
existence. Four of these crustaceans were found, each lying
just below a sense organ and along the line of a rhopalar
canal, the head end lying innermost. They were all females
with well-developed egg sacks, and were difficult to make out
in position as they have many minute brown pigment spots
scattered over the body, giving them the same general color
as the medusa.
I have since found that these Crustacea are to be found in
great numbers on living specimens whether mature or immature
and are not confined to any one region of the medusa.
Genus MASTIGIAS L. Agassiz, 1862
Mastigias papua L. Agassiz.
There are 3 immature and 2 mature specimens of this medusa
in the collection from Port Galera Bay, Mindoro, collected during
May and June, 1912. I saw many small specimens in Taytay
Bay, Palawan, in May, 1913.
These forms differ somewhat from the typical M. papua, and
while these differences coincide to some extent with those noted
in M. papua var. sibogse Maas they differ to about the same
extent. They seem to be intermediate in form between M. papua
var. sibogse and M. papua forma typica, and the specimens differ
among themselves as to coloration, length of filaments, etc.
These facts lead me to believe, as Mayer says, that there are
numerous very closely related or even intergrading forms in
this genus. It would be interesting to compare large series of
these medusae from localities joining two rather widely separated
habitats, say Japan and Papua, getting series from Japan,
Formosa, Luzon, Mindanao, Jolo, Amboina, and Papua. I have
no doubt that the individuals of such a series would so inter-
210 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
grade as to make it necessary to consider them as local forms
of a single very variable species.
The largest specimen in the collection measures 60 mm. in
bell diameter, and the arm disk is 33 mm. in diameter. The
arms measure 35 mm. in length from the center of the arm
disk, and project only slightly beyond the edge of the disk.
There are 8 rhopalia, with large, cup-shaped, pigmented ocelli
and long, pointed, ocular lappets. Between each 2 sense organs
are 9 rounded or bluntly pointed velar lappets. The subgenital
ostia are three times as wide as the interostial pillars. There
are 7 anastomosing interocular canals in each octant. The
rounded clubs are scattered on the mouth arms, and the terminal
appendages which are somewhat less in length than the bell
diameter are distinctly 3-sided and show a network of internal
canals. The general color in life is light greenish blue, shading
into light brown, purple, or olive green. The exumbrella is
covered, particularly in the mature medusa, with prominent white
spots. Those above the ring canal are double-headed or dumb-
bell shaped. The rhopalar canals are outlined by a broad violet
or deep blue band. The arm clubs are violet or blue at the
tip and base with intermediate zones of olive green, gray, and
white. In preserved specimens the colors fade with the excep-
tion of the violet band on the circular canal, which is not
present in some immature medusse, and the violet bases of
the terminal appendages.
Genus ACROMITUS novum ^
Generic characters, — Rhizostomata triptera with scattered
filaments and axial, terminal, filamentous appendages on the
oral arms. The cruciform stomach gives rise to 16 radial
canals, 8 of which are rhopalar and 8 adradial and inter-
rhopalar. The rhopalar canals extend beyond the ring canal
to the margin, while the adradial canals end in the ring canal.
Externally, the ring canal sends off many small canals which
anastomose and form a network between the ring canal and
the margin. Internally, it gives off several larger canals on
each side of each rhopalar canal which anastomose and join
the rhopalar canals. The exumbrellar sensory pits show radiat-
ing furrows. The subgenital porticus is unitary and cruciform.
The circular muscle is partially interrupted in the rhopalar radii.
The type species is A. maculosus sp. nov. from Taytay Bay,
Palawan.
' a/cpos, at the point, terminally; /^tVos, a thread.
IX. D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse
211
The genus Acromittts is most closely related to Catostylus
on one hand and less closely to Lychnorhiza and Crambione
on the other. It resembles Catostylus in its canal system, the
Fig. 4. Acromitus maculosus gen. et sp. nov., lateral view of the medusa. X 8/9.
shape and structure of its mouth arms, and in the presence
of furrows in the sensory pit, but differs from it in having
filaments and an axial terminal appendage on each mouth arm.
124685 2
212 The Philippine journal of Science 1914
While resembling Lychnorhiza and Crambione to some extent
in its canal system, in having filaments on the mouth arms
and in the presence of radiating furrows in the sensory pits,
it differs from them in having an axial terminal appendage,
in that the internal branches of the ring canal join the rhopalar
canals, and in that the circular muscles are interrupted, partially
at least, in the rhopalar radii. It differs from Mastigias in that
the exumbrella sensory pit is furrowed, in that the interocular
canals are regular in number (8) and in position and do not
anastomose, running directly from the central stomach to the
ring canal, and in that the axial terminal appendages of the
mouth arms are long, slender filaments and not clubs. It differs
from Pseudorhiza in having slender terminal appendages, in
the presence of filaments on the mouth arms, in that the sensory
pits are furrowed, and in the absence of a central mouth. It
differs from Phyllorhiza in having axial terminal appendages
and in that the inner branches of the ring canal do not reach
the stomach. It differs from Versura in that the interradial
canals are separate and in the presence of a definite ring
canal. It diflfers from Lobonema most strikingly in the small
size of the marginal lappets and in the absence of windowlike
apertures in the oral arms. It differs from Lobonemoides
gen. nov. in that there are not more than 8 rhopalia, in that
the interocular canals do not extend to the margin, and in
that the axial, terminal appendages of the mouth arms are
filamentous.
Acromitus maculosus sp. nov. (figs. 4, 5, and 6).
Type. — No. C. 2081, zoological collection. University of the
Philippines.
The bell reaches a width of 90 mm. or more, and is hemi-
spherical or somewhat flatter than a hemisphere. It has a
solid consistency, being thick in the central region and thin out-
side the ring canal. The surface of the exumbrella is covered
with minute, bluntly cone-shaped projections. There are 8
rhopalia, each with a pigmented area and a deep, triangular,
grooved, exumbrellar sensory pit. The marginal lappets are
typically 80 in number — 8 pointed velar lappets in 4 pairs and
2 narrow pointed ocular lappets being present in each octant.
The grooves between the pairs of velar lappets are deep, and
extend some distance up on the exumbrellar surface. The arm
disk is about 1.2 or 1.25 of the bell radius. The genital ostia
are from 1.3 to 1.5 as wide as the column between them. They
have a regular but sinuous outline, and are partially closed by
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse
213
a median flaplike projection from the outer margin. The sub-
genital porticus is cruciform and unitary.
The mouth arms vary in length from 1.3 to twice the bell
radius. The proximal area, in the adult, is about 0.25 of the
arm length and considerably more in the immature medusa.
It is narrow and unbranched, and bears mouths only on its
inner side where they extend to the center of the arm disk.
The distal portion has the shape of a 3-cornered pyramid, the
branches of the wings of the mouth arms extending alternately
in opposite directions. The mouths are found only on the outer
surfaces of the secondary branches of the 'three main divisions
of the mouth arms, but these branches are so elongated laterally
as to cover the bare spaces between the
branches and present in all directions a
surface composed of fringed mouth open-
ings interspersed with filaments. The cap-
itate tentacles fringing the mouths are very
numerous and heavily loaded with nema-
tocysts. The filaments are covered with
large nematocyst warts, giving them a
knobbed and knotted appearance. The fila-
mentous axial terminal appendages are about
as long as the mouth arms and very flexible.
They contain a central canal, and are covered
with nematocyst warts considerably smaller
than those of the other filaments. The cen-
tral ducts of the mouth arms join in pairs
before passing into the stomach, the ducts
of the two arms arising from a common
interostial pillar uniting. Each of these 4
main ducts enters the outer end of a stomach
pouch. The main duct of each mouth arm gives off about 6
small branches to the mouths of the upper portion of the mouth
arm. At the point of origin of the two outer arm branches
it gives off 3 main branches, one to each arm branch, and con-
tinues beyond that point to the tip of the mouth arm as a small
central canal giving off a few small branches to each of the three
arm branches and is continued as the central canal of the
terminal filament. The canals to the two outer arm branches
are broad and bifurcated near their outer ends.
The stomach is cruciform in shape, the 4 lobes tapering some-
what toward the outer ends. From the outer extremity of each
lobe there are given off 3 radial canals, a central rhopalar canal
and an ardradial canal on either side arising from the outer
Fig. 5. Acromitus ma-
culo8U8, an exumbrel-
lar view of a sense
organ; diagrammatic.
Much enlarged.
214 The Philippine Jou7mal of Science im
edge of the end of the lobe. In the cleft between each two
lobes, a rhopalar canal is given off. So, of the 8 rhopalar
canals, the 4 perradial canals — since they arise from the ends
of the stomach lobes — are short and the 4 interradial canals —
since they arise between the stomach lobes — are long. The 8
rhopalar canals extend straight to the sense organs, while the
8 interocular canals end in the circular canal. The area of
the bell between the circular canal and the margin is filled
with a network of anastomosing canals, taking their origin from
the outer surface of the ring canal and intercommunicating with
the branches of the rhopalar canals. Arising from the inner sur-
face of the circular canal on each side of each ocular canal
is a series of anastomosing canals usually 3 in number, which
joins the ocular canals by a common lateral branch. This canal
network has, typically, no connection with the interocular canals
Fig. 6. Acromitus maculosus, an exumbrellar view of a portion of the bell, showing the canal
system as seen when injected ; somewhat diagrammatic.
which run directly from the stomach to the ring canal without
branching or anastomosis.
There is a wide band of circular muscles covering the space
between the margin and a line a little external to the level
of the ends of the stomach pouches. The part of the muscle
band lying within the ring canal is interrupted in the 8
rhopalar radii, while that outside the ring canal is only partially
interrupted.
The whole medusa is pale blue in life, the color being deepest
along the radial canals and oral arms. The exumbrella is covered
with circular, ring-shaped, solid, elongated, or irregular spots.
In life, these are iridescent purplish black to dark brown. In
specimens preserved in formalin, the blue fades to slightly
opaque white with a faint bluish tinge and the spots fade to
bronze brown and finally dissappear.
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 215
These medusae were common in the shallow water along the
beach at Taytay, Palawan, in April and May, 1913. Great
numbers of immature forms were present the second week in
May. They first appeared after a very severe wind storm of
several days' duration, but were never noted in the deeper waters
of the bay.
Measurements of the type specimen in the collection of the zoological
department of the University of the Philippines y No. C, 2081.
mm.
Bell diameter 90
Length of the mouth arms 60
Length of the bare proximal portion of the mouth arm 15
Diameter of the arm disk 50
Width of the inturned portion of the exumbrella 15
Diameter of the largest exumbrellar spots 5
Width of the subgenital ostia 20
Width of the interostial pillars 15
Numerous specimens of the different stages of this medusa
were collected at Taytay, Palawan, in the summer of 1913 by
Dr. R. P. Cowles and myself while on the joint scientific expedi-
tion of the University of the Philippines and the Bureau of
Science. During the time in which they were numerous in the
vicinity of Taytay, I visited neighboring islands and other parts
of Palawan, but was unable to find the medusa.
Among the numerous immature specimens, some variations
and abnormalities are to be noted. The time at which the spots
appear on the umbrella seems to vary. Some specimens whose
umbrella is but 15 mm. in diameter show distinct spots, while
others which have reached a diameter of 40 mm. show no
markings at all. In the immature forms, the spots are arranged
in more or less circular groups of 4 or 5 which coalesce to form
the large spots of the adult form. The proximal portion of
the mouth arms is more prominent, and makes up a larger
portion of the arms of the immature medusa. The canal system
of the bell seems the same in mature and immature specimens,
but the side branches of the upper portion of the main canals
of the mouth arms are conspicuous in the immature forms.
The canal pattern is strikingly brought out by injecting pure
Delafield's hsematoxylin through an opening in the center of
the exumbrella. The only notable variation is that in a very
few cases the inner canal network is connected to the adradial
canals as well as to the interradial and perradial canals. This
216 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
connection is very slight, and is by no means common. One
specimen has 5 stomach lobes, 5 gonad lobes, 9 mouth arms,
18 radial canals — 10 of them rhopalar and 8 adradial — and 96
marginal lappets. There are 9 rhopalia present, and as the
margin is gone at the end of another rhopalar canal we may
say there are 10 rhopalia, so it is as if a new area equivalent
to a quadrant has been developed in this specimen to correspond
to the extra stomach lobe, lacking, however, two adradial canals.
In another specimen there are 18 canals, but 5 of them — 3
adradial and 2 rhopalar — arise from a single enlarged stomach
pouch. Another specimen has 10 mouth arms, 4 of them develop-
ing from a single interostial pillar, but the canal system is
of the normal type. At first glance, the canal system of the
bell of this species appears to be very similar to that of Catos-
tylus piirpurus Mayer, to which it is undoubtedly closely related.
But in the injected specimens of C purpurus it can be seen that
the internal network of canals from the ring canal is connected
most conspicuously with the adradial canals, while in A. macu-
losus it is connected with the rhopalar canals and typically not
at all with the adradial canals.
I have given the species the name maculosus, as the spots
on the umbrella constitute one of its most striking specific
characters.
Genus LOBONEMA Mayer, 1910, emended
Generic characters. — Rhizostomata triptera, in which the velar
lappets are greatly extended, tapering to pointed ends. The
mouth arms show numerous filaments, and the mouth-arm mem-
branes are perforated by windowlike openings. There are from
8 to 16 rhopalia, twice as many radial canals as rhopalia, and a
ring canal which gives off an anastomosing network of vessels on
both its inner and outer sides. The inner network does not
connect with the stomach. All of the radial canals extend
beyond the ring canal, the ocular canals always to the sense
organs. The subumbrella shows a well-developed system of
ring muscles extending from the mouth-arm disk to the margin,
interrupted partially or not at all by the radial canals. There
are numerous prominent tapering papillae upon the exumbrella.
There is an exumbrellar sensory pit above each rhopalium, whose
floor is covered with radiating dendritic furrows.
This is Mayer's original definition emended so as to include
Lobonema mayeri sp. nov.
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine S<^yphomedusse
217
Lobonema mayeri ^ sp. no v. (figs. 7, 8, and 9).
Type. — No. C. 2424, zoological collection, University of the
Philippines.
During the middle and latter part of May, Malampaya Sound
on the west coast of Palawan contained great numbers of this
very beautiful and interesting medusa. Two specimens were
«^i^i\'fM???\n
Fig. 7. Lobonema mayeri sp. nov., a quadrant of the exumbrellar surface, showing the papillse,
sense organs, and tentaclelike marginal lappets. X h-
taken in as perfect a condition as was possible in the case of
forms with such long and fragile arm filaments.
The bell is much flatter than a hemisphere both in preserved
and living specimens. The portion of the bell beyond the ring
* I have named this species in honor of Dr. A. G. Mayer without whose
Medusae of the World the completion of this report would have been ex-
tremely difficult if not impossible and who (1910) described the genus
Lobonema and the only other known species, L. smithii Mayer.
218
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
Fig. 8. Lobonema mayeri, a mouth arm, showing the appendages, the windowlike openings,
and the irregular arrangement of the ducts ; somewhat diagrammatic. X h-
canal, which is a considerable distance from the margin, is very
thin, and hangs down as a sort of fringe when floating. The bell
is from 340 to 500 mm. in diameter measured from a sense club
to the one 180° from it. Medusae having
a diameter of at least 500 mm. and prob-
ably much more were very numerous.
The subumbrella is covered with very
flexible tapering papillae, increasing in
size and number toward the center of
the exumbrella where they reach a length
of 60 mm. and a basal diameter of 15 mm.
Those in the center of preserved specimens
are stiff and solid at the base, but their
tips like the entire papillae toward the
outer position of the exumbrella are very
soft, shrunken, and without rigidity. In
life, they are all conical and flexible,
waving about in the currents of water.
Toward the center of the exumbrella, the
Fig. 9. Lobonema mayen, a rather broad bases of thesc papillae cover
sense organ from the ex- ^-j^q entire SUrface.
umbrellar side. Much en- im^^i^^i -,» ,
larged. The 12 to 16 rhopalia are very short
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 219
with broad swollen ends, and are covered above and below by
shelves of tissue, the exumbrellar shelf being very short and the
subumbrellar much larger. No pigment spots are present. The
exumbrellar sensory pit it small, rather deep below, and dendrit-
ically grooved. It lies in the surface of an oval, papillalike,
raised area. The ocular lappets are short, plump, and closely
approximated, being 4 mm. in length from the base of the ex-
umbrellar sensory pit to the tip and 3 mm. in diameter. There
are from 70 to 80 complete marginal lappets, from 3 to 6 in
a paramere. Some of the lappets show a distal bifurcation.
The lappets are elongated, tentaclelike, tapering to a point.
They reach a length of 200 mm., measured from the inner
end of the cleft, are very slender and flexible distally, and have
the appearance of true tentacles. For about 25 mm. of their
inner length they are joined by a web. They are concave
below and convex above, with thin edges. They contain a
number of large longitudinal canals joined by small lateral
branches, and no muscle fibers could be detected in stained
sections. The velar grooves of the exumbrella are about 25
mm. and the ocular grooves are about 12 mm. long. The rhopalar
clefts are V-shaped rather than Y-shaped as in L. smithii.
From 24 to 32 radial canals, half of them rhopalar and half
interrhopalar, leave the central stomach. There are always
half as many sense organs as canals. The ocular canals extend
to the sense organs in the margin, but the interocular canals while
extending for some distance beyond the ring canal are lost in
the network of anastomosing canals before reaching the margin,
differing in this character from L. smithii. This is well shown
by injecting one of these canals with Delafield's hsematoxylin.
There is a distinct ring canal about 45 mm. inward from the sense
club zone giving off an anastomosing system of canals internally
and externally, which connects with both the ocular and inter-
ocular canals but not with the central stomach.
The bell between the arm disk and the ring canal is from
25 to 30 mm. in thickness, while from the ring canal to the
margin it is not thicker than 10 mm. The thickest point is
at the level of the ring canal, where there is a circular swollen
subumbrellar area over which the radial canals curve to meet
the ring canal whose greatest breadth is at right angles to the
plane of the subumbrella. At this point, just before it joins the
ring canal, there is a bulbous enlargement of each ocular canal.
There is no radial muscle. The circular muscles form a series
of circular folds between the arm disk and the zone of the
sense organs. That part of the muscle band which lies within
220 '^^^ Philippine Journal of Science im
the ring canal is completely interrupted in the ocular radii and
thinned in the interocular, while that portion lying outside the
ring canal is thinned in the ocular radii and only slightly so
in the interocular radii.
The arm disk is two-thirds as wide as the bell radius, very
thin in the center, and swollen and rounded along the outer
edge. The subgenital ostia are compressed, are twice as wide
as the interostial pillars, and have a small papillalike projec-
tion in the center of their subumbrellar lip. The subgenital
porticus is unitary. The gonads are in the form of long lines
in the thin reduplicated and folded wall of the stomach. On
each side of these lines of reproductive organs are lines of blunt
gastral filaments. These reduplicated membranes are inflated
and pushed out through the subgenital ostia in the two specimens
in the collection. Each of the interostial pillars contains a
slitlike false ostium about two-thirds as wide as the pillar. One
specimen examined had a large cone-shaped papilla on the upper
margin of this false ostium, while others did not.
The supporting membranes of the 3 main branches of the
mouth arms are pierced by windowlike openings. Typically,
there seem to be 2 in the membrane of each wing, but the
weakened arm membranes have broken down in most of the
arms. In no arm are there more than 2 in each wing, in
some none at all, and in others the branch is only attached
by its upper edge, the membrane between the openings having
given away. The mouth arms are equally spaced, the two
arms arising from the same interostial pillar being widely
separated, the base of each extending partly over the adjacent
subgenital ostium. The proximal portion of each arm is about
one-half the length of the 3-winged distal portion. The fringed
mouths extend on the inner surface to the center of the arm
disk. Scattered among the mouths are very numerous filaments.
Those of the central disk and the proximal portion of the arms
are slender, threadlike filaments. Toward the distal portion
they increase in length and become spindle-shaped, circular in
cross section, and tapering to a long threadlike portion. The
larger filaments contain an axial canal, and reach a maximum
length of 200 mm. and a diameter of 10 mm.
In life, the medusa has an exquisite color scheme of purple,
violet, and rose pink. The gonads are, as a rule, pink, the
general color is violet, and the fringe of tentaclelike marginal
lappets purple. These colors vary considerably in intensity
and arrangement. In f ormalian, the entire medusa is milky gray
and the gonads and mouth fringes are yellow.
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 221
These medusae with their numerous tentaclelike velar lappets,
their exumbrellar papillae, and their arm appendages — all of
which are very long, slender, and flexible and all of which are
colored some shade between rose pink and purple — present a
most striking and beautiful appearance, and as they are found
on or near the surface are most conspicuous objects.
Numbers of young fish of the genus Caranx were found living
in the mass of filaments and mouth arms.
L. mayeri differs from L. smithii in that it has from 12 to 16
rhopalia instead of 8, in that the circular muscle is completely in-
terrupted in the ocular radii, in that it has a false ostium in
each interostial pillar, and in that the interocular canals do not
reach the bell margin.
I have handled this medusa and have seen and experienced
the results of the sting which are very similar to those of a
nettle sting and are not at all serious. This is surprising in view
of the statements of Dr. H. M. Smith as given by Mayer with
regard to the closely related L. smithii Mayer.^ It seems
to me much more probable that the cases of poisoning reported
by Old ^° were due, as I have said before, to the ''Chrysaora
stage" of Dactylometru quinquecirrha which is common in the
harbor. The Filipinos state that the latter form is very pois-
onous, and a number of instances are known in which it has
caused severe symptoms of poisoning.
I append a table of comparative measurements and the num-
ber of rhopalia and lappets to a paramere of the two specimens
of L. mayeri in the collection.
Measurements of Lobonema mayeri sp, nov.
Specimen
A.
Specimen
B.
Bell diameter - - millimeters
Arm disk, diameter do__
Maximum length of the velar lappets __do--
Number of rhopalia
Number of velar lappets
Width of the subgenital ostia - millimeters—
Width of the interostial pillars - do.
Width of the pillar cavity (false ostium) __ do.
Length of the mouth arms from the center of the arm disk do.
350
125
180
12
«3-6
c75
32
25
180
340
110
200
16
D3-4
c70
33
22
180
*6 in 4 parameres, 5 in 2, 4 in 5, and 3 in 1. c More than twice the width of the pillar,
b 4 in 13 parameres and 3 in 3.
^ Pub. Carnegie Inst, Wash. (1910), No. 109, 3, 690.
'' This Journal, Sec. B (1908), 3, 329.
222 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Genus LOBONEMOIDES novum
Generic characters, — Lobonema-like Rhizostomata triptera in
which the marginal lappets are pointed but not greatly extended.
The mouth-arm membranes are not perforated by windowlike
openings. There are more than 8 rhopalia, twice as many radial
canals as sense organs all extending to the margin, and a ring
canal. The ring canal gives off externally a network of anas-
tomosing canals, extending to the margin, and internally a series
of anastomosing canals on each side of each rhopalar canal, which
do not reach the stomach and are connected with the rhopalar
canals but not the interrhopalar canals. The exumbrellar
sensory pits are furrowed with radiating dendritic grooves.
Each mouth arm bears numerous small scattered appendages and
one large terminal spindle-shaped appendage, all of which taper
to filamentous outer ends.
The type species is L. gracilis sp. nov. from Taytay, Palawan.
Fig. 10. Lobonemoides gracilis, an exumbrellar view of half the bell, showing the canal system,
the marginal lappets, etc. X 1.
Lobonemoides gracilis sp. nov. (figs. 10, 11, 12, and 13).
Type. — No. C. 2422, zoological collection. University of the
Philippines.
The bell is flat, 50 to 85 mm. in diameter, and very trans-
parent. The stomach and canals are semiopaque white and the
gonads opaque white. That part of the bell which lies outside
the ring canal is very thin and flexible, while the central portion
is rather thick and stiff. This outer thin region is about 17
mm. wide in the type specimen. The bell is 7 mm. thick out-
side the ring canal, 14 mm. high through the outer edge of
the arm disk, and 10 mm. high through the center of the arm
disk. There are a few scattered papillae on the exumbrella.
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse
223
increasing in size toward the center. They are small, slender,
and flexible, and reach a length of 2 mm. and a basal diameter
of 0.5 mm. In preserved specimens they lie flat on the disk.
There are 14 rhopalia and twice as many radial canals, all
extending to the margin. The sense organs are very short, thick
clubs lying at right angles to the plane of the bell with the
swollen end toward the exumbrellar surface. Between each
pair of sense organs, there are 6 marginal lappets — 4 large
pointed triangular .velar lappets between 2 small pointed ocular
lappets. The rhopalar canals are somewhat larger than the
interrhopalar canals, and divide distally to form a U-shaped
sinus in the upper part of the ocular lappets. In the curve
Fig. 11. Lohonemoides gracilis gen. et sp. nov., ventral view of the medusa. X i- Two of the
mouth arms of this specimen are aborted.
between the limbs of this sinus lies the sense organ. The ex-
umbrellar sensory pit is dendritically grooved. The ring canal
lies at the outer edge of the swollen central region of the bell,
and its greatest breadth is at right angles to the plane of the
umbrella. The radial canals curve over this swollen area to the
ring canal, which gives off externally and internally a set of anas-
tomosing canals. The external network Is connected in a
number of places with both the ocular and interocular canals,
and it approaches the latter more closely and is joined to it
in a greater number of places. Internally, a network of 3
or 4 anastomosing canals is given off by the ring canal on
each side of each ocular canal to which it is joined in 2 or 3
224
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
places. The interocular canals internal to the ring canal are
broader than the ocular canals, and show a sinuslike broadening
where they join the ring canal. Beyond the ring canal the
interocular canals are small and are closely surrounded by the
network of anastomosing canals, while the ocular canals maintain
a uniform size to the margin and have on either side just
outside the ring canal a small area free from the anastomosing
canals.
The arm disk is 50 mm. in diameter, swollen in the zone
of origin of the arms, and thin in the center of the disk. The sub-
genital ostia are 18 mm. in width and 4 mm. high, with a
concave upper and swollen convex lower lip. The interostial
pillars are 9 mm. wide. The
subgenital porticus is unitary
and square. Each gonad lies in
a complex series of folds in the
floor of the stomach. The folds
are longest in the center and
shortest at the ends, where at
the level of the center of the
interostial pillars the gonads are
separated from one another by
a very short space. Thus the
outer edges of the gonads out-
line a square area, the corners
of which coincide with the cen-
ters of the interostial pillars.
The bases of the pillars are
rounded, and the edge of the
portion of the arm disk between
them is straight, so the arm disk
may be considered 8-sided —
rounded and straight faces alternating with one another — or
more exactly 4-sided, each corner being rounded. The outline
of the stomach is square, but the invaginated gonads have so
encroached on it as to leave only a narrow cruciform cavity
whose outer ends are joined by a marginal sinus from which
the radial canals originate.
The arms are about equally spaced. The two arms on a
common interostial pillar are widely separated, so that the base
of each arm lies over the outer one-third of a gonad. The
arm disk at the base is a little wider than the bell radius,
while at the point of origin of the arms it is only five-ninths
as wide as the bell radius. The arms are 50 mm. long from
Fig. 12. Lohonemoidea gracilis, a dia-
firrammatic representation of a quadrant
of the bell from the subumbrellar side,
showing: the subgrenital ostium, canals,
etc. X 1.
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusx
225
the center of the disk, and so a little longer than the bell
radius. They are very flexible. The inner wings bear mouths
to the center of the disk. The distal 3-winged portion of the
arm is about one-half the total length of the arm. The branches
are slender and delicate, and the fringed mouths are not crowded,
except toward the tip of the arms. At the center of the disk
is a slender filament, and around this a whorl of similar fila-
ments, one in the axil between each pair of arms arising from
a common interostial pillar. Scattered among the mouths are
a few similar but smaller filaments. At the end of each mouth
Fig. 13. Lobonemoides gracilis, lateral view of one mouth arm and an interostial pillar,
showing the ducts as seen in an injected specimen ; diagrammatic. X 1.
arm there is a large spindle-shaped appendage tapering to a
filamentous distal end and having a central canal. Scattered
on the distal ends of the arms are a few similar but smaller
appendages. The terminal appendages reach a length of 45
mm. and a maximum diameter of 6 mm.
Each of the very narrow, interradial limbs of the stomach
receives two ducts from the mouth arms, one (fig. 13, a,) at
a point about one-third of the distance from its outer end to
the center and the other (fig. 13, b) at the outer end. These
226
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
two ducts originate from the point of junction of three main
ducts in the mouth arms. The central one (fig. 13, c) is formed
by the union of the ducts, which run along the outer edge of the
inner wing of the two arms supported by a common pillar and
give off smaller ducts to the branches of their inner wings.
This union occurs not far from the disk center in the axil
between two mouth arms supported on the same interradial
pillar. The other two (fig. 13, d) are the main central ducts
from the same two mouth arms. Each of those two main ducts
divides at the point of origin of the two outer arm wings
into 3 main branches, the two larger of which run to each of
the outer arm wings and join the ducts running along the
outer surfaces of these wings. These and the main ducts of
the arms are often double (fig. 13). The smaller one runs
through the center of the arm, giving off branches to the outer
ducts of the 3 wings till at the tip of the arm it and the outer
ducts of the 3 wings are joined. The main duct of each arm
sends off in its proximal portion one large connecting branch
and numerous smaller connecting branches to the outer duct
of the inner mouth arm.
The medusa is transparent white, and the gonads are yellow.
There are 3 specimens of this new and interesting medusa
collected by Dr. R. P. Cowles along the beach at Taytay, Palawan.
Measurements of them are given in the following table.
Measurements of Lobonemoides gracilis sp. nov.
Specimen.
Bell di-
ameter.
Arm-disk
diameter.
Lengrth
of the
mouth
arms.
Width of
the sub-
genital
ostia.
Width of
the inter-
ostial
pillars.
Type C. 2422 _._ _
mm.
85
70
47
m,m.
50
44
84
mm.
50
44
30
mm.
18
16
12
mm.
10
8
5
Cotype A
Cotype B . _-, _ .
This is a very puzzling form to place systematically. It may
possibly be a growth form of Lobonema mayeri or some other
species of that genus, for in many ways it resembles these
medusae, but it lacks the two main generic characters of
Lobonema, the tentaclelike marginal lappets and the perforated
arm membranes. Further, it was collected on the east coast
of Palawan, whereas L. mayeri was found only on the west coast.
The gonads of Lobonemoides gracilis are well developed although
not fully mature, and its sense organs and the arrangement of the
canals of the mouth arms are different from those of L. mayeri.
IX, D, 3 Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusse 227
For these reasons, I have decided to consider it as a mature form
which necessitates the formation of the new genus to which
I have given the name Lobonemoides, because of its resemblance
in certain characters to Mayer's genus Lobonema.
The classification of a form such as this brings in question
the purpose of systematic work. As I see it, the function of
such work is to bring before scientific workers the forms of
life in such a way as to make possible their differentiation
and consequently to allow of their being placed in a general
system and used as a basis for scientific inductions. The
binomial system of nomenclature has been adopted as the most
practical method of accomplishing this end. The placing of
scientific data before the world is the essential part of such
a work. The mere introducing into the literature of the group
of a new generic or specific name is the smallest part and
should be but a means to an end. It seems to me, therefore,
that the possibility that these names may in the future become
synonyms should not prevent the worker from accomplishing
this purpose. For example, I might have described the above
species as a doubtful, immature form of L. mayeri. But this
denies a place in the classification and nomenclature of the group
to a very interesting medusa form, which in so far as present
data is concerned is a new species of a new genus and concern-
ing which there may be no more data for years. It practically
buries it from all but a very few workers; whereas, if it be
given a generic and specific name it receives a place in the
nomenclature of the group and is thus brought to the attention
of all workers, and the question as to whether it is a mature
form or not will, no doubt, be sooner settled and the medusa
put in its proper place. If it be a growth form, the name
which I give it will become a synonym and be discarded, but
it will have accomplished the purpose for which it was given.
RHIZOSTOMATA LORIFERA Vanhoffen
Genus RHOPILEMA Haeckel, 1880
Rhopilema visayana sp. nov. (figs. 14, 15, and 16).
Type. — No. C. 2423, zoological collection. University of the
Philippines. From Taytay Bay, Palawan.
The bell is from 200 to 400 mm. in diameter, and is hemi-
spherical or more convex than a hemisphere. The central por-
tion which forms the upper wall of the stomach is thick and stiff,
while the remainder is very thin and flexible. The exumbrella
is covered with numerous small, pointed, spinelike projections.
124685 3
228
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
These are about 0.5 mm. in basal diameter and
0.75 mm. high. They are scattered over the
surface, are about 2 mm. apart at the margin, and
increase in number toward the apex, where they
are only about 0.5 mm. apart. Scattered among
these on the sides of the exumbrella are a few
low, flatly rounded papillae about 1.5 mm. in
diameter and 0.5 mm. in height.
Each of the 8 rhopalia shows a distinct, brown,
pigmented area. There are typically 8 thin,
rounded, velar lappets in each octant. The free
outer ends and the deep irregular grooves between
them are free from the projections found on
the rest of the exumbrella. The width of these
lappets is variable, and their outer ends sometimes
show bifurcation.
The canal system is very similar to that of
R, hispidum Maas, the 16 radial canals extending to the margin.
Each adradial canal shows a sinuslike swelling at the point
of origin of its innermost and largest branch. The radial
Fig. 14. Rhopilema
visayana s p .
nov., an exum-
brellar view of a
sense organ,
showing the ad-
jacent canals as
seen in an in-
jected specimen.
Enlarged.
Fig. 15.
Rhopilema visayana, subumbrellar view of a quadrant, showing the canal system, the
radial muscles, and the subgenital ostium with the three papillae. X J.
IX, D, 3
Light: Some Philippine Scyphomedusx
229
canals divide the radial muscle into triangular areas which are
widely separated proximally.
The genital ostia are as wide as the interostial pillars, and
are partly closed by 1 large median papilla and 2 smaller, lateral,
elongated, roughened, wartlike papillse, each lying in the line
of a radial canal. The partitions between the 4 genital cavities
are narrow but complete.
The arm disk is supported by 4 broad, flat pillars. The
distance from the base of one of these to the base of the one
opposite it is 170 mm. The united arms arise from the center of
the arm disk, and are only 60 mm. in diameter where they leave
l^j^^-^^w^.-f'
Fig. 16. RhopUema visaycuna, a diagram of the arrangement of the ducts of two mouth arms
supported by a common pillar and of their scapulets. X i.
the disk. The mouth arms, measured from the outer surface of
the arm disk, are 190 mm. in length. They are united proximally
for more than two-thirds of this distance, the distal free portion
measuring 75 mm. When the arms are spread out, the specimen
is 200 mm. from the tip of one arm to the tip of the arm 180°
from it, the central united portion being 50 mm. across at this
point. The 3-winged portion of the arm makes up less than
one-half of the free distal portion of the arm. Each of the two
outer wings bears a dichotomously divided branch near its origin,
and is divided distally into 4 flattened, tapering, nearly naked
branches. Scattered among the mouths are appendages of three
types: Long, flexible, somewhat flattened, filamentous append-
230 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
ages; shorter, flattened, ribbonlike appendages; and pointed,
spindle-shaped or wedge-shaped appendages, the largest of which
is usually terminal.
The scapulets are about 65 mm. long and 45 mm. wide at the
base, their upper and outer surfaces bearing numerous mouths,
among which are many long, filamentous appendages. The
scapulets are branched along either side, and are deeply bifurcated
at the outer end.
Each interostial pillar contains a main duct which enters the
outer end of one of the 4 stomach lobes and is formed by the
union of the main ducts of the 2 mouth arms arising from the same
pillar. The main ducts of the 2 arms unite somewhat beyond
the scapulets, and the main duct formed by their union receives
on each side a duct formed by the union of the ducts of the two
scapulets of that side. The main duct of each mouth arm re-
ceives a number of smaller ducts from the inner surface of the
mouth arm and a very large duct from each of the 3 outer wings
of the distal portion of the arm.
The color in both preserved and living specimens is opaque
white.
This medusa was very common in Taytay Bay, Palav/an, during
May, 1913. Nearly every specimen examined contained one or
more living individuals of a species of a crab, Charibdis {Gonion^
emus) crucifera (Fabr.) M. Edwards. These crabs were con-
siderably paler than is typical for the species, which would seem
to indicate a somewhat extensive residence within the medusa. I
have also seen the medusa accompanied by large numbers of small
fish apparently belonging to the genus Caranx. In some instances,
these fish were seen to be eating the medusa, but in all such cases
the medusa was dead. When the medusa was alive, they seemed
to maintain a commensal relation. The fish would be seen play-
ing about among the mouth arms and appendages and on being
alarmed would disappear under the edge of the bell, between the
arms or in the subgenital porticus. A similar condition was found
in the case of Lobonema mayerL I am told that R, visayana
which is closely related to the common edible medusa of Japan, R,
esculenta Kishinouye, is used for food by the inhabitants of the
east coast of Leyte where it is preserved in vinegar. As it is
apparently a common form in the Visayas (hence the name),
there is no reason why it should not form a staple article of food.
It is very closely related to R, hispidum Maas, but differs from
it in having a distinct pigmental area in the sense organ, in
having its mouth arms united for more than two-thirds of their
length, and in having 3 wartlike papillse in the mouth of the
subgenital ostia.
ILLUSTRATIONS
(Drawings by Santos, Fajardo, and Penya)
TEXT FIGURES
Fig. 1. Cassiopea polypoides Keller var. culionensis var. nov., a sense organ
from the subumbrellar side. Much enlarged.
2. Cassiopea medusa sp. nov., a sense organ and the adjacent canal
system from the subumbrellar side. Very much enlarged.
3. Cassiopea medusa^ a portion of a mouth arm, showing the scattered
mouths and the very typical appendages. X 1.
4. Acromitus maculosus gen. et sp. nov., lateral view of the medusa.
X 8/9.
5. Acromitus maculosus, an exumbrellar view of a sense organ; dia-
grammatic. Much enlarged.
6. Acromitus maculosus, an exumbrellar view of a portion of the
boll, showing the canal system as seen when injected; somewhat
diagrammatic.
7. Lobonema mayeri sp. nov., a quadrant of the exumbrellar surface,
showing the papillae, sense organs, and tentaclelike marginal lap-
pets. X 1/2.
8. Lobonema mayeri, a mouth arm, showing the appendages, the
windowlike openings, and the irregular arrangement of the
ducts; somewhat diagrammatic. X 1/3.
9. Lobonema mayeri, a sense organ from the exumbrellar side. Much
enlarged.
10. Lobonemoides gracilis, an exumbrellar view of half the bell, showing
the canal system, the marginal lappets, etc. X 1.
11. Lobonemoides gracilis gen. et sp. nov., ventral view of the medusa.
X 1/2. Two of the mouth arms of this specimen are aborted.
12. Lobonemoides gracilis, a diagrammatic representation of a quadrant
of the bell from the subumbrellar side, showing the subgenital
ostium, canals, etc. X 1.
13. Lobonemoides gracilis, lateral view of one mouth arm and an interos-
tial pillar, showing the ducts as seen in an injected specimen;
diagrammatic. X 1.
14. Rhopilema visayana sp. nov., an exumbrellar view of a sense organ,
showing the adjacent canals as seen in an injected specimen.
Enlarged.
15. Rhopilema visayana, subumbrellar view of a quadrant, showing the
canal system, the radial muscles, and the subgenital ostium with
the three papillae. X 1/2.
16. Rhopilema visayana, a diagram of the arrangement of the ducts of
two mouth arms supported by a common pillar and of their scap-
ulets. X 1/2.
231
NOTES ON PHILIPPINE ALCYONARIA
PART II : LEMNALIOIDES KUKENTHALI, A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF
ALCYONARIA FROM THE PHILIPPINES AND A DISCUSSION OF THE
SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF THE NEW GENUS
By S. F. Light
(From the Zoological Laboratory, College of Liberal Arts,
University of the Philippines)
One plate and 8 text figures
Genus LEMNALIOIDES novum
Generic characters, — The colony is upright, treelike, or bushy,
and consists of a number of stems coalesced in one or more
groups for some distance above the base. The tubular, non-
retractile polyps are scattered singly or in little groups on the
branches and lateral and terminal twigs. The spiculation of
the cortex and the canal walls is similar to that in Lemnalia.
The tentacles contain a very few, very small, scattered spicules,
and the stomodseum contains no spicules. The tentacles beai:
more than one row of pinnules, and show a median longitudinal
band of muscle fibers on their outer surfaces. The type of the
genus is Lemnalioides kukenthali sp. nov.
Lemnalioides kiikenthali sp. nov. (Plate I; text figs. 1 to 6).
Type. — This species is described from a single well-developed
colony from one of the shallow reefs in Port Galera Bay, Min-
doro. No. C. 254, zoological collection. University of the Philip-
pines. Collected by S. F. Light in May, 1912.
The colony, which is 115 mm. in height and 110 mm. in greatest
breadth across the polypary, arises from a small somewhat en-
crusting base, 38 mm. in length and 25 mm. in width. It consists
of 2 main stalks or groups of stems which divide at a height of
about 40 mm. to form a number of stems or main branches.
These are divided and subdivided toward their outer ends to form
a number of distally directed, closely approximated branches.
On the slender, lateral and terminal twigs of these branches
and scattered to some extent on the branches themselves are
the large, tubular, nonretractile polyps. They arise singly or
in little groups, and are all expanded in the type specimen
(Plate I), where they average from 1 to 2 mm. in length and
233
234
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
Fig. 1. Spicules from the
polyp and tentacles of Lem-
nalioides kiikenthali; a, a
polyp spindle showing the
axis to be seen in cleared
specimens ; b, a spindle
from the distal end of one
of the double rows, showing
the axis and the divided and
sculptured distal end ; c,
tentacle spicules. X 112.5.
about 0.5 mm. in diameter. The lateral twigs decrease in length
from as much as 9 mm. at the base of a branch to 3 or 4 mm.
toward the tip of the branch. The lines of the canal walls are
distinct on the stem and branches, and each polyp can be plainly
seen to be the termination of a canal.
The stomodseum is long, thick walled, and spindle-shaped,
and contains no spicules. In an aver-
age polyp it is 0.6 mm. in length
and 0.2 mm. in greatest (central) diam-
eter. The tentacles are large with a
double row of short thick pinnulse on
each side and a median band of muscle
fibers on the outer surface (fig. 6).
They contain only a very few, small,
scattered spicules.
The polyp armature is not heavy, and
consists of smooth spindles in an ir-
regularly transverse arrangement on
the body of the polyps. Distally, they
form a double row of 5 or 6 pairs of
spindles at the base of each tentacle
(fig. 6).
The polyp spindles are rather irregular, bent, or curved, with a
few low projections, and a narrow, distinct, central axis, and ap-
pear, in cleared specimens, to be more like flexible fibers than stiff
spicules (fig. 1, a). They are from 0.15 to 0.20 mm. in length
and from 0.005 to 0.008 mm. in diameter, and have somewhat
swollen and divided ends. This is particularly true of the distal
ends of the spindles of the double rows
which are mushroomed and much
divided and sculptured (fig. 1, 6).
The very few tentacle spicules are
irregular forms found in the crotch
between two tentacles and here and
there in the pinnules of the lower
part of the tentacles. They range
from 0.04 to 0.05 mm. in length, and
are sculptured over their entire sur-
face, particularly heavily at the outer ends (fig. 1, c).
The spicules of the stem and branch cortex are spindles. They
are numerous, but do not seem to have the hard brittle character
of the spicules of Lemnalia, as the cortex of the colony except at
the base is soft and pliable. In the upper stem, these spindles are
smooth and curved and are very similar to those of the polyp
Fig. 2. Spindles from the stem
cortex of Lemnalioides kiiken-
thali; a, from the upper stem ; h,
from the mid stem. X 112.5.
IX, D, 3 Light: Notes on Philippine Alcyonaria 235
but with a wider, more conspicuous axis and with slightly en-
larged, divided, and roughened ends (fig. 2, a). Among them
are a few heavier spindles, whose axes are not distinct and which
show a few projections on the convex surface (fig. 2, 6). Prox-
imally, the spicules of the latter type increase in number and
become rougher and more irregular. Some of these spindles have
numerous blunt projections in zones, others have projections on
the convex surface, some of them graduate into 4-rayed forms and
forms approaching the double stars or capstanlike forms of so
many species of Lemnalia (fig. 3). In the extreme base, these
double stars and capstanlike forms predominate (fig. 5).
The spindles of the branch cortex reach a length of 0.15 mm.
and a diameter of 0.01 mm.; those of the cortex of the upper
stem are from 0.17 to 0.29 mm. in length and from 0.008 to 0.015
mm. in diameter ; those of the cortex of the middle of the stem
are from 0.18 to 0.3 mm. in length and from 0.009 to 0.02 mm.
in diameter. The curved spindles of the cortex of the lower
stem are from 0.05 to 0.19 mm. in length and from 0.019 to
Fig. 3. Spicules from the cortex of the lower part of the stem of Lemnalioidea kiikenthali.
X 112.5.
0.036 mm. in diameter, and the club-shaped forms are from
0.08 to 0.12 mm. in length, from 0.04 to 0.05 mm. in greatest
diameter, and about 0.025 mm. in least diameter. The spicules
of the base are from 0.057 to 0.08 mm. in length, from 0.04 to 0.07
mm. in maximum diameter, and about 0.02 mm. in least diameter.
The spicules of the canal walls are similar in form throughout
the whole colony, being smooth, rodlike bodies with roughened,
expanded, and divided ends (fig. 4). These increase from an
average length of 0.25 mm. and a diameter of 0.009 mm. in
the branches to a length of 0.5 mm. and a diameter of 0.026
mm. in the base.
The cortex of the entire colony contains large numbers of
unicellular algse. These are particularly numerous toward the
base, and give the cortex a characteristic appearance in cleared
specimens when examined under the microscope.
236
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
Fig. 4. The ends of
two spicules from
the canal walls of
Lemnalioides kuken-
thali, near the base
of the colony. X 230.
The stem is yellowish brown and the polyp-bearing portion is
light brown in formalin.
I have named the type species of the genus in honor of Prof.
Dr. Willy Kukenthal, whose epoch-making work in bringing
order out of chaos in the classification of the Alcyonaria is too
well known to need recounting here.
I was pleased to see in a recent reprint (1913), which the
author kindly sent me, that Kukenthal has come
to the conclusion that the first four species, in-
cluded in his revision of the Nephthyidse
(1903), in group A of the key to the species of
the genus Lithophytum as well as L. elegans,
brassica, and armatum belong to the genus
Lemnalia and to a new genus Paralemnalia
rather than to Lithophytum. As the classifica-
tion stood before, Lemnalia and Lithophytum
overlapped and neither was clearly defined. I
had been forced to this conclusion by a study
of the large collection of Nephthyidse in the
museum of the University of the Philippines. It was first and
most strikingly brought to my attention when separating the
species into generic groups. Following Kukenthal's key to the
genera of the Nephthyidse (1903), a distinct group of species was
found which seemingly belonged to Lemnalia, and a study of the
literature of that genus confirmed me in that opinion. On study-
ing the key to the species of Lithophytum, however, I found the
same group of species to agree very closely with certain of the
species of group A of that genus. A further
study of the descriptions of the species in
group A convinced me that some of them
were of the same genus if not of the same
species as the specimens in our collection,
which after a careful study of the works of
Gray (1866), Bourne (1900), and Kukenthal
(1903) I concluded were, without the pos-
sibility of mistake, species of the genus Lem-
nalia Gray emend. Bourne emend. Kukenthal. By placing the
five species africana May, elegans May, flava May, brassica May,
and armatum Ktikth. in the genus Lemnalia, Kukenthal has put it
and the genus Lithophytum on a clearer and more workable
basis as he has clearly shown in his Alcyonarien des Rothen
Meeres.
In this paper, Kukenthal also describes the new genus Para-
lemnalia to receive the species thrysoides Ehrbg. and flabellum
Fig. 5. Two spicules
from the cortex of the
extreme base of Lem,'
nalioides kukenthali.
X 112.5.
IX, D, 3 Light: Notes on Philippine Alcyonaria 237
Q. and G. (including Ammothea digitatum May) , both previously
placed by him in the genus Lithophytum, and a new species P.
eburnea, thereby further clearing up the situation in the genus
Lithophytum. He diagnoses the new genus Paralemnalia as
follows :
Die von einer gemeinsamen Basis entspringenden glatten sehr rigiden und
zerbrechlichen Hauptstamme sind nicht weiter verzweigt, hochstens konnen
sie sich gabeln. Die Polypen sitzen direkt an diesen Hauptstammen, und
zwar stets einzeln, niemals in "Biindel," *^Buschel" oder "Katzchen" vereint,
die Polypen sind retraktil, und ihr unterster Teil kann mehr oder wenig
deutlich zu einem Kelch umgebildet sein. Die Kanalwande sind diinn, aber
dicht erfullt mit einem Netzwerk spindelformiger Spicula. In ihrer Gestalt
schliessen sich die Spicula der verschiedenen Regionen an die von Lemnalia
an. Verbreitung; Indopazifischer Ozean, in flachem Wasser.
This new genus has for its type species Ammothea thrysoides
Ehrbg. which Gray (1868) placed together with Ammothea
(Alcyonium) ramosa (Q. and G.) in his new genus Verrilliana.
His diagnosis of this, as of so many other genera, Lemnalia for
example, was not only incomplete but incorrect, and was ignored
by subsequent workers. In the case of Lemnalia, although the
description was incorrect, the species described, including the
type species (that is, the first one named, as no type was de-
signated), did belong to a distinct genus, and Bourne when he
revised the genus retained Gray's name, Lemnalia. In the case
of Verrilliana, however, of the two species named as belong-
ing to the genus, Ammothea ramosa was given first and is,
therefore, since no type was named, the type species of the
genus. This form, however, is undoubtedly a species of the
older genus Ammothea (now Lithophytum), and thus the name
Verrilliana, the type species having been removed or rather re-
turned to another genus, becomes a homonym. This, together
with the very poor diagnosis, would seem to afford ample reason
for dropping the name Verrilliana.
Ktikenthal speaking of this point says:
Est ist mir daher ganz unmoglich, den namen Verrilliana fur die von mir
aufgestellte Gattung wieder zu verwenden, um so mehr als Gray ausser der
A, thyrsoides auch noch das Lithophytum arboreum (Q. and G.) zu seiner
neuen Gattung rechnete.
Beide Arten haben aber nicht das geringste miteinander zu tun, * * *.
He evidently refers here to Alcyonium ramosa of Quoy and
Gaimard, which Gray gave as the first species of his genus
Verrilliana, as I find no references to Lithophytum arboreum
(Q. and G.), and Lithophytum arboreum, the type species of
the genus Lithophytum, was named by Forskal. In either case,
Ktikenthal is eminently correct in finding no resemblance be-
238 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
tween such forms as Paralemnalia thyrsoides and such charac-
teristic Lithophyta as L. ramosa and L. arboreum.
Our collection contains a number of specimens of the type
species of this genus, Paralemnalia thrysoides (Ehrbg.) Kiiken-
thal. They are from three rather widely separated regions:
Bantayan Islands; Sabong (near Port Galera Bay), Mindoro;
and Batas Island on the east coast of Palawan. I found it
especially abundant on the reefs of the Sulu Sea side of Palawan,
where it was one of the common reef Alcyonaria. The spreading
colonies with their stiff upright stems reach a diameter of more
than a meter, and are usually found associated with Alcyonidss
to which they have a superjficial resemblance. It is one of the
most beautiful of the Philippine reef Alcyonaria. The expanded
colony has in life a soft velvety appearance, owing to the long
flexible polyps which reach a length of from 10 to 15 millimeters.
An examination of the stomodseal walls of these specimens has
demonstrated the presence of numerous spicules (fig. 8) some-
what similar to those found in the stomodaeal walls of Lemnalia
(fig. 7).
Judging from May's description and drawings (1899) and from
a study of a large collection of Lemnalia in our museum, I
suspect that Ammothea digitatum May which Kiikenthal has
included with L. flabellum as Paralemnalia flabellum is a species
of Lemnalia rather than of Paralemnalia or at least an inter-
grading form. A reference to May's figures (1899) of Am-
mothea digitata will show that the stems are branched. The
diagnosis is further based on the retractility of the polyps and
their arrangement singly on the stems. These characters must
be used with caution as it is very difficult to differentiate between
extreme contractility and retractility of polyps. A number of
species of Lemnalia in our collection have polyps which are
scattered singly on the stems and twigs and which are so strongly
contractile as scarcely to show above the surface and yet they
are unmistakably species of Lemnalia.
Paralemnalia, however, as may be easily seen by a comparison
of the type species, P. thrysoides, with any species of Lemnalia,
is a distinct genus related to Lemnalia and Lemnalioides. It
forms with these two a series of closely related genera of which
Lemnalioides is most nearly related and Paralemnalia least
nearly related to the genus Lithophytum. The method of branch-
ing, the form of the colony, the arrangement of the polyps, and
the proportion between the barren and polyp-bearing portions of
the colony are similar in Lemnalia and Lemnalioides, but different
from that in Paralemnalia. Lemnalia and Paralemnalia, on the
IX, D, 3 Light: Notes on Philippine Alcyonaria 239
other hand, have the characteristic stomodseum spicules which
are not found in Lemnalioides. The tentacle spicules also, which
are numerous in Paralemnalia and Lemnalia, are very few and
scattered in Lemnalioides, and may very probably be found to
be entirely absent in species as yet undiscovered.
In 1896 Klikenthal described and figured Ammothea carnosa,
a new species from Ternate. In his revision of the Nephthyidse
(1903), he includes this species in group A of his key to the
species of the genus Lithophytum, where its characters would
naturally place it as the group was at that time defined. Since
that time, two of the five species in this group, L. fiavum and
L. africanum, have been removed (Klikenthal, 1913) to the genus
Lemnalia and two others, L. thrysoides and L. flabellum, to
Kukenthars new genus Paralemnalia. This leaves L. carnosum
as the only member of group A remaining in the genus Litho-
phytum, and this in spite of the fact that Klikenthal says (1903) :
Vorliegende Art bildet zusammen mit L. africanum^ fiavum und digitatum
eine naturliche Gruppe innerhalb der Gattung Lithophytum.
The excellent figures and description of A. carnosa show it to
have characteristics which suggest a relationship to Lemnalia,
Paralemnalia, and Lemnalioides. The small polyp-bearing area
restricted to the anterior portion of the colony; the colony con-
sisting of a number of stems united for a part of their length;
and the typical form and size of the spicules, their arrange-
ment on the polyps, and their presence (supposedly in consider-
able numbers) in the canal walls are all characters which suggest
relationship to these genera. The absence of stomodseum spicules
and the absence (or apparent absence) of tentacle spicules pre-
vent A. carnosa from being included in the genus Lemnalia, and
this character together with the branching colony exclude it
from the genus Paralemnalia. But the presence of very few
tentacle spicules and, possibly, as only one form has been
examined, their entire absence is characteristic of the genus
Lemnalioides. The form of its cortex and canal-wall spicules,
and also their size and arrangement, are strikingly suggestive of
Lemnalioides kilkenthali. It seems probable then that a re-
examination of the type in the light of the recent changes in
the genus Lithophytum would show Lithophytum carnosum
(Klikth.) to belong to the genus Lemnalioides proposed in this
paper or to be a form connecting that genus with Lithophytum.
While in many ways the genus Lemnalioides, as the name
indicates, approaches the genus Lemnalia to which it is un-
doubtedly closely related as I have shown above, the differences
240
The Philippine Journal of Science
seem to me to be of generic value. In my study of a large col-
lection of Lemnalia in which Lemnalioides kukenthali was at
first included, I found that the differences between it and any
species of Lemnalia in the collection were so much greater than
the differences between the most widely different species of Lem-
nalia that it seemed impossible to place it with them in that
genus. With the addition of the five species transferred from
Lithophytum and the new Philippine species, the genus Lemnalia
will contain some 20 or more species. As further collections in
the Philippines and elsewhere will undoubtedly add to this
number and as these species are closely related and very dif-
ficult to differentiate from descriptions without specimens for
' comparison, the separation from the genus of any
natural group seems to be amply justified.
The Philippine species of Lemnalia all show on
dissection more or less numerous, characteristic
spicules in the walls of the stomodseum (fig. 7).
I have found no references to such spicules in any
species of Nephthyidse except Gersemnia studer
(Koch). Gray (1866), Bourne (1900), and
^^>^ Kiikenthal (1903 and 1913) evidently overlooked
these spicules, and I have no doubt that a re-
examination of the type specimens would show
them to be present in all the known species of
Lemnalia, This oversight is not to be wondered
at as these spicules are very seldom to be seen
unless the stomodseum is dissected away from the
rest of the polyp and would not be discovered
except by accident or by a more thorough mor-
phological investigation than is usually under-
taken in purely systematic work. They would
probably escape detection in a histological investigation, also, such
as that made by Bourne (1900) as the material must be decalcified
before sectioning. I found dissection under the binocular mi-
croscope of specimens cleared in clove oil to be the best method
of separating the stomodseum and studying the spicules of its
walls. I have examined the stomodseal walls of several of the
species of Lithophytum, Nephthya, Dendronephthya, Stereo-
nephthya, Capyiella, and Siphonogorgia in our collection, but
find the stomodseum. to be without spicules of any kind. In
Paralemnalia thrysoides, however, as I have mentioned above,
I found stomodseal spicules to be abundant.
In all the Philippine species of Lemnalia, there is a single row
of pinnules on each side of the tentacle. Bourne (1900) notes
Fig. 6. Two ten-
tacles from a
cleared specimen
of Lemnalioides
kukenthali, show-
ing the median
muscle bands,
the double rows
of pinnules, and
the double rows
of polyp spicules.
X 48.5.
IX, D, 3
Light: Notes on Philippine Alcyonaria
241
the same condition in L. nitida (Verrill), and judging from the
figures of Bourne (1900), M^y (1899), and Kukenthal (1903)
the same is probably true of all the previously described species.
All the species of Lemnalia described by Bourne, Kukenthars
L. umbellata, and the Philippine species have numerous tentacle
spicules. There are no tentacle spicules mentioned in the de-
scriptions of May's species, but I have no doubt that, as in the
case of the stomodseal spicules, a reexamination of the type
would show them to be present.
Kukenthal (1913) has emended his earUer diagnosis of
Lemnalia (1903) to read:
Von einer gemeinsamen, oft stark verbreiterten Basis erheben sich ein
Oder mehrere ausserlich glatte, wenig biegsame Hauptstamme, die sich an
ihrem oberen Ende in verschiedener Weise verzweigen und an ihren End-
zweigen in Biindeln oder Biischeln aber niemals in "Katzchen" angeordnete
Fig. 7. Two spicules from the stomodseal
walls of an undescribed species of Lemnalia.
X 1,000. Actual lengths, 0.038 and 0.0532
mm., respectively.
Fia. 8. A spicule from the stomodseal walls
of Paralemnalia thrysoidea (Ehrbg.)
Kukenthal. X 1,000. Actual length
0.0513 mm.
Polypen tragen. Die Polypen sind nicht retraktil. Die Kanalwande sind
diinn, aber dicht erfullt mit einem Netzwerk spindelformiger Spicula.
An der Polypenwand finden sich neben grosseren, schlanken, bedornten
Spindeln kleinere vor, bei denen die Dornen in ein Paar Kranzen angeordnet
sind. Die Tentakel enthalten plattenformige, fein skulpturierte Spicula.
In der Rinde der Aste liegt ein dichtes Netz schlanker, meist gekriimmter
Spindeln, die nach der Basis zu mit kleineren, mehr sternformigen Spicula
untermischt werden. Verbreitung; Indopazifischer Ozean, in flachem Was-
ser, auf Korallenriffen.
I have found no small spicules in the polyp walls having
two zones of projections as spoken of in the above diagnosis
("schlanken, bedornten Spindeln kleinere vor, bei denen die
Dornen in ein Paar Kranzen angeordnet sind.*') I have found
such spicules, however, in the stomodseal walls of all the specimens
I have studied, and I have also found them in very small numbers
in the oral surface of a few species, and they are present in
242 The Philippine Jourmal of Science 1914
large numbers in the tentacles of two species. It seems very-
probable that the spicules here referred to are the stomodseal
spicules which may sometimes be made out through the polyp
walls of cleared specimens.
I propose still further to emend the diagnosis of the genus
Lemnalia to read as follows :
Genus LEMNALIA Gray emended
Generic characters, — The colony is upright, stiff, or rigid, and
consists of one or more stems arising from a common often
broadened base. The stems may or may not be coalesced prox-
imally in one or more groups for a portion of their length. They
divide distally to form numerous branches and twigs. The
polyps are not retractile, but may be so strongly contracted as
to appear retractile. They are scattered singly, or in little
groups, on the branches and lateral and terminal twigs. The
tentacles bear on each side a single row of pinnules. The thin
canal walls contain a close network of spindle-shaped or rod-
shaped spicules whose ends are usually roughened, enlarged,
and divided. The spicules of the polyp wall are spindles usually
forming 8, more or less, distinct converging double rows in the
bases of the tentacles; those of the branch cortex are spindles
forming an interlacing felt work over the surface; those of the
stem form a thick layer of spindles, club-shaped forms, 4-rayed
forms, and double stars, the last predominating toward the base.
The tentacles contain numerous spicules which may be of three
types, curved or rod-shaped forms, finely sculptured flattened
sclerites, or slender, irregularly branched, rod-shaped spicules.
The walls of the stomodseum contain small, sculptured or un-
sculptured, rod-shaped or flattened, irregularly branched spic-
ules, usually having two zones of projection and often showing
bifurcation of one or both ends.
Lemnalioides it will be seen differs from Lemnalia as thus
diagnosed, in that the tentacles contain very few spicules, in
that the stomodseum contains no spicules, and in that there is
a double row of pinnules along each side of the tentacles. Two
other characters which may prove to be specific rather than
generic in value are the presence in the mid line of the outer
surface of each tentacle of a longitudinal band of muscle fibers
and the presence in the ectoderm of Lemnalioides of little
batteries of nematocysts which I have as yet been unable to
find in any species of Lemnalia.
Lemnalioides differs from Paralemnalia most distinctly in its
softer consistency, in its more treelike colony form, in that
IX, D, 3 Light: Notes on PhUippine Alcyonaria 243
the polyps are sometimes arranged in little groups and are
borne on the branches and twigs, in the absence of stomodseal
spicules, and in the scarcity of spicules in the tentacles.
Because of these differences, I consider Lemnalioides a natural
genus between Lemnalia and Lithophytiim. It approaches Litho-
phytum in that the tentacle spicules ,are few and scattered and
in the absence of stomodseal spicules. It further approaches
it in its softer consistency and more treelike colony form. It
is much more closely related to Lemnalia, however, which it
resembles in its colony formed of proximally coalesced stems,
in that the polyp-bearing portion of the colony is confined to
a small distal portion of the colony, in its mode of branching,
and very strikingly in the spiculation of the canal walls and
cortex.
A further characteristic of Lemnalioides which separates it
together with Lemnalia and Paralemnalia from Lithophytum as
from all other nephthyid genera is the presence of very numerous
long, sticky, elastic mesenterial filaments, extending to the base
of the colony. This would seem to be a character which, together
with the very characteristic form, size, and arrangement of the
spicules of the canal walls and cortex and the presence of distinct
polyp-bearing and barren portions of the stem with the prepon-
derance of the barren portion, might justify the separation of the
three genera Paralemnalia, Lemnalia, and Lemnalioides as a sub-
family, Lemnaliinse, within the family Nephthyidse.
LITERATURE
Bourne, G. C. On the Genus Lemnalia Gray with an Account of the
Branching Systems of the Order Alcyonacea. Trans. Linn, Soc. Lon-
don (1900), II, 7, 521-538, 3 plates, 3 text figures.
Gray, J. E. Descriptions of Some New Genera and Species of Alcyonid
Corals in the British Museum. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1868), 2,
441-445 (woodcut).
KUKENTHAL, W. Alcyonaceen von Ternate. Nyphthyidae Verrill und Si-
phonogorgiidae Kolliker. Abhandlungen der Senckenbergischen Natur-
forschenden Gesellschaft (1895), 23, pt. 1, 81-144, 4 plates.
Idem. Versuch einer Revision der Alcyonarien. II. Die Familie der
Nephthyiden. 1. Thiel. Zool. Jahrb., Syst. (1903), 19, 99-172, 3 plates.
Idem. Alcyonaria des Roten Meeres. Expeditionen S. M. Schiff "Pola" in
das Rote Meer, nordliche und sudliche Halfte, 1895-96-97-98. Zool
Ergeb. (1913), 29, 1-33 (reprint), 3 plates, 27 text figures.
May, W. Beitrage zur Systematik und Chorologie der Alcyonaceen. Jena.
Zeitschr. f. Naturw. (1899), 33, 1-180, 5 plates.
124685 4
ILLUSTRATIONS
Plate I. Lemnalioides kilkenthali gen. et sp. nov. The colony, natural size.
(Photograph by Cortes)
TEXT FIGURES
(From camera lucida outlines)
Fig. 1. Spicules from the polyp and tentacles of L. kilkenthali; a, a polyp
spindle showing the axis to be seen in cleared specimens; 6, a
spindle from the distal end of one of the double rows, showing
the axis and the divided and sculptured distal end; c, tentacle
spicules. X 112.5.
2. Spindles from the stem cortex of L. kilkenthali; a, from the upper
stem; b, from the mid stem. X 112.5.
3. Spicules from the cortex of the lower part of the stem of L. kilken-
thali. X 112.5.
4. The ends of two spicules from the canal walls of L. kiikenthalii
near the base of the colony. X 230.
5. Two spicules from the cortex of the extreme base of L. kilkenthali.
X 112.5.
6. Two tentacles from a cleared specimen of L. kilkenthali, showing the
median muscle bands, the double rows of pinnules, and the double
rows of polyp spicules. X 48.5.
7. Two spicules from the stomodaeal walls of an undescribed species of
Lemnalia. x 1,000. Actual lengths, 0.038 and 0.0532 mm.,
respectively.
8. A spicule from the stomodasal walls of Paralemnalia thrysoides
(Ehrbg.) Kiikenthal. X 1,000. Actual length, 0.0513 mm.
245
Light: Notp:s on Philippine Alcyonaria.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 3.
PLATE I. LEMNALIOIDES KiJKEiMTHALI GEN. ET SP. NOV. THE COLONY,
NATURAL SIZE.
NOTES ON JAPANESE LEPIDOPTERA AND THEIR
LARV^: PART 1
By A. E. WiLEMAN
{Manila, P. I.)
Three colored plates
RHOPALOCERA
While residing in Japan, I took a keen interest in the varied
and curious forms of lepidopterous larvae met with, an interest
further stimulated by the perusal of works such as those of
Owen Wilson and of Buckler.
With the exception of Nawa, Nagano, Matsumura, Miyake,
and Sasaki, who have published articles in the Insect World
(Konchu Sekai) and in other periodicals, few Japanese authors
have devoted much attention to describing and figuring the larvse
of Japanese Lepidoptera which are comparatively unknown to
science, and I felt that a wide and almost inexhaustible field of
labor existed in this particular branch of entomological research.
Therefore, I decided to figure the most interesting larvse met
with in my collecting rambles which have extended to many
parts of Japan. As I was unable to make drawings of these
specimens, I engaged the services of a Japanese artist, Hisashi
Kaido, in order that they might be accurately represented. In
the course of two years, 1901 and 1902, while residing at Kobe
and Hakodate, I accumulated 200 colored drawings, some of
which will be used to illustrate this series of articles.
Hisashi Kaid5, at the time that I engaged him, had no
experience in figuring larvse, but I think the general results
he has attained are very satisfactory.
Apart from the pleasure which the enthusiastic lepidopterist
feels in being able to identify any curious larva he may meet by
referring to the plates of special works and to descriptions and
figures of the various stages of butterflies and moths, he may
render much valuable assistance to the specialist in classifying
species, and for this reason all individual efforts are welcome
in a field where the harvest is great but the laborers are few.
For the scientific classification of Rhopalocera and Heterocera
not only a knowledge of structure, such as wing venation and
247
248 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
the genitalia, is necessary, but also a knowledge of the ova,
larva, and pupa is required; and this is gained by tracing
the life history of a species. In this respect I regret to say
that my paper is incomplete as I have been unable to work
out the life history of each species recorded. My aim has been
merely to figure as many species of larvse as I could collect
and to accompany these figures with brief descriptions which
have been taken from the original drawings by Hisashi Kaido —
not from the living pupa and larva. In describing larvae, I have
taken the head as the first segment.
As this paper is written with the thought of its aiding Japanese
and other lepidopterists who may be working upon Japanese
species, I have made a special point of quoting in the synonymy
references to the works of Japanese authors. In some cases,
the larvse figured by me have also been previously figured either
in colors, or in black and white, by Nawa and Nagano at Gifu.^
A most interesting characteristic of many lepidopterous larvae,
especially among the Heterocera, is their adaptability for har-
monizing in color with their environment so closely that it is
difficult to detect them. This is termed protective resemblance
and may be special or general. Poulton,^ has written at great
length on this subject, and gives a table by which the colors
of animals are classified according to their uses. As I shall
have occasion to refer to this table when commenting upon the
protective resemblance of certain larvae figured, more especially
with reference to species of Heterocera, I reproduce the data
here as Table I with the consent of the publishers.
In order to obviate confusion I will say that Tokio, or Tokyo,
the capital of the Japanese Empire, which in Japanese is called
Dai Nihon Teikoku, is situated on an island equally well-known
"" Insect World {Konchu Sekai) (1897-1913), 1-16. Other Japanese
authors to whom I have referred in the course of this paper are the
following :
Matsumura, Catalogus Insectorum Japonicum (sic.) (1905), 1 (no
plates); and Nihon Senchu Dzukai (Thousand Insects of Japan) (1907),
4; (1909), supplement 1; (1910), supplement 2; (1911), supplement 3; all
of these deal with Japanese Lepidoptera in the Japanese language, accom-
panied by many uncolored plates.
Miyajima, Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Japanese Butterflies) (1904), with
many colored plates.
Various details occurring in these works concerning the larvse of the
species figured by me and their food plants, the times of appearance, and
geographical distribution of the imago have been incorporated in my notes.
^ The Colours of Animals. 2d ed. London, Kegan Paul, Trench, Triibner
& Co. Ltd. (1890), i-xiii + 1-360.
Oversized
Foldout
IX, D. 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 249
by any one of the three names of Hondo, Honto, or Honshu.
Dai Nihon Teikoku is translated as the Japanese Empire or
Great Japanese Empire, in the same way as the British Isles
are known as Great Britain.
Matsumura ^ calls the island on which the capital is situated
Honto, and later ^ he calls it Honshu. For the sake of uniformity,
I have adopted the name he uses in his latest work. Yezo he
calls Hokkaido, as the name Yezo is but little used by modern
Japanese. There will be no confusion with regard to the two
large islands of Kyushu and Shikoku which are only known by
these names.
The following are the names, given in their geographical order,
of the chain of most important islands under Japanese rule,
extending from Saghalien to Formosa.
Karafu-to (Saghalien), southern portion only Japanese.
Chishima-to (Kurile Islands).
Hokkaido (Yezo).
Hondo, Honto, or Honshu, on which the capital, Tokyo, and the ports of
Yokohama and Kobe are situated.
Shikoku.
Kyushu (Kiushiu).
Tanegashima.
Yakushima.
Shichi-to (Linschoten Islands or Cecilia Archipelago).
Ryukyu-to (Loochoo Islands), consisting of the Hokubu-to (northern group),
Chubu-to (central group), and Nambu-to (southern group). The two
latter groups are also known, respectively, as the Sannan and Miyako
Islands.
Ogasawara-jima (Bonin Islands), to the east of Formosa.
Taiwan (Formosa).
The Japanese names of the food plants of larvae described
in this series of articles were mostly derived from my Japanese
collector, Uehara Magoichi, who is now dead. He collected
many of the larvae for me, and although not a trained botanist
he had a good working knowledge of Japanese flowering plants
acquired during an experience of many years as a collector
of Lepidoptera. I referred for the Latin names of these food
plants to a book by Matsumura.^ In cases of doubt, I have
occasionally queried the Japanese or Latin name of the food
plant.
^ Catalogus Insectorum Japonicum (sic.) (1905).
* Thousand Insects of Japan (Nihon Senchu Dzukai) (1907-1911).
^ Shokubutsu Mei-i. Enumeration of selected Scientific names of both
Native and Foreign Plants with Romanized Japanese names and in many
cases Chinese Characters (1906).
250 The Philippine Jommal of Science 1914
RHOPALOCERA
PAPILIONID^
Genus PAPILIO Doubleday
Papilio Doubleday, Gen. Diurn. Lep. (1846), 1, 5.
Papilio xuthus Linnaeus.
PI. I, figs. 1-2, young larvae; fig. 3, full-grown larva; fig. 4, food plant.
Japanese name, ageha.
Papilio xuthus LiNN., Syst. Nat. (1767), 1, 2, 751; Pryer, Rhop.
Nihon. (1886), 2, PI. 1, fig. 2 b, c?; Tokyo Zool. Mag. [Tokyo Dobut-
sugaku Zasshi (Jap.)] (May 15, 1891), 3, No. 31, PI. 2, fig. 1,
imago, xuthulus; fig. 2, imago, xuthus; fig. 3, larva 4th stage; fig.
4, larva 5th stage; fig. 5, pupa; Nawa, Insect World [Konchii Sekai
(Jap.)] (1898), 2, 6, PI. I, transf.; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan,
Corea (1892-1894), 2, 514; Matsumura, Jap. Injurious Insects
[Nihon Gaichuhen (Jap.)] (1899), 108, PI. 46, fig. 1, imago; fig. 2,
larva; Miyajima, Jap. Butterf. [Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Jap.)]
(1904), 72, PI. I, fig. 1, c?; Dyar, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28,
939, fig. 4, larva; Matsumura, Cat. Insect Jap. (1905), 1, No. 1, 1;
Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan [Nihon Senchu Dzukai
(Jap.)] (1907), 4, 62, PI. 63, fig. 1, 5; Seitz's Macrolep. of the
World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 11, PI. 6a; Jordan, Seitz's Macrolep.
of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1909), 9, 48.
Papilio xuthulus Brem., Bull. Acad. Petr. (1861), 3, 463 (spring form) ;
Brem., Lep. Ost.-Sib. (1864), 4, PI. I, fig. 2; Pryer, Rhop. Nihon
(1886), PI. I, fig. 2a; Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal.
(1906), 1, 11, PI. 6a.
Papilio xanthus LiNN., Rothsch. Nov. Zool. (1895), 2, 278; Moore,
Lep. Ind. (1903), 6, 45. (=P. xuthus Linn.)
The full-grown larva figured (Plate I, fig. 3) was taken in
September, 1900, at Kobe, Settsu Province, on karatachi {^gle
sepiaria DC). No record was kept of the date upon which
the imago emerged from the pupa resulting from this larva,
but I have bred the species on many occasions from similar
larvse taken chiefly on .^gle sepiaria on which it is very common ;
therefore, I am well acquainted with it. The karatachi shrub
is much used in the environs of Tokyo for ornamental hedges,
and is very useful for that purpose because of its spines. I
have also found the larva feeding on inu-zansho (Xanthoxylon
schinnifolium S. and Z.), which is also mentioned by Pryer as
a food plant. Leech,^ quoting Graeser, states that the larva
feeds on Phellodendron amurense (Japanese name, kiwada) in
Amurland, that it is greenish black, with irregular milk-white
'^ Berl ent Zeitschr. (1888), 32, 62.
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 251
spots and bands, and that when sitting on the upper side of a
leaf it resembles a bird-dropping. It is very true, as may be
observed from the figures given of the young larvse (Plate I,
figs. 1 and 2), that they have this peculiar resemblance, but it
only lasts up to the fourth molt, after which the larva assumes
the green color which marks the last, or adult, stage. In the
adult stage it closely resembles the larva of P. demetrius Cramer.
This is an instance where the larva is first protected during
the greater part of its existence by special protective resemblance
and in its last stage by general protective resemblance, both
apparently of a constant nature.
Up to the fourth molt it is evidently protected against enemies
by special resemblance as the appearance of a bird-dropping
is copied in outline and color as a protection against enemies. In
its last stage it is protected by general resemblance as its green
color harmonizes with the total artistic effect of its environment ;
namely, the foliage of the karatachi. (Table I, 1, procryptic
colors, a andb).
Matsumura also gives the orange tree, mikan {Citrus nobilis
Lour.), as a food plant.
The larva of Papilio helenus Linn., judging from the figure
of the young larva by Kershaw,^ seems to enjoy a similar
protective resemblance, both the young and full-grown larvae
being somewhat like those of P. xuthus, Nawa ^ gives colored
figures of the metamorphoses of P. xuthus and of an ichneumon
fly parasitic on it, and represents the larva with two yellowish
osmeteria, or nuchal horns, exserted from the junction of the
head and the first thoracic segment. These give oflf a strong
odor, and probably have an intimidating effect on enemies.
In the Tokyo Zoological Magazine (Tokyo Dobutsugaku
Zasshi), there is a good uncolored plate showing the metamor-
phoses of P. xuthus, but no allusion is made to this plate in
the succeeding Japanese text, and the author, therefore, cannot
be named. Seitz states that
the larva is very similar to that of P. hianor Cramer; bright green; a grey,
white-marked, transverse band on the third, fifth, and twelfth somites, a
similar oblique band over the seventh and eighth segments; above the pro-
legs large, rounded, white spots. From June to November it is found on
^gle sepiaria and various fruit trees. The chrysalis is green, rarely
brown; the anterior abdominal segments laterally somewhat swollen and
carinate, caputal processes strongly developed; an obtuse, somewhat thorn-
like process on thorax.
'Butterflies of Hongkong (1907), PI. 4a, fig. 7.
'Insect World (1898), 2, 6, PI. I.
252 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Matsumura records P. xuthus from Hokkaido (Yezo), Honshu,
Shikoku, and Kyushu, the Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu), Formosa,
Ogasawara (Bonin Islands), Korea, China, Manchuria, and
Amurland. He ^ also gives a short life history, accompanied by
figures of the imago and larva. He says that there are three
broods in the year and that it hibernates in the pupal stage.
The nuchal horns of the larva are tolerably long, and the imago
emerges in May or June. He refers here, no doubt, to typical
P. xuthus which emerges in early summer. In December, 1912,
I discovered its existence at an altitude of 2,800 meters (8,300
feet) in Luzon, at Pauai (Haight's Place), Benguet subprovince,
where I collected 5 specimens. Semper does not record this
species from the Philippines, so that it must be regarded as
new to the fauna of these Islands. It is interesting to discover
that it occurs so far south in the Indo-Malayan subregion at
such an altitude. Jordan remarks that this mainly Palsearctic
species extends southward to Upper Burma and also occurs in
Formosa, the Bonin Islands, and Guam and that Fruhstorfer
has based upon a single male from Formosa the subspecies
koxinga. I have myself taken P. xuthus in the Formosan
mountains, and have observed it in the Japanese Islands from
March to August and occasionally in September and October.
P. xitthulus, which is the spring brood, appears first, coming out
in March, followed in early summer by P. xuthus.
In Hokkaido (Yezo), in the extreme north of Japan, where
the winter is long and severe, lasting until April, the spring
form, P. xuthulus, does not emerge until June and the summer
form, P. xuthus, follows in September, which is much later than
in the southern latitudes of Japan with a warmer climate.
Subgenus Cosmodesmus Haase
Cosmodesmus Haase, Bibl. Zool. Heft. (1892), 8, 15; Seitz, Macrolep.
of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 14.
Papilio (Cosmodesmus) sarpedon Linnaeus.
PL I, fig. 5, young larva; fig. 6, full-grown larva; fig. 7, pupa; fig. 8,
food plant.
Japanese names, aosuji-ageha and kuro-taimaL
Papilio sarpedon Linnaeus, Syst. Nat. (1767), 1, 2,747; Moore, Cat.
Lep. Mus. E. I. C. (1857), 1, 113, PL 3, fig. 8, larva; (Dalchina),
Lep. Ind. (1903), 6, 12, PL 471, figs. 1, la-lc, larva and pupa; imago,
d* ?; Pryer, Rhop. Nihon (1886), 5, PL 1, fig. 9; Tokyo Zool. Mag,
[Tokyo Dobutsugaku Zasshi (Jap.)] (Aug. 15, 1891), 3, No. 34,
'Matsumura, Jap. Injurious Insects [Nihon Gaichuhen (Jap.)] (1899),
108, PL 46, fig. 1, imago; fig. 2, larva.
IX, D. 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 253
PL 5, fig. 1, c?; fig. 2, ?; fig. 3, larva first stage; fig. 4, larva fifth
stage; fig. 5, pupa; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892-
1894), 2, 524; MACKINNON and NiCEViLLE, Journ. Bombay Nat. Hist.
Soc. (1898), 11, PL W, figs. 26a, b, pupa; Scott, AustraL Lep. Mus.
Austral. (1898), 2, PL 17; Miyajima, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon Chorui
Dzusetsu (Jap.)] (1904), 79, PL V, fig. 2, c?; Dyar, Proc.
U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28, 937, fig. 1, larva; Matsumura, Cat.
Insect. Jap. (1905), 3, No. 14; Matsumura, Thousand Insects of
Japan [Nihon Senchu Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 65, PL 64, fig. 1,
?; KERSHAViT, Butterfl. Hongkong (1907), 113, PL 13, fig. 5; Seitz,
Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 15, PL 8c; Jordan,
Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1909), 9, 94.
Dalchina teredon Felder, Verh. ZooL-bot. Ges. Wien (1864), 14, 305;
Moore (Dalchina), Lep. Ceyl. (1881), 1, 143, PL 62, figs. 1, la-lb,
(^ ?, larva and pupa; Moore (Dalchina) , Lep. Ind. (1903), 6, 14,
PL 472, figs. 1, la-lc, larva and pupa, <^ ?.
Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc. (1890), 5, 364.
Papilio sarpedon Davidson and Aitken, nee Linn. (= teredon), Journ.
Bomb. Nat. Hist. Soc. (1890), 5, 364.
The full-grown larva figured (Plate I, fig. 6) was taken in
September, 1900, at Yoshino, Yamato Province, on tabu-no-ki
(Machilus thunbergii S. and Z.), a species of the Lauracese. It
pupated on September 11, 1900, and a female specimen emerged
on May 1, 1901. A male specimen was bred from a similar
larva on May 3, 1901. These two specimens are probably refer-
able to P. sarpedonides Fruhst., but as they are not before me
I am unable to say whether they should be assigned to the
spring form, P. sarpedonides, or the summer form, P. nipponits.
Moore describes the larva and pupa of P. sarpedon as follows.^*^
Larva, — "Smooth, thickened from the second to the 5th segment, and
thence decreasing to the end; with two short subdorsal fleshy spines on the
4th segment, between which ia a transverse pale yellow line, two shorter
spines also on the second and third, and two on the anal segment; color,
green, with a longitudinal posterior lateral and lower pale yellowish line."
Pupa. — "Conical, truncated in front; thorax produced into a lengthened
obtusely pointed frontal process."
The spines on segments 2 and 3 are not well represented in
my figure of the adult larva (Plate I, fig. 6).
Kershaw states that both larva and pupa are very much like
those of P. eurypilus Linn, and that, in Hongkong, the larva
feeds on citrus plants and on Laurus camphora.
Mackinnon and Niceville^^ figure the pupa, but not having
"Lep. Ind. (1903), 6, 12, PL 471, figs. 1, la-lc, larva and pupa.
^' Journ. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. (1898), 11, PL W, figs. 26 a, b, pupa.
254 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
access to the volume in which the illustration occurs I have been
unable to examine their figures.
Seitz remarks ^^ that —
the larva is green, with two pointed tubercles anteriorly and at the anus,
bearing also two small points on each side of the third and fifth segments,
on Aurantiaceae. Dorsal thoracical projection of the pupa strongly-
acuminate.
Jordan states ^^ that —
the young larva is black or dark green, with numerous spines, of which
those on the meta thorax are long and bristly; when full grown green,
beneath lighter, with a pair of short spines on each of the three thoracic
segments and on the last segment; on the metathorax a yellow transverse
band and from the metathorax to the anal segment a yellowish stripe above
the legs; on Machilus odoratissima, Geijera salicifoUa, Litsaea, Alseodaphne,
etc., and especially Camphora officinalis, where this tree has been imported.
Pupa green, the thoracic horn slenderer, more pointed and straighter than
in the allied species, the lateral ridges extending downwards from the horn
straight, between this carina and the frontal one a very slight, somewhat
curved vertical ridge.
Pryer states that the larva feeds on the young leaves of the
evergreen, Machilus thunbergii, and that its color resembles
very closely that of the young green leaves of this tree.
Butler ^* records P. teredon Feld., from Nikko, Central Japan ;
this is the Ceylon form of the species, and according to Moore's
figure of the imago only differs from typical P. sarpedon in
the narrower band of the forewing and in having the anal
angle of secondaries more produced.
Moore describes the larva of P. teredon as follows:
Larva smooth, green, with a paler lower lateral line, and a dorsal band
ending in a lateral tubercular spot on fourth segment; a pair of short tuber-
cles on front and anal segment. Pupa green, with lateral and dorsal longi-
tudinal yellowish streaks. Feeds on Cinnamomeum [sic].
Davidson and Aitken describe the larva of teredon as follows :
Larva, — "Very like that of agamemnon but prettier, being of a soft dark
green, inclining to emerald and passing into a pale bluish on the last segment
and the underparts."
Pupa, — **Easily distinguished from that of agamemnon by one mark, viz.,
the horn is not straight but curves slightly backwards."
In the Tokyo Zoological Magazine (Tokyo Dobutsugaku
Zasshi), already cited, there is a good uncolored plate showing
the metamorphoses of P. sarpedon, but no allusion is made to
"Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 15.
''Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1909), 9, 94.
"Ann. & Mag. Nat Hist (1881), V, 7, 133.
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 255
this plate in the succeeding Japanese text and the author, there-
fore, cannot be named. He gives black and white figures of
the larva in its first and fifth stages, of the pupa, and of the
imago.
Matsumura records P. sarpedon from Hokkaido (Yezo),
Honshu, Shikoku, Kyushu, and Formosa. Miyajima records it
also from the Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu), and states that it feeds
upon inu-gusu, Inu-gusu as well as shiro-gusuy are merely other
Japanese names for tabu-no-ki, previously referred to as the
food plant on which I bred the larva ; that is, Machilus thunbergii.
The imago flies from May to September. Matsumura also gives
Machilus japonica S. and Z. {ao-gashi) as a food plant.
Jordan states ^^ that ''sarpedon occurs from China and South
Japan to the Solomon Islands in numerous geographical forms."
The forms which are geographically connected with China,
Japan, and the Philippines are as follows :
Papilio nipponus Fruhst. (= morius Fruhst.), Seitz, 1, PI. 8c (described
as sarpedon), from Japan and the Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu).
Papilio sarpedonides Fruhst., f. vern., spring form from Japan.
Papilio nipponus is the Japanese race separated into spring and summer
forms which differ in the bands of the forewing being broad in sarpedo-
nides and narrower in nipponus.
Papilio connectens Fruhst., from Formosa and Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu).
Papilio semifasciatus Honr., from southeastern, central, and western China.
Papilio sarpedon Linn., typical ( = demophon Meerb. nee. Linn. ; demophoon
Shaw; luctatius Fruhst.; hagus Fruhst.; colus Fruhst.); (Seitz, 9, pi.
44d) ; distributed from Hainan, Tonkin, and North India to the Philip-
pines and Lombok. In the broad-banded specimens the median and
submedian veins are more or less white inside the band of the forewing.
In the summer specimens of the northern districts, f . aest. melas Fruhst.
(= demophoon Shaw), the band is narrower and the veins are black.
Subgenus Pharmacophagus Haase
Pharmacophagus Haase, Bibl. Zool. Heft (1892), 8, 15; Seitz, Macrolep.
of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 8.
Papilio (Pharmacophagus) alcinous Klug.
PI. II, fig. 12, full-grown larva; fig. 13, dorsal aspect of segment; figs.
14-16, pupa.
Japanese names, jako-ageha, yama-joro.
Papilio alcinous Klug, Neue Schmett. (1836), 1, PI. 1, figs. 1-4; Pryer,
Rhop. Nihon (1886), 4, PL 3, fig. 3, 2; Tokyo Zool. Mag. [Tokyo
Dobutsugaku Zasshi (Jap.)] (Aug. 15, 1891), 3, No. 34, PI. 4, fig. 1,
imago, <S\ fig. 2, imago, ?; fig. 3, larva 5th stage; fig. 4, pupa; Leech,
Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892-1894), 2, 539; Dyar, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus. (1905), 28, 938, fig. 2, larva; Matsumura, Cat. Insect.
'' Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1909), 9, 95.
256 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9u
Jap. (1905), 1, 2, No. 8; Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan
[Nihon Senchu-Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 60, PI. 62, fig. 2, 5; Seitz,
Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 9, PI. 2 a, d* 5; 2 b,
c? ?, f. aest.; Jordan, Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-
austral. (June 20, 1910), 9, 33; Miyajima, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon
Cho-rui Dzusetsu (Jap.)] (1904), 76, PI. 3, fig. 2, ?; 71 (woodcut),
ova, fig. 1; larva, fig. 2; pupa, fig. 3.
The pupa figured (Plate II, figs. 14-16) was taken at Kobe,
Settsu Province, Honshu, in July, 1901, and a male specimen
of P. alcinous emerged from it, but no record was kept of the
date. The larva figured (Plate II, fig. 12) was taken while it
was crawling upon the ground, at the same locality, in August,
1901, and pupated, but the imago failed to emerge. The pupa
taken in July, 1901, was similar in all respects to the one result-
ing from the larva of August, 1901, and I am satisfied that
the two pupae are of the same species. I have also compared the
figures of my pupa with that shown by Miyajima.^^ He gives
a good woodcut in which the larva, pupa, and ova of P. alcinous
Klug are figured, together with the food plant, and states that
the larva feeds upon the following plants: Uma-no-suzukusa
{Aristolockia debilis S. and Z.) ; ikema (Cynanchum caudatum
Maxim.) ; kaga4mo, scientific name unknown; ao-tsuzura (Coc-
cuius thunbergii DC), also known as tsuzura-fuji. The larva
figured by him also agrees with my original figure (Plate II, fig.
12), so that, although no imago ever developed from my larva,
I have no hesitation in referring it to P. alcinous. Nawa ^^ also
gives a black and white figure of the pupa which agrees with my
figures as to form, but he does not give one of the larva. In the
Tokyo Zoological Magazine [Tokyo Dobutsugaku Zasshi (Jap.)],
there is a good uncolored plate showing the metamorphoses of
P. alcinous, but no allusion is made to this plate in the succeeding
Japanese text and, therefore, the author cannot be named.
Pryer states that the larva feeds on Cocculus thunbergii DC,
and resembles a partially ripe mulberry and that the pupa
is most beautifully sculptured. The figures given (Plate II,
figs. 14-16) fully bear out his description of the pupa which is
yellowish in color and most delicately chiseled. Jordan describes
the larva as follows :
Larva olive-brown, with numerous dark, light-edged spots; on the 6th
and 7th segments a very broad red-white oblique girth, which is dorsally
interrupted or strongly constricted; the tips of the tubercles reddish, the
upper lateral projections of the pro thorax pale red with dark tips.
"Japanese Butterflies (1904), 71.
"Insect World (Konchu Sekai) (1907), 11. 559.
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 257
Dyar ^^ remarks that —
the larva of Papilio alcinous Klug is allied to the American philenoVf and
retains in the last stage the peculiar black and white coloration, resembling
bird excrement, so characteristic of most all young Papilios.
Seitz and Jordan ^^ give many forms of the P. alcinous group
which is distributed from Japan to western China and Tonkin.
Seitz remarks that 'T. alcinous Klug is a black, geographically
variable, Papilio which inhabits the Pacific, district of the
Palsearctic region" and that "it is almost exclusively Palaearctic,
only a few forms entering the most northern districts of the
Oriental Region." The forms given by them are quoted for
convenience of reference, although only three of them inhabit
Japan proper; the rest are mostly Chinese.
Papilio alcinous Klug (Seitz, 1, 9, PI. 2a, 2b) (= spathatus Butl., hssma-
tostictus Butl.), from Japan.
Papilio nagasakii Fruhst. (Seitz, 1, PI. 2a, (? ?; PI. 2b, c? ?, f. aest), from
southern Hokkaido (Yezo), Honshu, and Kyushu.
Papilio confusus Rothsch. (Seitz, 1, PI. 2c, c? ?), from China, southward to
Yunnan.
Papilio plutonius Oberth. (Seitz, 1, PI. 2c, c? ?), from central China and
Tibet.
Papilio dsemonius Alpher. (= fatuus Rothsch.), from Ta-tsien-lu, western
China and Tibet.
Papilio impediens Rothsch. (Seitz, 1, PI. 3a), from Ta-tsien-lu, western
China.
Papilio mencius Feld. (Seitz, 1 , PI. 2b, c? 2) , from central and southeastern
China.
Papilio bradanus Fruhst. (= intermedia Oberth.) (Seitz, 9, 33), from the
Sannan group (Ishigaki-Shima, Loochoo Islands).
Papilio decora Oberth. ab. (Seitz, 9, 33), locality not given.
Papilio loochooanus Rothsch. (Seitz, 9, PL 19c, cT; r. 1, PI. Ic, 9, underside),
from the Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu).
Papilio mansonensis Fruhst. (= mausonensis Fruhst.) (Seitz, 9, 33) ; from
Formosa, eastern and central China (westward to Chang-yang), and
Tonkin; the male is not distinguishable from the species from western
China, P. confusus, but the female is as pale as in P. loochooanus.
According to Matsumura, P. alcinous occurs in Honshu, Shi-
koku, Kyushu, and the Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu) ; also, in Korea
and China. It flies from March to September in two broods,
spring and summer, both of which are figured by Seitz.
The following description of a Papilio larva was entered in
my notebook on May 2, 1908. The larva was taken by me at
Kanshirei, in southern Formosa, but unfortunately never pupated,
" Dyar, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28, 938, fig. 2, larva.
" Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 9, and Faun. Indo-austral.
(1909), 9, 33.
258 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9h
so that no imago emerged for identification. From its resem-
blance to the larva of P. alcinous Klug, I thought it would
probably turn out to be the larva of a species closely allied
to P. alcinous which was flying at Kanshirei at an altitude of
300 meters (1,000 feet). I captured several specimens of this
species which I believe is referable to P. febanus Fruhst.^^
Description. — White lateral stripe on side of segment 7 not
quite meeting on the dorsum and ending in fleshy, white tubercles
on dorsum ; lateral, white, fleshy tubercles on segment 10 and two
on dorsum of segment 10 ; lateral white tubercles also on segment
6, from which segment the lateral white band on the side of
segment 7 commences, so that there is an oblique white band
on segments 6, 7, not quite meeting on the dorsum; all other
tubercles claret colored, red tipped; chocolate-colored diamond
pattern mediodorsal stripe on dorsum; three rows of tubercles:
subdorsal, subspiracular, and suprapedal.
A comparison of the foregoing description with my figure
of the larva of Japanese P. alcinous (Plate II, fig. 12) shows a
striking resemblance.
According to Seitz, the Japanese forms of P. alcinous are not
taken in Formosa, and I have never taken them myself at
Kanshirei, although of course they may possibly occur there.
The only form of P. alcinous which is at present known to occur
in Formosa is P. mansonensis Fruhst., so that if my larva
described above be not that of the Japanese P. alcinous it
may belong either to P. febanus Fruhst. or P. alcinous var.
mansonensis Fruhst.
I may mention that Kanshirei is the Japanese pronunciation
of the Chinese ideographs with which Koannania is written
and that it was at Koannania that Matsumura took his type of
P. koannania (= febanus Fruhst.).
SATYRID^
Genus NEOPE Butler
Neope Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1867), III, 19, 166; Seitz,
Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 89; Fruhst, Faun.
Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 324.
Neope goschkevitschii Menetries.
PI. II, fig. 7, larva; figs. 8-9, dorsal aspect of segments; fig. 10, head;
fig. 11, food plant.
Japanese name, kimadara-hikage.
=" Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1909), 9, 33.
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 259
Lasiommata goschkevitschii Men., Cat. Mus. Petr. (1855), 2, 121, PI.
10, fig. 4; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892-1893), 1,
52; Nagano, Nawa's Insect World [Konchu Sekai (Jap.)] (August
15, 1910), 14, 418, PI. 17, figs. 1-6, transf.; Seitz, Macrolep. of the
World, Faun. Pal. (June, 1908), 1, 90, PI. 33c, c? $; Fruhst., Seitz*s
Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 324.
Lasiommata gaschkevitschii Felder, Wien, ent. Mon. (1862), 6,
28; Pryer, Rhop. Nihon (1889), 32, PL 9, fig. 11; Matsumura, Cat.
Insect Jap. (1905), 1, 14, No. 109; Matsumura, Thousand Insects
of Japan [Nihon Senchu Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 101, PI. 72,
fig. 8, 2; Miyajima, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Jap.)]
(1904), 150, PI. 16, fig. 8.
Neope niphonica Butl., Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1881), V, 7, 133.
Neope japonica Butl. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1867), III, 19, 167.
The larva figured (Plate II, fig. 7) was taken in July, 1901,
at Yoshino, Yamato Province, Honshu, on bamboo grass, sasa-
gusa ( ? Lophatherum elatum Zoll.) . The imago failed to emerge
from the pupa resulting from this larva. Nagano gives lengthy
descriptions of the metamorphoses of this species including a
figure of the larva in his plate which agrees with my colored
figure. I am unable to follow the written description of his
larva with accuracy as it is in technical Japanese language,
and have therefore depended only on his figure for identification.
I think, however, that there can be no doubt that my larva is
identical with that of N. goschkevitschii, figured by Nagano on
a species of bamboo.
The following description is taken from my original figure.
Larva. — Length, 32 millimeters. Grayish brown with a yellow
tinge ; faint longitudinal mediodorsal dark lines ; subdorsal dark
spots and crosses; midlateral longitudinal dark line; series of
dark spiracular blotches; yellowish longitudinal subspiracular
stripe.
Matsumura records this species from the Hokkaido (Yezo),
Honshu, Kyushu, and Shikoku, where it is very common. I have
captured it in all those islands from April to August.
Fruhstorfer 2^ remarks that 'W. goschkevitschii reaches the
farthest north and inhabits all the islands from Hokkaido (Yezo)
to Formosa" and gives the following races :
Neope japonica Butler, described from Hakodate, Hokkaido (Yezo).
Neope watanahei Mats., from Formosa (Hoppo).
Fruhstorfer does not mention N. niphonica Butl. which was
described in 1881 from Nikko, Honshu.
''Seitz^s Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 324.
124685 5
260 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Genus LETHE Hubner
Lethe Hubner, Verz. bek. Schmett. (1827), 56; Seitz, Macrolep. of
the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 82; Fruhst, Seitz's Macrolep. of
the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 321.
Subgenus Kirrodesa Moore
Kirrodesa Moore, Lep. Ind. (1892), 1, 237.
Lethe (Kirrodesa) siceKs Hewitson.
PI. II, fig. 1, larva; fig. 2, head; figs. 3-4, dorsal aspect of segments;
fig. 5, pupa; fig. 6, food plant.
Japanese name, hikage-cho.
Debis sicelis Hewitson, Exot. Butterfl. (1862), 3, PL 1, fig. 3.
Lethe sicelis Pryer, Rhop. Nihon (1889), 32, PI. 9, fig. 10; Leech,
Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892-1893), 1, 36; Matsumura, Cat.
Insect, Jap. (1905), 1, 14, No. 113; Matsumura, Thousand Insects
of Japan [Nihon Senchu Dzukai (Jap.)], 4, 98, PI. 72, fig. 1, $;
Seitz, Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 84, PL 31b;
Nagano, Nawa's Insect World [Konchu Sekai (Jap.)] (1910), 14,
590, PL 24, figs. 1-12, transf.; Miyajima, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon
Chorui Dzusetsu (Jap.)], (1904), 146, PL 16, fig. 3; Fruhst., Seitz's
Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, ^22.
The larva figured (Plate II, fig. 1) was taken in July,
1901, at Kobe, Settsu Province, on bamboo grass, sasa-gicsa,
(? Lophatherum elatum ZolL). From this an imago emerged,
but no record was kept of the date of emergence nor of the
sex. A second larva was taken by me, also on sasa, on September
9, 1900; this pupated on September 20, and emerged on Sep-
tember 25, 1900. The pupa figured is the pupa of the second
larva. I have also taken the larva of this species on kaya
(? Torreya nucifera S. and Z.), a kind of reed grass, and on
tsubana ( ? Imperata arundinacea Cyr.) , a species of grass. Two
males and one female were bred by me at Kobe from the larvse,
June 7 and 8, 1901.
The following descriptions are taken from my original figures.
Larva. — Length, 39 millimeters. Yellowish green; green me-
diodorsal longitudinal stripe edged with yellow lines on each
side; yellow midlateral and whitish suprapedal longitudinal
stripes; horns of head pink tipped.
Pupa. — Light green with two rows of four white spots on the
dorsum. Suspended by tail from food plant.
Pryer remarks that he took the larva of L. sicelis and believes
that it feeds on bamboo grass. Matsumura records the species
from Honshu, Shikoku, and Kyushu, but not from Hokkaido
(Yezo), where it does not seem to occur. Miyajima gives its
season of flight as being from July to August, but I have taken
it in various localities in the islands enumerated by Matsumura
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 261
from May to September. Pryer says that it goes only a short
distance up the mountains, where it is replaced by L. diana Butler.
However, I have taken specimens up to an altitude of from
300 to 500 meters (1,000 to 1,500 feet) on the mountains of
Omine-san and Odai-san in Yamato Province, Honshu. In Tosa
Province, Shikoku Island, it occurs in May, and I have taken
it at Nikko, Honshu, in the same nu)nth at an elevation of about
500 meters (1,500 feet).
Fruhstorf er ^2 describes a distinct race of L. sicelis from
Kyushu, which he names vanelia. It is characterized by the
absence of the gray- or blue-violet bordering to the eyespots
on the underside of the hind wing which is always present in
examples from Hondo (Honshu) and which Hewitson and
Seitz ^^ distinctly figure.
Subgenus Rangbia Moore
Lethe Hubner, Verz. bek. Schmett. (1827), 56; Seitz, Macrolep. of
the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 82.
Ranghia MoORE, Lep. Ind. (1890-1892), 1, 232; Fruhstorfer, Seitz's
Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 322.
Lethe (Rangbia) diana Butler.
PL III, fig. 1, larva; fig. 2, head; figs. 3-4, dorsal aspect of segments;
figs. 5-6, pupa; fig. 7, food plant.
Japanese name, kuro-hikage.
Debis diana Butler, Journ. Linn. So«.. Zool. (1866), 9, 55; Pryer,
Rhop. Nihon (1889), 32, PI. 9, fig. 12; Oberthur, ]£tud. d'Entom.
(1881), 6, 16, PI. 7, fig. 2; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea
(1892-1893), 1, 28; Matsumura, Cat. Insect Jap. (1905), 1, 14,
No. 112; Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan [Nihon Senchu
Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 108, PL 73, fig. 10, 2; Seitz, Macrolep.
of the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 84, PI. 31a; Fruhstorfer, Seitz's
Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 322; Miya-
JIMA, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Jap.)] (1904), 147,
PI. 16, fig. 4.
Lethe whitelyi BuTLER, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1867), III, 20, 403,
PI. 9, fig. 8.
Lethe consanguis Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1881), V, 7, 133.
The larva figured (Plate III, fig. 1) was taken on June 3,
1902, at Hakodate, Oshima Province, Hokkaido (Yezo), on bam-
boo grass, sasa-gusa (? Lophatherum elatum ZolL). It pupated
on June 15, 1902, and a female imago emerged on July 3, 1902.
A male and female emerged from similar larvse on June 27 and
July 2, 1902.
The f ollow^ing descriptions are taken from my original figures.
'' Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 322.
'' Seitz^s Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1906), 1, 84, PI. 31b.
262 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Larva, — Length, 27 millimeters. Pinkish gray; dark medio-
dorsal pattern; spiracles black; whitish suprapedal longitudinal
line.
Pupa. — Bronze-brown with lighter reflections and black dots ;
two short white lines on the dorsum extending one-third way
from tail; mediodorsal white line on dorsum extending half
way from tail and continuing black ; suspended by the tail from
the food plant.
Matsumura records this species from Hokkaido (Yezo), Hon-
shu, Shikoku, and Kyushu ; also, from Korea and China. I have
taken it from May to August, and have noticed that in Honshu
and Kyushu it appears to be a mountain butterfly, while in Hok-
kaido it inhabits the plains. As far as I am aware, no figure or
description of the larva has been published before.
Fruhstorf er 2* lists the following forms of L. diana.
Lethe diana Butl., described from Hakodate, Hokkaido (Yezo).
Lethe consanguis Butl., aberration from Nikko, Hondo (Honshu).
Lethe celeja Fruhst., subspecies, normal form (= figure given in Seitz, 1,
PL 31a), from Hondo (Honshu).
Lethe whitelyi Butl., from Nagasaki, Kyushu.
Lethe fixseni Butl., subspecies from Korea.
*^Diana is the only Lethe which bears a long hair tuft on the underside
of the forewing, placed below the submedian.^*
Subgenus Tansima Moore
Lethe Hubner, Verz bek. Schmett. (1827), 56; Seitz, Macrolep. of
the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 82.
Tansima MoORE, Lep. Ind. (1890-1892), 1, 271.
Lethe (Tansima) marginalis Motschulsky.
PL III, fig. 17, larva; fig. 18, head; fig. 19, dorsal aspect of segment;
fig. 20, food plant; figs. 21-22, pupa.
Japanese name, kuro-hikage-modoki.
Satyrus marginalis Motschulsky, fitud. d'Entom. (1860), 9, 29;
Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan, Corea (1892-1893), 1, 25; Seitz,
Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (June 23, 1908), 1, 86, PL 31d,
d' 2; MiYAJiMA, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon Ch5rui Dzusetsu (Jap.)]
(1904), 147, PL 16, fig. 5.
Lasiommata maacki Bremer, Bull. Acad. Petr. (1861), 3, 468; Brem.,
Lep. Ost.-Sib. (1864), 22, PL 3, fig. 3; Matsumura, Cat. Insect Jap.
(1905), 1, 14, No. Ill; (Lethe), Matsumura, Thousand Insects of
Japan [Nihon Senchu Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 101, PL 72, fig. 7, $.
The larva figured (Plate III, fig. 17) was taken in June, 1901,
at Yoshino, Yamato Province, on sitsuki, a species of grass
(? Miscanthus sinensis Anders.), and a female imago emerged
from the pupa resulting from this larva on June 23, 1901.
'* Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 322.
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 263
Three males also emerged on July 6 and 11, 1901, from other
larvae taken about the same time.
The following descriptions are taken from my original figures.
Larva. — Length, 48 millimeters. Yellowish green; horns on
head pink tinged; mediodorsal longitudinal dark green stripe;
subdorsal midlateral supraspiracular longitudinal green stripes;
whitish longitudinal suprapedal stripe.
Pupa, — Yellowish green; three darker lines on dorsum; wing
cases edged with yellow. Suspended from food plant by tail.
Matsumura records the species from Hokkaido (Yezo) and
Honshu and also from Formosa, Korea, China, and eastern
Siberia (Ussuri and Amurland). I have taken the imago in
Yamato Province, Honshu, and also in lyo Province, Shikoku.
It appears to be a mountain species except in Hokkaido, where
it inhabits the plains. It flies in July and August.
Subgenus Harima Moore
Lethe Hubner, Verz. bek. Schmett. (1827), 56.
Harima MooRE, Lep. Ind. (1892), 1, 299 (type, callipteris Butl.).
Sinchula Moore, Lep. Ind. (1892), 1, 275; Fruhstorper, Seitz's
Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 313.
Lethe (Harima) callipteris Butler.
PI. Ill, figs. 23-24, dorsal aspect of segments ; fig. 25, head ; fig. 26, larva ;
figs. 27-28, pupa; fig. 29, food plant.
Japanese name, hime-kimadara-hikage,
Neope callipteris Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1877), IV, 19,
92; Pryer, Rhop. Nihon (1889), 32, PI. 10, fig. 2; Leech, Butterfl.
China, Japan, Corea (1892-1893), 1, 36, PI. 6, figs. 3 c^, 4 5; Miya-
JIMA, Jap. Butterfl. [Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Jap.)] (1904), 148, PI.
16, fig. 6; Matsumura, Cat. Insect. Jap. (1905), 1, 14, No. 110;
Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan [Nihon Senchu Dzukai
(Jap.)] (1907), 4, 103, PI. 72, fig. 10, $; Seitz, Macrolep. of the
World, Faun. Pal. (June 23, 1908 J, 1, 86, PL 31e.
The larva figured (Plate III, fig. 26), was taken in June, 1902,
at Hakodate, Oshima Province, Hokkaido (Yezo), on bamboo
grass, sasa-gusa (? Lophathenvm elatum ZolL). It pupated on
July 4, 1912, and a female imago emerged from the pupa result-
ing from it on July 19, 1902. A male emerged on August 10,
1902, from a second larva taken.
The following descriptions are taken from my original figures.
Larva. — Length, 35 millimeters. Bluish green; mediodorsal
longitudinal green stripe edged with yellow lines ; subdorsal and
midlateral longitudinal yellow stripes; white suprapedal longi-
tudinal stripe; horns of head tipped with pink.
Pupa. — Bluish green; four rows of white spots on dorsum
and thorax. Suspended by tail from food plant.
264 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
This species appears to be confined to the Japanese Islands.
Matsumura records it from Hokkaido (Yezo), Honshu, and
Kyushu, and I have taken it in Kyushu. It flies from July to
September.
Pryer states that it is a mountain insect. This is quite true
in Honshu and Kyushu Islands, as I discovered when collecting
there, but at Hakodate in Hokkaido, which is a great deal
farther north, it inhabits the plains as well as the mountains,
like several other species, which in the more southern parts
of Japan are only found in the mountains, but which in Hokkaido
occur commonly in the plains; for example, Vanessa io Linn,
and Lasiommata epimenides Men. I found L. callipteris
especially abundant in July and August on the summit of the
Raiden Toge (Raiden Pass), in Hokkaido, at an elevation of
500 meters (1,500 feet) where the vegetation mainly consisted
of bamboo grass, or sasa, the food plant of the larva.
Seitz 2^ remarks :
L. callipteris has the appearance of being a small form of labyriyithea
Leech, from central and western China in July, but the male is without the
dentate bandlike scent organ found in that species. Callipteris has, hither-
to, only been known from Japan; the specimen from which our figure
is taken and which belongs to Tring Museum, England, however bears the
locality "Kashmir." If that be not an error in labeling, I am inclined to
regard callipteris Butl. and labyrinthea Leech, in spite of the difference
in the scent organ, as being localized forms of one widely distributed
species.
Genus MYCALESIS Hubner
Mycalesis Hubner, Verz. bek. Schmett. (1827), 55; Seitz, Macrolep.
of the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 80; Fruhstorfer, Seitz's
Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 330.
Subgenus Sadarga Moore
Sadarga MoORE, Tr. Ent. Soc. Lond. (1880), 157.
Mycalesis (Sadarga) gotama Moore.
PI. Ill, fig. 8, larva; fig. 9 head; figs. 10-11, dorsal aspect of segments;
fig. 12, food plant; figs. 13-14; pupa; figs. 15-16, pupa previous to
emergence.
Japanese name, hime-janome.
Mycalesis gotama Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. G. (1857), 1, 232; Pryer,
Rhop. Nihon (1889), 30, PI. 9, fig. 1; Leech, Butterfl. China, Japan,
Corea (1892-1893), 1, 14; Nawa, Insect World [Konchu Sekai
(Jap.)] (1900), 4, 373, PI. 10, figs, transf. larva, pupa, imago, food
plant; Miyajima, Jap Butterfl. [Nihon Chorui Dzusetsu (Jap.)]
(1904), 145, PI. 16, fig. 1; Matsumura, Cat. Insect Jap. (1905),
1, 15, No. 118; Matsumura, Thousand Insects of Japan [Nihon
"Macrolep. of the World, Fauna Pal. (1908), 1, 86.
IX, D, 3 Wileman: Notes on Japanese Lepidoptera 265
Senchu Dzukai (Jap.)] (1907), 4, 99, PL 72, figs. 6 c?, 2 $; Seitz,
Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Pal. (1908), 1, 81, PL 29c, c? $;
Fruhstorfer, Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral.
(1911), 9, 348.
Mycalesis borealis Feld. and Rogen., Reise Novara (1867), 500.
The larva figured (Plate III, fig. 8) was taken in July, 1901, at
Yoshino, Yamato Province, Honshu, on bamboo grass, sasa-gusa
( ? Lophatherum elatum Zoll.) , and a female imago emerged from
the pupa resulting from it on August 9, 1901.
The following descriptions are taken from my original figures.
Larva, — Length, 30 millimeters. Yellowish green ; dark green
mediodorsal longitudinal line edged with yellow ; yellow subdorsal
longitudinal line.
Pupa. — Green with two lines of four white spots on the
dorsum; suspended by the tail from food plant; it is green for
some time after pupation, and, as in the case of the pupae of
many other Lepidoptera, turns brown before emergence (Plate
III, figs. 15 and 16) . Three males and two females also emerged
at later dates from similar larvse. There is another form of
the larva which, instead of being green, is a dirty grayish
brown with the dorsal and subdorsal lines dark. On May 12,
1901, I found a larva of this form at Yoshino from which an
imago of gotama emerged on May 31, 1901. The color of this
larva, however, may have been due to the fact that it was
preparing to pupate as the larvse of many Lepidoptera change
color before entering on the pupal stage.
Nawa 2^ gives a black and white figure of the larva of this
species, together with its transformations. Matsumura records
its occurrence in Honshu, Shikoku, Kyushu, and Ryukyu (Loochoo
Islands) . I have taken it in Honshu, Kyushu, and Shikoku, from
May to September. Miyajima records it from Hokkaido (Yezo) ,
but I have never taken it there, and Matsumura does not record
it from that island. Rice is given as its food plant by Matsumura.
Fruhstorfer ^^ remarks :
M, gotama, an East Asiatic collective species, which inhabits the Jap-
anese Islands from Hondo (Honshu) onwards, has spread from central and
western China to Annam and Upper Assam.
He also gives the following subspecies, races, and forms which
are referable to M. gotama.
Mycalesis gotama Moore, subspecies from Shanghai, China.
Mycalesis borealis Feld., subspecies from China and Japan (Nagasaki,
Kyushu Island).
''' Insect World (Konchu Sekai) (1900), 4, 373, PL 10.
" Seitz's Macrolep. of the World, Faun. Indo-austral. (1911), 9, 348.
266 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Mycalesis fulginia Fruhst., form of M. borealis, from Japan (Kyushu
Island).
Mycalesis seriphus Fruhst., Seitz, 1, PI. 29c, from Japan, Honshu Island.
Mycalesis madjicosa Butler, Seitz, 9, 92 d. ?; island race; described by
Butler from Madjico-shima in Cat. Satyr. Brit. Mus. (1868), 135, PI.
3, fig. 10. Madjico-shima (recte ? Majiko-shima) is undoubtedly a
Japanese island but I have been unable to trace its geographical posi-
tion; it is probably one of the Loochoo Islands; specimens are in the
Fruhstorfer collection from Oshima, one of the Loochoo Islands, and
from Ishigaki-shima, which is situated in the southern or Miyako group
of the Loochoo Islands (Ryukyu).
Mycalesis nanda Fruhst., subspecies from Tainan and Horisha in Formosa.
Mycalesis charaka Moore, subspecies from India, Tonkin, and Assam.
Mycalesis oculata Moore, dry season form, from Assam and Bhamo, Burma.
ILLUSTRATIONS
(Drawings by Hisashi Kaido)
Plate I
Figs. 1 to 4. Papilio xuthus Linnaeus.
1 and 2y young larvae; ^, full-grown larva; 4, food plant.
5 to 8. Papilio (Cosmodesmus) sarpedon Linnaeus.
5, j'^oung larva; 6, full-grown larva; 7, pupa; 5, food plant.
Plate II
Figs. 1 to 6. Lethe (Kirrodesa) sicelis Hewitson.
1, larva; 2, head; S and ^, dorsal aspect of segments; 5,
pupa; 6, food plant.
7 to 11. Neope goschkevitschii Menetries.
7, larva; 8 and P, dorsal aspect of segments; 10, head; 11,
food plant.
12 to 16. Papilio (Pharmacophagits) alcinous King,
12, full-grown larva; 13, dorsal aspect of segment; lU to
16, pupa.
Plate III
Figs. 1 to 7. Lethe (Ranghia) diana Butler.
1, larva; 2, head; 3 and J^, dorsal aspect of segments; 5 and
6, pupa; 7, food plant.
8 to 16. Mycalesis (Sadarga) gotama Moore.
8, larva; 9, head; 10 and 11, dorsal aspect of segments; 12,
food plant; 13 and i-4, pupa; 15 and 16, pupa previous
to emergence.
17 to 22. Lethe (Tansima) marginalis Motschulsky.
17, larva; 18, head; 19, dorsal aspect of segment; 20, food
plant; 21 and 22, pupa.
23 to 29. Lethe (Harima) callipteris Butler.
23 and 2^, dorsal aspect of segments; 25, head; 26, larva;
27 and 28, pupa; 29, food plant.
267
WiLEMAN : Japanese Lepidoptera,]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 3.
PLATE 1. PAPILIO XUTHUS AND PAPILIO SARPEDON.
WiLEMAN : Japanese Lepidoptera.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 3.
U
%
©
PLATE II. LETHE SICELIS, NEOPE 60SCHKEVITSCHII, AND PAPILIO ALCINOUS.
WiLEMAN : Japanese LEPioorTERA.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 3.
PLATE III. LETHE DIANA, L. MARGINALIS, L. CALLIPTERIS, AND SADARGA GOTAMA.
NEUE FULGORIDEN VON DEN PHILIPPINEN: I. THEIL
Von L. Melichar
{Brilnn, Moravia)
Eine Tafel
CIXIIN^
Benna sinuata sp. nov. (Fig. 1.)
Diese Art ist durch die etwas abweichende Form der Flugel-
decken gekennzeichnet. Die Fliigeldecken sind wie bei alien
Benna- Arten nach hinten verbreitert. Der Apikalrand ist jedoch
nicht schrag gerundet, sondern deutlich konkav, so dass die
abgerundete Suturalecke starker hervortritt da auch der innere
Apikalrand schwach gebuchtet ist. Die Apikalecke ist breit
abgerundet. Im iibrigen treffen alle charakteristischen Merk-
male dieser Gattung zu. Der Kopf, Thorax, die Unterseite und
Beine blassgelb oder wachsgelb. Die Fliigeldecken schmutzig
milchweiss zur Spitze und zum Schlussrand leicht gelblich. Die
Adern sind gelblichweiss, zart, nur in der Mitte der Fliigeldecken
und im Apikalteile braun, in den Endzellen am Apikalrande
(mit Ausnahme der zweiten Apikalzelle) je ein brauner Langs-
strich, zusammen 6 an der Zahl. Die stielartigen Fortsatze
zu beiden Seiten des Korpers blassgelb, die erweiterte Spitze
schwarz, mit aufliegendem weissen Sekret. Die Apikalrandader
schwarz.
Lange s 6.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (1 Exemplar Baker).
DERBIN^^
Syntames tubulifer sp. nov. (Fig. 2.)
Scheitel breiter als lang, von der Stirne nicht abgetrennt, die
Rander gekielt, in der Mitte ein Kiel, welcher sich auf die Stirne
f ortsetzt. Stirne langlich, nicht schmal, die Seiten schwach nach
aussen gebogen und gekielt. Fuhler kurz, jedoch von oben
sichtbar, das zweite FUhlerglied doppelt so lang wie breit,
etwas keulenf ormig. Subantennalplatte f ehlt. Clypeus langlich
dreieckig, in der Mitte schwach gekielt. Pronotum langer als
der Scheitel, vorne schwach gerundet, hinten flach gebuchtet,
mit 3 scharfen Kielen, die Seitenkiele stark nach aussen konkav,
die Hinterecken des Pronotums erreichend. Schildchen breit,
stark gewolbt, mit 3 parallelen Langskielen, die Seitenkiele dem
269
270 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Mittelkiel genahert. Fliigeldecken mehr als doppelt so lang
wie einzeln breit, der aussere Sektor nahe der Basis gegabelt
(Subcosta und Radia nach Kirkaldy), der zweite Sektor in der
Mitte der Flugeldecken, der innere ungefahr hinter der Mitte
der Clavusnaht gegabelt. Im Clavus eine gegabelte Ader, der
Costalrand ist hinter der Mitte eine kurze Strecke fein quer-
gestrichelt. Hintersehienen mit einem sehr kleinen Dome hinter
der Mitte. Ein ganz besonderes Merkmal fiir diese Art sind
auf jeder Seite des Bauches befindliche zwei Rohren welche
wahrscheinlich Trachealrohren sind. Die erste langere Rohre
befindet sich an der Grenze zwischen der Hinterbrust und des
basalen Ventralsegmentes, und hat zwei ofFnungen, eine grossere
vorne, eine kleinere hinten, die zweite kurzere Rohre befindet
sich in der hinteren Seitenecke des 1. Ventralsegmentes und
hat nur eine offnung; die Basis der Rohrchen ist schwarz, die
Spitze gelb.
Der ganze Korper ist schwarz, glanzend, bloss die Bauchlappen
des Pronotums, das 2. Fiihlerglied, mit Ausnahme der schwar-
zen Basis, die Mittel- und Hinterbrust und die Beine schmutzig
blassgelb. Im Apikalteile der Flugeldecken 13 Randmakeln
(Spitzen der Endadern) am Aussenrande und eine Makel am
Innenrande schmutzig weiss. Die Schenkel etwas braunlich, das
Basalglied der Hintertarsen halb so lang wie die Hinterschiene,
in der Mitte braunlich.
Lange ^ $ 4 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (2 Exemplare Baker).
Vekunta lineata sp. nov.
Blassgelblich, die Augen, eine Mackel in der Mitte des Clypeus,
eine Langsbinde nahe dem Costalrande, der Schlussrand, eine
Mackel auf den Seiten der Vorderbrust und die Rander der
Deckschuppen schwarz. Der Scheitel ist so breit wie an der
Basis, nach vorne etwas verschmalert, die gehobenen Seiten-
rander mit Kornchen dicht besetzt. Der Scheitel bildet mit
der Stirne eine Ecke, die Stime lang, schmal, zum Clypeus
etwas verbreitert, in der Mitte nicht gekielt. Fiihler kurz, das
2. Fiihlerglied ziemlich gross, globulos. Subantennalplatte fehlt.
Die Kiele des Pro- und Mesonotums sehr undeutlich. Fliigel-
decken langlich schmal, die Adern gelblichweiss, am Costalrande
feine Kornchen und zu beiden Seiten des ausseren Clavusader
eine Reihe solcher jedoch starkerer Kornchen. Der Apikalteil
leicht rauchbraun. Unterseite und Beine blassgelblich.
Lange $ 5 mm., 9 6 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (2 Exemplare Baker) .
IX, D, 3 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden 271
Megatropis interruptolineata sp. nov.
Strohgelb, glanzend, Fliigeldecken mit 3 schwarzen Langs-
strichen und zwar: ein Strich an der Basis des Clavus in der
Nahtzelle, der zweite tiefer hinten in der Mitte der Suturalzelle
des Coriums und der dritte in der Mitte des Coriums zwischen
dem mittleren und inneren Sektor. Im Apikalteile 4 querlie-
gende Zellen. Die Stirne von der Seite betrachtet gerundet, mit
dem gerundeten and gehobenen Scheitelrande eine leichte Einker-
bung bildend, so dass die Abrundung keine vollstandige ist. Die
Augen halbmondformig, die Fiihler tief unten eingelenkt, das
2. Fiihlerglied reicht bis zum vorderen Augenrande, ist cylin-
drisch, an der Spitze eingekerbt, die Fuhlerborste distal einge-
fiigt. Der obere Scheitelrand ist mit feinen Kornchen (sensible
Organe) besetzt.
Lange 8 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios {Baker).
Megatropis obliquefasciata sp. nov. (Fig. 3.)
Weiss, Stirne von der Seite betrachtet parabolisch vorgezogen,
der Scheitelrand hinten gerundet, nach vome fast horizontal in
die Wolbung der Stirne iibergehend, die Breite der Stirne vor
den Augen betragt gut den dreifachen Langsdurchmesser des
Auges. Vor dem Auge eine rotliche Querbinde. Augen
schwarz. Fiihler lang, cylindrisch, bis iiber die Mitte der
Wangen reichend, cylindrisch zur Spitze verschmalert, an der
Spitze rotlich, eingekerbt, Fuhlerborste distal. Die Basis des
zweiten Fuhlergliedes ist in einen gleich dicken Fortsatz nach
hinten verlangert, welcher ungefahr J der Lange des 2. Fiihler-
gliedes betragt. Fiihlerdecken hyalin, milchweiss, mit weissen
Adem und einer braunen schragen Querbinde, welche von der
Clavusspitze schrag nach hinten und aussen zum Costalrande
zieht. Im Apikalteile 4 querliegende Zellen. Die Apikalzellen
am Innenrande braunlich gesaumt. Flugel hyalin, mit weissen
Adern. Korper und Beine blass gelblichweiss.
Lange sammt Fliigeldecke 8-9 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (Baker).
Leptaleocera bakeri sp. nov.
Lang gestreckt, scharlachrot, die Augen, die Deckschuppen,
eine von der Basis bis zum Apikalrande reichende Langsbinde
in der Mitte der Fliigeldecken und der schmale innere Rand des
Apikalteiles hinter der Clavusspitze schwarz. Der Scheitel und
die Stirne bilden von der Seite betrachtet einen zusammenhan-
genden Bogen. Die Wangen kaum so breit wie der Querdurch-
272 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
messer des Auges. Das Auge hat die fur die Gattung
charakteristische Form, in dem das vordere Ende des Auges sich
verschmalert und mit dem Stirnrande parallel und bogenf ormig
bis zur unteren Wangenecke herabreicht. Die Fiihler sind bei
diesem Exemplare leider abgebrochen. Unterseite und Beine
scharlachrot, die Schienen mehr gelblich. Diese schone Cicade
ist nach der Farbung und Zeichnung, der eigentiimlichen Form
der Augen leicht zu erkennen.
Lang ^ samt Flugeldecke 5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (1 Exemplar Baker).
Genus DENDROKARA novum
Eine durch die Form der Fuhleranhangsel an die Gattung
Devandanda Dist. erinnernde Gattung. Der Korper ist langlich,
schmal. Der Scheitel mit der Stirne von der Seite betraehtet
gerundet. Scheitel dreieckig, ziemlich breit, in der Mitte nicht
gekielt. Augen klein, langlich oval. Clypeus ktirzer als die
Stirne, gewolbt, in der Mitte nicht gekielt. Die Fiihler sind in
der unteren Wangenecke eingelenkt, das Basalglied langlich,
flach, an die Wangen angelegt, das 2. Fuhlerglied kurz, oval
Oder langlich oval, mit dem ersten Gliede einen rechten Winkel
bildend, nach aussen gerichtet, an der Basis mit kurzen oder
langen, oft moosartig verzweigten Appendices. Pronotum
schmal, in der Mitte deutlich gekielt. Schildchen stark gewolbt,
mit 3 Kielen, die Seitenkiele nach aussen konkav, dem Mittelkiel
genahert. Flugeldecken lang, schmal, hinten schrag abgerundet,
der innere Apikalrand hinter der Clavusspitze etwas vorgewolbt.
Das Geader ist aus der Abbildung ersichtlich. Flugel etwas
ktirzer als die Fltigeldecke, aber immer mehr als Zweidrittel der
ganzen Lange. Beine grazil, Hinterschienen ohne Dornen.
Typ. gen.: Dendrokara monstrosa sp. nov.
Dendrokara monstrosa sp. nov. (Fig. 4.)
Die Stirne bildet mit dem Scheitel (von der Seite betraehtet)
keinen einfachen Bogen, sondern der Scheitel ist hoher gewolbt
und bildet mit dem Stirnbogen eine seichte Einkerbung. Der
Scheitel und die Wangen mit Ausnahme einer kleinen zentralen
Partie schwarz. Pronotum auf de^ Scheibe pechbraun, an den
Seiten gelb. An der Basis des 2. Ftihlergliedes sind 3-4 lange,
moosartig geformte schwarze Anhangsel verschiedener Lange.
Das 2. Glied selbst ist langlich oval, schwarz, mit feinen weissen
Warzchen besetzt, die Spitze mit einem roten Punkt, die kurze
Fuhlerborste etwas distal gestellt. Schildchen schwarz, die
Spitze breit gelb. Flugeldecken pechbraun, in der Mitte breit
IX, D, 3 Melickar: Neue Fulgoriden 273
gelb, und eine grosse gelbe Mackel am inneren Apikalrande
hinter der Clavusspitze. Brust und Beine gelb, Hinterleib
pechbraun. Diese Art ist sofort nach den eigenttimlichen
Anhangseln der Fuhler zu erkennen. Die Stirnbildung erinnert
an die Gattung Megalropis, aber die Augen sind nicht halbmond-
f ormig, sondern rund, die Fuhler ganz abweichend.
Lange ^ 7 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 Exemplar Baker).
Dendrokara torva sp. nov. (Fig. 5.)
Von derselben Form und Grosse, aber der Scheitel (von der
Seite betrachtet) bildet mit der Stirne einen gleichmassigen
Bogen. Das 2. Fiihlerglied ist globulos mit eingeschnurrter
Basis, aus welcher zwei kurze schwammartig geformte Blatter
entspringen, welche das Fiihlerglied schalenformig fast ein-
schliessen. Der Wangenrand und die ganze Oberseite des Kor-
pers braun, glanzend, die Unterseite samt Beine gelb, der Hin-
terleibsriicken pechbraun. Die Form und das Geader der FlU-
geldecken genau wie bei monstrosa. Diese Art ist durch die
Fuhlerbildung geniigend gekennzeichnet.
Lange $ 7 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 Exemplar Baker).
DELPHACIN^
Tropidocephala pMlippina sp. nov.
Weib. Scheitel so lang wie das Pronotum, nach vorne
verschmalert und leicht nach unten gebogen, sowie Pronotum
und Schildchen griinlichgelb oder schmutzig gelb, ohne Zeichnung.
Stirne blass griinlichgelb, am unteren Ende des Mittelkieles ein
brauner Fleck. Clypeus schwarzbraun, Fiihler gelb, am 2.
Fiihlergliede ein schrager schwarzer Strich, die Wangen unter-
halb der Fiihler schwarz, Fliigeldecken hyalin, mit blassgelb-
lichen fein granulierten Adern, am Ende des mittleren Sektors
ein schwarzer glanzender Hocker, der Clavus griinlichgelb, im
Apikalteile zum inneren Rande eine gelblichbraune Mackel, an
den Spitzen der Endnerven schwarze Punkte (2-3), und ein
kleiner Punkt hinter der Mitte des Schlussrandes. Unterseite
und Beine griinlichgelb.
Mannchen. Die kleineren Mannchen ebenso gezeichnet, die
dunkle Farbung breitet sich mehr aus und verdrangt die griin-
lichgelbe Farbung bis auf einen kleinen Saum am Schlussrande,
im Apikalteile einige helle Randflecken. In der Mitte der Fliigel-
decken nur ein dunkler glanzender Hocker wie beim $ .
Lange $ 2.5 mm., $ 3 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (Baker) .
274 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Genus BAMBUSARIA novum
Kopf samt Augen etwas schmaler als dei? Thorax. Scheitel
nur wenig die Augen uberragend, vorne gerundet, die Seiten
nach vorne schwach konvergierend, gekielt, in der Mitte ein
deutlicher starker Langskiel, welcher sich auf die Stirne fort-
setzt. Stirne langlich, viereckig, die Seiten parallel, oben und
unten (Clypeusnaht) gerade, die Seiten stark gekielt, der
ebenso starke Mittelkiel auf den Clypeus verlangert, dessen
Seiten sowie die Wangen ebenfalls gekielt sind. Augen halb-
kugelig, dicht am unteren Rande die Fuhler eingelenkt ; dieselben
sind lang, das Basalglied etwas wenig langer als das 2. Fuhler-
glied, zusammengedriickt kanntig, das 2. Fiihlerglied an der
Basis oben mit einer glatten Platte versehen, der iibrige Teil
mit kleinen Warzchen und Harchen bedeckt. Pronotum breit,
hinten flach gebuchtet, mit 3 Kielen, die Seitenkiele nach vorne
konvergierend. Schildchen breit, gewolbt, mit 3 Langskielen, die
Seitenkiele dem Mittelkiel etwas genahert, daher nicht in der
Fortsetzung der Pronotumkiele liegend, nach hinten schwach
divergierend.
Mannchen. Das Pygophor ist langlich oval, der Aussenrand
etwas gewulstet, in der Mitte des unteren Randes etwas erhaben.
Die GrifFel gross, hornartig, aus breiter Basis zur Spitze ver-
schmalert, nach aussen gebogen, mit der Spitze einander
beriihrend.
Lange $ 4 mm., $ 5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling {Baker).
Kommt auf Bambusrohr vor und ist demselben schadlich.
Typ. Gen.: Bambusaria pi'Cta sp. nov.
Bambusaria picta sp. nov. (Fig. 6.)
Braunlichgelb. Die Stirne, Clypeus und Wangen schwarz,
die Kiele weiss; Scheitel schwarz, die Kiele weiss, die schwarze
Farbung des Scheitels verlangert sich auf das Pro- und Mesono-
tum, nach hinten zu beiden Seiten des hellen Mittelkieles eine
Langsbinde bildend. Das Basalglied der Fuhler ist schwarz
liniert, die Kanten weiss. Die Platte auf der Oberseite des 2.
Fuhlergliedes weiss mit einem schwarzen Punkt. Flugeldeck-
en hyalin, mit einer breiten braunen Querbinde in der Mitte und
einer halbmondformigen, 2-3 hyaline Randflecken einschlies-
sende Marginalbinde, am inneren Apikalrande, an den Enden
der beiden ausseren Endadern spitzdreieckige Mackeln, eine
kleine Mackel an der Teilungsstelle des inneren Sektors und eine
solche am Schlussrande vor der Clavusspitze. Die Sektoren
IX, D, 3 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden 275
sind hinter der Querbinde verdickt, pechbraun, daselbst
mit feinen Kornchen besetzt. Flugel hyalin, mit pechbraunen
Adern, die Vorderbrust braun, an den Seiten der Mittelbrust
eine braune runde Makel, die Bauchsegmente an der Basis braun,
die Rander hellgelb, Samtliche Schenkel schwarz langsliniert.
Fliigeldecken hyalin, hinten abgerundet, der aussere und innere
Sektor hinter der Mitte gegabelt, die Gabelaste durch eine
Queraderlinie untereinander verbunden, aus welcher 5 Endadem
entspringen, die beiden ausseren nach aussen gebogen, die 3.
gerade die 4. und 5. nach innen stark gekrummt. Im Clavus
eine Gabelader. Beine einfach; Hinterschienen mit 2 kleinen
Dornen, der erste dicht an der Basis, der zweite hinter der Mitte.
Der bewegliche Apikalsporn stark.
Genus MALAXA novum
Kopf samt Augen schmaler als der Thorax. Scheitel lang-
lich, nach vorne etwas wenig verschmalert, die Augen nur wenig
iiberragend, mit fast undeutHchen Kielen. Stirne sehr lang und
schmal, parallelseitig, an den Randem und in der Mitte, sowie
die Wangen gekielt. Der Mittelkiel auf der Scheitelspitze ein
sehr kleines seichtes Dreieck bildend. Augen halbkugelig.
Fiihler sehr lang, die Basis der Fliigeldecken iiberragend, cylin-
drisch, dunn, das 2. Fiihlerglied um i langer als der Basalglied,
die Borste sehr kurz. Pronotum breit, vorne gerade abgestutzt,
mit 3 Kielen und 2 Griibchen zwischen denselben. Schildchen
breiter als lang, mit 3 Langskielen. Fliigeldecken hyalin, hinten
stark zugespitzt, mit 3 Sektoren, welche aus einer langlichen
Basalzelle entspringen. Die beiden ausseren Sektoren einfach,
der innere Sektor gegabelt, 5 Endadern, die mittlere gegabelt,
der aussere Gabelast in die Apikalspitze mundend. Im kurzen
Clavus eine Gabelader. Beine sehr grazil, Hinterschienen mit
einem sehr kleinen Dorn in der Mitte. Endsporn fast so lang
wie das Basalglied der Hintertarsen, dtinn, aalformig.
Typ. gen.: Malaxa acutipennis sp. nov.
Malaxa acutipennis sp. nov. (Fig. 7.)
Kopf, Thorax und Unterseite samt Beine wachsgelblich.
Fliigeldecken hyalin mit zwei braunen Querbinden. Die erste
Binde schmal, vor der Mitte, die zweite breitere auf der Quer-
aderlinie, samtliche Endadern braun gesaumt. Auf dem Hinter-
leibsrticken zwei breite Langsbinden. Die Schenkel vor der
Spitze schwarz geringelt, die Spitzen der Schienen schwarzlich.
Lange 9 ungefahr 3.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 Exemplar Baker).
124685 6
276 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
ISSIN.^^
Genus AUGILINA novum
Korper lang gestreckt. Kopf samt Augen schmaler als der
Thorax, in einen dreieckigen nach oben gekrummten kurzen
Fortsatz verlangert. Die Seiten des Scheitels gescharft, nach
vorne konvergierend, die Spitze dicht vor den Augen nach oben
gebogen, die Scheitelflache glatt, nicht gekielt oder mit einem
schwachen Mittelkiel versehen. Stirne langlich, nach unten
verbreitert, die Rander gescharft gehoben, die Stirnflache an der
Basis vertieft, unten mehr oder weniger gewolbt, nicht gekielt.
Clypeus langlich dreieckig, gewolbt, nicht gekielt. "Rostrum bis
zur Mittelbrust reichend, kurz, Augen gross, halbkugelig, stark
vorgewolbt, die Fiihler kurz, Fuhlerborste lang. Ocellen vorhan-
den. Pronotum glockenformig, an den Seiten gerundet, oben
konvex, vorne schwach gerundet, hinten gerade auf der Scheibe
2 nach hinten divergierende und abgekiirzte vorne zusam-
menstossende kurze Kiele, welche eine dreieckige Grube be-
grenzen. Schildchen stark gewolbt, breiter als lang, mit 3
parallelen schwachen Langsbinden. Flugeldecken sehr lang und
schmal, die Hinterleibsspitze uberragend, hinten abgerundet, am
Aussenrande in der Mitte leicht gebuchtet. Drei lange Adern,
von welchen die beiden ausseren sich nahe der Basis miteinander
verbinden; die Sektoren bilden im hinteren Viertel der Fliigel-
decken durch Gabelung zwei pentagonale ZeUen und eine innere
viereckige Zelle, welche auf einer von der Clavusspitze nach
aussen ziehenden geraden Querader aufsitzen. Aus der letzteren
entspringen 5 Endadern, die 2. und 3. bilden eine Gabel und
entspringen mit der 4. Ader aus einem Punkte. Der Apikalrand
besitzt einen schmalen fein quergestrichelten Saum. Der Cla-
vus sehr lang, die beiden Clavusadem nahe der Basis vereinigt,
eine sehr kurze Gabel bildend, der Gabelschaft miindet vor der
Clavusspitze in die Clavusnaht. Flugel wenig ktirzer als die
Flugeldecken, mit wenigen Langsadem, Hinterleib walzenfor-
mig, lang gestreckt, nach hinten verengt. Beine sehr lang,
grazil, insbesondere die Vorderschenkel und Schienen auffallend
lang und diinn, Hinterschienen mit 1 Dome hinter der Mitte.
Basalglied der Hintertarsen lang.
Typ. gen. : Augilina longipes sp. nov.
Augilina longipes sp. nov. (Fig. 8.)
Kopf in einen kurzen dreieckigen, dicht vor den Augen nach
oben gekrummten Fortsatz verlangert. Der Scheitel und die
IX, D, 3 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden 277
Stirne samt Clypeus schwarz, glanzend, die Seitenkiele des
Scheitels und der Stirne weiss. Pronotum weiss, die zwischen
den Kielen liegende kleine dreieckige Grube schwarz. Die Seiten
des Kopfes mit Ausnahme der Schlafen schwarz, glanzend,
Fuhler gelblich. Schildchen schwarz, glanzend, die Spitze blass-
gelblich, mit einem schwarzen Langsstrich. Flugeldecken
hyalin, schwach milchig getriibt, an der Basis rotlich, mit einer
breiten dunkelbraunen Querbinde auf der Querader und Teilungs-
stellen der Sektoren. Samtliche Adern sind tief schwarz. Die
Vorderbrust und die Vorderhiiften schwarz, glanzend, die Mittel-
und Hinterbrust blassgelb, auf der Seite eine grosse schwarze
Mackel. Hinterleib blassgelb, eine breite Querbinde und die
Spitze schwarz. Vorder- und Mittelschenkel braunlichgelb, an
der Unterseite schwarz, die Schienen und Tarsen pechbraun, die
Hinterbeine tief schwarz, die Hintertarsen weiss.
Lange $ 7.5 mm. ; Breite 2 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios (1 Exemplar Baker).
Genus SYMPLANA Kirby
Symplana Kirby, Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool. (1891), 24, 136. Melichar,
Hom.-Fauna Ceylon (1903), 19. Distant, Fauna Brit. Ind., Rhynch.
(1906), 3, 254.
Kopf in einen dreieckigen nach oben gebogenen Fortsatz
verlangert. Der Fortsatz ist von der Seite betrachtet spitzig,
von oben betrachtet abgestumpft, fast quer gestutzt. Der
Scheitel nach vorne verschmalert, die Seitenrander gehoben
gekielt, so dass der Scheitel vertieft erscheint. Stirne lang
schmal, mit 3 starken Kielen, welche sich auf der Stimbasis
miteinander verbinden. Clypeus langlich dreieckig, in der
Mitte fein gekielt. Die Augen halbkugelig, Ocellen vorhanden,
Fuhler kurz, Fuhlerborste lang. Rostrum kurz. Pronotum
schmal, vorne schwach gerundet, hinten sehr schwach gebuchtet,
fast gerade, ohne deutliche Kiele, hinter den Augen jederseits
ein kleiner Hocker. Schildchen breiter als lang, mit zwei paral-
lelen schwachen Seitenkielen, der Mittelkiel sehr undeutlich.
Flugeldecken lang, schmal, hinten abgerundet, mit 3 einfachen
Sektoren, die beiden ausseren an der Basis miteinander verbun-
den, die Sektoren bilden durch Gabelung hinter der Mitte eine
viereckige und zwei pentagonale Zellen, welche auf einer geraden
Querader aufsitzen, aus welcher 5 Endadem entspringen, die
2. und 3. bilden eine Gabel, der Gabelschaft mit der 4. Ader aus
einem Punkte entspringend. Clavus sehr lang, die beiden Cla-
vusadern nahe der Basis vereinigt, die Gabelaste langer als bei
278 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Augilina, Flugel wenig kurzer als die Fliigeldecken. Beine ein-
fach, nicht auffallend lang, Hinterschienen mit einem Dome hin-
ter der Mitte.
Typ. gen. : Symplana viridinervis Kirby.
Kirby hat diese Gattung auf Grund eines auf Ceylon gefun-
denen Exemplares gegrundet und stellte diese Gattung zu den
Dictyophorinen, mit welchen sie eine grosse aussere Ahnlichkeit
hat. Da ich diese Cikada nicht kannte, folgte ich in meiner
Arbeit Horn. Fauna Ceylon der Angabe Kirby's. Distant sprach
mit voller Berechtigung den Zweif el aus, dass diese Gattung eine
Dictyophorinengattung sei. Das mir von Baker von den Philip-
pinen eingesendete Exemplar ist ohne Zweifel die Kirby'sche
Symplana, welche mit der philippinischen Gattung Augilina
sehr verwandt ist. Die Form und die Bildung der Fliigeldecken
und das Geader ist bei beiden voUkommen gleich, nur sind bei
Symplana 3 Stirnkiele vorhanden, bei Augilina keine Kiele, die
Beine sind bei Augilina auffallend lang, bei Symplana gewohnlich
lang. Zu den Dictyophorinen konnen beide Gattungen nicht
gerechnet werden, weil dieselben keine Seitenrandkiele besitzen,
der Hinterrand des Pronotums gerade ist und der Schaft der
Clavusadern nicht in den Schlussrand miindet. Nach meiner
Ansicht gehoren beide Gattungen zu den Issinen und zwar in die
Nahe der Gattung Augila Stal mit welcher sie eine gewisse
Verwandschaft zeigen.
Symplana viridinervis Kirby. (Fig. 9.)
Symplana viridinervis Kirby, Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool. (1891), 24, 136,
Tafel VI, fig. 11; Melichar, Hom.-Fauna Ceylon (1903), 19;
Distant, Fauna Brit. Ind., Rhynch. (1906), 3, 254.
Der ganze Korper blassgriin, mit einer orangegelben Langs-
binde, welche von der Scheitelspitze iiber das Pro- und Mesono-
tum und den Schlussrand bis zur Clavusspitze zieht. Die Spitze
der Dornen der Hinterschienen dunkel.
Lange 7-8 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (Baker) ; Ceylon, Punda-
loya (Kirby).
Eupilis rubrovenosa sp. nov.
Der E. nigrinervis Stal ahnlich, die Adern der Deckflugel sind
lebhaft rotbraun. Scheitel quadratisch, mit zwei eingepressten
schwarzen kommaformigen Langsstrichen. Stirne langlich,
nach oben schwach verengt, mit 3 schwachen Kielen, die ausse-
ren nach aussen gebogen, auf der Basis mit dem Mittelkiel ver-
bunden. Die Stirnbasis ist mit hellen flachen Kornchen besetzt,
IX, D, 3 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden 279
welche sich jederseits langs des Stirnseitenrandes bis ungefahr
zur Mitte der Stirne herabziehen. Die Stirne braun, mit 4
helleren Flecken. Flugeldecken und das Geader wie bei E. nigri-
nervis, die Flugeldecken fast hyalin, nicht gefarbt, hochstens
zum Schlussrande hellbraunlich, die rotbraunen Adern stark
vortretend. Flugel hyalin, mit pechbraunen Adern, die Unter-
seite und Beine braunlichgelb, die Schenkel und Schienen an den
Kanten dunkel.
Lange 11 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling {Baker) ,
Eupilis hyalinocosta sp. nov.
Von alien bekannten Arten sofort dadurch zu unterscheiden,
dass die innere Halfte der Flugeldecken rotbraun oder gelblich-
braun, von helleren Adern durchsetzt ist, die aussere Halfte samt
Adern hyalin und graulichweiss ist. Femer befindet sich stets
auf den griinen Brustlappen des dunklen Pronotums ein grosser
schwarzer Punkt. Auf der Basis der Stirne in den Stirndrei-
ecken keine Kornchen, diese sind bloss am Seitenrande der Stirne
bis zur Spitze sichtbar. Die Stirne ist nicht dunkel gezeichnet,
die Unterseite und Beine schmutzig olivengrun oder graulichgelb.
Auf dem quer viereckigem Scheitel nahe dem Hinterrande 2
schwarze eingestochene Punkte, sowie 2 Griibchen auf der
Scheibe wie bei alien Arten.
Lange 10-12 mm.
Luzon, Los Baiios, Mount Maquiling (Baker),
Hemisphaerius affinis sp. nov.
Korper oval, olivengrun. Die Stirne lederartig gerunzelt,
griin. Der Clypeusspitze schwarz. Unterseite und Beine
schmutzig graulichgelb, die Vorder- und Mittelschienen an der
Spitze schwarz, die Hinterschenkel braunlich. Dem H. chloro-
phanus Mel. durch die lederartig gerunzelte Stirne sehr nahe
stehend, unterscheidet sich von dieser Art durch schwarze
Clypeusspitze und die bloss an den Spitzen schwarzgeringelten
Schienen der vorderen Beine.
Lange 5 mm.; Breite 3.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (Baker).
Hemisphaerius triangularis sp. nov.
Von der Form und Grosse der H. affinis. Stirne hellgriin,
schmal rot gerandet, mit einem roten Dreieck in der Mitte.
Clypeus schwarz, Scheitel rot. Pro- und Mesonotum hellgriin,
die Rander des letzteren und ein kleines Basaldreieck rot.
Flugeldecken fein lederartig gerunzelt, olivengrun, der Schluss-
280 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
rand von der Basis bis zur Mitte rot gerandet, daneben ein hell-
griiner Langsstreifen, welcher nach aussen durch einen roten
Streifen begrenzt ist. Die Costalrandader schwarzlich. Unter-
seite und Beine schmutzig graulichgelb, die Schenkel mit Aus-
nahme der Basis und der Spitze, 2 Ringe an den Vorder- und
Mittelschienen schwarz. Hinterschenkel braunlich.
Lange 5 mm. ; Breite 3.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (Baker).
Hemisphaerius rufus sp. nov.
Stirn lederartig gerunzelt wie bei H. affinis, wie die ganze Ober-
seite blutrot, Clypeus mit Ausnahme der Basis schwarz. Die
Beine schmutzig gelb, bloss die Spitzen der Vorder- und Mittel-
schienen schwarz, die Hiiften und die Hinterschenkel, letztere
mit Ausnahme der Spitze schwarz. Bauch mit 2-3 dunklen
Querstreifen in der Mitte. Von affinis durch die blutrote Far-
bung der Oberseite verschieden.
Lange 5 mm.: Breite 4 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (Baker).
Genus LAPITHASA novum
Kopf stark nach vorne vorgezogen. Der Scheitel parallel-
seitig, der liber die Augen vorragende Teil doppelt so lang wie
der Basalteil bis zum vorderen Augenrande, die Schlafenecken
winkelig vorspringend, von der Seite betrachtet abgerundet.
Scheitelrander etwas gescharft gekielt, in der Mitte ein voU-
standiger Langskiel. Stirne sehr lang, vor dem Clypeus
plotzlich verbreitert, indem die Seitenrander eine nach aussen
abgerundete Ecke bilden, mit 3 Kielen auf der Stirnflache, welche
sich auf der Stirnbasis miteinander verbinden. Clypeus ein
Drittel der Stirnlange, an den Seiten nur in der Mitte gekielt.
Rostrum, die Hinterhiiften erreichend, das letzte Glied kurz.
Fiihler kurz, das 2. Fiihlerglied nur wenig langer als breit.
Ocellen vorhanden. Pronotum vorne schwach gerundet, hinten
fast gerade, oben mit 3 Kielen, ein Seitenrandkiel. Schildchen
mit 3 Langskielen, die seitlichen schwach nach vorne konver-
gierend. Flugeldecken doppelt so lang wie einzeln breit, die
Seiten parallel, hinten breit abgerundet, die Apikalecke starker
abgerundet als die Suturalecke. Der 1. Sektor nahe der Basis,
die beiden inneren Sektoren hinter der Mitte gegabelt. Die
Costalmembrane an der Basis schmal, nach hinten verbreitert,
quergeadert. Im Apikalteile zahlreiche dichte Apikaladern,
welche durch zahlreiche Queradern untereinander verbunden
sind. Ein dem Apikalrande genaherte Subapikallinie. Die
IX, D, 3 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden 281
beiden Clavusadern hinter der Mitte des Schlussrandes vereinigt.
Die Vorder- und Mittelbeine zusammengedruckt, die Schenkel
an der Unterkante, die Schienen an der Aussenkante massig
erweitert. Hinterschienen zur Spitze verbreitert mit 2 starken
Dornen vor der Spitze, das Basalglied der Hintertarsen langlich.
Typ. gen : Lapithasa bakeri sp. nov.
Lapithasa bakeri sp. nov. (Fig. 10.)
Braun. FlUgeldecken pechbraun, auf der inneren Halfte
mehr oder weniger gelblich, nur gebandert und gesprenkeit, am
Costalrande hinter der Mitte eine grosse gelblichweisse hie und
da braune quergesprenkelte Mackel, vor derselben am Costalran-
de zahlreiche kleine hyaline Fleckchen, nach hinten mehrere
hyaline Querstriche und dreieckige Randmackeln, insbesondere
ist am Apikalrande aussen und innen je eine Quermackel, da-
zwischen in der Mitte des Apikalrandes eine kleine dreieckige
Mackel. Vor der Suturalecke ist auf dunklem Grunde ein
kleiner schwarzer Punkt. Flugel rauchbraun, mit schwarzen
Adern. Die Unterseite und Beine braun. Das letzte Glied der
Schnabelscheide weiss.
Lange 12 mm.
Luzon, Los Baiios (Baker).
uber die systematische Stellung dieser Gattung bin ich nicht
im Klaren. Nach dem ausseren Habitus wurde man geneigt
sein dieselbe zu den Lophopinen zu rechnen, aber dagegen spricht
der Urn stand, dass das Basalglied der Tarsen lang, nicht verdickt
ist. Zu den Dictyophorinen kann diese Gattung aus dem Grunde
nicht gerechnet werden, weil der Schaft der Clavusnerven in
die Clavusspitze miindet und der Hinterrand des Pronotums
gerade ist, nicht winkelig ausgeschnitten. Gegen die Einreihung
in die Subf. Issinse spricht der starke Seitenrandkiel auf dem
Pronotum. Die Form der Stirne erinnert sehr an die von
Acarua und Kasserota und wurde vielleicht am ehestens in die
Nahe der letztgenannten Gattung zu stellen sein, von welcher
sich diese Gattung durch den langen Scheitel und die zusam-
mengedrlickten, etwas erweiterten Vorderbeine unterscheidet.
TAFELERKLARUNG
Tafel I
Fig. 1. Benna sinuata sp. nov.
2. Syntames tubulifer Mel.
3. Megatropis obliquefasciata sp. nov.
4. Dendrokara monstrosa sp. nov.
5. Dendrokara torva gen. et sp. nov.
6. Bambusaria picta gen. et sp. nov.
7. Malaxa acutipennis gen. et sp. nov.
8. Augilina longipes gen. et sp. nov.
9. Symplana viridinervis Kirby.
10. Lapithasa bakeri gen. et sp. nov.
283
Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden : I.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 3.
TAFEL I. NEUE FULGORIDEN VON DEN PHILIPPINEN.
ENUMERATION DES SERPHIDES (PROCTOTRUPIDES) DES
ILES PHILIPPINES AVEC DESCRIPTION DE GENRES
NOUVEAUX ET D'ESPfeCES NOUVELLES ^
Par J. J. KlEFFER
{Bitsch, Germany)
Les premiers auteurs qui se sont occupes des Serphides ou
Proctotrupides sont: Westwood, Ashmead, Brown et Crawford.
Le nombre des especes observees par eux est de 27. J'ai ajoute
a ce chiffre 70 autres especes, qui ont ete recueillies a Los
Baiios, Luzon, par le professeur Ch. Fuller Baker. Ces 97
especes, auxquelles viennent s'aj outer 24 nouvelles especes, se
repartissent de la fagon suivante:
DRYINID^
1. Lestodryinus browni Ashmead (Dryinus), Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905),
29, 109. ?.
2. Lestodryinus luzonicus Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 189. $.
3. Lestodryinus perkinsi Kieffer, Bull. Soc. ent. France (1914), No. 1. ?.
4. Prodryinus (?) stantoni Ashmead (Dryinus), Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.
(1904), 28, 134. ?.
BETHYLID^
5. Goniozus philippinensis Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1904), 28,
134. ?.
6. Goniozus depressus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 318. 2-
7. Dissomphalus tibialis Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1904), 28,
134. ?.
8. Misepyris exaratus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 317. 2.
9. Misepyris longiceps Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 318. $.
10. Rhahdepyris luzonicus Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 189. c?.
11. Epyris apertus Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 189.
12. Epyris philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 258. d*, ?.
13. Chlorepyris flavipennis Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 189.
14. Neurepyris tagala Ashmead (Epyris) y Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905),
29, 109. c?.
15. Xenepyris compressicomis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 259. c?.
16. Foenobethylus gracilis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 257. c?.
17. Cleistepyris minimus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 257. c^.
18. Cleistepyris minor Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 256. c?.
19. Cleistepyris philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 254. c?, ?•
^ Since this paper was received, the author has sent descriptions of 1 more
new genus and 4 more new species; namely, Epyris filiformis, genus Uro-
scelioy Uroscelio luteipeSy Dilapitha nitida, and Macroteleia flaviceps. The
descriptions of these species will be found under their respective genera,
but the species are not included in the keys. — The Editors.
285
286 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
SCELIONID^
20. Prosparasion cceruleum Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 190. (?.
21. Scelio philippinensis Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28,
963. ?.
22. Scelio aratigena Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 320. c?, $.
23. Scelio consobrinus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 319. c?, $.
24. Scelio variicornis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 319. c?, $.
25. Platyscelio abnormis Crawford, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1910), 38,
126. (?.
26. Platyscelio punctatus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 321. (?.
27. Sparasion philippinense Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 320. d, $.
28. Calliscelio philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 322. c?.
29. Opisthacantha nigriclavata Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 29,
399. ?.
30. Macroteleia manilensis Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28, 963,
c?; Crawford, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1910), 38, 127. ?.
31. Macroteleia craivfordi Kieffer nom. no v. [kiefferi Crawford, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus. (1910), 38, 127. ?; non kiefferi Brues.]
32. Macroteleia striativentris Crawford, Proc. U. S Nat. Mus. (1910), 38,
126. c?, ?.
33. Macroteleia philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 323, 367. c?, $.
34. Hoploteleia pacifica Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 29, 112. ?.
35. Hoploteleia car'inata Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 368. ?.
36. Hoploteleia philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 369. d", ?.
37. Hoploteleia unidens Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 370. c?, S-
38. Camptoteleia carinata Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 387. $.
39. Camptoteleia excavata Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 388. <S.
40. Chrestoteleia bakeri Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 389. c?, $.
41. Xenoteleia flavipennis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 390. ?.
42. Hadronotus flavipes Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 29, 399. $.
43. Hadronotus philippinensis Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1904), 28,
153. ?.
44. Anteris atriceps Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 428. ?.
45. Habroteleia brotvni Crawford, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1910), 38,
125. c?.
46. Neurocaciis philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 429. c?.
47. Aeolus luteipes Crawford, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1910), 38, 124. ?.
48. Hoplogryon longispina Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 429. <?.
49. Hoplogryon flaviclava Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 191. ?.
50. Hoplogryon roberti Crawford (Prosacantha) , Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.
(1910), 38, 125. <S.
51. Hoplogryon striaticeps Crawford (Prosacantha) , Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.
(1910), 38, 125. c?.
52. Telenomus catacanthsB Ashmead, Canad. Ent. (1904), 36, 284. d", ?.
PLATYGASTERID^
53. Anopedias luzonicus Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 28,
964. ?.
54. Ceratopsilus rufipes Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 461.
IX, D, 3 Kieifer: Enumeration des Serphides 287
CERAPHRONID^
55. Ceraphron manilas Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1904), 28, 135. ?.
DIAPRIIDiE
56. Galesiis manilss Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 29, 397. J, 5-
57. Galesus luzonicus Ashmead, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1905), 29, 398. d*.
58. Galesus clavaticornis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 430. 2.
59. Galesus philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 431. c?.
60. Galesus crawfordi Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 432. c?.
61. Galesus curticeps Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 432. cJ.
62. Hemigalesus niger Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 434. cJ, $.
63. Hemigalesus rufus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 434. c?, $.
64. Hemigalesus brevicornis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 434. d*.
65. Hemigalesus gracilis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 435. c?.
66. Lipoglyptus primus Crawford, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1910), 38, 122.
c?, S.
67. Cologlyptus kiefferi Crawford, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus. (1910), 38,
124. ?.
68. Scapopria atriceps Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 441. ?.
69. Acidopria variicornis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 442. c?, ?.
70. Acidopria tricomuta Crawford (Loxotropa), Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.
(1910), 38, 122. c?, ?.
71. Acidopria monachanta Kieffer, Boll. Zool. Portici (1913), 7, 192. c?.
72. Acidopria tetratoma Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 442. ?.
73. Phoenopria rufa Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 455. 2-
74. Phcenopria nigriceps Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 455. c?*
75. Phcenopria exilis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 456. c?.
76. Loxotropa philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 456. c?.
77. Trichopria caudata Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 456. 2.
78. Trichopria analis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 457. 2-
79. Trichopria semirufa Kieffer, Insecta (1913) 3, 457. c?.
80. Trichopria insulas Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 458. d*.
81. Ashmeadopria bakeri Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 458. c?.
82. Ashmeadopria nigriventris Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 459. c?.
83. Ashmeadopria bipunctata Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 459. d*.
84. Aparamesius carinatus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 436. c^, 2.
85. Aparamesius filicomis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 437. c?.
86. Aparamesius levistilus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 437. c?.
87. Aparamesius depressus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 437. 2-
88. Spilomicrus carinifrons Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 438. c?, 2.
89. Spilomicrus variicornis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 439. 2.
90. Spilomicrus opertus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 440. d*.
91. Spilomicrus dispansus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 440. d*.
92. Spilomicrus nitidicornis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 441. d*.
93. Spilomicrus consobrinus Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 441. 2.
94. Loboscelidia rufescens Westwood, Thesaur. entom. Oxon. (1874), 172.
BELYTID^
95. Aclista punctulata Kieffer, Insect (1913), 3, 459. d, 2.
96. Xenotoma philippinensis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 460. 2.
97. Procinetus rectinervis Kieffer, Insecta (1913), 3, 461. d*.
288 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
DESCRIPTION DES NOUVELLES ESPECES ET DES NOUVEAUX GENRES
BETHYLID^
Genus GONIOZUS Foerster
Parmi les 26 especes dont se compose ce genre, les trois
suivantes reviennent aux Philippines :
1. Segment median margine lateralement et posterieurement, ayant sur la
moitie anterieure de sa partie mediane un espace preeminent, trian-
gulaire et lisse G. triangulifer sp. nov.
Segment non margine, sans espace releve et triangulaire 2.
2. Tete plane, circulaire, entierement lisse G. depressus Kieffer.
Tete allongee, parsemee de points G. philippinensis Ashm.
Goniozus triangulifer sp. nov. {$ , $ .)
Noir, brillant, mandibules, antennes, genoux, tibias et tarses,
parfois les quatre femurs posterieurs d'un jaune clair. T6te
presque circulaire, tres faiblement chagrinee, parsemee de points
peu prof onds. Clypeus fortement carene. Yeux deux f ois aussi
longs que leur distance du bord occipital. Ocelles posterieurs
touchant le bord occipital, plus eloignes des yeux que Tun de
I'autre. Articles antennaires 3-5 chez le male ou seulement
le 3^ chez la femelle, un peu allonges, les suivants globuleux,
sauf le 13^ qui est allonge. Thorax tres finement chagrine.
Pronotum de moitie plus long que le mesonotum, sillons parapsi-
daux nuls. Scutellum avec un mince sillon transversal. Segment
median margine lateralement et posterieurement, mat et chagrine,
ayant dans la moitie anterieure de sa partie mediane un espace
releve, triangulaire, lisse et brillant, a pointe dirigee en arriere
et reliee au bord posterieur par une arete longitudinale. Ailes
hyalines, prostigma, stigma et radius bruns, les autres nervures
jaunes, radius presque droit, recourbe a Textremite, basale brisee
fortement en angle, sa partie inferieure plus longue que la
superieure. Abdomen lisse et brillant, segment anal incurve
chez le male, droit et a tariere proeminente chez la femelle.
Taille: 2.5-3 mm.
Localites: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos et Mont Maquiling, et
Manila.
Genus EPYRIS Westwood
Epyris filiformis sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir, lisse, brillant, glabre ; mandibules, 4 ou 5 premiers articles
antennaires, palpes, tibias et tarses roux, reste des antennes
graduellement assombri. Corps tres mince. Tete quadrangu-
laire, au moins deux fois aussi longue que large, convexe, beau-
IX. D. 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 289
coup plus large que le thorax, partie anterieure faiblement ponc-
tuee, avec trace d'une ligne enf oncee longitudinale. Yeux glabres,
allonges, grands, plus courts que Tocciput. Joues nulles. Front
decoupe en arc au bord anterieur. Clypeus situe plus bas que
le front, fortement carene. Mandibules mediocres, graduelle-
ment elargies, avec 3 ou 4 petites dents noires. Ocelle anterieur
situe plus en arriere que le bord posterieur des yeux. Palpes
courts, les maxillaires avec 3 petits articles apres la flexion.
Scape arque, aussi long que les 3 ou 4 articles suivants reunis
et guere plus gros, article 3® tres transversal, les suivants un
peu transversaux sauf le 13% tous serres. Thorax quatre a
cinq f ois aussi long que haut. Pronotum deux f ois aussi long que
large, trois f ois aussi long que le mesonotum, sillons parapsidaux
visibles seulement au tiers posterieur, elargis en virgule.
Fossettes du scutellum separees seulement par une arete.
Segment median horizontal, quadrangulaire et tres long, deux
fois et demie aussi long que large, densement strie en travers,
margine lateralement par deux aretes separees par une gouttiere
striee transversalement, bord posterieur non margine, graduelle-
ment arrondi, mesopleures et metapleures densement ridees en
long. Ailes subhyalines, atteignant le milieu de Tabdomen, sous-
costale conf ondue avec la postale, sauf distalement, basale oblique
et distante du stigma de ses deux tiers, transversale perpen-
diculaire, stigma obconique, guere plus long que large, radiius
a peine arque, deux fois aussi long que la basale, sans autres
nervures. Femurs tres elargis, les anterieurs en ellipse, articles
2-4 du tarse anterieur cordiformes et aussi larges que longs,
crochets tarsaux ayant au moins une dent. Abdomen aussi
long que le reste du corps ou plus long, mince, graduellement
en pointu, termine par un stylet, comme d'ordinaire, tariere
proeminente.
Taille: 6 mm. sur une largeur n'atteignant pas 1 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
SCELIONID^
Genus SCELIO Latreille
Quatre especes du genre Scelio etaient connues pour les
Philippines; j'en ajoute deux nouvelles, qui se distinguent des
precedentes d'apres le tableau suivant.
1. Sillons parapsidaux plus ou moins distincts 2.
Sillons parapsidaux nuls 3.
2. Tete et thorax avec des points serres et ombiliques, scape jaune brunatre,
joues non striees S. philippinensis Ashm.
290 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Vertex et mesonotum lisses, avec de rares points non ombiliques, scape
noir, joues striees en partie S. bisectus sp. nov.
8. Joues striees 4.
Joues reticulees comme le reste de la tete 5.
4. Front strie jusqu'au milieu des yeux, hanches et massue des femurs d^un
brun noir S. aratigena Kieff.
Stries n'atteignant pas la base des yeux, hanches et pattes jaunes en
entier S. luzonicus sp. nov.
6. Articles antennaires 3-5 rouges chez le male, scape de la femelle noir,
hanches rousses S. variicornis Kieff.
Antennes noires en entier chez le male, scape de la femelle roux, hanches
noires S. consobrinus Kieff.
Scelio bisectus sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir; antennes brunes, scape noir, mandibules d'un brun
noir, les 2 lobes aigus et longs, pattes d'un jaune sale, hanches
noires, massue des quatre femurs posterieurs brune, tarse poste-
rieur brunatre. Tete a ponctuation grosse et dense. Yeux
reunis aux mandibules par un sillon. Bas du front strie de
chaque cote, ces stries ne depassent pas le sillon et n'atteignent
pas ou h. peine la base des yeux ; f ossette f rontale remplacee par un
petit espace lisse et brillant au-dessus du tubercule antennaire.
Vertex brillant, lisse, a points epars et peu gi«os. Ocelles
posterieurs distants des yeux de moins de leur diametre. Article
3« des antennes obconique, plus gros et un peu plus long que le
2% a peine plus long que gros, 4« obconique et transversal, 5«
tres gros, transversal, 6-10 egalement minces, serres, tres
transversaux sauf le 10% qui est ovoidal. Thorax glabre. Pro-
notum ponctue densement. Mesonotum lisse, brillant, avec
quelques rares points peu gros ; sillons parapsidaux percurrents,
profonds, divergents en avant, lobe median du mesonotum plus
large en arriere que les lateraux. Scutellum ponctue grossiere-
ment en de. Metanotum a aretes longitudinales formant des
f ossettes, milieu en forme de tubercule peu apparent. Segment
median a grosses rides longitudinales. Pleures ridees en long et
ponctuees, sans espace lisse. Ailes faiblement enfumees, sous-
costale jaune, marginale circulaire, d'un brun noir, stigmatique
d*un brun clair, presque perpendiculaire. Metatarse posterieur
un peu plus long que les articles 2 et 3 reunis. Abdomen en
ellipse allonge, deprime, un peu d^passe par les ailes, arrondi
en arriere, tous les tergites transversaux, stries en long avec le
bord posterieur lisse, 6« et 7« seulement ponctues densement, les
trois premiers graduellement plus longs.
Taille: 4.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios.
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 291
Scelio luzonicus sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir ; mandibules d'un brun noir, les 2 lobes aigus et peu longs,
pattes jaunes, hanches plus sombres a la base. Tete a polls
blancs, appliques, courts, plus denses sur les tempes, grossiere-
ment reticulee, sauf a la base du front qui est striee en long
de chaque cote, ces stries ne depassent pas le sillon qui reunit
Toeil a la mandibule et n'atteignent pas ou a peine la base de
Toeil. Fossette frontale comme chez le precedent. Antennes
noires en entier, 3« article obconique, bien plus long que le 2^,
deux fois aussi long que gros ou que le 3^. Thorax a polls plus
rares que sur la tete, grossierement reticule, sans sillons parap-
sidaux, les pleures plutot ridees-ponctuees. Ailes faiblement
enfumees, subhy alines a la base, nervures tres pales. Abdomen
comme chez le precedent sauf que le 6® ou dernier segment est
chagrine, triangulaire, aussi long que large.
Taille: 6 mm.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus TJROSCELIO novum
9 . Yeux glabres. Mesonotum avec 2 sillons parapsidaux.
Postmarginale plus longue que la stigmatique. Thorax inerme.
Abdomen avec une corne, 6« segment subitement aminci et for-
mant une longue queue. Le type est :
TJroscelio luteipes sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir; mandibules, antennes sauf les 5 derniers articles, han-
ches et pattes d'un jaune sale, abdomen brun noir, marge laterale
plus claire. Tete glabre, brillante, presque deux fois aussi large
que longue vue d'en haut, beaucoup plus haute que longue vue
de cote, un peu plus large que le thorax. Ocelles en triangle,
les posterieurs distants des yeux de leur diametre, beaucoup plus
distants du bord posterieur que de Tanterieur. Joues lisses,
egalant la moitie des yeux, avec une ponctuation assez grosse et
assez dense et un prof ond sillon. Tempes larges, graduellement
elargies par en bas, lisses, avec une ponctuation plus eparse que
celle des joues. Vertex strie ou ride densement en long. Front
strie transversalement en arc, sans fossette, a peine deprime au
milieu. Antennes avec une niassue de 6 articles, scape subcylin-
drique, un peu plus long que les articles 2 et 3 reunis, article 2«
obconique, deux fois aussi long que gros, 3« egal au 4«, subcylin-
drique, presque double du 2«, 5^ un peu plus court que le 4® et a
peine plus gros, encore trois fois aussi long que gros, 6« un peu
plus gros que le 5s de moitie plus long que gros, 7« h peine plus
292 The Philippine Journal of Sciefice i^u
long que gros, formant le commencement de la massue, plus gros
que le 6® mais moins gros que le 8% 7-11 presque trans versaux
et serres, 12« un peu allonge. Thorax peu convexe, mesonotum
et scutellum mats, chagrines, finement pubescents. Pronotum
a peine visible d'en haut, mesonotum semicirculaire, sillons pa-
rapsidaux percurrents, peu divergents en avant, bord posterieur
du lobe median deux f ois aussi large que les lateraux. Scutellum
transversal, separe du mesonotum par une rangee transversale
de fossettes, bord posterieur margine par des fossettes plus pe-
tites. Metanotum transversal, plus long que la moitie du
scutellum, grossierement cannele en long, inerme. Segment
median decoupe en trapeze jusqu'a sa base. Propleures avec un
espace elliptique traverse par des aretes longitudinales ; meso-
pleures tres excavees, lisses et brillantes. Ailes a peine teintees,
pubescentes, ciliees, atteignant le milieu du 5^ tergite, sous-costale
brune et situee contre le bord, les autres nervures pales, basale
tres oblique, marginale plus courte que la stigmatique, qui est
oblique, longue, noueuse au bout, postmarginale plus de deux
fois aussi longue que la stigmatique. Pattes greles, tibia poste-
rieur beaucoup plus long que le femur, metatarse posterieur tres
long, deux fois aussi long que les 4 suivants reunis. Abdomen
deux fois aussi long que le reste du corps, brillant; petiole
presque deux fois aussi long que large, lineaire, grossierement
cannele, avec une corne obtuse striee transversalement
en arc et s'engageant entre les deux lobes du segment
median, segments 2-5 formant un fuseau, le 2^ un peu plus long
que le 1^^ graduellement elargi, grossierement cannele en avant,
finement strie dans le reste, de moitie plus long que large, 3«
a peine transversal, egalant les deux suivants reunis, finement
ride en long et ponctue, 4« et 5« tres transversaux, le 4« un
peu plus long que le 5% tous deux densement ponctues, 6^ tergite
subitement aminci, beaucoup plus etroit que le 5«, formant une
queue lineaire, deprimee, pubescente, presque aussi longue que
les 3 tergites precedents reunis, cotes de Tabdomen faiblement
pubescents.
Taille: 4.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus HOPLOTELEIA Ashmead
Hoploteleia carinata Kieff .
On ne connaissait de cette espece que la femelle. Le male
differe par les antennes qui sont d'un jaune rougeatre et assez
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 293
grosses, 2« article tres petit, 3« presque deux fois aussi long que
le 2% plus long que le 4% 4-11 un peu plus gros que le 3% a peine
pus longs que gros, le 5^ avec une minime dent laterale, 12«
allonge. Tete seulement de moitie plus large que longue. Ab-
domen aussi long que le reste du corps, sculpte comme chez la
f emelle, sauf que le 3« tergite est ponctue densement, les suivants
plus finement ponctues, le 7« tres court, tronque en arriere, avec
une minime dent a chaque angle posterieur. Metatarse poste-
rieur grossi. Pubescence du corps faible, peu apparente, jau-
natre.
Taille : 4 mm.
Localites: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos, Mont Maquiling.
Genus DILAPITHA novum
Voisin de Neuroteleia Kieif., dont il differe surtout par la
presence des sillons parapsidaux. Le type est D. albipes sp.
nov.
1. Thorax brun noir, brillant D. nitida sp. nov.
Thorax roux mat, avec une bande longitudinale d'un brun noir.
D. albipes sp. nov.
Dilapitha albipes sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir; thorax roux, lobe median du mesonotum sauf Textre-
mite anterieure, scutellum, metanotum et milieu du segment
median noirs, hanches posterieures et toutes les pattes blan-
chatres, les hanches anterieures brunes, mandibules rousses,
antennes d'un brun noir, scape blanc sale, sauf Textremite.
Tete presque deux fois aussi large que longue, densement striee
ou ridee en travers sur le dessus. Yeux glabres, margines au
cote median. Joues petites, striees, avec un sillon. Antennes
greles, filiformes, scape a peine plus gros que le flagellum, 2«
article globuleux, 3-6 subegaux, cylindriques, trois fois aussi
longs que gros, les suivants graduellement raccourcis, le 10«
de moitie plus long que gros, flagellum pubescent. Thorax un
peu plus long que haut. Pronotum non visible d'en haut. Me-
sonotum transversal, mat, tres finement ponctue ou chagrine
comme le scutellum, sillons parapsidaux percurrents, faiblement
divergents en avant. Scutellum separe du mesonotum par une
ligne crenelee, arrondi en arriere. Metanotum arme de deux
petites dents separees par une incision arquee. Segment median
graduellement declive. Ailes depassant Tabdomen, pubescentes,
ciliees, faiblement teintees, nervures pales, sous-costale proche du
bord, marginale tres courte, stigmatique longue, oblique, deux
294 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
fois aussi longue que la marginale, radius oblique, trois fois
aussi long que la stigmatique, formant avec la postmarginale
une longue cellule radiale fermee, basale arquee, formant avec
la mediane une cellule basale fermee, deux autres nervures longi-
tudinales parcourent la moitie distale de Taile. Abdomen depri-
me, a peine plus long que le reste du corps, arrondi en arriere,
spatule, petiole a bords paralleles, a peine transversal, 2® seg-
ment allonge, graduellement elargi, tous deux stries en long et
avec des fossettes le long du bord anterieur, 3® tergite transver-
sal, a peine plus courte que le 2^ mat et ponctue densement
comme les trois suivants.
Taille: 2.5 mm.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos.
Dilapitha nitida sp. nov. {$ .)
Noir; thorax brun noir, mandibules devant du scape et pattes
d'un jaune sale, hanches d'un brun jaune. Tete aussi large que
le thorax, tres transversale, glabre, brillante, grossierement
striee en travers. Tempes etroites, lisses et finement ponctuees.
Joues egalant le tiers des yeux, striees en eventail, une arete va
de Tocelle externe, le long du bord interne de Toeil, et traverse
ensuite la joue jusqu'aux mandibules, entre les antennes se
trouve une fine carene qui se prolonge encore en arriere. Front
a peine deprime, avec des stries arquees et transversales mais
sans fossette. Yeux glabres. Ocelles posterieurs situes contre
les yeux. Scape subcylindrique, un peu plus long que les deux
suivants reunis, 2® obconique, guere plus long que gros, 3-12
cylindriques, pubescents, graduellement raccourcis, le 3® pres-
que trois fois aussi long que gros, 11« pas deux fois aussi long
que gros, plus court que le 12% le 5^ avec une petite dent avant
le milieu. Thorax a peine plus long que haut, pronotum non
visible d'en haut, mesonotum transversal, fortement convexe,
brillant et tres finement ponctue comme le scutellum, lobe
median un peu moins large en arriere que les lateraux, sillons
parapsidaux convergents faiblement en arriere. Scutellum
transversal, separe du mesonotum par une rangee de fossettes,
des fossettes semblables sont alignees le long de son bord poste-
rieur. Metanotum petit, cannele, les deux dents petites et rap-
prochees. Segment median transversal. Propleures avec un
espace elliptique borde en avant de fossettes alignees, mesopleures
bordees en arriere de fossettes alignees. Ailes un peu brunies,
depassant beaucoup Tabdomen, sous-costale distante du bord,
basale oblique, distante de la marginale de sa longueur, marginale
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 295
deux fois aussi longue que large, n'ayant que la moitie de la
stigmatique qui est oblique et noueuse au bout, postmarginale
deux a trois fois aussi longue que la stigmatique, radius oblique,
atteignant le bord un peu en arriere de la postmarginale, recur-
rente, courte, continuant la direction du radius, anale percur-
rente. Abdomen deprime, a peine plus long que le reste du
corps, spatule, petiole un peu transversal, cannele, a fossettes
en avant, 2« tergite graduellement elargi, un peu plus long que
le 3®, strie, avec des fossettes en avant, 3^ a peine plus court
que les 3 suivants reunis, ponctue densement comme les suivants,
tous les tergites transversaux.
Taille : ^ , 2.5 mm.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus APEGUS Foerster
Apegus maquilingensis sp. nov. ( 9 .)
Noir mat; antennes et pattes sauf les hanches d'un jaune
vitellin. Tete un peu transversale, a ponctuation eparse et super-
ficielle. Yeux glabres. Ocelles posterieurs distants des yeux de
moins de leur diametre. Joues striees, separees de la face par un
sillon. Fosse frontale profonde, lisse, brillante, marginee, trois
fois aussi large que sa distance du bord oculaire. Article 2^ des
antennes a peine plus long que gros, 3« deux fois aussi long que
gros, obconique comme le 4«, et un peu plus long que lui, 2-4
egalement minces, les suivants distinctement grossis, le 5® obco-
nique, un peu plus long que gros, 6-12 subglobuleux ou un peu
transversaux et bien separes. Thorax peu convexe, chagrine
dorsalement. Sillons parapsidaux percurrents, divergents en
avant. Scutellum separe du mesonotum par un sillon, son bord
posterieur arrondi et precede de gros points alignes. Metano-
tum inerme. Ailes legerement jaunatres, nervures pales, sous-
costale eloignee du bord, marginale petite, presque ponctiforme,
stigmatique longue, oblique, noueuse au bout, postmarginale deux
fois aussi longue que la stigmatique. Abdomen un peu plus long
que le reste du corps, deprime, presque d'egale largeur sauf aux
deux extremites qui sont un peu moins larges, les trois premiers
tergites graduellement plus longs, 1^^ et 2« stries, avec des
fossettes le long du bord anterieur, transversaux, 3« presque
aussi long que large, mat et densement ponctue comme les
suivants qui sont transversaux.
Taille: 3.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
296 • ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Genus CAMPTOTELEIA Kieffer
Les especes dont se compose ce genre se repartissent de la
fa^on suivante:
1. Front sans impression; metanotum a deux dents aignes et se touchant
presque a la base C. carinata Kieff.
Front avec une profonde impression; metanotum avec une dent unique
excavee dorsalement 2.
2. Dent du metanotum longue, egalant les deux tiers du scutellum.
C. magna sp. nov.
Dent du metanotum petite, large, un peu transversale 3.
3. Mesonotum et scutellum grossierement rides en tr avers.
C. flavipennis sp. nov.
Mesonotum et scutellum brillants et lisses, a points epars et fins 4.
4. Ailes brunes, abdomen aminci graduellement et fortement en arriere, 2e
tergite reticule, 3-7 stries, sans ponctuation C. excavata Kieff.
Ailes subhyalines, abdomen faiblement aminci en arriere, tergites 2-7
grossierement ponctues entre les aretes C. cupularis sp. nov.
Camptoteleia magna sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir; mandibules jaunes, antennes sauf la massue, hanches
et pattes d'un jaune sale, tarse posterieur brun. Tete, vue
d'en haut, subglobuleuse, a peine transversale, grossierement
ridee en travers, intervalles des rides formant des gros points
ocelles. Yeux grands, glabres ; ocelles en triangle, les posterieurs
touchent les yeux. Vertex depuis Tocelle poster ieure jusqu'a
Texeavation frontale formant un espace deux fois aussi long
que large, a bords paralleles ; bord posterieur du vertex margine
en arc comme le bord posterieur des yeux, puis declive oblique-
ment en arriere, cette partie oblique a gros points ocelles.
Tempes graduellement et fortement elargies par en bas, leur
bord posterieur aigu et margine. Joues ayant le tiers de la
longueur des yeux, avec un large sillon. Excavation frontale
profonde, plus de quatre fois aussi large que sa distance du bord
oculaire, lisse et brillant, sa partie superieure striee en arc
transversalement, son extremite superieure arquee et marginee.
Antennes avec une massue de sept articles, scape aussi long que
les trois articles suivants reunis, 2^ article deux fois aussi long
que gros, 3« de moitie plus long que le 2^, 4® plus court que le
2«, 5® un peu plus court que le 3^ et a peine plus gros, 6-12
subitement grossis et serres, le 6« moins gros que les suivants,
qui sont un peu transversaux, sauf le dernier. Pronotum nul
au milieu, le bord dorsal du prothorax etant forme par le col,
situe plus bas que le mesonotum ; celui-ci un peu allonge, brillant,
pubescent, a points epars et fins, arete mediane traversant
IX, D, 3 Kieifer: Enumeration des Serphides 297
encore le scutellum, sillons parapsidaux divergents en arriere.
Scutellum grand, atteignant presque la demi-longueur du
mesonotum, arrondi en arriere et ponctue comme le mesonotum,
bord posterieur releve, tranchant et separe du disque par un
enfoncement en forme de gouttiere, qui est traverse par de
courtes aretes longitudinales. Metanotum tres court, parcouru
par des aretes, armee d'une dent horizontale, longue, atteignant
les deux tiers du scutellum, graduellement amincie et profonde-
ment excavee dorsalement. Segment median court, parcouru par
des aretes, divise au milieu, jusqu'a sa base, en deux lobes.
Pleures ridees en long, mesopleures tres excavees, propleures
avec un long espace elliptique margine. Ailes jaunes, atteignant
le segment anal, sous-costale eloignee du bord, marginale ponc-
tif orme, postmarginale nulle, stigmatique oblique, longue, noueuse
au bout. Abdomen un peu plus long que le reste du corps, aussi
large que le thorax, graduellement aminci en arriere, compose
de 6 segments transversaux, sauf le 6« qui est triangulaire, et
aussi long que large, les trois premiers graduellement plus longs,
stries en long comme les autres.
Taille : $ , 6 mm.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Camptoteleia flavipeimis sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir; scape, hanches et pattes jaunes. Tete sans arete
transversale en arriere des ocelles, non declive obliquement en
arriere mais decoupee en arc, grossierement ridee-ponctuee,
vertex ridee en travers, joues a sillon, yeux non margines,
fossette frontale comme chez le precedent mais non striee.
Antennes filiformes; scape un peu plus long que les articles
2 et 3 reunis, lisse et glabre comme le 2«, les suivants pubescents
et mats, le 3^ un peu plus long que le 2^, 4-11 cylindriques,
aussi longs que le 2« mais plus gros, a peine aussi longs que
gros, le 5^ avec une minime dent au milieu du bord exteme,
12^ plus long que le 11®. Thorax conforme comme chez le
precedent, sauf la sculpture et la dent du metanotum; sa
partie dorsale est ^grossierement ridee en travers, la dent du
metanotum est petite, large, un peu transversale, excavee dorsale-
ment et cupuliforme. Ailes jaunes, atteignant le segment
anal, nervures brunes, conformees comme chez le precedent.
Abdomen a peine plus long que le reste du corps, graduellement
et fortement aminci en arriere a partir du milieu, les deux
derniers segments n'ayant pas la demi-largeur du second, le
premier strie, les suivants grossierement reticules, 3^ et 4^ aussi
298 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
longs que larges, les autres transversaux, 6^ et 7^ deux fois aussi
larges que longs, sans appendices.
Taille : $ , 3.8 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios.
Camptoteleia cupularis sp. no v. ( ^ .)
Noir ; scape, hanches et pattes d'un jaune pale, antennes brunes,
tarse posterieur assombri. Tete grossierement ponctuee, les
points non ocelles, vertex ride en travers. Article 3« des antennes
deux fois aussi long que le 2^ distinctement plus long que le
4% 4-12 cylindriques, un peu allonges, subegaux sauf le 12«
qui est plus long que le 9«. Mesonotum et scutellum brillants,
a points epars et fins, dent du metanotum cupuliforme comme
chez le precedent. Ailes subhyalines, nervures jaunes. Abdomen
de moitie plus long que le reste du corps, tergites stries en
long, 2-7 non lisses et brillants entre les aretes mais grossiere-
ment ponctues et mats, le 3« le plus long, faiblement allonge,
2® et 8« aussi long que larges, les autres transversaux, le 7«
tronque, avec une dent a peine perceptible a chaque angle
posterieur.
Taille : ^ , 5.5 mm. Pour le reste, semblable au precedent.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus MACROTELEIA Westwood
Les representants de ce genre dans les lies Philippines se
distinguent comme il suit:
1. Scutellum muni, en arriere, de deux bouquets de longs polls blancs, ligne
dorsale du 6^ tergite fortement arquee M. manilensis Ashm.
Scutellum sans bouquets de polls, ligne dorsale du 6^ tergite droite 2.
2. Thorax densement pubescent dorsalement et mat; impression frontale
tres faible, mate et ponctuee sauf le centre, 7^ tergite depassant de
moitie le 7© sternite M. superans sp. nov.
Thorax presque glabre, impression frontale profonde, lisse et brillante.. 3.
3. Postmarginale guere plus longue que la marginale, 2e et 3^ tergites de la
$ d'egale longueur.... M. crawfordi Kieff. (M. kiefferi Crawf. non Brues).
Postmarginale au moins deux fois aussi longue que la marginale 4.
4. Impression frontale moins large que sa distance des yeux, tete et meso-
hotum densement ponctues, 6^ tergite de la ? comprime et plus long
que le 5e M. striativentris Crawf.
Impression frontale au moins deux fois aussi large que sa distance des
yeux, 6e tergite de la ? deprime comme les autres, plus court que le 5^,
tous deux transversaux 5.
5. Tete lisse, a ponctuation superficielle, eparse et peu distincte.
M. philippinensis Kieff.
Tete k points gros et serres M. cavifrons sp. nov.
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 299
Macroteleia superans sp. nov. ( S .)
Noir, mat; scape, hanches et pattes d'un jaune clair, reste des
antennes d'un jaune brunatre. Tete de moitie plus large que
longue, pubescente, ponctuee densement et assez finement, tempes
ridees en long ou reticulees. Fossette frontale remplacee par
une faible depression non marginee, moins large que sa distance
des yeux, mate et ponctuee, sauf un petit espace lisse au centre.
Joues a sillon, mesurant le quart des yeux, ceux-ci glabres.
Ocelles posterieurs distants de Toeil de leur diametre. Scape
un peu arque, a peine plus court que les articles 2 et 3 r^unis,
2« un peu plus mince que les suivants, obconique, deux f ois aussi
long que gros, 3« trois fois aussi long que gros, 4-11 cylindriques,
allonges mais moins que le 2^, le 5^ avec une dent laterale, 12«
plus long que le 11«. Thorax dorsalement plus fortement pubes-
cent de gris que la tete, de sorte que sa ponctuation, qui est plus
fine que celle de la tete, est a peine perceptible. Pronotum aussi
eleve que le mesonotum, profondement decoupe au milieu et
seulement ponctiforme a cet endroit. Mesonotum allonge, sillons
parapsidaux percurrents, tres divergents en avant. Ailes un peu
jaunatres, nervures jaunes, marginale aussi longue ou a peine
plus longue que la stigmatique, postmarginale presque triple de
la stigmatique, celle-ci oblique, longue, noueuse au bout. Segment
median glabre, ride en long, tronque posterieurement, sans inci-
sion et sans dents. Pleures subglabres, rugueuses, mesopleures
cannelees superieurement, enfoncees, lisses et brillantes dans la
moitie inferieure. Metatarse plus de deux fois aussi long que
le 2« article, egalant les 3 suivants reunis. Abdomen presque
deux fois aussi long que le reste du corps, fusiforme, les 7
tergites allonges, le 1«^ d'un tiers plus long que large, 2« un
peu plus court que le 3% qui est deux fois aussi long que large, 4«
a peine plus court que le 2% plus long que le 1«^ 5® plus long
que le 6% un peu plus court que le 4% 6^ egal au 1^% 7® mince,
en pointe triangulaire, un peu plus long que large; vu de cote
le 7® tergite depasse de sa demi-longueur le 7® sternite; les 4
premiers tergites sont stries en long, 5® faiblement ride en
long, 6® et 7^ mats et chagrines, vus de cote, leur ligne dorsale
est droite.
Taille: $, 6.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Macroteleia eavifrons sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir, brillant; scape, hanches et pattes d'un jaune sale, tarse
posterieur noir. Tete presque deux fois aussi large que longue.
300 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
avec des points gros et denses, sauf dans la fossette du front,
qui est profonde, lisse, et atteignant presque les yeux. Joues
tres petites, avec un sillon. Ocelles en triangle, les posterieurs
sont distants des yeux de moins de leur diametre. Thorax con-
forme comme chez le precedent, sauf la sculpture; mesonotum
presque lisse, avec une ponctuation tres fine et peu distincte,
bord anterieur a gros points alignes, sillons parapsidaux
divergents en avant. Scutellum transversal, presque lisse.
Metanotum grossierement sculpte, egalant le tiers du scutellum.
Segment median petit, decoupe, les angles en forme de petite
dent. Propleures avec Tespace elliptique ordinaire. Ailes
hyalines, marginale egalant la stigmatique, atteignant le tiers
de la postmarginale, stigmatique oblique, longue, avec un noeud
au bout. Metatarse posterieur egalant au moins les 4 articles
suivants reunis. Abdomen a peine deux fois aussi long que le
reste du corps, f usiforme, les 5 premiers tergites grossierement
stries en long, 6® et 7® chagrines et mats, tous deprimes, le 1^"^
un peu allonge, plus court que le 2^, 2-4 subegaux, au moins
aussi longs que larges, 5® et 6® a peine transversaux, 7® tres
petit.
Taille : $ , 6 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos.
Macroteleia flaviceps sp. nov. {$ *)
Noir ; tete jaune et mate, alentours des ocelles assombris, scape,
hanches, pattes et thorax sauf le dessus d'un jaune mat,
milieu des tergites 2-4 et des sternites 2-4 d'un jaune roussatre,
flagellum brun. Tete decoupee en arc posterieurement, grosse,
un peu transversale, lisse ou a peine chagrinee. Tempes tres
larges, aussi larges que les yeux. Joues egalant les deux tiers
des yeux, traversees par un sillon. Ocelles posterieurs touchant
presque les yeux. Scape aussi long que les trois articles suivants
reunis, articles 2 et 3 obconiques, au moins de moitie plus longs
que gros, 4-11 egaux, cylindriques, a peine plus longs que
gros, le 5^ un peu grossi, le 4® un peu plus court que le 6®,
12« faiblement allonge. Mesonotum plan, allonge, mat, pubes-
cent, avec une ponctuation mediocre et dense, sillons parapsidaux
percurrents, f ortement convergents en arriere. Scutellum trans-
versal, sculpte comme le mesonotum, tronque en arriere, borde
posterieurement par des fossettes. Metanotum a peine visible.
Segment median horizontal, transversal, tronque en arriere.
Ailes subhyalines, atteignant le milieu du 4^ tergite, sous-costale
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 301
eloignee du bord, marginale plus longue que la stigmatique,
celle-ci oblique, mediocrement longue, noueuse au bout, post-
marginale presque triple de la stigmatique, basale nuUe. Meta-
tarse posterieur un peu plus court que les 4 articles suivants
reunis. Abdomen deux fois et demie aussi long que le reste
du corps, plus etroit que le thorax, presque lineaire, sauf que
les 3 derniers segments sont un peu plus etroits, tous allonges,
1-3 graduellement plus longs, le 3* deux fois aussi long que
large, tous trois stries, leurs bords lateraux avec une arete
marginale plus forte, 4^ egal au 2«, 5-7 graduellement raccourcis,
rides en long ou finement chagrines et pubescents.
Taille: 4.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
DIAPRIID.ZE
Genus PARAMESITJS Westwood
Paramesius luzonicus sp. nov. ( S >)
Noir, lisse et brillant ; flagellum roux brun, mat et pubescent,
mandibules, hanches et pattes d'un roux sombre, palpes blan-
chatres. Tete un peu transversale vue d'en haut, plus haute
que longue vue de cote, sans ponctuation. Yeux glabres. Joues
sans sillon. Palpes maxillaires ayant apres la flexion 3 articles
dont le 1^^ est tres petit, le 2« comprime et triangulaire, tous
deux reunis aussi longs que celui qui precede la flexion, le dernier
un peu plus long que Tavant-dernier. Antennes aussi longues
que le corps, scape cylindrique, egalant le 3« article, le 2^ glabre,
brillant, globuleux, mince comme les suivants, 3^ quatre fois aussi
long que le 2^, 3-13 graduellement amincis et raccourcis, le 12® plus
de deux fois aussi long que gros, egal au 13^ Sillons parapsidaux
percurrents, divergents en avant, lobe median du mesonotum un
peu plus large en arriere que les lobes lateraux, ceux-ci f aiblement
deprimes, avec une fossette allongee pres du bord externe.
Scutellum avec deux fossettes separees par une arete. Segment
median avec une dent pointue mais petite. Ailes faiblement
brunies, depassant un peu Tabdomen, brievement ciliees, sous-
costale atteignant le milieu, marginale guere plus longue que
large, stigmatique oblique, egale a la marginale, recurrente
indiquee par une trace, basale indiquee par un trait a peine
perceptible, arque et distant de la marginale de moins de sa
longueur. Thorax brievement ovoidal, guere plus long que haut.
Tiers distal du tibia posterieur subitement grossi. Petiole
302 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
egalant la demi-longueur de rabdomen, trois fois aussi long
que gros, cannele; abdomen en ellipse allongee, deprime, gra-
duellement aminci en avant jusqu'au petiole, 2^ tergite occupant
les t, 2« sternite occupant les f de Tabdomen.
Taille: 3.6 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus SPILOMICRUS Westwood
Ce genre comprenait 5 especes dans les lies Philippines ; nous
y ajoutons une sixieme.
1. Sillons parapsidaux percurrents 2.
Sillons parapsidaux nuls ou marques seulement en arriere, tete sans
ponctuation 3.
2. Tempes et joues ponctuees S. carinifrons Kieff.
Tete sans ponctuation S. philippinensis sp. nov.
3. Scutellum ayant, outre les 2 fossettes basales, une fossette laterale
allongee et une rangee de points au bord posterieur 4.
Scutellum sans fossettes laterales ni posterieures ; sillons parapsidaux
formant seulement un point allonge S. variicornis Kieff.
4. Yeux relies aux mandibules par un sillon, sillons parapsidaux marques
au tiers posterieur S. opertus Kieif.
Yeux non relies aux mandibules par un sillon, les sillons parapsidaux
forment seulement un point allonge au bord posterieur 5.
5. Flagellum roux brun, tergites ne couvrant pas les sternites.
S. dispansus Kieff.
Flagellum noir brillant et plus gros, tergites couvrant les sternites.
S. nitidicornis Kieff.
Spilomicrus philippinensis sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir; flagellum brun noir, hanches et pattes d'un jaune bru-
natre. Tete non ponctuee, lisse comme le reste du corps. Yeux
velus. Antennes filiformes, 2^ article globuleux, 3^ plus court
que le scape, presque trois fois aussi long que gros, 4« non
echancre, 12« encore deux fois aussi long que gros, plus court
que le 13«; pubescence fine. Sillons parapsidaux percurrents,
fortement divergents en avant. Scutellum avec 2 fossettes ba-
sales separees par une arete, fossettes laterales petites et minces.
Segment median avec une petite dent pointue. Ailes ciliees,
sous-costale parallele a la costale, depassant un peu le tiers basal
de Taile, marginale pas plus longue que large, stigmatique
oblique, un peu plus longue que la marginale, basale faiblement
marquee, arquee. Petiole presque deux fois aussi long que gros,
strie; abdomen deprime, en ellipse, releve a sa base, d6passe de
beaucoup par les ailes.
Taille: 2 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos.
IX, D, 3 Kieifer: Enumey^ation des Serphides 303
Genus DIGALESUS novum
Semblable a Galesus, dont il differe par le scape non bispinu-
leux, par les antennes de 13 articles et les ailes pourvues d'une
sous-costale, d'une marginale et d'une stigmatique. Le type est :
Digalesus flavipes sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir, lisse et brillant, flagellum brun sombre et pubescent,
pattes jaunes, hanches assombries, moitie posterieure des tempes,
devant du prothorax et metapleures, avec un f eutrage blanchatre.
Tete allongee, presque droite dessus et dessous, declive presque
verticalement en avant, plus longue dorsalement que haute, ven-
tralement encore plus longue et prolongee en un bee forme par les
mandibules et atteignant le prosternum; vertex avec 2 aretes
longitudinales qui atteignent les ocelles, ceux-ci groupes en
triangle, se touchant et situes au bord anterieur de la tete; une
carene mediane descend de Tocelle anterieur j usque entre les an-
tennes en s'elevant graduellement, Tarete qui contourne le bord
des yeux se prolonge en carene parallele a la carene mediane et
s'arrete brusquement en forme de dent, comme la mediane ; lamelle
f rontale prolongee encore au-dela de la tete, bilobee et portant les
antennes. Scape long, un peu arque, subcylindrique, sans spi-
nules a son extremite, a peine plus long que le 3® article, 2«
article de moitie plus long que gros, 3® presque triple du 2®, au
moins de moitie plus long que le 4% 5« un peu plus court que le
4% un peu plus long que le 6®, 6-12 egaux, cylindriques, de moitie
plus longs que gros, 13® plus long que le 12^ Pronotum profon-
dement decoupe en arriere ; mesonotum un peu transversal, sillons
parapsidaux larges, faiblement convergents en arriere, ou ils
sont distants de deux fois leur largeur. Scutellum allonge,
fossettes anterieures allongees, separees par une arete, un peu
plus courtes que les fossettes laterales, fossettes du bord poste-
rieur ponctiformes. Segment median a 3 aretes paralleles,
angles posterieurs prolonges en dent. Ailes jaunatres, costale
nulle, sous-costale brune, atteignant presque le milieu de Taile,
marginale carree, stigmatique oblique, pas plus longue que la
marginale, un trait brunatre indique une trace de recurrente
oblique, bords non cilies. Tibias graduellement et faiblement
renfles. Petiole deux fois aussi long que gros, subcylindrique,
avec 3 fortes aretes dorsales ; abdomen ellipsoidal, deprime, grand
tergite occupant un peu plus des deux tiers anterieurs, a sillon
traversant le tiers anterieur, les quatre suivants graduellement
raccourcis.
Taille: 3.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
304 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Genus HEMIGALESUS Kieffer
Les especes qui forment ce genre sont particulieres aux Phil-
ippines; elles se distinguent de la fagon suivante:
1. Les deux spinules externes de la tete sont pointues et plus longues que
larges 2.
Les deux spinules externes sont en forme de lamelle un peu transversale
et arrondie 5.
2. Mesonotum fortement convexe dans sa partie mediane, deprime ou enfonce
lateralement 3.
Mesonotum egalement convexe partout, sans depressions laterales 4.
3. Noir; face, pleures en partie, hanches et pattes rousses, tete un peu trans-
versale vue d'en haut H. niger Kieff.
Roux; abdomen noir sauf le petiole, tete un peu allongee vue d'en haut.
H. rufus Kieff.
4. Yeux deux fois aussi larges que leur distance du bord occipital.
H. brevicornis Kieff.
Yeux a peine plus larges que leur distance du bord occipital.
H. gracilis Kieff.
5. Bouche perpendiculaire au grand axe de la tete et atteignant la demi-
hauteur de la tete, 2® article antennaire du male obconique, au moins
aussi long que le 4® H. longrirostrum sp. nov.
Bouche ayant au maximum le quart ou le tiers de la hauteur de la tete,
2e article antennaire du male subglobuleux, n*atteignant que la demi-
longueur du 4« 6.
6. Bouche continuant la direction du grand axe de la tete, scape avec une
dent au milieu du cote externe, tete et thorax roux (c^).
H. dentatus sp. nov.
Bouche perpendiculaire au grand axe de la tete, scape inerme, tete et
thorax noirs (d"), ou tete noire, thorax roux (2)- H. auriculatus sp. nov.
Hemigalesus auriculatus sp. nov. ($ , ? .)
Tete noire, thorax et abdomen d'un brun noir chez le male, roux
marron chez la femelle, petiole de la femelle et pattes d'un roux
jaune, antennes d'un brun sombre chez le male, d'un roux jaune
chez la femelle. Tete subglobuleuse, spinule mediane petite, les 2
laterales en forme de lamelle un peu transversale, subarrondie.
Palpes jaunes, pluriarticules. Scape droit, bispinuleux a Textr^-
mite, sans dent au milieu du cote externe, 2« article tres court
et subglobuleux chez le male, moins gros et de moitie plus petit
que le 4«, le 3« plus long que le 4«, 4-13 cylindriques, presque de
moitie plus longs que gros, 14« de moitie plus long que le 13® et
aussi gros que lui, flagellum pubescent et mat, 3® article de la
femelle obconique, 3-9 egalement minces, 4-9 d'abord globuleux,
puis un peu transversaux, 10-12 subitement tres grossis, 10*
et 11« aussi longs que gros, cylindriques, 12® ovoidal. Bouche en
forme de bee, presque perpendiculaire au grand axe de la tete,
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 305
egalant le tiers ou le quart de la hauteur de la tete. Ocelles
situes en avant, a la limite de la surface horizontale du vertex et
du front qui est presque vertical. Tete vue de cote aussi longue
que haute. Thorax d'un tiers plus long que haut. Partie poste-
rieure des tempes et partie anterieure du prothorax avec un feu-
trage blanc. Mesonotum transversal, convexe au milieu, deprime
lateralement, de moitie plus long que le scutellum. Celui-ci trian-
gulaire, aussi large que long, avec une f ossette en avant. Segment
median avec une arete. Ailes subhyalines, depassant beaucoup
Tabdomen, ciliees longuement, sous-costale tres rapprochee du
bord, depassant un peu le tiers proximal de Taile, marginale ob-
cuneiforme, basale d'un jaune pale, double de sa distance de la
marginale, perpendiculaire mais n'atteignant pas la sous-costale.
Tibia posterieur subitement renfle au tiers distal. Petiole non
strie, aussi long que gros ; abdomen deprime, chez le male graduel-
lement elargi jusqu'a Textremite du 2« tergite, qui occupe les f
anterieurs de Tabdomen ; chez la f emelle Tabdomen est elliptique
et le grand tergite atteint presque Textremite.
Taille : 2.5 mm.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Hemigalesus dentatus sp. nov. ( $ .)
Tete, thorax et petiole d'un roux marron, abdomen brun noir,
deux premiers articles antennaires d'un roux brun, pattes d'un
jaune roux. Tete vue de cote un peu plus longue que haute, plus
longue ventralement que dorsalement, bee continuant la direction
du grand axe de la tete. Scape avec une petite dent au milieu du
cote externe. Thorax de moitie plus long que haut. Pour tout
le reste, semblable au precedent.
Taille: 2.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Hemigalesus longirostrum sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir; antennes d'un roux brun comme la bouche, hanches et
pattes d'un roux clair. Bee perpendiculaire au grand axe de la
tete, long, atteignant la demi-hauteur de la tete. Scape graduel-
lement grossi depuis sa base, sans dent au cote externe, son
extremite est deux f ois aussi grosse que le 2® article, bispinuleuse ;
2« article obconique, au moins aussi long que le 4% 3® distincte-
ment plus long que le 4^, 4-13 cylindriques, a peine plus longs
que gros, 14« plus mince que le 13« et pas plus long que lui.
Tarse posterieur comprime, ce qui est aussi le cas pour les deux
especes precedentes. Petiole un peu transversa], lisse et brillant;
306 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
terg'ites 3-6 egaux et tres courts, abdomen de la longueur du
thorax.
Taille : 2.5 mm. Pour tout le reste, semblable a H. auriculatus.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus GALESUS Curtis
Les especes de ce genre qui ont ete observees aux Philippines
se distinguent de la f agon suivante :
1. Ailes entieres, non incisees ni pliees 2.
Ailes incisees a Textremite ou en arriere de Textremite 4.
2. Pattes posterieures rousses, sauf les hanches 3.
Pattes posterieures en grande partie noires G. manilse Ashm.
3. Petiole densement pubescent de blanc, articles du flagellum du male deux
fois aussi longs que gros G. luzonicus Ashm.
Petiole glabre dorsalement, articles du flagellum du male a peine plus
longs que gros G. philippinensis Kieff.
4. Sillons parapsidaux se touchant en arriere G. clavaticornis Kieff.
Sillons parapsidaux distants en arriere 5.
5. Sillons parapsidaux distants en arriere d*un peu plus de leur largeur,
petiole du male deux fois aussi long que gros G. crawfordi Kieff.
Sillons parapsidaux distants en arriere de deux fois leur largeur, petiole
de moitie plus long que gros 6.
6. Surface dorsale de la tete plus courte que la hauteur de la tete, sillon
atteignant presque le milieu de Tabdomen G. curticeps Kieff.
Surface dorsale de la tete plus longue que la hauteur, sillon du 2® tergite
prolonge par une ligne atteignant le dernier tiers.... G. lineatus sp. nov.
Galesus (Schizogalesus) lineatus sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir, brillant, pattes sauf les hanches d'un roux clair. Tete
allongee, sa surface dorsale plus longue que sa hauteur, plus
courte que sa surface ventrale, lisse et brillante. Dents laterales
du devant de la tete assez grandes. Yeux margines en haut par
une arete. Face tres convexe, separee de Toeil par un profond
sillon, de chaque cote. Scape deux fois aussi long que gros,
ride en long, bispinuleux a Textremite, 2® article a peine plus long
que le 3®, tous deux cylindriques, un peu plus longs que gros,
4« et 5^ aussi longs que gros, 2-5 egalement gros, 6® a peine plus
gros que le 5«, mais un peu moins que le 7«, presque transversal,
7-11 transversaux, 12® ovoi'dal, pas de massue distincte ou mas-
sue de 6 ou 7 articles ; flagellum pubescent. Collier du prothorax
et feutrage des tempes d'un gris sombre. Sillons parapsidaux
profonds, divergents en avant, distants de deux fois leur largeur
au bord posterieur. Fossettes du scutellum separees par une
arete, un peu allongees, mais moins longues que les fossettes
laterales, les 2 fossettes posterieures ponctif ormes. Ailes un peu
brunies, pliees, echancrees en arriere de la pointe alaire. Tibia
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 307
posterieur graduellement et faiblement grossi dans sa moiti^
distale, metatarse posterieur pas deux fois aussi long que le 2«
article. Petiole de moitie plus long que gros, cannele grossiere-
ment, 2^ tergite occupant presque tout le dessus de Tabdomen,
sillon traversant le tiers anterieur du grand tergite, prolonge
ensuite par une fine ligne jusqu'a Textremite du 2« tiers; a sa
base se voit de chaque cote une petite f ossette ; le 2^ tergite couvre
encore de chaque cote un quart de la largeur des sternites 2-5
et une partie du 6^, dorsalement il couvre les tergites 3-5.
Taille : 3.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos.
Genus STYLOPRIA novum
Differe de Phsenopria surtout par les yeux poilus et le scape,
dont la moitie proximale est filiforme et la moitie distale subite-
ment grossie tres fortement. Le type est:
Stylopria rufa sp. nov. ( $ .)
Roux clair; antennes a massue d'un brun noir, abdomen noir,
tiers posterieur brun roux sombre. Tete globuleuse, lisse et
brillante comme tout le corps, large comme le thorax. Yeux
glabres, circulaires. Bouche non proeminente. Palpes tres
courts, non proeminents. Bord posterieur des tempes avec une
pubescence soyeuse. Scape a moitie distale subitement grossie,
trois fois aussi grosse que la moitie basale qui est filiforme, 2®
article obconique, deux fois aussi gros que le 3^ 3-9 egalement
minces, obconiques, sauf le 9« qui est subglobuleux, 10-12 for-
mant une massue subite et grosse, 10^ subglobuleux, 11® transver-
sal et plus gros que le 10®, 12® brievement ovoi'dal. Thorax un
peu plus long que haut. Prothorax avec un collier de feutrage
blanc, interrompu en haut. Mesonotum transversal, convexe,
sans sillons parapsidaux. Scutellum convexe, sans fossette a
sa base. Segment median avec une faible carene. Ailes de-
passant beaucoup Tabdomen, longuement ciliees, hyalines, sous-
costale formant le bord, depassant un peu le tiers basal, margi-
nale obcuneiforme, de son extremite elargie part une trace de
la basale dirigee obliquement vers la base alaire et fortement
courbee en angle au milieu, une trace semblable ou ligne jaunatre
indique une mediane eloignee du bord, arquee, graduellement
rapprochee du bord a son extremite qui aboutit a la base de la
marginale. Aile inferieure lineaire, sauf que son bord anterieur
est releve triangulairement a Tendroit des crochets frenaux,
cils inferieurs deux fois aussi longs que la largeur de Taile.
Tibia posterieur subitement grossi au tiers distal. Petiole aussi
124685 8
308 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
long que gros, pubescent de gris ; abdomen a peine deprime, f usi-
forme, aussi long que le reste du corps, 2« tergite occupant les
deux tiers anterieurs, 5® tergite egalant le 3« et le 4« reunis,
extremite de Tabdomen en pointe.
Taille: 1.2 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos.
Genus ASHMEADOPRIA Kieffer
Quatre especes de ce genre reviennent aux Philippines; elles
se distinguent comme il suit:
1. Yeux poilus A. (?) trichota sp. nov.
Yeux glabres 2.
2. Scutellum carene ^ 3.
Scutellum convexe, non carene 4.
3. Petiole pas plus long que gros, verticilles antennaires atteignant Textre-
mite de Particle suivant (c?) A. bakeri Kieff.
Petiole de moitie plus long que gros (?) A. subcarinata sp. nov.
Petiole deux fois aussi long que gros, verticilles antennaires atteignant la
massue du 2® article suivant (c?) A. luzonica sp. nov.
4. Scutellum a fossette unique, tete et thorax noirs A. nigriventris Kieff.
Scutellum a 2 fossettes ponctiformes et tres distantes, tete et thorax
noirs A. bipunctata Kieff.
Ashmeadopria luzonica sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir, brillant; antennes, hanches et pattes rousses, moitie
basale du scape et massue des articles 4-13 un peu obscurcies.
Yeux glabres. Antennes de moitie plus longues que le corps, 3«
article cylindrique, aussi long que le 4% a 2 verticilles de poils,
4-13 avec une massue deux fois aussi longue que grosse, petiole
au moins aussi long que la massue, mais graduellement rac-
courci et massue graduellement allongee, au 14® article le petiole
est tres court, verticilles longs, atteignant la massue du 2« article
suivant. Prothorax a collier de feutrage blanc. Mesonotum
convexe partout. Scutellum carene, avec une fossette unique.
Segment median avec une lamelle triangulaire. Ailes hyalines,
longuement ciliees, depassant de beaucoup Tabdomen, marginale
comme d'ordinaire, n'atteignant pas Textremite du tiers basal,
de son extremite distale part une trace de la basale jaune brisee
en angle au milieu. Petiole deux fois aussi long que gros, lisse,
brillant, sauf sur les cotes qui ont des poils soyeux blancs, longs,
denses et dresses; abdomen en ellipse allongee, deprime, grand
tergite atteignant presque Textremite.
Taille: 2 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
IX, D. 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 309
Ashmeadopria bipunctata Kieff .
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Get insecte n'etait connu que de Los Baiios; la femelle reste
encore a decouvrir.
Ashmeadopria subcarinata sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir; antennes rousses, sauf la massue, hanches et pattes
jaunes. Tete globuleuse. Scape cylindrique, 2« article 6gal au
3®, obconique, 4-7 egalement minces, pas plus longs que gros,
retrecis basalement, 8-12 formant une massue graduelle, aussi
longs que gros, sauf le 12® qui est ovoidal et plus long, pubescence
tres fine et tres courte. Tempes, devant du prothorax et m^ta-
pleures avec un feutrage blanc. Scutellum a peine caren6,
fossette unique. Ailes depassant beaucoup Tabdomen, ciliees
longuement, nervation ordinaire de ce genre. Tiers distal du
tibia posterieur subitement grossi. Petiole de moitie plus long
que gros, sa moitie posterieure porte dorsalement un feutrage
blanc, dense et long; abdomen un peu plus long que le thorax,
deprime, en ellipse, 2® tergite occupant plus des deux tiers
anterieurs, extremite un peu en pointe.
Taille: 1.8 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Ashmeadopria (?) trichota sp. nov. ( $ .)
Se distingue de tous ses congendres par les yeux a poils longs
et epars. Roux; antennes et pattes d'un roux plus pale, deux
derniers articles antennaires noirs, abdomen brun au milieu.
Tete globuleuse. Tempes, devant du prothorax et metapleures,
avec un feutrage blanc et dense. Scape subcylindrique, arque,
aussi long que les 3 articles suivants reunis, 2® article de moitie
plus long que le 3® et plus gros que lui, tous deux obconiques,
4« obconique, un peu plus court que le 3«, un peu plus long
que gros, 5-9 a peine plus longs que gros, 3-9 egalement minces,
a poils egalant leur grosseur, 10« bien plus gros que le 9« mais
bien moins gros que le 11% ovoidal, 11« et 12« tres gros, finement
pubescents, le 12« ovoidal court, le 11® a peine transversal. Meso-
notum convexe, transversal, sans sillons. Scutellum carene, avec
une fossette en avant. Ailes hyalines, depassant I'abdomen,
longuement ciliees, nervation ordinaire. Tibia posterieur subite-
ment renfle au tiers distal. Petiole subglabre dorsalement, de
moitie plus long que gros; abdomen deprime, aussi long que le
thorax, en ellipse allongee, 2« tergite occupant les deux tiers
anterieurs, tiers posterieur graduellement aminci.
Taille: 2 mm.
Localite : Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
310 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Genus TRICHOPKIA Ashmead
Les especes de ce genre qui ont ete observees aux Philippines
se distinguent comme il suit :
1. Thorax roux 2.
Thorax noir comme la tete et Tabdomen 3.
2. Tete et quart posterieur de Tabdomen roux T. analis Kieff.
Tete et abdomen noirs, sauf le petiole T. semirufa Kieff.
3. Scutellum avec deux fossettes T. maquilingensis sp. nov.
Scutellum avec une fossette unique T. caudata Kieff.
Trichopria maquilingensis sp. nov. ( ^ .)
Noir, brillant ; 2 premiers articles antennaires roux, hanches et
pattes jaunes. Tete globuleuse. Scape cylindrique, un peu plus
court que les articles 2 et 3 reunis, 2® obconique, egal au 5%
3« cylindrique, un peu plus long que le 4^ presque deux fois
aussi long que le 5®, 4^ arque fortement, grossi a Textremite,
plus long que le 5% 5-13 un peu plus longs que gros, sub-
cylindriques, a poils epars, egalant en longueur les f de la
grosseur des articles, 14« article un peu plus long que le 13«.
Scutellum convexe, avec 2 fossettes distantes de leur largeur.
Ailes hyalines, depassant beaucoup Tabdomen, ciliees longuement,
pubescentes sauf aux alentours de la sous-costale, marginale
comme d'ordinaire, de son extremite sort une ligne jaune et
perpendiculaire. Tibia posterieur subitement grossi au tiers
distale. Petiole pubescent, de moitie plus long que gros ; abdomen
deprime, elliptique.
Taille: 1.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Genus SCAPOPRIA Kieff er
Scapopria atriceps Kiejff.
Get insecte, dont le male est encore a decouvrir, n'etait connu
que pour Los Bafios. M. Baker vient aussi de le decouvrir au
Mont Maquiling, tres pres a Los Bafios.
BELYTID^
Genus XENOTOMA Foerster
Une espece etait connue pour Los Bafios; nous y ajoutons
une seconde.
1. Pattes blanchatres, abdomen droi.t X. philippinensis Kieff.
Pattes d'un roux brun, abdomen recourbe au bout X. sorer sp. nov.
Xenotoma soror sp. nov. ( $ .)
Noir; mandibules rousses et se croisant, antennes d'un brun
noir, scape noir, pattes d'un roux brun. Antennes filiformes,
IX, D, 3 Kieffer: Enumeration des Serphides 311
scape plus long que le 3« article, 2« article globuleux, 3« quatre
fois aussi long que gros, 3-14 graduellement raccourcis, le 14«
un peu plus long que gros, plus court que le 15«. Cellule
radiale fermee, tres mince, deux fois et demie aussi longue que
large, beaucoup plus courte que la postmarginale, stigmatique
oblique et tres courte, recurrente plus longue que la marginale,
continuant la direction du radius, puis dirigee par en bas, margi-
nale un peu plus courte que la cellule radiale. Petiole presque
deux fois aussi long que gros, strie; abdomen aussi mince a la
base que le petiole, piriforme, grand tergite occupant les |, le
dernier i forme une pointe conique recourbee par en haut.
Taille: 2 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Genus CINETUS Jurine
Cinetus maquilingensis sp. nov. { S .)
Noir; mandibules rousses, antennes d'un brun noir, pattes
anterieures d'un jaune clair, sauf les trochanters et les hanches,
les quatre pattes posterieures brunes sauf les hanches. Anten-
nes filiformes, 2« article subglobuleux, 3® plus long que le 1®^ et
le 2« reunis, fortement decoupe au tiers distal, renfle a Textre-
mite, un peu plus long que le 4^ les suivants graduellement
raccourcis, les derniers encore trois fois aussi longs que gros.
Ailes hyalines, marginale plus longue que la cellule radiale qui
est etroite, fermee et a peine plus longue que la moitie de la
postmarginale, stigmatique tres courte, recurrente presque double
de la cellule radiale, dirigee par en bas des son origine, parallele
a la basale. Petiole fortement strie, deux fois et deniie a trois
fois aussi long que gros, egalant au moins la moitie de Tabdomen
qui est deprime, brievement fusiforme, strie a sa base, ou il
passe insensiblement au petiole, sans separation bien distincte.
Taille: 2.5 mm.
Localite: Luzon, Laguna, Mont MaquiHng.
NOTES ON A NESTING PLACE OF CROCODILUS PALUSTRIS
LESSON
By W. SCHULTZE
{From the Entomological Section, Biological Laboratory, Bureau of Science,
Manila, P. I.)
One plate
During the biological expedition of the Bureau of Science
and the University of the Philippines to Taytay, Palawan, April
7 to June 7, 1913, opportunity was taken to explore two lakes
near Taytay, the larger one being called by the natives from the
village of Bantolan *'Manguao," the smaller one "Nagsirocan."
According to the statements of old natives, neither had been
visited before by white men. Lake Manguao is located approx-
imately 8 kilometers south of the town of Taytay. Mr. E. D.
Merrill and several natives relocated an old direct trail from
Taytay to Lake Manguao during the latter part of April, 1913.
A second trip to the lake was made on May 11, by a party con-
sisting of A. L. Day, R. A. Rowley, Mrs. Schultze, myself, and
several assistants and guides, and we camped there until May
16. Our camp was located on the southwestern shore. On
May 14, while going close to the shore on a raft, Mr. Day^
discovered a peculiar heap or mound of grass on the beach in
one of the little bays of the lake. Upon coming back to camp,
our guides, natives of the town of Bantolan, were asked as to
the nature of the peculiar mound. They stated that it might be
the nest of a crocodile. Whereupon the next morning Mr.
Rowley, his assistant, Mrs. Schultze, and I went on a bamboo
raft to investigate the place. The mound was made of a very
coarse, wiry, thick-stemed grass {Ischaemum sp.) which had
been torn out by the roots, scratched together, and piled up.
A space about 8 meters long and 5 meters wide, on the sandy
beach, had been cleared absolutely of the grass. The mound
^ He states :
Lake Manguao is indicated on various charts, but because of the fact that
very little surveying has been done in northern Palawan the lake has hereto-
fore been incorrectly located. On May 14, I went on a bamboo raft south-
east from our camp. On the southeast side of the second point I observed a
mound of grass, the nature of which was not clear.
313
314 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
was located about 2 meters from the water. It was somewhat
irregular in shape, about 2.5 meters in diameter at the base and
1.5 meters in height. All around the mound, foot marks of a
crocodile and furrows made by the animal's claws could be seen,
so it was evident that the reptile had completed the nest very
recently, that is, within the preceding few days, as several heavy
rains would have washed away the marks in the sand. In pull-
ing the mound apart, it was noticed that the material was very
firmly packed. The grass was mixed with sand and was moist.
In about the center of the mound and about 40 centimeters above
the ground, 30 eggs were found arranged in several layers. The
eggs were taken with part of the nest material to our camp.
One egg was opened, and it appeared to be absolutely fresh.
On the next day, the eggs were transported in a tin can by
carriers over a bad mountain trail to our main camp at Taytay.
I there packed the eggs in a box filled with fresh grass, leaves,
and some of the original nest-material. On June 7 the eggs were
taken to Manila, where I kept them with the object of determin-
ing the period of incubation and time of hatching. Measure-
ments of 20 eggs gave the following results.
Measurements, in millimeters, of 20 eggs of Crocodilus palustris Lesson.
78 X50
77 X49.5
77 X49.5
83.5X46
75.5X49.5
76 X49.5
76 X49
78 X50
76 X49.5
76 X49.5
73.5X49
79 X49
76 X49.5
76 X49
80 X49
79 X48
75.5X49.5
75.5X49.5
83.5X50
82 X48.5
Average 77,65x49.15.
The egg is decidedly oblong ellipsoidal and has a very
hard porous shell with a high porcelain luster. Though the
color is a translucent white, the egg has very strongly marked
opaque white band around the middle (girth). The band is
about 4 centimeters wide and in strong contrast with the two
ends of the egg.
The eggs were kept in the box with the original material and
covered with a 5-centimeter layer of old horse manure. As the
incubation proceeded, the white band on the egg became less dis-
tinct. On July 1, one egg was opened; the embryo was about
6.5 centimeters long. On August 19, another egg was opened,
and the embryo was found to be 19 centimeters long. On Sep-
tember 4, as no egg had hatched, I opened all of those which
showed signs of incubation and found that all of the embryos
had died except in one egg which was about ready to hatch.
Their death was probably due to the fact that the material in
IX, D, 3 Schultze: Nesting Place of Crocodilus palustris 315
which they were packed had shrunken to such an extent that
most of the eggs were not covered by more than 2 centimeters
of the packing and that they therefore became too dry. At
any rate, the time of incubation of the eggs of Crocodilus palus-
tris is from seventeen to eighteen weeks in the Philippines.
During our stay at Taytay, we frequently noticed crocodiles
close to the shore in the sea. The species was probably Croco-
dilus porosus Schneid., the widely distributed seashore species.
On an expedition to Malampaya Sound, west of Palawan, on
August 20, 1913, I saw a specimen of this species at very close
range, and the natives informed me that these reptiles are very
abundant at the farther end of the sound. This statement was
verified by members of our party, who saw as many as twenty
at one time. Their abundance there is probably due to the large
number of fish found in the sound. A specimen of C porosus
Schneid., from Zamboanga, Mindanao, which I have had under
observation for three years, measured 30 centimeters when re-
ceived, and at the present time measures 85 centimeters, which
indicates that crocodiles grow faster than is ordinarily supposed,
at least during the early years of their life.
ILLUSTRATION
Plate I
Fig. 1. A nest of Crocodilus paluatris Lesson. (Photograph by R. A.
Rowley.)
2. An egg of Crocodilus paluatris Lesson. Actual size. (Photograph
by Charles Martin.)
Vol. IXy Sec, Dy No, 1 of this Journal was issued May 28, 191U; No. 2
was issued August 2^, IQIJ^.
317
Schultze: Nesting Place of Crocodilus palustris.] [Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 3.
Fig. 1. A nest of Crocodilus palustris Lesson.
Fig. 2. An egg of Crocodilus palustris Lesson. Actual size.
PLATE I.
THE PHILIPPINE
Journal of Science
D. General Biology, Ethnology,
AND Anthropology
Vol. IX AUGUST, 1914 No. 4
PALAEMONS of the PHILIPPINE ISLANDS
By R. P. COWLES
(From the Department of Zoology, College of Liberal Arts,
University of the Philippines)
Three plates and 1 text figure
The palaemons are widely distributed over the world, but
are usually confined to the fresh-water lakes and rivers of trop-
ical and subtropical countries. A few species, however, inhabit
the temperate regions and some live in the sea and in brackish
water. In the Philippine Islands this genus is well represented,
and especially is this the case in the lakes and rivers near Manila
where several species are very abundant. The palaemons, com-
monly but incorrectly spoken of as ''shrimps'' or "lobsters,''
appear occasionally in our markets, and are considered an
excellent food, being even more highly esteemed than the so-
called ''salt water shrimps" belonging to the genus Penaeus.
They form an important article of food for the Filipinos who
live inland; consequently, most of them are purchased before
they reach the markets of such coast cities as Manila.
A glance at a map of the Philippines shows how rich the
Islands are in rivers and streams which flow to the sea. It
is safe to say that all of them contain palaemons and that these
are used by the Filipinos for food. I have collected these crus-
taceans from streams near Port Galera on Mindoro Island, from
streams at Taytay on Palawan Island, from a small river at
Sisiman on Luzon Island, and from Mariquina, San Juan, and
Pasig Rivers near Manila. In addition to specimens from the
129877 319
320 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science iqh
above-mentioned localities, we have in our collection specimens
from Gandara, Samar Island; from Lake Lanao, Mindanao
Island; from Jaro, Leyte Island; and from Pampanga River,
Luzon Island.
While the palaemon fishery in the Philippines is not so large
as some other fisheries, it is an industry which is carried on all
over the Islands and is one which deserves to be improved if
possible. The French people are famous for the way in which
they have cultivated the fresh-water crayfish in France, and
even here near Manila it is said that an attempt has been made
to grow palaemons in some of the fishponds. A series of ex-
periments conducted on a scientific and practical basis would be
of great value to this industry.
METHODS USED IN FISHING
At least seven methods of fishing for palaemons are employed
in the Philippine Islands. (1) The larger forms are often caught
in a large fish trap known as the baclad. This consists of a
split bamboo fence arranged in the form of a V. The palaemons
follow the two wings of the V until they reach a narrow opening
at the angle, through which they pass into an inclosure. The
narrow opening is guarded by pieces of bamboo which point in-
ward and prevent the crustaceans from escaping. (2) The
smaller forms are frequently caught by men and boys who dive
and feel about in holes and crevices for them. (3) Another trap
which is used is the bobo, a rectangular box made of bamboo.
The bobo is filled with hay or grass through an opening in one
side, and is then lowered to the bottom. It is allowed to remain
in the water for two or three weeks until the hay or grass has
decayed, after which the palaemons enter to feed on the material
and the trap is hauled up. (4) The familiar cast net is also used
in shallow water where the palaemons can be seen. It has been
given the name dala by the Filipinos. (5) Another familiar way
of catching these crustaceans is by hauling an ordinary seine.
This seine, which is provided with a pocket, is called pukot.
(6) A method frequently employed is the following: Two men
are seated in a banca, the one in the bow handles a dip net and
the other in the stern does the paddling. The frame to which
the net is attached is triangular, and is firmly attached at one
angle to a long handle. This net is held close to the bottom
where it catches the palaemons as the banca moves forward.
(7) The talabog consists of a large bundle of roots bound to-
gether at both ends. This is lowered into the water and the
palaemons instinctively cling to it or hide among the roots.
IX, D, 4 Cotvles: Palaemons of the Philippi7ie Islands 321
When the talabog is brought to the surface, they still remain
attached. On Mindoro there is a modification of this method.
Instead of the roots, a large bundle of leaves baited inside with
cooked rice is used.
VALUE OF THE FISHERY
The commercial value of the palaemon fishery is difficult to
estimate. Many Filipinos living along the banks of the rivers
and lakes catch only enough for their own use. Fishermen who
make a business of catching palaemons usually retail their catch
in the locality where they live ; and in the neighborhood of towns
or cities, as an example, Manila, the catches are not taken to
the markets unless they are large.
The price varies a little with the abundance of the catch. Very
small individuals, those from 1 to 2 centimeters long, are sold by
measure, while those from 10 to 15 centimeters long bring about
2 or 3 centavos^ each. Palaemons larger than these are sold
for 20, 30, or 40 centavos, while the largest with a body length
of from 30 to 35 centimeters bring from 40 to 50 centavos each.
I have been told that larger specimens than any in our collec-
tion are caught occasionally and that these may bring as much
as 80 centavos.
The palaemon fishery is at its height during the hot and rainy
seasons, and it is then that the bulk of the year's catch is made.
Unfortunately, it is at this time that the breeding occurs in
most of the species. One of the most successful fishermen living
on the banks of San Juan River at the town of San Juan del
Monte states that he and another fisherman, together with three
helpers, catch from 20,000 to 25,000 palaemons in a season and
that these net from about 540 to 550 pesos. There are a few
other fishermen farther up the river whose business is not so
large, but it is safe to say that the total value of the palaemon
fishery in this one river easily reaches 2,000 pesos in one season.
In Pasig River and, especially, where it and its branches have
their origin from Laguna de Bay, the palaemon fishery is of
much more importance than that in San Juan River. A trip
from the barrio of Tagig along one of the smaller branches
of Pasig River to Laguna de Bay will convince one of this.
One bank of this stream is lined by fishermen's houses, each with
its small baclad for catching the kind of palaemon that is sold
by measure, and where the stream widens out as it issues from
Laguna de Bay one may see several hundred of the large baclads
^ One centavo equals 0.5 cent United States currency; 100 centavos equal
1 peso or 50 cents United States currency.
322
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
planted in the shallow water. It is in these large baclads that
during the months of April, May, June, July, and August,
especially, a local form of Palaemon carcinus Fabricius of
India is caught in great numbers. The fishery in this region
must amount to from 20,000 to 25,000 pesos per year.
EXTERNAL CHARACTERS OF A PALAEMON
As it is the purpose of this paper to describe the various
species of Philippine palaemons so that people in the Philippine
Islands who are not zoologists may be able to identify specimens,
I shall devote a little space to a simple description of the external
anatomy of a palaemon (fig. 1).
Flagella of first antenna
Cephalothorax
Abdomen
Antennal scale
Rostpm \ Peduncle'
^y^ First, tooth
Flagellum of second ajUemta
Carpus
Ischium
Fig. 1. Diagram of a palaemon.
The body of the palaemon may be divided into a forward or
anterior part known as the cephalothorax and a hind or poste-
rior jointed part known as the abdomen. The cephalothorax is
composed of a head and a thorax which are so closely joined
together that there is no neck, and it is covered above — dorsally —
and on the side — laterally — ^by a tough shield-shaped carapace.
From the front of the carapace a pointed beak or rostrum ex-
tends forward, and is armed with teeth along its dorsal and
its lower — ^ventral — border. The "first tooth*' in the following
description means the most posterior tooth arising from the
carapace and the number of teeth on the dorsal and ventral
borders of the rostrum is indicated in the form of a fraction
which I have called the rostral or dental formula /i^^JL.^il? ^ ^
There are 2 spines on each side of the carapace near the
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 323
anterior border. The upper one is called the antennal spine;
the lower one, the hepatic spine. On each side of the rostrum
where it has its origin from the carapace is an eye mounted on
a stalk. The stalk occupies a little niche in the carapace known
as the orbit. Extending forward from the base of the eye
stalk along each side of the lower border of the rostrum is a
peculiar structure known as the peduncle of the first antenna.
Each one bears a pair of whiplike flagella. The outer flagellum
of the pair has a short branch arising near its origin from
the peduncle. Below the peduncle of the first antenna on each
side of the rostrum lies a large scalelike structure known as
the antennal scale. From the underside of each scale where it
has its origin from the cephalothorax arises the long whiplike
flagellum of the second antenna. On the lower side of the cepha-
lothorax are attached 5 pairs of leglike structures, which are
known as the first, second, third, fourth, and fifth pairs of legs.
The chelipeds (second pair of legs) are much larger than the
others, and terminate in pincers. The first legs, which are
much shorter and slenderer than the chelipeds, have their origin
from the cephalothorax in front of the origin of the chelipeds,
. and are usually folded once under the body. They also terminate
in small pincers. The third, fourth, and fifth legs are slenderer
and shorter than the chelipeds, but stouter than the first legs.
They do not end in pincers. Each leg consists of jointed pieces or
segments. The segments of the cheliped are as follows: The
pincers are made up of 2 fingers, which are armed with teeth.
One of these is movable, and is known as the mobile finger ; the
other is known as the immobile finger, and is continuous with a
thick piece known as the palm. The immobile finger and the
palm are often spoken of as the propodus. The propodus, in-
cluding the mobile finger, is called the chela. The segment next
to the chela is the wrist or carpus, which is joined to another
segment known as the merus. Finally, the last piece or ischium
follows the merus and is attached to the cephalothorax by 2
very short pieces, the names of which it is not necessary for
us to consider. The first leg is made up of the same number
of segments as the cheliped, and these have the same names.
The back or posterior portion of the body, which is often
bent under, is known as the abdomen, and is composed of 7
pieces, the first 6 of which are known as somites. The seventh
or terminal piece, which is pointed, is called the telson. Each
somite has a tough covering, the dorsal surface and part of
the lateral surface of which are known as the tergum. The
lower part of the lateral surface is called the pleuron. Each
324 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
of the first 5 somites has a pair of branched structures at-
tached to its lower surface, which are known as swimmerets,
and the sixth somite has a somewhat similar but larger pair
called the uropods. The uropods and the telson together make
up the tail fin.
While zoologists might have no difficulty in identifying palae-
mons among a number of other crustaceans more or less related,
one who is not specializing in this line might have considerable
trouble. For this reason, I shall compare several forms found
in the waters about Manila which might be mistaken for them.
One of the commonest crustaceans, which may be seen almost
any day in our markets, is the "salt water shrimp'' belonging
to the genus Penaeus. This can be distinguished from the pala-
emon by the more or less evident keellike ridge on the dorsal
surface of the posterior part of the abdomen, by the absence of
large legs, and by the presence of pincers on the first, second, and
third legs.
The pistol crab, belonging to the genus Alpheus, is occa-
sionally seen in the markets, and differs from the palaemons
in the following particulars : The rostrum is very small or absent,
the first legs are strong and provided with pincers, the second
legs are weak and have small pincers, and the third, fourth, and
fifth legs are weak and without pincers.
Another form which is used for food by Filipinos, although
not highly thought of, belongs to the genus Atya, and is found
in mountain streams. It may be distinguished easily from the
palaemons by the peculiar pincers of the first and second legs.
These pincers are provided with brushes of hairs which are used
to catch mud and minute organisms. The third, fourth, and
fifth legs have no pincers.
Finally, I shall mention the large brillantly colored '*sea
crawfish" or "spiny lobster" (langosta del mar) belonging to
the genus Palinurus. It lives along rocky shores washed by
the open sea, and is occasionally seen in our markets. All
five legs are without pincers, and the antennae are very long
and spiny.
PHILIPPINE SPECIES OF THE GENUS PALAEMON
Palaemon carcinus Fabricius. Plate I, figs. 1 and la-;.
The largest palaemon in our collection, and undoubtedly the
largest one in the Philippine Islands, I have diagnosed as
Palaemon carcinus Fabricius. This conclusion was arrived at
after a careful study of a large series, although a comparison
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 325
of this series with individuals of the Indian species shows
certain distinct and constant differences. The local form differs
slightly from typical P. carcinus in the shape of the rostrum,
the rostral formula, the arrangement of the teeth on the rostrum
at all ages, and the position of the tip of the rostrum with
reference to the tip of the antennal scale at different ages ; there
is, however, a close similarity in the shape, armature, and
proportions of the segments of the chelipeds. The characters
of the chelipeds, just mentioned are of great diagnostic value
in determining species of the genus Palaemon, and for this
reason I have not described it as a new variety. It should be
mentioned, however, that our local form of Palaemon carcinus
probably closely resembles a form originally known as Palaemon
rosenbergii de Man,^ but which is now considered by de Man,'
Ortmann,^ and others as a variety of P. carcinus. The original
description of P. rosenbergii was based upon a single full-grown
female, and as no male has been seen I shall not place our
local form under de Man's variety. However, his description
agrees closely with a female specimen of about the same size
which is in our collection. The shape, size, and toothing of
the rostrum, as well as the measurements of the chelipeds,
are almost identical.
The detailed description of the Philippine form of P. carcinus
which follows is considered advisable, because our form differs
from the type, because our collection affords a large number
of different ages and sexes, and because it is the most important
species from a commercial point of view in the Philippine
Islands.
Rostrum and antennal scale. — An examination of 21 female
specimens, varying in body length ' from 115 to 250 millimeters,
shows with one exception that the rostrum extends beyond the
antennal scale. This exception (230 millimeters long) has a
rostrum which appears to be normal, but the tip just reaches
the distal end of the scale. In the largest specimen (250 milli-
meters), however, the tip extends slightly beyond, while in a
young female (115 millimeters) the rostrum extends one-fourth
of its length beyond the end of the. antennal scale. Thirty-six
^ Notes Leyden Mus. (1879), 1, 167.
' Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandish Ost-Indien (1892),
2, 417.
*Zool Jahrb., Systematik (1891), 5, 701.
^ By body length, or length, is meant the distance from the tip of the
rostrum to the tip of the telson.
326
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
O C4
«H OJ S 3
> U CO
•S o
"S 6
»H ^ -M 5 4? <i^
U «H
2 3 OD
Ms
«H X ^ «H
o o
Q « '
So S S
' Q Q
c c c
O O O
O n
d ^ ?
2
t! 5
jj 3 s p»
§ "S 'g 'g
P S* S- S-
^ P P P
"—J ^< »^ ^<
<; PL( (Xi P4
<H U
O •H
o o'g'S'g o'g o'S'S O O o'g'g
P^ (li dn
2 6
01 rt
:§ s
it
H P^
Pi »^
«« O
O ^
^3
«M 5
00 C
» pq I
^ ^ '§'2
If
-S « g ^
1^
U ^ -S X 73 -O
o ft !r3
l^gl
^ o :g .g
d OD ^
fe § ;2
S-s
H fa
loouaiooooiooooiooooooooooooo
^ »-tT-»r-tTHrH»-4rHTHiHTHrHC<I01 r^ r-i r-i r-i r-i
OOWiOOOOOU3i0U3OOOOOOOOOOOOO
^oideooc)od«>M>j«id«dc4'<i'ooc)ou3<d"^'od-«tc4o>-^
ggNeoeoco'<*<u3?oooooo>o-*t'<i'oo(Mr-ti-i»?bu3«Bc-t-o>
SrHr-JtHi-HrHrHr-(rHr-lT-lr-l<M<NM(MCO»-lrHrHiH,-H»H»Hr-l
'^^5^3^3^D^D^3'b'b'b'b'b"D'b'b'bC>C><>CM-<>OfOfC>
ja ^ ja
»Hoieo'^iO<ot-oocf>OTHMeo-«*"iO«ct-ooo»OrHweO'<f
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
327
1
c
J
<
a
C
t
c
£
IT
C
A
1
cr
«♦-
c
E
E
c-
T
c
■1
c
i
o
§
J
O
1
o o o
1
!
C
1
V
N
c
.3:
d
OD
tC
o
'ft -r?
S"
«H
^
g
s
C
1
.£
^
si
be
bo
gl
1
^
1
<3
"5
o
d 0
d c
0
1
OD
c4
0
d d d ^
d
1
1
PQ
0
Q 0
P C
p
P
Q Q Q £
>
Q
1
2
Q>
b«
c
tC
«H
I
o
«n ' 1
§.
b()
§ i i ^
RJ
.S
3 1 ! c
O
o
o c
c
1 -M
o ?
« c
c
c
O
c
.2 * ' a '
P, O O rt o
1
1
TJ
T3 t:
'C
T3
1
'C
X
n3
T
« T3 'O bo 'c
_
"c
c«
£
s
t^
'S
X
o
O
^
u
p
a
n
ft
IS
1
o
■tJ
1
>
§
^
A
U
J3
§
§
o
J
O
O 0
1
i
«H OJ C
c
c
c
01
o
c
.i4 ! I
o 1 I
5 o o^
1 .
(^
m
tJ
T3 t
H
rt SI -^
ro -r
T
0
'C!
'C
>> TJ "O ^
'a rt
E
-^ C
c) ! ; ^
£ '^
<«5
w
{S
> I : <;
w
j3
>*
Hi
o o
*IA
lO o
U5 Ifl
o
in
in
o
o o o o
o
a>
CO
^' j5
to
«d 00
d o
c;
t-
d
Tj<
^* ^' £5 ^
csi
r-i
1-t tH
tH (N
(N
(N
N
CO
!5
o
m
Ui
o
o o
O
o o
O lO
O
O
in
o
o o o o
o
1
^
o
U5
U3 «
oc
00 d
»H C^
d
CO
d
00
SS S I 5^*
?J
5
rH
r-t N
<N M
(N
CO
CO
CO
rH
1
m
o
lO
o o
Irt
»o O
O O
»o
o
in
o
o o o in
in
3
CO
00
oJ a
w cc
id d
00
oc
oi
t-^
»H f-3 OJ CC
d
1
ft
<M
cj (^^
M c^
eg
CO
•^
r}<
r-t r-l (M rH
1
O
S
r-( tH rH
•s
bo
o
lO
o in
O
o o
o ta
o
o
o
O
o o o in
o
g
g
00
d
CO p:
ui
M5 t-
ci "n*
t-
d
d
c»:
g* 1 g «>
d
►S
rH iH
W (N
(M
CO
Tf
Tj«
u
o
o
O lO
o
o o
O U3
o
o
o
o
o o o in
in
<u
u>
N
CO «
w
MS t-
d r-i
•<f
(M
d
«o
tr-^ rH in oo
i>
bo
w w
<N
CO
CO
oo
«£> t- 00
c
S
£
o
la
o o
o
o o
o o
O
o
o
o
o o o o
in
63
Jh'
-^*
«5 t>
d
d ■<i5
N to
«
d
05
g g s s
d
2:
N
(N (N
CO
CO CO
^ ^
kO
«£>
t-
t-
P-l o
g
a
4)
"o
^)
^D ^3
^D
^ ^
^D ^3
•b
^D
^5
"c
\i \) ^ o*
O
w
^ £1 M
n.
T7
OJ
CO -^
lO
t£> r-
00 o>
o
~~^
N
cc
Tt in ic t^
00
z
r-l *H <U
d O
328
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
o
O
1
5J
^ .s
o o o o
Q Q Q Q Q Q P
'O'O'C'O u'O'O'a
OiOOOOOOOO
g ?5
(M N OJ CO CO CO
u5moomoou50
c5 o ui M lo oj
S g:j
(N <M M CO CO CO
m
o
O
O
U3
\a
la
in
o
o
3
s
r^l
ro
CO
«>
CO
•^
CO
t-
o.
M
<M
M
(M
w
CO
Tj«
■>*
s
rt
O
L.O
O
kO
O
US
\a
o
o
\o
a
s
?o
lO
00
rn
to
rA
d
t^
lA
<N
CO
CO
■>*
&
s
U5
o
o
o
o
O
o
o
o
?
S
(M
CO
fO
rj<
^
on
«>
w
CO
bo
rH
r-4
c^
CO
CO
C
S
b
Pu. 5
OOU5O»0iCOO»0
00 "Tj< o o o
M CO CO CO CO
to OS 00
lO CO t-
OfOOOOOf OfOof
OOrHMCO'TflOtOt-
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 329
male individuals (short chelipeds)/ varying in body length from
100 to 240 millimeters, show that the rostrum overreaches the
antennal scale. In specimens from 100 to 110 millimeters long
the rostrum extends almost one-third of its length beyond the
antennal scale, and this distance gradually decreases until in
individuals 240 millimeters long it overreaches the antennal
scale only slightly. Finally, in 4 large males (chelipeds enor-
mously developed) measuring from 250 to 320 millimeters, the
rostrum fails to reach the tip of the scale. In fact, in another
male only 240 millimeters long but with the chelipeds enormously
developed the condition is similar. While this gradual decrease
in the length of the rostrum might be explained by the as-
sumption that during the life of these palaemons the tip is
repeatedly broken off and then partially regenerated, it is hard
to believe that such is the case, considering the uniform character
of the decrease shown by the series at hand.
The descriptions or figures of Palaemon carcinus by Fabricius,^
Herbst,^ M. Milne-Edwards,^ Ortmann,'^ de Man,^^ and Hender-
son and Matthai ^^ all indicate that the rostrum extends beyond
the antennal scale, while Henderson's ^^ description and
Rumphius's ^* figure show that these authors have examined some
specimens in which the rostrum extends to the tip of the antennal
scale only or fails to reach it. Von Martens ^' mentions the
fact that the rostrum of Palaemon carcinus from Luzon is
strikingly short. Henderson finds great variation in the length
of the rostrum of P. carcinus from India, some specimens show-
ing the rostrum scarcely longer than the scale. This fact and
others leave him in considerable doubt as to the limitations of
" In our collection, except in one case, male specimens of P. carcinus,
from the shortest to those 240 millimeters long, have the short weakly
developed chelipeds like those of the female, but in males 250 millimeters
long, or longer, the chelipeds are enormously developed.
^ Fabricii Entomologia Systematica Supplementum (1798), 5, 402.
'^ Versuch einer Naturgeschichte der Krabben and Krebse (1796), 2, Tab.
XXVIII, Fig. 1.
''Histoire Naturelle des Crustaces (1837), 2, 395.
^''Zool Jahrb. Systematik (1891), 5, 701.
^^ Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandisch Ost-Indien (1892),
2, 414.
^"^ Records Indian Mus, (1910), 5, PI. XV, fig. la. Henderson and Mat-
thai, in the general part of their paper on palaemons, state that the rostrum
in the young is relatively longer than in the adults and that it is usually
relatively longer in females than in males.
'* Trans, Linn. Soc. London, Zool. (1893), 5, 411.
'' D'Ambonische Rariteitkamer (1741), PI. I, fig. B.
''Arch, f. Naturgesch. (1868), 5, 35.
330 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science isu
the species, and he is forced to regard such species as belonging
to a variety in which the apical growth of the rostrum has
been arrested. It does not seem to me probable that the
gradual decrease in length between the tip of the anten-
nal scale and the tip of the rostrum, which is so strikingly
illustrated in our series, is unique for the form we have
here in the Philippines. On the contrary, I believe that an
examination of a large series of P. carcinus from India
will show a similar condition, and I am inclined to agree with
that part of Henderson's statement in which he says that the
apical growth of the rostrum may be arrested. From a study
of specimens of Palaemon carcinus and Palaemon philippinensis
sp. no v., I believe that the growth of the rostrum becomes
partially arrested when the so-called mature characters are
acquired and that this change is especially marked in the males.
Curvature and dental formida of rostrum, — Females of all
ages show the distal one-third of the rostrum curved upward,
but this is more evident in the young than the old. The arching
over the eye, which is pronounced in Palaemon carcinus from
India, is not conspicuous in the Philippine form, and remains
about the same throughout the life of the female. The upward
curve of the distal part of the rostrum in the males does not
seem to differ from that in the females, except in the large
males (those with the enormously developed chelipeds), where
the tip scarcely bends upward at all. The degree of arching
over the eye is slightly greater in the old than in the young
males.
The dental formula is very variable. An examination of
the specimens in the collection shows the formula for the males
(100 to 320 millimeters) to be ^l' }^\}^\]'^. In one exceptional
o, y, lu, 11
case 12 teeth are found on the lower border, 2 of which, how-
ever, are situated well up under the arch over the eye. The
12
smallest male (100 millimeters) has the formula -5-, while the
o
largest male (320 millimeters) has — . In the females (115
11 12 13
to 250 millimeters) the formula is ' \ . Those of the smallest
o, y, 10
12
(115 millimeters) and largest (about 250 millimeters) are ^
12
and -^, respectively. It appears that the number of teeth in
the males is somewhat greater than in the females, but there
IX, D, 4 Coivles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 331
is no evidence that the number of the teeth increases with the
ag-e. In the large majority of both males and females the
formula is ^ ^^^^ . The dorsal border of the rostrum in young
y to 10
males and females may be divided into a proximal two-thirds
armed with 9 or 10 teeth and a distal one-third usually un-
armed, except near the tip where there may be 2 or 3 teeth.
(A similar condition has been described by von Martens ^^ for
Palaemon carcinus from Luzon.) The bases of the first and
second teeth and part of the base of the third tooth lie back
of the orbit. These teeth are more widely separated from one
another than the following 6 or 7 teeth, and also the ninth
and tenth teeth are separated somewhat more from the teeth
directly back of them. The unarmed portion of the distal one-
third has a length of 9 or 10 millimeters in specimens measuring
115 millimeters in body length, and beyond this lie the 2 or
3 rather widely separated teeth of the tip region. The usual
9 or 10 teeth of the ventral border are more widely separated
toward the tip than at the proximal end. In middle-aged males
and females the arrangement of the teeth is similar, but the
unarmed space is, relatively, slightly shorter. The bases of
the first, second, and third teeth of the upper border in the
largest males lie back of the orbit, and the unarmed space is
proportionately shorter than in the middle-aged males and
females.
The following facts concerning the rostrum of Palaemon
carcinus found in the Philippines seem clear from the study
of our collection:
1. The rostrum increases in length as the body length becomes greater.
2. In young males and females the rostrum extends much beyond the an-
tennal scale.
3. As the males and females grow older, the rostrum extends less beyond
the antennal scale; this is, especially, the case in males.
4. In old males (250 to 320 millimeters), those with the enormously devel-
oped chelipeds, the rostrum fails to reach the antennal scale by a
considerable distance.
5. The number of the teeth does not vary with the length of the rostrum,
with the length of the body, nor with the age of the individual.
Relative position of first antenna and rostrum. — ^As in other
palaemons, the peduncle of the first antenna fails to reach the
antennal scale. While it increases in length as the animal grows
older, it retains about the same relative proportions; that is,
the peduncle extends forward over about three-fifths of the
^'Ibid, (1868), 5, 35.
332 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
antennal scale of the second antenna. A glance at Table I shows
that the tip of the peduncle varies in position with reference to
the teeth on the lower border of the rostrum. In the smallest
males and females it extends to the third or fourth tooth, while
in the largest males with the small legs and in the largest
females it extends to the fifth, sixth, or seventh tooth. In the
large males with the enormously developed chelipeds the tip
of the peduncle reaches almost to the end of the rostrum.
First pair t>f legs. — The length of the first pair of legs with
reference to the length of the antennal scale does not seem to
vary much. In young males and females usually the propodus
of the first leg extends beyond the tip of the antennal scale,
while in the largest males the propodus and as much as one-
fourth or one-half of the carpus may be seen beyond the tip of
the scale.
Chelipeds. — The chelipeds are much shorter in young males
and females than the length of the body from the tip of the
rostrum to the tip of the telson. Even in the adult and largest
females these fail to equal the body length. Also, males under
240 millimeters in length with weakly developed legs have the
chelipeds shorter than the body, but males over 250 millimeters
in length have the chelipeds longer than the body. The chel-
ipeds of the largest male in our collection (body length, 320
millimeters) measure 486 millimeters (ischium, merus, carpus,
and propodus), and they extend with one-half of the merus
beyond the tip of the antennal scale. As a rule, in young males
and females the palm and fingers are nearly of the same length,
but as the animals grow older the palm increases in length more
rapidly than the fingers, so that the proportion may be as much as
1 : 1.43. In Table I it will be seen that the smallest male in
the collection shows a proportion of 1 : 1.33. Only one cheliped
is present in this case, and I believe the proportion is unusual.
A similar proportional increase in the length of the palm is
seen in the female, but it is not so striking. In all of our speci-
mens, male and female, the carpus is shorter than the propodus.
The difference is not so great in the young specimens, and
I think it probable that younger specimens than we have might
show the carpus to be longer than the propodus, a condition
which de Man has observed in the young of the Indian form.
The fingers of young specimens (100 millimeters) show no
toothing, but at 115 to 120 millimeters the teeth begin to make
their appearance. The mobile finger is armed along its cutting
edge with 2 acute teeth. The distal tooth is situated at a point
one-third of the distance or a little more from the articulation
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 333
to the tip of the finger, and it is flattened laterally.^^ It measures
2.5 by 2 millimeters at the base in our largest specimens, and is
2.5 millimeters high. The proximal tooth is found about midway
between the distal tooth and the articulation of the finger. It is
flattened laterally, and in the largest males is smaller than, but of
the same shape as, the distal tooth. In old males with the enor-
mously developed chelipeds there are 4 teeth present on the
immobile finger. The distal one, which is conical in shape (3
millimeters at the base and 3 millimeters in height) , is the largest,
and is situated 4 or 5 millimeters anterior to the proximal tooth
of the mobile finger. Also, in younger males and females this
tooth is found in front of the proximal tooth of the mobile finger
but much closer to it. The next tooth, which is much smaller and
less acute than any so far described, touches the proximal tooth
of the mobile finger on its posterior side when the fingers are
closed. Directly back of this tooth and almost continuous with it
is the third tooth, which is still smaller. The fourth tooth is
continuous with the third, and might be considered as a smaller
cusp of the third tooth. In young males and females and even
sometimes in the very old males the fourth tooth is not distin-
guishable, but is represented by a short raised piece of the
cutting edge. In the oldest male in our collection (320 milli-
meters) there is an indication of a fifth or sixth tooth, which
might become more distinct in larger specimens. While the
toothing in general is much like that of Palaemon carcinus F. of
India as described and figured by Henderson and Matthai,'^
the teeth in our form seem to be somewhat more robust. A felt-
like coat of hair is present on the mobile finger of both males
and females, except when they are very young. Specimens in
our collection from 100 to 115 millimeters long show no signs
of this hair. As a rule, only the proximal one-half of the finger
is coated in the young measuring from 115 to 140 millimeters,
but as the animals grow older the coat extends gradually until
it covers all but the distal one-fourth. Herbst's ^^ figure of Pa-
" In most living palaemons the chelipeds are held so that the immobile
finger lies more nearly in a dorsal position and the mobile finger more
nearly in a ventral position, but sometimes in preserved specimens the
cheliped becomes twisted so that the fingers lie in a horizontal plane. In
this paper the immobile finger will be considered as dorsal in position with
reference to the mobile finger, and in the case of P. carcinus the long rows
of large spines will mark the dorsal and ventral surfaces of the merus and
carpus. The ischium remains in about the same position after preservation.
""Rec, Indian Mus. (1910), 5, 281, PI. XV, fig. la.
" Versuch einer Naturgeschichte der Krabben und Krebse (1796), 2, Tab.
XXVIII, fig. 1.
334 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
laemon carcinus shows a condition similar to that found in
our form, except that the coating of hair extends a little farther
toward the tip. In the figure shown by Henderson and Matthai,
however, the pubescence extends to the tip of the finger. The
tips of both fingers curve inward in specimens of all ages, and
overlap when the fingers are closed. In young specimens with
a body length of about 150 millimeters or less, the fingers when
closed lie close together throughout their extent, but larger in-
dividuals have the fingers gaping. In old males the immobile
finger, which is curved less sharply at the tip than the mobile
finger, extends beyond the latter. The immobile finger of the
largest male presents 13 or 14 indistinct longitudinal rows of
small spines. Several of these rows, especially the one along
the cutting edge, are made up of larger spines than those of the
other rows. Near the tip of the finger the cutting edge disap-
pears and the number of rows of spines is reduced. Spines
are absent along the cutting edge and the region covered by the
felt of the mobile finger, but a few spines are to be seen along
the incurved tip. The cutting edge disappears near the tip. In
young males and females the fingers are spineless.
The palm of the largest male in our collection measures 122
millimeters in length. It is flattened laterally at the distal
one-half, measuring 13 by 16 millimeters, but at the proximal
one-half it becomes almost cylindrical in cross section, measuring
about 15 millimeters in diameter. It presents about 18 lon-
gitudinal rows of spines, which in general are larger than those
on the fingers, and the rows on the inner surface are made up
of spines which are larger than those of the rows on the outer
surface. An average-sized spine of the larger kind measures
2 millimeters in length. The palm is marked on each lateral
surface by a longitudinal groove, and each of these grooves is
continued, except with a break at the joint, into a **linear space"
on the outer and inner surfaces, respectively, of the carpus which
is similar to that described by Hoffman, von Martens, and
Coutiere. The shape of the palm in all younger males and
females is the same as that of the old males. Males and females
of middle age show the characteristic rows of spines, but these
are not so conspicuous, and in young males and females they
are only visible with a lens. The grooves can be seen in speci-
mens of all ages and both sexes represented in our collection.
The carpus in our largest male equals the palm in length, but
probably in larger specimens it is shorter. In the oldest fe-
males the palm is shorter than the carpus, and the same is
true of young individuals of both sexes. Table I shows that the
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 335
palm grows faster than the carpus as the individuals increase
in size, a fact which has been pointed out by several authors.
The carpus of the largest male in the collection measures 122
millimeters in length, and is cylindrical in cross section through-
out practically the whole extent. Near its distal end the diameter
is 17 millimeters, while at a point near the proximal end it
measures 13 millimeters. Eleven indistinct longitudinal rows of
small spines are present on the outer surface, and these are
separated from 3 indistinct rows of medium-sized spines on
the inner surface by a dorsal and a ventral longitudinal row of
blunt and conspicuous spines. One of the largest of these
spines is 4 millimeters in length. The 2 linear spaces men-
tioned above are very distinct, and lie on the dorsolateral and
ventrolateral regions of the outer surface. All younger males
and females show the carpus to be of the same shape as that
of the large male. In the youngest individuals (100 to 115 milli-
meters) minute spinules may be seen with a lens, and slightly
older specimens show the beginnings of the 2 rows of largest
spines. The ''linear spaces" can hardly be made out until the
spines show clearly to the naked eye.
The merus, which retains about the same relative proportion
in length to the carpus throughout life, is cylindrical anteriorly
in the largest male, and has a length of 100 millimeters. It
increases gradually in size, passing from the proximal end for-
ward, and near the distal end suddenly decreases in diameter
thus giving the impression of a swelling. About 13 milli-
meters from its proximal end it measures 13 millimeters, and
at the thickest part of the distal end it measures 18 millimeters
in diameter. The merus at its articulation with the ischium is
much flattened dorsoventrally, so as to correspond to the distal
end of the ischium. The dorsal and ventral longitudinal rows of
large spines, which are very conspicuous on the carpus, are even
more so on the merus, one of the largest spines measuring 5
millimeters in height. There are 6 indistinct longitudinal rows
of small spines on the outer surface and 5 indistinct rows of
medium-sized spines on the inner surface. The more dorsal
"linear space" of the carpus is continued on the merus, while
the more ventral one is absent or at least not clearly marked.
The description of the character of the surface of the carpus in
younger males and females applies to that of the merus in speci-
mens of the same age.
The ischium (57 millimeters in length) in the largest male
is greatly flattened dorsoventrally, and increases in size toward the
distal end. On the dorsal and ventral surfaces there are 2 lon-
129877 2
336 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
gitudinal grooves, one of which is deep. These divide the
surface into 3 regions — 2 lateral and 1 median. Distally the
median region of the dorsal surface is highly convex and armed
with several stout spines, while the rest of this surface is spine-
less. The median region of the ventral surface is smooth. The
externolateral region of the ventral surface presents a lon-
gitudinal row of fairly stout spines and 2 rows of smaller spines ;
the intemolateral region of the same surface is armed with 2
longitudinal rows of fairly stout spines ; the externolateral region
of the dorsal surface presents 2 rows of medium-sized spines;
and the intemolateral region presents 1 row of fairly stout
spines. In younger males and females the more shallow groove
mentioned above is absent, so that the same regions cannot be
distinguished. The armature and shape remain about the same,
except that the spines diminish in size until in the smallest
specimens no spines are visible. The ischium grows slower
(Table I) than the merus and carpus, a fact which has been
noted in the publications of other authors on palaemons in
general.
Third, fourth, and fifth legs. — The third pair of legs in speci-
men 2 is absent. The tip of the fourth leg and the dactylus
of the fifth leg extend beyond the tip of the antennal scale.
The diameter of the propodus of the fifth leg in the middle is
0.75 millimeter, and the length is 15 millimeters. In specimen
9 the tips of the dactyli of the third, fourth, and fifth legs extend
slightly beyond the tip of the antennal scale, and the measure-
ments for the propodus of the fifth leg are 1.25 by 25 millimeters.
The fifth leg only of specimen 16 is present, and 7 millimeters
of its propodus extend beyond the scale. It measures 4 milli-
meters in diameter at its middle, and is 61 millimeters long.
Telson, — The telson of the local form agrees with the de-
scriptions and figures which have been published for Palaemon
carcinvs. The innermost pair of lateroterminal spines on each
side of the tip is the largest and best developed. The tip of the
telson is acute, and does not extend as far as the posterior border
of the uropods.
Character of surface, — ^As in many other palaemons, the char-
acter of the surface of the carapace and abdomen differs with
the age. The carapace and abdomen of males and females from
100 to 190 millimeters in length are strikingly smooth to the
touch and under magnification show no spines. The third,
fourth, and fifth pairs of legs are beset with rows of minute
yellowish spinules, especially along their distal two-thirds, but
the first pair of legs are devoid of spines of any sort. Males and
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 337
females, 190 to 240 millimeters long, show a similar condition
to that found in the smaller individuals, except that the merus
and ischium of the first pair of legs are armed with spinules
and the spinules of the third, fourth, and fifth legs are larger.
The surface of the carapace in large males (240 or 250 to 320
millimeters, with long chelipeds) is rough to the touch and beset
with spinules, except along the extreme posterior border. The
spinules of the dorsal and anterolateral regions are larger than
those of other parts. These spinules, which are usually acute,
point forward, and average about 0.5 millimeter in length. Most
of the dorsal and lateral surfaces of the abdominal segments
and the dorsal surface of the inner ramus of each uropod have
a growth of fine spinules, causing them to feel rough to the
touch. The first, third, fourth, and fifth legs are armed like
younger specimens, but the spines are larger.
Eggs, — The eggs of the local form of Palaemon carcinus
measure from 0.5 by 0,5 to 0.5 by 0.66 millimeter.
Color of living specimens. — The local form of Palaemon carci-
nus varies in color with the age, but the color is fairly constant
for any one age. The following color notes are taken from
living specimens. The carapace of females (115 to 190 milli-
meters) is greenish gray, but is marked with brown, gray, or
cream-colored streaks running longitudinally. The terga and
pleura of the abdomen have a general color similar to that of
the carapace, and are marked with rather irregular but more
or less parallel streaks of brown, gray, or cream, which make
a somewhat definite pattern. In the region of the hinge of each
of the abdominal somites is an orange-colored patch; these
patches are especially evident on the fourth, fifth, and sixth
somites. The ventral and lateral edges of the first 3 abdominal
somites show a cream-colored band, while the ventral edges of
the fourth and fifth somites have a similar but narrower band.
A cream-colored band is also present along the edges of the rami
and the outer edge of the basipodite of the swimmerets. The
chelipeds are blue or lavender in color, but where the segments
join there is an orange-colored patch. The first and second
antennae are blue, in part at least, and the internal flagellum
of the first antenna is a conspicuous blue. The rostrum is
strikingly marked by the vermilion color of its lateral longitu-
dinal ridge. The colors practically all disappear, sooner or later,
when the specimens are preserved, leaving the animals yellow
in color. Living males (100 to 190 millimeters) have a color
which is similar to that of the young females, except that the
cream-colored band is absent on the pleura of the abdomen.
338 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
A faint cream-colored band is present on the external rami of
the swimmerets. As the males and females (190 to 240 or 250
millimeters) grow larger and the chelipeds become longer, the
general color becomes a darker blue and the brown, gray, or
cream-colored lines on the carapace and abdominal somites and
the cream-colored bands on the pleura become much less dis-
tinct. The color of other parts still persists, but becomes some-
what darker. In old males (240 or 250 to 320 millimeters) with
the enormously long chelipeds the color is much less brilliant
than in the younger specimens. The dorsal region of the cara-
pace and abdomen is brownish green, and the lateral regions are
light green or brown. The brown, gray, or cream-colored mark-
ings and bands so characteristic of smaller individuals disappear
almost entirely, while the orange-colored spots on the abdomen
and at the articulations of the segments of the chelipeds, the
vermilion color of the ridge on the rostrum, and the conspicuous
blue of the first and second antennae usually persist to some ex-
tent, but become noticeably darker. The chelipeds appear at
first sight a dirty black, but on closer examination they are seen
to be a very dark, dirty blue, except in the proximal region where
they are greenish blue. The third, fourth, and fifth legs are
bluish green in color. The ventral border of the pleura of the
sixth abdominal segment shows a distinct orange-colored band.
A comparison of the color of the local Palaemon carcintts with
descriptions and color drawings of Palaemon carcinns from
India shows, that while there is a general similarity there are
some striking differences. The blue color of the cephalothorax
and abdomen is absent, and in its place there are cream-colored
bands and other markings. The latter may be present in young
specimens of the Indian form. The first and second antennae,
so far as I have been able to make out from colored drawings
and descriptions, are not blue like those of our local form, and
it is of interest to note that in no other palaemon in the Philip-
pines with which I am familiar are the antennae colored in the
same way as those of the local form of P. carcinus. Finally, the
striking changes in color as we pass from the younger specimens
to the older ones, if occurring in Palaemon carcinus of India, do
not seem to have been recorded.
Old and young males, — While specialists on the genus Palae-
mon are familiar with the fact that the old males in some species
look very different from the young males and while it seems
probable that the same is true for all species of Palaemon, it is
difficult to convince one who is not a zoologist or even a zoologist
IX, D, 4 Cotvles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 339
who is not familiar with palaemons that the old males are of
the same species as the young males and females. The fol-
lowing are my reasons for considering the large brownish pa-
laemon, which is seen in our museums and sometimes in our
markets and which has the extremely long and thick chelipeds,
as the same species (P. carcimis) as the beautifully colored young
males and females with short weak chelipeds:
1. Both the first and second antennae show the deep peacock blue color,
which is found in no other species in our collection.
2. If we assume that the large brown form with the enormous chelipeds
is a different species from the smaller brightly colored males and
females, then we have to account for the facts that all of the large
brown forms are males, that no females have been found corre-
sponding to them in size and shape, and that the fishermen have never
caught any females like them.
3. The number of teeth on the dorsal and ventral borders of the rostrum
is approximately the same in both.
4. While the rostrum is distinctly shorter proportionately in the large brown
form, a gradual reduction in the relative length of the rostrum can be
traced if we place both kinds together in a series arranged according
to increasing body length.
6. In living specimens a series shows how the brilliant color of the young
gradually grades into the dull brown of the old form.
6. Both kinds have the coat of felted hair on the mobile finger.
7. The chelipeds are blue in both forms, but very dark blue in the large
form.
''Males feminises,'' — It is not possible to determine whether or
not our collection of P. carcimis contains what Coutiere -'* speaks
of as ''males feminises,'' although all the males, except the oldest
ones, show the female characteristics; that is, the chelipeds
are weak and short. Plate I, figs, le and 1/, shows how little
the chelipeds of the full-grown female and the chelipeds of
the young male differ from one another. As a matter of fact, our
collection does not contain any young male which has taken on
the characteristics of the old males, with the possible exception
of the specimen (240 millimeters) noted in Table I. These
males are more numerous in our collection of Palaemon philip-
pinensis sp. nov., which is described on page 340.
The enormous increase in the size of the chelipeds and the
change in shape of the fingers in the old males of P. carcinus,
P. lar, P. jamaicensiSy and other species are phenomena which
cannot fail to stimulate the mind of the zoologist. Ortmann 2'
thinks that we have every reason for believing that the beautiful
'''Ann. ScL Nat., Zool. (1900), 11, 269.
'' Bronn's Klassen und Ordnungen des Thier-Reichs (1901), 5, 1242.
340 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
chelipeds of the male Palaemon carcinus are sexual adorn-
ments. In our local form of Palaemon carcinits the chelipeds
of young males, young females, and mature females are blue
or lavender, while the chelipeds of the old males are very dark,
inconspicuous blue. I can readily believe that the blue color
is an adornment, but I can hardly believe that it is attractive
to the females, even if we assume that they have color sense,
as these palaemons live in water which is far from clear. A
study of the habits of the palaemons may throw some light
on the meaning of these large chdipeds.
Localities, — ^We have in our collection 41 males and 21 females
which were collected from Pasig River, San Juan River (a
tributary of Pasig River), and Laguna de Bay, the source of
Pasig River. All of these bodies of water are in the neighbor-
hood of Manila, Luzon. Since the above was written, several
large specimens have been added to the collection by A. L. Day,
who collected them in Naujan Lake near Calapan, Mindoro.
Palaemon philippinensis sp. nov. Plate II, figs. 2 and 2a-m.
This species presents much variation in the shape and general
appearance of the rostrum. The proportion of the carpus to the
merus of the chelipeds is not constant, the carpus increasing
in length faster than the merus as the animal grows longer.
Another characteristic of this sp^ies (possibly of all species of
Palaemon) is the occurrence of dimorphic males; that is, some
of the males of medium size have chelipeds of about the
same length and shape ("males feminises" of Coutiere)22 as
those of the females of the same size, and other males of small
or medium size, but usually covered with brownish sediment,
have the characteristics of the largest and undoubtedly mature
males; namely, enormously long chelipeds with well-armed and
gaping fingers (young mature males). In our collection the
"males feminises" far outnumber the other males (Table II).
^^Ann, Sci, Nat, Zool, (1900), 11, 269. In the present paper the follow-
ing terms are used to distinguish between different forms of males : "Young
males," "males feminises," "young mature males," and "old mature males."
The distinction between the different forms is not always clearly defined,
but the terms are used for convenience in description and for the purpose
of indicating my attitude in reference to Coutiere's statement that di-
morphic males exist among palaemons. It should be understood, however,
that I have no proof that the "males feminises" are nonbreeding in-
dividuals or that the "young mature males" are breeding individuals. The
former term is used for medium-sized male specimens that have chelipeds
like those of the females and the latter term is employed for such small
or medium-sized males as have chelipeds like those of the largest males.
IX, D, 4 Coivles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 341
Palaemon philippinensis seems to be most nearly related to
P. nipponensis de Haan,^^ differing from this species in size, in
the absence of the rather thick coating of hairs on the fingers,
and in the presence of distinct tubercles along the sides of the
cutting edge. The tubercles (absent in young males, in most
"males feminises,'' and in all females but the largest specimen)
remind one of P. elegans de Man ^^ and P. rudis Heller,^^ but
in Palaemon philippinensis the tubercles are found on both sides
of the cutting edge of the mobile finger and only on one side,
the inner, of the cutting edge of the immobile finger.
Two other striking characteristics of this species are the
variability in the shape of the rostrum, reminding one of
P. weberi de Man, and the variability in proportion between
the lengths of the carpus and merus, which also seems to be
characteristic of P. ritsemae de Man ^^ and P. rudis Heller.
These variations, together with the occurrence in the collection
of both forms of the male, would have aroused a doubt in my
mind as to the specimens being of one species if I had not seen
them all shortly after they were taken from the water, when
the living color was still retained and when they showed a
characteristic T-shaped pigment mark and certain obliquely
placed pigment marks on each side of the carapace, which are
found in no other species in our collection. (See discussion on
the color of P. philippinensis.)
The following is a description of the largest male specimen in
the collection (one from San Juan River near Manila), after
which follows a comparative description of specimens differing
in age and sex :
This male (Table II, specimen 31) (Plate II, figs. 2, 2a, 26,
and 2c) measures 144 millimeters in length. The rostrum fails
to reach the tip of the antennal scale. The dorsal border is
conspicuously convex over the eye, the ventral border curves
upward moderately, but the tip is not directed upward. The
ridge along the side of the rostrum divides the surface of the
latter into an upper wide and a lower narrow area. Along the
dorsal border are 12 teeth, the first, second, and third of which
are situated on the carapace. These are separated by wider
intervals than those immediately following. The ninth and
eleventh teeth are also farther apart than those immediately
** Fauna Japonica. Siebold (1833), 1, 171.
" Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandisch Ost-Indien (1892),
2, 440.
* Reise der Osterreichischen Frigatte Novara (1868), 2, 115.
''Zool Jahrb., Systematik (1897), 9, 774.
342
The Philippine Journal of Science
k
^
^
<
1
1
n
3
m a
(+•
CQ
OS ,'
O P
3
'S'S
n
3
& I
(S (»'
*«
^
OQ
m
ill
lis
lis
S E
3 3
S S 5
•s .-s . 1
i
fl P 3
Bo, o
2.S 8
OD
V
4i
ere
o S c
4J U 4-
1°^
•^ s i g 1 s 1
OS o a c s .t
1 8 ^ & 2
lull'"'!
<
H <! C
^ ^ <
iz; << iz; <5 O <
<
<J {S
^ <J Z
1
1
Jq
>>
m
g
+
X
3
O
1!
1
3
&
OS
0]
s
.
03
3
&
a
3
•Si
u
t
2
11
ft g
1
1.
It ^
OD
J
-£
%
I
c
\\
1 °
Is
c
c
C
a
+
8
Is
S.1
*H OQ t 00 u^
l" O Uj ft tw ^
V ^ ^ o i
§ S "H .^ 0
i 2 5 2 e
o:
c
C
1
1
1 s •« " t:
a '©33
' rt "^ X ft o
3 " ft X g i
ii "V B o ? ^
h
H <3 O
<! 3 <
;q<H^<Ohqo<U<h40<J<Jb5
a>
Is
11
1
1^
1
1
.jC
4-
11
ill
o fi >^
'S -5 .
11
1
|2
1
.£3
ii
li
-1
I
3
1
1
1
1
111
^ i: •B
i a %
>> -M «H
2 IS E
sl
1
Ill
2 -^ "'.
2 3 -e
i § §
E & S
"3 .Q X>
o
1 a ^ i -g
6 -^ o S §
"^ +J 13 "^ X5
^ o g ^ i>
II ^ -^ S
o
Q
4J
3
s
s
U5
o
i
1
0
0
1
o
0
o
o
o o a
1 s s
£i \a iti
-c
3
s
z
•x.
s
t:
III
H
<< H <5
< rA ^
<J << W <J hJ
<
<
H
<J <J rH-
CO
U5
« 6
\,
\
lO
CO •* rf
Ili CO "^
"^Jt Tf Tj« lO CO ^
(M
■^
T}<
■^
to
CO ■<* '<*
\
;::?;:?;::;
V "v "^
"\ \ \ \ 7* \
>
\
\
•\
^
\
\ "\ \
CO
^ ^ ?^
CQ M rH CO lia CO
CO
c<
C^
(N
c^
CI T-< N
O u
1-i
^ ^ ^ ^ « ^
r-t
fH tH rH
tf o
o
(N
S-l
Carapace
length
(pos-
terior
face of
eye to
posterior
border of
car-
apace) .
O O VO
00 N eo
lO O U5
t-' t-^ oi
O O U5 O O O
o' c> d oi d o
O
O
d
lO
o
d
O
o
d
o o o
d M 1-5
M (M
(M <N <N
C4 <N CO N CO CO
eo
«
CO
CO
00
CO
CO CO
o o
%6 tA
Body
length
(tip of
rostrxim
to tip of
telson).
U)
§ n
kfi O ift
^ g SJ
kO O Ift
III
O no lO O lO o
1 1 1 s s ::i
lO
U5
o
o
3
o
o
o
■-4
1
«
J^
i
^
•b ^5 ^D
"O ^3 "0
•b '^^ ^3 "D "o ^D
"o
b
b
b
b
^
\) ^-) b
d
5?
^
* CJ| CO
^ lO «£>
t- 00 OS O rH ^
00
3
lO
to
t-
00
0» O tH
tH
»-< <M C<J
IX, D, 4
Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
343
«H O JL
g X
*^ s *=• »
?5
5 •-
C0 X
O O
6 e8 fi ■«
O
&
H
o o
^1
X5 C ^
<j O <J
^'S
43 «M O
73 -5 T
►J o
e *
1-4 ^ ^ -^ ^ 4J
.^ 'S
O
;= ^
O ft g ^ ^
■*^ *^ "tS rt 0)
^ G 'T. _! -r: .P
<5
m O
H <J H PM
8 1
eo M (N CO
\ \ "^ >v. -\ \ --x
d CO CO M (M CI N
9 ?^
O O O lO
O O us lO O lO o
•^;H T-trH WtN't (N
O O lO o
00 o> 1-5 ^
^u ;:: ?i y
O U3 O O U5 O O
in lo ci c^ t- :^ t;:
M M OJ eo CO 222 "^
\a o o
iH to CO
t- OO OS
^^■b^ ^'b'b'b^^'bCH- Ofo+ oocM- Of o
i:3g5SS S&5SS^53§S n^
at
344
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
o
.I
-si
•J
O O „ "
-hJ3 • S I
I I I I o
I I I I en
<«{ fi< fe
So 73 ^ -a
bo *S bo
G cJ C
ft ^ "ft
bfl -c b« ■
o £* o
^ CO ;?;
o o o o o . _
73 t3 TJ TJ T3 13 T3
«
£ ««
I ^ !2; o :z;
lOOOU5000U3iLOOOOkOiOOO»OOU30»00
§j s I g Si g* ^ i o 8 g' § o I s ^ I ^ 1 1 1 g
U300U3kOiOU50000U3kOOlOO»000000
i-HT}<fr>'<foi-^u3»ococ<i
«ooo»gioui«5'X)irft>
T-(i-tr-lTHrHiHr-«THTH
O O O kO «o
CO (m' C> U3
OOOOOOU5I0U5OOOOOOOO
05 t- O Oi o> o
r> lO t- 05 00 00 (3>
r-l Cvj T-H iH r-( rH W
OOOOOO10OU5OOOOU0OU5OOU5OO
00 0> r-J id 00 i-H «5
th CO tj< ca "^ M
«0 CO U3
U30»rtU500U5tO»00>OOOOOoOOOOlOO
I lo «o CO «>
Cv] N CVI C4
»r> eo CO «c5
§1 55' Si §^ §i §^ ^ s* s s* % gj ^
kAOlAOOiOlOOUaOkOO
t- 00 «0 U3 t-
lA U3 la
c4 t-i
o o o o o o
C<Jr-tC0r-(MrHrHtHr-(r-(r-«rH
OOOU50»OOU30000»OUJlOkOOOOOiOO
S S* S S ^ 4 n ^ ^ §S 5 :5 S ^' S 5* 9 n 4 i 2§ ^'
Sex.
'r)'bV)^^'b"o«D'b'b"o^)^D'b^«o"D^3^D'b^D'b'b
1
rH^C^eOTjiU5^t>000»OrHNe9'*IO«OI>000>OrHCl
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
345
COOO-^'<i<COt>Or-tQ
OOOOOOOOCC- _ - _ -
<U ^ S) ^ 'O
•^ '^ 'O tJ ID 13
O mZ
TS
^
rt
6
53
>
o 1
J2; I
lO U5 VO
o
O
o
o
o
kO
o »o
lo \a
o
o
o
lO
1 g g
g
g
i
i
^ s
% S
c-
c-
a
i
o
in
o
o
o
US
us
o
us
us
o
o
o
o
o
us
us
§3
'X>
tr-
^
§
§
g
Cv|
§5
us
o
a>
•"*
CO
CM
^
s
\a
o
io
o
o
o
us
o
us
o
U5
o
o
o
o
o
o
ri
<— >
on
o
CM
lO
<£>
o>
Ci
CM
'Jt
-^
CO
a>
CO
w
C^
CO
CO
CO
■^
■^
lO
us
US
o
us
o
us
us
o
us
o
us
o
o
o
o
us
^
s
^
o
^
■^
Ci
Tf
CO
t^
r4
en
CO
00
CO
CO
CO
CD
us
us
00
00
CM
CM
CM
o
o
us
O
us
us
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
us
o*
.n
US
CM
g
■^
y-i
o
«5
o
o
CO
s
Tj<
O)
55
TJ«
CO
(N
us
Tj*
t-
t-
lO
to
O
o
o
o
us
o
us
o
o
o
us
o
o
us
o
05
o
00
r^
t-
<x>
us
r^
00
us
00
00
o
00
CM
cm"
00
<M
N
co
CM
CM
CM
00
CO
lO
»o
lO
o
US
us
us
o
us
o
o
o
us
o
o
us
us
«d
5B
CO
e^'
a>
CT>
CTJ
00
oo
00
00
s
o>
to
o
rM
<£>
a
■b
"D ^) ^D
•b
^5
\>
\5
\>
o
o
CM-
o
Of O CH-
o
03
•'f
us
to
t^
00
a
o
^
CI
s§
•^
^
o
r-
00
Oi
CM
C4
CM
CM
CO
CO
346 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
posterior to them. On the lower border are 3 teeth, the distal
one of which lies some distance back of the tip. The peduncle
of the first antenna reaches almost to the tip of the rostrum.
One-third of the carpus of the fully extended first pair of legs
extends beyond the antennal scale.
The left cheliped, which is a little longer than the right (not
true of all specimens), measures 266.5 millimeters, being a little
less than twice as long as the body. The immobile finger extends
farther forward than the mobile finger, and is not curved in-
ward so sharply. The fingers are a little more than one-half
as long as the palm (1 : 1.81), and in this specimen they gape;
that is, when their tips meet, there is an open space between
the fingers. Of the 2 teeth situated near the proximal end of
the mobile finger, the more distal one, which is subacute and
flattened laterally, is 2 millimeters high and 2 millimeters wide
at the base. The more proximal one is smaller, less acute, and
is flattened laterally. It measures 1.5 millimeters in height and
1 millimeter at the base. The cutting edge of the mobile finger
is seen with difficulty, being simply a very slightly raised ridge.
On each side of it is a row of 12 plainly visible tubercles, which
do not extend to the tip. There is no thick coating of hair as
in Palaemon nipponensis. On the immobile finger, which is also
without the thick coating of hair, is a large subacute tooth, which
is situated a little posterior to the distal tooth of the mobile
finger. It is conical in shape, measuring 2.5 millimeters in
height and 2 millimeters in width at the base. Back of this
tooth may be seen a series of 4 closely set teeth. The most
anterior of the 4, which is the largest, is on a level with the more
proximal tooth of the mobile finger. The second, third, and
fourth decrease gradually in size, and the last 2 are incompletely
separated. A series of 8 or 9 tubercles, similar to those on the
mobile finger, is situated along the inner side of the very in-
conspicuous cutting edge. The palm, which is almost cylindrical
in cross section, is flattened slightly laterally. It is of about the
same size throughout its extent, and is shorter than the carpus.
The cylindrical carpus, which reaches its greatest diameter (9
millimeters) some little distance back of the distal end, is much
shorter than the chela, while the slightly curved merus, which
is almost cylindrical near its distal end and decidedly flattened
near its proximal end, is much shorter than the carpus, showing
a ratio of 1:1.5. The much flattened ischium has its dorsal
and ventral surfaces divided into 2 regions by a longitudinal
groove. The lengths, in millimeters, of the parts of the cheliped
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 347
just described are as follows: Propodus, 105.5; fingers, 38.5;
palm, 70 ; carpus, 84 ; merus, 45.5 ; ischium, 28.5.
The telson of this specimen ends in a subacute spine. The
extemolateral spines are slightly less than 1 millimeter in length,
while the internolateral spines, which extend with a little less
than one-half their length beyond the tip of the telson, measure
about 1.5 millimeters in length. (See description of telson in
smaller specimens.)
Patches of very obtuse spines are present on the anterior sur-
face of the carapace. Similar spines are seen on the ventral
and lateral parts of the pleura, on the dorsal surface of the
sixth somite and the telson, and on exposed parts of the dorsal
and ventral surfaces of the uropods. These spines are especially
numerous on the last three structures named.
The ischium of the first pair of legs and the 5 distal segments
of the third, fourth, and fifth pairs of legs are clothed with acute
spinules. Eight or 9 indistinct longitudinal rows of blunt, small
spines (much smaller than the tubercles) are seen on the mobile
finger of the chelipeds, and the immobile finger bears 7 or 8
rows of similar spines. The palm is armed with 26 or 27 more
distinct longitudinal rows, made up of larger and more acute
spines than those of the palm, the spines of the ventral and
dorsal surface being the largest. On the carpus are 17 or 18
longitudinal rows of spines, similar to those of the palm. A
dorsal ''linear space'' is evident, and a ventral ''linear space" is
very conspicuous. It will be seen that these spaces are not
situated on the lateral surface as in the local P. carcinus. The
merus presents about the same number of longitudinal rows made
up of spines similar to those of the carpus, and the dorsal and
ventral "linear spaces'' can still be seen, although the former is
not very clear. There are 14 or 15 rows of acute spines on the
ischium, the largest ones being situated on the dorsal, ventral,
and internolateral surfaces.
Rostrum and antennal scale. — The 8 female specimens in our
collection, when arranged according to increasing body length,
show a gradual reduction in the length of rostrum relative to
the length of the antennal scale. In a specimen 47 millimeters
long the rostrum extends slightly beyond the tip of the antennal
scale; in others, 69, 71.5, and 86 millimeters long, they are equal;
in specimens 93, 97, 99.5, and 118 millimeters long the rostrum
fails to reach the tip of the antennal scale by 2.5, 1, 3, and 3
millimeters, respectively. The rostrum extends 1 millimeter
beyond the tip of the antennal scale in the smallest male specimen
348 2^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
(33.5 millimeters) ; in specimens from 90 to 96.5 millimeters long
the tip of the rostrum barely reaches the tip of the antennal scale ;
in those from 96.5 to about 124 millimeters long the rostrum
usually fails to reach the tip of the antennal scale by from 1
to 3 millimeters; and in specimens from 124 to 144 millimeters
long this distance usually increases to from 4 to 6 millimeters.
The specimen (111.5 millimeters) indicated in Table II is a male
which has assumed adult male characters (young mature male),
although its body is still only of medium length. It is covered
with a dirty brown sediment, and its chelipeds are enormously
developed relative to the body length. The rostrum fails to
reach the antennal scale by 7.5 millimeters. The chelipeds, al-
though much shorter than those of the specimen 144 millimeters
long (Table II), are almost perfect miniatures, showing prac-
tically the same proportions. While the decrease in the relative
length of the rostrum with reference to the antennal scale is
not so regular with increasing size as in the local form of
Palaemon carcinus, it is, nevertheless, plainly apparent.
Curvature and dental formula of rostrum. — Specimens of dif-
ferent ages show such a remarkable difference in the shape of
the rostrum, that if I had not seen all of my specimens when
alive I should hesitate to consider them as belonging to the
same species. In this respect P. philippinensis reminds one of
the variable form of the rostrum in P. weberi de Man ^^ and
P. dispar von Martens."^ Certain characteristic markings men-
tioned under the section devoted to the color of the living in-
dividuals and not found in any other species in our collection
were present in all. The youngest males (33.5 and 39.5 milli-
meters) and the youngest females (47 to 71.5 millimeters) have
the dorsal border of the rostrum almost straight, only a very
slight convexity over the eye being apparent. As the "males
feminises" (those similar in general appearance to females) and
females increase in body length, the convexity becomes gradually
more pronounced. In the largest males it is very striking, but
in the largest females it is not so much so. The young and
middle-aged males which take on the adult characters usually
show a greater curvature of the dorsal border of the rostrum
over the eye than do the "males feminises" of the same size.
Correlated with this increase in the convexity, as these males and
^ Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandisch Ost-Indien (1892),
2, 421.
^ Arch. /. Naturgesch. (1868), 5, 41.
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 349
females become more nearly mature there is an increase in the
distance between the longitudinal ridge on the side of the rostrum
and the dorsal border. At the same time there is a decrease
in the relative length of the rostrum, so that the rostrum of
younger individuals is a rather narrow blade while that of the
older individuals is a broader blade.
The dental formula for the males (33.5 to 144 millimeters) is
11 12 13
jc-^^c — ^ — ^, while that for the few females in our collection is,
^, 6, 4, 5
11 12 13
with one exception, — '-o-j — • As in the local form of Palaemon
carcinus, there is no evidence that the number of teeth on the
rostrum increases with age. It should be mentioned that the
exception referred to above is a female 93 millimeters long, in
18
which the rostral formula is -^ (Table II). This specimen has
recently carried eggs, and has a rostrum similar in shape to
the largest males. The living color markings agreed exactly
with those of other females of this species. The chelipeds, in
shape, armature, and proportion, are much like the chelipeds
of specimen 37 (97 millimeters) indicated in Table II. I have
hesitated before diagnosing this individual as P. philippinensis,
but as I can find no character which would rule out the specimen,
except the large number of teeth on the dorsal border, I am
forced to include it. In young and middle-aged males the teeth
9 and 10, or 10 and 11, or 11 and 12, or 12 and 13 on the dorsal
border of the rostrum are more widely separated from one
another than those farther back. The comparatively wide space
between any two or any three of the teeth just mentioned is very
evident in the young, but it decreases gradually as the animal
grows larger, until in the largest males these teeth are almost
evenly spaced. Similar prominent spaces are seen on the young,
middle-aged, and older females. The first, second, and third
teeth are usually found on the carapace in both males and females,
although occasionally the third is astride of the edge of the orbit.
The distance between the first and second and usually also between
the second and third is greater than that between the teeth
immediately succeeding. The lower border of the rostrum in
both sexes and at all ages curves upward in its distal two-thirds,
but this upward curving is not so pronounced in old age. The
most distal tooth of the lower border is almost invariably at a
considerable distance from the tip of the rostrum.
350 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
The specimens of Palaemon philippinensis in our collection
bring out the following facts concerning the rostrum in this
species :
1. The rostrum increases in length as the body grows longer.
2. Its relative length compared with the length of the antennal scale
becomes less with increasing age, and only in the young does it
extend beyond the tip of the scale.
3. The convexity of the dorsal border over the eye increases as the indi-
viduals grow more mature, and as a result the distance between the
longitudinal ridge on the side of the rostrum and the dorsal border
increases greatly.
4. The wide spacing between the teeth near the tip of the rostrum decreases
with age, and almost disappears in old males.
Relative position of first antennas and rostrum. — The peduncle
of the first antenna retains the same relative proportions with
reference to the antennal scale of the second antenna throughout
life, and never extends to the tip of the scale. Generally in
young and middle-aged males and females the peduncle of the
first antenna extends to about the third or fourth tooth of the
lower border of the rostrum, but in the largest specimens, espe-
cially the males, it reaches or almost reaches the tip of the
rostrum. Small males which have taken on the mature male
characteristics (young mature males) also sometimes show the
tip of the peduncle even with the tip of the rostrum (Table II,
No. 13). The relative position of the tip of the rostrum and
the tip of the peduncle of the first antenna at different ages
reminds one of the condition in the local form of Palaemon
carcinus, although in a series of Palaemon philippinensis sly-
ranged according to increasing body length the approximation
of the tips of the peduncle and rostrum does not take place so
gradually and uniformly with increasing body length as in the
former.
First pair of legs, — In the smallest males and females a portion
of the propodus extends beyond the tip of the antennal scale,
while in larger males and females a portion of the carpus is
also seen extending beyond it (Table II).
Chelipeds, — The chelipeds of small males and females are
shorter than the body, and with certain exceptions this condi-
tion persists with increasing body length, although the chelipeds
of larger individuals show a relatively greater length compared
with that of the body (Nos. la, 2, 5, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 17, 18,
19, 20, 21, 22, 25 (?), 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39). The excep-
tions mentioned are the large mature males (Nos. 26, 27, 28, 29,
30, 31) and the smaller males which have taken on the mature
characters (Nos. 3, 4, 6, 11, 13, 15, 23, 24). By mature charac-
IX. D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 351
ters are meant the gaping of the fingers, the proportionately lar-
ger teeth on the fingers, the exceedingly long chelipeds, and the
roughness of carapace, pleura, sixth abdominal somite, and
telson.
All specimens of P. philippinensis in our collection possess
fingers which are shorter than the palm, the next to the smallest
male (No. la) showing a proportion of 1:1.22 and one of the
largest males (No. 30) a proportion of 1:1.91. In general, as
the body grows larger the palm increases in length at a greater
rate than the fingers. A similar but much less marked pro-
portional increase occurs in the females. The fingers of P. phil-
ippinensis show no signs of the long hairs or of the felted hairs
which are characteristic of P. nipponensis and P. carcinus,
respectively, but all specimens in the collection possess a few
scattered tufts of hair, which do not obscure the underlying
structures in the least. The teeth, which have been described
above as present on the fingers of a large male, can be seen in
the youngest males and females only with a high-power magnify-
ing lens. They soon increase in size as the' animal grows larger
(90 millimeters), and become visible to the naked eye. In the
small males (No. 3 and others that have taken on the mature
form and which for convenience I have called young mature
males) the teeth are conspicuous, their size being in proportion
to the length of the cheliped. Two teeth on the mobile finger
and 1 tooth (the distal) on the immobile finger are present in
the youngest males and females (Nos. la and 32). In females
and "males feminises" of the size of No. 19 the small teeth back
of the proximal tooth on the immobile finger are just beginning
to form. The tips of the fingers curve inward at all ages and
meet, except in the largest males and sometimes in the young
mature males, where the immobile finger curves in much less
and extends beyond the mobile finger. In small males, in "males
"feminises," and in all the females with the possible exception
of No. 39, the fingers do not gape when closed, but in young
mature males and especially in the old males the gaping is
conspicuous. A keellike cutting edge is found on both fingers
of all males and females. This is rather high and sharp in
young males (including "males feminises" and young mature
males of smaller size) , but it decreases in height markedly with
increasing body length in the young mature males and less
rapidly in the "males feminises" and females. In the large
males Nos. 30 and 31 and the older young mature males Nos.
23 and 26, the keel is reduced to an inconspicuous raised line
which can be seen only with a magnifying lens. The tubercles
352 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
mentioned in the description of the large male as being present
along the outer and inner sides of the cutting edge of the mobile
finger and along the inner side of the immobile finger cannot be
seen in the smallest males (Nos. la and 2) nor in any of the
females except No. 39, in which they are slightly developed.
In the smallest young mature male (No. 3) they show slightly,
becoming better developed in specimens of larger size (Nos. 4,
6, 11, 13, 15, 23). "Males feminises," when sufficiently large
(Nos. 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 27),
show the tubercles, but in one of these. No. 17, the row on the
outer border of the cutting edge of the mobile finger is re-
presented by only 2 tubercles. In No. 18 this row is not present,
but the inner row on each finger is well developed, while in
Nos. 7, 8, 9, and 10 only very few tubercles along the inner
border of both fingers are seen. Numbers 14, 16, 20, 21, 22,
24, and 25 show the characteristic 2 rows on the mobile and
1 row on the immobile finger.
The palm in specimens of all sizes and sexes is similar in shape
to that of the larger male already described. In young speci-
mens the fingers are a little shorter than the palm (1: 1.22 in
No. la), but as the body length increases the palm grows faster
than the fingers, until in the oldest male the fingers are only
a little more than half the length of the palm. It is probable
that smaller specimens than those in our collection would show
the fingers equal to, or even shorter than, the palm.
The carpus, which is cylindrical in cross section and a little
shorter than the propodus in all our specimens, increases grad-
ually in diameter, passing from the distal to the proximal end.
The palm is always shorter than the carpus, but a comparison
of lengths at different ages indicates, in general, that the palm
grows a little faster than the carpus, although considerable
variability is seen in a series arranged according to the body
length.
The relative lengths of the merus and carpus are shown in
Table II, where the specimens are arranged according to increas-
ing body length. Here again much variability appears, but if
the young mature males are separated the variability is not so
marked. The* proportions given in Table II show clearly that, in
general, the merus of the male does not increase in length as
fast as the carpus. This condition is not evident in the small
number of females we have in the collection. A similar and no
less striking increase in the proportion of the merus to the car-
pus may be seen in the specimens of P. ritsemae de Man examined
IX. D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 353
by Coutiere,^^ and I believe that large series of P. idae Heller ^^
and P. rtidis Heller ^^ will show the same thing. The merus,
which is flattened dorsoventrally along the proximal part, be-
comes almost cylindrical in cross section and of greater diameter
at the distal part. As in other palaemons, the merus grows more
rapidly than the ischium. While Table H shows that there is
some variability in the proportion between the merus and ischium
when a series of specimens is arranged according to increasing
body length, it may also be seen that when the measurements for
young mature males are separated from the rest this variability
is much reduced.
The description of the shape of the ischium given for the
largest male applies to specimens of all ages and sexes.
The chelipeds of young specimens show spines on the palm
and anterior part of the carpus, but the "linear spaces'' are not
distinguishable. The covering of spines increases as the animals
become larger, but it is not until they have reached about the
middle size that the spines become apparent on the fingers and
ischium. The **linear spaces" then show clearly.
Third, fourth, and fifth legs. — The third legs are missing in
specimen la. One-quarter and two-fifths of the propodus extend
beyond the tip of the antenna! scale in the fourth and fifth legs,
respectively. The measurements for the propodus of the fifth
leg are 0.16 millimeter in diameter at the middle and 7 milli-
meters in length. In No. 16 the third, fourth, and fifth legs ex-
tend with two-thirds, two-fifths, and one-fourth of the propodus,
respectively, beyond the antennal scale. The propodus of the
fifth leg is 0.7 millimeter in diameter at the middle and 17 milli-
meters in length. A large specimen measuring 133 millimeters
(not indicated in Table H) shows one-fourth of the propodus
of the third leg extending beyond the antennal scale. In this
specimen the dactylus of the fourth leg extends beyond the scale,
while in the fifth leg merely the tip of the dactylus overreaches
the scale. The propodus of this leg is 19 millimeters in length,
and 1 millimeter in diameter at its middle point.
Telson. — The armature of the telson varies with the size, but
the difference may be due to wear. In a young female 47
millimeters long (Plate II fig. 21) the tip of the telson is long,
the extemolateral spines are well developed, and the interno-
lateral spines are very long, with almost three-fourths of their
'*Ann. Sci, Nat., Zool. (1900), 11, 314.
"^^ Sitzungsber. Akad. d. Wiss., math.-nat. Klasse, Wien (1862), 45, 416.
"Reise der Osterreichischen Frigatte Novara (1868), 2, 115.
354 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
length reaching beyond the tip of the telson. This condition
figured by Ortmann.^^ j^ older specimens (Plate II, fig. 2k),
however, the tip, the externolateral spine, and the internolateral
spines are proportionally much shorter.
Character of surface. — All females and all ''males feminises,"
with the exceptions of Nos. 20 and 22, present no areas of spi-
nules on the carapace, telson, or abdominal somites. Nos. 20
and 22 are slightly rough to the touch along the anterior part
of the carapace. All of the young mature males and the old
males show the characteristic areas of spinules described above
for the largest male specimen.
Eggs. — The eggs of P. philippinensis, when preserved, measure
about 1 by 1.3 millimeters.
Color of living specimen. — Palaemon philippinensis is not
brilliantly colored. The surface is translucent, showing an
underlying ground color of gray which is usually punctated
on the dorsal and lateral regions of the abdomen and carapace
with fine brownish red dots. The telson is usually bright
brownish red in color, although not conspicuously so. The fol-
lowing striking pigment marks which may be seen through the
translucent carapace are characteristic of the species (Plate II,
fig. 2m) :
1. Two usually brownish black lines running longitudinally on each side
of the dorsal median line of the carapace.
2. A conspicuous T-shaped dark pigment mark seen on the posterior part
of each gill cover.
3. Usually a dark, obliquely placed pigment mark immediately back of the
hepatic spine.
The first and second antennae are marked with brownish red
and show no blue color. Along the ventral border of the pleura
of the fourth and fifth abdominal somites is a purple band. The
first, third, fourth, and fifth legs are translucent and punctated
with reddish brown dots, while the chelipeds are dark in color
and marked longitudinally with dark greenish bands. The color
of the pigment varies somewhat in different specimens and also
probably in the same specimens at different times. The color
disappears almost entirely after preservation. In the young
mature males and sometimes in the adult males a covering of
brownish sediment often obscures the color, but the sediment
may be rubbed off, leaving the markings visible.
Localities. — We have in our collection 31 males and 8 females,
all but one of which were taken in San Juan River (usually
^^Zool Jahrb.^ Systematdk (1891), 5, Tafel XLVII, Fig. 4.
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 355
fresh) which empties into Pasig River near Manila. The one
specimen j,ust mentioned was captured in an estero (brackish
water) emptying into Pasig River in the city of Manila. It is
very probable then that P. philippinensis might be taken in
considerable numbers in brackish water.
Palaemon sundaicus Heller. Plate II, figs. 3 and 3a-/.
There is in our collection a fairly complete series of a
palaemon which may be distinguished in life and sometimes in
the preserved condition from other species found near Manila
by the beautifully marbled or tortoise-shell-like markings on its
chelipeds. This form is probably Palaemon sundaicus Heller,"
although there are certain differences which will be mentioned
below. The young specimens in our collection agree very well
with the descriptions of de Man and Coutiere for P. sundaicus,
but our series contains a number of much larger males exhibit-
ing characters which have not been described by Heller, de
Man,3* or Coutiere.^^ I regret that I have not been able to see
the paper of Hilgendorf.**
A study of the females and the young males in our series
shows how closely they resemble specimens of like size described
by the authors mentioned above. The shape, length, and dental
formula of the rostrum and also the relative lengths of the
different segments of the chelipeds are strikingly similar. In
our collection the males reach a larger size than the females,
the former ranging from 59.5 to 108 millimeters, the latter from
53.5 to 89 millimeters. Unfortunately, both de Man and Coutiere
had small collections, the individuals of which were mostly fe-
males, and in all cases the males which they examined were no
larger than the smallest males in our series.
The fingers of the chelipeds in all of our males except the
smallest are covered with felted hair which increases in thickness
as the animals become larger. This does not seem to be true
of any of the males described by de Man or Coutiere, although
it must be mentioned that all of our specimens bearing this
felt are larger than any specimens described by these authors.
Another difference is that in our series we have males of medium
size (young mature males) in which the fingers gape widely
and in which the relative length of the segments of the chelipeds
^^ Sitzungsber. Akad. d, Wiss., mafh.-nat. Klasse, Wien (1862), 45, 415.
'' Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandisch Ost-Indien
(1892), 2, 437.
'"Ann. Sci, Nat, Zool (1900), 11, 332.
'"Land und Siisswasser-Dekapoden Ostafrikas (1899), 130.
356 '^h^ Philippine Journal of Science i^u
differs considerably from the specimens described by de Man
and by Couti^re.
The specimens listed in Table III were all seen by me while
they were still alive. Judging from certain characteristic color
markings, especially the pattern on the chelipeds, which were
present in specimens of all sizes and sexes, one could not fail
to include them under one species. Even the young mature males
(Nos. 15 and 20) with the exceptionally long chelipeds showed
the characteristic markings.
Notwithstanding the differences between our large males and
the smaller males described by de Man, I do not feel justified
in establishing a new species until larger collections of the Javan
form are made.
While I have not been able to see any figures or specimens
of the American species, Palaemon acanthurtts Wiegmann,^^
except Ortmann's ^^ drawing of the telson which agrees well with
young individuals of this species, the descriptions indicate that
it is a larger form, although I believe our series does not include
the largest specimens to be found. The proportion of the palm
to the fingers in old males and the shape of the rostrum are
different, but the coat of felted hairs on the fingers of the males
is present in both. I believe that Palaemon acanthurus Wieg-
mann and the form under consideration are closely related, and
I should not be surprised if, when further collections of Palaemon
sundaicMs from Java are made, older males with more mature
characters are brought to light which will ally the Javan species
closer to Palaemon acanthurus.
Rostrum and antennal scales. — The position of the tip of the
rostrum with reference to the tip of the antennal scale does
not vary much in our specimens. In both males and females the
tip may be even with, extend slightly beyond, or fail slightly
to reach, the distal end of the scale. It is possible, however,
that in larger males the rostrum may not extend so far forward.
Curvature and dental formula of rostrum. — There is little
difference in the shape of the rostrum in the males and females
of all ages. The distal third is turned upward somewhat, and
there is in nearly every case a gentle convexity over the eye.
Usually there are 3 rostral teeth on the carapace, the fourth
being over the edge of the orbit, and rarely are there 2 or 4
on the carapace. The rostral ridge divides the lateral surface
of the rostrum into an upper and a lower area which are of
''Arch, /. Naturgesch. (1836), 1, 150.
''Zool Jahrb., Systematik (1891) 5, Tafel XLVII, Fig. 5.
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 357
about equal width. Usually those teeth which are near the distal
end of the upper border are separated from one another more
than those posterior to them. The first tooth is nearly always
separated from the second tooth by a distance which is con-
siderably greater than the distances separating the teeth
immediately anterior to them. The dental formula for the
specimens in the collection is — — * ^ ' ' , but the large
4, 5, b, 7
majority of the females show a dental formula of — *^ — .
First pair of legs. — The first legs extend beyond the tip of the
antennal scale in all specimens; in the youngest, only the
propodus is seen beyond it, but in larger specimens more of
the first legs overreaches the scale, and finally in the largest
individuals as much as one-third of the carpus extends beyond it.
Chelipeds. — The chelipeds in this species are approximately
equal. All the females have chelipeds which are shorter than
the body, and the same is true of practically all the males until
they reach a length of about 77 millimeters. Beyond this size
the chelipeds are usually longer than the body, and in certain
specimens, Nos. 15, 16, and 17, which I consider to be young
mature males, they are relatively long. In the largest female,
No. 38, the tip of the merus extends beyond the antennal scale,
while in the smallest female. No. 25, three-fourth of the carpus
overreaches the scale. One of the largest males. No. 20, shows
more than one-half of the merus beyond the scale, while in the
smallest male only four-fifths of the carpus extends beyond it.
It will be seen, if reference is made to Table III, that the
fingers of all individuals are shorter than the palm, except in
Nos. 1 and 2, which are the smallest males in the series. In
the case of the males the palm seems to grow much faster than
the fingers, so that an individual 88 millimeters long (No. 14)
has a palm one and two-thirds times as long as the fingers. One
of the young mature males. No. 20, shows the palm to be one
and three-fourths times as long as the fingers. The largest males
in the series have chelipeds which are shorter than the body
length except in the case of No. 23. At first sight I considered
these specimens to be "males feminises,*' but upon examining
them more closely I find that they have well-developed spines
on the carapace and abdominal somites and I am of the opinion
that these individuals are old mature males whose chelipeds
are regenerating. The palm of the largest male. No. 24, is a
little more than one and one-half times the length of the fingers.
358
The Philippine Journal of Science
1
00
o
g
s
n
G
oi
A
« s
T3
J
CD
i I . I
1-3
3
e
8 . ° i § s -.
OQ _
< Q
1-
g 1
*H Oi
1 !
1 g
•H S ^ s s s ^
S a X ^ g E i
^lllllllllll^^
a
a
X
<
% "O
§
^
Xi
1 .
■'I^
n
^1
a
oc
BC
sc
ft
CO
0
g
a
!
0.
3
3 a 3 «H S •«
3 ;
»4
«M
&
8
§8 S- S^
S .^ g g 8 «
^ c8
§
. o
3
•H
"s^-g-l-Si
«M !
0.
1 .c
O
o •
6 "H c
;i c
•y c
C
0
S c
c
C
C
■s s 5 § ■a §
5ls |5 1
C
-Z i
5 o
P, O T
2 **
;r
O T
T
t
r
T
T
t:
sHlil
t:
si
<x, p
• o
H
o
O O H <J O <J
o I
•11
Ei
9^
|i
T
?^
2|
O g
t3
73
ts T3
73
« T3
§B
(3
(:
c c
C
•Q C
p
P
o
>» *s
>>
>>
^ >>
>>
'g
^
^
^ ^
^
2 «
c
>»
t»>
>. >»
>.
o
' O O ^3
43o*»+3oooo '^ooS+5
o o
C »© T3 X C
X-oXJC-o-onaTS CJSta-oS.c
c
•c -o
?
U) «
.$?
J^ .5f
« U
C M
o
1
>
w W
W
OQ W
W §
6 W
>
•35'
11
lO lO to lO ■»*
U5^tOU3lOCO«OlOlOVOlf5<CU3M5
U3
to kO
^ ^ > ^ ^
>^^>o^^^^^>^^^S
\
^^
ri
tH ^
«£
U3
O
S^.Sog"S .
O lO O O lO
OiOOOOiOlOiO
o o o o o o
o o
Carapa
lengt]
(post
crior fa
of eye
posteri
border
cara-
pace)
• ^ uj to* t-* od
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
t-* 00 0> Oi* O O O Cvj '^' ""t lO* ui U5 «> to
od
od od
^rM,Hr-(NC^l<NCS|<NW<NWNN<N
d
O C<l
.^v.g'S^
to kO lO o o
OOiOOOOOOOOU5»000
la
o o
Bodj
lengt!
(tipo
rostru
to tip
telson
g g f^
^D ^D "O
^0
8
II
1
•d "l
"D"D"D'b'b"D"0^5«D"D"0\)'D^3
•b
^D -b
o
th M eo '«»' lo
«>t-00<?>OjHMCD^^JOt;;jOOO»0
C4
§^ S3
Z
]X, D, 4
Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
359
of cari
arpus.
of car]
of car]
carpus
carpus
00 U CD so ^ «^
o
3 O rj
»H O H JCS 00 «n
U3
Mr- U,
uo.
Thrce-fou
One-third
Three-fou
Seven-eig
Two-third
Four-fifth
§
it
<
Tip of me
Almost al
Carpus,
Tip of me
ft T3 O
TJ 'O TJ TJ
8 g
•S 8
2 8
8:S
O «H ^ "H jC
V V A. V V
O O H O O
"O .g "Ta c TS
o .-
W CO W W W W
to to tjO
lO
ifi
lO
lO
kft
m
»o
to
IbO
kO
to
1
■\ \ \
*V
V
>
\
V,
•^
X
\
\
\
\
\
;:5 ?} ;:::
»H
<->
*"*
*"*
"
"
U5 lO O
o
o
o
o
lO
o
o
la
o
o
o
\a
S5 S S
■«f
■«1«
la
*£>
to
S
s
o>
g
d
^
§3
O lO o
o
o
o
O
o
lO
o
lO
o
o
o
o
gS5S
E5
K
s
s
s
s
^
e
gi
ss
s
tH ^ ^
x>
Ji
^3 O CH
o
o
Of
Of Of Of
Of
Of
Of
Of
Of Of
■^ \0 f£>
r-
00
o>
o
^
CJ
eo
^
vo
«o
t-
s
M N N
C4
C4
N
CO
eo
CO
CO
eo
CO
360
The Philippine Journal of Science
-2
O
CO
?5
<
O ® M 3
s s
S 2S ^
1 ^
o e»
S
s
i 55 ^ ^ ql 53 gJ
tA rH
rH r^ ,H
tA rA rA
! ^ ^- ^* ^- ^ »H
fi'-^gS
^
:
13
(U
I "*
>
>
>
«
«
4
-a
'0
i '^
1
l'
1 4
C
>>
^
^
! ^
1 >
§
«c
Xi
I T
t)
1
a
>
J
1 '^
oped.
Short, but fai
oped.
Increasing
Think
-2
1
i w
c
0
4i
i
c
-§
£
«c
"S
bo
c
ft
03
il
1
1
Oi
,^^ C
O O 0
O " 4J
I ' 4J ■ O O O
i'
^
'C
'C
'0
t:
:2 bo
0) X * T
1 J5 OT :?
'a
73
A .
o o
U3 lO lO
1 U3
U3 lO O
o
! O US »0 m O lO
^
3f2
t- t' a
i ^
1 g 2
S
1 83 1 8 §* ^ §*
6
C"-
i
o o
o o o
I lO
O O O
o
1 O O O O O lO
_3
M 1-H CO
i ^
U3 t-* «)'
a
1 ^ UD U3 t^ f* CO
^
r-f fH
1-1 iH iH
^
W
CD
CD
o o
O O tA
! o
O O O
o
1 O U3 O U3 O lA
3
5
N ^
IS ;3 ^
> tr-
CJ C^l (N
«
1 ^ §j -^' 00 00 00
S
n
o o
O lO o
! \a
O O lO
o
1 O O O O UJ O
1
3
g
S i^
W CvJ N
\ ^
CO ■Tl« w
00
! U3 (M* d N d r4
1 N CO CO r-5 r-t r-l
•i
!«
g
o
o
1)
o
o o
moo
\ to
o o
o
[ O O O O O U3
s
s
g
s
(M* W
JO to o
I <T.
U5 -Tjl cd
lO
< 00* kO tH f' 00 t-*
a
2
w ec <M
CO
1 rH (N (N
OQ
o o
o o o
I O
lA to lO
o
1 O O lO o »o o
1
i
^s
ass
1 ^
sss
s
' N JO CO d «o* l>
£
o o
U5 O O
! lo
U5 »0 U3
o
I O O lO O lO lO
sl
8
e
si S
g^^
i g|
§' Ig ^'
18
1 f f S* ?2 3 ^
1
^) "0
"d "o "o
«0 "D
■b "D 'b ^ *D ^ "b
"O "O "b "b CM- Of O
i
t- 00
» s s
S S
•^ lO «D t- 00 0> O
?3 §3 §5 S ^ S S
IX, D, 4
Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
361
•<tco»oSS>A-^S-«*wvo
o o o o o
o o o o o
oooooooo
tOOiOOUSkOWOOOO
■rf U3 ,-? '^' C> C4 T-H rH 00 U5 us
OO10OOU3OOU3U3O
00t>0d050>0>OTHO»-JM
US00000W0U500
CO Ci O p O W r^ ^ CO ^* «C
ooooooooooo
<N5c<iu5lO»O<»t>»Ha>C0iC>
ooooooooooo
OOOOlOOOOOiOO
t> 00* t-* Oi t-* O* r4 rH r-I tH CO
OOOOU30000U50
«5t^OOO«9eOCOlOkO«OTM
rHT-4TH(Mr-t<M(MCM(MC<ICO
o
CH-
o
o
O*-
o
o
Of
Of Of
Of
?5
OI
o
CO
CO
n
?3
^
^
^
CO
?§
362 ^^^^ Philippine Jour^ial of Science 1914
The fingers and palm are more nearly of the same length in
the females, the palm being one and two-fifths times as long
as the fingers in the largest individual. All of the male in-
dividuals, except the three smallest (Nos. 1, 2, 3), have both
fingers of the chelipeds covered with felted hair, a condition
which is not found in the females. The fingers of both males
and females are slender, and each has a rather low cutting edge,
extending from the teeth to the tip. The youngest males (Nos.
1 and 2) and all the females, except No. 25, show 2 teeth on
the mobile and 1 tooth on the immobile finger. In No. 25 only
1 tooth is seen, and this is situated on the mobile finger. The
males, Nos. 3 to 13 and 22 to 24, inclusive, show 2 teeth on the
mobile finger and 2 on the immobile, but in the young mature
males the teeth on the immobile finger are increased in number
by the addition of 2, 3, or even 4 confluent teeth, which are
situated between the most proximal of the two teeth just men-
tioned and the joint, a condition which is characteristic of
mature males in some other species at least.
The palm is almost cylindrical, that of the smallest measuring
2 by 2.5 millimeters at its middle and that of the large male,
No. 20, measuring 4.5 by 5 millimeters at a similar point.
The carpus is cylindrical in cross section, and increases grad-
ually in diameter passing from the proximal to the distal end.
It is shorter than the propodus and longer than the palm, but it
does not increase in length so fast as does the palm. In the
mature males there is a slight swelling of the carpus a little
posterior to the distal end.
The proportion of the merus to the carpus ranges from 1 : 1.33
to 1 : 1.77, and the measurements indicate that the carpus grows
faster than the merus. The latter is slightly longer than the
palm in the young but slightly shorter in old individuals. It is
always shorter than the carpus and longer than the fingers. The
merus, which is flattened dorsoventrally along the proximal part,
becomes almost cylindrical and of greater diameter at the distal
part.
As in other palaemons, the merus grows faster than the
ischium, so that the proportion between the ischium and merus
increases with increasing body length. In the young mature
males this increase is especially evident. The ischium is flattened
dorsoventrally, the upper and lower surfaces being divided into
two regions by a median longitudinal groove.
Third, fourth, and fifth legs, — The third, fourth, and fifth legs
extend with their dactyli beyond the tip of the antennal scale
in young individuals of both sexes. In older individuals as much
IX, D, 4 Co ivies: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 363
as one-fifth or one-third of the dactyli may extend beyond. The
propodus of the fifth leg (No. 1) measures 0.5 millimeter in
diameter at its middle and 8.75 millimeters in length. Similar
measurements for Nos. 24, 25, and 38 are 0.8 by 15, 0.3 by 7.5,
and 0.6 by 13 millimeters, respectively.
Telson. — Specimens in which the telson has not been worn
show the intemolateral spines extending about two-thirds of
their length beyond the acute median spine. The externolateral
spines are short and of about the same length as the median
spine. In some specimens the tip of the telson is worn and the
intemolateral spines are considerably shortened.
Character of surface. — The carapace and abdominal somites of
all females and males (Nos. 1 to 13, inclusive) are smooth to the
touch, and show no spines under a lens. Male specimens larger
than these have patches of spinules on the carapace, pleura of
abdomen, tergum of sixth somite, upper surface of uropods, and
the telson. These spinules are especially numerous on the young
mature males, and the surface is distinctly rough to the touch.
The surface of the first pair of legs is smooth, except in the old
males where the ischium and part of the merus are covered with
a few spinules. The spines on the chelipeds make their appear-
ance at an early age. Specimen 1 shows a few rather indistinct
rows of spines on the palm and distal half of the carpus. The
area of spines increases with the body length, so that in No. 4
it covers the proximal end of the finger, the palm, the carpus,
and the distal half of the merus. In No. 8 the condition is
similar except that the ischium also is covered. Young mature
males, as an example. No. 20, show a few spines at the proximal
end of the fingers and about 12 longitudinal rows of medium-
sized spines, which are distributed on the inner, ventral, and
dorsal surfaces of the palm. The outer surface of the palm is
covered with innumerable very small spines, which are not
arranged regularly in rows. A similar condition exists on the
carpus, merus, and ischium. The dorsal and ventral "linear
spaces'' are visible especially on the palm, carpus, and merus.
In middle-sized specimens the "linear spaces" are more con-
spicuous. The third, fourth, and fifth legs are smooth in all but
the largest males, where the propodus, carpus, and sometimes the
met*us are covered with very minute spinules.
Eggs. — The eggs of this species when preserved are almost
spherical, and average 0.5 by 0.46 millimeter.
Color of the living specimens. — The general surface of the
body owes its color mainly to the layer of pigment cells under
the transparent chitinous covering. The color is not always the
364 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
same in any one individual. It may range from green to blue
or even to brick red, and in old specimens these colors may be
partially obscured. No T-shaped, L-shaped, or diagonal mark-
ings are seen under the sides of the carapace, but in living speci-
mens the chelipeds are conspicuously marked, so as to appear like
tortoise shell (Plate II, fig. 3c). These markings, which are
probably the same as the marbled markings spoken of by de Man,
sometimes persist temporarily after preservation, but usually dis-
appear as do all other colors mentioned. The uropods are colored
a conspicuous red, and there is a purple spot on the postero-
lateral portion of the exopodite. The internal flagella of the first
pair of antennae are marked on their dorsal surface with bright
yellow, and similar yellow spots are also seen on the uropods
and telson. The color notes which have just been given apply
to both sexes, but there are certain markings which distinguish
the males from the females. A cream-colored transverse band
on the tergum of the third abdominal somite is present in all
the females of this species, but in the males it is much reduced in
size or almost absent. This band is found in some other species
which are described below. In the females the ventral border of
the pleura of the fourth and fifth somites has a blood-red color
which is absent in the males.
Localities. — We have in our collection 73 females and 24 males.
Most of these were collected in Obando River flowing into Manila
Bay near Manila (brackish water) ; some were taken in San
Francisco River (usually fresh), which is a branch of Pasig
River; others were obtained from an estero (often brackish)
emptying into Pasig River within the city of Manila. Nos. 2,
6, 7, 9, 12, 17, 19, and 21 (Table III) are from San Francisco
River.
Palaemon lanceifrons Dana. Plate II, figs. 4 and 4a.
The collection contains several palaemons which agree well
with Dana's ^® description of Palaemon lanceifrons. The fingers
of the chelipeds are about equal to the palm in most specimens,
although in the old mature males (Dana's specimen was evidently
a rather old male) the fingers are considerably shorter than the
palm and are two-fifths of the length of the propodus. (Plate
II, figs. 4 and 4a.) The propodus is a little longer than the
carpus in all cases and a little slenderer. Characteristic tubercles
(not mentioned in Dana's description), teeth, and thick hair are
'•United States Exploring Expedition, Crustacea (1852-1854), 13, 589.
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 365
present on the fingers. These structures are described below
in a description of a local form of this species.
The dental formula is — ' ^ J » and the shape and size
d, 4, 5
of the head and rostrum agree very well with Dana's figure.
The rostrum never extends beyond the antennal scale, and is
decidedly convex over the eye in older specimens.
The general surface of the body is sometimes dark and some-
times light. The color is due partly to closely set brownish
pigment spots, which often have a dark reddish tinge, and in
addition to this ground color there are patches of yellowish cream
flecks scattered over the surface. Usually the tips of the uropods
and the telson have a reddish brown color. The characteristic
markings of this species (Plate II, fig. 5g) are an almost straight
diagonal mark, an inverted V-shaped mark, and 2 marks shaped
like an inverted L. These are often bluish in color, and may
always be seen more or less clearly on the sides of the carapace.
The horizontal limb of the anterior inverted L extends poste-
riorly from the anterior border of the carapace, ventral to the
spines. The posterior inverted L is situated back of the anterior
inverted L, and its horizontal limb is on a level considerably
higher than that of the former. The diagonal mark, which
really lies on the tissues beneath the carapace and is seen on
account of the transparency of the latter, extends from the point
where the horizontal and vertical limbs of the posterior L meet
to the posterior margin of the carapace. Finally, the inverted
V-shaped mark lies directly above the anterior L. The first and
second antennae are never colored blue, but are usually marked,
especially in the male, with reddish brown transverse bars. The
second legs or chelipeds are mottled in a manner somewhat sim-
ilar to that of Palaemon sundaicus, but the coloring is reddish
brown and greenish cream, and does not resemble tortoise shell
in appearance.
Palaemon lanceifrons Dana, judging from our specimens,
is distinct from Palaemon idae Heller, The carpus is always
shorter than the propodus, and the proportion is about the
same throughout the series. Furthermore, the chelipeds of
P. lanceifrons are thicker and the rostrum is broader.
I agree with de Man's statement that P. lanceifrons is distinct
from P. sundaicus. The shape of the rostrum, the shape of the
different. The color markings and the tubercles on the fingers,
fingers, and the distribution of the hair on the fingers are
366 "^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
which are seen in our specimens of P. lanceifrons, are absent in
P. sundaicus.
Palaemon lanceifrons is not the young of Palaemon philip-
pinensis. The latter has differently shaped fingers, there is no
thick coating of hair on them, the eggs are much larger, and the
color markings are different.
De Man's *° suggestion that Palaemon lanceifrons Dana is
possibly identical with Palaemon dispar von Martens receives
considerable support from my observations. I believe that the
former is very closely related to the latter, the only differences
being found in the shape of the rostrum, the number of proximal
teeth on the fingers, the number of distal tubercles on the fingers,
and the shape of the tip of the immobile finger. Further col-
lections and an actual comparison of specimens of the two species
may show them to be identical.
There are 9 males and 24 females of this species in the col-
lection; they were all purchased in a Manila market. Nearly
all the females bear eggs. These measure from 0.5 to 0.7 by
0.6 to 0.8 millimeter.
A local form of Palaemon lanceifrons Dana, collected in San
Juan River near Manila, differs slightly from the specimens just
described. Except for minor differences, the chelipeds have the
same proportions and general characteristics. The rostral for-
mula is practically the same, but the rostrum is slightly longer
and is less convex over the eye.
Rostrum and antennal scale. — The rostrum extends about as
far forward as the antennal scale, but in some cases fails to
reach it or extends beyond it a very short distance.
Curvature and dental formula of rostrum. — The shape of the
rostrum does not vary much, but it must be added that there are
not many individuals in the collection and that they do not
show a very great range in size. The tip of the rostrum of old
and middle-aged specimens turns up slightly, but in the young
it is straight. The rostrum usually has its origin rather far
forward on the carapace, but in Nos. 5, 7, and 8 (Table IV)
it arises from about the middle of the same. Usually, there are
2 teeth on the carapace, and the 4 distal teeth at the tip of the
rostrum are more widely separated than the rest. The first and
second teeth are more widely separated than those immediately
anterior to them. The lateral surface of the rostrum is divided
^•^ Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandisch Ost-Indien
(1892), 2, 419.
IX. D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 367
into an upper wider and a lower narrower region by the usual
ridge. The dental formula varies somewhat I — ' ^' a^ — )*
First pair of legs, — In young males about one-half of the pro-
podus, in the middle-aged males the whole of the same segment,
and in the old males the tip of the carpus extends beyond the
antennal scale.
Chelipeds. — The chelipeds of the young specimen, No. 2, are
equal in length, but in all the rest of the specimens in which
the chelipeds are present they are unequal in length. This
inequality seems to increase with age, and it seems probable
that it is not due to injury and regeneration. Only in the mature
males, Nos. 7 and 8, are the chelipeds as long as the body. In
the youngest male only two-fifths of the carpus extends beyond
the antennal scale, while in the mature males from one-fourth
to one-third of the merus may be seen beyond it.
The fingers of the youngest male, No. 1, are longer than the
palm, slightly older specimens show the fingers to be a little
shorter than the palm, and the old mature males have fingers
which are much shorter than the palm. In specimen 8 the
proportion of the fingers to the palm is 1:1.66 (left cheliped)
and 1:1.44 (right cheliped). Thick hair is not present on the
fingers of the youngest specimens, Nos. 1 and 2, but it makes
its appearance on both fingers in slightly older individuals. The
mature males have a thick coating of hair, which covers all but
the tip of the mobile finger. The immobile finger bears a small
patch of hair, which is limited to a narrow region extending
as far forward as the middle of the finger on both sides of
the cutting edge. Four broad and inconspicuous tubercles bear-
ing a few stiif hairs are present along the inner side of the
cutting edge of the immobile finger. These are situated on the
swollen distal half, and are only seen in the mature males, Nos.
7 and 8. The mobile fingers of the specimens just mentioned
have 3 long low tubercles along the inner side of the cutting
edge. They are situated on the distal half of the finger. The
keel of the cutting edge is well developed but low in the young
and middle-aged individuals, and it becomes reduced to a raised
line in the mature males. The youngest male. No. 1, shows 2
teeth on the mobile finger and 1 tooth on the immobile finger, but
these may be seen only through a strong lens. In specimen
3, the beginnings of 1 or 2 confluent teeth posterior to the large
tooth of the immobile finger are present. In the mature males,
Nos. 7 and 8, there is an indication of the beginning of a
129877 4
368
The Philippine Journal of Science
I
%
il
s^!s
i§ g§ ^ ^ § s
1
m •
yA T^ rA rA y-\ tA
II
11
«• '2 .
1 ! ">
S
td
I 1 cc
H H O w O H O
§
i i 1
O O -M O •♦J I
« t) TJ ^ TJ ,C '
"H
o .' I ^
.s •
(3
J5 ; 1 OT
53 ;
«
^
C
o .
12
V cS
•M O
i^, "
t
Vm
o
ii
00
53
T
T
1)0
•h C
1
E
JH
§
§
«H
o
o «
S « 5
P.
00
X O o'S'm'S 0«h
o
)M
j^'O'O ao a-o o
p;;
S
1^1
O.
.; o o o o o ;
« rg rg fQ fQ rc3 ,
O
(1| H 04
H
00
1 1 i
8
2
43
ft
O O O O ITS o I
l> r-J r4 00 id U5 1
*
(N CO CO CO CO CO 1
!«
O
5*3
c "
ti S
^«
3
o o o »o »o O ]
i|
id xd «>' CO* «d «d ■
vi S
o
43 V
00
OS -^
Si
\a \a lo lo \a o !
•Hm
1
00
o o
73
"O tJ frt 'O
»d «o «o t-* t-' t> 1
ao,
§
o
1 § 1 §
«)
■m:p
>>
>,
rfl >i 43 >>
s
"85
§ !
,a ^ ^ ^
n
O O O O to lA 1
.2
A U A ti A A Xi JS,
3
00* oi oi -j o o I
b««6o«b«b0t*l«
1
o
;= > s > ;= s s ;=
04
wWwWwwww
o
U
•3 «•
tti
O U5 O o o o !
23
II
g
s
-sjJ id id t-* <»* «>* 1
►J
s
Carapace
lentrth
(poste-
rior face
of eye to
posterior
border of
carapace.
OU50U500010
n
U5 O lO O O lO 1
::j ^* s ;5 ;s ^ s s
'^
^ Tf< Tj! «d id »d I
^•ggo^
OOOiOlOlOtOO
U3 lO lO O O lO I
>»t3 O J3 I C
^ 18 S g g S' S S
ft
00 o> cri CO 1^* rH 1
Pl^ J pi ^' tf' h4 tf'
i
"o^o'b'b'b'b'b'b
d
•b \) "o ^
CO
OT
o
fHMC0-^IO(Ot*00
1
r-l W CO -^
z
IX, D, 4
Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 369
a la la
«> CO i>
O O lO o
t:^ ^ eo tA
«D t> 00 to
lo in o o
00 00 o 00
o o o
aj 05 00
o lO o o
TjJ -^ai lo ec
o o o
rj< CO rH
O O to O
lO O O O
o o o
t^ (£ tc
o o o o
cj o co' oi
U5 O O O
CO 00* (m' <m'
<N <N CO N
^4 tf >j tf J pi kJ «
^ \-)
370 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
third confluent tooth and the first or most anterior confluent
tooth is almost separated from those back of it. The large
tooth of the immobile finger measures 1 millimeter in height,
and the teeth of the mobile finger are about half as high
(No. 8).
The palm is cylindrical in cross section, and is always shorter
than the carpus. The proportion of the palm to the carpus
in the smallest specimen is 1:2, and in the largest mature male
the length of the palm is contained about one and one-third
times in that of the carpus (No. 8).
The carpus reaches it greatest diameter some distance posterior
to the distal end in mature males, and is cylindrical in cross
section. In all of our specimens it is shorter than the propodus,
but only slightly so in the immature specimens (Nos. 1-6).
The proportion of the merus to the carpus ranges from
1:1.37 to 1:1.76. The former is always longer than the fingers,
and it is longer than the palm except in the mature males
(Nos. 7 and 8).
Third, fourth, and fifth legs, — In the smallest male the
dactylus of the third leg, one-fourth of the propodus of the
fourth, and one-half of the propodus of the fifth leg extend
beyond the antennal scale. The propodus of the fifth leg meas-
ures 8 millimeters in length, and has a width of 0.33 millimeter
at its middle point. One-half of the propodus of the third
leg extends beyond the tip of the antennal scale in the largest
male, and one-third of the same segment of the fourth and
fifth legs overreaches the scale. The measurements for the
propodus of the fifth leg are 11.5 by 0.5 millimeters.
Telson. — The telsons of the two largest males and the smallest
male are damaged. The tip in uninjured specimens is sub-
acute, the externolateral spines fail to reach the tip of the telson
by a distance equal to their own lengths, and the internolateral
spines extend with three-fifths (No. 7) and two-thirds (No. 1)
of their lengths beyond the tip.
Character of the surface, — The carapace and abdominal
somites of all specimens except the two largest males, Nos. 7 and
8, are smooth. The last-mentioned mature males have the usual
spinules on the pleura of the abdomen, the tergum of the sixth
somite, the uropods, the telson, and the carapace. No spines can
be seen on the legs of the smallest specimen. The surface of the
first legs is smooth in all individuals except in the two largest
males, where a few spines may be seen on the ischium. The
chelipeds of No. 1 are smooth, and in No. 2 a few spinules
may be seen on the immobile finger, the palm, and the car-
IX, D. 4 Coivles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 371
pus, but these are only visible under rather high magnification.
In older specimens the spines are larger and cover the proximal
part of the immobile finger, the palm, the carpus, the merus,
and the ischium. The spines on the chelipeds are inconspicuous,
being broad, low, and subacute. ''Linear spaces" cannot be
distinguished. Very minute spinules may be seen, with the aid
of a lens, on the propodus, carpus, and merus of the third, fourth,
and fifth legs.
Eggs, — There are no females of this form in the collection.
Color of the living specimens. — The color of these specimens
agrees with that of the typical Palaemon lanceifrons Dana, the
pigment marks on the sides of the carapace being plainly visible.
Locality, — All of these specimens were captured in San Juan
River near Manila.
Palaemon lanceifrons Dana var. montalbanensis var. nov. Plate II,
figs. 6 and 6a4,
I have collected from the water supply of the city of Manila
at Montalban 72 specimens of a form which I consider to be
a variety of Palaemon lanceifrons Dana and one which in some
respects is very similar to Palaemon elegans de Man. It is char-
acterized by the decided convexity and shortness of the rostrum,
by the fingers being much shorter than the palm in large speci-
mens, and by the presence of tubercles in older males along
the sides of the cutting edge of the fingers.
This variety, which I have called P. I, var. montalhayiensls,
differs from P, lanceifrons as originally described by Dana in
the following particulars: The number of teeth on the dorsal
and ventral borders of the rostrum is less, the rostrum does not
extend so far forward, and the carpus is considerably shorter than
the propodus even in young specimens.
Palaemon lanceifrons var. montalbanensis, while very similar
to P. elegans de Man, differs as follows : The number of teeth on
the dorsal and ventral borders of the rostrum is less ; the teeth at
the distal end of the dorsal border of the rostrum are spaced more
widely ; the chelipeds are unequal in length except in the young ;
the relative length of the fingers and palm of the chelipeds is
different; the segments of the chelipeds are thicker; and the
tubercles along the sides of the cutting edge of the fingers are
distributed differently. Judging from the 37 males and 35 fe-
males in our collection, the mature females are much smaller
than the old males.
The following description applies to the large male listed as
No. 12 in Table V. This specimen, which measures 65.5 milli-
372 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
meters in length, has a rostrum which reaches the tip of the
peduncle of the first antenna. The dorsal border of the rostrum
begins at the middle of the carapace, but in this region and for
some distance forward it is without teeth. The ventral border
curves upward moderately, the tip extends directly forward,
and the ridge along the side of the rostrum divides the blade
into a wide upper and narrow lower area. The rostral formula
9
is ^, and the proximal and distal teeth of the dorsal border
are more widely separated than those between them. On the
ventral border the 2 teeth are situated well back from the tip.
The slender first pair of legs extends with the whole of the
propodus beyond the antennal scale.
The chelipeds which are decidedly unequal in length extend
with from one-third to one-half of the merus beyond the scale,
and are both considerably longer than the body. Of the two
chelipeds, the left is the longer, measuring 87 millimeters from
the tip to the proximal end of the ischium; the right measures
75 millimeters, and is slenderer. The description which fol-
lows applies to the left cheliped : The immobile finger curves in
less sharply and extends farther forward than the mobile finger.
It is considerably more than half as long as the palm (1 : 1.68),
and is distinctly swollen along its distal half. The keel of the
cutting edge is reduced to a raised line, but a short distance in
front of the proximal end of the finger there is a well-developed
triangular tooth measuring 1.5 millimeters in height, which
meets the cutting edge of the mobile finger and aids in preventing
the fingers from closing. Posterior to the tooth just mentioned
is a row of 3 much smaller confluent teeth (4 in specimen 14).
All of these teeth are obscured by a thick growth of hair, which
is limited to a narrow region on both sides of the cutting edge
as far forward as the middle of the finger. Along the inner
side of the cutting edge of the distal portion of this finger is
a row of 5 broad, low, and inconspicuous tubercles, which bear
a few stiff hairs. The sharply curved mobile finger is covered,
except at the tip, with a dense coat of hair and is not swollen.
The keel of the cutting edge is reduced as in the case of the
immobile finger. Along the cutting edge are 2 teeth, measuring 1
millimeter in height, which curve slightly posteriorly. The palm
is cylindrical in cross section and considerably shorter than the
carpus (1 : 1.26). The carpus, which reaches its greatest dia-
meter some distance back from the distal end, is much shorter
than the chela (1:1.28), while the merus, which is only slightly
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 373
flattened at the posterior end, is much shorter than the carpus
(1:1.57). The dorsal and ventral surfaces of the ischium
each present a median longitudinal groove. The lengths, in
millimeters, of the parts just described are as follows: Propodus,
33.5; finger, 12.5; palm, 21; carpus, 26; merus, 16.5; ischium,
11; total, 87.
The telson of this specimen ends in a subacute spine. The
extemolateral spines do not extend to the end of the telson, and
the internolateral spines extend with about half their length
beyond the tip. (See below, description of telson of smaller
specimens.)
Patches of poorly developed spines are present on the an-
terior part of the carapace. Similar spines are seen on the
ventral and lateral parts of the pleura, the dorsal surface of
the sixth somite, and the exposed parts of the dorsal and ventral
surfaces of the uropods and the telson. These spines are espe-
cially numerous on the last three structures named. The is-
chium of the first legs and the distal segments of the third,
fourth, and fifth legs are covered with very fine spines, which
are scarcely stronger than stiflf hairs. The immobile finger,
palm, carpus, merus, and ischium of the chelipeds are armed
with short blunt spines, which are larger in size and fewer in
number on the inner than on the outer surface of these seg-
ments. The mobile finger is spineless. "Linear spaces" cannot
be seen.
Rostrum and peduncle of first antenna. — An examination of
the 72 specimens in our collection shows that the rostrum may
extend as far as the tip of the peduncle of the first antenna,
may extend slightly beyond it, or may fail to reach it. In no
case does the rostrum extend to the tip of the antennal scale,
and there is no indication that the rostrum decreases in pro-
portional length with reference to the peduncle of the first
antenna.
Curvature and dental formula of rostrum, — There is little
variation in the shape of the rostrum, but in the old males the
convexity of the dorsal border is much more pronounced than in
the females or young males. The tip does not turn up, the ros-
trum begins about halfway back on the carapace, and 1 or 2
teeth have their origin on the carapace. In all specimens the
distal teeth of the dorsal border are more widely separated
from one another than the teeth immediately posterior to them,
and in the old males the first 2 teeth on the carapace are slightly
more separated than those which immediately follow. The ridge
374 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
along the side of the rostrum divides the blade into an upper
and lower region, the former being the wider of the two in
specimens of all ages. The dental formula is very constant
„ /8, 9, 10\
m all specimens V o"^ — f'
First pair of legs. — The first pair of legs in young males and
mature females extends with the tip of the propodus beyond
the antennal scale, but in the large males the whole propodus
is seen beyond the scale.
Chelipeds. — The chelipeds of the smallest males and all the
females are approximately equal. An examination of Table V
shows that in the males the inequality between the chelipeds in-
creases with the increase in body length and that the difference
in length is most marked in those specimens which show mature
characteristics (Nos. 7, 8, 12). While it is difficult to determine
whether this unequal length is the result of injury and regenera-
tion or whether this condition is always characteristic of un-
injured middle-aged and old males, the fact that none of the
specimens in the collection shows chelipeds of such unequal length
that there can be no doubt that the smaller one is regenerating
indicates that the inequality is characteristic. The chelipeds
of the females (Nos. 15, 16, 17), the "males feminises'* (Nos.
9, 11, 13), and the young immature males are shorter than the
body (Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) . Young mature males and old mature
males have the chelipeds longer than the body (Nos. 7, 8, 10, 12) .
In the smallest males, one-half of the carpus extends beyond
the antennal scale, while in the largest males one-third of the
merus may be seen beyond. The females do not show a great
range in size, and a small fraction of the carpus only extends
beyond the antennal scale.
The fingers of the youngest male. No. 1, are longer than the
palm, and those of the youngest female. No. 15, are equal in
length to those of the palm ; in slightly larger males and females
the palm becomes longer than the fingers, and in some of the
largest males the fingers are contained one and one-half times
in the palm. All of the male individuals except the smallest
one have felted hair on the mobile finger, a condition which is
not found in the females. There is also hair on the immobile
finger of the males, but this does not appear to be present until
the individual has reached a considerable size (No. 6). The
immobile finger of young mature males and old mature males
(Nos. 7, 8, 10, 12, 14) is swollen, and bears from 5 to 8
tubercles along the inner side of the cutting edge. The mobile
finger of the same specimens is conspicuosly curved, and bears
IX, D, 4 Coivles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
375
<
V
c
c
f^
?i
e
si
0)
cs
s
q
§rt
CO
'SI
?^
1^
&2
.&§
o o
2-i
«£
to »-
6 t
e 6 § S § iJ S 6 S «
I -E S ^ S -S 2 -s -2 I
V vj <u "^ V n V
c ® c ® c ® c
O S O S O S O
^
H
ago
S^sB.2^^ o o «^ (=•
O, t3 TJ
O a O ft O A P.
/-^ O o O O Jl O
H H ft.
O
^ '^ ^
'O 'T3 TJ
C C C
>> X >.
0) o a>
ua J2 ^
>>>>>>
43 +3
' ! .^ > .5? ^ .^ .^ .^
M H 55 W CO w w
CONCO COC<ICO(MMCO<NeO
be
VM ^ >^
00 o ^
lO O O lO o
U3OOOOOOOO10OU5
OOCOeOOO"^ »OtOl««>b-C»0000OiOirHT-«
o »o o o o
OOlOlOOOiOUSO
c>odt-*ocoioi«a>o
^ \) >o \) X •c^^•o"D^:."D^D•D'^^oocH
CSICO'^^kO <£>t-OCO»OrHC<ICO-«*'U5«>t-
376
The Philippine Journal of Science
o
I
e
I
Eh
§ =3
por-
n of
us to
pus.
§§ :?
S S
^ 5? S 2
g; S s
5 J§ g tg
^ ^
s
'^. ^
c- eo
tA kO
rH rH
TH >H
r-4 rH ■
tH tH
r-i rH
rH
tM ^*
iH rH
rA rA
rH
r-i r-5
r-i rH
2.2 fe§^
w_^w
Ut
ci
^
I »^
V
'O
«
1 (l>
bo
fl ••
bo
(«
c
3 S5
c
• C
«c
tC
' «
e
P
S
u
V
I ^
&
JQ
^
01
1
a
1 2
S
c
fi
0
.2
c
«3
c
g
I c
1
o
2
S
12
g
X
c
X
; o
-
0)
V 6
5 -^
+3
^
+3
I ^
-M
g
5
g
^
3
i
I -^
9
S
o
i
§
§!
§
§
§
i 2
g
1
s
1
d
s -
IS
-s
d
T3
*S
0
"t
1 3
1 **
1
00
6
§
6-
i
d
I
! O
J
c
«
•g
bo
)3
p.
el
m
O
-s
o,
o
o
o
o
o
o
V
Tl
TS
TS
'O
'd
o
tJ
2
V
I <y
<0
"3
c
"O
c
t:
• c
TJ
6
o
J_
_i^
_1^
^
^
_i^
-i-
^
i i
^_
Total
length
begin-
ing with
schium.
§3 §^
kO lA
eo CO
38
o o
lO
o o
O lO
E^8
O lO
c
s
1 o o
i 18 s
o o
S5 ^
V C"^
6
3
kO »o
lO lO
o o
o o
o
o o
lO o
o o
c
1 O IC5
O lO
Tf Tti
id id
id id
to* «d
<d <o*
00*
00* 00*
00* 00*
t-* c-'
c
< 00 00
r-i O*
2
o
<n
s
iO iO
O U5
o o
O kO
o o
o
O lO
lO kO
kO to
kfi
I o la
lO o
^ ^
to to
t-' c^
00 t-*
00* 00*
d
CO* N*
TjJ eo*
ai 00
kfi
1 r-5 r-J
ed id
il
tH
iH »H
rH
1 ,^ r-t
rH iH
m
O Ui
o o
o o
kO %o
o o
o
O lO
o o
to lO
C
1 O O
O O
1
P
fO <d
oi o
s's-
23' d
:i ^
13
d s'
C4 C<l
23 9
^
i s s
^* §5
k
1
t
to o
o o
O lO
kO o
lO o
lO
o o
o o
O iO
c
I o o
O lO
2
eo CO
«d t^
t-* t"^
00 00*
l> 00*
o*
JO ^
00 kd
r-j cn*
^
I rH* id
^* id
a
r-l
r-i r-«
<N
1 rH rH
CO .H
2
lA kO
O lO
O lO
o o
o o
o
o o
O O
o o
U3
1 kO o
lO o
a>
'* -^
id id
id id
tJ ^•
*6 fo
o>
O 00*
juj o
od r-*
W
i ''* ^
^' d
b«
c
(^
O \Q
O lO
o o
lO o
ta o
kO
o o
o o
O kO
kC
I lO O
lO lA
n
ao c-'
;:i?3*
c4 eg
id ^
s;?
OS*
§5 gj
ss*
SS
S5
i S* ^"
ss ^
a
J «
i«
^4 tf
)J Qi
J* «
iL^
iM
ni («
J «
^
ji i±S
t±£
1
^5
"b
^D
"O
"o
•b
•o
"b
^
O ^3
"0
6
CQ
eo
•^
lO
«o
t-
00
o>
S 7^
S3
%
IX, D, 4
Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
377
s §3
s s
1 I
G B
O "*
O O U5 O U5 O
O 0> CI
o o o o o o
<«)• rt< LO to lO lO
lO U5 O O O O
yef -^ lei id lo lii
kA U3 lO O ta lA
«o «c> <o t- c- t-
O us lA
lA eo r-5
lA U3 O O lA »A
CO CO LA lA «4< Tjt
lA »A O O lA O
00 CO '^ '^ ^ '^
O lA
lA
o o
O O
O lA
ai 00*
dS
^
\i
O
o
Of
S
^
tA
CO
t-
378 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
from 2 to 4 tubercles along a similar region. These characters
do not appear in young males, **males feminises," nor females.
The keel of the cutting edge of both fingers in young males and
all females is well developed but low. It decreases in height
as the body length increases, so that in the oldest males it is only
a raised line. In the youngest males and females (Nos. 1 and
15) no teeth can be seen on the fingers, but slightly older speci-
mens (Nos. 2 and 16) show 2 teeth on the mobile and 1 tooth
on the immobile finger. The condition last mentioned is char-
acteristic of all the females of this species in our collection, ex-
cept of No. 15, but an examination of the older males shows the
presence of confluent teeth back of the tooth, mentioned above,
on the immobile finger. These teeth make their first appearance
in No. 3, being represented by 1 or 2 very small teeth, but
with increasing body length the number increases to 3 or 4.
The palm is cylindrical in cross section, that of one of the
large males (No. 12) measuring 4 millimeters and that of a
small male (No. 3) measuring almost 2 millimeters in diameter
at the middle point.
The carpus is also cylindrical in cross section, and in females,
young males, and ''males feminises'' it increases in diameter
passing from the distal to the proximal end. The same is true
for young mature and old mature males, except that the greatest
diameter is reached some distance posterior to the distal end.
The carpus is shorter than the propodus and longer than the
palm or the fingers; the palm, however, grows faster than the
carpus.
The proportion of the merus to the carpus ranges from 1 : 1.33
in the smallest male to 1 : 1.64 in the largest, showing that the
carpus increases in length faster than the merus. The latter is
longer than the palm and is of the same length as the fingers in
the smallest male and shorter than the palm and longer than the
fingers in the largest. The merus, as in other species, is flattened
dorsoventrally along the proximal part, becoming almost cylin-
drical and of greater diameter in the distal region.
Third, fourth, and fifth legs, — In the smallest male, the dactyli
of the third and fourth legs and the tip of the propodus of the
fifth leg extend beyond the antennal scale. The propodus of
the fifth leg measures 5.5 millimeters in length and 0.1 milli-
meter in diameter at the middle region. One of the oldest males
(No. 12) shows one-third of the propodus of the third and fourth
legs beyond the tip of the antennal scale, while in the fifth leg
one-fourth of the propodus is seen beyond. The propodus of
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 379
the fifth leg measures 10.5 millimeters in length, and has a
width of 0.5 millimeter at its middle point.
Telson, — The telson of a large male has been described above.
In young specimens the telson tip is subacute, the externolateral
spines extend posteriorly almost as far as the telson tip, and
the internolateral spines overreach the tip by more than two-
thirds of their length.
Character of the surface, — The carapace and abdominal so-
mites of all females (Nos. 15, 16, 17), "male feminises'* (Nos.
9, 11, 13), and young immature males (Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)
are smooth to the touch, and show no spines under a lens.
Young mature males and old mature males (Nos. 7, 8, 10, 12,
14) have spines on the carapace, pleura of the abdomen, tergum
of the sixth somite, the uropods, and the telson. The surface
of the first pair of legs is smooth, except in the old males where
the ischium presents a few feeble spinules. No spines can be
seen on the chelipeds of the smallest male and female specimens
(Nos. 1 and 15). Very minute and feeble spinules, which can
only be seen under a rather high power lens, are present on the
palm, carpus, and merus of specimens Nos. 2 and 16. The
spines are more conspicuous in specimens Nos. 3 and 17. In
the medium-sized and large males, the spines become better
developed than in any of the females. Specimen 4 and all indi-
viduals of greater body length have spines on the ischium in
addition to the spines on the palm, carpus, and merus. Speci-
mens 7 to 14, inclusive, have also a few spines on the immobile
finger. The spines in this species are not conspicuous, being
broad, low, and subacute in old males. The **linear spaces"
cannot be distinguished. There are very minute spines present
on the merus, carpus, and propodus of the third, fourth, and
fifth legs, but these can only be seen in the old males.
Eggs, — The eggs of this variety when preserved measure from
0.5 to 0.7 by 0.7 to 1 millimeter. Those of P. lanceifrons measure
from 0.5 to 0.7 by 0.6 to 0.8 millimeter. The eggs of both are
smaller than those of Palaemon elegans de Man, which measure
1 to 1.1 by 1.4 to 1.5 millimeters.
Color of the living specimens. — The color of the general sur-
face of the body is similar to that of Palaemon lanceifrons Dana.
The pigment marks which are so characteristic of the carapace
of the latter are plainly seen.
Localities, — There are 37 males and 35 females of this variety
in our collection; all of them were collected below the dam at
Montalban near Manila.
380 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Palaemon lar Fabricius. Plate II, figs. 7 and la-h.
The widely distributed Palaemon lar Fabricius is represented
in our collection by a large number of specimens, most of which
were collected in Mindoro.
Rostrum and penduncle of the first antenna. — The rostrum in
our specimens usually extends to a point slightly beyond or
slightly behind the tip of the peduncle of the first antenna, but
in one case it reaches to the tip of the antennal scale. In males
possessing mature characters (chelipeds longer than the body
and fingers gaping widely and with heavy teeth) the rostrum
does not extend as far forward with reference to the tip of the
antennal scale as in the younger, immature individuals.
Cu7^vature and dental formula of rostrum, — In the youngest
specimens the tip of the rostrum is straight and there is almost
no convexity of the dorsal border of the rostrum, but older
specimens show a slight upward curve of the tip and a gentle
convexity over the eye. The first 2 rostral teeth are found on
the carapace, and usually are separated from one another by
a greater distance than are those farther forward. Frequently,
the third tooth lies partly on the carapace. The lateral ridge
on the rostrum divides the surface into an upper wider and a
lower narrower region. The number of teeth does not vary
7 8
through a very great range, the dental formula being 5- -q— ;<•
Z, o, 4
First pair of legs. — The whole of the propodus extends beyond
the tip of the antennal scale in all the specimens, and in most
individuals this distance is increased by from one-fifth to one-
third of the carpus.
Chelipeds. — The chelipeds of immature specimens are approx-
imately equal in length except in cases where one cheliped is re-
generating. Some of the mature males have chelipeds which are
about equal in length, but as a rule there is considerable inequal-
ity. Here again, as in many other palaemons, it is impossible
to determine from preserved specimens whether the inequality
is the result of injury or whether it is a normal, characteristic
condition. An interesting case is shown in Plate II, fig. 76,
where one of the chelipeds is considerably longer than the other
but the palm of the former has a smaller diameter and the fingers
are more weakly developed. Our collection does not include
the oldest mature males which may attain a body length of almost
200 millimeters. Specimens 10 and 13 are young mature males,
and their chelipeds are longer than the body. The younger im-
mature males, the ''males feminises*' (No. 12, Table VI), and the
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 381
females have chelipeds which are shorter than the body. In the
youngest individuals, as a rule, the propodus and part of the car-
pus extend beyond the antennal scale, with increasing size the tip
of the merus is seen beyond, and finally in the largest of our males
from one-third to one-half of the merus overreaches the scale.
The fingers of all individuals of this species in our collection
are shorter than the palm, in the young they are only slightly
shorter, but in the largest specimens the length of the fingers
is contained one and one-half times or more in the length of the
palm. A few stiff hairs are present on the fingers, but there is
no dense felt such as is seen in some other species. Young
males, **males feminises,*' and all the females show no gaping of
the fingers, but in the old males the gape is very wide and the
immobile finger extends a little beyond the mobile finger. There
is no keel on the cutting edge of the fingers in the old males,
but in other individuals it is present. Four or 5 small proximal
teeth and 1 larger distal tooth are seen on the mobile finger of
young males, "males feminises," and all females, but in mature
males the smaller teeth become reduced to 2 or 3 long inconspicu-
ous tubercles and the large tooth becomes very much larger. On
the immobile finger 1 tooth is present in the youngest males and
females, but in older individuals (Nos. 7 to 13, inclusive) a
second smaller and proximal tooth appears. These 2 teeth are
well developed in the old males (figs. 7a and 76).
The palm of the oldest males is almost cylindrical in cross
section, but in younger individuals it is flattened laterally.
The carpus of young individuals is almost as long as the palm
and longer than the fingers, but with increasing body length
the palm becomes much longer than the carpus and even the
fingers show a greater length than the latter. The cylindrical
carpus is much wider at its distal than at its proximal end.
The merus is always longer than the carpus or the fingers.
It is equal in length to the palm in young individuals, but much
shorter in old specimens. The proportion of the merus to the
carpus is very constant, varying from 1:0.75 to 1:0.93. The
merus is flattened dorsoventrally at its proximal end, and in
old individuals is much enlarged at its distal end.
Third, fourth, and fifth legs. — The tip of the dactylus of the
third pair of legs extends slightly beyond the tip of the antennal
scale in young specimens (No. 2). The dactylus of the fourth
pair of legs fails to reach the tip of the scale by a short distance,
and the dactylus of the fifth pair of legs extends slightly beyond
the end of the carpus of the chelipeds. The propodus of the
382
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
I 'H -ON I
I *8ndJ[«9 o:^ snjaui jo uoi:^aodo4j j
e
k
?-
^
-2
bo j^
•S bo
eOfrJ
•uintqD
O to lO lO
•uiniqDSj I
o o
•snaaj^
o o
CO oi
•8n(lJ«3 i
•i"l«<I
lO o
•snpodojj
O lO
t> 00
I
p. s p- s p"
<
S'^
o o c
e« (3
a^ o
lull
(1^
•«inuiaoj i«a:j8oy
•(uosiar^ j
JO <Ip^ (y\ lunat^soj jo dp) m3uai iCpoa !
•xas !
•ON
W 00
• (ao9d[«x«3 JO jspjoq JOU9:^8od <y\
9K9 JO 90V} JOiJd^^Bod) q^JSuai 9o«d«j«3
IX, D, 4
Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands
383
11
.2 6
o o o »o
Cj N WNeoeo ^ f2
o o us o
lo irj Tj5 U3
O U3 UJ O
t-J t^ 00 OS
OJ o o o
O "«»• CO -^ lO <D
O "5 to O
O O O lO
o oi 00* t-^
o o o o o o
00 00 '^ -^ i£ vi
_r-t____r-4 Cg_C^_N_W _
iO O lO lO o o
i6 ifi to to o> 00
kO o o o
O O O lO o
rH id 00 t^ t-4
lO o o
§* 4 ^
d o o
o
5^3
A s
§' O 0)
s*
5 8
eg
6 .
ft o o.
oo ^
§1
•5 <:^ -«
e3 c3 ^ « C
^ <!)
►J tf ni tf J
3 .
O m
o
i 2
« 2
i 2
5 a
s i
S « o>
2 2^
ft
a
ft
U
^ ft
II
a S'S
2 *> •«
I ^"
< O
129877-
384 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
right fifth leg measures 0.5 millimeter in diameter at its middle
point, and is 7 millimeters long. In old specimens (No. 13) the
tip of the dactylus of the third leg extends slightly beyond the
antennal scale, the tip of the dactylus of the fourth leg fails
slightly to reach the tip of the scale, and one-fifth of the propodus
of the fifth leg extends beyond the tip of the peduncle of the
second antenna. The diameter of the propodus of the right fifth
leg at the middle point is 1.5 millimeters, and its length is 17
millimeters.
Telson. — The tip of the telson (specimen 81 millimeters long
and not listed in the table) is subacute, the externolateral spines
fail by their own length to reach the level of the telson tip, and
the internolateral spines extend with three-fifths of their entire
length beyond the tip of the telson.
Character of the surface, — All specimens of Palaemon lar in
our collection have smooth bodies. Even the largest males show
no signs of the patches of spines which are found on the carapace,
pleura of the abdominal somites, tergum of the sixth somite,
uropods, and telson of mature males in some other species. The
first legs are smooth in small specimens, but in medium-sized and
large individuals the ischium is armed with short, heavy, in-
conspicuous spines. The chelipeds are well supplied with
strongly developed subacute spines, which are arranged in
rather definite longitudinal lines. These spines are found on all
segments, and those on the inner side are the largest. Two
sets of "linear spaces'* can be distinguished in all middle-sized
and large specimens. One set is found on the outer lateral sur-
face of the palm, carpus, and merus, the other is found along
the ventral surface of the same segments. The third, fourth,
and fifth legs of young individuals have well-developed spines
on the propodus, but the remaining segments are smooth. With
increasing size more of the segments become spiny, until in the
old males with mature chelipeds the dactylus, propodus, carpus,
merus, and ischium have a coating of spines.
Eggs. — The average size of the preserved eggs of the single
female specimen is 0.5 by 0.6 millimeter.
Color of the living specimen. — The carapace, abdomen, and
telson of the male vary in color, being grayish brown, olive, or
very dark blue. The uropods are usually olive or dark blue,
with reddish brown around the edges. Very distinct orange-
colored spots are seen on the sides of the abdomen at the junc-
tions of the terga and pleura, except in the case of the third
segment. There are no T- or L-shaped markings on the carapace.
The first pair of legs is blue, tinged in places with pink; the
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philipphie Islands 385
chelipeds are olive to a very dark blue, and show in places brown
mottled markings; and the walking legs show a mixture of
gray, blue, and brown. The color of the female is similar to
that of the male, except that the ventral edges of the pleura
are of a cream color. The colors are brighter in young than in
old individuals.
Localities, — The collection contains 96 males and 1 female from
Port Galera, Mindoro, 1 male from the settling basin of the
Manila water works near San Juan del Monte, Luzon, Philip-
pine Islands, and 5 males from Guam, Mariana Islands. The
single specimen from the settling basin was collected by A. L.
Day, and those from Guam by R. C. McGregor.
Palaemon jaroensis sp. nov. Plate III, figs. 8 and Sa-k.
The work of Coutiere^^^ on Palaemon lepidactyhis Hilgendorf
and that of von Martens *^ on Palaemon grandimanus Randall
indicate that there may be striking differences in the shape and
proportion of the chela in a given species. The variability,
especially of the former species, renders it difficult to determine
whether or not one is dealing with a new species when examining
specimens which are quite similar in certain respects to Palae-
mon lepidactylus, but which come from new localities.
The individuals of one series of specimens in our collection,
although not showing much variability, remind one of Palaemon
lepidactylus Hilgendorf.*' After a careful examination I have
decided that they belong to a new and distinct species which is
closely related to Palaemon placidus de Man,^^ Palaemon hilgen-
dorfi H. Coutiere, and Palaemon lepidactylus Hilgendorf. This
species to which I have given the name Palaemon jaroensis is
represented in our collection by 23 specimens, of which 6 males
and 2 females are perfect so far as the chelipeds are concerned.
While there is considerable difference between the chelipeds of
the females and those of the males, this is probably sexual.
There is but little variability in the shape, proportions, and other
characteristics of the large cheliped of the male specimens, and
the same is true of the small cheliped, but there is a constant
difference in the proportional length of the segments of the large
cheliped when compared with those of the small cheliped of the
same individual.
"Mnn. Sci. Nat, Zool, (1900), 11, 272.
*^Arch. /. Naturgesch. (1868), 34, 45.
*^ Monatsher, Preussischen Akad. d. Wissensch. Berlin (1879), 838.
" Zoologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in Niederlandisch Ost-Indien
(1892), 2, 483.
386
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
2
<2
i
•BtidJBO o:^
^ S5
t^ LO t- rH
tH tA
tH O
js s s ;3 8 §
^- ^- ^- ^ ^ ^
siijaiu JO uoi:^j[odoj[ J
^* r^
rH- rH ^ rH
rH rH
§2
M '
i : i !
I J
[ J
} J
U V
si
.H o
o o o o
o o
o o
o o '^ -^ '^ '^
^ 'O
'O t3 'O -a
73 tJ
13 TS
73 TJ ^ w w w
H I
! i ! !
i 1
i i
I ;
bo 1
j 1
ill!
[ [
; ;
1 ! 1 I 1 1
can
0) '
1 1 ^ 1 1 1
'd o
o o o o
O O
o o
o o c o o o
g^
TJ 'O •« 13
13 'O
ro rO
73 73 O 13 13 13
'uiniqosi q:^iM Suiu
\a ya
O U3 U5 lO
o \a
lo \a
lO O O O lO O
-uiaaq q:^Suai jb^ox
88 S 88 S §8 S
\a (x>
lO oo
^
4_
o
o
^ CO m § 5J
•mniqosi
o »o
O «3 O W
o o
lO
© © U3 © ©
{
Ci 00
0> 00 O 00
t-* o>
oJ t«:
00 O t- CD t- C-
B
t
•8njai\[
o us
O O O O
t> CO t-' eo
o o
o o
i> d
O O O O lO ©
CO Oi t-* t-^ 0(3 OJ
V
tH tH
M
o
a
•sndJBO
O kO
O O O lO
o o
o o
©©©©©©
o -^
O lO o •^
eo o
0» rH
N iH
•uilBd JO Bsau^ioiqx
o o
i> to
o o o o
!>: W 00 »o
o o
o \a
«o eo
© U5 © U5 © U5
lo 00* eo' M c4 N
•uiiBdjoq:^pi^
o \a
O «5
O O kO lO
o c^ o «>
o o
^ o
o o
00 lO
U5 lO U3 © © ©
t> rH CO* eo CO eo
•uiiBj
\o o
o o w o
O Ui
O W5
U3 O © lO © ©
da
?^ S S 5^
tH rH
00 at
•^ U3 C- U3 Oi 0>
•"i
o o
o o
rH
<N
'sjaSui^
o o
O O O W5
© © © © ©
rH «>*
a \Q Oi -^
CO o
O tH
lO »H 00 t- c- t-
(N .H
N rH rH r-l
r-t <N
rH (M
U3 O
O O lO lO
o \a
o \o
© © © U3 © ©
4)
9S
c<i' 00* eg to
CO r-<
^ §
© «5 lO* <M* «> «d
»:]
•snpodoJti
«• J
« fJ « ^
tt J-
C^' h4
tf J- tf J «• .4
X c
;
;
J
V 0)
3
3
ll
3
•gl.
•s
<H
O
U'^^
^
o
Xi
'5 Crt
<H
•^
4^
^
«H
«s
(^
o <c
o
o
CI i o
111
2
t:
t
13
X
i:
2 •=
^
H
H
H
«
^§
c
P
-2
p<
P
•s
1
J3
C V to
5
•2 8,6
o o
O
o
o o o
%1%
42
'S
-XJ
t:
73
'd
T3
13
13
^
fa
c^
ea c<i
N
e<i
M N W
•B[nuiJoj iBa:»8oa
?3
\ \
;;j
;;^
;:^ ;:? ;:r
tH T-t
•(aoBdBJBo JO aapjoq joij
o
o o
o
lO
© w ©
•^sod o% aXa jo aoBj jou
tA
5:3 S3
a
S^
CJ «0 00
-a^BOd) q:^J8uai ao^dBaBQ
--
•(aosia^ JO di:^ o:^ mnxx
o
o o
o
©
© © ©
-80J[ JO djq.) q:jSuai ^V^^
^
^ 5
s
s
gi § S
«
«
•xas
^D
\> "o
—
^D
"*
•b
^D Of Of
o
^
C4 00
to
O t> 00
:z:
1
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 387
The following description applies to the largest male (No. 6,
Table VII), which is 72 millimeters long. The rostrum almost
reaches the tip of the peduncle of the first antenna and has the
formula - . It is convex over the eye, dipping sharply ante-
Li
riorly and then extending horizontally at the tip. The teeth
on the carapace are more widely separated than those imme-
diately anterior to them, and the first one is situated a little
more than two-thirds of the distance from the posterior edge
of the carapace to the border of the orbit.
The first pair of legs extends with two-fifths of the carpus
beyond the antennal scale.
The chelipeds are decidedly unequal in size and length but
similar in shape, a condition which is found in all the males
of P. jaroensis in our collection and one which may be charac-
teristic of all middle-aged and old males of this species. In
the case of the larger cheliped, which measures 96 millimeters
in length, one-third of the merus extends beyond the antennal
scale. The mobile finger curves sharply, while the immobile
finger is practically straight, and when their tips meet a con-
siderable space is seen between them. Along the proximal por-
tion of the cutting edge of the immobile finger are 6 blunt, fairly
well-developed teeth which are not situated upon a raised ridge.
The 4 nearest the palm are confluent. Following the 6 teeth
is a space, and distal to this is a series of 11 blunt teeth arranged
at rather regular intervals along the cutting edge and extending
almost to the tip of the finger. The most proximal one of these
is larger than the rest. A series of 9 similar teeth are present
along the inner side of the cutting edge, but the teeth are not
upon the latter. There is no large tooth corresponding to the
one on the cutting edge. The toothing on the mobile finger
consists of 3 rather large, blunt, irregular, proximal teeth and
2 distal series of smaller blunt teeth separated from the former
by a space. As in the case of the immobile finger, the outer
teeth are found on the cutting edge while the inner are not.
There are 10 of the former and 8 of the latter, and there is no
conspicuously large tooth at the beginning of either series.*^
^ An examination of the fingers on the large cheliped of smaller spec-
imens shows that the dentition is similar, but that the number of teeth
in the two series beyond the space may be much smaller, especially along
the inner side of the finger, and that there is some variation in the number
of proximal teeth. In the females very small proximal teeth are present
and the keel of the cutting edge is well developed, but the proximal series
of blunt teeth, so characteristic of the males, is not present on the fingers
of either cheliped.
388 ^^<^ Philippine Journal of Science ^^^"^
A thick growth of rather short hairs is present along the cutting
edge of both fingers, and as a result the teeth described above
are completely concealed.
The much flattened palm (11.5 millimeters wide and 8.5 milli-
meters thick) is longer than the fingers, the proportion of the
length of the fingers to that of the palm being 1 :1.19 ; the slightly
flattened carpus which is smaller in diameter and shorter than
the palm equals the fingers in length ; and the merus is shorter
than the carpus,^^ a condition which seems to be characteristic
of Palaemon placidus, but not of Palaemon hilgendorfi or Palae-
mon lepidactylus.
The smaller cheliped measures 65.5 millimeters in length,
and the distal end of the merus just reaches the tip of the
antennal scale. It is similar in appearance to the large cheliped,
but the relative lengths of the different segments are not the
same. As in the case of the large cheliped the fingers gape,
the mobile one curving rather sharply and the immobile one
being practically straight. The dentition of the fingers is similar
to that of the fingers of the large cheliped, except that the distal
series of teeth along the inner side of each finger is made up
of a smaller number of teeth and that there are 8 proximal
teeth on the immobile finger instead of 6. The cutting edge of
each finger is clothed with a heavy coat of short hairs which con-
ceals the teeth.
The fingers (15.5 millimeters) are longer than the palm (14.5
millimeters), and this is true for the small cheliped of all the
male specimens. The palm is flattened, and measures, at its
widest point, 7.5 millimeters in width and 5 millimeters in thick-
ness. The carpus is slightly longer than the palm, and the same
is true for these 2 segments in the small cheliped of all the
male specimens. As in the large cheliped the merus is shorter
than the carpus.
The impression one receives from comparing the large and
small chelipeds of the same individual is that the smaller is
merely a younger stage in the development of the larger, that
if the specimen had lived and molted the palm of the former
would have increased in length at a faster rate than the carpus,
and that finally the small cheliped would have assumed the form,
size, proportions, and general characteristics of the larger che-
liped. It is impossible to determine, however, with the specimens
" All the males of this species in our collection show a similar condition,
but in the females the carpus and merus are about equal, and it is probable
that the latter is true of young males.
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 389
at hand if the two chelipeds ever become more nearly alike in
older individuals.
The tip of the telson is acute, but the lateral spines are worn,
and some of them are absent from the specimen under considera-
tion. In another male specimen with a more perfect telson the
extemolateral spines are very short and the internolateral spines
extend beyond the tip of the telson with one-half of their length.
The carpus, abdominal segments, and uropods are smooth,
but the second, third, fourth, and fifth legs are well covered with
heavy spines. In general, the spines are much like those of
Palaemon lepidactylus Hilgendorf, except that there are no con-
ical spines on the superior *^^ and inner surfaces of the palm
of the cheliped and that in the place of these there are pointed,
flattened spines, whose upper surfaces are concave and whose
lower surfaces are convex. Also, these spines are found on the
fingers as in the case of Palaemon lepidactylus Hilgendorf.
"Linear spaces'' are present on the palm, carpus, and merus of
both chelipeds.
The third, fourth, and fifth legs are stout in comparison with
those of most other palaemons. There is little difference in the
length of these legs ; the fifth is the shortest. One-third of the
propodus of the third leg and the tip of the dactylus of the fourth
leg extend beyond the tip of the antennal scale, but the fifth leg
extends only slightly beyond the tip of the peduncle of the second
antenna. The propodus of the fifth leg measures 9 millimeters
in length and 1.1 millimeters in diameter at its middle point.
The two females listed in Table VII are the only perfect ones
in the collection. The right and left chelipeds in each specimen
are nearly the same in size and shape. No distal teeth are pres-
ent, but there is a well-developed keel on the cutting edge of
both fingers, and this keel is partially concealed by a sparse
growth of hair. One female, which is not listed in Table VII,
carries eggs, and the measurements of these average 0.7 by 0.5
millimeter.
The 18 males and 5 females of this new species were taken in
Hibucawan River, near Jaro, Leyte, by Alvin Seale and Urbano
Villamor.
Palaemon lepidactylus Hilgendorf. Plate III, figs. 9 and 9a-6.
A rare species known as Palaemon lepidactylus Hilgendorf is
represented in our collection by 2 male specimens. Both indi-
viduals are rather small, and one has the chelipeds missing ; the
48 a That is, the border which is continuous with the immobile finger.
390 '^he Philippine Journal of Science i^^4
uninjured individual has these appendages well developed. The
body length of the latter is 58.5 millimeters and the carapace
length, 18.5 millimeters ; the other has a body length of 66 milli-
meters and a carapace length of 20 millimeters. The following
description applies to the smaller specimen :
The rostrum extends slightly beyond the middle segment of the
peduncle of the first antenna, and the first tooth on the dorsal
border is 7 millimeters posterior to the anterior edge of the
carapace. Five teeth are situated on the carapace, and these
are more widely separated from one another than those anterior
to them. The dorsal border dips anteriorly, showing only a
slight convexity over the eye. The lateral ridges of the rostrum
divide the lateral surface into an upper, wider region and a
lower, narrower region. The dental formula of the specimen
under consideration is ^, while that of the other is -^.
Three-fifths of the carpus of the first pair of legs extends
beyond the tip of the antennal scale.
The chelipeds are decidedly unequal in length and different
in form, the larger being much longer than the body. One-
half of the merus of the larger (left) and one-fifth of the merus
of the smaller extend beyond the antennal scale. The slightly
gaping fingers of the large cheliped are much longer than the
palm, the length of the mobile finger being 25 millimeters and
that of the palm 16 millimeters. The toothing of the fingers
agrees well with Coutiere's description and figures. At the
proximal end of the immobile finger close to the articulation of
the mobile finger with the palm are 4 rather indefinite teeth on
a short ridge, which is a continuation of the cutting edge. Fol-
lowing this is a short space along the cutting edge which is
without teeth. At the end of the space is a well-developed obtuse
tooth, beyond which a distinct keel is seen extending to the tip
of the finger. Along the inner side of this keel, but not arising
from it, is a series of 16 anteriorly directed, acute teeth which
are placed at somewhat regular intervals. On the outer side of
the keel is another series of 14 teeth similar to the one just men-
tioned, but the teeth have their origin from the side of the keel.
At the proximal end of the mobile finger are 3 blunt teeth, the
posterior 2 of which meet the short raised ridge of the immobile
finger. The mobile finger extends beyond the immobile finger.
The oval palm, which is much wider than the carpus, measures
16.5 millimeters in length, 10.5 millimeters in width, and 6 milli-
meters in thickness. The carpus (17 millimeters) is slightly
ix,L\4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 391
longer than the palm, and is much reduced in diameter at its
posterior end. The merus equals the carpus in length, while
the ischium measures 8.5 millimeters.
A ''linear space'* is seen along the outer surface of the merus,
carpus, and palm. The spines on the posterior, outer region
of the palm are scalelike and oval in shape, and each spine is
rather closely applied to the palm. Toward the anterior end of
the palm the spines become more pointed, and on the fingers
they curve at the tip, their upper surfaces being decidedly con-
cave and their lower surfaces convex. On the superior border
of the palm (the border continuous with the immobile finger)
are 2 rows of stout conical spines, and these spines are longer
than any of the others. Similar shorter spines are distributed
sparsely over the inferior inner surface of the palm, and these,
toward the superior region, grade into spines like those of the
outer surface of the palm. Smaller spines of similar shape and
distribution to those of the palm are found on the carpus, merus,
and ischium.
The smaller cheliped (right) has slender widely gaping fingers,
the mobile one of which measures 15.5 millimeters in length.
Along the cutting edge of each finger is a dense growth of stiff
hairs, but no teeth, tubercles, or keel can be seen.
The short oval palm measures 7 millimeters in length, 6 milli-
meters in width, and 4 millimeters in thickness. The carpus is
not so wide (5 millimeters) as the palm, but is somewhat longer
(9 millimeters). The merus (11 millimeters) is considerably
longer than the carpus, and the ischium measures 6 millimeters.
The spines are much smaller than those of the larger cheliped,
but they have a similar shape and distribution. "Linear spaces"
are present. Patches of spines, which are characteristic of
supposedly mature individuals in many species of palaemons and
which are found on the carapace and abdomen, are not present
in our two specimens.
In each specimen the tip of the telson is truncated, but this
is probably the result of wear. The internolateral spines extend
beyond the tip of the telson, a condition which is undoubtedly
true of uninjured specimens. As usual, the externolateral spines
are short. The inner ramus of the uropods extends poste-
riorly slightly farther than the outer ramus.
The third, fourth, and fifth legs are rather stout as com-
pared with most other species of palaemons. The fifth leg is the
shortest and the slenderest, although there is but little difference
between the three. One-half of the propodus of the third leg
392 The Philippine Journal of Science i^h
and the tip of the dactylus of the fourth leg extend beyond the
tip of the antennal scale, but the fifth leg barely reaches it.
The propodus of the fifth leg measures 7 millimeters in length,
and at its middle point it is 1 millimeter in thickness.
Both specimens are males; they were collected in a small
mountain stream near Sisiman, Bataan Province, Luzon, by
Tomas Banguis.
Palaemon latidactylus Thallwitz. Plate III, figs. 10 and lOa-h,
This species is represented in our collection by 2 young mature
male specimens (Nos. 1087 and 1484)*^ from the region of
Manila, which agree very well with Thallwitz's *" original de-
scription and with the description of de Man.** There are also
2 male specimens (Nos. 73 and 128), collected in the region of
Manila, which J believe belong to the same species but which
I consider to be "males feminises;'' 2 females (Nos. 371 and 593)
from the Manila water supply; 1 male (No. 1485) from the
Manila water supply, which I hesitate to include under this
species; 2 specimens (Nos. 1499 and 1500), one of which is an
old male and the other a young male from Jaro, Leyte; 3
specimens (No. 1451) from Agusan River, Mindanao; and a
young mature male (No. 71) from Samar, which differs only
slightly from Thallwitz's original description.
I believe, as do Thallwitz and de Man, that the specimens
from Manila diagnosed by von Martens *^ as Palaemon grandi-
manus Randall are probably identical with Palaemon latidactylus
Thallwitz. On the other hand, it is very questionable if von
Martens's Manila specimens belong to Randall's Palaemon grandi-
manus. Miss Rathbun's notes on Randall's type specimens and
her photographic reproduction of an old male from the Honolulu
market indicate that von Martens's Manila specimens belong to a
different species."^^ The following description applies to an old
male (No. 1484) collected from the settling basin of the Manila
water supply:
It is 66 millimeters in length (carapace 20.5 miUimeters),
and the rostrum extends to the tip of the peduncle of the first
antenna. There are 16 teeth on the dorsal border of the rostrum,
** In this description the numbers referred to are museum numbers.
*^ Abhandlungen und Berichte des Koniglichen Museums zu Dresden
(1891), 17.
*^ Abh, Senckenbergischen Naturforsch. Ges, (1900), 25, 802.
"^Arch. /. Naturgesch, (1868), 34, 45.
""Bull Z7. S, Fish Comm, (1903), 23, pt. 3, 923. Published in 1906.
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Isla7ids 393
of which 4 are situated on the carapace. The first and second
teeth, and in some other specimens also the second and third,
are more widely separated from one another than the rest.
Anteriorly the dorsal border dips, but there is scarcely any con- .
vexity over the eye. On the lower border are 3 teeth, sometimes
4 in other specimens, and the tip of the rostrum does not turn
upward. The posterior part of the lateral ridge on the rostrum
should be shown slightly higher up than it is in the figure (Plate
III, fig. 8). One-sixth of the carpus of the first pair of legs
extends beyond the antennal scale, and the outer maxillipeds
reach slightly beyond the peduncle of the second antenna.
The chelipeds are decidedly unlike in form and unequal in
length, the larger being much longer than the body. One-sixth
of the merus of the larger and one-third of the carpus of the
smaller cheliped extend beyond the antennal scale. Measuring
in a straight line from the articulation of the mobile finger (large
cheliped) to the tip of the same, the length is 20 millimeters.
This finger is strongly curved inward, it is compressed laterally
throughout its extent, and crosses the tip of the immobile finger
when the fingers are closed. Near the proximal end of the mobile
finger, along the cutting edge, are 3 small, closely set teeth,
which are followed distally by 2 somewhat larger teeth. Beyond
these, 5 teeth are seen which gradually decrease in size, until
near the tip the last one is nothing more than an inconspicuous
tubercle. The immobile finger is strongly compressed laterally,
its outer surface is decidedly concave near the palm, and its
proximal end is much wider than that of the mobile finger, about
2:1. Near the proximal end of the cutting edge is a com-
paratively large tooth, which curves inward ending in an acute
tip. This is followed by 7 smaller teeth, which become almost
like tubercles near the tip of the finger. A few scattered hairs
may be seen on both fingers, but at the proximal end of the mobile
finger and on its lower surface there is a small dense patch of
hairs.
The palm, which is strongly compressed, measures 30 milli-
meters in length, 12.5 millimeters in width at its widest point,
and 6.5 millimieters in thickness in the same region. From these
figures it will be seen that the palm is one and one-half times as
long as the finger and that the ratio of the thickness of the
palm to the greatest width is about 1 : 2.
The carpus, which is practically cylindrical in cross section and
much narrower than the palm at its distal end, measures 25.5
millimeters in length, thus being shorter than the palm.
394 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
The merus varies in the shape of its cross section at different
points, and measures 19 millimeters in length. It is much longer
than the greatly compressed ischium, which is only 7.5 milli-
meters along its longest border.
There is a considerable growth of hair on the ventral edge of
the palm and ischium. A few hairs are found near the ends
of the carpus and merus, but for the most part the palm, carpus,
merus, and ischium are without hairs. Closely set sharp spines
are present on the inferior and lateral surfaces of the proximal
end of the mobile finger, but the remainder of the finger is
smooth. Similar closely set spines are present on the inferior
border of the palm. These grade into much smaller and more
widely separated teeth on the inner surface and, on the outer
surface, into widely separated, very minute spines. A few rather
heavy spines are located along the outer surface of the anterior
border of the palm, where the mobile finger articulates. The
spines on the carpus are widely separated, and on the inner
surface they are fairly well developed. There are practically
no spines on the upper and outer surfaces of the merus and
ischium, but on the lower and inner surfaces they are very close
set and well developed.
"Linear spaces'' cannot be seen, but a longitudinal depression
on the outer and inner surfaces of the palm along a line connect-
ing the articulation of the mobile finger with the proximal end
of the palm is very conspicuous.
The smaller cheliped (left) has slender, widely gaping fingers;
the mobile one measures 12 millimeters in length, and the im-
mobile one is slightly shorter. Along the cutting edge of both
fingers is a dense growth of stiff hairs and a well-developed keel.
Near the proximal end of the immobile finger is a short portion
of the cutting edge, which shows indication of breaking up into
3 or 4 teeth. This is followed distally by a short space at the
end of which is a small tooth, but beyond the latter no teeth nor
tubercles can be seen. Three small teeth are visible at the
proximal end of the mobile finger. The short oval palm measures
7.5 millimeters in length, 4.5 millimeters in width, and 3.1 milli-
meters in thickness. The carpus is not so wide (4 millimeters)
as the palm, but it is considerably longer (10 millimeters). The
merus (9.5 millimeters) is slightly shorter than the carpus, and
the ischium measures only 6 millimeters in length.
Unlike the larger cheliped, the fingers, palm, and carpus are
free from spines, but the lower surface of the merus and ischium
are armed with a few spines similar to those on the large cheliped,
but smaller. Patches of small spines are present on the anterior
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 395
part of the carapace in the dorsal and lateral regions, but they
are not present on the abdomen nor on its appendages.
The telson ends in an acute spine; the extemolateral spines
do not extend so far posteriorly as the tip of the telson, but
the internolateral spines overreach it by one-half of their length.
The 2 rami of the uropods extend the same distance posteriorly.
Some of the walking legs of this specimen are missing, but
in the other old male (No. 1087) they are intact. In the case
of No. 1087, the third, fourth, and fifth legs are of equal length
but slenderer than those of Palaemon lepidactylics. The third
leg just reaches the tip of the antennal scale. One-fifth of the
propodus of the fourth leg and the dactylus of the fifth leg extend
beyond the peduncle of the second antenna. The propodus of
the fifth leg measures 8.75 millimeters in length, and at its middle
point it is 0.5 millimeter in diameter.
The old male, No. 1484, which has been described in detail
above, was collected in the settling basin of the Manila water
supply by A. L. Day; the old male, No. 1087, was collected by
Alvin Seale from Laguna de Bay, near Manila, Luzon.
Two other male specimens, Nos. 128 and 73, collected in the
region of Manila, differ in the size of the body and the form of
the large cheliped from the individual described above. These
specimens have a somewhat greater body length, the gape be-
tween the fingers of the chela is less, the mobile finger is not
curved so sharply, the width of the immobile finger at the
proximal end (Plate III, figs. 10c and lOd for No. 128 and No.
73, respectively) is not so great, and there is a more extensive
armature of spines on the outer surface of the palm. I consider
these specimens, although they are larger than the young mature
males, to be "males femenises'' or at least specimens in which
the mature male form of the chela has not yet developed. Unlike
No. 1484, the patches of spines on the carapace are feebly de-
veloped, a condition which indicates immaturity.
The 3 specimens (No. 1451) from Mindanao are very similar
to the young mature male. They have about the same body
length (one specimen is a little smaller), and the large chela
(Plate III, fig. lOe, No. 1451x) is still well armed with spines
on the outer surface, but it is approaching more nearly the shape
and proportions of the mature male form. The specimen (No.
71) from Samar is smaller than the specimens from Mindanao,
but the large chela has taken on the mature form and pro-
portions. I consider it to be a young mature male.
One of the specimens from Leyte (No. 1500) measures 86.5
millimeters in length (carapace, 27 millimeters). It is an old
396 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science iqh
mature male and the largest one in the collection. Unfor-
tunately, the fingers on the large cheliped are broken. The palm
measures 35 millimeters in length, 15 millimeters in width, and
8 millimeters in thickness, indicating that with increasing age
the palm becomes wider in proportion to the length (1 : 2.33)
and thicker in proportion to the width (1:1.80). The patches
of spines on the carapace are better developed than in any of
the rest of our specimens, but as in the latter they are absent
from the abdomen. The superior portion of the outer surface
of the palm is absolutely smooth.
The other specimen from Leyte (No. 1499) is of interest be-
cause it is a very young male, possibly a '*male feminises.'* An-
teriorly, the rostrum dips only slightly, and there are no patches
of spines on the carapace or abdomen. The large chela is similar
in shape to that of specimen 128, but it is smaller. The palm
is well covered with fine spines, and the gape between the fingers
is small. There is no gape between the fingers of the small chela
and no thick growth of hair. Furthermore, the slender fingers
are only slightly longer than the narrow palm, which is no wider
than the carpus.
The largest female. No. 593, measures 68 millimeters in body
length, the carapace and abdomen are smooth, and the chelipeds
are alike. There is no gape between the fingers which lack a
thick growth of hair and no teeth on the distal two-thirds, but
there is a well-developed keel on the cutting edge of the latter.
The fingers are shorter than the palm, which is compressed and
slightly wider than the carpus.
Finally, specimen 1485, an old male from the water supply of
the city of Manila, is one which, owing to lack of material, I do
not feel justified in classifying at the present time. It measures
91 millimeters in body length, dense patches of spines are
present on the anterior part of the carapace, the abdomen is
smooth, and the rostrum is practically like that of Palaemon
latidactylus. The large cheliped in respect to the distribution
of spines and the toothing of the fingers is like that of Palaemon
latidactylus, but the shape of the chela is different. The fingers,
which are only slightly shorter than the palm, gape considerably.
The immobile finger is comparatively narrow at its proximal
end, and the mobile finger is not curved sharply. In the case
of the smaller cheliped, the palm has about the same width as
the distal end of the carpus, the fingers gape only moderately,
and the growth of hair on them is not so great as in specimen
1484. Further collections may justify the establishment of a new
variety of Palaemon latidactylus. If the view of Henderson and
IX, D. 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 397
Matthai is correct concerning some species of Macrobrachium, this
specimen may be a polymorphic form of Palaemon latidactylits.
Specimens 73, 128, and 371 were purchased in a Manila market
by the author, and it is supposed that they were collected in
Pasig River, near Manila ; No. 593 was taken from the filter of
the Bureau of Science, which receives its water from the Manila
water supply; No. 1485 was collected by A. L. Day from the
settling basin of the Manila water supply; Nos. 1499 and 1500
were collected by Alvin Seale and Urbano Villamor in a small
river at Jaro, Leyte; the 3 specimens. No. 1451, were collected
by E. H. Taylor in a natural canal connected with Agusan River,
Mindanao.
Palaemon sp. Plate III, figs. 11 and lla-c.
Two old male palaemons collected from the Manila water
supply may be representatives of a new species, although the
specimens possess certain characters which suggest Palaemon
esculentus Thallwitz and especially Palaemon oenone de Man.^'
However, as I have not seen specimens of either of these species
and as I have 2 specimens of nearly the same size only, I do not
feel justified in describing them as a new species.
The description which follows, except when otherwise stated,
applies to the largest individual whose body length is 59.5 milli-
meters and whose carapace length is 20 millimeters: The body
length of the smaller specimen is 58 millimeters and the length
of the carapace, 19 millimeters. The rostrum which curves down
slightly, fails by a considerable distance to reach the tip of pe-
duncle of the first antenna. Of the 15 almost evenly spaced
teeth on the dorsal border of the rostrum, 7 are situated on
the carapace, and of these the first 3 are smaller than those
anterior to them. The first tooth is situated back of the orbit
a little more than one-third of the distance from the orbit to
the posterior border of the carapace. On the lower border of
the rostrum are 2 teeth. From this description it is evident
that the shape and dental formula of the rostrum and the arrange-
ment, size, and position of the rostral teeth very closely resemble
those of Palaemon oenone and not so closely those of Palaemon
esculentus. The rostrum of the smaller specimen is similar to
14
the description given above, but the dental formula is only -^
with the seventh tooth directly over the posterior edge of the
orbit.
"A6/i. Senckenbergischen Naturforsch. Ges, (1900), 25, 784.
398 "^he Philippine Journal of Science 1914
One-half of the carpus of the first pair of legs extends beyond
the antennal scale, and the distal segment of the outer maxillipeds
extends beyond the peduncle of the second antenna.
The chelipeds are decidedly unlike in form and unequal in
length, the larger being much longer than the body. One-third
of the merus of the larger and two-thirds of the carpus of the
smaller cheliped extend beyond the antennal scale. Measuring
in a straight line from the articulation of the mobile finger (large
cheliped) to the tip of the same, the length is 25.5 millimeters.
This finger is strongly curved inward, it is slightly compressed
near the tip, and it crosses the tip of the immobile finger when
the fingers are closed. Near the proximal end of the mobile
finger, along the cutting edge, are 5 low blunt teeth, followed
distally by a space at the end of which there is a rather large
subacute tooth. Beyond this, the cutting edge, which runs more
and more toward the outer surface of the finger as the tip is
approached, bears 14 low tubercles, which gradually decrease in
height toward the distal end of the finger. The immobile finger,
which is almost straight when seen in side view, curves inward
slightly and, although compressed laterally, is not concave on
its outer surface. It is one and one-half times as wide as the
mobile finger at the proximal end. There is a conspicuous
distally directed tooth on the cutting edge at the proximal end
of the immobile finger, and between this tooth and the articulation
of the mobile finger is a short low ridge, which possibly in older
specimens may be broken up into small confluent teeth. Along
the cutting edge, distal to the conspicuous tooth, 13 tubercles may
be seen, which gradually decrease in size as the tip of the finger
is approached. A few scattered hairs are present on both
fingers, and the elongated, anastamosing, longitudinal grooves
described by de Man as characteristic of Palaemon oenone can
be seen easily with a low-power lens.
The palm, which is strongly compressed, measures 26 milli-
meters in length, 12 millimeters in width at its widest point,
and 7 millimeters in thickness in the same region. From these
figures it will be seen that the mobile finger (measured as de-
scribed above) is almost equal in length to the palm and that
the ratio of the thickness of the palm to the greatest width is
about 1:1.71. The palm decreases suddenly in width near its
proximal end where it is clothed, especially on its superior and
inferior borders, by a thick feltlike growth of hairs. On the
rest of the palm no hairs can be seen.
The short, much infiated carpus, which is cylindrical in cross
section and much smaller in diameter than the width of the distal
IX, D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 399
two-thirds of the palm, measures 15.5 millimeters in length, thus
being a little more than one-half as long as the palm. There
is a fairly thick coating of long hairs over the entire carpus.
The shape of a cross section through the merus differs at
different points. When seen from above, the outer border is
almost straight and the inner border forms a line shaped like
an elongated S. The merus, which is covered with a thick coat-
ing of long hairs on its inferior, inner, and superior surfaces,
measures 18 millimeters in length, and is much longer than the
greatly compressed ischium. The latter is only 7 millimeters
in length along its longest border.
Anteriorly directed, closely set, flattened spines which give
only a sensation of slight roughness when the finger is rubbed
over them are present upon the inferior border of the palm. On
the inner and outer lateral regions and the superior border these
are even smaller in size. These spines extend about halfway
out on the fingers, but beyond this the latter are smooth so far
as spines are concerned. Spines similar to those of the palm are
present on the carpus, merus, and ischium, but they are better
developed, and on the inner surfaces of these members they are
comparatively long and sharply pointed. No ^'linear spaces" can
be detected.
The large cheliped of the smaller specimen differs mainly from
that of the longer specimens in the shape and size of the fingers
and in the proportion of the width of the palm to its length.
The mobile finger is much less strongly curved, and the palm is
narrower in proportion to its length.
The smaller cheliped (left) of the large specimen has widely
gaping fingers; the mobile one measures 15.5 millimeters in
length, and the immobile one is slightly shorter. Along the cut-
ting edge of both fingers is a dense growth of stiff hairs and a
slightly developed keel. Near the proximal end of the mobile
finger are 5 low blunt teeth followed by a short space, at the
end of which there is a larger and more acute tooth; beyond
this no tubercles or teeth can be seen. At the proximal end of
the immobile finger is a short ridge on the cutting edge, remind-
ing one of a similar structure on the large cheliped ; in the former,
however, it shows indication of breaking up into small teeth.
Beyond this ridge and very close to it is a large anteriorly di-
rected tooth similar in shape to the one on the immobile finger
of the large cheliped. As in the case of the mobile finger, there
are no tubercles or teeth beyond the large tooth just mentioned.
The palm measures 10.5 millimeters in length, 5 millimeters in
width, and 4 millimeters in thickness. The carpus is not so
400 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science
wide (4 millimeters) as, and is considerably shorter (8.5 milli-
meters) than, the palm. The merus (9.5 millimeters) is slightly
longer than the carpus, and the ischium measures 6 millimeters
in length.
The fingers are smooth, the palm is armed with a few minute
spines, and the carpus, merus, and ischium have fairly well-
developed spines on their inner and lower surfaces. Along the
inner surfaces of the carpus, merus, and ischium is a consider-
able growth of rather long hairs, and on the superior and inner
surfaces of the posterior end of the palm is a patch of felted
hairs similar to that on the large cheliped. The small cheliped
of the smaller specimen is essentially like that of the large
specimen, except that it is smaller, that the palm is relatively
shorter, and that the patch of felted hair is absent.
The telson of the large specimen ends rather bluntly, a condi-
tion which is undoubtedly the result of wear ; the externolateral
spines are very short, and the internolateral spines extend beyond
the telson tip for a considerable distance. The outer and inner
rami of the uropods are of equal length.
Patches of small spines are present on the anterior part of
the carapace in the dorsal and lateral regions, but are not present
on the abdomen or its appendages.
The third legs are slightly longer than the fourth, and the
latter are slightly longer than the fifth. They are all slenderer
than those of Palaemon lepidactylus and they are about the same
size as those of Palaemon latidactylus. One-fifth of the propo-
dus of the third leg and the tip of the dactylus of the fourth leg
extend beyond the antennal scale, but the fifth leg extends with
the dactylus only beyond the peduncle of the second antenna.
The propodus of the fifth leg measures 8 millimeters in length,
and at its middle point it is 1.0 millimeter in diameter. Both
specimens were collected by R. C. McGregor from the filter of
the Bureau of Science, which receives its water from the Manila
city water supply.
ILLUSTRATIONS
(All the illustrations are of natural size unless otherwise stated. Drawings by Jos6 K. Santos.)
Plate I
Fig. 1. Palaemon carcinus Fabricius. Old male, 320 millimeters long.
1*. Left cheliped of same specimen.
1^, Telson of female, 116 millimeters long. x6.
I''. Middle-aged male, 245 to 250 millimeters long,
i"*. Full-grown female, 248 millimeters long.
i^ Left cheliped of young male, probably mature, 240 millimeters
long,
i'. Left cheliped, full-grown female shown in fig. 1'^.
1^. Young female, 115 millimeters long.
f\ Right cheliped of same specimen,
i*. Young male, 100 millimeters long.
IK Right cheliped of same specimen.
Plate II
Fig. 2. Palaemon philippinensis sp. nov. Old male, 144 millimeters long.
No. 31.
2". Left cheliped of same specimen.
2^, Mobile finger of same, showing outer surface and cutting
edge. X 2.
2^ Immobile finger of same left cheliped, showing outer surface
and cutting edge. x2.
2^. "Male feminise," 114 millimeters long. No. 19.
2*. Left cheliped of same.
2'. Immobile finger of same. x3.
2^. Mobile finger of same. x2.5.
2". Left cheliped of young mature male, 111.5 millimeters long.
No. 13. Measurements given in Table II apply to right
cheliped.
2\ Young male, 39.5 millimeters long. No. 1 (a). x2.
2K Right cheliped of same. x2.
2^, Tip of telson of male, 117 millimeters long, x 10.
2\ Tip of telson of young female, 47 millimeters long. X34.
2"\ Pigment marks on the carapace of Palaemon philippinensis
sp. nov.
3. Palaemon sundaicus Heller. Young mature male, 90 millimeters
long. No. 15.
3". Left cheliped of the same, markings faded after preservation.
S"", Female, 79 millimeters long. No. 36.
S"". Left cheliped of same, showing markings.
3'^. Young male, 66.5 millimeters long. No. 2.
5% Left cheliped of same, showing markings.
3\ Tip of telson of young male. No. 7.
401
402 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9h
Fig. 4. Palaemon lanceifrons Dana. Mature male, 62.5 millimeters long.
No. 6.
V. Right cheliped of same.
5. Palaemon lanceifrons Dana (local form). Mature male, 63.5 milli-
meters long. No. 7.
5*. Left cheliped of same.
5". Right cheliped of same.
5*". Mobile finger of left cheliped (fig. 5"), inner aspect. X 3.
5^. Immobile finger of same, inner aspect. X3.
5^ Young male, 49 millimeters long. No. 1.
5*. Right cheliped of same.
5*^. Pigment marks on carapace of Palaemon lanceifrons Dana,
the local form and Palaemon lanceifrons Dana var. montal-
banensis var. nov. X2.
6. Palaemon lanceifrons Dana var. montalbanensis var. nov. Old male,
65.5 millimeters long. No. 12.
6*, Right cheliped of same.
6^. Left cheliped of same.
6^ Immobile finger of left cheliped, inner aspect. x3.
6**. Mobile finger of same, inner aspect. X 3.
(?'*. Female, 45.5 millimeters long, with eggs.
6^. Cheliped of same.
6^. Young male, 51 millimeters long. No. 3.
6^\ Cheliped of same.
6K Tip of telson of young male, 43 millimeters long. xl6.
7. Palaemon lar Fabricus. Old male, 114 millimeters long. No. 10.
?*. Right cheliped of same, inner aspect.
7^. Left cheliped of same, outer aspect.
7\ Young male.
7^. Left cheliped of same.
7*. Chela of specimen of about the same size as the one shown
in fig. 7^ X3.
7\ Young male.
7^. Left cheliped of same.
7". Tip of telson of young male. x8.
Plate III
Fig. 8. Palaemon jaroensis sp. nov. Old male, 72 millimeters long. No. 6.
5*. Right cheliped of same, outer aspect.
8^. Left cheliped of same, outer aspect.
<5^ Outline of chela of left cheliped, hair removed.
8^. Mobile finger of left cheliped. X2.
8^. Immobile finger of same. x2.
8*, Mobile finger of right cheliped. X2.
8^. Immobile finger of same. x2.
8^\ Spines on palm of No. 6. X 2.
8'. Spines on finger of No. 6. x2.
8K Right cheliped of female. No. 7.
8^. Left cheliped of same.
9. Palaemon lepidactylus Hilgendorf. Old male, 58.5 millimeters long.
9". Left cheliped of same, outer aspect. Carpus shown drawn
away from palm and hence longer than stated in text.
9^\ Right cheliped of same, outer aspect.
IX. D, 4 Cowles: Palaemons of the Philippine Islands 403
Fig. 10. Palaemon latidactylus Thallwitz. Old male, 6Q millimeters long.
Museum No. 1484.
10^, Right cheliped of same, outer aspect.
10^. Left cheliped of same, outer aspect.
lO"". Large chela of specimen. Museum No. 128.
10*. Large cheliped of specimen. Museum No. 73.
lO"". Chela of specimen. Museum No. 1451x.
10'. Old male, 91 millimeters long. Species? Museum No. 1485.
10^. Right cheliped of same, outer aspect.
10^. Left cheliped of same, outer aspect.
11. Palaemon sp. Old male, 59.5 millimeters long. Museum No. 572.
11^. Right cheliped of same, outer aspect.
11^. Left cheliped of same, inner aspect.
ll"". Right cheliped of specimen, 58 millimeters long. Museum
No. 572.
TEXT FIGURE
Fig. 1. Diagram of a palaemon.
Oversized
Foldout
Oversized
Foldout
[Phil. Journ. Sci., Vol. IX, C, No. 5.
CowLES : Palaemons of the Philippine Islands.]
83
Sh
8
8
8
f
89
Old male 72.0 mm. lonfl.
Fifl. 8. Palaemon jaroensis sp. nov.
No. 6.
Flo. 8a. Right cheliped of same. Outer aspect.
Fig. 8b. Left cheliped of same. Outer aspect.
Fig. 8c. Outline of chela of left cheliped, hair removed.
Fig. 8d. Mobile finger of left cheliped. X 2.
Fig. 8e. Immobile finger of same. X 2.
Fig. 8f. Mobile finger of right cheliped. X 2.
Fig. 8g. Immobile finger of same. X 2.
Fig. 8h. Spines on palm of No. 6. X 2.
Fig. 81. Spines on finger of No. 6. X 2.
Fig. 8j. Right cheliped of female. No. 7.
Fig. 8ic. Left cheliped of same.
Fig. 9. Palaemon lepidactylus. Old male 58.5 mm. long.
10
9a. Left cheliped of same. Outer aspect. Carpus shown
drawn away from palm and hence longer than stated
in text.
Fig. 9b. Right cheliped of same. Outer aspect.
Fig. 10. Palaemon latidactylus. Old male 66.0 mm. long.
Mus. No. 1484.
Fig. 10a. Right cheliped of same. Outer aspect.
PLATE III.
Fig. 10b. Left cheliped of same. Outer aspect.
Fig. 10c. Large chela of specimen Mus. No. 128.
Fig. lOd. Large cheliped of specimen Mus. No. 73.
Fig. lOe. Chela of specimen Mus. 1451 (X).
Fig. lOf. Old male 91.0 mm. long. Species? Mus. No. 1485.
Fig. lOg. Right cheliped of same. Outer aspect.
Fig. lOh. Left cheliped of same. Outer aspect.
Fig. 11. Palaemon sp.? Old male 59.5 mm. long. Mus. No.
572.
Fig. 11a. Right cheliped of same. Outer aspect.
Fig. lib. Left cheliped of same. Inner aspect.
Fig. lie. Right cheliped of specimen 58.0 mm. long. Mus.
No. 572.
A NEW PHILIPPINE MALARIA MOSQUITO
By Charles S. Banks
{From the Entomological Section, Biological Laboratory y Bureau of Science,
Manila, P. I.)
In the course of investigations at Calamba, Laguna Province,
Luzon, carried on by Drs. E. L. Walker and M. A. Barber to
ascertain the species of mosquitoes capable of transmitting ma-
laria, many specimens of a very interesting Myzomyia were
bred between December 27, 1913, and April 12, 1914.
This mosquito, in many respects, is very much like Myzomyia
ftmesta Giles and M. rossii Giles, but differs in the wing spots
and female palpal markings.
A brief description of this mosquito is given by Doctors Walker
and Barber^ and this more detailed description is given fully
to identify the species.
Myzomyia febrifera sp. nov. S and $ .
General color pale gray, thorax darker laterally, abdomen
dark, proboscis dark brown, labellse golden brown, apical third
of palpi of female white with dark brown markings, as de-
scribed below. Wings with 4 broad black costal spots alternating
with cream spots, other veins with alternately black and cream
scales. Legs wholly brown or bluish brown, with exceedingly
minute golden brown spots or rings at articulations.
Male. — Pale gray, head with erect black scales on occiput,
white ones on frons, and a bifurcated tuft of white hairs be-
tween eyes ; antennae golden brown-gray, apical segment inflated ;
palpi porrect, basal segments thin, dark brown, apical one white
with brown transverse and semilongitudinal bands which are
preapical and basal ; apical segment with pale bristles on interior
surface; proboscis dark brown; labellse pale.
Mesonotum pale gray with a dark brown median hair-line
expanding caudad before scutellum, also faint submedian and
dorsolateral lines caudad. Pleurae pale with indistinct, longitu-
dinal brown fasciae, golden hairs abundant on dorsum and
sides. Scutellum dark mediad ; metanotum dark, narrow median
fascia.
' This Journal, Sec. B (1914), 9, 384.
405
406 2^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Abdomen dark unctuous brown with golden hairs equal in
length to width of segments. Genitalia ordinary, claspers sub-
falcate-spatulate apically.
Legs uniformly dark brown, except coxae which are pale; all
articulations marked by indistinct golden brown spots or rings.
Wings pale cream with dark areas as follows: Basal third of
costa brown (1),^ then a short cream area (2), then a long
brown area (3), one-fifth length of wing a pale area one-half as
long (4), a brown area equal to this (5), another pale area equal
to this (6), a brown area two-thirds as long as this (7), and
an apical pale area (8) . Subcosta with brown area below apical
half of (1) and one also below (3) . First longitudinal vein with
brown area like (1) on subcosta, but its next dark area (3) is
interrupted just after its beginning by a pale area equal to
(2) in length, followed by brown area two-thirds the length of
(3) ; the remaining apical markings of this vein are like (4),
(5), (6), (7), and (8) on costa. First submarginal cell twice the
length of the second posterior, its forks brown, their junction
pale, the stem brown, interrupted by pale areas at cross veins.
Third vein pale with 2 dark spots at cross veins and 1 at apex.
Fourth longitudinal vein with pale basal third, then dark to cross
veins, at which it is pale, and beyond which dark nearly to
junction of forks which is pale; beyond this point, both forks
are dark to apices which are pale. Fifth vein pale with a small
dark subbasal spot and a spot at forks, the anterior of which
has 1 long and 1 short basal dark spot and a similar preapical
one; basal three-eighths of posterior fork pale, the apical five-
eighths dark. Sixth vein with basal one-fourth pale, then a
short dark line, a short pale line, and the apical one-half dark.
Marginal fringe dark brown, with pale areas at all veins except
sixth.
Female. — Color of head, body, legs, and wings similar to that
of male, but wings much darker and more distinctly marked.
White frontal tufts extended to middle of clypeus ; proboscis as
in male but darker; palpi somewhat similar to those of M.
rossii Giles, but apical third cream-white with an ill-defined wide
brown ring near its middle, or subbasal in some specimens;
middle and basal thirds of palpus separated by a narrow snowy
ring ; basal scales erect. Antennae dark brown with golden gray
verticels.
* (1), (2), etc., refer to numeration of costal areas and correlate these
with areas on other veins of wing.
IX. D, 4 Banks: New Philippine Malaria Mosquito 407
Length, exclusive of proboscis: $ , 3.5 millimeters; $ , 3 milli-
meters ; length of wing, 2.75.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Canlubang near Calamba {E. L.
Walker and M. A. Barber).
Type $ and $ , No. 18015, in entomological collection. Bureau
of Science, Manila. Paratypes bear the same number.
Time of rearing, April 2, 1914.
This species has been proved to be a malaria carrier, hence
its name.
THE PHILIPPINE
Journal of Science
D. General Biology, Ethnology,
AND Anthropology
Vol. IX SEPTEMBER, 1914 No. 5
STUDIES IN PHILIPPINE JASSOIDEA: I, SOME REMARKABLE
TETTIGONIELLID.€
By C. P. Baker
(From the College of Agriculture, University of the Philippines,
Los Banos, P. L)
Eleven text figures
It did not take long for Julian Valdez, after coming to these
Islands two years ago, to bring together specimens of all of the
Tettigoniellidse previously recorded from the Islands, and that
from a very circumscribed region near Los Baiios, Laguna Prov-
ince, Luzon. At the same time he discovered many more not
yet in the Philippine list. Among the latter I find some very
remarkable insects — a few belonging to genera or species de-
scribed by Distant.^
One group of species in this new material represents a generic
type apparently undescribed by Distant, Kirkaldy, Melichar, or
Matsumura, and this group adds to the Philippine fauna not only
a new genus, but a subfamily not previously known to occur so
far east. The species of this genus are found, so far as known
to me, only in the forests on the neighboring mountain masses
of Maquiling and Banahao, and for this reason I am giving them
the generic name Makilingia,
Genus IttAKIUNGIA novum
Small tettigoniellids, colored principally black and red, rarely
whitish, with head much narrower than pronotum, anterior mar-
gin very shortly sublaminate and strongly rounded in front
between the eyes. Face rather long and narrow. Basal clypeal
suture usually entirely obsolete. Lorae small and narrow. Lat-
* Fauna Brit. India-Rhynchota.
130422 409
410 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
eral frontal margins passing close to eyes. Vertex flattish or
concave, variously impressed or excavated, and always longer
than half width between eyes. Ocelli placed before the line of
anterior margins of eyes. Pronotum longer than the vertex,
of a sexangular type in form, but anteriorly strongly, quite
evenly, and narrowly rounded from the lateral angles to between
the eyes, the posterior lateral margins short, the posterior mar-
gin gently incurved, the pleural area with a strong complete
carina. Scutellum usually large, longer than wide or wider
than long, and with an acuminate tip, the posterior area more
or less swollen. Tegmina normal in outline or somewhat nar-
rowed distad, with 4 apical cells and 2 or 3 anteapicals, some-
times with indistinct and irregular cross- veins in the costal area ;
clavus without cross- veins, its 2 sectors joining the commissure;
appendix very short or extending to near tip of inner apical cell.
Armature of hind tibiae dense and heavy. Sculpturation largely
a heavy and conspicuous puncturation.
Type: Makilingia nigra sp. nov.
By reason of the very distinctive form of pronotum and head,
the strong sculpturation and coriaceous tegmina this genus un-
questionably finds its nearest relatives among the Hylicinae — a
group very highly developed in India. Of the described hylicine
genera it approaches most nearly to Bhooria. Viewed from
above, the remarkable character of the head is not apparent,
but a side view instantly removes it from any near relationship
with Tettigoniella.
The species of this group are undoubtedly congeneric. They
all conform closely to the generic type in habitus and all funda-
mental characters. Within the group, however, are remarkable
divergences in structural detail. It would be easy to break the
genus into three or four groups equivalent to many of Distant's
or Kirkaldy's "genera," although in well-founded taxonomy I do
not see how they could be more than subgenera.
Synopsis of species of Makilingia.
a\ Clypeus notched at tip, the basal suture distinct at least at sides, front
more than twice longer than wide; black, more or less whitish or
bluish pruinose, the vertex with two triangular yellow marginal spots ;
length 7 mm M. prninosa sp. nov.
a'. Clypeus entire and rounded at tip, the basal suture obsolete; front much
less than twice as long as wide.
6\ Ocelli about as near eyes as to each other; ground color in large part
black; scutellum wider than long.
c\ Without red spots; deep black throughout, except the yellow legs
and antennal scape; length 5-6 mm M. nigra sp. nov.
c'. With red spots on vertex and elsewhere.
IX, D, 6 Baker: Studies in Philippine Jassoidea, I 411
rf\ Deep black, four spots on margin of vertex, and a large elongate
spot on claval commissure red or yellow; legs yellow; length
5-5.5 mm M. maculata sp. nov.
d\ Vertex with four large coalescent spots about margin and three
smaller spots basally ; pronotum black ; tegmina bronzy greenish
with basal margin of clavus calloused red; legs reddish brown;
length 5-5.5 mm M. colorata sp. nov.
6'. Ocelli distinctly nearer to each other than to eyes; scutellum longer
than wide; color very pale ochraceous with two small black mar-
ginal spots on vertex next eyes; tegmina milky white; length
5-5.5 mm M. pallida sp. nov.
Makiliagia nigra sp. nov.
Body and tegmina deep black, the legs and two basal antennal
articles lemon yellow. Length ^ 5, $ 6 mm.
Length of face twice the width between eyes; basal clypeal
suture obsolete; front a little
swollen and with disc flat-
tened, transversely impressed
above beneath margin of ver- / V ^xA i Ji jj^J
tex; front coarsely sparsely )/ V Y'\ / '.
punctate on disc, lateral mar- \ / ^ (1 ' / \
gins and clypeus coarsely N^^" --^^ / \ \^ iy'
shagreened; lorse and genae
with very large confluent ^w
punctures. Length of vertex
about five-sixths of the width ^^
between eyes, its anterior
lateral margins slightly bi-
sinuate ; surface coarsely
sparsely punctate, the entire ^''-'- ^^«^^'^-^^-^-<*Bp.nov.
lateral areas between ocelli and eyes deeply excavated, as is also
the anterior median area. Ocelli somewhat in front of anterior
line of eyes, an* about as far from each other as from eyes.
Pronotum coarsely sparsely punctate, and posteriorly with in-
distinct transverse rugae. Scutellum wider than long, longer
than pronotum, transverse impressed line at middle very strong
and medially widened ; posterior to impressed line the surface is
distinctly longitudinally striolate. Tegmina opaque, coriaceous
proximad including the clavus, the entire coriaceous portion
strongly sparsely punctate. Last ventral segment of female
rectangularly emarginate, the lateral posterior borders strongly
curved.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Banahao (Julian Valdez —
coll. Baker) ,
412
The Philippine Jo^irnal of Science
Makilingia pruinosa sp. nov.
Body and tegmina deep black; legs reddish brown, femora
except tips black, 2 basal articles of antennae yellowish. Narrow
margin of head in front of eyes, and 2 large subtriangular spots
near tip of vertex, yellowish ; younger specimens entirely whitish
or bluish pruinose above, this gradually disappearing in older
specimens. Length $ 7 mm.
Length of face more than two and a half times the width
between eyes, basal clypeal suture distinct at least at sides, the
clypeus strongly notched at tip; face evenly convex, narrowly
impressed below margin of vertex ; front and gense coarsely and
confluently punctured, the clypeus and small area at base of
front coarsely shagreened, the
front with indistinct trans-
verse glabrous stripes at
sides. Length of vertex a
little more than three-fourths
width between eyes, its disc
coarsely sparsely punctate, a
very fine carina very near to
anterior margin and parallel-
ing it; a large depression be-
tween each ocellus and the
margin, and another medially
situated, back of tip. Ocelli
far in front of the line of
anterior margins of eyes, and
much nearer to eyes than t®
each other. Disc of prono-
tum strongly transversely
rugosopunctate, the lateral margins very slightly angled at hind
margins of eyes (not shown in drawing) . * Scutellum wider
than long, a little more than half length of pronotum, deeply
broadly impressed near pronotum, the posterior portion swollen
and finely rugose. Tegmina, except apically, coriaceous and
strongly punctate, the veins strong, inner apical cell and ap-
pendix whitish translucent. Last ventral segment of female
rectangularly emarginate, the lateral posterior borders straight.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling {Julian Valdez —
colL Baker),
Makilingia maculata sp. nov.
Body and tegmina deep opaque black; the legs and basal
antennal articles whitish or yellowish; front margin of head
P'IG. 2. Makilingm pruinosa sp. nov.
IX. D, 5 Baker: Studies in Philippine Jassoidea, I 413
with 4 equally spaced small bright red spots; clavus largely
occupied by an irregular elongate commissural spot, broader
anteriorly and constricted before the posterior end, either bright
red or bright yellow; costal area with a large translucent spot
slightly beyond line of tip of clavus. Length 5 5, $ 5.5 mm.
Length of face a little more than twice width between eyes;
basal clypeal suture obsolete; front and clypeus evenly convex,
coarsely but very uniformly shagreened throughout, scarcely at
all impressed below margin of vertex; lorse and gense coarsely
sparsely punctate. Length of vertex about three-fourths of
width between eyes; entire surface evenly shallowly concave.
Ocelli just in front of line of anterior margin of eyes, and some-
what farther from each other than from eyes. Pronotum with
disc coarsely shallowly irregularly punctate. Scutellum wider
than long, nearly smooth an- , .,
terior to the transverse me- \ ^x /
dian fine impressed line; back /\ . --^ A )';\ |i<
of this line greatly swollen to j ' ' 5
a posterior transverse ridge, / \ r^\ / (
the surface of this posterior ^ "^ ~ \;^ /) /
area shining and minutely \ / ./^
check striate. T e g m i n a /
opaque, coriaceous basally _, -/--' \
where it is sparsely punctate. ^/"^ / ^^\\ ^ ,
Last ventral segment of fe- vjill_- -/ jitr^
male with the area of the Lz^r^ \ ■/ ^—^
emargination deep black, the ' -O.^T"'^ /
emargination occupied by a ir » itr , •/• •
^ jr ./ Pjq 3 Makihngia maculata sp. nov.
large tooth, the lateral post-
erior margins straight; the last ventral segment of male is very
large, strongly swollen, the hind margin medially acute, and the
pygofers are distally strongly twisted, though this may not be
normal.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling and Mount Ba-
nahao {Julian Valdez — coll. Baker).
Makilingia colorata sp. nov.
Head and pronotum shining black with a bronzy luster; legs
reddish, femora yellowish ; basal articles of antennse yellow ; face
broadly banded above, this band reddish above at margin of
vertex shading into yellow below, the lower margin of band
sinuate. Vertex with 4 very large coalescent shining red spots
on anterior margin, 2 small basal spots near eyes coalescent with
these, and 1 small separated median basal spot. Basal half of
414
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
\
K
\/
\/
tegmina bronzy greenish, black punctate, remainder blackish
translucent, the inner apical cell and appendix paler ; inner basal
borders of clavus shining calloused and reddish. Length s 5,
$ 5.5 mm.
Length of face nearly two and a half times width between
eyes; basal clypeal suture obsolete; front and clypeus evenly
convex, and evenly, thickly, strongly shagreened; lorse, gense,
and pronotal pleurae below the carina, rugosopunctate. Length
of vertex three-fourths of width between eyes ; surface broadly
concave; all of the red marginal areas shining calloused and
nearly smooth or slightly striate; the dark disc thickly coarsely
punctate ; a longitudinal area outside of ocelli and reaching base
^^ of vertex excavated; where
this lateral depressed area
reaches basal margin, the
margin is cut through with a
narrow sinus, a structure
previously unknown in this
family. Ocelli far in front
of line of anterior margin of
eyes, and farther from each
other than from the eyes.
Pronotum thickly and coarse-
ly thimble-punctured. Scutel-
lum much wider than long,
about as long as pronotum,
area anterior to the fine im-
pressed transverse line
coarsely thimble-punctured,
behind this line slightly
swollen and finely rugose. Last ventral segment of female
medially rectangularly marginate, the lateral posterior margins
straight.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling (Julian Valdez —
coll. Baker) .
Makilingia pallida sp. nov.
Body pale ochraceous throughout; the tegmina milky white,
apically narrowly margined with smoky; vertex with 2 small
black spots on anterior margin next eyes and the ocelli black
margined. Length ^ 5, $ 5.5 mm.
Length of face a little more than twice width between eyes;
basal clypeal suture obsolete ; front and clypeus finely punctured,
the former flattened on disc; lorse, genae, and pronotal pleurae
below the carina rugosopunctate. Length of vertex about two-
Fig. 4. Makilingia colorata sp. nov.
IX, D, 0
Baker: Studies in Philippine Jassoidea, I
415
Fig. 5. MakUingia pallida sp. nov.
thirds the width between
eyes; sparsely coarsely punc-
tured, the median and lateral
areas depressed. Ocelli con-
siderably in front of line of
anterior margins of eyes, and
much nearer to each other
than to eyes. Pronotum
coarsely and rather sparsely
punctured. Scutellum longer
than wide, with a transverse
deeply excavated area next
pronotum, the remainder
swollen and rugoso-punctate.
Tegmina with apical half
pearly translucent, the basal half coriaceous and sparsely
strongly punctate. Last ventral segment of female emarginate,
the emargination occupied by a black tooth, the whole area of
the emargination being black, the lateral posterior margins
straight.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling (Julian Valdez —
coll. Baker).
Genus MILEEWA Distant
Mileewa luzonica sp. nov.
Vertex, pronotum, and scutellum ferruginous, the front margin
of vertex and all below very pale yellowish, the tegmina washed
with shining ferruginous. A large rectangular spot in middle
of vertex, 2 round spots near basal margin of pronotum, a vary-
ing and indistinct median area on posterior half of pronotum,
lateral angles of scutellum broadly, a narrow longitudinal band
on clavus within commissural
margin and not reaching tip
of clavus, a longitudinal band
on corium bordering claval
suture and passing into inner
apical cell, and a band from
base of tegmina passing to
apex of first anteapical cell,
black; area of apical cells
smoky translucent. Length s
4.5, $ 4.75 mm.
Length of face two and one-
fourth times width between
PIG. 6. Mileewa luzonica sp. nov. ^y^s, basal clypeal suture dis-
416 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
tinct, the whole surface faintly shagreened; front and clypeus
strongly convex, the former slightly flattened on disc above.
Length of vertex about three-fourths of width between eyes,
surface smoothly convex. Ocelli nearly on line of anterior mar-
gin of eyes, somewhat nearer to eyes than to each other. Pro-
notum smooth, the pleural carina very fine but complete. Scut-
ellum wider than long, a fine impressed transverse line at middle.
Tegmina opaque proximad of apical cells, but not at all coriace-
ous, and not at all punctate. If viewed squarely the hind margin
of last ventral segment appears to be slightly incurved and with
a median projection, the hind angles oblique; if viewed at a
slight angle the hind margin appears to be deeply evenly emar-
ginate.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling {Julian Valdez —
coll. Baker).
Mileewa luzonica var. decolorata var. nov.
Body pale ochraceous
throughout, the tegmina whit-
ish subtransparent and smoky
tipped. The quadrangular
spot on vertex is divided into
two along the median line.
Pronotal spots as in M. luzo-
nica. Length 4.5 mm.
The face is somewhat nar-
rower in the single specimen
than in typical luzonica, and
TiQ.1. MiUewaluzonicav2Lr. decolorata yB.r.Tioy. ^^C VerteX is slightly longer,
but otherwise it is very close
to the species, and at present must be placed with it.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling {Julian Valdez—
coll. Baker),
Genus UJNA St^l
Ujna philippinensis sp. nov.
Black, all below very pale yellowish. Vertex with 2 large
lateral spots extending forward from eyes, 2 irregular spots
involving the ocelli, 1 median stripe on posterior two-thirds
which is broadened anteriorly and narrowly extended basally
to eyes, and a narrowly triangular median spot at tip, pale yel-
lowish. Scutellum with an indication of a median yellowish
line anteriorly. Elytra deep smoky throughout, costal area sub-
hyaline as far distad as apical cells, this area broadening distad
IX, D. 5 Baker: SUidies in Philippine J assoidea, I 417
where it is crossed by a red dash on the line of an indistinct
oblique cross nervure. Length 4 mm.
Front and clypeus very strongly convex and minutely sha~
greened, the former with 2 transverse black spots on upper
margin. Second antennal article very large, longer than first.
Vertex very long, narrowly rounded anteriorly, nearly smooth,
coarsely shagreened just before tip, length once and a half the
width between eyes, slightly impressed across ocelli. Ocelli very
large, on the line of anterior margins of eyes and almost as far
from median line as from eyes. Pronotum nearly smooth, the
pleural carina complete. Scutellum wider than long, convex and
nearly smooth anteriorly, deeply transversely foveate just behind
middle, the posterior area
minutely rugose. Hind mar-
gin of last ventral segment of / \ ^\
female slightly incurved. ' c 'o \ \ \ !}
Luzon, Laguna Province, / - \; 1/ \
Mount MsLquiling {Julian Val- ^ \ ',.;^ /{ -^
dez — coll. Baker). y" V P .^ _A -J^
This appears to be nearest \ .' I ;/ /
to U. consors of Distant. The -, >
genera Mileewa and Ujna are
very small and peculiar close-
ly related tettigoniellids. As C^ 'Z^--^-
described by Distant they - _^^
seemed to be quite distinct- ...^/g; t/jna p/.iiippinen«« sp. nov.
Mileewa with its carinate ver-
tex and truncate tegmina, and TJjna with its carinate front and
rounded tegmina. Both genera have only 3 apical cells in the
tegmina. Melichar ^ describes a new species which he names
Mileewa gillavryi, which has the head form of Mileewa, but the
wing form of Ujna. Mileewa luzonica described herein does not
have a distinctly carinated vertex, nor does Ujna philippinensis
have the carinated front. However, the Mileewa is evidently
congeneric with the type of the genus and the Ujna even shows
the general color plan of Ujna delicatida and U. co7isors of Dis-
tant. This leaves only the truncated tegmina on which to sepa-
rate Mileewa. Melichar mentions the close resemblance of his
Mileewa gillavryi to the type of Ujna, and I believe that it should
be placed in that genus, if Ujna is to be kept separate from
Milee^va.
'Notes Leyden Mus. (1914), 36, 125.
418
The Philippine Journal of Science
1914
Genus TETTIGONIELLA Jacobi
Tettigoniella whiteheadii Distant.
Very pale ochraceous throughout ; tibiae and tarsi slightly dark-
ened; 2 small black dots at tip of vertex, 2 spots on margin
anterior to ocelli, 1 large median angulated black spot connected
with basal margin of vertex by a median stripe, a variable median
stripe on pronotum and scutellum, entire commissural margin of
tegmina narrowly, and principal sectors of corium, dark brown
to black. Tegmina concolorous, becoming smoky subhyaline api-
cally. Length s 9.5, $ 11 mm.
Length of face somewhat less than twice width between eyes.
Face strongly swollen; the disc of front flattened, lateral areas
with numerous transverse darker stripes, the upper angles of
the front, and the upper
angles of the flattened area,
each with subtriangular black
spots — extensions of those on
the vertex. Face and vertex
very finely shagreened. Head
tumidly rounded in front, the
anterior portion of vertex
strongly convex, posterior
third with a strongly im-
pressed complete transverse
area in which the ocelli are
placed. Length of vertex
somewhat more than half
width between eyes, slightly shorter in the male; anterior
margin slightly incurved at eyes, much more strongly so in
the male. Ocelli just behind the line of the anterior margins of
the eyes, distinctly long oval in shape, and twice as far from the
median line as from the eyes. Pronotum with a few scattered
weak punctures and with very indistinct transverse wrinkles, the
anterior third with a deep oblique groove on either side of median
line. Scutellum about as wide as long, large acuminate-tipped,
a little shorter than pronutum, the sharp transverse impressed
line near middle of disc. Last ventral segment of female some-
what produced and strongly narrowly rounded.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling and Mount Bana-
hao (Julian Valdez — coll Baker) .
This species presents a remarkable superficial resemblance to
Tettigoniella spectra var. nigrilinea St41, and specimens may be
found under that name in collections. But apart from minor
Fig. 9. Tettigoniella whiteheadii Distant.
IX, D, 5 Baker: Studies in Philippine J assoMea, I 419
differences, the head in whiteheadii is narrower than pronotum
and the disc of front is flattened. In these characters the species
agrees with the genus Kolla of Distant. But the chief character
mentioned by Distant for Kolla — the curvature of the anterior
margin of vertex beyond eyes — varies widely in the sexes of
many species of Tettigoniella, as it does in the species described
above. In fact, so much does it vary, that in some species, the
female might be typical Kolla and the male Tettigoniella so
far as this character is concerned. In Tettigoniella, likewise,
there is a wide range of flattening of the disc of the front.
Distant himself figures species of Tettigoniella with head dis-
tinctly narrower than pronotum.
Tettigoniella makilingensis sp. nov.
Pale greenish yellow, below
concolorous, with clypeus,
tibiae apically, and tips of
female valves, light green.
Tip of vertex with a small \ .,
black spot. Length $ 11 mm. //
Head slightly broader than /
pronotum. Face nearly twice
as long as width between eyes
and strongly swollen. Outer \
genal margins nearly straight. \
Front with disc not flattened,
the lateral areas with numer- /
ous darker transverse streaks. p,,. ,,. remgomeiia .nauninacnsis sp. nov.
Face and vertex finely sha-
greened. Vertex with a sharply impressed median line, the
anterior areas on either side of this strongly convex. Vertex
strongly angularly produced, nearly as long as width between
eyes, and a little longer than pronotum. Ocelli just in front of
line of anterior margins of eyes, about as far from eyes as from
median line. Pronotum with a few scattering very weak punc-
tures, anteriorly with a transverse impressed groove, this groove
strongly roundly bent cephalad near middle, straight at the
sides. Scutellum smooth, with a sharp transverse impressed
line behind middle of disc; width equalling length, and this
much exceeding length of pronotum. Tegmina whitish trans-
lucent, apically transparent, the principal sectors of both clavus
and corium brown and indistinctly beaded. Last ventral seg-
ment of female with hind margin broadly evenly rounded.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling {Julian Valdez —
coll Baker),
420 The Philippine Journal of Science
This species is nearest to T. quinquenotata Stal, but the latter
is a smaller species, and apart from other differences, has the
head narrower than the pronotum.
Tettigoniella differentialis sp. nov.
Pale green, legs white, vertex with a discal black spot and
head with 2 black dots on margin in front of eyes ; tegmina semi-
transparent with brownish veins, the milky white wings under-
neath giving them an opaque appearance. Length $ 7 mm.
Length of face about once and a third width between eyes.
Outer genal margins strongly sinuate below eyes. Face strongly
swollen, the disc of front not at all flattened; lateral areas of
front with numerous darker transverse stripes. Face and vertex
finely shagreened. Head tumidly rounded in front, the vertex
strongly convex anteriorly, impressed across the base. Length
of vertex about three-fourths
of width between eyes, an-
s^ terior margin slightly swollen
\, just in front of eyes. Ocelli
/ jx " : 1 /'^4j ij^\ just behind lines of anterior
Y n/ Y'v /V margins of eyes, and much
/ \ ' ( V /) ' nearer to eyes than to median
_ ,' ^V;\ A line. Pronotum with an
/ / evenly curved transverse im-
. / pressed groove at anterior
\/ one-fourth, back of this the
Fio.li. Tettigoniella dif^ereniioMss^. no.. surface distinctly tranversc-
ly wrinkled. Scutellum very
short acuminate tipped, much wider than long, the width nearly
equal t^ length of pronotum. Last ventral segment of female
somewhat produced, the hind margin narrowly rounded.
Luzon, Laguna Province, Mount Maquiling (^Julian Valdez —
coll. Baker).
This species is similar in coloration to T. unimaculata Sign.,
but the black spot on the vertex is behind the middle and much
smaller, and the vertex is much longer. Tettigoniella unima-
culata is referred to Kolla by Distant while T. differentialis
could not possibly be so referred. It does not appear from the
descriptions given that T. unimaculata of Distant is at all that
of Signoret. Distant does not attempt to define the limits of
variability of the species, as he determines it. Nor does it
appear that the reference of T. kinbergi to unimaculata is at all
final. StSl noted the resemblance, but considered them distinct.
ILLUSTRATIONS
TEXT FIGURES
(Drawings by C. F. Baker)
Fig. 1. Makilingia nigra sp. nov.
2. Makilingia pruinosa sp. nov.
3. Makilingia maculata sp. nov.
4. Makilingia colorata sp. nov.
5. Makilingia pallida sp. nov.
6. Mileewa luzonica sp. nov.
7. Mileewa luzonica var. decolorata var. nov,
8. (//na philippinensis sp. nov.
9. Tettigoniella whiteheadii Distant.
10. Tettigoniella makilingensis sp. nov.
11. Tettigoniella differentialis sp. nov.
421
PHILIPPINISCHE HISTERIDEN: P
Von H. BiCKHARDT
{C asset, Germany)
Eine Tafel
Professor C. F. Baker vom College of Agriculture, University
of the Philippines, in Los Baiios hatte die Giite mir eine kleine
Suite Histeriden von den Philippinen su senden, die den nach-
stehend aufgef iihrten Arten angehoren. Ich bin uberzeugt, dass
bei grosserem Material sich noch manche weitere Art fur diese
interessante Insel-Gruppe nachweisen lasst.
Hololepta elongata Erichson.
Hololepta elongata Erichson, in Klug, Jahrb. Ins. (1834), 92; Mar-
SEUL, Monogr. (1853), 190, t. 4, f. 31.
Ein kleines Exemplar vom Mt. Maquiling (Nr. 1959). Die
Art ist iiber den ganzen Malayischen Archipel von Indien bis
zu den Philippinen verbreitet.
Apobletes tener Marseul.
Apobletes tener Marseul, Monogr. (1860), 859, t. 15, f. 5.
Die vorliegenden Stiicke wurden bei Los Baiios und am Mt.
Maquiling gefunden (Nr. 1964). Auch in meiner Sammlung
(ex coll. F. Schmidt) befinden sich mehrere Stucke von den
Philippinen. Die Art scheint weit verbreitet zu sein. Mir
liegen noch Exemplare vor von Java, Borneo, Sumatra und
Formosa.
Apobletes feriatus Lewis.
Apobletes feriatus Lewis, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (1902), VII, 10, 224.
Die Philippinischen Stucke stamen vom Mt. Maquiling (Nr.
1962). Lewis vergleich die Art mit A. tener Mars, und A.
schaumi Mars. Wenn ich die Exemplare richtig bestimmt habe,
so ahneln die Tiere — abgesehen vom Sternum — ^viel mehr A. corti-
calis Lew. Sie sind von dieser Art verschieden durch ausge-
dehntere, aber noch feinere Punktierung des Halsschildes, darch
andere Punktierung des Propygidiums und durch ein geandertes
Pygidium.
' Proof read by C. F. Baker.
423
424 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Apobletes fictitius Lewis.
Apobletes fictitius Lewis, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1885) V, 16, 206.
Apobletes difficile SCHM., Ent. Nachr. (1889), 15, 334.
Apobletes platysomoides Lewis, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1891), VI,
8, 382.
Apobletes semperi Lewis, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1891), VI, 8, 382.
Diese Art ist von Professor Baker nicht gefunden worden.
Ich besitze jedoch die Type von A. difficile Schm. von den Philip-
pinen. Auch diese Art ist weit verbreitet und in meiner Samm-
lung durch Stiicke von Borneo, Mentawei, und Sumatra vertreten.
Platysoma (Platylister) charrali Marseul.
Platysoma {Platylister) charrali Marseul, Monogr. (1861), 146, t. 3,
f. 6.
Ein Stlick dieser seltenen Art, die bisher nur von Borneo
bekannt war, fand Professor Baker auf den Mt. Maquiling auf
Luzon (Nr. 1958). Der Lateralstreif des Halsschildes setzt
sich zuerst kraftig, dann feiner, am Hinterrand (Basis) fort.
Platysoma (Platylister) corticinus sp. nov.
Oblong-ovatus, subparallelus, subeonvexus, niger, nitidus.
Fronte cum clypeo antice concavo, stria transversa subrecta.
Pronoto stria laterali antice interrupta. Elytris striis dorsalibus
1. et 2. integris, 3. late interrupta, 4. apicali punctiformi obsoleta
vix notata, ceteris subhumeralibusque nullis. Propygidio later-
ibus fortiter ocellato-punctato, pygidio minus f ortiter sed densius
punctato, margine tenui elevato. Mesosterno antice emarginato,
stria marginali in medio late interrupta. Tibiis omnibus 4-
dentatis.
Long., 4.75-5.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (Baker Nr. 1648 et 1957).
Die Korperf orm ist langlich oval, fast parallelseitig. Die Stirn
ist nur vorn, der Clypeus vollstandig concav. Der Stimstreif
ist fein. Der Lateralstreif des Halsschildes ist etwas gesch-
wungen, dem Rande vorn und hinten mehr genahert als in der
Mitte der Seite; am Vorderrand hinter den Augen ist er unter-
brochen. Der 4. Dorsalstreif fehlt meist ganz, zuweilen ist
er durch einen undeutlichen apicalen Punkt angedeutet. Das
Propygidium ist an den Seiten mit kraftigen Augenpunkten
massig dicht besetzt, die Mitte ist fast glatt. Das Pygidium ist
dichter und etwas feiner punktiert, es hat einen ziemlich schar-
fen erhobenen Aussenrand. Der Randstreif des Mesosternums
ist vorn breit unterbrochen. Von den 4 Zahnchen der Hinter-
schienen ist das basale Zahnchen sehr klein und leicht zu iiber-
sehen.
IX. D. 6 Bickhardt: Philippinische Histeriden, I 425
Die neue Art ist mit P. abruptus Er. und ramoicola Mars, nahe
verwandt, sie gleicht diesen Spezies in Grosse und Habitus voU-
kommen. Sie unterscheidet sich von beiden durch das dichter
und f einer punktierte Pygidium ; von abruptus f erner durch den
unterbrochenen Lateralstreif des Halsschildes und den ebenfalls
unterbrochenen Mesosternalstreif. Von ramoicola ist die Art
ausserdem verschieden durch den breit unterbrochenen 3.
Dorsalstreif.
Platysoma (Platylister) ovatum Erichson.
Platysoma ovatus Erichson, in Klug, Jahrb. Ins. (1834), 1, 108;
Marseul, Monogr. (1853), 257, t. 7, f. 1.
Auch diese Art ist iiber den Malayischen Archipel weit ver-
breitet. Die vorliegenden Stucke wurden in Los Baiios (Nr.
1643) gefunden.
Platysoma (Platylister) abruptum Erichson.
Platysoma abruptum Frichson, in Klug, Jahrb. Ins. (1834), 1, 109;
Marseul, Monogr. (1853), 257, t. 7, f. 2; (1861), 142, t. 3, f. 2.
Platysoma gorhami Lewis, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1889), VI, 3,
278; (1893), VI, 11, 418.
Die beiden mir vorliegenden Exemplare von Los Baiios (Nr.
1649 und 1650) entsprechen sowohl der Beschreibung des Plor
tysoma gorhami Lew. wie auch der des Platylister abruptum Er.,
die ich sowohl nach Erichson wie nach Marseul verglichen habe.
Lewis hat bei Beschreibung seines gorhami off enbar vergessen,
die Art mit abruptus zu vergleichen ; dies hat seinen Grund darin,
dass er die Art als eine afrikanische ansah (er gibt 1889 als
Fundort Zansibar an, berichtigt dann 1893 in Philippinen) .
P. gorhami Lew. ist identisch mit P. abruptum Er.
Platysoma (Platylister) striatiderum Marseul.
Platysoma striatiderum Marseul, Monogr. (1853), 270, t. 7, f. 15.
Diese .Art gehort wegen des erhaben gerandeten Pygidiums
zur Untergattung Platylister Lew. Sie wurde von Professor
Baker bei Los Baiios aufgefunden (Nr. 1640).
Auch die folgenden Arten miissen wegen des gerandeten Py-
gidiums in die Untergattung Platylister gestellt werden : P. bir-
manum Mars., jobiense Mars., pini Lew., sesquistriatum Mars.,
contiguum Mars., emptum Mars.
Platysoma (s. str.) luzonicum Erichson.
Platysoma luzonicum Erichson, in Klug, Jahrb. Ins. (1834), 1, 111;
Marseul, Monogr. (1853), 265, t. 7, f. 10.
Mehrere Stucke von Los Banos (Nr. 1645).
130422 2
426 Tf^^ Philipinne Journal of Science i»i4
Platysoma (s. str.) uniforme Lewis.
Platysoma uniforme Lewis, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1894), VI, M,
176.
Die bei Los Baiios (Nr. 1642) gefundene Art scheint hierher
zu gehoren. Das basale Rudiment des 3. Dorsalstreifs ist
sehr undeutlich und nur bei seitlich auffallendem Licht schwach
wahmehmbar. Der 5. Dorsalstreif ist kiirzer als von Lewis an-
gegeben, er erreicht nicht die Mitte der Fliigeldecke sondern
nur etwa zwei Funftel derselben.
Platysoma (Cylistosoma) dufali Marseul.
Platysoma dufali Marseul, Abeille I (1864), 310.
Platysoma scitutum Lewis, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (1889), VI, 3,
280.
Der Diagnose von Marseul und auch der von Lewis ist noch
hinzuzufiigen, dass die Augenpunkte auf dem Propygidium viel
grosser sind als auf dem Pygidium.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (Baker Nr. 1651).
Liopygus diopsipygus Marseul.
Apobletus diopsipygus Marseul, Ann. Mus. Geneva (1879), 14, 259.
Ein kleines Exemplar von Los Baiios (Nr. 1646). Die Art
wurde bisher gefunden in Java (Teijbodas) , Perak und Sumatra ;
sie scheint weit verbreitet zu sein.
Santalus philippinarum sp. nov.
Elongatus, parallelus, convexus, niger, nitidus, fronte sub-
convexa, stria frontali antice recta; mandibulis curvatis, basi
extus marginatis. Thorace ciliato; striis lateralibus basin at-
tingentibus, versus basin convergentibus, interna antice integra,
in angulo antico rotundato. Elytris stria subhumerali interna,
dorsalibus 1.-3. integris, 4. antice vix abbreviata vel integra, 5.
ultra medium abbreviata. Propygidio pygidioque sat fortiter
punctatis. Mesosterno stria marginali antice integra obsoleta.
Tibiis anticis 3-dentatis.
Long., 8 mm.
Philippinen.
Der Korper ist langlich parallelseitig, oben massig gewolbt.
Der Stirnstreif ist vorn nahezu grade. Die Mandibeln sind
ziemlich stark gekriimmt, aussen nahe der Basis gerandet, auf
der Oberseite flach, kaum concav. Die Lateralstreifen des Hals-
schildes erreichen die Basis und convergieren nach hinten. Der
innere Lateralstreif ist vorn im flachen Bogen stumpfwinkelig
zum Vorderrand des Halsschildes gebogen (bei dem verwandten
piraticus Lew. geht der innere Lateralstreif weiter nach vorn
IX, D, 5 Bickhardt: Philippinische Histeriden, I 427
und biegt dann spitzwinkelig gerundet nach hinten zum Vor-
derrand des Halsschildes um; ferner verlaufen bei dieser Art
die Lateralstreifen parallel zu einander oder nahern sich gar
vorn mehr einander als hinten) . Der 5. Dorsalstreif reicht bis
zur Mitte der Fliigeldecke nach vorn oder noch etwas dariiber
hinaus, er ist parallel zur Naht. Das Propygidium ist ziemlich
kraftig und massig dicht, das Pygidium kaum feiner und dichter
punktiert. Der Marginalstreif des Mesosternums ist vorn nicht
unterbrochen, aber undeutlich.
Das typische Exemplar wurde am Mt. Maquiling auf Luzon
von Professor Baker erbeutet (Nr. 1644). Ein Stiick meiner
Sammlung, Mindoro (ex coll. Schmidt), das irrtiimlich als S,
congruens Mars, bestimmt war,^ gehort unzweifelhaft hierher,
trotzdem die Mandibeln etwas langer und starker concav sind.
Es wird das andere Geschlecht ( $ ) sein.
Die bekannten Arten der Gattung Santalus Lew. lassen sich,
wie folgt, auseinanderhalten. Sie sind samtlich in meiner
Sammlung vertreten.
Tabelle der Santalus Arten,
a\ Die Fliigeldecken haben einen kraftigoa Nahtstreif und 2 subhumeral-
streifen (Indien, Birma) S. latitibius Mars.
a'. Die Fliigeldecken haben keinen Nahtstreif. Der aussere Subhumcral-
streif fehlt (hochstens ist eine punktformige Andeutung an der
Schulter vorhanden).
6*. Der aussere Lateralstreif des Halsschildes ist nach hinten abgekurzt,
er erreicht nicht die Basis.
o\ Die Vorderschienen haben 4 Zahnchen, das Zahnchen nachst der Basis
ist klein und undeutlich. Der 4. Dorsalstreif ist an der Basis
um etwa ein Drittel verkiirzt (Lombok) S. congruens Mars.
c'. Die Vorderschienen haben 3 Zahne; der 4. Dorsalstreif der Fliigel-
decken ist vollstandig oder an der Basis ganz wenig abgekiirzt.
cT. Die Korperform ist oval; das Propygidium ist ziemlich krftftig
und massig dicht punktiert (Indien, Ceylon). S. orlentalis Payk.
d^ Der Korper ist oblong; das Propygidium ist ausserst fein und
seicht punktuliert (glatt erscheinend) , elongatulus Mars.
(Indien) S. parallelus Redt.
6". Der aussere Lateralstreif des Halsschildes reicht biz zur Basis.
€\ Das Propygidium und Pygidium sind glatt; hochstens finden
sich seitlich einige flache Punkte. (Die Mandibeln haben
eine lange, fein ausgezogene Spitze.) (Celebes.)
S. mandibular is Schmidt.
e\ Das Propygidium und Pygidium sind punktiert.
/\ Der Korper ist oblong, seitlich schwach gerundet. Die
Hinterschienen sind weniger stark verbreitert.
^ Zu diesser Art kann das Stiick nicht gehoren, denn die Vorderschienen
haben nur 3 Zahne, der aussere Lateralstreif des Halsschildes erreicht die
Basis und der 4. Dorsalstreif ist langer.
428 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
g^. Die Lateralstreifen des Halsschildes sind parallel, der
Zwischenraum ist weit. Das Mesosternum ist vorn
deutlich und vollstandig gerandet (Celebes).
S. rupestris Mars.
fir'. Die Lateralstreifen des Halsschildes convergieren nach
hinten, ihr Zwischenraum ist vorn an den Vorderecken
beinahe doppelt so breit als hinten nahe der Basis. Das
Mesosternum ist in der Mitte des Vorderrandes nicht,
Oder obsolet, gerandet (Celebes) S. tabelUo Mars.
/^ Der Korper ist langgestreckt, cylindrisch, fast parallelseitig.
Die Hinterschienen sind sehr stark verbreitert.
h^. Die Lateralstreifen des Halsschildes sind parallel, der
4. Dorsalstreif convergiert etwas mit der Naht der
Flugeldecken nach vorn (Timor).... S. piraticus Lew.
/i'. Die Lateralstreifen des Halsschildes convergieren nach
hinten. Der 4. Dorsalstreif verlauft parallel zur Naht
(Philippinen) S. philippinarnm Bickh.
Hister (Atholus) bakeri sp, nov.
Ovatus, convexus, niger, nitidus; antennis pedibusque rufo-
piceis; fronte plana, stria semihexagona valida antice recta;
pronoto stria lateral! interna unica antice interrupta hamata,
marginali lateribus et antice integra; eljrtris striis subhumera-
libus nullis, dorsalibus 1.4 integris, 5 suturalique dimidiatis,
crenatis. Propygidio pygidioque sparse punctatis. Mesosterno
antice obtuso, stria marginali integra; tibiis anticis dilatatis
4-dentatis.
Long., 4.5 mm.
Philippinen.
Die K5rperform ist oval, ziemlich stark gewolbt, die Ober-
seite ist glanzend schwarz. Die Fiihler und Beine sind rotbraun.
Die Stirn ist eben, der Stimstreif ist vorn ganz gerade und sein
Innenrand ist etwas (massig) eingedruckt. Das Halsschild
hat einen Lateralstreif, der an der Basis und vorn verkiirzt ist,
an der Vorderecke endigt dieser Streif in einem einv^arts gebo-
genen Hakchen. Der Marginalstreif reicht ununterbrochen um
Vorder- und Seitenrand herum. Die Flugeldecken haben 4
vollst^ndige Dorsalstreifen, der 5. und Nahtstreif reichen etwa
bis zur Mitte der Flugeldecken nach vorn. Das Propygidium
und Pygidium sind ziemlich fein und weitlaufig punktiert, gegen
die Spitze wird die Punktierung des Pygidiums feiner und dich-
ter. Das Prostemum hat keine Streifen. Das Mesosternum ist
vorn zugerundet und mit einer kraftigen Randlinie versehen.
Die Vorderschienen haben 4 Zahnchen, von denen der grossere
Spitzenzahn dreieckig vorgezogen ist.
Die neue Art ist mit Atholus torquatus Mars, am nachsten
verwandt. Die Korperform ist aber oval, starker gewolbt, die
IX, D. 5 Bickhardt: Philippinische Histeriden, I 429
Oberseite ist nicht punktiert, der Stirnstreif ist vorn ganz gerade
(bei torquatus schwach einwarts gebogen), der Nahtstreif der
Fliigeldecken ist etwas ktirzer. Das Pygidium ist ebenso punk-
tiert wie das Propygidium.
Professor Baker fand die Art bei Los Bafios (Nr. 1639).
Epierus nasicomis sp. nov. Tafel I.
Ovalis, convexus, niger, nitidus; antennis pedibusque rufis;
fronte antice in medio cornuta, circa impressa. Thorace sub-
laevi, stria marginali integra; elytris striis dorsalibus 1.-5. su-
turalique integris (3 internis partim obsoletis). Propygidio
pygidioque subtiliter sparsum punctulatis. Prosterno bistriato,
striis utrinque modice divergentibus, lobo magno antice obtuso ;
mesosterno antice subrecto, stria marginali integra. Tibiis an-
ticis breviter multispinosis.
Long., 2.20 mm.
Philippinen.
Die neue Art ist die einzige der Gattung Epierus mit einem
regelrechten Kopfhorn. Am Vorderrand der Stirn, wo Stirn
und Epistom zusammenstossen, steht gerade nach vorn gerichtet
ein wohlausgebildetes Horn. Unmittelbar daneben und dahin-
ter ist die Stirn etwas eingedruckt, ebenso ist der Clypeus con-
cav. Von den 6 vollstandigen Riickenstreifen der Fliigendecken
sind die 3 inneren (einschliesslich des Nahtstreif ens) auf der
Scheibe sehr fein und nur durch Punktreihen angedeutet, sie
sind oft nur bei schrag auffallendem Licht, zusehen. Das Pro-
pygidium und das Pygidium sind sehr fein (das letztere noch
feiner als das erstere) und sparlich nadelstichartig punktiert.
Diese Kehlplatte des Prosternums ist sehr gross und vorn quer
abgestutzt. Das Mesosternum ist am Vorderrand fast gerade,
das Prosternum ist mit seiner geraden Basis unmerklich in das
Mesosternum eingelassen.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (Baker Nr. 1647).
Paromatus (s. str.) sp.
Zwei Stiicke aus Los Baiios (Nr. 1641) ohne Auszeichnung
auf dem Pygidium, jedoch mit in toto flach eingedriicktem ersten
Abdominal-segment lassen sich unter den bekannten Arten der
Gattung nicht unterbringen. Dass die Gattung dringend der
Revision bedarf sehe ich vorlaufig von einer Beschreibung ab.
TAFELERKLARUNG
Tafel I. Epierus nasicornis sp. nov.
431
BiCKHARDT ; HiSTERIDEN, I.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 5.
TAFEL r. EPIERUS NASICORNIS SP. NOV.
NEUE FULGORIDEN VON DEN PHILIPPINEN: IP
Von L. Melichar
(Briinn, Atiatria)
Eine Tafel
DERBIN^E
Zoraida flavicomis sp. nov.
3 : Blassgelblich, Augen braun, Kopf r5tlich. Die langen
Fiihler flach, zusammengedriickt, gelblichweiss, fiusserst fein
braun gekSmt, die Rander rotlich, an der Spitze eingekerbt, in
der Einkerbung die kurze schwarze Borste eingef iigt. Pronotum
fast weiss, der Vorderrand rotlich, Schildchen gewolbt, die LSngs-
kiele undeutlich, auf dem Metanotum 2 braune Punkte.
Hinterleib blassgelblich, auf dem 4. oder 5. Ruckensegmente
jederseits 2 braune Fleckchen, die Spitze (Genitalapparat)
rotlich, Deckschuppen rot. Fltigeldecken hyalin, der Costalrand
rotlichgelb, der ^usserste Rand, die Apikalrandadern und samt-
liche Adem pechbraun. Die ersten 3 Apikaladern besitzen
einen runden braunen Punkt, aus welchem sie verdunnt und
farblos zum Apikalrande Ziehen. Fliigel kurz, rudimentftr.
Unterseite und Beine blassgelb, Hinterschienen mit einem Dome
hinter der Mitte.
$ unbekannt
Lange des Korpers, 4 mm. ; der Fltigeldecken, 10 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios und Mount Maquiling (2 Exem-
plare in meiner Sammlung, C. F. Baker.)
Zoraida puncticosta sp. nov.
$ : Blass grUnlichgelb, Augen braun. Das 2. Fuhlerglied
lang, zusammengedriickt, an der Spitze eingekerbt, in der Ein-
kerbung die Ftihlerborste eingelenkt, blassgriin, mit feinen brau-
nen Kornchen besetzt, die Spitze rotlich, Kopf und pronotum
blassgriin, letzteres in der Mitte nicht gekielt. Schildchen mit
mehreren braunen Flecken und Punkten und zwar 2 Langsstriche
an der Basis, 2-3 Punkte an den Seiten, 2 Punkte an der Apikal-
spitze und von diesen jederseits eine schiefe Querlinie zur Flii-
geldeckenbasis. Hinterleib griinlich, auf den Seiten des 4.
* Proof read by C. F. Baker.
483
434 ^'/^^ Philiqypine Journal of Science 1914
Rlickensegmentes jederseits 2 braune einandergenaherte Mac-
keln, die Mitte des Bauches pechbraun. Flugeldecken lang,
hyalin, der Costalrand gelblich, die Costalrandader an der Basis
von 2 schwarzen Linien begrenzt, dann bis zur Spitze mit klein-
eren und grosseren schwarzen Punkten besetzt; die Adern
gelblich. Fliigeln sehr klein, rudimentar. Beine blassgelblich,
Schenkel an der Spitze auf der Unterseite mit einem braunlichen
Fleck, Hinterschienen mit einem Dome hinter der Mitte, die
Spitze desselben dunkel.
S unbekannt.
Lange des Korpers, 4 mm.; der Flugeldecken, 11 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (1 Exemplar, C. F. Baker),
Zoraida dorsopimctata sp. nov.
S : Korper gelblichbraun. Die langen flachen Fiihler pech-
braun, fein gekornt. Pronotum schmutzigweiss, die Seiten
braun. Schildchen gewolbt, mit 3 deutlichen Langskielen, die
Scheibe mehr oder weniger dunkel. Auf dem Hinterleibsrucken
befinden sich jederseits 3 Reihen von schwarzen Punkten, welche
nach hinten zur Mittellinie konvergieren. Die Rander der Ge-
nitalsegmente schwarz. Metanotum stark kugelig gewolbt,
pechbraun. Bauch pechbraun, Brust schmutziggelb, an den
Seiten braun gefleckt. Flugeldecken hyalin, am Costalrande
gelblichbraun, nicht gefleckt, die Adern braun, auf den Apikal-
adern keine dunklen Punkte vor dem Apikalrande, letzterer
sowie der Hinterrand schmal braun gesaumt. Fliigel kurz, rudi-
mentar. Beine schmutziggelb, die Schienen dunkler, die Basis
der Hinterschenkel schwarzlich. Hinterschienen mit einem
Dome hinter der Mitte.
$ unbekannt.
Lange des Korpers, 5 mm. ; der Flugeldecken, 11.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (1 Exemplar, C. F. Baker),
Genus NEOCAMMA novum
Der Gattung Carnma Distant sehr ahnlich. Die Costalmem-
brane ist breit, so breit wie die nachste Zelle, aber nicht an der
Basis wie bei Camma (dilatata Dist.) vorgewolbt, der Scheitel
klein, dreieckig, die Stirne von der Seite betrachtet gerundet
aber nicht vorgewolbt, so dass die Wangen sehr schmal sind.
Die Stirnrander einander beriihrend, an der Clavusbasis diver-
gierend, ein kleines Stirndreieck bildend. Clypeus bedeutend
langer als die Stirne, in der Mitte und an den Seiten fein gekielt.
Die Fiihler unter den halbkugeligen, am Unterrande schwach
gebuchteten Augen eingelenkt, den Stirnrand weit liberragend.
IX. D, 6 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden von den Philippinen: II 435
das 2. P^uhlerglied fast dreimal so lang als breit, cylindrisch,
Fiihlerborste apikal eingefugt. Pronotum in der Mitte schmal,
nach aussen erweitert, Schildchen gewolbt, mit 3 Langskielen,
die Seitenkiele etwas furchenartig vertieft. Metanotum dreiek-
kig, gewolbt, in der Mitte mit einer Langsfurche Flugeldeeken
lang, schmal, in der Mitte am breitesten. Der Verlauf der
Adern wie bei Camma, die Radialzelle ist aber nicht so breit wie
bei Camma. Die Flugel ungefahr halb so lang wie die Flugel-
deeken, lanzettlich, nach hinten nicht erweitert, mit einer Ader
in der Mitte welche nach beiden Seiten kurze Aste zum Vor-
beziehungsweise Hinter-rande sendet, nach innen zu eine kurze
Gabelader. Beine grazil, Hinterschienen mit einem Dome hin-
ter der Mitte.
Von der Gattung Camma Dist., durch die an der Basis nicht
erweiterte Costalmembrane der Flugeldeeken, die langeren
Fiihler und die lanzettlich geformten Flugel, sowie die mit einem
Dome versehenen Hinterschienen verschieden.
Typ. gen. Neocamma trifasciata sp. nov.
Neocamma trifasciata sp. nov. Tafel I, Fig. 1-4.
$ : Korper gelblichbraun ohne Zeichnung. Fliigeldecken
hyalin mit 3 braunen Querbinden, der Costal- und Apikalrand
mit braunen Flecken. Der nervus radialis ist rotlich, die iibri-
gen Adern braunlichgelb. Beine gelblich.
$ unbekannt.
Lange des Korpers, 2.75 mm.; der Fliigeldecken, 7 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mount Maquiling (1 Exemplar, C. F. Baker).
Genus ACANTHOCERA novum
Kopf samt Augen klein, der Scheitel als kleines Dreieck an der
Basis erkennbar, die Stirne von der Seite betrachtet gerundet,
nicht vorgewolbt, die Wangen daher schmal, die Stirne von
vome linear, die Rander zusammenschliessend bis zur Spitze,
Augen halbkugelig, die Fuhler die Augen iiberragend, das 2.
Fiihlerglied mehr als doppelt so lang wie breit, cylindrisch, an
der Aussenseite mit einem breiten Zahne versehen, wodurch sich
diese Gattung von alien anderen bekannten Gattungen unter-
scheidet. Clypeus gross, breit, in der Mitte und an den Seiten
undeutlich fein gekielt. Rostrum die Hinterhiiften iiberragend.
Pronotum in der Mitte sehr schmal, die hintere stumpfwinkelige
Ausbuchtung fast den Vorderrand erreichend, die Seiten blat-
tartig erweitert. Schildchen breiter als lang, vor der Spitze
quer eingedriickt, mit 3 undeutlichen Langskielen. Fliigeldek-
ken lang, schmal, hinter der Mitte am breitesten; das Geader
436 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9u
ist aus der Abbildung ersichtlich. Fliigel kaum halb so lang
wie die Fliigeldecken, ziemlich breit, hyalin. Beine grazil, Hin-
terschienen nicht bedornt.
Typ. gen., Acanthocera punctifrons sp, nov.
Acanthocera punctifrons sp. nov. Tafel I, Figs. 5-8.
$ : Blassgriin, Augen braun, auf der Stirne 5 schwarze Punkte,
welche sich auf die Stimrander ausdehnen und daher auch
von der Seite sichtbar sind. Fliigeldecken hyalin, mit gelblich-
braunen Adern und zahlreichen hell braunlichgelben Makeln,
hinter der Basalzelle, an der Teilungsstelle des nervus radialis
und hinter der Clavusspitze eine dunkle pechbraune Makel.
Hinterleib, Unterseite und Beine blassgriin, auf der Aussenseite
der Vorderschienen an der Basis und in der Mitte je ein
schwarzer Punkt.
$ unbekannt.
Mnge des Korpers, 2 mm.; der Fliigeldecken, 6 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 Exemplar, C. F, Baker),
Fenuahala maculipennis sp. nov.
$ : Schmutzig gelblichweiss. Scheitel dreieckig, doppelt so
breit wie der Querdurchmesser des Auges, die Seiten gescharft
und aufgerichtet, mit sensiblen Organen besetzt Stirne schmal,
die Rander nur in der Mitte einander beriihrend, nach oben
und unten divergierend. Von der Seite betrachtet gerundet, die
Wangen kaum die Halfte des Langendurchmessers des Auges
breit. Fuhler in der unteren Wangenecke eingelenkt, den Unter-
rand des Auges erreichend, das 2. Fiihlerglied doppelt so lang
wie breit, cylindrisch. Clypeus breit, gewolbt, nicht gekielt.
Pronotum schmal, seitlich verbreitert. Schildchen mit 3 Kielen,
die seitlichen schwach gebuchtet. Auf den Wangen eine braun-
liche undeutliche Makel, in den hinteren Scheitelecken ein schwar-
zer Punkt, sonst mit weissem Sekret mehr oder weniger be-
deckt. Fliigeldecken lang, hyalin, mit zahlreichen rauchbraunen
zusammenfliessenden Makeln, vor der Apikalspitze dort wo die
beiden Aste des nervus radialis sich verbinden eine rundliche
dunklere Makel. Fliigel mehr als die Halfte der Fliigeldecken
lang, breit, hyalin. Hinterleibsbasis pechbraun, die Spitze hell.
Beine blass gelblichweiss, die Kanten der Schenkel schwarz, die
Schienen etwas verdunkelt, die Spitze der Hinterschienen und
der Hintertarsen schwarz.
S unbekannt.
Lange des Korpers, 3.5 mm.; der Fliigeldecken, 6 mm.
Luzon, Mount Maquiling (1 Exemplar, C. F. Baker).
IX, D. 5 Melichar: Neue Fulgoriden von den Philippinen: II 437
Mecynorhynchus hyalinus sp. nov.
S : Kleine, sehr zarte Derbine. Korper und Beine wachsgelb,
auf der Aussenseite des Scheitelrandes eine kleine rote Makel.
FlUgeldecken etwas schwach milchig getrubt, hyalin, mit weissen
Adern, ein sehr kleiner loter Punkt am Costalrande im ersten
PritteL Die Bildung des Kopfes und Verlauf der Adern in den
FlUgeldecken wie bie M. kershawi Kirk., von dieser durch die
hyalinen, nicht dunklen Fliigeldecken verschieden.
9 unbekannt.
LSnge, ungefahr 3 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 Exemplar, C. F. Baker).
Rhotana punctovenosa sp. nov.
Kopf und Thorax schmutzig gelblichweiss. Die Wangen hya-
lin, mit 2 schwarzen Strichen, der eine vor dem Auge, der
zweite vertikal auf der Aussenseite des Scheitelrandes. Auf
dem Schildchen 2 diffuse braunliche Makeln und 2 kleine Punkt-
chen vor der Spitze, Fliigeldecken breit, hyalin, graulichweiss,
stellenweise braunlich geflekt, die Adern karmoisinrot, schmal
hell gerandet, mit starken braunen Punkten besetzt. Ungefahr
10 schwarzbraune Punkte befinden sich am Costalrande und
zwar von der Basis bis zur Wolbung der Fliigeldecken. Fliigel
milchweiss getriibt. Hinterleib schwach rStlich, Beine rostgelb.
Diese Art ist durch die punktierten Adern und den Costalrand
besonders gekennzeichnet.
Lange, 5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C F. Baker).
Ehotana excelsa sp. nov.
Korper blassgelblich, die Stirn und Scheitelrander und der
Clypeus orangegelb., Augen braun, Fliigeldecken breit, hyalin,
glashell, glanzend, der Costalrand blass citronengelb. Von der
Mitte dieses Costalsaumes zieht eine ebenso gefarbte halb-mond-
formige Binde in der Mitte der Fliigeldecken, erweitert sich
an der konvexen Seite breit bis zum Schlussrande und miin-
det in den Costalrand, ohne sich mit dem Costalsaum zu ver-
binden. Daselbst befindet sich eine kleine braunliche Rand-
makel, anschliesend an diese ein roter Fleck. Die Adern sehr
zart, gelblich. Fliigel breit, in der Mitte blass citronengelb,
am Apikalrande vor der Spitze eine grosse schwarze dreilappige
Makel, vorne von einem blutroten Fleck begrenzt; in den mit-
tleren Lappen befindet sich ein weisser Punkt. Beine blassgelb.
Der R, latipefinis Walk, ahnlich, durch die Zeichnung verschieden
und leicht zu erkennen.
438 ^/^^ Philippine Journal of Science
Lange, 5 mm.; Spannweite, 7-8 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios und Mount Maquiling (C. F,
Baker).
Rhotana basipunctulata sp. nov.
9 : Korper blassgelblich, Augen braun, Flugeldecken hyalin,
stark irisirend, mit blass-gelblichen Adem, die Queradern blass-
braunlich gesaiimt, so dass 2-3 Querbinden entstehen. Auf
dem nervus radialis nahe der Basis befinden sich 3 schwarze
Punkte welche in einer Langsreihe stehen. Unterseite und
Beine blassgelb. Nach den 3 Punkten auf der ersten Langsader
ist diese Art leicht zu erkennen.
^ unbekannt.
Lange samt Flugeldecken, 3 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 Exemplar, C. F. Baker).
TAFELERKLARUNG
Tafel I
Pic. 1-4. Neocamma trifasciata sp. nov.
n-8. Acanthocera pnnctifrons sp. nov.
439
Melichar: Neue Fulgokiden, IL]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 5.
Fig. 1-4. Neocamma trifasciata sp. nov. 5-8. Acanthocera punctifrons sp. nov.
TAFEL I.
ELATERIDyE DES ILES PHILIPPINES *
Par Ed, Fleutiaux
(Nogent-sur-Marney France)
Les Elaterides decrits en suite sont partie d'une collection
que j'ai regu de M. C. F. Baker, professeur d'agronomie au
College d' Agriculture de Los Banos, iles Philippines.
Agrypnus bifoveatus Candeze.
Mon. Elat. (1857), 1, 23, 41; Revis, Mon. Elat. (1874), 8.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Lacon cervinus Erichson.
Nov. Act. Ac. Lesp. Carol. (1834), 16; SuppL, 1, 230. CandIjze,
Revis. Mon. Elat. (1874), 48, 78.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Meristhus nigritulus Candeze.
Elat. nouv. (1893), 10. Fleutiaux, Ann. Soc. ent. belg. (1895), 167.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
N'^tait connu que de Sumatra.
Alans scytale Candeze.
Mon. Elat. (1857), 1, 214, 228; Revis. Mon. Elat. (1874), 120; Ann.
Mus. Civ. Gen. (1878), 106.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Decrit d'abord des Philippines, puis trouve ensuite a Celebes
et en Nouvelle Guinee.
^olus beccarii Candeze.
Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. (1878), 117.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Espece decrite de Makassar, au meme temps qu'une autre tres
voisine, ^. multilineatus et placees toutes deux par Tauteur dans
le genre Heteroderes. La derniere se trouve egalement en
Malaisie.'
^= Proof read by C. F. Baker.
' Candeze, Ann. Mus, Civ, Gen, (1894), 488.
130422 3 441
442 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i^>i i
Heteroderes drasterioides Fleutiaux.
Ann. Soc. ent. France (1894), 686.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
D'Annam et de Saigon. Est avec H. intermedins Cand. tres
voisin, de H. triangularis Esch. et de H. proximus Fleut.
Drasterius sulcatulus Candeze.
Mon. Elat. (1859), 2, 423, 427.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Deer it de I'Hindoustan. Cite du Bengale ^ et de Sumatra.
Megapenthes inconditus Candeze.
Mon. Elat. (1859), 2, 493, 504; Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875),
122; Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. (1878), 122.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios.
Les individus de M. Baker appartiennent a la variete citee par
Candeze (1875). Se trouve aussi a Celebes.
Megapenthes junceus Candeze.
Elat. nouv. (1864), 1, 30; Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 122;
Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. (1878), 122.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Je rapporte presque sans aucun doute a cette espece Texem-
plaire recolte par M. Baker, malgre qudques differences avec
la description, notamment en ce qui concerne la couleur des
pattes qui sont jaunes. Se rencontre egalement a Borneo.
Megapenthes junceus variete candezei (var. Cand., 1875).
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Differe par une tache en form d^O sur le front, une tache
obscure sur le disque du pronotum et les cotes de celui-ci, avec
ses angles posterieurs plus ou moins noiratres.
Megapenthes angulosus Candeze.
Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 122.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Megapenthes luzonicus sp. nov.
Allonge, assez convexe, d'un brun noiratre avec la base des
elytres jaune et le voisinage de la suture des elytres d'un brun
plus clair, pubescence jaune. Tete peu convexe, fortement et
^Candeze, Compt. rend, Soc. ent. belg. (1T90), 151; Ann. Soc. ent. belg.
(1892), 489.
•Fleutiaux, Anrc. Soc. ent. belg. (1895), 169.
IX, D, 6 Fleutiaux: Elateridse des lies Philippines 443
assez densement ponctuee. Antennes d'un brun noiratre. Pro-
notum beaucoup plus long que large, retreci en evant, ponctuation
un peu moins forte et moins serree que sur la tete, surtout a la
base, angles posterieurs longs, bicarenes, legerement divergents.
Ecusson oblong, attenue en arriere, peu convexe, ponctue. Elytres
r6trecis en arriere a partir de la moitie, tronques au sommet,
stries-ponctues, interstries granuleux. Dessous brunatre, epi-
pleures des elytres jaunes, pattes jaunes.
Long., 13 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Megapenthes fulvus sp. nov.
Allonge, subpgirall^le, peu convexe, jaune clair avec le milieu
du pronotum a peine rembruni, pubescence jaune. Tete peu
convexe, assez fortement ponctuee. Antennes d'un jaune un
peu rougeatre. Pronotum parallele, arrondi en avant, ponctua-
tion peu serree mais profonde, angles posterieurs bicaren§s,
prolonges en arriere. Ecusson oblong. Elytres retrecis seule-
ment dans leur tiers posterieur, tronques au sommet, fortement
stries-ponctues, interstries granuleux. Dessous d'un jaune un
peu obscur, sauf sur les propleures. Pattes jaunes.
Long., 9 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos et Mont Maquiling.
Voisin de M. junceiis.
Melanoxanthus promecus Candeze.
Elat. nouv. (1864), 1, 36.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Melanoxanthus bakeri sp. nov.
Allonge, convexe, assez brillant, noir avec le prothorax entier
et une grande tache humerale sur les elytres jaunes, pubescence
noire clairsemee. Tete convexe et ponctuee, faiblement carenee
au milieu. Antennes courtes, noires. Pronotum jaune, convexe,
a peine retr6ci en avant, legerement et eparsement ponctue,
pubescence rare herissee, noire, angles posterieurs unicarenes.
Ecusson noir, oblong, sur un plan perpendiculaire, coupe carre-
ment en arriere, eparsement ponctue. Elytres un peu plus
etroits que le pronotum, faiblement attenu6 en arriere, tronques
au sommet, noirs avec une grande tache humerale jaune n'at-
teignant pas la suture, stries-ponctues assez fortement dans la
premiere moitie, tres faiblement en arriere, interstries rugueux
en avant, simplement et finement pointilles dans la partie pos-
terieure. Dessous du prothorax jaune, le reste du corps noir
444 '^^^ Philippine Jouryial of Science i9i4
et assez fortement ponctue. Pattes noiratres avec les trochanters
et rextremite des tarses brunatres.
Long., 8 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Voisin de M. exclamationis Cand.
Melanoxanthus afOinis sp. nov.
Oblong, convexe, attenue en arriere, noir brillant avec le
pronotum rouge sauf sur le bord anterieur et Textremite de
ses angles posterieurs, pubescence obscure. Tete convexe, arron-
die en avant, couverte d'une grosse ponctuation serree, large
et peu profonde. Antennes ne depassant pas la base du thorax,
noires, larges, a articles transversaux comprim^s. Pronotum un
peu plus long que large, convexe, sillonne en arriere au milieu,
curvilineairement retreci en avant, rouge avec le bord anterieur
et rextremite des angles posterieurs noirs, ponctuation forte
et serree sur les cotes, moins grosse et moins dense sur le disque.
Ecusson noir, triangulaire et granuleux. Elytres un peu plus
etroits que le pronotum a la base, attenues en arriere, tronque
au sommet, fortement ponctues-stries surtout en avant, inter-
stries rugueux dans la partie anterieure, ponctues en arriere.
Dessous noir, propleures rouges. Pattes noires, extremite des
tarses brunatres.
Long., 5.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Voisin de M. bicolor Cand.
Melanoxantlius luzonicus sp. nov.
EUiptique, peu convexe, noir avec le thorax et les pattes jaunes ;
pubescence jaune, d'un jaune plus clair sur le pronotum et le
propectus. Tete convexe, arrondie en avant couverte de points
ombiliques assez rapproches. Labre et mandibules rougeatres.
Pronotum jaune, graduellement retreci en avant, ses cotes arques,
ponctuation assez forte et serree, angles posterieurs aigus, non
divergents, carenes. Ecusson allonge, subtriangulaire. Elytres
attenues en arriere, tronques au sommet, ponctues, stries, inter-
stries plans et rugueux. Dessous noir, propectus jaune, ponc-
tuation peu serree sur le prosternum, grosse et ecartee sur les
propleures, bien distincte et peu serree sur les autres parties du
corps. Pattes jaunes.
Long., 5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios.
Voisin de M. sangidnicollis Schw.
IX, D, 5 Fleutiaux: Elateridse des lies Philippines 445
Melanoxanthus ater sp. nov.
Oblong, attenue en arriere, peu convexe, entierement d'un
noir profond peu brillant, pubescence noire. Tete convexe, ar-
rondie en avant, ponctuation assez forte. Pronotum arrondi
et retr^ci en avant, sillonne au milieu a la base, ponctuation
nette et peu serree sur le disque, plus forte et plus dense sur les
cotes, angles posterieurs courts, carenes. Ecusson oblong, r6t-
reci en arriere. Elytres attenues en arriere, subtronques au
sommet, ponctues-stries, interstries rugueux. Dessous et pattes
noirs.
Long., 4 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Voisin de M. carhunculus Cand.
Melanoxanthus crucifer sp. nov.
Allonge, peu convexe, jaune avec une etroite bande noire au
milieu du pronotum prolongee sur les elytres tout le long de la
suture et une bande transversale de meme couleur au dela de la
moitie des elytres. Tete peu convexe, front arrondi et saillant en
avant, ponctuation forte et serree. Antennes jaunes. Prono-
tum assez convexe, retreci en avant, sillonne au milieu a la base,
assez fortement et densement ponctue, angles posterieurs pro-
longes, arrondis au sommet, longuement car6nes. Ecusson
allonge, retreci en arriere, rugueux. Elytres arrondis a Textrfi-
mite, assez fortement ponctues-stries, Dessous et pattes en-
tierement jaunes.
Long., 4 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Voisin de M. cruciellus Cand.
Melanoxanthus infimus Candeze.
Compt. rend. See. ent. belg. (1875), 124.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Anchastus vittatus sp. nov.
Elliptique, peu convexe, noir avec la base des antennes, les
angles posterieurs du pronotum, une bande longitudinale au
milieu de chaque elytre partant de la base, se retrecissant en ar-
riere et s'arretant avant Textremit^, jaunes; pubescence de la
couleur du fond. Tete arrondie en avant, peu convexe, ponc-
tuee. Antennes depassant la base du thorax. Pronotum plus
long que large, retreci en avant, ponctuation assez forte mais
446 The Philipinne Journal of Science 1914
ecartee, plus grosse sur les cotes; angles posterieurs aigus, non
divergents, sans carene distincte. Ecusson noir, oblong, rugueux.
Elytres graduellement retrecis en arriere, fortement ponctues-
stries. Dessous d'un jaune rougeatre avec la partie mediane
externe des propleures et le pourtour de Tabdomen sur une assez
grande largeur noirs. Pattes jaune clair.
Long., 4.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Voisin de A. mfangulns Cand.
Anchastus unicolor Candeze.
Elat. nouv. (1881), 3, 61.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios.
Hypnoidus bakeri sp. nov.
Oblong, d'un brun noiratre brillant, pubescence grise. Tete
assez convexe, bord anterieur ferrugineux. Antennes jaunes,
articles du milieu un peu obscurcis. Pronotum a peine aussi
long que large a la base, retreci en avant, assez convexe, tres
finement et densement pointille; angles posterieurs jaunes, leur
carene angulaire atteignant la moitie en avant. Ecusson brun,
convexe, assez grand, retreci en arriere. Elytres ornes de deux
taches jaunes, une en croissant partant de Tepaule et se dirigeant
vers la suture en contournant Fecusson a une certaine distance
et une autre oblongue avant Textremite, stries tres fines, non
ponctuees, interstries plans. Dessous obscur, bord externe des
propleures jaune, prosternum brunatre avec sa mentonniere plus
clair. Pattes jaunes.
Long., 3 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Cardiophorus bakeri nom. nov.
Cardiophorus elegans Candeze, Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. (1878), 132; nee.
Solier.
Decrit de Celebes, j'en possede un exemplaire d'Amboine.
J'ai du changer le nom de Candeze qui a ete employe anterieure-
ment par Solier (1851) pour une espece chilienne.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Biploconus umbilicatus Candeze.
Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 125.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
IX. D, 5 Fleutiaux: Elateridx des lies Philippines 447
Diploconus erythronotus Candeze.
Elat. nouv. (1864), 1, 46.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Diploconus politus Candeze.
Compt. rend. Sec. ent. belg. (1875), 126.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios, Mont Maquiling.
Diploconus philippinensis sp. nov.
Allonge, entierement d'un rouge f errugineux peu brillant, pub-
escence jaune. Tete convexe, fortement ponctuee, bord anterieur
arrondi et reborde. Antennes depassant la base du thorax,
ferrugineuses, premiers articles plus clairs. Pronotum plus
long que large, r^treci en avant, peu convexe, regulierement
ponctue, legerement sillonne au milieu de la base, angles poste-
rieurs a peine divergents, bicarenes. Ecusson oblong, rugueux.
Elytres attenues en arriere, arrondis et denticules au sommet,
ponctues-stries, interstries faiblement rugueux. Dessous de
meme couleur. Hanches posterieures nettement anguleusses et
meme subdentees. Pattes jaunes.
Long., 9 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont. Maquiling.
Voisin de D. politics Candeze.
Diploconus obscurus sp. nov.
Allonge, d'un brun noiratre peu brillant, pubescence jaune.
Tete peu convexe, a bord anterieur avance et saillant, tres forte-
ment et densement ponctuee. Antennes d'un ferrugineux obs-
cur. Pronotum plus long que large, retreci en avant, peu convexe,
fortement et densement ponctue, sillonne au milieu a la base au
dela de la moitie, angles posterieurs peu divergents, bicarenes.
Ecusson oblong, ponctue. Elytres attenues en arriere, subtron-
ques au sommet, ponctues-stries, interstries rugueux. Dessous
de meme couleur. Hanches posterieures subanguleuses. Pattes
ferrugineuses.
Long., 9.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Voisin de D. umbilicaUi^ Candeze.
Diploconus bakewellii sp. nov.
Allonge, peu convexe, d'un brun noiratre assez brillant, pu-
bescence rousse. Tete peu convexe bord anterieur avance,
arrondi et saillant, ponctuation forte, ombiliquee et serree. An-
448 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
tennes ferrugineuses, depassant la base du thorax. Pronotum
plus long que large, graduellement retreci en avant, peu convexe,
ponctuation assez forte, ecartee sur le disque, plus profonde et
plus serree sur les bords, angles posterieurs aigue et bicarenes.
Ecusson oblong, ponctue. Elytres graduellement retrecis en
arriere, arrondis au sommet, ponctues-stries, interstries peu
rugueux. Dessous d'un brun rougeatre clair, surtout sur Tab-
domen. Ranches posterieures subanguleuses. Pattes jaunes.
Long., 6.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios, Mont Maquiling.
Voisin de D. obscurics. Je possedais deja un exemplaire de
cette espece provenant de la collection Janson (ex-Bakewell.)
Melanotus ebeninus Candeze.
Mon. Elat, (1860), 3, 305, 335. Compt. rend. Soc. belg. (1875), 126.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios.
Je possede un type de Candeze, dans la collection Chevrolat
(ex-Cuming). Se trouve egalement a Tile Jolo (Dr. Platen).
Melanotus scribanus Candeze.
Elat. nouv. (1893), 5, 48.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos, Mont Maquiling.
Tristilophus luzonicus Candeze.
Elat. nouv. (1864), 1, 53. Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 120.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
C'est seulement dans son Catalogue Methodique des Elaterides '
que Candeze a place cette espece dans le genre Tristilophus, cor-
respondant a la section IV du genre Corymhites, dans sa Mono-
graphie des Elaterides.^
Ludius hirsutus Candeze.
Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 126.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Malgre la coloration uniformement d'un brun noiratre, de
Tunique individu que j'ai sous les yeux, je ne crois pas devoir
le separer de cette espece.
*(1891), 175.
'(1863), 4, 85, 123.
IX, D. 5 Fleutiaux: Elateridse des lies Philippines 449
Glyphonyx erraticns Candeze.^
Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 127.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos.
L'exemplaire de M. Baker repond a la variete citee par Can-
deze.
Glyphonyx posticus (?) Candeze.
Compt. rend. Soc. ent. belg. (1875), 127.
Luzon, Laguna, Mont Maquiling.
Un seul exemplaire chez lequel la pubescence est unicolore
sur toute la surface.
Hemiops semperi Candeze.
Elat. nouv. (1878), 2, 53.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios.
Dicronychus bakeri sp. nov.
Subcylindrique, convexe, entierement jaune, pubescence peu
visible. Tete abaissee et impressionnee en avant, bord ante-
rieur arrondi et reborde, ponctuation grosse et serree. Anten-
nes epaisses, depassant la base du thorax, d'un jaune obscure.
Pronotum subparallele, ponctuation forte, moins serree que sur
la tete, angles posterieurs courts et divergents. Ecusson sub-
arrondi, irregulierement ponctue. Elytres par alleles, arrondis
au somment, tres rugueux, f ortement stries. Dessous de la meme
couleur. Cuisses plus clairs.
Long., 7.5 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios, Mont Maquiling.
Voisin de D. cinnamomeus Candeze.
•Je ne crois pas que la variete attonitus Cand., Elat. nouv. (1896), 6,
78, de Palawan puisse etre rapportee a cette espece.
CATALOGUE DES PSeLAPHIDES (COLEOPTfeRES) DES ILES
PHILIPPINES '
Par A. Rapfray
(Romay Italia)
M. le Professeur C. F. Baker a bien voulu me communiquer
quelques Pselaphides qu'il avait recueillis a Los Bafios et parmi
lesquels il y avait plusieurs especes nouvelles.
Bien que le nombre des Pselaphides connus de TArchipel des
Philippines ne represente qu'une tres minime partie des especes
qui habitent certainement cette region intertropicale, j'ai pense
qu'il y avait interet a donner la liste de toutes les especes connues
jusqu'a ce jour et que cela pourrait encourager des recherches
ulterieures.
C'est en 1890 que mon ami M. Eugene Simon fit un voyage
aux Philippines d'oii il rapporta 12 especes de Pselaphides qui
s'augmenterent de 5 autres especes de la collection Baer et
d'une autre decrite deja par Reitter, se qui me donna Toccasion
de publier un premier travail sur les Pselaphides des iles Phil-
ippines.^'
Intempus punctatissimus Reitter.
Intempiis punctatissiynus Reitter, Deutsch. Ent. Zeitschr. (1885), 337,
PL III, fig. 27. Manila.
Thesiastes crassipes Raffray.
Euplectus crassipes Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. F'rance (1891), 475.
Bulacan.
Batrisodes cavicola Raffray.
Batrisiis cavicola Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 476, PI. 14,
fig. 1. Cueva de San Mateo (Montalvan), province de Manila.
Batrisodes verticinus Raffray.
Batrisus verticinus Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 477.
Cueva de San-Mateo (Montalvan), province de Manila.
Batrisocenus tumidipes Raffray.
Batrisodes tumidipes Raffray, Ann. Soc, ent. France (1891), 479,
PI. 14, fig. 4. Manila.
' Proof read by C. F. Baker.
'Ann. Soc, ent. France (1891), 473, PL 14.
451
452 The Philippine Journal of Science i9u
Batrisocenus hamatipes Raffray.
Batrisodes hamatipes Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 480,
PI. 14, %. 5. Manila.
Batrisocenus clavipes Raffray.
Batrisodes clavipes Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 480,
PL 14, fig. 3. Manila.
Batrisocenus squamiceps Raffray.
Batrisodes squamiceps Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1911), 478,
PI. 14, fig. 2. Manila.
Batraxis pubescens sp. nov.
Oblonga, subparallela, convexa, tota rufa, setis erectis sed
sparsis vestitus. Caput magnum, transversum, antice vix at-
tenuatum; fronte subrecte truncata, angulis anticis integris,
sulco transverse integro et juxta oculos fovea obliqua; tempor-
ibus rotundatis. Antenna mediocres, articulis 1 et 2 majoribus,
1 cylindrico, 2 obconico, 3 obconico, latitudine sua longiore, 4-8
monilibus, 9 cylindrico, latitudine sua paululum longiore, 10
magno, trans verso, 11 maximo, latere interno recto, latere ex-
terno obliquo, basi rotundato, apice parum acuminato. Protho-
rax capite vix angustior, transversus, ad basin attenuatus, an-
gulis anticis obtusis, lateribus obliquis; fovea antebasali minuta.
Elytra subquadratra, lateribus rotundatis, humeris obtuse cari-
natis; stria suturali Integra, dorsali nulla. Abdomen elytris
aequilongum, lateribus rectis, postice rotundatum; segmento pri-
mo magno, cujus margine laterali vix perspicue carinata; basi
carinulis duabus brevibus et circa quartam partem disci inclu-
dentibus. Pedes validi, sat elongati; femoribus sat crassis;
tibiis subrectis ad apicem incrassatis.
Long., 1.40 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (C. F, Baker),
Cette espece est excessivement voisine de Batraxis hirtella
Raffray de Nouvelle-Guinee occidentale; elle en differe par la
tete encore plus grosse, avec les angles anterieurs non entailles,
les antennes plus longues, moins epaisses, dont le 2^ article est
plus allonge, le prothorax plus gibbeux sur le disque en avant,
avec les angles anterieurs plus marques.
Batraxis nitidula sp. nov.
Oblonga, antrorsum attenuata, convexa, rufotestacea, nitida,
glabra, antennis leviter pubescentibus. Caput quadratum;
fronte medio antrorsum declivi, utrinque in angulis quadratis
elevata, transversim sulcata; inter oculos magnos, prominentes,
IX. D. 6 Raff ray: Catalogue des Pselaphides (Coleopteres) 453
antice sitos, f oveis duabus validis ; temporibus obliquis et leviter
arcuatis. Antennae validse, crassse, articulis duobus primis
pauIo majoribus, 3-7 subobconicis, longitudine decrescentibus,
8 ovato, 9 fere globoso, 10 magno, trapezoidali, transverse, 11
maximo, triangular!, latere externo obliquo et sulcato, apice
leviter acuminate. Prothorax capite et longitudine sua per-
parum latior, breviter cordatus, angulis anticis rotundatis late-
ribus ad basin obliquis; fovea antebasali minutissima. Elytra
leviter transversa, ad basin leviter attenuata; humeris obliquis
et obtuse carinatis; lateribus leviter rotundatis; margine pos-
tica trisinuata; basi bifoveata, stria dorsali nulla. Abdomen
elytris sequilongum, lateribus subparallelum, postice obtusum;
segmento 1^ magno; margine laterali bicarinata, carina in-
terna valde obliqua et externa maxime approximata; basi
utrinque foveato, medio transversim impresso et ciliato inter
cannulas duas breves, plus quam tertiam partem disci includen-
tes. Pedes validi et elongati ; f emoribus medio incrassatis ; tibiis
ad apicem paululum incrassatis, posticis leviter incurvis; tro-
chanteribus anticis obtuse angulatis.
Long., 1.70 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F. Baker).
Cette espece, par Tabsence de toute pubescence sur le corps,
est tres differente de la precedente. Elle etablit une transition
entre le groupe IX qui a les carenules abdominales distantes
de I et le groupe X qui les a distantes de i ou f ; dans B,
nitidula ces carenules sont distantes seulement d'un peu plus
de J." Voisine de sinensis Raffr. de Tientsin (Chine) ; elle en
differe par les carenules abdominales beacoup plus courtes, les
elytres plus fortement sinues a Textremite, le dernier article des
antennes notablement moins long et plus epais.
Reichenbachia rufa Schmidt-Goebel.
Reichenhachia rufa Schmidt-Gcebel, Beitr. Mon. Psel. ( ), 6,
PI. I, fig. 4. Manila. (Inde, Ceylon, Java, Singapore, Celebes,
Siam, Annam, Syrie.)
Reichenbachia manillensis Raffray.
Bryaxis vianillensis Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 490,
PL 14, fig. 14 et 14a. Antipole, province de Morong.
Reichenbachia laticoUis Raffray.
Bryaxis laticoUis Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 491, PI. 14,
fig. 15 et 15a. Antipolo, province de Morong.
'Ann. Soc, ent. France (1904), 117, 199.
454 The Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Reichenbachia dama Raffray.
Bryaxis dama Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 492, PL 14,
fig. 17. Quingua, province de Bulacan.
Anasis leevicoUis Raffray.
Bryonia Ixvicollis Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 493.
Manila.
Rybaxis gladiator Raffray.
Rybaxis gladiator Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 481, PL 14,
fig. 7. Manila et Antipolo.
Rybaxis simoniana Raffray.
Rybaxis simoniana Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 482. An-
tipolo.
Tyraphus baeri Raffray.
Tyraphus baeri Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 493.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (C. F. Baker).
Gentrophthaliniis philippinensis sp. nov.
Oblongus, antice attenuatus, rubrocastaneus, nitidus, longe
brunneo-hirsutus. Caput triangulare ; tuberculo antennario
angusto, sulcato ; inter oculos f oveis duabus magnis ; spina inf ra-
oculari deficiente; temporibus dense et longe ciliatis. Oculi
magni, prominentes. Palporum articulo 3 elongato-triangulari,
apice recte truncate, 4 minuto, subulate. Antennae validae,
crassse, clava quadriarticulata, articulis 1 cylindrico, 2 quadrate,
3-7 mineribus, quadratis, 8-10 majoribus, latitudine sua longior-
ibus, 8 cylindrico, 9 et 10 ovatis, 11 magno, ovate. Pretherax
capite major, latitudine sua paululum lengier, antice plus et post-
ice vix attenuatus, lateribus ad basin subrectis ; fovea antebasali
magna. Elytra leviter transversa, ad basin attenuata ; humeris
rotundatis sed obtuse notatis ; basi bif oveata, sulco dorsali parum
prefundo, oblique, ante medium evanescente. Abdomen elytris
paulo longius ; segmento 1° secundo paulo minere, carinis duabus
plus quam dimidiam partem disci includentibus, in prime seg-
mento integris, in secundo tantum mode basi brevissimis. Pedes
validi, elengati; femoribus, prsesertim anticis, crassis; tarsis
anticis extus medio inflatis, intermediis et posticis subrectis.
Long., 2.60 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios ((7. F, Baker.)
Voisin de Centrophthalmtis clavatics Raffray des Nilghiri
(India) par Tabsence d'epine infraoculaire qui est reduite a un
tres petit tubercule mousse; elle en differe par les teguments
lisses sur les elytres depourvus d'asp^rites setif eres ; les articles
IX. D, 5 Raffray: Catalogue des Pselaphides (Coleopteres) 455
8, 9 et 10 des antennes sont plus longs que larges, au lieu d'etre
transversaux comme dans C clavatus; les carenules abdominales
sont beaucoup plus courtes sur le 2® segment et bien moins dis-
tantes entre elles; le prothorax aussi est different, retreci tout
a fait en avant, avec les cotes ensuite presque droits jusqu'a la
base qui est a peine retrecie.
Raphitreus bakeri sp. nov.
Oblongus, antice attenuatus, castaneus, palpis tarsisque tes-
taceis, sat dense sed tenuiter pallide pubescens. Caput latitudine
sua longius, antice attenuatum, postice rotundatum; tuberculo
antennario magno, basi coarctato, profunde sulcato, in vertice
f oveis duabus ; genis canthum inf raocularem f ormantibus, longe
ciliatis. Oculi maximi, prominentes. Palporum articulis 2
apice incrassato et angulato, 3 triangulari, 4 elongato, apice
valde acuminato, latere externo ad basin angulato, 2, 3 et 4
longe uniappendiculatis. Antennse elongates et crassae, articulis
1° cylindrico, 2 subovato, 3-8 minoribus et leviter transversis,
clava magna, triarticulata, 10 transverso, 11 breviter ovato, basi
truncato. Prothorax capite multo major, cordatus, convexus,
latitudine sua paulo longior; f oveis tribus liberis, lateralibus
majoribus antebasali oblonga. Elytra transversa, subdeplanata,
ad basin leviter attenuata, humeris rotundatis sed obtuse elev-
atis, basi bifoveata, stria dorsali medio abbreviata. Abdomen
elytris ma jus, segmentis dorsalibus 1 utrinque toto carinato, 2
dimidio longiore, basi utrinque brevissime carinato. Pedes va-
lidi; femoribus incrassatis; tibiis anticis leviter incurvis, medio
extus inflatis, intermediis ante apicem leviter sinuatis, posticis
vix incurvis.
$ : Antennarum clava ma j ore, articulo 9 obconico, latitudine
sua paululum longiore. Metasternum impressum.
2 : Antennarum clava minore, articulo 9 subquadrato. Me-
tasternum simplex.
Long., 2 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F. Baker).
Cette espece differe de R. speratus Sharp du Japon et de R.
dentimamis Raffr. de TAnnam, Tonkin et Singapore, par Tabsence
totale de ponctuation. Je suis tres heureux de dedier cette
espece a Monsieur C. F. Baker qui Ta decouverte.
Dacnotillus simoni Raffray.
TmesiphoTTus simoni Raffray, Ann. Soc. ent. France (1891), 495.
Cueva de San Mateo (Montalvan).
NEW PHILIPPINE HYMENOPTERA '
By J. C. Crawford
(Washington, D, C.)
CHALCIDID^
Leucospis pulchellus sp. nov.
Female. — Length, 7 mm. Black, the first 3 abdominal seg-
ments red ; spot on front of scape, transverse band on anterior
edge of pronotum and 1 near posterior margin, a small spot on
middle of propodeum at apex, a line on middle of metapleurse,
a small spot on each side of first abdominal segment, a line on
each side of third segment, a line on anterior tibiae outwardly,
middle tibiae except narrow brown stripe inwardly, a line on upper
outer margin of hind femora which at base extends downward
to first tooth on lower margin, a line on hind tibise outwardly, and
on first 2 joints of hind tarsi, ivory yellow; face finely vertically
rugulose, above antennal fossa more coarsely transversely ru-
gulose; on each side of face a swelling just below upper end of
antennal fossa; pro- and mesonotum closely coarsely punctured,
punctures on mesoscutum arranged so that the interspaces in
places form indistinct transverse rugse ; metanotum, propodeum,
and pleurae with punctures similar to those on mesonotum ; propo-
deum with median and lateral longitudinal carinae; wings dark
brown; lower margins of hind femora with a tooth followed
apicad by 2 or 3 much longer ones, then several smaller semif used
teeth; abdomen closely punctured, the punctures on the first
segment sparse, separated from each other by about two or more
times a puncture width; ovipositor reaching almost to base of
third abdominal segment, the groove for its reception not quite
reaching base of segment; the second abdominal segment me-
dially longitudinally carinate, the first segment toward apex
exceedingly indistinctly carinate, being more angulate than
carinate.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18401,
United States National Museum.
Leucospis bakeri sp. nov.
Female. — ^Length, about 7 mm. Black, with red and yellow
markings, the ovipositor not reaching the base of the third ab-
' Proof read by C. F. Baker.
130422 4 457
458 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
dominal segment, the apical two-thirds of which is deeply fur-
rowed for its reception; head, thorax, and abdomen coarsely
rugoso-punctate, the head black, the antennae ferruginous, dusky
above, the scape yellow; pronotum with 2 broad yellow stripes,
the anterior margin reddish, the 2 yellow stripes separated by a
black stripe bordered with reddish; posterior margin almost
hyaline, slightly tinged with reddish; pronotum with 2 trans-
verse carinse, the anterior one short, at about the middle of the
black stripe, the posterior one at the middle of the posterior
yellow stripe and extending to the lateral margins; mesonotum
black with the lateral margins yellow, and a large subquadrate
reddish spot on the disk extending to the apex of the scutum;
anteriorly the corners of this reddish spot are yellow ; scutellum
with the apical margin narrowly reddish and just cephalad of
this a transverse yellow mark ; somewhat U-shaped ; metanotum
with a semicircular carinated medial elevation, this apically with
a median depressed area, carinated at sides, elevation projecting
over propodeum slightly at middle ; metanotum medially reddish
and with a median yellow spot; propodeum coarsely punctured
and with a median longitudinal carina; wings infuscated, more
so along anterior margins, near apex with a darker spot ; tegulae
and propectus reddish; metapleurse yellow; coxae black, the mid
ones yellowish anteriorly at apex ; hind coxae with a large yellow
basal spot above and 1 below at apex; fore and mid femora
black, with the apical part yellow, their tibiae yellow each with
a brown stripe behind, that on the mid tibiae small ; hind femora
outwardly black with the upper margin yellow and a large yellow
spot below at base ; lower margin with a large triangular tooth
near middle and distad of this about 6 small teeth ; first abdominal
segment with 2 large yellow spots, second segment transverse,
yellow except apical margin, third segment near middle with a
yellow band which laterally widens posteriorly and reaches the
apical margin of segment; fourth segment with 2 small spots,
fifth with 2 larger spots, first, second, and third segments basad
of the furrow for the ovipositor with a median longitudinal
carina.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18402,
United States National Museum.
Pareniaca browni sp. nov.
Female. — Length, about 3.5 mm. Black, the head and thorax
coarsely rugoso-punctate, the antennae and fore and mid legs,
except coxae, ferruginous ; antennae dusky at tips ; hind legs, ex-
IX, D, 6 Crawford: Neiu Philippine Hymenoptera 459
cept the whitish tarsi, black ; first joint of f unicle slightly longer
than second, the pedicel about as long as these combined ; wings
almost hyaline, very faintly dusky; first segment of abdomen
longer than broad, with 4 dorsal carinse, second segment with
4 basal carinse, these not as long as the first segment and extend-
ing less than one-sixth the length of the segment, second seg-
ment near apex with a punctured area on each side; following
segments punctured at the sides.
Male. — Length, about 3 mm. Similar in color and structure
to the female, but the first joint of the f unicle shorter than the
second ; wings slightly more dusky than in the female ; the petiole
longer and more slender, the 4 dorsal carinse more prominent;
second segment with about 7 or 8 short carinse.
Luzon, Manila (R. E. Brown, S.J.). Type No. 18403, United
States National Museum.
Pareniaca bakeri sp. nov.
Female, — Length, about 3 mm. Black, the head and thorax
coarsely ruguso-punctate ; antennse brown, the first joint of f uni-
cle slightly longer than broad, the pedicel slightly longer than
first and second joints of f unicle combined ; wings hyaline, slightly
whitish; fore and mid legs dark brown, the femora lighter at
bases and the tibise lighter at apices, their tarsi testaceous ; hind
legs, except the testaceous tarsi, black ; first segment of abdomen
transverse, with 4 dorsal carinse; second segment with 8 or 9
carinse which are about three times as long as first segment,
but not reaching middle of the segment; second segment with
a punctured area near apex on each side; following segments
with similar small areas.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Manila (R. E. Brotvn, S. J.). Type No. 18404, United
States National Museum.
The type and one paratopotype were collected by R. E. Brown,
S. J. ; two paratypes from Los Banos were collected by Prof. C.
F. Baker, after whom the species is named.
PERILAMPID^
Perilampus luzonensis sp. nov.
Female. — Length, 5 mm. Green, face with a strong carina
extending down to level of insertion of antennse, the space be-
tween the carina and the eyes coarsely punctured, sides of face
below coarsely punctured, inner margins of parapsidal areas with
a broad smooth band ; scutellum slightly longer than mesoscutum,
460 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
the apex very slightly emarginate; legs green, the tarsi whitish
testaceous; abdomen smooth, sides of the second segment very
finely indistinctly punctured.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F. Baker) . Type No. 18405,
United States National Museum.
Perilampus punctiventris sp. nov.
Male, — Length, about 3.5 mm. Head and thorax obscurely
greenish, the middle lobe of mesonotum almost black, the ab-
domen black; face with a carina on each side which meet back
of anterior ocellus ; in front of the lateral ocelli and centrad of
the carinas along their upper ends a few fine punctures ; between
the ocelli the surface rugose, back of them transversely so;
mesoscutum including outer part of parapsidal areas coarsely
rugoso-punctate ; broad inner part of parapsidal areas smooth,
polished, posteriorly this area with a few fine wrinkles and along
the inner margin a row of large shallow punctures; wings
hyaline; legs green, the tarsi testaceous; abdomen with the
first segment, except basally and a broad apical margin, closely,
finely punctured ; second segment at base with similar punctures.
Female. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18406,
United States National Museum.
The punctures on the abdomen distinguish this species.
PTEROMALID^
Cercocephala bakeri sp. nov.
Female, — Length, about 1 mm. Head and thorax light red-
dish-brown with a slight metallic sheen ; abdomen almost black,
with aeneous and purple reflections ; antennae testaceous, the last
2 joints of the funicle and the club dark brown; funicle 6-jointed,
the first joint quadrate ; pedicel as long as first 2 joints of funicle
combined; entire insect, except the finely rugulose propodeum,
smooth and polished; wings with a distinct violaceous luster,
beyond the base of the marginal vein slightly infuscated; stig-
mated spot on submarginal vein with a tuft of dark hairs; legs
testaceous; sheaths of ovipositor exposed about one-fourth the
length of abdomen, whitish, with dark tips.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F, Baker), Type No. 18407,
United States National Museum.
Described from 4 specimens reared by Professor Baker from
bark containing borers. This species differs from the de-
IX. D, 6 Crawford: New Philippine Hymenoptera 461
scribed species of the genus Cercocephala except elegans by having
a tuft of dark hairs on the stigmated spot on the submarginal
vein, and from C. {Chxtospila) elegans Westwood in having 6
joints in the funicle.
ELASMID^
Elasmus elegans sp. nov.
Female, — Length, about 2.25 mm. Head and thorax blue-
green ; abdomen elongate, somewhat longer than head and thorax
combined, brown, with the basal third both above and below
reddish, and with the extreme base above green ; face with large,
scattered punctures, those laterad of the antennal fossa arranged
in 2 vertical rows; antennae long, scape whitish, rest of an-
tennae brown, segments of funicle almost subequal in length,
the first indistinctly longer than the pedicel, the last fully twice
as long as widest diameter, and about two-thirds as long as
club ; mesoscutum rather closely punctured, each puncture having
a dark-colored hair; scutellum finely and indistinctly reticu-
lated; metanotum yellow, with a hyaline border; wings slightly
dusky; hairs on legs black; fore legs, including coxae, whitish,
the coxae beneath with 4 long setae; tibiae with longitudinal
rows of hairs ; mid coxae and femora, except their apices, black ;
rest of mid legs whitish, the tibiae and basal joints of tarsi with
longitudinal rows of hairs; basal half of hind coxae and apical
half of hind femora almost black, rest of hind legs whitish ; the
tibiae behind with rows of hairs arranged in diamond-shaped
figures; basal joints of hind tarsi with longitudinal rows of
hairs.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18408,
United States National Museum.
This species resembles E. philippinensis Ashmead, but that
species is much smaller, has the joints of the funicle much
shorter, the hind coxae except extreme apices dark, the hind
femora entirely dark, etc.
Elasmus lutens sp. nov.
Female. — Length, about 2.25 mm. Yellow; ocellar triangle,
a large triangular spot on rear of head extending from top of
eyes almost to their bases and connected along carinate edge
of occiput with ocellar spot, the axillae, a small spot on side
of propodeum, a large spot covering the upper part of hind
coxae, spots on the sides of abdominal segments at apices, all
brown; toward apex of abdomen the spots become larger so
462 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
that the last 2 segments are almost entirely brown; rest of
the dorsal surface of abdomen light brownish; face with large
scattered punctures ; antennae brown, the scape yellowish white,
its apex brown, the first joint of funicle slightly longer than ped-
icel ; mesopleurse centrally dark brown, shading off into lighter
above and below; bristles on hind tibise arranged in diamonds.
Male, — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18409,
United States National Museum.
Elasmus ashmeadi sp. nov.
Length, about 1.5 mm. Yellow; the head above insertion of
antennae, pronotum medially, a narrow stripe on middle of meso-
scutum widening caudad, scutellum, propodeum, base of abdo-
men, and spot on hind coxae above, green; head with large, scat-
tered punctures; antennae brown, the scape whitish, the first
joint of the funicle longer than the pedicel ; triangular plate on
, metanotum yellow at base, rest of the plate hyaline ; mesopleurae
largely brownish; legs, including coxae, yellowish white, the
bristles on the hind tibiae arranged in diamonds.
Luzon, Manila (R. E. Broivn, S, J.). Type and only specimen
No. 18410, United States National Museum.
EULOPHID^
Entedon magnus sp. nov.
Female. — Length, about 3.25 mm. Head and thorax bronzy,
the propodeum and abdomen at base bluish green, rest of ab-
domen aeneous; head and thorax coarsely reticulately rugose,
on rear of head finer and more shallow, on middle of mesoscutum
at rear coarser; antennae brown, scape whitish, first joint of
funicle twice as long as pedicel, second joint slightly longer
than pedicel; propodeum smooth, shiny, with a median carina,
on each side of which is a narrow depression running to the
short neck; lateral grooves on propodeum with cross carinae,
the grooves somewhat resembling a chain of pits ; coxae aeneous,
femora and basal half of tibiae brown, the knees, apical halves
of tibiae, and tarsi, except apical joint, whitish.
Male. — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos and Mount Maquiling (C. F.
Baker). Type, from Los Bailos, No. 18411, United States
National Museum.
Described from 4 females from the type locality and 1 from
IX, D, 5 Craivford: New Philippine Hymenoptera 463
Mount Maquiling ; 2 of the paratopotypes and the specimen from
Mount Maquiling have the sculpture at rear of mesoscutum no
coarser than the other.
Entedon manilensis sp. nov.
Female. — Length, about 2 mm. Green, more brilliantly so on
propodeum and base of abdomen; apical margin of third ad-
dominal segment and beyond, purple; head and thorax coarsely
reticulately rugose, sculpture on rear of head much finer ; anten-
nae brown, pedicel and base of funicle slightly greenish, the
scape, except apex, whitish, first joint of funicle about one and
one-half times as long as pedicel, second joint of funicle slightly
longer than pedicel, the club about as long as first joint of
funicle; propodeum smooth, shiny with a median carina reach-
ing the short neck, lateral furrows with cross carinae; a short
spine on each side of propodeum back of the spiracle; coxae
aeneous, femora, except tips, brown, tibiae and tarsi whitish,
tibiae near base with brown annulus, that on anterior tibiae
occupying about half the tibiae, on mid and hind tibiae not reach-
ing beyond basal third.
Male, — Unknown.
Luzon, Manila (R. E. Brown, S. J.). Type No. 18412, United
States National Museum.
This species resembles E. magnus, but is much smaller, the
first joint of the funicle, is shorter, and tibiae have a narrow
brown annulus instead of the basal half or more being brown.
Euplectrus flavescens sp. nov.
Female, — Length, 2.5 mm. Yellow; middle lobe of mesoscu-
tum, middle of scutellum, sides of axillae and of metanotum,
most of propodeum and pleurae reddish honey color ; the abdomen
more or less suffused with the same color; antennae brown, the
scape and pedicel testaceous; joints of the funicle elongate,
the first over twice as long as the pedicel, the club not longer
than the last joint of funicle; pronotum and mesonotum
irregularly rugose; the rugae on scutellum finer than on meso-
scutum, scutellum at base with 2 large foveae; metanotum with
a median longitudinal carina and on each side of it about 2
similar but indistinct carinae, the apical margin subcarinate;
basal lip of propodeum strongly produced; propodeum with a
median and lateral carina, being areolated ; legs yellow, the hind
coxae slightly tinged with reddish, first joint of hind tarsi almost
one and one-half times as long as second joint; longer spur
464 The Philippine Journal of Science
of hind tibia reaching to apex of second joint of tarsi, the shorter
spur about three-fourths as long as first joint.
Male, — Unknown.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18413,
United States National Museum.
The complete areolation of the propodeum distinguishes this
from the other species of the Oriental Region in which yellow
is the predominating color.
Euplectrus nigosus sp. no v.
Female. — Length, about 2.5 mm. Black, the coxae dark brown,
the femora reddish honey color, rest of legs testaceous ; antennae
light brown, the scape whitish, joints of the funicle elongate,
the first almost twice as long as pedicel, the club slightly longer
than last joint of funicle; pronotum and mesoscutum finely
rugulose, the axillae finely reticulately lineolate, the scutellum
coarsely irregularly reticulately rugose, the apical margin sub-
carinate, metanotum with a short median carina extending cau-
dad about half the length of metanotum then dividing and
each branch extending laterad then caudad again, making a
median apical fovea; propodeum with a median carina, the
basal lip not very strongly produced; first joint of hind tarsi
not quite one and one-half times as long as second, longer spur
of hind tibiae reaching almost to apex of second tarsal joint,
shorter spur reaching about to base of apical fourth of first
joint of tarsi.
Male. — Unknown .
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (C. F. Baker). Type No. 18414,
United States National Museum.
This species resembles E. bicssyi Crawford from Sumatra, but
in that species the metanotum is smooth, the sculpture of the
middle lobe of the mesoscutum is similar to, and almost as strong
as, the sculpture of the scutellum, being in both cases reticu-
lately rugose, whereas in E. rugostis the sculpture of the middle
lobe of the mesoscutum is much finer and of a different type
than that on the scutellum.
THE PHILIPPINE
Journal of Science
D. General Biology, Ethnology,
AND Anthropology
Vol. IX NOVEMBER, 1914 No. 6
THE IGOROTS OF LEPANTO
Compiled and edited by James A. Robertson
(Librarian, Philippine Library, Manila, P. /.)
Nine plates and 1 text figure
INTRODUCTION
In order that local historical data regarding the Philippine
Islands, which exist only in scattered manuscripts or in oral
tradition, might be preserved, the Governor-General of the Phil-
ippines, under date of January 26, 1911, directed each provincial
governor to *'issue instructions to each nucnicipal presidente
to call together the old men in each and every barrio, sitio, or
arrahal in his municipality ^ and obtain from them and from
any documents in their possession the entire history of such
community, in so far as may be possible/' Each report was
to embody, among other things, the present official name of the
^ In Spanish times, each province was divided into units termed pueblos.
The present units of the provinces are called municipalities or townships —
the latter name being used in Mountain Province. Each of these divisions
is presided over by an official known as the preside/.t or presidente. He
is assisted by a vice-president or vice-presidente, by a secretary and treas-
urer or secretary-treasurer, and by a body of councilors or concejales.
Each municipality or township consists of a number of small communities,
known as barrios. The barrio may be likened somewhat to the ward of
a city, except that many barrios are compact communities distantly sepa-
rated from the rest of the larger unit. The chief official of the barrio is
termed lieutenant or ieniente. Many barrios are in turn divided into small
districts called sitios, although this term has no legal significance. Arrabal
is a term used to designate the suburbs of a large town. It is used at
times in the Philippines to denote a section of the municipality, and is
itself divided into barrios. The terms comandancia and distrito relate to
military not civil government. See Census of the Philippine Islands.
Washington (1905), 1, 57-59.
130429 • 465
466 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
barrio or other division, its native name and meaning, date of
its establishment, the original families, lists of officials, old
stories or legends, and the history of any old abandoned barrios
or other divisions. The material was to be forwarded to the
Executive Secretary of the Philippine Government and by him
to be deposited in the Philippine Library — a Government in-
stitution which bears the same relation to the Philippine Islands
as the Library of Congress does to the United States.
Of course, it is recognized that some of the material gathered
in this way is apt to be wrong, misleading, or fragmentary.
Much of it can, however, be checked by known written history,
while often one manuscript will check or correct another, and
frequently common sense will act as the best guide as to what
is to be received and what rejected. On the other hand, many
little points that have entirely escaped writers may be preserved.
The generation from which this material was obtained is rapidly
passing away, and the new generation that is taking its place
is losing, almost insensibly, a part of the storied traditions.
A considerable number of the 38 provinces have already com-
plied fully with the order, and about 600 manuscripts of varying
degrees of excellence have been added to the library. Some are
written in the native languages, some in Spanish, and some in
English. Many of those written in languages other than English
are accompanied by English translations. Among the manu-
scripts are those for Lepanto subprovince, a part of Mountain
Province of northern Luzon.^ These were gathered under the
^ The evolution of the present Mountain Province is interesting, and
may be followed in various Acts of the Philippine Commission. During
the latter part of the Spanish regime, the 7 subprovinces now composing
Mountain Province were known as distritos or comandancias, or formed
part of another province. Act No. 410, enacted May 28, 1902, provided
for the organization of a provincial government in the territory comprised
in the comandancias of Lepanto, Bontoc, and Amburayan, and the terri-
tory lying between Abra, Cagayan, and Bontoc not included within the
limits of any province, and providing for justices of the peace in this
territory and in Nueva Vizcaya Province [Public Laws. Manila (1903),
1, 970-972]. The new province was called Lepanto-Bontoc. Bontoc sub-
province contained certain lands not before assigned. The other two sub-
provinces followed closely the limits of the former comandancias. Act
No. 411, enacted on the same date as the above [Public Laws (1903), 1,
972], provided for the establishment of civil governments in the townships
and settlements of the province. Act No. 768, Manila, 1904, enacted May
26, 1903 [Public Laws (1904), 2, 422, 423], fixed the boundary lines
between Amburayan and Lepanto subprovinces and Benguet Province. Act
No. 867, enacted September 5, 1903 [Public Laws. Manila (1905), 3],
declared the Mountain Judicial District to consist of the Provinces of
IX. D. 6 Robertson: The Igorois of Lepanto 467
supervision of Mr. W. A. Miller, formerly lieutenant-governor
of Lepanto. The various manuscripts were all v^ritten in the
Ilocano language, with the exception of that for Mancayan,
generally by the presidente or secretary of the township, at the
dictation of the old men, and all w^ere translated into English,
evidently by a Filipino in the office of the subprovince in
Cervantes. There are reports for all the 12 townships of the
subprovince; namely, Ampusungan, Angaki, Bagnen, Banaao,
Banco, Besao, Cayan, Cervantes, Concepcion, Mancayan, Saban-
gan, and San Emilio. 'The material for Banco/' says Beyer, 'Ms
quite accurately written, and is more valuable than all that pre-
cedes it.'' The people of Lepanto belong in general to the wild
Malayan tribe called Igorots, who are of the same stock as those
of the adjoining Benguet subprovince.^ In as much as the
Lepanto-Bontoc, Benguet, and Nueva Vizcaya. Act No. 926, enacted Octo-
ber 7, 1903 [Public Laws (1905), 3, 62-77], extended land laws already
enacted for other provinces to Lepanto-Bontoc. Act No. 955, enacted Octo-
ber 23, 1903 [Public Laws (1905), 3, 110-111], provided a method of taxa-
tion, in accordance with Act No. 387 [Public Laws (1903), 1, 914-915].
Act No. 1396, enacted September 14, 1905 [Public Laws (1907), 5], pro-
vided for the organization of provincial governments in all the provinces
of the Islands, other than Moro Province. All parts of Acts Nos. 387, 410,
and 566, at variance with this Act, were repealed. The capital of Lepanto-
Bontoc was declared to be at Cervantes. Act No. 1397, enacted September
14, 1905 [Public Laws (1907), 5], provided for the establishment of local
civil government among non-Christians. The subject of taxation received
considerable attention in the above Act. By Act No. 1642 [Public Laws
(1908), 6] the subprovinces of Kalinga and Apayao were established and
boundaries fixed. Act No. 1876, enacted August 18, 1908 [Public Laws
(1910), 7, 131-134], created Mountain Province, with the 7 subprovinces
of Benguet, Amburayan, Lepanto, Bontoc, Ifugao (formerly comandancia
of Quiangan) Kalinga, and Apayao. The boundaries of Lepanto are still
somewhat vague. The Spaniards located it between 16° 45' and 17° 15'
north latitude, and between 124° 10' and 124° 45' of longitude east of
Madrid. Each of the 7 subprovinces is governed by a lieutenant-governor.
Legislation for the province pertains to the Philippine Commission alone.
' Since early Spanish days, much confusion has existed regarding the
Igorots, and the term Igorot, which simply means hillmen, has been used
to designate several distinct peoples. The confusion has been marked with
regard to the inhabitants of the districts (now subprovinces) of Benguet and
Lepanto who are apparently of one stock, and those of Bontoc who differ
from the former. Beyer \_This Journal, Sec. D (1913) , 8, 95] says definitely:
"The Bontoks are sometimes wrongly called Igorots, but have no more right
to that name than have the Ifugaos. They are a distinct people, occupying
a part of the subprovince of Bontok." No adequate classification of the
tribes of northern Luzon has yet been adopted, although Worcester has done
considerable in clearing up old confusions. A classification based on dialect
might perhaps answer all requirements. Worcester [This Journal (1906),
1, 834] says: 'The line between the territory of the Bontoc Igorots and
468'
The Philippine Journal of Science
1S14
AMBURAYAN\ Mt^ngun^M^ y^k^^
^Mt.Tun6layafl^t^. , ^^
/T4 ' M' /
Mt.Badan^vi/ ■ ji|t.Data/
%
Mt.LusonA
V
1 1 F U G \A O
A^AS^' ''l:y^J: j''^- ;
-; /
Fig. 1. A part of Mountain Province, Luzon.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 469
information contained in the documents for Lepanto was ob-
tained mainly from people who, although in the lower grades
of civilization, are called "wild,'' in order to distinguish them as
non-Christians from the civilized Christian Malayan races prop-
erly called Filipinos,* the essential parts relating to their customs
and beliefs are here reproduced. The few stories recounted,
fragmentary as they are, have come down by oral tradition
through many generations; most of the practices described are
still in force, although they are bound to disappear through
contact with higher civilization. As will be seen by citations
in footnotes, the present culture of the Igorots is not very dif-
ferent from that of some of the Filipinos at the time of the
Spanish conquest.
It is hoped that these documents will prove an addition to
what has already been published about the northern peoples of
Luzon by well-known writers, such as Worcester, Jenks, and
Beyer, if in no other way than as a basis for comparison. Very
little has been written about the Igorots of Lepanto, and little
real ethnological work has been done among them. This paper
is in no sense the result of personal investigation among the
Igorots, and the only claim that I make for it is as editor
and compiler. In editing these accounts I have considered of
minor importance the orthographic peculiarities of the partially
English-educated Filipino translator, interesting as these might
be in a paper devoted exclusively to the study of English as
learned in the Philippines, for I fear lest the phonetic spelling
detract from the subject of prime importance. Most of the
errors in spelling have, therefore, been silently corrected, a very
few punctuation marks and capitals altered, and a few glaring
grammatical errors corrected. Otherwise, the translator, when
citations are made direct, is followed strictly. The material
taken from the Mancayan manuscript, however, I translated
that of the Benguet-Lepanto Igorots is well defined, the first rancherias
of the latter tribe on the north and west being Quinali, Besao, Payeo,
Bagnen, Bangnitan, Data, Sabangan, Bonayan, Pingad, Gayan and Na-
matec." He notes also (p. 851) that many Tinguians live among the
Lepanto Igorots of Tiagan, Concepcion, and Angaki. The dialects spoken
by the Igorots of Lepanto (p. 862) are known as Kankanai, in the southern
part, and Katangnan, in the central and northern parts. Regarding their
state of culture, Worcester (p. 850) says: *'A11 in all, the Benguet-Lepanto
Igorots must be considered far more highly civilized than any other non-
Christian northern Luzon tribe except the Tingians*' Beyer (ut supra,
p. 97) implies that the Ifugaos are the most highly developed of the moun-
tain peoples, or at least the most capable of development.
* Census of the Philippine Islands. Washington (1905), 1, 22,
470 ^^^^ PhiUppi7ie Journal of Science i9i4
directly from the Spanish, as the translation furnished was very
poor and inadequate. All editorial interpolations are inclosed
in square brackets. Some at least of the numerous inclosures
in parentheses appear to be explanations made by the translator
from Ilocano to English. These are reproduced without com-
ment. Excerpts from the manuscripts from the several town-
ships are reproduced in alphabetical order, according to the name
of the township, and in small type. Each document, or each
part of each document, is signed with the marks and names of
the old men consulted and by various officials. These are re-
produced in no case. Considerable aid in annotation has been
given by Mr. H. Otley Beyer of the Bureau of Science. All notes
by him are marked with his name. Other aid has been given
by Mr. Otto Scheerer of the University of the Philippines, by
Mr. Luther Parker and others of the Bureau of Education, by
Dr. Merton L. Miller of the Bureau of Science, and by Mr. Otis
W. Barrett of the Bureau of Agriculture.
Lepanto subprovince (see map), obviously named from the
celebrated battle, is bounded on the north by Abra subprovince
(which belongs to Ilocos Sur), on the east by Bontoc and Ifugao
subprovinces, on the south by Benguet subprovince, and on the
west by Amburayan subprovince and Ilocos Sur Province.
Perez (13) says that all the territories of Lepanto and Bontoc,
and a great part of Abra, were formerly called Valle de Cayan,
until Lepanto was declared an independent comandancia ^ in
1852. Various expeditions were made into the district. Luis
Perez Dasmarinas and other officials, in their expeditions to Tuy,
in the sixteenth century, and Quirante, in his gold-hunting semi-
scientific expedition in 1624, probably entered the boundaries
of the present subprovince. Governor Diego de Salcedo dis-
patched an expedition to the mountains in 1665. But the early
expeditions effected little. The expedition of 1836, dispatched by
Governor Pedro Salazar, that of 1877, the earlier work in the
Mission of Cayan, the mission work for some years after 1881,
and the military occupation beginning with 1852 accomplished
more. The term Mission of Cayan comprehended the mission-
ary labors for much of Lepanto. However, Christianity never
gained more than a slight foothold among the Lepanto Igorots.
'See the early official guides published during the Spanish regime; also,
Perez, Igorrotes. Manila (1902). The chief official of the comandancia
was the comandante politico militar, who combined in himself all three
functions of government.
j^. i^- R Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 471
For the years 1881 to 1886, the reports show 58 marriages, 253
baptized children, 83 baptized adults, and 85 deaths of converts.
For the years 1886 to 1891, the numbers are, respectively, 179,
524, 597, and 364. As a result of the mission work, various
schools were opened both for boys and for girls, while 7 private
schools were maintained at one time by the Igorots. None of the
schools, as was natural, came to any prominence. The Span-
iards desired to exploit the mineral resources of the district,
and although the operations of the Cantabro-Filipino company
were rather extensive for some years the exploitation was not
thorough. The capital of the district was shifted from Cayan
to Cervantes by the Spaniards, and the latter pueblo (now
township) was retained by the Americans as the capital on
the change of Government. With the creation of Lepanto-
Eontoc Province, and later of Mountain Province (see footnote
2), the district of Lepanto was made a subprovince.
No real systematic study has yet been made of Lepanto and
its inhabitants, despite the early missions and the fact that
Spanish contact was rather close after 1856 because of the mines,
v/hile during the American regime Cervantes has gained a new
importance because of its location. This is the time for a thor-
ough ethnographical survey of the subprovince to be made, for
customs are insensibly changing, and if ethnological study be
delayed too long much will be lost. According to Worcester, the
number of Lepanto Igorots probably does not exceed 31,000.
With them are found some Tinguians and Bontocs, while the
enterprising Ilocanos are pushing steadily into the Igorot terri-
tory. Already the pure culture is passing away, and the study
of the real Igorot of the subprovince is becoming more difficult.
The people are being raised to a higher level, and new standards
are being created, for the march of progress cannot be ob-
structed. Within a few years, the study now possible cannot be
made (Plate I).
AMPUSUNGAN "'
According to the manuscript, the township of Ampusungan
belonged to the district of Benguet until 1902. It was known
originally as Alacan. The Spaniards, on account of its sparse
population, did not organize it as a town (pueblo) until 1878.
• Local civil government was provided for all the townships of Benguet
Province, to which Ampusungan formerly belonged, by Act No. 48, enacted
November 22, 1900. Act No. 768, enacted May 26, 1903, fixed the boun-
daries of Benguet.
472 'J'he Philippine Journal of Science j^h
For many years the Spaniards were a source of terror to the
people, who promptly deserted their homes whenever any of
the gitardia civil ' appeared. The account of the customs of the
inhabitants of Ampusungan is meager. It is as follows:
In the olden time our parents never used to make cafiaos'^ and during
their whole lives never knew of any remedies for their sickness and a
great number of them died because they knew of no remedy for their
sickness; but one of the old men thought that caiiaos were good for
anybody that was sick, so, therefore they used to have canaos if there was
anybody among them that had any kind of sickness in order that their
sick might become well. And when they had their canaos they used to
take and kill any kind of animals and one of the old men would pray to
the sun, moon, and stars and to his dead relatives, also to the anitos' in
^ The guardia civil (civil guard) of the Spanish regime was similar to
the Philippine Constabulary of to-day. It was, however, a part of the
regular army. It was named after a similar body in Spain. One regi-
ment was stationed in northern Luzon. See also Worcester, Philippines,
Past and Present. New York (1913), 1, 378-380.
'Canao, a feast. Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 850] says: "Sick-
ness is attributed to anitos. Very few native medicines are employed in
treating the sick and great reliance is placed in canaos, at which carabaos,
cattle, pigs, or chickens, according to the wealth of the sick person, are
killed." The cafiao is common throughout Mountain Province.
"Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 817] notes that the rather vague
belief in the anito is widespread among the peoples of Mountain Province.
The word, he points out, is used to designate a spirit, often that of a dead
person, while the anito is at times represented by an image made of wood
or by tying grass or leaves together. Of the anito or its representation
aid is asked, and propitiatory ceremonies are performed to it. Belief in
the anito is not, however, confined alone to the mountain peoples of north-
ern Luzon. There is probably not a single people in the Philippines that
does not now cherish, or that has not at some time in its history cher-
ished, a belief in the anito. Even the Negritos near Floridablanca, Pam-
panga, who are not Malayan, believe in the anito, but they probably
acquired it from the Malayan people with whom they came in contact.
Loarca in his Relacion [republished in both Spanish and English in Blair
and Robertson, The Philippine Islands. Cleveland (1903-1909), 5], written
about 1580, says of the Tagalogs of Manila (pp. 173-175) : ''They said that
this Batala (the Tagalog deity) had many agents under him, whom he sent
to this world to produce, in behalf of men, what is yielded here. These
beings were called anitos , and each anito had a special office * * *.
When the natives were asked why the sacrifices were offered to the anito,
and not to the Batala, they answered that the Batala was a great lord, and
no one could speak to him. He lived in the sky; but the anito, who was
of such a nature that he came down here to talk with men, was to the
Batala as a minister, and interceded for them. In some places, and espe-
cially in the mountain districts, when the father, mother, or other relative
dies, the people unite in making a small wooden idol, and preserve it.
Accordingly there is a house which contains one hundred or two hundred
IX. D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 473
order that he might be safe from any disease: **Here is an animal that we
sacrifice in order that all of you may unite in the same place and use it."
That was the old man's prayer. As soon as this caiiao was over the sick
man would feel better, and they say that the canao that they performed
acted the same as medicine. This is our strong inheritance from our old
men that serves as a reminder to us and that we cannot deny, and this will
be handed down again to our children.
ANGAKI ^^
The township of Angaki comprehends the barrios of Angaki,
Cayos, Malideg, Patiacang, Mabalili, and Suagayan. Accord-
ing to the manuscript, Angaki was first inhabited in 1836. The
first inhabitants came from two small settlements on the moun-
tain just west of Angaki, but their fathers and grandfathers
had gone thither from other places — a fact that proves that
there was considerable movement among the mountain peoples.
The first Christians came in 1884. The first gobernadorcillo^^
was appointed by Ramon Tajonera, governor of Abra Province,
of these idols. These images also are called anitos; for they say that
when people die, they go to serve the Batala. Therefore they make sacri-
fices to these anitos, offering them food, wine, and gold ornaments; and
request them to be intercessors for them before the Batala, whom they
regard as God.'' For other old citations regarding the anito, see Blair
and Robertson, ut supra: 6, 146; 12, 181 (Chirino, Relacion, 1604); 40,
71-73 (Colin, Labor evangelica, 1663) ; 40, 222, 223 (San Agustin's cele-
brated letter, 1720); 40, 333-336 (San Antonio Chronicas, 1738-44). By
the early Visayans the anito was known as diwata. Cf. Jenks, Pub. l\ 1.
Ethnol. Surv, (1905), 1, 196-200.
^"Angaki is described by Perez, Igorrotes, 93-107. It is 22 kilometers
northwest from Cervantes and has a picturesque location amid small
streams and cascades. The township has an abundance of good mineral
waters. Considerable weaving was formerly carried on there. The mission
established in Angaki was organized by Fray Antonio Blanco, O. S. A.
During the Spanish regime a boys' school had a more or less precarious
existence.
"Montero y Vidal, Archipielago Filipino. Madrid (1886), says of the
gobernadorcillo : ''Certain native functionaries, improperly called goberna-
dorcillos, exercise command in the towns; they correspond to the alcaldes
and municipal judges of the Peninsula, and perform at once functions of
judges and even of notaries, with definite powers. As assistants they elect
several lieutenants and alguacils, proportionate in number to the inhab-
itants. Those assistants together with three ex-gobernadorcillos, to whom
are referred the duties of judges of cattle, fields, and police, constitute a
sort of town council." The recompense was so small that the office was
almost honorary, the duties were onerous, and the incumbent of the office
ran the risk of annoyances, fines, and imprisonment. Notwithstanding
these disadvantages the office was much sought after. The above is taken
from Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 17, 329, 330,
474 "^he Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
as a reward for guiding the Spanish soldiers into the mountains.^-
Tajonera encouraged the people to plant rice, tobacco, and other
products. The first taxes were paid in wax and baskets, but
*'when Angaki began to grow rich, the people began to pay taxes
at the rate of 12 centavos each, and in 1887 when Mr. Ramon
Francia ^^ was the governor in Cervantes, we paid 50 centavos
taxes each, until the revolt between the Spaniards and the Fi-
lipinos occurred, and later we paid a contribution of 40 centavos
each." The customs as related by the old men of the barrio
of Angaki are as follows :
These were the customs of our forefathers when one of them wanted
to get married.''*
When a young man sees a young woman to whom he wants to get mar-
ried, he tells it to a married man whom he asks to go and speak to the
parents of the woman. And if he goes and finds out that they both have
the same affection, the woman's parents tell him the day on which the
young man must bring a load of fuel to the house of his father-in-law;
and then each of them must begin to help the other to do some kind of
work. And if it takes them a year to do this, the parents of the man and
woman make an agreement as to which one of them shall build a house
for the married couple. And when they have straightened out their agree-
ment they tell it to some old man ^° who must then m.ake an offering of the
cafiao that will unite them.
^- For a description of Abra, now a part of Ilocos Sur Province, see
Memoria descriptiva de la provincia de Abra, n. p., n. d.; Perez, Igorrotes,
271-285; and Buzeta y Bravo, Diccionario geografico estadistico, historico
de las Islas Filipinas. Jose C. de la Peiia, Madrid (1850-51), 1. The
official government guides for 1848-50 show Ramon Tajonera as coman-
dante politico militar.
^^ Ramon Francia y Parajua, according to the Guia Oficial de Filipinas
for 1897, was comandante politico militar at Cervantes in 1897. No earlier
mention of him is found. One peso (100 centavos) Philippine currency
equals 50 cents United States currency. The peso of Spanish times was
worth considerably less.
" See also, post, other descriptions of marriage customs. Cf . with the
accounts of these documents the old customs of Philippine peoples in Blair
and Robertson, ut supra: 3, 61 (Relation by Legazpi, Cebu, July 7, 1569) ;
3, 166 (Conquest of Luzon, 1572) ; 5, 119, 153-161 (Loarca, Relation, ca.
1580) ; 7, 181-184 (Plasencia, Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589) ; 16, 124-126
(Morga, Sucesos, 1609) ; 34, 320 (1580) ; 40, 88-91 (Colin, Labor evange-
lica, 1663) ; 40, 167-171 (Combes, Historia, 1667) ; 43, 123, 124 (Martinez
de Zuniga, Historia, 1803). See also Jenks, Puh. P. I. Ethnol, Surv. (1905),
1, 202,203.
^° Alonso Martin Quirante in Expeditions to the mines of the Igorotes,
written in 1624 (Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 20, 274) says: "Their
sages or philosophers are the oldest men or women, whom they respect
and obey in an extraordinary manner, and most when they are occupied
in the said feasts; for they say that then and even ordinarily those persons
are wont to talk with the devil, who keeps them blinded."
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 475
Thus, when they are going to celebrate the wedding, the parties on both
sides are first gathered together to see if the subsistence for the caiiao is
sufficient; they then tell the old men to give a canao called begnas'^" in the
old men's tribunal," and after that they go from house to house to sing a
caiiao song, and after this, the wedding of the couple to be married is
performed and then they will again have nine days of wedding prayer
until it is finished; they should not work for three years [sic] and are not
allowed to go to Candon ^^ or any place until the three years are completed.
In general the townsmen m.ust celebrate a feast called begnas" thrice
a year and after each they are not allowed to work for a week if it is well
done; if an earthquake or some other bad thing is predicted by the old
men, they cannot work for a long time.
The immediate ancestors of the people of the barrio of Malideg
migrated into the mountains from the Ilocano town of Santa
Maria, in order to escape the baptism which the Spaniards were
forcing on them and in order to live in accordance with Igorot
customs. Until American rule, this barrio w^as a part of the
town of Tubo;-" subsequently, it was separated from that town
and placed within the jurisdiction of Lepanto. During Spanish
times, the tax amounted to 12 centavos per person, and until
the rule by the Katipunan -^ the same moderate sum was required
for the registration of a license for a carabao or horse. The
Americans increased the taxes to 1 peso for a personal cedula
and a license of 1 peso for carabaos, horses, and cows.^^ t^^ cus-
toms as related by the old men are as follows:
The custom we inherited from our fathers and grandfathers is that
when a young man and woman want to get married there must be one
^*^ The religious ceremony called begnas corresponds to the Ifugao honga,
which is a ceremony for the general welfare of a group of people. The
group may be of any size, from a single family, or a party of travelers,
to a village or a whole clan. Freedom from sickness and crop failure,
health, happiness, and increase of rice, chickens, pigs, and children are the
chief things prayed for at a honga. — Beyer.
" The building here referred to as a tribunal is the I^epanto structure cor-
responding to the Bontoc pabafunan or fawL See Jenks, Pub. P. I, Ethnol.
Surv. (1905), 1, 50-52.— Beyer.
^^ A town of Ilocos Sur, with which the Igorots carried on considerable
trade. Many other instances of taboo will be noticed in the following pages.
^^ See footnote 16. The ceremony here referred to is evidently for a
large group of people. Small begnas are held frequently. — Beyer.
^° By Act No. 293, this rancheria was placed in Abra Province.
^^ Meaning the short period of control exercised over the mountain dis-
tricts of Luzon by the Filipino insurgents. The expression is in general
use in Mountain Province.
" In addition to the taxes named, there was also for the earlier years
of American occupancy a slaughterhouse tax of from 25 to 50 centavos for
each animal killed. The taxes are higher than the legitimate taxes during
the Spanish regime.
476 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9u
or two men to stand as witnesses to arrange the matter. Whenever one
of the married couple repents and makes a complaint to the old men or
principales of the town, they are punished with a fine of 1 carabao, 30
bundles of palay," 6 pesos, 1 jar of basi or tapuyy'* and this fine of the one
who repents will be eaten by the people and not given to one person only.
But if the married couple are quiet and live in harmony, the parents of
the woman or wife must kill a hog; they will also take some basi or tapuy
accompanying the hog-'s meat which they give to the parents of the hus-
band; the relatives of the husband's party gather together and come to
eat and drink; and from the time when the wife's party gives these eatables
to the husband's party during a day and a night, and the time is rather
good and [there is] no earthquake no rainbow nor shower or even [though]
it rains heavily if [the weather be] not stormy and no chicken is caught
by a hawk in the town, and no person dies, and both parents of the married
couple always keep their fire alive, the married couple will then have rather
long lives and many children. They then perform the marriage and the
four parties of the wife and husband are gathered together and the number
of animals that are killed are 14 hogs and 18 chickens or hens. These must
not be less then the number needed; and these hogs and chickens should
be eaten at once in one day.^*^ There is another and last pamegyasan (feast
for wedding) , such as haquid, lapsag, sungeh, and quinaoang^ and the cere-
monies for these feasts are the killing of 10 hogs and 15 chickens; this is
performed for the same wedding.
When anyone dies, the clothing we use must be arranged in the follow-
ing order: When an old man dies, his clothing will be a blanket, a coarse
G string and aboiigos, and if an old woman, the clothing will be lanwia,
bayaongy bacguet, and a coarse blanket; but if a boy dies, his clothing might
be a coarse blanket; if a boy dies, his clothing must be a coarse G string
'^ Palay is unhusked rice; the same as paddy.
" A manuscript conserved in the Philippine Library, and entitled "Me-
moria aprocsimada del pais Ygorrote dependiente de la 1". Division Militar,
escrita por los oficiales Dn. D. S. y D. C. G. en el mes de Febrero de 1843,
describes the drink basi as follows: **They (the Igorots) cook a quantity
of rice, pound up another like quantity, then mix the two thoroughly with
well-pressed ginger ^nd with a quantity of hay that they call anuad.
After the abovesaid is thoroughly mixed, they place it in a jar, the mouth
of which they stop with leaves from some tree. Then they leave it under
the house for about three days in order that it may ferment. At the end
of that time they use it after putting water in it." Cf. Jenks [Pub, P. /.
Ethnol. Surv, (1905), 1, 144], who describes the making of basi quite
differently. According to Jenks's account, basi is a "fermented beverage
prepared from sugar cane," and no rice is used in its manufacture. The
authors of the manuscript seem to have confused basi with tapuy. For
the method used by the Bontocs in the manufacture of tapuy, see Jenks,
ut supra, 144. Tapuy appears to be much like the bubud of the Ifugaos.
[For a full account of the methods of manufacture and difference between
basi, tapuy, and bubud, see This Journal, Sec. A (1912), 7, 97-119. — Beyer.]
"Compare with the eat-all feasts of the North American Indians de-
scribed so often by the Jesuit missionaries in their famous relations. The
two seem to have but one point in common ; namely, the religious necessity
and significance of disposing of all of the food and drink.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 477
and bay-an; and if it is a girl her clothing must be lamma, bacguet, and
lanlan; the ceremony to be made for the dead is the killing of 10 hogs
and 15 chickens; we inherited these customs from our grandfathers and
fathers.'*' (Plate III.)
The second custom that we inherited is that we must perform a general
caiiao called begnas in the abong" (tribunal) just after planting and
harvesting of the rice crop ;" if there are some to be married, they celebrate
the wedding just after this cafiao; the ceremony observed for begnas is
the killing of a dog, 2 hogs, and 3 chickens, and in the afternoon of the
same day we string the meat not eaten on fine split bamboos, also the
chicken and dog; there are as many of them as the number of houses in
our settlement; on the third day we again take a hog to be killed to the
same abong, and all the people in that settlement must be gathered together,
and the meat must be divided among them to be distributed to our houses
for the performance of a caiiao for the hog or chicken; not one of us is
allowed to go to the country to work during seven days, and no one can
come into our town not even anyone who has some letters to bring us unless
we let him come in; we inherited this custom from our fathers and they
*' The abongos is a headband or turban. The bayaong is a woman^s
striped skirt, ornamented with conventional designs, and made only in
Lepanto. — Beyer.
Jenks [Pub, P. /. Ethnol Surv. (1905), 1, 79, 80] describes the clothing
of the Bontocs as follows: "The burial clothes of a married man are the
los-adan, or blue anito-figured burial robe, and a breechcloth of beaten bark,
called *chi-nang-ta.' In the coffin are placed a fa-a, or blue cotton breech-
cloth made in Titipan, the fan-cha-la, a striped blue-and-white cotton
blanket, and the to-chong, a foot-square piece of beaten bark or white cloth
which is laid on the head. A married woman is buried in a kay-in, a
particular skirt made for burial in Titipan, and a blue-bordered waist or
la-ma. In the coffin are placed a burial girdle, wa-kis, also made in Titi-
pan, a blue-and-white-striped blanket called bay-a-ong, and the to-chong,
the small cloth or bark over the hair. * * * With the men are buried,
besides the things interred with the married men, the basket-work hat,
the basket-work sleeping hat, the spear, the battle-ax, and the earrings if
any are possessed. * * * In addition to the various things buried with
the married woman, the unmarried has a sleeping hat. Babes and children
up to 6 or 7 years of age are buried in the sementera [that is, field] wrapped
in a crude beaten-bark mantle. This garment is folded and wrapped about
the body, and for babes, at least, is bound and tied close about them.** See
also Jenks, A. Anthrop. (1904), n. s., 6, No. 5; Perez, Pub, P. L Ethnol.
Surv. (1904), 3, 237; and Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto, 30.
" Aboiig, or abung, is the universal name throughout northern Luzon for
a long, low dwelling house, built either directly on the ground or at a slight
elevation above it. — Beyer.
"See Barton, This Journal, Sec. D (1911), 6, 81-103; and Jenks, Pub.
P. I. Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 1, 103-105. Superstitions in regard to planting
and harvesting are very common in the Philippines. Miss Emma Yule, a
teacher in the Manila High School, has gathered together from her students
many of the common superstitions regarding the planting, care, and har-
vesting of rice. This is entitled. Some superstitions and customs of the
Filipino farmer, and is soon to be published.
478 ^^^<2 Philippine Journal of Science 1914
inherited it from the grandfathers of our grandfathers, and thus we signed
it and put our cross at the end of the names of those who cannot read or
write.
The ancestors of the inhabitants of the barrio of Patiacang
are traced by the manuscript to 1793, when they "went to a
place called Balaoa, west of Santa Lucia in Ilocos Sur." The
infidel Igorots were compelled to pay a tax for the benefit of
living in the town and to promise to aid the Christians should
harm threaten from other Igorots. In 1840, when a census or
tax list of the people of Patiacang was made, the Spaniards
appointed several officials in the barrio. In 1908, the barrio was
organized under the American Government. No customs or
beliefs are recorded.
The story of the barrio of Mabalili is as follows :
We, the inhabitants of the barrio of Mabalili, in the limits of the town-
ship of Angaki, Mountain Province, have written out this history of the
customs we used and how we lived in the ancient times. The first people
who cleared and formed this place into a town were Guilalo, Ao-aoiden,
and Balugong; they and their wives came from Sumade; they cleared these
places and planted camotes, aha, maize, bananas, and squashes, which they
used for their food, and when they had increased in number, Guilalo and
Amasan moved to the other side, called Tube, clearing the same, and when
some other people from other towns came to join them, they thought of
turning the land that would be watered from the brooks into good but
small rice fields; the boundary of our town is close to the mountain called
Tirad on the south and touches the foot of the mountain called Tubba. The
custom of marrying a young man and a young woman is first that they
make an agreement and they must tell their agreement to the old men or
to the principales,^^ and they [that is, the old men or principales] go to the
houses of the parents of the girl and boy to witness the agreement; the
[acts of the] witnesses are [that] the principales or the old men eat etag
(salted pork) ; but, if at the last moment there should be one of the mar-
riage couple who wishes to change his mind or to dissolve their marriage,
we punish her or him with 25 (anything counted to that number) as was
our custom in ancient times until now. Thus after the marriage of the
couple has been witnessed, first, the husband goes to find fuel and brings
it with him to the house of his parents-in-law and after that the wife gets
a jar of water and takes it with her to the house of her parents-in-law
also; as to their building they kill a hen, and if the hen that they kill (by
beating the body of the hen with a stick or anything else until the hen dies)
has a good and satisfactory gall, we inform our town mates; and everyone
who comes to help them, must bring with him some cogon or bamboo that
will be added to the materials that they are preparing for the building;
^ In the Filipino town, during the Spanish regime, the principalia was
a class made up of those who had held the office of gobernadorcillo and
cabeza de barangay. The members of the class were known as principales.
Among the mountain peoples, the chiefs and often the old men form the
principalia.
IX. D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 479
and after the house is built, we kill a hen and then cook it mixed with etag
(salted pork) ; but when they are going to live in the house they mang-
mang '° (to kill a chicken with a stick) a chicken in the stove inside of the
house, and if the liver is all right they then stay in the house doing nothing
for three days and then again kill a chicken in a fireplace outside of the
house; but when they want to go to the country to work and the liver is
all right, they again kill one hog in the fireplace outside of the house, and
the meat of that hog will be given to those who come as their guests; and
at the third day they must perform a canao called saguepsep in the house
using one chicken; and after seven days of oayied (canao) they again
baquidan hogs (the hogs are put in a frame called baquidan as required
in the canao); 2 hogs and 2 chickens are needed in this canao; the hogs
must be 1 female and 1 male ; and then the chickens are put between them,
and no one is allowed to go as far as or to the places where the Ilocanos live
for a month, during which they will not do any kind of work.
Our customary feast which we often used to offer to God so that He
may let us live longer is a general canao. The ceremony that we make
in this canao is the killing of a hog in the country, and when we return
home we must take 1 hog to the abong in which we are gathered together,
and after this we must go from house to house to agdao-es (to ask for a
hen from each house and kill it, after which the meat is strung with a fine
split bamboo and distributed among the houses) a hen of those who have
chickens and wish to offer something to God; this is not compulsory if a
man has no chicken. After the said dao-es we must perform 2 cafiaos
called libaya and sagepsep in the abong, and the ceremony observed is the
killing of 1 pig and 1 hen inside of the abong, and if the livers of the two
are satisfactory and puffed up ^^ then we can go to the country to work
after seven days. This must be done yearly for we ought to follow the
customs which we inherited from our forefathers. Since the first time
when our town was inhabited by the original dwellers, the chief ruler was
called campoy^' and each man had to pay a tax of 8 centavos. In that time
the Spanish tobacco graders were called rulers ; there was then also a meas-
uring of tobacco.^' Both men and women had to pay taxes of 25 centavos
each, and when the Spanish priests were scattered around, each man and
woman had to pay taxes of 50 centavos, but in the year 1901, when the
Katipunan was in control of the Islands, each man contributed only 20
'° MaiTg-mang means to view or to look at. In this case, the author
means that they will kill a chicken and look at its gall to learn the omen.
Such metaphorical uses of mang-mang are common. — Beyer. See also
Jenks, Pub. P, L Ethnol. Surv, (1905), 1, 200, 208, 209.
" The manner of reading the omen from a chicken's gall is the same
among all of the Igorot, Bontoc, and Ifugao peoples. If the gall bladder
is full of liquid and has a smooth surface the omen is good, but if it is
empty and the surface wrinkled the omen is bad. — Beyer.
^^ From maestre de campo, the title of a Spanish military officer of high
rank.
" Governor Basco de Vargas established the government monopoly over
tobacco in the Philippines in 1781. At first this resulted advantageously,
but it was only a forced benefit both to people and government, and soon
the evils of the monopoly became apparent. It was finally repealed in
1881.
480 "^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i»i4
centavos; and in 1903, we, the men, had to pay taxes of 100 centavos; in
1904, we had to pay a cedula tax of 1 peso, and road tax of 2 pesos — in
all, 3 pesos. Besides these there is another tax yearly ever since the
United States of America took control of the Islands.
We have also to relate in this section our custom when a young man
marries a young woman, in order that they may be married; the relatives
of both sides must be all gathered together and must make their customary
ceremony for a wedding; they surround a coobran (jar) of tapuy with
pieces of wood and erect a bebe (a piece of log) at the door of the house,
and the ceremony that they perform is the killing of 5 hogs and some
chickens; and after this wedding they cannot go very far away from home
for a year. But when they have a child they perform a caiiao called bay as
as a galut (clothing) of their babe, and the ceremony that they must
perform in this cafiao is the killing of 10 hogs besides some chickens used
for their habitual offering that we inherited from our forefathers. And
this is the result and end of the offering as to our ways and living at Mabi-
lili, but in order that the position of our place might be seen, we will mark
out the rivers, brooks, and mountains."
The barrio of Suagayan was named from oaig (brook), so
called from a river on its eastern side. Customs are described
as follows :
The custom of the forefathers in the ancient times when the young men
and women married was a peculiar one; they did not get married (as the
Christians do), but they were committed to two old men who witnessed
their marriage. And they [that is, the old men] decided the day on which
they must celebrate the wedding, in order that the husband and wife may
live together in the same house. If one of the married couple wishes to
be divorced " from the other, a fine of 1 carabao and punishment of 25
strokes is imposed upon him or her; this was the law of our forefathers
in the ancient times. The organization of this village was quite good for
we compelled all the lazy fellows to work and plant certain crops to feed
themselves with. And thus our custom is that we must perform a caiiao
called begnas (just before planting and harvesting the crops) and two
after the performance of begnas. We perform another caiiao the ceremony
in which is the killing of 1 hog. We must perform certain cafiaos as
offerings to God so that He may save our hogs together with our chickens.
•* A rough plan accompanies the manuscript, which is not reproduced
here.
"Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 850] says: ''The Benguet-Lepanto
Igorots are monogamous. Children are betrothed at a very early age and
often marry at the age of puberty or even before. Strong attachments
are not uncommon among the married people and divorce is relatively rare."
Some men in Lepanto keep concubines. The manuscript Memoria aprocsi-
mada says of marriage: "Among these heathen, the passion of love is
unknown, because they marry when very young. In the negotiations the
contracting parties have nothing to say, for on this occasion, they are
subjected to the caprice and wish of their parents. The latter generally
base their reasons on one of the two following things. The first is when
two intimate friends have their wives with child at the same time; and
they agree to bind their offspring together, if it happen that one bear a
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 481
BAGNEN ^"^
In olden times this town was known by the name Bagnen. When the
Spaniards were in control of this country, they called it rancheria" of
Bagnen, but when the Katipunan were the rulers they called it a munic-
ipality, and now the present Government names it a township.
No one knows the exact time when this town was settled ; the oldest men
at this time and those who have been told of the history by their old people
say that this town was organized before the Spaniards came to this coun-
try, and thus we do not know the names of the principales and settlers who
were the forefathers of the present inhabitants of the barrios.
Four barrios form the township of Bagnen, and their names are as
follows: Bagnen, Data, Laylaya, and Balintoogan.
In ancient times each of these barrios, except the last named, Balin-
toogan, was called a rancheria, and each of them had a gobernadorcillo,
teniente mayor, alguaciles, and cabezas de barangay, who were the officials
that governed their town, and they had appointments given to them by
the comandante politico militar who was in authority in the district. This
was not then called a province but Distrito de Lepanto."
son and the other a daughter. The second is when two friends have
children, one a male and the other a female, whom they desire to be related
by marriage. The contract having been made by the parents and the day
set for the espousals, they advise the old woman who acts as priestess.
The families assemble in the house of the parents of the bride. The drum-
beat notifies the people of the village and neighbors that there is a function
in that house. This is at the cost of the father of the groom. The people
give 5 pesos to the father of the bride, unless the bride and groom are of
importance. Then presents of 30 or 40 pesos are generally given, with
which, together with what the father of the groom expects to spend, they
buy basi, carabaos, and pigs which are taken to the house of the bride."
•* Bagnen is located 22 kilometers east of Cervantes. It was out of the
usual route of communication, and its inhabitants were more backward
than those of other pueblos. During the time of the tobacco monopoly,
considerable tobacco was raised in Bagnen, but after the repeal of the
monopoly only enough for home consumption was planted. After 1890
some coffee was raised. See Perez, Igorrotes, 203-207.
•^A name originally applied by the Spaniards to a small collection of
huts. Some of the so-called rancherias in the Philippines approached a
small hamlet in size.
" Teniente mayor, head lieutenant ; generally head of a barrio. Alguacil,
constable of the courts or of a municipal body. Cabeza de barangay, for-
merly the chief of the old Filipino government unit, the barangay. The
Spaniards retained the title and made the office appointive or elective. The
incumbents of this office were made responsible for the collection of the
tribute and taxes, and each officer was supposed to be responsible for 50
families. They were subordinate to the gobernadorcillo, and together with
him and all ex-gobernadorcillos and ex-cabezas de barangay, formed the
principalia. See Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 17, 331; 40, 83, 347-349.
Comandante politico militar, the highest Spanish officer of any given mili-
tary district. See Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 850]: "While all
the settlements of the Benguet-Lepanto Igorots have their own govern-
130429 — 2
482 Tlie Philippine Journal of Science 1914
The fourth barrio, named Balintoogan, was lately organized. This place
is on a steep side of a large mountain between Bagnen, Sagada, and
Besao. The people who are living there came from the villages of Ambasing,
Balugang, and Amquileng. They left these (places) on account of the
sinking and falling away of the ground and owing to fear they moved
to the place which is now called Balintoogan.
There are no records showing the list of the officials of this town or
the time when they served and thus we cannot give a true and exact
account but nevertheless those whom we know and have heard of are
as follows:
Names of 24 gobernadorcillos, 6 tenientes mayores, 7 cabezas
de barangay, 4 presidentes, 4 vice-presidentes, 11 concejales or
councilors, and 2 secretary-treasurers follow. These officials
''served since the time of the Katipunan, who are succeeded by
the present government," but they are not of sufficient impor-
tance to be reproduced here. The manuscript continues :
A SHORT DESCRIPTION
The township is situated on the steep sides of the high mountains;
the people are very poor, because there is not enough good land for them
to work; it is divided into small villages because the people found that
the mountain side where they can plant camotes, a little maize, and other
vegetables from which they could obtain their food was a rich land;
camotes are the important food of the people of this town. There are
some small parcels of rice fields owned by the people, but they are very
hard to cultivate because they are made along the creeks and on hill-
sides, and they look like disarranged steps of vertical ladders; they cannot
use carabaos to plow them because they are in such bad places. They
must patiently dig and clean them, and then they can plant rice in
them. They are always digging camotes, but rice can only be harvested
in the time of calgao (dry season) on account of the cold weather in
these places.'^
RELIGION AND CUSTOMS
There is nothing to show or any proofs of any true religion which
these people possess or follow, but they believe that there is a God and
they call Him Cabunian;*^ they believe also in the souls of the dead,
ments, organized in accordance with the white man's law, there still remain
Igorot representatives of the families from which came the chiefs of former
days, who have more influence than have any of the present elected officials.
Not a few individuals of these families have attained to considerable
wealth.'*
" See Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto, 39-41. See also a description
of agricultural methods among the Bontocs by Jenks [Pub. P. 7. Ethnol.
Surv, (1905), 1, 88-107]. The rice terraces of the Ifugaos are one of
the wonders of the Orient. The stone walls, many of which are of
great height and exceedingly well made, have an appearance of great age.
*^ I doubt if Cabunian is the name of a deity. It is probably a place.
In the Ifugao religion it is the name of the sky region where most of
the greatest deities dwell. — Beyer. Beyer [This Journal, Sec. D (1913),
IX. D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 483
and call them anito; and their manner of praying or making offering
is somewhat like that of the people in ancient time/^ the only difference
being that in ancient times when they made prayers or offerings they
killed a sheep " for the ceremony ; but now the ceremony that they
observe whenever they make any offering to God (Cabunian) is the
killing of a hog or a chicken/'
8, 99], speaking of the Ifugaos, says that Cabunian is the layer of
the sky world "immediately above the Earth World, and it is the blue-stone
underfacing of this layer that we call the *sky/ " Fray Benito Herosa,
0. S. A. [see Perez, Pub. P. /. Ethnol. Surv. (1904), 3, 243] identifies
Cabunian with the sun.
*^ Of the religion of the Igorots, Alonso Martin Quirante (Blair and
Robertson, ut supra, 20, 273, 274) says: "The Yglotes are an idolatrous
race. They say that their god is the sky, whom they call Cabunian;
and they offer and sacrifice to him, in their banquets and feasts, swine
and carabaos, but under no consideration cows or bulls. The method
of sacrifice practiced by them is [as follows] : Having tied all the
animals not prohibited about the house of the sacrifice, after the ceremony
an old man or old woman, having placed on the ground a painted cloth
that resembles a surplice, and which they call salili, they proceed to
kill the animals, and make a great feast. They keep that up for two
or three days until they have finished eating what they have, when
their feast or magunito also finishes. He who keeps up such entertain-
ment longest, and kills most of the said animals is most respected.'* See
also, Perez, Pub, P. /. EthnoL Surv, (1904), 3, 137, 138, and Jenks, ibid.
(1905), 1, 196-215.
*^ Thus in the manuscript, but probably a dog is meant, as no sheep
are found in Mountain Province, except those brought in from outside,
such as those now owned by the Jesuits at Baguio.
*^ See the description of a sacrifice witnessed among the Visayans
in 1521 by Antonio Pigafetta, who accompanied Magellan, in Robertson,
Magellan's journey around the world. Cleveland (1906), 163-167. See
also, Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 3, 163-165 (Conquest of Luzon,
1572) ; 3, 198, 199 (Relation of the Western Islands called Filipinas,
1573) ; 5, 131-133, 163, 173-175 (Loarca's Relation, ca. 1580) ; 7, 185,
190, 191 (Plasencia, Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589); 12, 265-272, 302,
304 (Chirino, Relation, 1604); 13, 59, 72, 81; 21, 137, 138; 29, 284-286,
293, 294 (Bobadilla's Relation, 1640); 30, 190-192, 288, 289; 31, 145,
146, 155; 32, 55, 56, 248; 33, 167-171; 34, 319; 38, 219, 221, 236,
239; 40, 70-89 (Colin, Labor evangelica, 1663) ; 40, 167 (Combes, Historia,
1667); 40, 221, 223; 40, 335-339 (San Antonio, Chronicas, 1738-44);
43, 105 (Ortiz, Practico del ministerio, ca. 1742) ; 43, 124, 125 (Martinez
de Zufiiga, Historia, 1803); 47, 301, 302 (Perez, Relation of Zambales,
1680) ; 48, 107, 125, 129, 132. See also, Perez, Pub. P. I. Ethnol. Surv.
(1904), 3, 242, 243. Mr. Luther Parker, of the Bureau of Education,
Manila, has seen the sacrifices still performed by the half-wild mountain
people of Panay. They resemble closely the sacrifice described by Pigafetta.
The manuscript above cited, Noticia aprocsimada, gives an account of
sacrifices among the Igorots, especially of that called jalujalu, which is
defined as the sacrifice of pigs.
484 "^he Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
They often do this, and there is no day designated especially when they
have a celebration or feast to thank Cabunian for giving them a good
crop to harvest, or for the increasing of their animals, their good health,
or whenever there is a wedding {homayas) ,**' or when one of them
dies. (Plate II, fig. 2.)
They surely believe that there are souls, and they say that anitos
of their forefathers visit them frequently. They have also a belief that
these anitos are the companions and helpers of Cabunian to look after the
people, to give prosperity, and also to give hardship and bad luck to
the people; if one of their children is sick, they say that the anito of
their forefathers visited him and thus they must kill a hog or a chicken
to feed him. They believe that this offering of food is eaten by the
anito and that he will give health to the sick and cure him/'
According to their customs, whenever they go to any place or go to
another town or the authorities call them, they must first have a canao;
or if they intend to do something they first perform a inamidiSy the so-called
pidis, which is that they must kill one chicken to see if its liver is
satisfactory; if it is good and full they continue, but if it is unsatisfactory
they stop and have another mamidis (to kill a chicken and see the liver) .
When they are already on the way, if a crow, mouse, snake, etc., runs
across the road, they at once stop their journey. They say that it is
bad luck or that the object of their journey will not be accomplished
or that it will turn out badly. For that reason they must stop for a
while or else return to the town which they started from.**
It can be seen that there exists great union among them, for when
one of them has something to do and cannot do it alone all the people
will agree to help; when one is going to build his house, all the people
must help him to secure all the materials and other things needed and
help build the house asking no pay.*'
If there is a person of any kind who asks a shelter in their house, they
feed him and request no pay; they are humble and obedient to the orders
of the authorities.
BANAAO ^'
^'Official names of the barrios are : Banaao, Dacudac, Pandayan,
Lebga, Cagubatan, and Cada-anan.''
**A bumayas is not a wedding. It is a great ceremony given only
by members of the aristocracy as a public demonstration of their right
to their titles. It is often given by an aristocratic couple immediately
following their wedding ceremony. — Beyer.
*' See footnote 9.
*• These superstitions were common in early times to all the peoples
now called Filipinos. Cf. Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 7, 189 (Plasencia,
Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589) ; 40, 341-346 (San Antonio, Chronicas,
1738-44). There are many references in Philippine documents to this
superstition.
" But they expect to and do receive a very considerable quantity of food
and drink. — Beyer,
** Banaao is located 18 kilometers south of Cervantes. It is the center
of extensive rice fields. See Perez, Igorrotes, 141-152.
IX. D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 485
*The barrio of Dacudac was formed into a barrio on August
31, 1908; the five other barrios were formed in olden times; the
old men living now have no idea as to when these barrios were
formed."
The names of the original families and of the officials as far
back as known follow. The manuscript proceeds :
CUSTOM OF DRESSING OF THE IGOROTS
For an Igorot one suit of clothes is sufficient for a year; this consists
of a handkerchief, a blanket, and a G string for the men and of a
camisa, a tapis, a waist bandage, and a string of head beads, which they
call banges, for the women.
The women in this township do not wear their hair any longer than
it is worn by the men; the headwear of the men differs from that of
the women. The women can only use a string of beads; they are not
allowed to wear anything like the men's head string. The men's headwear
is a piece of cloth or handkerchief which they wind around their head;
they are not allowed to wear the head ornament of the women.**
The "muebles'* [that is, possessions or property] of the Igorots consist
only of pupputic (jars).'* There are many different kinds, such as
hunay, sinal-itan, inot-otot, pucao, guilas, pinaypayao, tinodco, lunghoy,
bimaog, guinalman, lucian, saoit, and gayang; and also a string of gold,
which resembles a necklace and is called camaqui. All these properties
are held very sacred by the Igorots, and they must not be sold; they
would rather have their rice land sold than these properties, because
they regard them as sacred relics of their forefathers."
The jars are used to make tapuy in, a drink made out of rice which
they drink at any time as it is a means of diversion for them; the
jars and other things are also used in the celebration of canaos.
'" x\lonso Martin Quirante (Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 20, 269) thus
describes the clothing of the mountain people in 1624 : "The usual dress and
clothing of that people is a loose shock of disheveled hair that reaches below
the ears, and certain bands about one jeme [span] wide made from the
bark of trees. Having wound these about the waist, they twist them
so that they cover the privy parts. They call these bahaques, and they
are worn by all classes of people, men and women. Besides the said
bahaque, the chiefs wear Ilocan blankets, which they have inherited from
their ancestors; this garment is crossed from the shoulder to the waist,
where they knot it. Thus do they go, without any other clothes or
shoes.'* See also footnote 26.
** That is, things made of clay. Putik is a common northern Luzon
word for clay or mud. — Beyer.
" Throughout the entire extent of the Philippine Archipelago are found
jars of Chinese origin, mute witnesses of the great extent since the
earliest times of Chinese trade. Many of them are centuries old, and
are considered among the most priceless treasures of their owners. See
Jenks, Pub, P. L Ethnol, Surv. (1905), 1, 117-121, for a discussion of
Bontoc pottery. See also Cole and Laufer, Chinese pottery in the Philip-
pines, Field Mus. Pub, (1913).
486 ^^^<? Philippine Journal of Science 1914
All Igorots have tapuy in their houses; it is for them a kind of a
household god; they always have tapuy set aside for drinking purposes,
and no matter how much they have on hand it is sometimes drunk
up in one day, because when the Igorots gather together and sit around
in the shade without having anything to do, and they just feel [like drink-
ing] it, they go from one house to another to hunt for tapuy, and when
they find some, although the owner may be absent, they drink it all
without regard to what the owner might say upon his return. When
the owner returns and finds his tapuy gone, he can't say anything,
because it is their custom to do so. (Plate II, fig. 2.)
SUPERSTITIONS OF THE IGOROTS WHEN GOING AWAY FROM HOME
When an Igorot goes anywhere and a bird of any kind flies across
the trail ahead of him he discontinues his journey because it predicts
a failure of his purpose or he might get into trouble; but, if he insists
on going ahead in order to avoid delay, he must stop for about a half
an hour right at the place where the bird crossed the trail, or else
he must return to his home and make a new start.
IGOROT CUSTOMS
The Igorots have a custom of going to sit nearly every day in a high
place from where all the trails and roads leading to the town can be
plainly seen; ^^ there they do nothing but clean themselves of their head
and body lice (coto, head louse; tonia, body louse) ; one Igorot cleans
the head of another and so on. While sitting around that way they do
also some simple work, such as making baskets, which are called taddo,
balloco, labba, etc.''^ In each of the barrios there is a little house called
" Alonso Martin Quirante (Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 20, 269)
says: **Their settlements are established on the peaks of the mountains,
and on the roughest of them, whence afar off they can see all the
paths, so that no one can approach them without being seen by their
sentinels, who always guard their posts day and night. '^
" Labba is the term employed by the Ilocanos for the large carrying
basket. The following information was furnished by the Bureau of
Education in Manila. ^'Relative to Lepanto-Igorot basketry in general
the following information can be given. Nearly all Igorot baskets are
made entirely of rattan. Other materials, such as nito, are sometimes
used in decoration. The rattan may be dyed black, red, or yellow for
decoration. Two methods of construction are used: binding and braiding.
The former is most common. It implies the employment of rather strong
strips bound together by smaller pliable strips. By this method rigidity,
beauty, and any desired shape can be secured. Large tampipis, vase-
shaped storage and carrying baskets, and small trinket baskets of all
kinds are made by this method. Baskets made by the latter method
are pliable and not so pleasing to the eye. They are made entirely of
narrow pliable strips braided together. Winnowing trays and rude carry-
ing baskets are the principal products of this method." The following
note was furnished by Dr. Merton L. Miller of the Bureau of Science:
"In the Philippine museum all the basketry from Benguet and Lepanto
is grouped together as there is very little, if any, difference between
the basketry of the two subprovinces. It consists of carrying baskets;
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 487
dalipey (tribunal), where the young men over 8 years of age and
the widowers sleep. Boys and girls old enough to wed do not sleep in
their parents' home; the young women seek the houses of widows or
women that are not living with a man and sleep in their houses as long
as they are not married; the children sleep in the house of their parents."
A young man that has been sleeping for some time in the dalipey
that wants to get married and has already found a girl that will have
him, gets two or three old men to go to make a marriage agreement
with the parents of the girl; the only point which they have to settle
is the sabong (dowry) '^ that the man is to give to the bride. If the
sabong is satisfactory to the girl's parents then they kill a rooster and
a hen and get some tapuy. If the gall of the chickens proves unsatisfactory,
they kill two others and so on until they find two whose galls are
satisfactory; the expense for this is borne by both parties.
The old men commissioned by the bridegroom also send after his father,
but not until after the agreement about the dowry has been settled;
and these old men are considered as the witnesses to the marriage; the
girl's parents send after the young man to live with their daughter after
three days have passed, although this time can be extended to one or
two years. The husband and wife can be divorced at any time they
wish, without anybody being able to prevent them from doing so. A
divorce is sought for the following reason: If they have no children,
despite the continued observance of the jMsang (a prayer to the anito
to give them children). If the husband is the one that first suggests
a separation, the dowry given by him to his wife will be left to her,
but if the woman first suggests the separation the dowry will go back
to the husband, but what property they have accumulated during the
time that they have been married will be shared equally between them.
The divorced parties must not have any hard feelings toward each other
during their lifetime.
ANOTHER CUSTOM OF MARRYING
The parents of both the boy and girl have a talk with each other
and make an agreement to marry their children; the boy's parents turn
over to the girl's parents the dowry agreed upon, which remains in their
possession; if rice land, they work it until the children get old enough
to marry; the profits therefrom are used for the maintenance of the girl;
when the children are grown up and then refuse to marry each other,
the dowry is returned to the boy's parents.
carrying frames; pouches worn by men and women; storage baskets;
hats; baskets for carrying eggs, ore, and fish; and fish traps. These are
made almost entirely of rattan and bamboo." Cf. also Jenks, Pub. P. I.
Ethnol. Surv, (1905), 1, 121-123.
" Dalipey, see footnote 17. Beyer says that the sleeping customs of
the Lepanto Igorots are the same as among the Ifugaos and that there
is no public sleeping house for girls as in Bontoc. But see page 493,
where a communal house for girls is described. This may have been bor-
rowed from the Bontoc s.
'"' See footnotes 14 and 35. The dowry, which was always given by
the man, was an important condition of marriage throughout the
Philippines.
488 2^^^ Philippine Journal of Science lou
HOW THE IGOROT WORKS
The women do all the work in the rice and camote fields; they till
the soil by means of iron bars; they transplant the rice and also cut
the rice when it is ready for harvest; the men only help the women to
build the walls in the rice fields and to carry home, once a day, part
of the rice that has been cut by the women.
The men^s work consists in pounding out the rice from the palay,
getting the water for home use, pasturing the animals if they have any,
cooking their rice, feeding the hogs, taking care of the house, and carrying
the baby around."
To build or remove an IgoroVs house is very easy; no nails are needed,
only split bamboo is used to join the house together; the house is con-
structed out of lumber, it has only 4 posts; the boards used are 1 decimeter
thick, 4 decimeters wide, and 2 meters long.
When an Igorot intends to remove his house, he prepares two big
jars of tapuy with which to entertain the people at his house; at twilight
he sends a man to notify his neighbors and townspeople that he intends
to remove his house to another place the next day, so that all those
who were so notified will not go away but come and work on his house
that day; this house is built entirely during one day's work. When it
is completed, they drink the tapuy that has been prepared for them, but
eat no food.
CLIMATE
The climate of Banaao is pretty cold throughout the year; we raise
two rice crops a year.
There are no more old barrios left in this township in which any
of the present inhabitants were born.
All the people living in any of the barrios, comprising this township,
**Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto. Manila (1877), says: "The
Igorot woman is the one who attends to the planting, and on that account
she is away from home most of the day. The man only plows the
field and builds the rock walls of the fields. After these labors the men
only attend to public matters, and even in the performance of the latter
tasks, it is usual to see the women substitute the men. The children
accompany the women. Meanwhile the man stays at home, cooks the
rice and other food, and amuses the nursing children while their mothers
are away. They give the children masticated morisqueta [cooked rice]
from their own mouths. It would not be imagined that a robust, agile
man, well able to work, should lend himself to so feminine an occupation
and pastime, unless this was a fitting custom of the law that belongs
to woman among heathen people of backward intelligence. On the other
hand, the men are wont to work for a medium wage, far from their own
neighborhood, and for a very small sum do not hesitate to carry heavy
loads. They are good cultivators, and are always eager to get seeds
and plants unknown to them." The report just cited is excellent and the
work of a good observer. Lillo de Gracia was comandante politico militar
of the district of Lepanto. Among the Bontocs, some care of the children
devolves on the men. See Jenks, Pub. P. L Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 1,
134-136.
IX, D. 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 489
observe the same custom and manners in the celebrating of the 9 following
described caiiaos:
1. Canao called hagaoas. This canao is attended by all the people
who have a house of their own in the barrio that celebrates the canao;
this is an offering to the anito that they may have a good rice crop
and [that the anito may] protect their rice from the plague of mice
and keep their grain from drying up.
The ceremonies gone through in their canao are the killing of a
hog in the yard of a deserted house, called ao-a. After the hog is killed,
one-fourth of the liver and one-half of the breast are strung on finely
split bamboo and dropped into boiling water; after this is boiled it is
taken to a particular place, together with a dish of rice and a dish
of tapuy, all of which, an old man, accompanied by a prayer, offers
according to custom to this particular anito; after the ceremony, the
old man, who made the offering, takes for himself all the provisions
set aside for this ceremony; the rest of the meat is sold to anyone who
wishes to buy some. Then they also make an offering for the protection
of their rice from the plague; this meat, so used in this canao, is cooked
and eaten the same as any other meat.
2. Canao called quesley. This caiiao is an offering and prayer to the
anito to protect them against any kind of sickness or disease.
The ceremonies for this caiiao are the killing of a hog (the hog is
burned) ; after the hog is killed, one or two old men take their spears
and sit down facing the killed hog, which they offer to the anito, together
with a dish of rice and a dish of tapuy; as is the custom after the
prayers are said, these two old men, together with others, examine the
gall. If it is large and puffed up, the sickness, if any, will be cured
within a few days, but if the gall is small and bad they kill another
hog; and if this gall is still bad they continue to kill hogs until they
find one that has the right kind of a gall, but if the man killed the
last hog that he can buy or can get, and the gall continues to be bad,
then they give up hope and the sick person's life is in danger.
3. Canao called bayas. This canao is a feast of rejoicing in which
the Igorot shows his affection and good will toward his neighbors,
town mates, and other friends.
The ceremonies made in this canao are the killing of 2, 3, 5, 7, or 12
hogs; in addition to this, horses, cattle, carabaos, goats, sheep [sic],
chickens, and other animals that the person giving the canao wishes to kill.
In this canao there is always more meat than can be eaten by the
visitors to the canao; the rest of the meat that is left from one day's
canao is cut into small pieces corresponding in number to the neighboring
houses, relatives, and friends who are living in other places, [and] this
meat is then distributed among them. This canao can also be made in
honor of one who is dead, but without any kind of music; but if it is
only a feast ganzas " are used.
The one giving this canao must stay in his house for ten days without
coming out and without speaking to anyone except his housemates, nor
must anyone go into his house or even into his yard during those ten days.
" Ganzas, the brass gongs used throughout the Orient, and probably
of Chinese origin.
490 ^^^ Philippine Journal of SciP7ice i9i4
4. Canao called tongcala. This caiiao is to the anito to whom offerings
or promises have been made by a person while sick [who] says this,
for instance, "I shall offer up a hog*, together with music, according
to the custom, if my sickness be cured/'
The ceremonies observed in this canao are the killing of a hog; an
old man, accompanied by ganzas, takes the head of the hog, together
with the liver and a little of the meat (muscle), and puts them on the
end of a dry piece of wood covered with the tops of sugar cane or with
the whole plant; after holding this meat up on the end of the piece of
wood, it is taken off and cooked and eaten by the people; the person
giving this caiiao will have to stay in his house for ten days.
5. Canao called baquid. This canao is celebrated in case the water
used for irrigating the rice fields sinks into the ground and in that way
passes the rice fields that are to be irrigated.
The ceremonies for this and for the increase of the water are as
follows: An old man goes with the owner of the field to the place, taking
with them a small pig, a chicken, and a basket, which are needed when
they eat; upon arriving at the place they kill the pig and the chicken
and offer them up to the anito of the fields; after the ceremony is over
they cook and eat them; the person who makes this caiiao must stay
in his house for one day.
6. Canao called pacde. This is a caiiao by all the people of one village
or barrio to the anito so that he may give them a good crop of rice and
other crops and make the grain fill out good.
The ceremonies gone through in this caiiao are the killing of a hog
in the following manner: The old men bring with them a hog covered
with a shield and spear, and taking it near the edge of the barrio
there they kill (burn) the hog and cut it into pieces for an offering
to the anito; they look at the liver, and if it is good they do not kill
another hog,, but if it is bad they kill hog after hog until they find
one with a good liver.
The meat of the killed hog is not eaten by the old men who only
eat the liver; the meat is cut into as many pieces as there are houses
in the barrio that is giving this caiiao; the meat of every hog that is
killed in this caiiao, is divided to correspond to the number of the houses.
Each piece of meat is strung on a split piece of bamboo and so distributed
among the houses.
The value of all the hogs killed is figured up and the amount is
divided by the number of houses; when it is determined what the
share of each will be, they pay it to the headman or chief of the caiiao,
and he pays the owners of the hogs that were killed.
This caiiao is celebrated twice a year, before the planting and harvest-
ing of the rice. During this canao, every one not living or belonging
to that barrio is driven away, and nobody is allowed to enter the barrio,
except the officials who pass through or whose duty it is to come to the
township, who may be allowed to enter.
Across all paths and trails leading into the town or barrio that is
celebrating this caiiao a design of green leaves is made into an arch,
which is the sign that no one may enter.
None of the people of the barrio in which this caiiao is held are
allowed to go to another barrio or other place while this caiiao is going
on, and every one must take great care of his animals, chickens, etc..
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 491
for it is a bad omen should a hawk or other bird take away the little
chickens.
7. Caiiao called pasang. This cafiao is celebrated by married people
who have lived together for a certain length of time, but who have
neither sons nor daughters, in order that they may have children.
The ceremony in this canao is the killing of a hog to be offered up
in the yard of the married couple, together with the things needed in
the house, such as a turban of beads, camisa, belt, etc., all things used
by the man as well as by the woman, and some money in addition to
the above things. All these things are put together into a big wide
flat basket; the woman takes the basket on her head and starts to
dance and the man dances around her for about an hour, accompanied
by the beating of a ganza or salibao (drum). The married couple must
not do any work for two days.
8. Caiiao called palis. This caiiao is for the protection against poisoners
and that the poison used by them may become harmless.
This caiiao is principally performed when a person is sick; it is for
the purpose of finding out the real cause or reason for the person's
sickness; but, if it is known that the person was poisoned, then this
caiiao is for his cure (medicine) ; the ceremony in this caiiao is the
killing of a dog, a cat, a hen, a turkey, a duck, or a goose. If every
one of these animals has a bad liver, the person will die, but should
they have good livers then the person will be cured and will become well.
9. The ^ caiiao that can be performed daily is the killing of a hen
or other chicken; the Igorot can make this caiiao as an offering or
prayer to the anito when anyone is sick; if he kills a chicken the anito
will cure his sickness, providing that the chicken has a good liver.
If anyone intending to go on a trip caiiaos [that is, makes a caiiao
with] a young chicken or a hen having a good liver, he will have a
good trip; if he is accused of anything or some one makes a complaint
against him, he kills a chicken; if he finds the liver good, he will win;
but if bad then he will surely lose; the meat of these chickens is eaten.
The person making this kind of a caiiao is forbidden to go to the
country or other place to work for one day and during that day he is
also prohibited from speaking to anybody except to members of his own
household and no one is allowed to enter his house during that day.
The real sign of the termination of any one of these nine caiiaos is
that on the morning of the third, fifth, or tenth day, as the case may
be, the person giving the caiiao goes to a brook or river, a little way
from his house to bathe; he takes with him his spear and sticks a
long chicken feather in his hair. In this manner he informs the people
that the caiiao is over.
On the last day of the caiiao and when he goes to the river to
bathe, he does not speak to anyone nor does he look behind nor beside
him; should anyone speak to him, he will only shake his head.
Everybody knows just what kind of a caiiao anyone is performing,
because a certain kind of a bunch of green leaves is put up at the gate
in front or at the side of the house.
During the celebration of any one of these nine caiiaos, no one taking
part in them can do any kind of work in the country or other places,
[but] in their own houses they are allowed to do certain kinds of
work. The people are prohibited from working or from leaving their
492 The Philippine Journal of Science iQi-i
house when they celebrate any kind of a canao, especially during the
canaos called "pacde" and "palis/* because if the people living in the
barrio where the canao pacde is being held go to the country or other
places to work, they will have a bad harvest of their crops during one
year. If during the canao palis the people go to work in their fields
they will have no water for their fields for one year; and if they work
on their lapog (caingan) " it will dry up as there will be no moisture.
BAUCO '^
Bauco township has 4 barrios; namely, Guinzadan, Vila,
Ibanao, and Bauco. Guinzadan, one of the oldest places in the
province according to the manuscript, was formerly called Lili-
teg, "but when a big flood came and destroyed the town and
cut it in two by a river they changed Liliteg into Guinzadan
which means, damaged by water." The Spaniards established
a government in this barrio after several campaigns waged
against the Igorots of the district. The names of many officials
are given. The barrio of Vila was so called ''after a certain
kind of soil that can be made into pots and pans.'' The story
of its settlement is as follows:
One time there was a famine in Qiapan and the married couple,
Tayapan and Guislan, ran away to Guibasan Mountain and there they
built themselves a hut according to the Igorot ways; a short time after
Taycapan and Yang-gacao followed them to that place, and they did
not go back to Quiapan any more, and so became the forefathers of the
people of that place.
In due time a Spanish government was established in Vila,
and after that "the Katipunan controlled this town for a short
time" and until the coming of the Americans. The barrio of
" The caingin method of farming consists in a progressive deforestation,
that is, small areas of, say, 1 to 5 hectares are felled and burned, then
planted to rice, camotes, maize, yams, beans, etc.; by the end of the second
season, however, so much cogon and other grasses and weeds have
become established in the comparatively rich new forest soil that their
influence upon any successive crop would be very great; usually, therefore,
only 2 crops or perhaps in some localities 3, are grown in each cleared
space; cogon then takes possession of the clearing and this, being burned
every dry season, soon reduces the humus content in the otherwise rich
soil (the mineral salts in the ashes readily leaching out in the rainy
season). This is a most pernicious and reprehensible practice considering
the waste of good land, first, through allowing cogon to enter the clearing,
and secondly, through burning the cogon every dry season, thereby
killing all forest seedlings and rapidly exhausting the humus. The method
has been extensively used in the mountain regions. — Barrett.
"Bauco is located 18 kilometers east of Cervantes. Its inhabitants
are industrious and possess many rice fields and at one time raised many
cattle. See Perez, Igorrotes, 191-193.
IX, D, 6 Robertso7i: The Igorots of Lepanto 493
Ibanao received its name * 'because there was a lake in the middle
of it." The story of its foundation is as follows :
Smallpox broke out in Quiapan, Bauco, and all people attacked by
this disease died. Ando and Doma, a married couple, ran away to
Patog-6 Mountain, and there they built a small hut; later Tanca and
Andeo went after them to the same mountain and lived with Ando
and Doma; as long as they lived there they never returned to Quiapan,
the place where they came from, and they were the forefathers of the
people.
''After the administration of the Spanish government, the
Katipunan ruled these places for a short time,'' but the latter
was defeated by the Americans.
BARRIO OF BAUCO
The ancient story of Padoca and Adian**" who lived in Tabeo Mountain.
The man was Padoca and the woman was Adian, their first child was a
boy named Opig, the second was a girl named Daoquen; when the children
grew up and there was no one to marry, they married each other;
when this family increased in number, they looked for a spring and
a good place where they could till the ground; they found the mountain
called Quiapan and settled there, and when the people grew more
in number, they named the place Bauco. There also came people from
other places. Not long after this Comandante Casanuba," who lived
in Cayan, arrived there; he came with many guardia civil and many
people of Cayan, and fought against the people of Bauco. After the
fight they received a cane of authority from the rulers."'
The Spanish, Katipunan, and the Americans in succession
governed the place. Various customs are described as follows:
MARRYING CHILDREN
Boys and girls that are old enough to marry don't sleep in their
homes with their parents; the young women go every night to the
house designated for them to sleep in, and the young men go to sleep
in the atato (tribunal)."
•''The fragment of an origin myth.
"Casanova. Probably before 1852, as the names of the comandantes
politico militar, up to 1890, do not show this name.
"A tasselled cane given to the chief official of a pueblo in Spanish
times as a badge of authority.
" See footnote 54. See also Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto, 27.
Among the Bontocs, the girls sleep in a communal house called oldg from
the time that they are about two years old until they marry. The
Igorots of Bauco may have borrowed this custom from the Bontocs.
Among the Bontocs ato is used to designate one of the political units
of the township. The at-ato of the town of Bauco evidently combines
the functions both of the Bontoc pabufunan and fawi. See Jenks, Pub,
P. I. Ethnol. Surv, (1905), 1, 49-55.
494 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
At night time, young men go to the house where the young women
are sleeping; if a young man that has been sleeping for some time in
the at-ato wants to get married he tells it to the young woman whom
he likes; the young woman, if she likes the young man, tells him to
go to find firewood which will be taken to the house of the woman^s
father; the young woman goes to the house of the young man*s father
and brings him camote or rice as a sign to the parents that their son
and daughter want to get married. After these ceremonies the parents
of the young man and woman make an agreement that the young man
shall go to the house of the woman's father and perform a caiiao with
a chicken. Three days after the performance of this canao, they perform
another canao with a suckling pig. When they have been living together
for one year, they get 3 or 4 hogs and with these hogs they again
kill a suckling pig which shows that that day the last canao has been
performed.
THE IGOROT CUSTOMS
The ancient people used the bark of trees for G strings and their
hats were made of fine splints of bamboo; the women made their tapis
out of the fibers procured from certain kinds of trees.
When a man has a complaint to make he gathers all the old men
together and tells them his complaint. The old men, after they have
heard the complaint of the plaintiff, call the defendant or accused and
let them speak face to face and listen to the matter. After the old
men have heard the cause of the dispute of the two fellows and they
have no witnesses, they let them prick each one's head with a needle;
the one whose head bleeds will lose and he whose head does not bleed
will win; or they let them throw a stone at each other and the one
who hits the backbone is the winner; if the old men don't want to try the
case in [one of] these manners, they get 2 chickens from one hen and
give one to the plaintiff and the other to the defendant; each one then
burns his chicken and cuts it in two before the old men. The owner
of the chicken whose gall is the larger loses and the one whose chicken
has the small gall wins.^^
At the beginning of planting rice in the seed beds, all the people
perform a canao with a hen or rooster; before the transplanting of the
rice plants in the field, they perform another canao with a chicken,
and after the performance of this canao they must transplant all their
rice plants to their rice fields. After the transplanting, they again
celebrate a canao with a chicken, which shows that they have finished
rice planting.
Before the beginning of the rice harvest every one is prohibited from
leaving his town or his house, because all the people must perform a
canao within ten days. The ceremony they make in this canao is the
" Cf . trial by ordeal among Filipino peoples as related by various
authors in Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 16, 129 (Morga, Sucesos, 1609) ;
40, 85, 86 (Colin, Labor evangelica, 1663) ; 40, 152-154 (Combes, Historia,
1667); 40, 343, 357 (San Antonio, Chronicas, 1738-44); 43, 109 (Ortiz,
Practice del ministerio, ca., 1742) ; 43, 123 (Martinez de Zuiiiga, Historia,
1804). See also, Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto, 20; and Jenks,
Pub. P. I. Ethnol Surv. (1905), 1, 168-171.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 495
killing of a hog or a chicken; ten days after this canao an old man of
the township goes and kills a hog or a suckling pig near the foot of a
large tree, and after this they may harvest the rice; after harvesting
all their rice the people perform a canao as a sign that they have
finished the harvest. The ceremony they make in this canao is the
killing of a chicken.
After the planting of camotes, the men with spears and shields go to
the mountain to pray to the souls of the dead persons and when they
have returned home they all go to the tribunal or abong; the head or
chief of the tribunal takes a cup of water and a spear and puts them
in front of the tribunal and prays.
The next morning he gets a dog or a chicken which they kill and cook
and place in a dish and set it in a certain place; this is the food for
the dead that they called to when they went to the mountain.
When a certain kind of caiiao is being performed, all the roads or
streets or paths leading into the township are closed in order that the
people from other towns may not come into their town.
The man who begins to build a house and sees a mouse does not
continue it, for he thinks that it is very bad luck. After the materials
for a house are collected and the house is built, if the owner of the
house sees a snake or a mouse before he has occupied the house, he
removes his house to another place. After the erection of the house
when it is removed, if the owner does not see a dog, a crow, or a snake,
he performs a canao with a chicken; three days after this caiiao, he
again performs a canao by killing a suckling pig; after all these things
are done, if the owner does not dream any superstitious beliefs regarding
his house, he moves into it and does not leave it for three days; he again
performs a canao with the ceremony of killing a chicken; but when he
dreams something bad he will leave the house and find another place
where he may build his house.
Igorot names for the months of the year.
Libtong, January. Hoa-6, July.
Atong, February. Leppas, August.
Panlitonan, March. Tioay, September.
Becas, April. Tiguey, October.
Deam, May. Quilingy November.
Adug, June. Esec, December.
Each month of the year is named or called by the Igorots according to
the climate, weather, or season of that month, also by the birds and the
things they did during that time.''"''
" This is a very common practice in all parts of the world. A manu-
script history of the Visayas in the possession of the Philippine Library
gives such a calendar that purports to have been handed down from as early
as 1543. Mr. H. Otley Beyer, of the Bureau of Science, and Mr. Luther
Parker, of the Bureau of Education in Manila, have both gathered impor-
tant data of early calendar systems in the Orient, which it is hoped will
soon be published. Quirante says (Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 20,
274) that the Igorots do not "know what day, month, or year, or the
increase and decline of the moon, signify. They govern themselves by one
496 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
[Continuation of footnote numbered 65.]
Star that rises in the west, which they call gaganayan while they call the
natives of the neighborhood by the same name. On seeing that star they
attend to the planting of their waste and wretched fields in order to sow
them with yams and camoteSy which form their usual and natural food."
Cf. also, Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 5, 165 (Loarca, Relation, ca.
1580); 7, 189, 190 (Plasencia, Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589). Mr. Otto
Scheerer, of the Uuiversity of the Philippines, in a letter to me very
appropriately warns against considering the native words of the calendar
of the above text as the exact equivalents of the months of our calendar.
They do not indicate divisions of thirty or thirty-one days. Mr. Scheerer
says:
** Their names indicate the beginning, lapse, or end of rural occupation
or natural phenomena, which used to take place at more or less the same
time indicated by our moons, but are far from being so sharply defined
and are really more in the nature of 'seasons,' such as our 'harvest,' 'fall,'
etc. Banco, being a town in Lepanto, the words [of the calendar in the text]
should be, so far as I know, Tinguian, a dialect of which I possess very
scant information and other people, too, I believe. We possess, in the
matter of linguistic data concerning these Islands, such a mass of confused
and unreliable information that I should hate to see it added to in the
more enlightened era of investigation by Americans. I notice that these
names must have been taken down by some Filipino from the lowlands,
since they show the characteristic Spanish orthography current among the
Christian population of the Islands. This spelling is, however, also found
adopted by one or the other literate Igorot. All I can do is to compare
them with identical or similar words in other known dialects from northern
Luzon, without, however, vouchsafing, in so doing, that there exists an
actual identity of meaning.
Lib long. This word occurs in the same form in Ilocano, where it means
lake or ditch of stagnant water.
Atong» In Isinai the word atung means heat, warmth, sickness. In Ilocano
atang designates a superstition consisting in placing the first pickings
of some fruit, a plate of meat, or of any other food, in the corners of
the house, in the garden, or field, or somewhere in the mountain, in
order to appease some malign spirit. In Ibanag atang means any
kind of herb used as a vegetable. The change from *o' in atong to 'a' in
atang might be nothing else than a different pronunciation of a certain
indistinct primitive sound well known to linguists as the 'pepet vowel.'
Panlitonan, This word is unknown to me. In structure it is characterized
by prefix pan and sufRx an, which often help to form words indicating
either the place or the time where or when the action indicated by the
stem is executed, so that panlitonan may mean the time when that is
done which is expressed by liton.
Becas, In Inibaloi, bekds means hulled rice, which in Ilocano is bagds, in
Tagalog big as. Observe here again the indistinct (pepet) vowel-
changing from V to 'a' and *i.'
Beam, This is an unknown word. It might go back to a form dalam,
dayam, dagam.
Adug, In Ilocano and Pampanga (and old Tagalog?) alog means inundated,
low-lying land (whence, tagalog, dweller on such lands) . The changes
from 'd' to '1' and from *u' to 'o' are very common.
^^' ^' ^ Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 497
[Continuation of footnote numbered 65.]
Hoa-6. This is an unknown word. I refrain from speculation on a pos-
sible identity of this word with similar words in other dialects.
Leppas, In Ilocano, leppas means the time when something (a work, the
year, the day, etc.) finishes or is finished. In Bon toe, lipash is a
season beginning about July 1; lipash expresses the idea of finishing
or accomplishing.
Tioay. This is an unknown word.
Tiguey, In Inibaloi, tige is the word for maize. In Ilocano, tigi is the
name of a plant whose tubers are fed to pigs.
Quiling. In Ilocano, hiring designates the time when the rains cease. The
change from 'V to 'r' offers no difficulty. I have no doubt that we have
here the same word.
E-sec. In Ilocano, isek is a kind of early rice. In Inibaloi, asak gives the
idea of planting; the vowels are indistinct. In Bon toe, iseg^ ishek,
issek express the idea of sowing, planting.
*'If we remember that Igorot calendars divide the year generally into
sections that are named from the characteristic field work undertaken at
the various periods, or from plants flowering, or birds appearing, at such
times, we may safely set down, I believe, the present calendar as coming
fully within this general description."
See also, Jenks, Pub. P. /. Ethnol Surv. (1905), 1, 219, 220.
Some additional information has been received through Mr. D. M.
Thomas, division superintendent of Mountain Province. This was obtained
through the interest of Mr. C. H. Magee, assistant director of Education.
Mr. Thomas cites as his authority "Rev. M. Vanoverbergh, the Belgian
missionary at Bauco, who is compiling a vocabulary of the local dialect
and his accurracy cannot be questioned as in all his work he is exceedingly
methodical and accurate." According to the above authority, the names
of 11 periods of time used in Bauco, reckoned roughly from new moon to
new moon, are as follows, beginning near the first of the Gregorian year:
Luya, Wdo, The name of a red hairy caterpillar.
Lede'w. Panabd.
Upoc, Tiway, The name of a sparrow; going away.
Bacdkew, Sorghum. Adug.
Kitkiti. Kiling. Furious fighting.
Kidng.
The words as given in the document belong to the Lepanto-Igorot dialect
as spoken in Bauco, with the exception of libtong. . The root of panlitonan
is a Bauco form, although the word itself is not used by the Igorots of the
township of Bauco. Libtong is an Ilocano word meaning a pond, marsh,
or swampy place. The meaning of the words of the document that can be
identified by Father Vanoverbergh are as follows:
Atong. Heat.
Panlitonan, This is a Cayan word, meaning the time when the palay heads.
Litun means pregnancy, but the term is applied, even in Bauco, to
palay; with the prefix pan and the suffix an it is used only in Cayan.
Beam, Rainy season.
Wao. Thus accented, it means eight.
Lepas. A caiiao celebrated after the harvest.
Tegey. Coarse cloth.
Esec. Seed; is-ec, to sow.
130429 3
498 ^^^<^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
BESAO '^
The material for this township furnishes some very interesting
and important data. The township contains 8 barrios; namely,
Besao, Payeo, Ambaguio, Padangaan, Abeo, Ayubo, Banguitan,
and Agaua. The township, which was organized in 1904, con-
tains a population of 3,502, all Igorot and pagan,' except the
family of the secretary-treasurer, which is Christian. A list of
officials since 1904 is given.
HISTORY OF THE BARRIO OF BESAO
We, the old men of this barrio, caused it to be written, stating the facts
as they have been handed down to us from our forefathers, who were the
original people of our barrio/'
Ganggang-a and his wife Casindo of Lamaoan came to make their home
in a place, now known as Besao, owing to the fact that their means of
making a living had become exhausted in Lamaoan. Ganggang-a said to
his wife, "We would better leave our home and find another place where
we can make our living." Ganggang-a had a sister by the name of Abay;
when Ganggang-a and his wife decided to move, Abay, his sister, did not
want to accompany them, but decided to go down to a town called Busalan,
a barrio of Candon, in the Province of Locus [that is, Ilocos] Sur, where she
eventually married. Ganggang-a and his wife went in the opposite direc-
tion looking for a good place where they could settle; on their way they
stopped at a place now called Besao to rest for a couple of days, during
which time Ganggang-a looked airound for a place to make their home.
He observed that the land around there was very fertile, so they decided
to remain there. During the long time that they had to wait before their
camote patches began to produce, they lived on nothing but vines and wild
gabe.*' During the course of many years they had 4 children, 2 girls,
named Lagmaya and Golla, and 2 boys whom they named Madalang and
Laongan. After these children became men and women their father wanted
them to get married, but there were no other men or women in the place
now called Besao whom they could marry, so they intermarried. Mada-
lang married his sister Lagmaya and Laongan married his sister Golla;
Madalang had 6 children by Lagmaya, 4 boys and 2 girls, and Laongan had
5 children by Golla, 2 boys and 3 girls. When Madalang and his brother
Laongan's children became old enough to marry, they intermarried with
their sisters, with the exception of one, the youngest son of Madalang,
because there was no girl left for him to marry. Therefore, Ganggang-a
•• For a description and partial history of Besao, see Perez, Igorrotes,
171-177.
•^ What follows is a confused account of a primitive origin myth. The
marrying of brother and sister is very common in these stories. Of. Blair
and Robertson, ut supra, 5, 121-127 (Loarca, Relation, ca. 1580), in which
the brother and sister consult the tunnies of the sea, the doves of the air,
and the earthquake, successively, in order to calm the qualms of the woman.
" Gabe, or taro, Colocasia esculentum (L.) Schott, a plant (both root
and leaves) used extensively in the mountain districts. See Census of the
Philippine Islands (1905), 4, 121; see also Merrill, E. D., A flora of Manila.
Manila (1912), 134.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 499
said to the brothers of his youngest grandson that they must take their
youngest brother to Loma-oan to find him a wife; so they went to Loma-oan
and stayed there until their brother was married. Then they returned
home bringing with them Langaya, the wife of their younger brother. Up
to this time the people in the place now called Besao had increased to 18
persons, or 9 families. These were the forefathers of the people now living
in Besao, with the exception of a few that came later from other towns.
When the population of the place now called Besao reached the number
of 300, including men, women, and children, they considered themselves
strong enough to go down to the coast to buy s^lt, without being molested.
So Maxsil headed a crowd of 50 persons and started for the coast; when
they came to the sitio of Locbuban in the confines of Santa Lucia, Ilocos
Sur, they met a man and his son. When the man saw the Igorots with
their spears and shields he ran away, leaving his son there, a boy about
9 years old; the Igorots captured the boy; some of them wanted to cut his
head off, but Maxsil said, "Let him live, because I want him for my son
(Maxsil being sterile), for this is the place where Abay, the sister of our
grandfather, made her home and married, and who knows that this boy is
not related to us." They discontinued their journey to the coast and
returned home taking the boy, that had been captured, with them; the
boy said that his father's name was Aquino and that his name was Quino.
Maxsil brought Quiiio up in the place now called Besao; the boy Quino
acquired the customs of the Igorots and became a very industrious man.
Maxsil married Quiiio to one of his nieces by the name of Dalinsa, and
they raised a family of 7 children, 3 boys and 4 girls. By this time Quino
became homesick; he thought of his father and mother, and he asked the
old men of the community if they would not allow him to go down to the
coast to visit his parents. They agreed, and some of the old men accom-
panied him; they took with them 70 men, armed with spears and shields
in order that they might protect themselves against the people that might
want to attack them. When they arrived near the town of Santa Lucia
they halted and Quifio took with him 8 men as guards to go with him to
his father's house. When they arrived at his father's house the door was
closed, as it was night already. Quino called out, and his father asked,
"Who is there?" Quino answered, "I am Quino, your son!" His father
and mother became very angry when they heard this reply, as they thought
it certain that their son, Quino, had been captured by tattooed Igorots.
The old woman got a torch and the old man armed himself with a club, as
he wanted to punish the man outside who claimed to be his son. As soon
as they opened the door, they recognized their son; they were convinced
that he was the son they had lost years ago, though he was naked and had
long hair like a woman, as was the fashion of the Igorots in those days.
The old man cried out, "Here is my son that was taken away by BusoSy*^^
''See Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 845 and 850], who says that
the Igorots of the northeastern mountains of Benguet, the Kayapa district,
are called Busaos. This word means enemies, and is not a tribal designa-
tion. Scheerer [Pub. P. L Ethnol Surv. (1905), 2, pt. 2, 99] says, "The
term busol is not so much a tribal name as a hateful designation of the
head-hunting, cattle-thieving, and kidnaping Igorot living around and
south of the mountain Data in what is sometimes called the Kabusolan
or territory of the Busol." See also, Perez, Igorrotes.
500 The Philippine Journal of Science isu
and he has returned to me!*' When their neighbors heard this they all
gathered around the place and all were very glad. When all the relatives
had gathered together, Quiiio gave them a complete narrative of his life
among the Igorots and he also told them that he was married to an Igorot
woman. His relatives were very glad to see Quino again, and they ex-
tended to him and his companions a kind welcome and hospitality. While
they were in Santa Lucia, an order from the civil governor of the prov-
ince of Ilocos Sur was received there, stating that every town must send
to Vigan, the capital of said province and the official residence of the civil
governor, their representative, to receive the cane of office as capitan of
their town. Quiiio's parents and relatives advised him and his companions
to go with them to Vigan; they consented to go, and when they arrived at
Vigan they presented themselves to the civil governor there and requested
that their rancheria might be organized into some kind of a government
and that one of their men might be given authority to look after the
community, in order that the name of Buso, by which name the people on
the coast call the Igorots, might be changed. The civil governor appointed
Quino as maestre de campo, and gave him the cane of authority, a cane
mounted with a rooster-shaped gold knob. The rancheria was then formed
into a town and was named Besao. Formerly the people called this country
the Buso's territory; the word Besao was derived from the word Buso.
After Quino had received the cane of command, they all started for home,
by way of Candon. When they arrived at Candon they inquired for the
relatives of Abay; they found them, and it resulted that Quino was de-
scended from Abay and, therefore, was related to the Igorots that captured
and cared for him. As a token of relationship, the relations and descend-
ants of Abay granted to the Besao people half of the plain that lies between
Santa Lucia and Candon, for them to make their homes there in case they
wanted to remain there. (A long time ago, it was said that the plain east
of Candon belonged to the Besao people.) When the necessary papers were
made out for the granting of this plain to them, they returned to their
town, Besao. At that time the civil governor had imposed on the people
of Besao a yearly tax; to wit, 2 pounds of beeswax and a jar for the whole
town. Any time that they took their taxes to Vigan they always returned
by way of Candon; there they stopped and collected salt and cotton in
payment for the rent of the land granted them by the descendants and
relatives of Abay, who were occupying it at the time. After many years
had passed, during which time the Besao people had always collected the
rent for this land, the people of Candon send word to our old men to come
to Candon and bring with them the papers regarding the land in order
that they might renew it. Sablay and Mangudang took the papers down
to Candon and, upon their arrival there, Sr. Alberto Guirnalda and Alferez
Leon's father took the papers from them; they made out new papers and
copies of them were given them. They returned home without having
anyone look at them to see whether they were right or not; when they
returned to Besao they carefully put them away; after a good many years
they showed those papers to a sergeant of infantry, stationed at Sagada,
a close-by town; great was their surprise when they heard the contents
of the paper read to them, as follows: "The Besao people are not in any
way to be restrained to pass back and forth to Candon and they are free
to make their homes in any place they wish." This was entirely different
from what they had imagined.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 501
At the nomination of another maestre de campo, to relieve the outgoing
one whose term had expired, the old men went again to Vigan by way of
Candon. They stopped there for a while to talk over the matter of the
land, but the people of Candon denied everything, and when our people
asked them to return to them the old papers about the land they informed
them that they were burned up. That ended the collection of rentals for
this land, and from that time on they had to p^y for all the salt and cotton
that they got from there. They proceeded on their journey to Vigan, and
when they arrived there they called on the civil governor and requested
him that he change the title of their official from maestre de campo to
that of gobernadorcillo. The civil governor granted them their request,
and Mangudang was appointed with that title and became the first gober-
nadorcillo of Besao, and after Mangudang had received the cane of office
they all returned to their homes. About that time Sr. Antonio,^* a Spaniard,
arrived at Cayan as comandante politico militar for the province of Le-
panto; not very long after that a man from Vila, a barrio of the rancheria
of Banco, made a trip to Besao, and upon his return he stole a carabao,
but the people saw him and pursued him; they overtook him at a place
called Anaman in the confines of Besao, and there they killed him. When
the Vila people heard that one of their men had been killed by the Besao
people, they made a complaint to Sr. Antonio, the comandante politico
militar. Sr. Antonio sent a force of soldiers against Besao, headed by a
captain of infantry. The people of Besao heard of this expedition and
the old men gathered together and with the gobernadorcillo went to meet
them. They displayed a white flag (a piece of white cloth) ; they took
with them also a drum, and the gobernadorcillo carried his cane; when the
captain of infantry saw all these things, he knew that the people of Besao
were not alzados (outlaws). However, he arrested all the old men, together
with the gobernadorcillo, and took them to Cayan, the official station of
the comandante politico militar. Upon their arrival there, a great many
people from different towns had gathered there, to witness the executions,
for they believed that the Besao people were going to be shot. The Besao
people were taken to the upper story of the comandancia, to the office of
the comandante politico militar, and after he had heard their declarations
he decided that they were peaceful people and gave them G strings, made
of condimariy^ also some handkerchiefs; but, in the place of Mangudang,
he appointed Gaoli gobernadorcillo for the three towns of Besao, Payeo, and
Banguitan, and gave him the official cane; he also appointed other subor-
dinate officials; such as teniente mayor and cabezas de barangay. The
people from the other towns, who had come there to witness the executions,
were greatly surprised to see that instead of these people being executed
they had been given clothes and had been honored with official positions
besides.
^° Probably Antonio Perea, the first comandante politico militar of Le-
panto, who held office during the years 1852-56. See Perez, Igorrotes, 47
and Pub, P, I. Ethnol Surv. (1904), 3, 362.
"Condiman (Ilocano for red) is a red cloth used extensively by the
Ilocano women for making the small upper covering worn by them, as well
as for tablecloths, towels, and various other purposes, such as the decora-
tion of buildings on certain holidays. It is also traded by the enterprising
Ilocanos with the mountain peoples.
502 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
A list of the officials of Besao, covering the period of eighty-
eight years follows. The* account bears the name of the presi-
dente and secretary and the names and marks of the old men
consulted.
ORIGIN AND LIFE OF THE FIRST MAN AND WOMAN THAT SETTLED IN THE BARRIO
OF PAYED, BESAO, LEPANTO, MOUNTAIN PROVINCE
Angpeo and Dam-may, his wife, both of the rancheria of Tubo, Abra,
came to make their home in Banay, where they lived all alone. A girl
was born to them, and they named her Siding. They lived on nothing
hut wild gabe, bananas, and camote-moroy- as they had no rice nor anything
else. When Siding grew up to be a woman, a young man from the ranch-
eria of Deydey, subprovince of Bontoc, came to their place and married
her. After being married many years, 3 children were born to them, 2
boys and a girl; they named the boys Baccangen and Daguillo and the
girl, Biana. When these children became men and women, a young man
from Tubo, whose name was Bulalacao, and who was somewhat related
to Angpeo, the original settler, came there, and after staying there for
some time with them married Biana. He told his father-in-law that he
would go and bring his sisters over from Tubo and they could marry his
two sons; he went after them, and when they arrived (their names were
Un-nanay and Licona) Baccangen married Un-nanay and Daguillo married
Licona. Bulalacao had 7 children with Biana, 4 boys and 3 girls; 6 chil-
dren were born to Baccangen and Un-nanay, 3 boys and 3 girls; 7 children
were born to Daguillo and Licona, 3 boys and 4 girls. The children of
Bulalacao, Baccangen, and Daguillo, when they became old enough to
marry, married among themselves. By that time they had increased to
30 persons ; then people from other places began to arrive and settle among
them. Among the new settlers there was a woman named Caducali; nobody
knew where she came from. She brought with her a stalk of rice; she
gave this stalk of rice to Cote, the headman of this little community, and
said to him, "This is the best food for people, take it and plant it in a
seed bed, and when the stalks have grown big enough transplant them
into swampy ground." She also said, "You had better move into another
place and make the place where you are living into rice land." Therefore,
they moved to the uplands and named it Payeo and turned the land from
which they moved into payeos (rice paddies). From that time on rice was
raised to a great extent." The population had also considerably increased,
but owing to so many people coming from other towns it is impossible for
us to learn the origin of all of them.
THE BEGINNING OF ENMITY BETWEEN IGOROTS AND CHRISTIANS
Langlangquioan, Oaquing, Pasicat, Lobdoy, and Bocasi, of the towns of
Besao and Payeo, went down to the coast to find some work in the town
of Santa Maria, Ilocos Sur. At the east side of this town they met some
hunters from Santa Maria, who were looking for a dog that had strayed
" The camote moro a yellow-fleshed, red-skinned, sweet potato, grown
more or less commonly throughout the Archipelago. — Barrett.
" The Ifugao myth of the origin of the lowland or irrigated rice is very
similar to this. — Beyer.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 503
from them. When they saw the Igorots they thought that the Igorots had
stolen their dog, as it was known that Igorots eat dogs; the Christians
persuaded the Igorots to follow them, telling the Igorots that one of them
had some work for them to do; they went with the Christians, who had
them that night to sleep inside of a strong bamboo fence; when they were
sound asleep, the Christians killed every one of them, with the exception
of Bocasi, who succeeded in escaping. The Christians buried the bodies of
their victims in Santa Lucia.'* Upon Bocasi's return home, he told his
townspeople what had happened to them. Thereupon the people of Besao
and Payeo planned a head-hunting trip to Santa Maria; they started for
that place, and when they reached the outskirts of the town they saw a
young man carrying ears of corn on his head. They killed him and cut
off his head, arms, and legs and then returned home again, full of joy that
they had avenged themselves for the cruelty of the Christians. From that
time on, the Besao and Payeo people stopped going to Santa Maria until
the time when Quino went to Vigan and was appointed maestre de campo;
then the Igorots and the Santa Maria people made peace, with the friendly
help of the people from Santa Lucia.
MURDER OF A YOUNG BOY
Pasingan and one of his sons, a boy about 7 years old, named Bulay-oc,
went to Suagayan River, now in the confines of Angaqui, to fish. While
fishing, instantly and without notice, they found themselves surrounded
by Busos from Cagubatan.'* Pasingan's intentions were to make a stand
against the Busos and defend his son, but he saw that it was useless,
because he was greatly outnumbered, and that if he did not run away
he also would be beheaded. The Busos cut off the boy's head, arms,
and legs, and left the body there; when the Busos had gone, Pasingan
returned and took the body of his son to Payeo. After three months,
the whole town of Payeo went on a head-hunting expedition to Cagubatan;
on their way they encountered the Cagubatan Busos, who were also on
a head-hunting expedition; fighting began between the two parties, which
resulted in a defeat for the Payeo people, 2 of their men being killed,
Matel-lo and Yotayot, and their heads, arms, and legs being cut off.
When the Cagubatan Busos had gone, the Payeo people went back to
the place for the bodies of their companions, which they took back with
them to their town, after which they had a mourning canao that lasted
about three months. After the termination of this canao, they selected
some of their men to go to Cagubatan to recover, through purchase or
exchange of gold, putic (jars), and brass gongs, the heads, arms, and
legs of the men that had been killed. They started out, and upon reach-
ing Sumadel they found a leg of one of their people; they held a little
'* For relations between the Igorots and other Philippine peoples, see
Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 20, 258, 275, 276; 21, 149; 23, 280; 43,
77; and 48, 82, 83. For their relations with Spaniards, see 14, 281-326;
17, 306; 19, 161, 255; 20, 262-303, 306; 28, 158, 167, 238; 31, 261, 262;
37, 245-249; 38, 228; 43, 76, 77; 48, 56, 57, 68, 70, 73, 81-90, 128, 131;
50, 170; 51, 49, 56; and 52, 215.
"See Beyer, This Journal, Sec. D (1913), 8, 94, and Lillo de Gracia,
Distrito de Lepanto, 21, for interesting accounts of the customs and
beliefs of this place.
504 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i9h
canao over it and then proceeded on their way. At Masla they found
another leg, also one at Lobong; they found out that the people of Tadian
and Cayan were in possession of the arms. When the Payeo people
saw that all the neighboring towns were their enemies, they turned toward
home, and when they went through Sumadel they redeemed the leg they
found there with a putic worth about 100 pesos; then they went home.
They told the people about the arms and legs and where they were;
the old men then decided to send other men after the heads of their
people that were killed. Banaoi and Dagdagnen were chosen for this
errand; they took with them brass gongs, jars, and gold. When they
reached Cagubatan they informed the people there that they had come
to exchange gold, putic, and brass gongs for the heads taken by them
from their people; the Cagubatan people killed them and then took their
gold, jars, and brass gongs. The Payeo people waited many days for
the return of Banaoi and Dagdagnen, and when they did not return they
sent some of their men to look for them. When these men arrived at
Sumadel, they commenced to kill the people there; when they had taken
four heads they returned to their town, highly satisfied at being avenged;
upon their arrival in their town they held a canao that lasted about
four months. Shortly after this, the Sumadel people also started on
a head-hunting expedition against the people of Payeo and Besao, but
when they were halfway between Sumadel and Besao, a man that was
gathering firewood saw them and ran to inform the Payeo and Besao
people; immediately these two towns started out to meet the Sumadel
expedition, which prevented the Sumadel people from getting into their
towns. At the mountain Batay the two parties met and had a fight;
the Sumadel people were defeated, and one of their warriors was beheaded
by the Payeo and Besao people. When the people of Sumadel and Masla
realized that they had no show against these two towns, Payeo and
Besao, Quabang and his wife Ecyey decided to go to Vigan^* to make
a complaint to Sr. Galbey," the commandant of infantry. Upon arriving
there they presented themselves to the commandant of infantry and said
to him, "We, husband and wife, have come to ask your protection against
the people of Payeo and Besao who are exterminating us, and if you
will go and punish them we will give you a piece of gold, in the shape
and about the size of a dog.'* The comandante of infantry went to
Payeo with 30 soldiers; upon arriving at a place called Sacaan, a sitio
close to Payeo, the old men of Payeo went out to meet them with a
white flag, made out of the bark of a tree, and took with them also
things to eat, among them some chickens. The comandante made friends
with them, and went to Pandangaan and remained there five days in
order to observe the people, and when he was satisfied that the Payeo
and Besao people were not bad people he told Quaban and his wife
that their complaint was false and that they must go and get the
gold, the size of a dog, that they had promised to give him. When
they brought the gold, the comandante was greatly surprised, because
it was not as big as the size of a dog, but it was only as big as a
" The capital of Ilocos Sur Province.
" Possibly the Col. Guillermo Galvey mentioned by Santos, Informe
sobre las minas de cobre de las rancherias de Mancayan, Suyuk, Bumucun
y Agbao. Manila (1862), 18.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 505
finger in the shape of a dog; the comandante insisted that he wanted
the gold they had promised him and that they must find enough to
enable them to make it the size of a puppy. They got together all
the gold that the people of Masla and Sumadel had, and made it in
the shape that the Spaniard told them, but still they had not enough
gold. Then Quabang asked the Payeo people, as a favor to him, to
give him some gold and thereby their tov^ns would make friends and
forgive the wrongs that they had done them. The Payeo people gave
Quabang two pairs of earrings, but still there was not enough; then
Quabang gave to the Spaniard his unmarried sister, by the name of
Dayeman, whom the Spaniard took away with him, and who has never
returned to her home. Before the Spaniard went away, he appointed
Paguien maestro de campo for Payeo and ordered him to Vigan to
receive his instructions from the authorities there. About a year after
they decided to go to Vigan, but they thought that Buluan should go
to Vigan and take the place of Paguien as maestro de campo, because
Paguien was a small man and thin and it would be a disgrace to them,
while Buluang was a big man — fat and big headed — and his eyes were
like the eyes of a carabao. They did so, and when they arrived at
Vigan Buluan appeared there as maestro de campo. The authorities
then told them that if possible they should quit their head-hunting. From
that time on, Buluan was known as maestro de campo. Upon their arrival
home, Buluan made a trip to the neighboring towns and invited them
to make peace with each other; peace was established with all the
towns that he visited. Later on he made another trip to Tanobong,
taking with him Olbanes, Macon, Cangoy, Pacodan, and Logsing, with
the intention of visiting the towns in the eastern country, but on their
way they were met by Busos from Mainit who killed Buluan, the maestro
de campo, Olbanes, Macon, and Cangoy. Pacdogan and Logsing made
their escape and ran back to Payeo for help; all the men of the community
started at once in pursuit. When they arrived at the place the Mainit
Bus6s had gone, but they found the bodies of their companions and took
them back to Payeo. About a half a year after, a comandante politico
militar arrived at Cayan, and the Payeo people complained to him of
the murder of Buluan and his companions; the comandante sent soldiers
to Mainit, but the soldiers found nobody there, so they burned up all the
houses that were in Mainit.
The town of Payeo was reduced to a barrio the same time as Besao;
it was part of the town of Besao, originally. Many years after it
was reduced to a barrio we succeeded in having it organized into a town
again and were then separated from Besao again; a gobemadorcillo
and other subordinate officials were appointed for Payeo. We were a
separate town for more than four years, when we were again annexed to
Besao; after many years we were again separated from Besao and formed
into a separate town. When the American Government established the pro-
vincial government in Lepanto, we were again annexed to Besao as a barrio.
BARRIO OF PADANGAAN
The original families of the barrio of Padangaan and their lives,
as told us by our forefathers, are as follows:
Quindaguen and his wife Palonet from Payeo were the original people
that settled at Padangaan; they had planted a piece of land there with
506 ^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
camotes and other vegetables, so they went and made their home there;
while there they had 5 children, 3 boys and 2 girls. Smallpox then broke
out at Payeo; the people there were very much frightened over it, because
that was the first time that that disease ever appeared among them;
consequently a good many of the Payeo people moved to Padangaan; in
this manner Padangaan became inhabited and so Padangaan is the off-
spring of Payeo.
In 1902, Padangaan became a barrio of Besao. A short list
of its officials since that time and the names and marks of the
old men consulted follow.
BARRIO OF AGAUA
The original families of the barrio of Agaua, as it has been told to
us from generation to generation are as follows:
Bodoos, Seppa his wife, and his two daughters, from the rancheria of
Fidelizan, of the town of Sagada, had a she hog who went to have her
pigs at a place called Agaua. That was before anyone lived at that
place. Bodoos went after her but he did not succeed in getting her home,
so he built himself a little hut there in which he lived while taking
care of the hogs. While there, he noticed that the place was good for
planting, as it was swampy; therefore, he decided to make their home
there; he brought his family over and they were the first settlers in
Agaua. When Bodoos's daughters, who were named Bal-i and Canopa,
had grown up, they married two young men, one from Fidelizan, named
Pag-ha, and the other one from Tubo, Abra, named Tobtaben. Pag-ha
married Bal-i and had 2 sons by her, who were named Basicon and
Pilingen; Tobtaben married Canopa and had 3 children by her, 2 boys,
Olao and Atioag, and 1 girl named Dal-ling. When the sons of Pag-ha
and Tobtaben grew up to be men, they went to Fidelizan to get married;
Fidelizan is not very far from Agaua, only a mountain separating the
two; after they had all got married, they returned to Agaua with their
wives; in this manner the population of Agaua increased also by many
peopie coming from other places.
Lists of the officials of the barrio follow. The barrio was at
first annexed to Sagada, and in 1908 it became a part of Besao.
VARIOUS EVENTS
During Domeguias's time as gobernadorcillo, the towns of Mainit, Gui-
naang, and Dalican made a combined head-hunting trip to the town of
Agaua, without any cause whatever that the people of Agaua were aware
of. They killed 11 people, and the rest of the Agaua people, not being
able to hold their own, ran away; then the head-hunters plundered the
town and took everything away with them, as palay, putic (jars), brass
gongs, hogs, and everything that they could find, after which they set fire
to the town and not a house or granary was left standing. The people
escaped in all directions, some went to Besao, some to Payeo, others went
down to the coast and to other places. Five months after this incident,
Domeguias, the gobernadorcillo, called all the people back to Agaua; some
returned and others remained where they had made their homes by that
time. When they had rebuilt their town again, they thought that they
IX, D. 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 507
would take the matter up with the authorities. So Domeguias, the gober-
nadorcillo, and others went to Vigan to see the civil governor. After Dome-
guias made his complaint to the governor, the governor sent for the
comandante politico militar of Bontoc, in whose jurisdiction Agaua was
at that time, and transferred the complaint to him. The comandante
politico militar and Domeguias then returned to the mountains; on their
way the comandante horsewhipped Domeguias and would have killed him
had he not succeeded in making his escape. The comandante whipped
Domeguias because he did not make his complaint direct to him; he was
angry and ashamed for being called to Vigan. After Domegiuas ran
away, nothing more was done about the complaint.
About that time the population of Agaua had increased considerably
again and Agoyoc was appointed gobernadorcillo. Shortly after Agoyoc
was appointed, the Guinaang Busos made another head-hunting expedition
to Agaua in which they killed 9 people. The people of Agaua then
made a complaint direct to the comandante politico militar of Bontoc,
and he had the town of Guinaang set on fire and burned up.
During the time of Malaggay as gobernadorcillo, the town of Sacasa-
can sent a head-hunting expedition against Agaua and killed Pagdang
while he was getting firewood in the nearby mountains. And while Somi-
lep was gobernadorcillo, the Guinaang people killed a man by the name
of Diaoyao, of Agaua, while he was hunting in the mountains above the
town.
While Docal-las was gobernadorcillo of Agaua, the Dalican people killed
Anamong while he was working in his rice fields and then entered the
town and killed 2 more people.
During Masidong's time as gobernadorcillo, the Mainit people killed Ban-
ganay and Duquey while they were planting camotes.
When Baygo was gobernadorcillo, the Sadanga people killed Bandideo
and Paquio w^hile they were cutting rice at Libo.
While Odlas was concejal of Agaua, the Tococan people killed Pampa-
mayan at Bontoc, where he was studying in the industrial school.
All the above-mentioned events have taken place just as they are related
and we witness it with our signature. [The signatures and marks follow.]
BARRIO OF BANGUITAN
We, the old men of Banguitan, herein relate the origin of the first
people that settled in Banguitan, as accurately as it has been handed down
to us by our forefathers.
Gayaman and his wife Pingan, together with 5 more families from Dali-
can, Cayos, in the confines of Cervantes, went to make their homes in a
place called Cablad, in the confines of Besao; they emigrated from their
town, Dalican, because they were afraid of other enemies, as many of their
townspeople had been killed by Busos. During the first year that they
lived at Cablad, they were engaged in herding their swine; one of Gaya-
man*s hogs gave birth in a forest near Cablad. After Gayaman found her
there he built a house for himself to live in, while he was taking care of
his hogs; later on his wife came to live with him there, and then they
decided to remain there and make that their home. This place was known as
Banguitan. Their relatives, still living at Cablad, finally came to make
their home at Banguitan also. In this manner the barrio of Cablad became
abandoned and Banguitan became settled and the people are living there to
508 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
this day. The above-mentioned people are our forefathers, the original
families of this barrio. We are, however, unable to find out the origin of
each of us living here; neither do we know in what year our town was made
into a barrio; we only know that when a gobernadorcillo was appointed for
Besao, we were annexed to it and a cabeza de barangay, who is considered
as the father of the barrio, was appointed.
Lists of officials of various periods follow. At one time the
barrio was annexed to the municipality of Bagnen, but in 1908
it became a part of Besao.
COMMON CUSTOMS AS THEY ARE OBSERVED ALL THROUGH THIS TOWNSHIP
Birth of a child. — The husband of a woman that is pregnant and about
to give birth cannot do the following things: (a) Plant bananas; (b) erect
a post of a house; (c) cut down a tree. When the child is born, the father
must not do the following: (a) Build walls; (b) cut down trees; (c) lead
carabaos, cattle, or horses; (d) wade a river in going to another town
before three months have past; (e) climb a tree or to the top of a house
until the child has teeth.'*
Marriage customs. — The parents of the young man and woman, after
they know that their son and daughter wish to marry, call all their relatives
together and kill a suckling pig. When they are about ready to eat, the
father of the girl goes to the young man's house and takes him to the
house of the girl. On their way back, they watch very closely for rats,
alligators, or snakes; they also look carefully for a hawk or a crow flying
over them. If they see any of these animals, the wedding is postponed
for that day. If they see any of these animals for the second and third
time, the young man and girl are not allowed to marry each other. During
the first year of their wedded life, the husband cannot go to another town,
especially if he has to cross a river.
Wedding. — After a man and woman have been married a year, a big
wedding feast is prepared, for which they kill carabaos, cattle, horses, hogs,
dogs, and chickens, according to the property. For two days after this
feast the married couple must not eat anything. The young girls of the
town stay with the wife and watch her for seven days and nights, in order
that she may not sleep with her husband. For three years she must not
go into another town; also she is not allowed to do the following things:
(a) Eat in another house for five months after the wedding; (b) work
on walls; (c) chop on a live tree; and upon going to another town for the
first time she must kill a chicken upon her return.
Customs at the death of a person. — When a person becomes seriously ill,
the parents or relatives kill 2 hogs and have a canao. The moment that the
sick person dies, they kill 2 hogs again. Two hours after the death an-
other hog is killed. They recline the body against the ladder of the Rouse
and wail and cry over the dead. After their lamentations are over, they
kill a chicken, and when they are about to bury the dead another chicken
is killed. After the burial a she hog is killed; two days after the burial
another chicken is killed; and a month after the death another hog will
be killed; after four months, 2 hogs and 3 chickens are killed; three months
'• See Jenks [Pub. P, L Ethnol Surv. (1905), 1, 59-62] for a discussion of
childbirth and care of children among the Bontocs.
IX. D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 509
after this caiiao, 1 hog and 2 chickens are killed again; four months after
this, they kill 3 hogs and 2 chickens; they wait four months more and then
kill 1 hog and 2 chickens more. After all these ceremonies are over the
parents and relatives can depart, but if they should live in another town
and there is a river to cross they cannot cross for a year.'"
Customs in the building of a house. — When a man has started to
chop timbers to build a house for himself, he cannot go to another place
or town until the house is completed. When he builds his house, even
though it is raised already, and he digs up a toad, rat, snake, or other
animal, the house is moved to another place. Also, should it rain or
should a rainbow appear in the sky, while the house is under construction,
or a crow or a hawk fly over it, the house is moved to a different place.
The foregoing is a description of our customs that we have inherited
from our forefathers.
CAYAN '^
The barrios of the township of Cayan are Cayan, Tadian,
Balaoa, Lubon, Masla, Sumadel, and Tue. **In 1844, owing to
the great many dangers that threatened this town, arising from
the hostilities of neighboring towns, from the stealing of their
cattle, hogs, chickens, etc., and from being compelled to pay
tribute to other towns, the people decided to go to Bucay, the
former capital of Abra, and request the authorities there that
a Spanish official be sent to their town/' Thereupon Spanish-
appointed officials were established in Cayan, which became the
'^ Of mortuary customs among the Igorots, Quirante [Blair and Robert-
son, ut supra, 20, 274, 275 (1624)] says: "When one of those barbarians
dies, they do not bury him for many days, for, as they say, they pass one
month, during which period they amass quantities of food about the
deceased, to whom they give his share as well as the others. Then they
continue to prick the body, and, as they say, they draw off or suck put
the humors until the body is left dry. When that time comes they wrap
it in their blankets, and fasten buyos (betel) and other things about the waist
for the journey. Some are buried in a sitting posture and placed with
their backs against their shields, in caves under the rocks, the mouths of
which are stopped with stones. Others they set in the trees, and they carry
food for so many days after having left them in either one of those
places." Compare other mortuary customs of Philippine peoples in Blair
and Robertson, ut supra: 5, 129-141 (Loarca, Relation, ca., 1580) ; 7,
194-196 (Plasencia, Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589); 16, 133 (Morga,
Sucesos, 1609) ; 40, 79-82 (Colin, Labor evangelica, 1663) ; 40, 165, 166
(Combes, Historia, 1667); 40, 337-339 (San Antonio, Chronicas, 1738-44).
Compare also the ceremony among the Ifugaos described by Beyer and
Barton, This Journal^ Sec. D (1911), 6, 227-249; among the Bontocs in
Jenks, Pub. P. I. Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 1, 74-80. See also Worcester,
This Journal (1906), 1, 850; Perez, Pub. P. I. Ethnol. Surv. (1904), 1,
201; and the manuscript Memoria aprocsimada, op. cit.
"^ For a description and partial history of Cayan, see Perez, Igorrotes,
153-162. It is located 9 kilometers from Cervantes.
510 The Philippine Journal of Science leu
capital of Lepanto. In 1883, Luis Sarela ^^ became the chief
official. '*He took great interest in the people and in their future
welfare; he ordered the planting of potatoes, cabbages, beans,
cacao, coffee, mangos, and other fruits." The people, however,
paid little attention to the order, and a penalty of imprisonment
or whipping was imposed for neglect. In 1883, the capital was
transferred to Cervantes, as Cayan lacked good building sites.
The first friar missionary entered Cayan in 1881, and the first
teacher was appointed in 1885. Lists of the officials of the va-
rious barrios are given. The following customs are described:
CUSTOMS OF THE PEOPLE
The canao that is celebrated by the whole town is called begnas '^ which
is celebrated twice a year, before the rice planting and the rice cutting
time; this is the biggest canao that is held by the whole town; it lasts
from two to three days, during which the people dance, play ganzas, and
sing. This canao is held to ascertain whether the rice crop will be a
good one or not; they tell it by the gall of the hogs that are killed for this
caiiao; if the galls are big and full it is a sign that there will be a good
crop, but if they are small and empty it is a sign that the crop will be
small ; "^ during the time that the hogs are killed no one from the town is
allowed to go out anywhere, nor is anyone from another town permitted
to come into the town.
The canaos that were handed down to us from one generation to another
by our forefathers are called bayas, baquid, obaya, and palis."
Bayas is a caiiao in which 4 to 6 hogs are killed, also carabaos, cattle,
and horses; that is, if the people are rich. They sing, play on their
ganzas, and dance. The persons that celebrate this canao cannot leave
their houses for nine days and they cannot go to another town for three
months. (This canao is held by married people, and is celebrated only
three times by the same persons.) '^
Baquid is somewhat like the bayas canao, but in this caiiao ganzas are
not played, nor do they sing or dance; it is only held once a year. (This
canao is held for the dead.)
Obaya is a caiiao in which a hog is killed; no ganzas are played in this
caiiao; the old men come together and eat; after a while they all go back
home again. (This caiiao is for the purpose of finding out anything
that happened in the town, such as the discovery of a thief, etc.)"®
" Luis Sarela y Figueroa became comandante politico militar of Le*
panto in February, 1879, and governed the district until August, 1883.
Besides moving the capital, he encouraged education and built a trail
from Cervantes to the boundary of the district. See Perez, Igorrotes, 58, 59.
" See footnote 16.
•" See footnote 31.
" Compare this account with that on page 489.
•* See footnote 44. The ceremony here described is similar to the Ifugao
bumaiyah. — Beyer.
'• This ceremony is the same as the Ifugao ubaya. — Beyer.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 511
Palis is a cafiao in which a hog is killed at night time; they beat the
drums and sing; this cafiao is held for the sick, in order that the people
afflicted with enlarged intestines, the poor, and pale and weak people may
be cured; the next morning they kill another hog which they call sabusab
(meaning the end of the cafiao) . These are the only cures for sickness
that the people believe in.
SICKNESS
When a person gets seriously sick, the parents or relatives send for
an old woman, who is called baylan (priestess). This woman prays to
the anito and then speaks to the sick person, in a trembling voice, saying,
"We have caused you to be sick because you have failed to offer up to us
our customary sacrifice (a hog or a chicken) ; we have made you sick, so
that from now on you may not forget again; we may not only make you
sick, but we may kill you also." The patient then answers and says, "Yes I
will sacrifice to thee all thou asketh; though I have it not, I will find
it, but I pray thee, restore my health to me again.'* In the meantime
the parents or relatives prepare a coconut shell of tapuy over which they
pray and say, "If it be true, that thou, the anito, hast made him sick,
we pray thee to restore him again to health so that he will be able to
make the sacrifices that thou hast asked of him.'* If the anito, so prayed
to, is the one that made the person sick, the patient will get well as soon
as the sacrifice is offered; if the patient does not get well, another old
women is called, who goes through the same ceremonies as the other
one; this is kept up until some old woman baylan finds the anito who
made the person sick."
SETTLING QUESTIONS AND COMPLAINTS
Old men only, who have reached a certain age, are allowed to take part
in the settling of disputes and complaints of their townspeople. As soon
as a complaint is made, the old men are called together to investigate
the complaint. A dog and 2 chickens, of the same size and color, are
prepared. The 2 chickens represent the 2 litigants; the chickens are
killed by beating them with small sticks; then they are held over the fire
and partly roasted, with the feathers on;'' after that they cut them up
and take out the galL If the galls of the chickens are of equal size, they
counsel the litigants to make a friendly settlement, which will settle their
dispute forever. The dog and the chickens are then cooked and eaten.
The litigants pay for them as well as for other things that are used up
during the settlement of their question. Should the galls be of different
size, the one whose chicken has the larger gall loses the case. The old
men then will inform the one whose chicken had the larger gall that the
case has been decided against him; then he will be obliged to make good
whatever there is stated in the complaint. For instance, if he had stolen
a horse, he would have to return the horse or make good in some other
" Cf. Blair and Robertson, ut supra; 5, 129 (Loarca, Relation, ca. 1580) ;
40, 336, 337 (San Antonio, Chronicas, 1738-44) ; 43, 108, 109 (Ortiz,
•Practica del ministerio, ca. 1742) ; 43, 310-319 (Present beliefs in Luzon,
1905).
•• The object of holding the chicken over the fire is to bum the feathers
off — ildgim» — Beyer.
512 ^'^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
way, with money or another horse, and the same way with cattle, carabaos,
or hogs. The old men who take part in the settlement of a case are
responsible and have to answer for everything, should the same case ever
come up again. Questions can only be settled in the aforestated manner,
when the litigants are not in any way alike in age, stature, or in any
other manner; but if they are of about the same age, height, etc., the old
men put a sharp piece of iron on each litigant's head inserted to the
depth of 2 or 3 millimeters, and he that bleeds less wins the case. Should
the party who lost the case not be satisfied with the old men's decision,
he has the right to call in the old men from a neighboring town; when
they arrive, the old men that decided the case will also be called together.
The old men from the neighboring town speak first; they state their
arguments and ask that the question be reopened and the decision given
be revoked and given according to the petition of the man against whom
the case was decided. The old men that decided the case in the first place
say: "Our decision stands good, because we decided it by the gall of
sacrificed chickens that showed that he is the guilty man, but if you
insist that the decision be revoked first restore to life the dog and the
chickens from which the galls were taken, before we can give another
decision."
After the old men have questioned both the litigants, they make them
take an oath of the most horrible nature; such as, "May your belly swell
up, from which you will die if you have declared falsely;" or, "May you
become blind, if what you have spoken be false;" "May you be eaten up
by a boa, if you did not speak the truth." The old men set fire to a bundle
of pine wood, split into small pieces, which they then stick into a shell full
of tapuy. At this the litigants answer, "I swear," accompanied with howls
and shrieks, signifying that he who lied will be punished by the anito
according to the oath that he took."
The expenses, including the cost of dogs and chickens, incurred in the
settlement of questions are paid by both the litigants.**
CERVANTES ^^
Cervantes is the capital of Lepanto. Seven barrios belong to
it; namely, Concepcion, Rosario, and San Juan, inhabited by
Ilocanos and other Christians; and Dain, Malaya, Brooke-Din-
widdie, and Pilipil, inhabited by Igorots. In 1908 Cervantes had
'• Cf. Colin, Labor evangelica, 1663 (Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 40,
78, 79), who gives the following forms of oaths used by the Filipinos at
the time of the conquest: "May I die;" "May I be eaten by the crocodile;"
"May I turn into a monkey." "When the chiefs of Manila and Tondo
swore allegiance to our Catholic sovereigns, in the year one thousand five
hundred and seventy-one, they confirmed the peace agreements and the
subjection with an oath, asking 'the sun to pierce them through the middle,
the crocodiles to eat them, and the women not to show them any favor or
wish them well, if they broke their word.' "
^ See page 518. The expenses may be regarded as the fee paid by the
one losing the case.
** For description of Cervantes, see Perez, Igorrotes, 115-124. Cervantes
is called by some an Ilocano town, because of the numbers of that race
living there.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 513
3,787 inhabitants, of whom 1,705 were Christians and the rest
Igorots. The account of Cervantes sent to the Philippine Library-
was written in 1908 by Sabas Gaerlan, a native of Tagudin, who
had Hved in various parts of Lepanto since 1873. His manu-
script shows that he had received a fair education. The account
is simply and charmingly written, and all of it deserves publica-
tion. Space and the main subject in hand, however, permit
only the following excerpt to be made :
OTHER CUSTOMS OF IGOROTS
When an Igorot wants to celebrate a fiesta or perform a canao once in
four or five years, he kills many hogs, carabaos, and cattle, and calls in
all the rich men from neighboring towns and all the poor people in his
own town. This fiesta is performed so that he may be honored by his
visitors and all who know him. W^hen the canao is begun all the hogs to
be used are gathered together and the carabaos and cattle are all tied up
to trees. They dance accompanied by ganzas, and make an offering and
ask Cabunian^'* (God) to favor the man performing the canao and to
give him good health, and pray to the anito and the souls of their dead
ancestors not to destroy his plants and not to kill his animals so that he
may use these animals to perform another canao for them (another canao
for the anito) ; this is the custom of the people in Malaya. The people of
Dain and Pilipil have another name for this canao bayas,"' and it is per-
formed with ganzas before they kill the hogs; first they drink tapuy on
the day when the visitors arrive, and the next day they kill the hogs,
carabaos, and cattle that they have prepared, and after this, one old man
makes an offering to Lomaoig (God)^ to give good health, good thoughts,
and customs to the rich man that performed the bayas; and the old man
also calls the souls (anito) of their dead ancestors to help them in praying
•^ See footnote 40.
•" See footnote 44.
•*See Beyer [This Journal, Sec. D (1913), 8, 96 and 97] for Bontoc
stories of Lumawig. I am indebted also to the same authority for the
following: "Lumawig is a famous Igorot, Bontoc, and Ifugao culture hero.
He is only one of many ancestral deities. Jenks [Pub. P, /. EthnoL Snrv,
(1905), 1, 174, 200-204, 216, 217] is in error in speaking of Lumawig as a
supreme being." Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto, recites a story of
Lumawig. His wife is Bangan, and the two children, Ubban, the boy,
and Bugan, the girl, or Cabigat and Suyan. A sample of the manner in
which the missionaries were able to turn the old stories to account is
related by Perez, Igorrotes, 142, note: "Father Rufino Redondo says,
* Making use of their beliefs (since they worship four gods called Lumauig,
Bugan, Cabigat, and Bangan), I informed them that we also worship
God (one and triune), and that Bugan, the wife of Lumauig, is no other
than the most holy Virgin Mary, spouse of the Holy Spirit, and Mother
of the Eternal Word. I ended my talk by exhorting them to obedience
and submission to the Spanish crown.' " [The apparent inconsistency in
the names mentioned in the above quotations is probably due to the fact
that the authors cited obtained their information from different persons
or in different clan districts. — Beyer.]
130429 4
514 The Philippine Journal of Science 1^14
to Lomaoig that he may give a better living or v^rhatever they have asked
and that they may have sufficient of everything when they have their
bayas (canao).
It is a custom of the people in the same barrios to have a canao v/hich
they call pacde or begnas, either before or after working or harvesting;
this is for all people, and it is performed in the abong (tribunal). The
ceremony that they perform is the killing of a hog, but if the gall of the
hog they killed is not good they kill another and continue to do so until
they meet a good and full gall. As soon as they see that the gall of the
hog they killed is good, they cut the hog into pieces after it is burned and
ask Lomaoig or Cabunian (both Gods) to give them a good crop. If it is
time for harvesting, or for good luck in the planting, they perform pacde
or begnas before they begin their work. No one can go to work the day
just after the canao, and they are [not] allowed to go to the country to
work [until] three days after the performance of pacde or begnas if the
gall of the first hog they killed is good and full, but if they had to kill
[two] or three times they are longer delayed in being allowed to go to
the country to work and it will [be] five or six days then before they are
allowed to do any work.
If any one of them falls sick, it is their custom to call an old woman to
make the canao, and if she says that 1 hog is needed the parents or relatives
of the sick person must kill 1 hog; if the anito says that they must perform
bayas, they must do it, and if he says that they must perform tobag they
must do it also. The ceremony for tobag is the killing of a hog which they
offer to Cabunian in order that the sick person may be cured. If one of
them dies, they must kill a hog, and if the gall of the hog is good and full
they bury the dead; but, if the gall is not good, they kill another hog and
keep on doing so until they find a hog that has a good gall. The dead person
is kept in the house for two or more days or until they find a good gall;
after the dead person is buried, and before the separation of the visitors
in front of the dead house, an old man relates a story and says: **There is
Cabunian or Lomaoig looking at the level land where he puts the people
who do not know their homes and are cruel. 'I make the earth sink,' he
says and *I again make other mountains.* The world is flooded, and after
the water becomes low there are the mountains; two people are left, a
man named Gomatan and a woman named Bangan. Gomatan lived in
Gangyango Mountain, a part of Malaya, and Bangan lived in Caoitan
Mountain, a part of Ifugao, Banaue. When Gomatan saw a fire in Caoitan
Mountain he went on a small wooden raft called salibao (drum used by
the Igorots), and when they saw each other they were brother and sister.
They waited in Caoitan until the water became small, and there they saw
the other mountains and rivers. Cabunian saw them there and went and
married them, though they did not want to get married; but Cabunian
took a runo (stem of a large grass) and split it and then he put them
close together and said: *This runo is only one, but can be divided into
two and can be joined together again; you, Gomatan and Bangan, get
married and become father and mother of many people.' The people in-
creased in number and they did not bury the ones who first died; then
Cabunian came down to the earth and told the people that the dead may
not become obnoxious and 'After burying the dead you should make prayers
and offerings so that you may not be affected by any kind of diseases.'
IX. D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 515
After they make a prayer or offering, they go to some running water and
bathe themselves and after that all the people may go home."*'
CONCEPCION ^®
The township of Concepcion has 6 barrios, as follows : Alf onzo,
Ananaao, Concepcion, Sigay, Mateo, and Tubaline. After giving
the lists of officials for these barrios, the manuscript continues :
HISTORY OF THE PEOPLE, THEIR CUSTOMS, AND LIFE
The first condition of a child when he is born and the things he does
until the end of his life are the following :
When a child is born, the old men or women perform a canao which
is observed as an offering to God so that the child will have a successful
life in the future. The ceremony they observe in this canao is the killing
of a hog or a chicken.*^
The parents of the child, whether he is a boy or a girl, when he becomes
one or two years old, make an agreement with the parents of another child
of another family to marry these children, but sometimes this agreement
is not carried out.
When this child, boy or girl, is about 10 years old and can do any kind
of work, the parents let him go to any place where he can earn a good
living or he helps his parents to find food for the family.
As the boy reaches the age of 18 or less, he wants to get married and
begins the performances of some canaos according to the Igorot customs.
When this boy becomes a full-grown man, and old enough to think
of the future, he builds himself a house to live in. This married couple
diligently work to find enough provisions for their living and they often
do the same thing as their parents did,, according to their customs; this
married couple, though they were united together or living in the same
house, have not the right to get the dowries given by their parents, unless
the wedding ceremonies are celebrated.
When the husband and the wife want to get the dowries from their
parents they tell the old men (principales) of the town that they will
celebrate their marriage. The parents of both must agree to it, together
with the old men of the town. The day before the marriage they prepare
all the things needed for the wedding.
After the preparations are made they summon the people to come to
attend the marriage ceremony. On the wedding day there is much happi-
ness, and the husband and the wife as well as the visitors are full of
joy. On this day the parents of both bequeath some property, such as
lands, animals, house, and other things, to the married couple. In this
**' One Igorot version of the flood and the new creation. Compare with
the similar story in Beyer, This Journal^ Sec. D (1913)) 8, 96. Note that
in the Bontoc and Igorot story there is the same reluctance of the brother
and sister to be married. Compare also the Ifugao myths related by Beyer,
ut supra, 100-102, and 111-113.
•* Concepcion was f omierly a part of the district or comandancia of
Bontoc. See Perez, Igorrotes, 245-247.
•' See footnote 78.
516 ^/^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
case they make out no receipts showing the property given to the husband
and the wife; they only give the document of such property to the married
couple.
After the marriage of the husband and wife they must build a house
of their own and they themselves secure their own food.
Now if one of them dies and they have a son he will inherit their
property; the son himself has the only right to keep all their property.
But if one dies and they have no son to inherit the property, the
property that had been awarded cannot be given to the one left until the
end of the offering done by their relatives according to custom.^^
If the married couple had accumulated or earned property besides the
awarded property, that property will be divided between the two of them.
There are other habits or customs inherited from our forefathers that
we can hardly relate, especially the customs regarding the Igorot canao.
HISTORY THAT TELLS HOW THE QUARRELS OF THE HUSBAND AND WIFE ARE
REGULATED
It is the habit of the married couple, when they have a quarrel and
want to be divorced, that the case is told to the old men of the town who
assemble at the abong. They talk about it, and the husband and wife are
forced to agree and be united together again. During this, the old men
in the abong, who are settling this case, compel the married couple to kill
a goat or a hog which the old men will eat as their punishment [that is,
of the couple] and in payment for the good advice given by the old men.
If it is not agreed that the husband and wife be united, the married couple
are sent to the tribunal (presidencia) to settle the question.
STORY OF A MAN WHO IS A WRONG DOER, SUCH AS ONE LIVING IN CONCUBINAGE
(A MAN WHO LIVES WITHOUT BEING LEGALLY MARRIED), AND THIEVES
If a man is found to be living in concubinage, it is our custom not to
complain against him to the tribunal (presidencia), but we gather all
the old men, principales, of the township regarding this matter; the old
men advise him not to do this same thing again. In this meeting or
assembling of the old men a goat or a hog must be furnished, and they
eat it according to their customs. But, if he is found doing the same thing
again, he will be complained against before the tribunal."*
Now, if there is a man found who stole something, he will be counseled
just the same as in the case of concubinage and be forced to return to the
owner the thing he stole from him; he must suffer the punishment that
the old men impose together with what advice they may give him. Such
a case will not be reported to the police or to the justice of the peace if it
is the first time that the person has stolen something, but if he does it again
" Compare the inheritance customs as described in Blair and Robertson,
ut supra: 5, 153 (Loarca, Relation, ca. 1580) ; 7, 181, 182 (Plasencia,
Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589); 16, 125, 127 (Morga, Sucesos, 1609);
and in Jenks, Puh, P. /. EthnoL Surv. (1905), 1, 164, 165.
•* Cf. Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 5, 177-179 (Loarca, Relation, ca.
1580); 7, 182, 187 (Plasencia, Customs of the Tagalogs, 1589); 16, 126
(Morga, Sucesos, 1609). See 5, 125, for the Visayan myth of the origin
of concubinage.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 517
we will have the right to complain of him to the tribunal or the justice
of the peace.
STORY OF THE METHODS OF BUILDING THE HOUSES AND HOW WE WORK
ACCORDING TO THE CUSTOMS INHERITED FROM OUR FOREFATHERS
When an Igorot wants to build a house, his neighbors are willing to
help him without pay; when the house is finished, the owner of the same
will not go to live in it without first performing a canao and after the
caiiao he will live in the house.
We can't begin any work unless we kill a chicken, which is used as an
offering in order that we may do the work fortunately.
MANCAYAN ^^^
From the document for the township of Mancayan, the follow-
ing excerpts are taken. The township contains three barrios;
namely, Aban, Suyoc, and Cabali. The stories of the formation
of the three settlements are similar. The customs of all three
are identical. For Aban and Suyoc, the narrative of the func-
tions of campo and medes and of the trial by ordeal, called
pudong, are given word for word the same. That for Cabali
is abbreviated. For all three, short accounts of Spanish and
American rule are given, but as they have no special bearing
on the main subject they are omitted here. The story of the
discovery of copper occurs in the narrative for Aban, and that
of gold in the narrative for Suyoc.
ORGANIZATION OF THE PUEBLO OF ABAN (MANCAYAN ) IN TIME IMMEMORIAL
The old men of the above town, by name Cacamo, Lasbaquen, Dagacen,
Mullones, and Bayed, and the old women, Bangayan and Gulling, state that
the persons Tibaldo and his wife Alummay, Magagneo and his wife Cupit,
Cumacom and his wife Gueyna, Lagdingan and his wife Budeas, Agaguen
and his wife Dapunay, Bilasi and his wife Tampacao, Disamoy and his wife
Tabollo, Tiab and his wife Bacluya, and others whose names we do not
remember, and who came from very distant rancherias, are the ones who
formed the pueblo of Aban in time immemorial. They divided Aban into
4 barrios, according to the centers of population, the names of which are
"" For a description of Mancayan and Suyoc, see Perez, Igorrotes,
125-140. See also Eveland, Preliminary reconnaissance of the Mancayan-
Suyoc mineral region, Lepanto, P. I., Bull. P. I. Bur, Min. (1905), No. 4;
and Santos, Informe sobre las minas de cobre de las rancherias de Manca-
yan, Suyuk, Bumucun y Agbao. Manila (1862). The last-named treatise
is the first comprehensive geological report on the mining region of Lepanto.
See also Hernandez, Reconocimiento de un criadero de cobre en el Monte
Aban, termino de Mancayan (1850) ; von Drasche, Fragmente zu einer
Geologie der Insel Luzon. Wien (1878), 36-45; its translation into Spanish,
Datos para un estudio geologico de la isla de Luzon. Madrid (1881), 41-50;
Memoria . . . de la sociedad Cantabro-Filipina de Mancayan. Binondo
(1871).
518 The Philippine Journal of Science i9i4
Balili, Tuboc, Banaba, and Aban. These were the fathers and grand-
fathers of those who make these statements.
The wealthy old man Tibaldo, who was called campo, was headman of
this pueblo, and in each barrio was a wealthy old man of the same barrio
who was called mede/*^^
The names of those who have been medes that are remembered are Bang-
oaiigdan, Aguelba, and Quioaen.
Those appointed held those offices [of campo and mede] for an unlimited
period, and were only succeeded when the pueblo or barrio so decided, and
were relieved by a son or other member of the family.
The medes [each] had in their barrio an ato (kind of court), a small
building in which the entire barrio assembled, headed by the mede, in
order to discuss the affairs pertaining to the barrio. (Plate II, fig. 1.)
The medes communicated these matters to the campo. The latter there-
upon assembled all the former in one of the atos, and the matter was
discussed in order that he might give his decision. The campo could not
decide any matter without the approval of one or two medes, although
he believed his decision proper and necessary. There were matters that
were decided by the medes, if they formed the majority.
At present this court is involved at times in family disputes and in
the case of debts, and is held as follows: Any person appears before the
mede and makes a complaint against another person for debt. The mede
thereupon sends word to the other medes to assemble in the ato. They
summon the defendant, take the declarations of the two litigants, and
as soon as the defendant has been declared guilty sentence is given and
the sentence communicated to the defendant, with a fine which is imposed
of a hog or other animal, and of tapuy, which are consumed by all [the
medes] and by those present. Furthermore, he is forced to pay double
the debt. If the plaintiff loses the suit between himself and the defendant,
he has to give a hog and tapuy, which are consumed by all the people
as above said. In cases in which the plaintiff and defendant maintain their
positions obstinately because of a strong denial on the part of the latter,
the medes oblige them to take the pudong. This is a kind of examination
and proof, and is conducted as follows; The medes and old men prepare
a small bit of [sharp] steel, and a bamboo through which the steel can
pass easily when let fall through the hollow. While the above objects
are being prepared, other old men proceed to sacrifice chickens, at the
same time praying to their gods to aid them with the litigants, as each
one [of the gods] may desire. When everything is ready, the above-
mentioned litigants are made to squat on the ground on their heels. As
soon as they are in position, he who is about to perform the operation
approaches. This is usually an old man, and [there is] another one
who acts as witness or assistant. The former places the bamboo on top
of the head of one of the above-mentioned litigants and drops the above-
said piece of steel through the hollow of the said bamboo. This, through
the force of its fall, makes a slight wound in the scalp, from which oozes
a small drop of blood. Then he does the same to the other litigant, also
in the presence of the other witness or assistant. When the operation
is ended, the medes and old men examine very carefully the drops of blood
^" A note in this account later on defines campo as the headman of the
pueblo and mede as the headman of the barrio.
IX, D. 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 519
on the heads of the above-said litigants, for the purpose of ascertaining
which of the two has the greater amount of blood. That one is thereupon
considered to have lost the case, and he is punished as above said.^"
The presence of the campo is not necessary for all matters, unless he
wishes, but it is necessary in the most important matters.
All the affairs of the pueblo and other very important matters could
not be written, because we had absolutely no knowledge of paper, pen,
and ink in those times, and we preserved all such matters by memory
from family to family to our present time.
Short accounts of the Spanish and American regimes follow.
Spanish officials were stationed in Mancayan from 1862
until the insurrection against Spanish rule. The manuscript
continues :
DISCOVERY OF THE COPPER MINES BY NATIVES''"
The men, Buansi, Gal-ey, Banggit, and two others whose names we do
not now remember, the fathers and grandfathers of the declarants, and
hunters in those early times, inhabitants of the old pueblo of Aban (Man-
'"'See footnote 64. Cf. Blair and Robertson, ut supra: 5, 145-147, 161,
181-187 (Loarca, Relation, ca. 1580) ; 7, 179 (Plasencia, Customs of the
Tagalogs, 1589); 16, 128, 129 (Morga, Sucesos, 1609); 16, 321-329 (Pla-
sencia, Customs of the Pampangos in their lawsuits, 1589) ; 40, 85, 86
(Colin, Labor evangelica, 1663) ; 40, 150 (Combes, Historia, 1663) ; 40,
357, 358 (San Antonio, Chronicas, 1738-44) ; 43, 109 (Ortiz, Practica del
ministerio, ca. 1742); 43, 304 (in Mindanao).
^'^^ The copper deposits of this region have long been known. W. D. Smith
of the Bureau of Science [Jonrn. GeoL (1913), 21, 29-61], says that the
copper is found in the form of arsenates and sulphides. Eveland [Pub. P. /.
Min. Bur, (1905), No. 4, 9] presents a good description of the copper
fields together with a short bibliographical survey and a history of mining
and the mining methods of the Igorots. See also the annual bulletin,
Mineral resources of the Philippine Islands, published by the Bureau of
Science. A Spanish company, called the Cantabro-Filipino Company, began
operations in 1856. The company paid about 400 pesos Philippine cur-
rency for the concession, and the Igorots were guaranteed employment in
the mines at regular fixed rates. It is estimated that 40,250 pounds of
copper were produced during the years 1840-55, valued at 117,000 Spanish
pesos. The company began the work of actual production in 1860. From
that time until 1875, when the company ceased operations, 2,500,000 pounds
of copper were produced. The copper mined by the Igorots is smelted by a
primitive method probably learned from the Chinese. Eveland says (p. 18) :
**The copper obtained in this manner they sell partly in cakes to the Chris-
tian people in the lowlands, and partly dedicate to the manufacture of pots
and boilers which the Igorots forge with stones; also making of the same
metal bars, tongs, and small pipes for smoking.*' La Guia Oficial, Manila
(1893), 115, says: "In the district of Lepanto are important copper deposits
and considerable exploitation has occurred in Mancayan, Suyoc, Bumucun,
and Agbao. The Igorots of the most distant mountains carry the mineral
down to sell it, but they are hostile to whites, and no one has gone up.''
Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 848] says of the copper mining of
the Igorots: "Many of the Igorots of northern Benguet and southern Le-
520 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
cayan), while out hunting one day, in the hopes of being able to catch
a deer with their dogs pursued it for some hours. They had the good
fortune to catch it in one of the places where to-day is found a hole of
the mines of this above-mentioned pueblo. When it came time to prepare
their food, the above-mentioned hunters agreed to prepare it in the
place abovesaid. For that purpose they gathered some stones on which
to do their cooking and on which they set their jar. Thereupon they
set fire to the wood, and after several hours one of them went to the
said cooking place to see whether the food was ready. He saw that one
of the supporting stones had melted like lead. Thereupon all were
astonished at the melting of the stone. Upon this they examined the above-
mentioned stone and made several experiments with it. As a result they
converted it into a substance dark red in color. This the aforesaid dis-
coverers called gambang (copper).
After continuing their experiments for some months, the discoverers
succeeded in obtaining a certain number of pieces of gambang. They
resolved to make jars out of it, which they called galang. The rest they
converted into lumps and took them to Tagudin (Ilocos Sur) to sell,
before and now a part of Mountain Province.
After some years a commission composed of several Spaniards entered
the pueblo. Among them were two whose names we remember yet, namely,
Senores Don Mariano del Pielago and Don Evaristo, and an Englishman.^'^*
After another year, those men took possession of the copper mines, and
told our ancestors that they had been given the title to those mines by
the government. Thereupon, some of our abovesaid ancestors went to
other pueblos, and others to other near-by places, and some remained as
workmen for those men. In our days, this is our present condition.
(Plates IV to IX.)
The organization of the pueblo of Suyoc is related. This is
very similar to that of Aban, and the account of the pudong
ceremony is word for word the same. The following is related :
DISCOVERY OF GOLD MINES BY THE NATIVES ''°
Daguioa and Al-laoas, the grandfathers of the declarants, one time when
they went to the above-mentioned sitio of Palidan located within the
panto mine copper and smelt it by a process of their own. From the
metal thus obtained they fashion ollas and kettles which frequently are of
large size. The method employed in making kettles is kept secret by those
familiar with it, and numerous attempts on the part of Americans to
surprise coppersmiths at their work have proved abortive. At one time
a considerable business was done in the vicinity of Suyok in making rude
counterfeits of Spanish copper coins. Clay molds were taken from genuine
coins, and into these molds the copper was run. These counterfeits, al-
though quite recognizable as such, circulated freely for some time because
of the shortage of small change. '^ American claims were staked out in
1900. See also Siantos, Informe, op. cit.
"* Possibly the forerunners of the Cantabro-Filipino Company, or the
company itself. See Eveland, BulL P, I. Bur. Min, (1905), No. 4, 16-19;
and Santos, Informe, op. cit.
^"^ The Igorot gold mines have long been famous. As early as 1575, Gov-
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 521
jurisdiction of the pueblo, for the purpose of bathing, on arriving at the
creek, took a bit of unit (wet earth that is used as soap for the head)
to rub themselves with for the bath. One of them upon rubbing his head
with the abovesaid earth saw that his hands had become tinged a saffron
ernor Guido de Lavezares, influenced no doubt by report of gold, planned
and despatched an expedition to northern Luzon, but the undertaking
had no result. In 1591, the energetic governor, Gomez Perez Dasmarifias,
sent his son Luis, afterward acting governor, and two other expeditions
to explore the so-called province of Tuy. In 1594, Luis Perez Dasmarinas
despatched Captain Toribio de Miranda to the same region. See Blair
and Robertson, ut supra, 14, 281-326, for an account of these early expe-
ditions. Pages 301-307 relate *'What has been known from old times, in
these districts, of the rich mines of the Yglotes [that is, Igorots] both
from seeing the great amount of gold that the Indians of those mountains
have extracted without skill, and are still obtaining, and which they sell
to the neighboring provinces, and trade for food; and by persons
(Spaniards as well as Indians) who have been in the mines opened by
those mountaineers." As early as 1624, the workings of the Igorots appear
to be very old, and many of them were already abandoned. An engineer
conversant with Chinese methods of mining told me recently that it was
his belief that the Igorots had learned their methods from the Chinese.
See Becker's account on native methods of mining in 21st Ann, Rep. U. S.
Geolog. Surv. (1901), III, 576-680. Quirante writing in 1624 (Blair and
Robertson, ut supra, 20, 276-279) says that the Igorot men, women, and
children were accustomed to wash gold in the small mountain streams
during the rainy season. This was traded in the lowlands for cattle
and other animals by its quantity as determined by sight instead of by
weight. Quirante says that the natives had five hills where they had
tapped the gold-bearing quartz rock, although they obtained but a small
amount of the metal. The workings as described by Quirante appear to
have been rather extensive. Their tools he says were "certain stakes of
heavy wood fashioned like pickaxes, with the knot of the said stake
larger at the end of it, where, having pierced it, they fit into it a small
narrow bit of iron about one palmo long. Then seated in the passages
or works, as the veins prove, they pick out and remove the ore, which
having been crushed by a stout rock in certain large receptacles fixed
firmly in the ground, and with other smaller stones by hand, and having
reduced the ore to powder, they carry it to the washing-places." The gold
was then obtained by repeated washings and crushings. Under Quirante's
directions 26 assays of the ore taken from the old workings were made.
Worcester [This Journal (1906), 1, 848] says of the gold mining of the
Lepanto-Igorots : *The men have mined gold for centuries. They work
over the faces of exposed cliffs, when necessary suspending themselves by
means of rattans, and pick out the streaks of rich ore which show free
gold. This they dig with their crude iron or steel implements, the use
of powder being unknown among them. The ore, after being dug, is
crushed and panned. Both men and women also wash gold from the
sands of the streams, and the women are especially famed for the skill
with which they save the very light float gold — a skill which American
miners have found it impossible to attain. The gold is usually sold in
the form of dust, although it is sometimes melted and run into ingots."
522 '^he Philippine Journal of Science 1914
color. He was much surprised at that and told it immediately to his
companion. The latter, on seeing the hands of the former, was also sur-
prised, and they both stood looking at it for some moments. After exam-
ining and studying it, they went home to get some wooden vessels. They
returned to the abovesaid sitio, and gathered a big lump of unit. They
performed the dayas, by which the saffron-colored substance is separated
from the earth and sand. When the latter was separated from the former,
the discoverers saw that the saffron-colored substance consisted of very
small particles of dust, which when shaken in the abovesaid wooden vessels
glittered brightly in the sun. One of the men continued to shake the par-
ticles in the wooden vessel for the purpose of studying them carefully,
while the other was sitting beside a small fire warming himself. After
some minutes of talk, they agreed to try to melt them in the fire. This
they really did by placing a certain quantity of those particles in a bit of
broken jar, which they set among the live coals. After a few hours they
obtained the result they desired. On becoming cool, they had a substance
with the abovesaid color. But it was mixed with other substances, which
were probably impurities from the coal which was used to melt the particles,
and which had united with the abovesaid particles at the moment of melt-
ing. That abovesaid substance they called bulauan or dadaaUy according to
the condition in which it was found in the soil and subsoil when it was
obtained and corresponding to its color. They continued to experiment in
order to ascertain its uses. After a few days had passed, the abovesaid
agreed to convert it into a kind of earrings which they called dinanpulay.
At the present time only the wealthy people wear them, because of their
excessive value, because of the difficulty in finding them, and because of
the great cost of manufacture. Those discoverers continued their under-
taking and succeeded in making a number of earrings, which they took to
other rancherias to sell, as well as some pieces to Tagudin (Ilocos Sur).
There the purchasers had the material tested by experts before buying it.
As a consequence, it obtained the name of balitoc.^'^ From those times we
have continued to work that enterprise without cessation in spite of the
difficulty and costliness of the work, and in fact in the way in which it
was done in those days.
SABANGAN ^^^
The township of Sabangan has 6 barrios, as follows : Bonayan,
Goyan, Ilagan, Pingad, Namatec, and Sabangan (native name,
Bait). Its total population is 2,232, of whom 37 are Christians
Smith [Journ. Geol (1913), 21, 59, 60] thinks that at least 1,000 pesos
per month are panned by the people of the Philippines. A manuscript
conserved in the Philippine Library is entitled Noticia de los Ygorrotes,
de sus pueblos, gentio, y minas de oro y de varias tentativas para su des-
cubrimiento. Although undated, this manuscript is of the nineteenth
century. It is a compiled account of Spanish contact with the Igorots
and is accompanied by a map.
^'^ Balitoc, the Ilocano word for gold.
^'^ For a description of Sabangan, or Sabangan, as it is sometimes
written, see Perez, Igorrotes, 195-201. It is located 27 kilometers east of
Cervantes.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 523
and the rest Igorots. The inhabitants of Bonayan claim descent
from Bintua and Olimen, a brother and sister, the only two
people left alive "after the big flood/' '*A she hog from Pidipid
strayed over to the place now called Bonayan and there had
young ones. When the owners and others went after her they
saw that the place was very fertile and well adapted for planting
and good pasture for their live stock." The barrio of Ilagan was
formed by the inhabitants of a place called Talo, who migrated
en masse because of ''the frequent visits of their neighbors, who
were their enemies." The barrio of Pingad lays claim to great
antiquity and size. During the Spanish regime, however, many
of its inhabitants moved to other barrios. The barrio of Namatec
was formerly located nearer the river, ''but for protection from
their more savage neighbors they moved * * * higher up
the mountain." The population of this barrio is decreasing.
Various legends and customs of the township are described as
follows :
LEGEND OF THE ORIGIN OF THE WORLD
In ancient times the earth was flat. When Lomaoig (God) saw that on
the earth all his people and every other living thing were mixed together,
He said, '*It is better that I make the earth float on water so that it could
be inundated and the new creation that will come after will be more scat-
tered and separated.'' A big flood came and destroyed every living thing
except two people, who were brother and sister — Bintua, the brother, and
Olimen, the sister. This brother and sister married each other and they
had many descendants who are now scattered all over the earth.**'
CANAO
The caiiao is a sacrifice of chickens, hogs, and all other kinds of animals,
offered to Lomaoig (God), that he may give them good health, better
crops, and a better increase from their live stock.
MARRIAGE CEREMONY
At sunset, after supper, the young women go to their tribunal to
sleep and the young men go to theirs. Late at night the young men go
to the tribunal where the girls are sleeping, and the young man that
wishes to get married speaks with the girl of his choice; then if the girl
is willing she tells the young man to go and bring firewood to her father's
house, and she takes hinohodan^'^ (a native drink made out of rice) and
rice to the house of the young man's father. In this manner their parents
know that their son and daughter wish to marry. Then the parents
of both the young people agree that the young man shall go to the house
'"* See Blair and Robertson, ut supra, 5, 125-129, for the story regarding
the separation and origin of different nations.
*°* Rather the rice that is left after tapuy is made, although here the
word may be used as a synonym for tapuy. It is said to be more intoxicat-
ing than tapuy.
524 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science i^h
where the girl lives and there they have a canao, for which they kill
a chicken; three days later they have another canao for which they
kill a suckling pig, and after this canao they become man and wife.
After they have been living together for one year they have a canao
again for which they kill 3 or 4 hogs, at the third day of this canao
they kill a suckling pig, thus signifying that the canao is over. After
being married five years and after they have acquired a little property,
they have another canao, for which they prepare beforehand plenty of
binobodan. Preparations for this canao are commenced seven days before
the date of the canao; the day before the canao they repair the roof of
their house and bring in plenty of firewood. The day after all these
preparations are completed the parents and relatives of both gather together
there; then they kill a carabao and prepare food for all the people. In
the meantime they send after all their relatives living in other towns.
After all their relatives and visitors have arrived, the man and his wife
erect in front of their house 4 pieces of wood; the pieces of wood are
tied together at the top and spread out at the bottom; they kill a hog
and roast it between these 4 pieces of wood; after it is roasted they
cut the head off and place it on a little platform, which is fixed between
these pieces of wood, about halfway up; this arrangement is called bansa.
The married couple then dances the bansa, the man holding a basket
while the woman scatters rice around it and in front of the house. The
relatives and guests then make presents to the married couple, such as
money, rice, or anything else that they wish to give. After this last
ceremony is over, all the people are allowed to dance and sing as they
please.
CANAO FOR THE SICK AND THE DEAD
When a person gets sick, a canao is made for him, for which a chicken
or a hog is killed, which serves as treatment for his or her sickness.
When a person dies, all the relatives of other towns are sent for.
The dead are either buried early in the morning or late in the evening;
the parents and relatives have a canao for which a chicken is killed.
Five days after the burial, all the people participating in this canao go
to the river and take a bath; for this occasion a chicken is killed over
which a prayer is offered up for the soul of the dead. A year after,
the parents and relatives of the dead person have one more canao for
which a she hog and 3 suckling pigs are killed. After this ceremony, the
mourning for the dead is over.""
"° The death-caiiao described above is for the poor people. If the dead
person is a rich Igorot, the canao will last as long as there are any
animals left to be killed. When about all the animals are killed, some
old woman goes into a trance and while in that state pretends to see
the man sitting along the mountain side, all tired out and unable to go
any farther. She will communicate this to the relatives of the dead
person, and they will immediately procure a horse and kill it in order
that the dead man may have a horse to ride and in that manner reach
his destination. During all this time the dead person is placed in a sitting
posture, tied in a chair, raised up from the ground 4 or 5 feet. Under
the chair a smouldering fire is built, thereby preserving the body. This
lasts sometimes ten or twelve days, according to the number of animals
to be killed. — W. A. Miller. See also footnote 79.
IX, D. 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 525
MATERIAL OUT OF WHICH CLOTHES WERE MADE
The ancient people used G strings made out of pounded tree bark and
basket-shaped hats woven out of bical (a wild bamboo). The pingad worn
by the women was also made out of tree bark, pounded, finely twisted,
and then woven into a cloth. (The pingad is a narrow blanket about 2
feet wide and long enough to reach around a woman's waist.) '*'
MANNER OF SETTLING COMPLAINTS
When a person has a complaint to make against anyone, all the old
men of the community are called together, and the complainant states the
nature of his complaint to them. They then send after the accused, and
upon his arrival the complainant is asked to state his complaint before
the accused; the accused then is allowed to make his statement; if neither
party has any witnesses, the old men stick a fine needle in the top of
their heads (complainant and accused) and he that bleeds loses the case.
Another way: They make the complainant and the accused throw stones
at each other and he that is not hit wins the case. Another way: They
give to the complainant and to the accused [each] a small chicken, hatched
by the same hen. Each one roasts his chicken before an open fire, without
cleaning it, or taking the feathers off. When they are roasted they are
cut into before the old men and he, the gall of whose chicken is the
smallest, loses the case.^^'^
CANAO FOR PLANTING AND HARVESTING
At the time for planting rice in seed beds, all the people in the community
have a common canao for which everybody kills a chicken. Before they
begin to transplant their rice, they have the same kind of a canao; also,
when the planting is over. For ten days before the rice cutting commences,
nobody is allowed to leave the town; during this time they have a canao
for which they kill hogs and chickens; after the ten days' canao is over, one
of the old men goes under a big tree (the sacred tree of the community)
and there he sacrifices a chicken and offers up a prayer, and after this
ceremony the rice cutting begins. After the rice is all cut, another canao
is held.""^
After camote planting is over, every man in the community goes, with
his spear and shield, to the mountains, and there calls in a loud and sup-
pliant voice for the souls of the dead to come in. Upon their return to
the town they go directly to their tribunals. Then an old man from each
tribunal goes to get water and a spear and places them, while offering up
a prayer, in front of his tribunal. The next day they kill a dog and place
it in front of the tribunal and there they leave it as food for the spirits
they have thus summoned.
When a cafiao is about to commence all the paths and streets leading
into the town are closed with brush and thorns in order that no one from
another town may enter.
"' See footnotes 26 and 49; and cf. Jenks, Pub. P. I. Ethnol. Surv. (1905),
1, 111-114.
'" The first of the ordeals mentioned above is similar to the ordeal by
pudong, described on page 518. Compare also page 512. See Jenks
[Pub. P. I. Ethnol. Surv. (1905), 1, 169] for a description of the pudong.
'" See footnote 28.
526 2^^^ Philippine Journal of Science im
SUPERSTITIONS
When a person commences to build a house and he sees a rat or a mouse,
he discontinues his work, as that predicts bad luck.
After all materials needed to build a house are prepared and ready to
start the work, all the people of the community come to help; but after
the house is built, if the owner sees a crow, a mouse, or a snake, he at
once moves the house into another solar or lot. When his house is once
more built, if he sees no more of these animals, he holds a three days*
canao, for which at first a chicken is killed and then some hogs. After all
these ceremonies are over, if the owner has no bad dream or sees no bad
omen, he will then inhabit the house. If within three days he sees or hears
nothing, he holds another canao of chicken, but if he sees anything that
predicts bad luck, or has a bad dream, he leaves the house forever and
finds himself another place to live.
The barrio of Sabangan is the central barrio of the township and when
the Spaniards first came to this country they established their headquarters
for the g-uardia civil there.
This document is made out by the presidente of the township together
with the secretary, due to the fact that the teniente of the barrio, the old
men, and the old women do not know how to read or write.
This document of information is signed by the presidente and the old
men of the community who were all present, and is dated this date (July
6, 1911).
SAN EMILIO^^*
No legends or customs are related of this township. It is
comprised of the following barrios, each of which is divided
into two or more parts: San Emilio, Tiagan, Baang, Lancuas,
Kalumsing, Sibsibu, Paltoc, and Matibuey. Parts of the town-
ship belonged formerly to Abra subprovince and to Ilocos Sur
Province. The names of the old sites inhabited by the people
of the present territory of the municipality were Ampagadan,
Baioes, Bago, Lipay, Batbatay, Batingco, Petredo, Gunnabec,
Bising, Bangbagas, Nagbukel, Liang, Paracad, Pitocan, Laqueb,
Bacongan, and Limpa, but these places were deserted because
of sickness, in accordance with Igorot custom. Part of the
known history dates back to 1829. In Spanish times, a garrison
of 1 lieutenant, 1 sergeant, 1 corporal, and 12 soldiers was
stationed in San Emilio. The Filipino soldiers of the revolution
followed them, and then the American soldiers were stationed
there until 1904. One friar was stationed there from 1890 to
1897. "In 1894, the comandante politico militar and the friar
enforced baptism upon the people of the townships of San Emilio
and Concepcion. All the people, youths and adults, with no
exceptions, were baptized, but the customs of the Igorots, such
"* For a description of San Emilio, see Perez, Igorrotes, 243, 244. It
was formerly a part of the district of Bontoc.
IX, D, 6 Robertson: The Igorots of Lepanto 527
as performing canaos and other habits, had not been forbidden
up to date; but since the revolution in the Philippines none of
our children have been baptized ; the only ones are the children of
the original Christians who are now living in this township/' ^^^
SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY
(1) Blair, E. H., and Robertson, J. A. The Philippine Islands: 1493-
1898. Cleveland (1903-1909). 55 vols. See index: Igorots.
(2) Census of the Philippine Islands. Washington (1905). 4 vols. See
1, 533-544. Compiled from accounts by Governor Dinwiddie of
Lepanto-Bontoc and Governor Pack of Benguet.
(3) Dinwiddie, W. Report on Igorots, Jan. 17 (1903). In Report of
the Philippine Commission. Washington (1903), pt. 1, 833-836.
(4) Drasche, R. von. Fragmente zu einer Geologic der Insel Luzon.
Wien (1878), 36-45.
(5) Idem. Datos para un estudio geologico de la isla de Luzon. Madrid
(1881), 41-50. A translation of the preceding.
(6) Eveland, a. J. Preliminary reconnaissance of the Mancayan-Suyoc
mineral region, Lepanto, P. I. BulL P. I. Min. Bur, (1905), No. 4.
(7) Hernandez, Antonio. Reconocimiento de un criadero de cobre en el
Monte Aban. Termino de Mancayan (1850).
(8) Jordana y Morera, R. Bosquejo geografico e historico-natural. Ma-
drid (1885), 56-66.
(9) Memoria de la sociedad Cantab ro-Filipina de Mancayan. Binondo
(1871). There are several reports of the operations of the above
company.
(10) Memoria del distrito de Lepanto. No date, no place.
(11) Meyer, A. B., and Schadenberg, A. Album von Philippinen-typen.
Dresden (1891). Plates 32, 33, 43, 44, 47, and 48 show types of
Lepanto.
(12) The Mineral resources of the Philippine Islands. Published annually
by the Bureau of Science, Manila.
(13) Perez, Angel, 0. S. A. Igorrotes. Manila (1902), 29.
(14) Santos, J. M. Informe sobre las minas de cobre de las rancherias
de Mancayan, Suyuk, Bumucun y Agbao. Manila (1861).
(15) Idem. Same title. Manila (1862).
(16) Smith, W. D. The geology of Luzon. Joum, GeoL (1913), 21,
29-61.
(17) Worcester, D. C. Our fifteen years' work in the Philippines. Mun-
sey, February (1914).
(18) Idem. The non-Christian tribes of northern Luzon. Phil Journ.
Sci. (1906), 1, 791.
^" Christianity has never obtained any great hold among the Igorots.
In Lepanto, the work of the missionaries was carried on first from the
mission of Cayan. Lillo de Gracia, Distrito de Lepanto, 17, says that the
Igorots called all Christian Filipinos Ilocanos. The Christian population
of the subprovince is found for the most part in Cervantes, Concepcion,
and San Emilio [Census of the Philippine Islands. Washington (1905), 1].
ILLUSTRATIONS
{ Plates 1 and II are from photographs by Martin ; Plate III is from a photogrraph by Worcester ;
Plates IV to IX are from photographs by Eveland.)
Plate I
Fig. 1. Lepanto-Igorot woman.
2. Lepanto-Igorot woman, showing tattooing.
Plate II
Fig. 1. The ato at Sagada.
2. Group of Igorots at Cervantes with a jar of tapuy.
Plate III
Burial place of Lepanto Igorots.
Plate IV. Igorot Copper Smelting
Fig. 1. First roasting.
2. Completion of the roast.
Plate V. Igorot Copper Smelting
Fig. 1. Clearing the matte.
2. Roasting the matte.
Plate VI
Old Spanish road to copper mines at Mancayan, showing contact between
overlying quartz porphyry and Mancayan diorite.
Plate VII
Copper mines, Mancayan.
Plate VIII
Smelter site, Cantabro-Filipino Company, Mancayan.
Plate IX
Old native workings at Suyoc.
text figure
Fig. 1. Map of a part of Mountain Province, Luzon.
130429 5
529
:^|t'a^^f->V "'•*'- '•'■''■■- ■ ■ .''5w^-:. '■ ,>!.;:' A" -isia
Robertson: Igorots of Lepanto.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 6.
f -
0^:
>
-»^--'^
h&J%
fei,*»»^
-^•"lli
/T^-*:;-..-^!^.
Fig. 1. The ato at Sagada.
.^.5*'-'^'
>l
''^'^'^J^hBHim.
..^ ■
yJ-V
. j ^B
b^
MH^^H
iiiWB^
r^^"T^
HT
Mm^
^">^0^i
^Bi
^^fl
^^^^
^H J
f^ ^^^^BHJ
99H
m ^Uji
IhI
l^^l
^^^9
pf|L« ^ '^^Km^
919
ii^^^S
^^^H
jJ-IVCMBM
^M
WH
^H
1
H
^H
1
Fig. 2. Group of Igorots at Cervantes with a jar of tapuy.
PLATE II.
Robertson : Igorots of Lepanto.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 6.
PLATE I!!. BURIAL PLACE OF LEPANTO IGOROTS.
Robertson: Igorots of Lepanto.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 6.
Fig. 1. First roasting.
Fig. 2. Completion of roast.
PLATE IV. IGOROT COPPER SMELTING.
Robertson: Igorots of Lefanto]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 6.
Fig. 1. Clearing the matte.
Fig. 2. Roasting the matte.
PLATE V. tGOROT COPPER SMELTING.
Robertson: Igorots of Lepanto.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 6.
PLATE VI. OLD SPANISH ROAD TO COPPER MINES, MANCAYAN, SHOWING
CONTACT BETWEEN OVERLYING QUARTZ PORPHYRY AND MANCAYAN
DIORITE.
:z5
p
Oh
O
(4
o
DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SPECIES OF PRIONOCHILUS FROM
THE HIGHLANDS OF LUZON
By Richard C. McGregor
{From the Section of Ornithology and Taxidermyy Biological Laboratory,
Bureau of Science, Manila, P, I.)
One colored plate
Prionochilus anthonyi sp. nov.
Specific characters. — Top of head with a conspicuous yellow
patch; remainder of upper parts glossy black; chin and throat
white; remainder of under parts yellow; under tail-coverts
cadmium yellow.
Type. — No. 7515, $ , Bureau of Science collection. Polis
Mountain, Ifugao subprovince, Luzon, P. I. Collected February
7, 1913, by R. C. McGregor and A. Celestino.
Description of type. — Forehead, lores, circumocular region,
and auriculars black with very little gloss; crown and occiput
cadmium yellow ; neck, back, rump, upper tail-coverts and median
and lesser wing-coverts black glossed with dusky dull bluish
green ; primaries and their coverts, secondaries and their greater
coverts, and rectrices fuscous to chaetura black; edge of wing,
wing-lining, axillars, and inner edges of primaries white; chin,
throat, and malar region white ; remainder of under parts green
or yellow; sides of breast citrine, becoming more yellowish on
flanks ; middle of breast and abdomen empire yellow ; under tail-
coverts cadmium yellow. Iris brown ; bill black ; legs, feet, and
nails blackish slate ; soles pale yellow. Length in flesh, 106 mm. ;
wing, 56 ; tail, 29 ; tarsus, 16.
Remarks. — Prionochilus anthonyi does not resemble any other
Philippine species of the genus and appears to differ from all
other described species in pattern of coloration. The bill is
similar in proportions to that of P. quadricolor Tweeddale, but
is very much larger. The bill is much stouter than in P. johan-
nse Sharpe. The type and only specimen was collected in the
mossy forest near the summit of the Government trail between
Banaue and Bontoc, within a few meters of the rest house on
the Banaue side. The elevation of the rest house is about 2,000
meters. The species is named for Alfred Webster Anthony.
531
ILLUSTRATION
Plate I. Prionochilus anthonyi sp. nov. (Drawn and colored from the
type by T. Espinosa.)
533
McGregor: A New PRioNOCHn.us.]
[Phil. Journ. Sci., IX, D, No. 6.
PLATE I. PRIONOCHILUS ANTHONYI SP. NOV.
NITIDULID^ DES PHILIPPINES RECOLTES PAR C. F. BAKERS
Par A, Grouvelle
{Paris y France)
Brachypeplus ornatus sp. nov.
Ovatus, abdominis apice acuminatus, modicissime convexus,
nitidulus, tenue flavo-pubescens, capite, prothorace abdomineque
rufo-testaceus, elytris ochraceo-testaceus ; capite vix infuscato,
prothoracis margine postico medio, elytrorum lateribus apicequi,
abdominis segmentorum disco nigris. Antennae breves; clava
paulo longiore quam latiore, apice breve et obtuse acuminato-
pulvinata; articulis 7° et 8° praecipue ultimo valde transversis.
Caput transversum, subdepressum, crebre punctulatum, ante
antennarum bases sat productum, subtruncatum ; temporibus
minutis, acutis. Prothorax valde transversus antice quam
postice vix angustior, lateribus rotundatus ; angulis anticis posti-
cisque obtusis, vix hebetatis ; basi truncata, utrinque scutelli vix
perspicue breveque sinuata, tenuiter marginata. Scutellum
subsemicirculare, tenuissime punctulatum. Elytra paulo bre-
viora quam simul latiora, tenuiter punctato-striata ; striarum
intervallis unilineato-punctatis ; striis integris. Abdominis seg-
mentum ultimum apice obtuse acuminatum.
Long., 4 nmi.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Banos (2 individus).
Ovale, abacumine vers le sommet de Tabdomen, un peu plus
de deux fois plus long que large dans sa plus grande largeur;
tres faiblement convexe, brillant, convert d'une fine pubescence
flave, mediocrement visible, roux testace sur la tete, le prothorax
et Tabdomen, testace- jaunatre sur les elytres; marge anterieure
de la tete rougeatre, tete a peine enfumee; milieu de la marge
posterieure du prothorax, marges laterales et epipleures des ely-
tres et milieu des segments de Tabdomen noirs. Antennes
courtes, massue noiratre ; 1^^ article epais, un peu plus long que
large, 2« moins epais, une fois et demie plus long que large, 3«
grele, 4® a peine allonge, 5« et 6« subtransversaux, 7® et 8« (8«
surtout) tres transversaux, le 8« plus large que le 7**; 9« et 11«
formant une massue brusque, un peu plus longue que large, dont
' Proof read by C. F. Baker.
535
536 The Philippine Journal of Science i9h
le dernier article, un peu plus long que les deux premiers, est
termine par un bouton conique, emousse, surbaisse. Tete moins
de deux fois plus longue que large, subdeprimee, retrecie trans-
versalement en avant des bases des antennes; epistome assez
saillant, parallele, subtronque en avant; front tres densement
pointille, faiblement impressionne en avant des bases des anten-
nes, de ehaque cote de Tepistome; epistome presque lisse yeux
echancrant les margues du front, mediocrement saillants, a tres
petites f acettes ; tempes petites, anguleuses ; labre environ quatre
fois plus large que long. Prothorax tronque en avant, a peine
plus etroit en avant qu'a la base, arrondi sur les cotes, environ
deux fois I plus long que large dans sa plus grande largeur, tres
densement pointille, un peu plus fortement sur les marges late-
rales ; angles anterieurs et posterieurs obtus, a peine emousses ;
cotes finement rebordes; base tronquee, brievement sinuee de
ehaque cote de Fecusson, tres finement rebordee. Ecusson
presqu'en forme de demi-cercle, finement et tres densement
pointille. Elytres tronques a la base, arrondis aux epaules, sub-
paralleles, arrondis aux angles posterieurs-externes, separement
et tres largement arrondis au sommet, un peu moins longs que
larges ensemble, finement ponctues-stries ; stries entieres ; inter-
valles larges, chacun avec une ligne de points beaucoup plus larges
que les stries; calus humeraux marques; marges laterales fort-
ement declives, tres etroitement rebordees. Segments apparents
de Tabdomen tres densement pointilles; dessous roux testace,
glabre; 1«' et 2« segment (1^^ mesure entre la hanche et le som-
met) subegaux, plus courts que le 3«, 5« presqu'aussi long que 3«
et 4® reunis.
Amystrops bakeri sp. nov.
Breviter oblongus, convexiusculus, nitidulus, tenuissime flavo-
pubescens, ferrugineus, creberrime tenuissimeque punctulatus.
Antennae fere breves; 1° articulo incrassato, intus valde rotun-
dato-producto, clava paulo longiore quam latiore, articulis baud
densatis. Caput transversissimum, subdepressum, antice sinu-
atum, dense punctulatum; oculis productis, temporibus baud
indicatis, lateribus retrorsum valde convergentibus. Prothorax
transversissimus, antice valde angustatus ; margine antico medio
truncato, utrinque antrorsum late subanguloso-producto ; later-
ibus arcuatis, juxta basin parallelis, praecipue ad basin sat late
concavo-explanatis ; angulis posticis acutis, retrorsum productis ;
basi medio subsinuata, utrinque ante angulos posticos subtrunca-
ta. Scutellum triangulare, transversissimum. Elytra humeris
IX, D, 6 Grouvelle: Nitidididae cles Philippines 537
rotundata, lateribus arcuata, vix ampliata, apice subtruncata,
breviora quam simul in maxima latitudine latiora; elytrorum
angulis suturalibus breviter rotundatis. Pygidium apice rotun-
dato-acuminatum.
Long., 2.3 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios (2 individus).
Oblong, environ une fois et demie plus long que large dans sa
plus grande largeur, mediocrement convexe, couvert d'une pube-
scence flave, a peine visible, ferrugineux, faiblement brillant,
tres densement et tres finement pointille, sauf sur la tete. An-
tennes presque courtes; 1«^ article fortement dilate, arrondi en
dedans, a peine plus long que large, 2« a peine epaissi par rapport
au 3% un peu plus long que large; 3° moins d'une fois et demie plus
long que large, 4« et 5« subcarres, 6« un peu transversal, 7« encore
plus, 8« tres court et plus large que les precedents; 9** a 11«
formant une massue tres accentuee, un peu plus longue que large,
legerement attenuee vers Textremite, a articles faiblement sep-
ares dont le 2« article est un peu plus court que le 1^' et assez
nettement plus court que le 3% ce dernier termine par un bouton
conique tres surbaisse. Tete beaucoup plus de deux fois plus
large que longue, subdeprimee, densement pointillee, impression-
nee de chaque cote vers la naissance de Tantenne ; bords lateraux
fortement convergents en arriere avant les yeux, sinues en avant
pour rinsertion des antennes; epistome parallele, faiblement
sinue en avant; labre bien visible, arrondi aux angles anterieurs,
sinue au milieu de sa marge apicale ; yeux tres saillants ; tempes
nulles. Prothorax tres retreci an avant, arrondi sur les cotes,
subparallele a la base, environ deux fois et i plus large a la base
que long ; bord anterieur tronque au milieu, saillant en avant, de
chaque cote, en formant un lobe anguleux emousse ; cotes bordes
par un fin bourrelet et par une marge concave plutot etroite en
avant, dilatee sur la region des angles posterieurs ; ceux-ci aigus,
un peu saillants en arriere ; base largement subsinuee au milieu,
presque tronque de chaque cote de cette sinuosite; ponctuation
dessinant presque des strigosites transversales. Ecusson trian-
gulaire, plus de deux fois plus large a la base que long. Elytres
sinues a la base de chaque cote de Tecusson, arrondis aux epaules,
arques sur les cotes, a peine elargis, presque tronques ensemble
au sommet, nettement moins longs que larges ensemble; angles
suturaux brevement arrondis; marges laterales bordees par un
fin bourrelet efface vers le sommet et par une marge concave
plus large a la base que celle du prothorax en avant, s'effacant
vers Textremite de Telytre, se raccordant avec le disque de
538 ^^^^ Philippine Journal of Science 1914
Telytre par une partie en pente assez inclinee; calus humeraux
assez marques. Pygidium deprime, emousse a Textremite, den-
sement et finement pubescent. Pygidium du male tronque,
complete par un segment supplementaire triangulaire, emouss^
au sommet.
Haptoneus latior sp. nov.
$ : Breviter ovatus, ad apicem attenuatus, convexus, nitidus,
vix perspicue flavo-pubescens, ferrugineo-testaceous. Antenna-
rum primum articulum intus rotundato-dilatatum, tam elon-
gatum quam latum; clava sesquilongior quam latior. Caput
transversissimum occipite convexum, fronte subdepressum, an-
tice modice sinuatum, tenuissime et parce punctulatum ; oculis
prominulis, temporibus minutissimis acutis. Prothorax trans-
versissimus, antice valde angustatus, tenuiter parceque punctu-
latus; margine antico medio truncato, utrinque antrorsum late
et modice rotundato-producto ; lateribus arcuatis, fere stricte
explanato-marginatis ; angulis posticis acutis, hebetatis, retror-
sum leviter productis; basi ante scutellum et utrinque inter
scutellum et angulos porticos subsinuata. Scutellum triangulare,
basi duplo latius quam longius, vix perspicue punctulatum. Ely-
tra basi quam prothorax paulo angustiora, humeris obtuse angu-
losa, apicem versus arcuatim angustata, apice fere conjunctim
truncata, breviora quam simul basi latiora, subdense punctulata,
lateribus latius quam prothorax explanato-marginata. Pygidium
depressum, apice breviter rotundatum. Tibiae intermediae pos-
ticaeque maris circiter ad medium dilatatae.
Long., 1.7 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios (1 individu).
Ovale, attenue vers Textremite du corps, environ une fois et
un tiers plus long que large dans sa plus grande largeur, assez
convexe, brillant, a peine visiblement pubescent, d'un testace
f errugineux. Antennes mediocrement longues ; 1*^ article epais,
fortement arrondi en dedands, environ aussi long que large, 2«
un peu epais, moins d'une fois et demie plus long que large, 3«
a 8« progressivement un peu plus larges, 3* environ une fois et
demie plus long que large, 4^ et 5« subcarres, 6« a 8« progressive-
ment plus transversaux, 9« a 11« formant une massue compacte,
environ une fois et demie plus longue que large, dont le premier
article presqu'en forme de demi-sphere est plus long que less
deux autres, et dont le dernier un peu plus etroit que le precedent
est termine par un bouton subconique, tres surbaisse. Tete
environ deux fois plus large que longe, se retrecissant fortement
en avant et en arriere des yeux, convexe sur Tocciput, subdepri-
IX, D, 6 Grouvelle: Nitidulidse des Philippines 539
mee sur le front, brevement et transversalement retrecie entre
le bord anterieur de Toeil et Tinsertion de Tantenne, peu saillante
en avant de celle-ci, legerement sinuee au bord anterieur, couverte
d'une ponctuation extremement fine et eparse; yeux echancrant
moderement les marges du front, saillants, tempes tres petites,
aigues. Prothorax tres retreci en avant, presque parallele a la
base, arrondi sur les cotes, environ deux fois plus long a la base
que long, eparsement ponctue, mais un peu plus fortement que
la tete; bord anterieur tronque au milieu, moderement saillant
en avant de chaque cote en lobe largement arrondi ; cotes bordes
par une marge concave presqu'etroite ; angles posterieurs un peu
saillants en arriere, emousses; base subsinuee devant Tecusson
et largement subsinuee de chaque cote entre Tecusson et Textre-
mite. Ecusson triangulaire, deux fois plus large a la base que
long, eparsement et a peine visiblement pointille. Elytres un
peu plus etroits a la base que le prothorax, en angle obtus aux
epaules, arques, attenues vers Textremite separement et un peu
obliquement tronques au sommet, nettement moins longs que
larges ensemble a la base, converts d'une ponctuation assez dense
plus forte que celle du prothorax, attenuee vers le sommet ; bords
lateraux bordes un peu plus largement que ceux du prothorax;
marges laterales du disque brusquement declives; calus hume-
raux a peine marques. Tibias intermediaires et posterieurs du
male elargis dans la moitie apicale.
Appartient au groupe de H. lotrolus Er., mais taille plus grande
et forme beaucoup plus large.
Aphenolia bakeri sp. no v.
Oblonga, modice convexa, nitidula, glabra, testaceo-ferruginea.
Antennae modicissime elongatae; 1^ articulo intus valde lobato-
producto, clava sesquilongiore quam latiore, 2^ articulo transver-
sissimo, quam 1^ et 3° paulo latiore. Caput transversum, con-
vexiusculum, antice truncatum, dense punctulatum, utrinque ad
antennae basin puncto notatum; oculis prominulis. Prothorax
antice quam postice paulo angustior, lateribus praecipue ad basin
arcuatus, vix perspicue undulatus, fere 2 et i latior in maxima
latudine quam longior ; crebre punctulatus ; margine antico medio
truncato, utrinque oblique lateque modice producto; angulis an-
ticis hebetatis, posticis obtusis, marginibus lateralibus antice
modice, ante angulos late concavo-explanatis ; basi truncata, vix
perspicue marginata. Scutellum transversum, subtriangulare,
crebre punctulatum. Elytra humeris rotundata, lateribus ar-
cuata, parum ampliata, apice separatim sub-oblique truncata, 1
et J longiora quam simul in maxima latitudine latiora, crebre et
540 ^^^^ Philippine Joimial of Science ish
quam prothorax paulo validius punctata; lateribus stricte mar-
ginatis. Pygidium in maxima parte apertum, apice acuminatum,
crebre punctulatum.
Long., 3 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Bafios (1 individu).
Oblong, un peu plus de deux fois et demie plus long que large
dans sa plus grande largeur, moderement convexe, un peu brillant,
glabre, testace-f errugineux. Antennes mediocrement allongees ;
1«^ article dilate en dedans en lobe arrondi; 2« un peu epais,
environ une fois et demie plus long que large; 3® grele, plus
d'une fois et demie plus long que large ; 4^ a 8« progressivement
un peu plus epais ; 4« et 5^ subcarres ; 6« et 7® moderement trans-
versaux, 8® nettement transversal; 9® a 11® formant une massue
environ une fois et demie plus longue que large, dont le 2^ article
est tres transversal et un peu plus large que les deux autres et
dont le dernier est en majeure partie forme d'un bouton apical
conique. Tete environ deux fois plus large que longue, retrecie
transversalement en avant des yeux, obliquement en arriere;
epistome parallele, tronquee au bord anterieur; occiput convexe,
front subdeprime, densement pointille, marque de chaque cote
pres de la base de Tantenne d'un point enfonce ; yeux echancrant
moderement les marges laterales du front, presentant une saillie
transversable subegale a la longueur du bord de Torbite; labre
profondement et etroitement incise au milieu, environ quatre
fois plus large a la base que long. Prothorax un peu plus retreci
en avant qu'a la base, arrondi, a peine ondule sur les cotes,
presentant sa plus grande largeur vers le premier quart de la
longueur a partir de la base, environ deux fois et un tiers plus
large dans sa plus grande largeur que long ; bord anterieur assez
brievement tronque dans le milieu, saillant un peu obliquement
en avant de chaque cote, en formant un arc peu accentu^ et peu
regulier; angles anterieurs obtus, emousses, posterieurs obtus;
base tronquee, tres finement et a peine visiblement rebordee.
Bords lateraux bordes par une marge explanee concave, tres
moderement large, se developpant sur la region des angles pos-
terieurs, se raccordant en pente peu prononcee avec le disque;
ponctuation fine tres serree. Ecusson subtriangulaire, trans-
versal, tres densement pointille. Elytres tronques a la base,
brievement arrondis aux epaules, arques sur les cotes, tres fai-
blement elargis, obliquement et separement tronques au sommet,
environ une fois et un tiers plus longs que larges ensemble dans
leur plus grande largeur, converts d'una ponctuation tres serree,
un peu plus forte que celle du prothorax ; marges laterales etroi-
IX, D, 6 Grouvelle: Nitidulidse des Philippines 541
tement rebordees, raccordees avec le disque des elytres par une
pente presque normale au plan de Tinsecte; calus humeraux a
peine marques. Pygidium acumine au sommet, en majeure
partie decouvert, un peu convexe, tres densement et tres finement
ponctue.
Cryptarcha bakeri sp. nov.
S : Ovata, convexa, nitidula, tenuiter alutacea, pube flava in
prothoracis marginibus anticis lateralibusque densata vestita,
picea ; margine antico capitis prothoracisque dilutiore, in singulo
elytro duabus maculis fuseo-rufis: 1» basilari, juxta callum hum-
erale, 2» transversa, antrorsum arcuata, ultra medium, suturam
subattingente. Antennae breves; clava sesquilongiore quam
latiore, I*' articulo conico, transverse, 2° transversissimo, 3°
transverssissimo, sed quam 2° paulo angustiore, apice pulvino
acuminate, valdissime depresso, terminate. Caput transversum,
dense punctulatum; margine antico inflexo, subtruncato. Pro-
thorax transversus, antice valde augustatus, dense punctulatus ;
margine antico late et baud prof unde emarginato ; angulis anticis
antrorsum productis; lateribus arcuatis, juxta basin, ad apicem
modice convergentibus ; angulis posticis acutis, retrorsum prod-
uctis ; basi subtruncata, utrinque scutelli breviter sinuata. Scu-
tellum transversissimum, apice late rotundatum, tenuissime
alutaceum. Elytra fere sesquilongiora quam simul basi latiora,
apice conjunctim rotundata, dense punctulata, punctis subasperis.
Long., 3.2 mm.
Luzon, Laguna, Los Baiios (1 individu).
Ovale, environ deux fois et un tiers plus long que large dans
sa plus grande largeur, convexe peu brillant, tres finement alutace,
convert d'une pubescence flave, plus allongee et plus dense sur
le bord anterieur du prothorax et sur ses marges laterales, for-
mant des bordures laterales beaucoup plus larges que la bordure
anterieure; couleur brun de poix, plus claire sur le devant de
la tete et vers les marges laterales du prothorax; sur chaque
elytre deux taches d'un roux sombre : la 1^« basilaire, suballongee,
en dedans du calus humeral, la 2« au dela du milieu, transversale,
arquee en avant, atteignant presque la suture et se continuant
centre le bord lateral par une tres etroite bordure atteignant le
sommet. Antennes brun de poix clair, relativement courtes ; 1«'
article plus epais, moins de deux fois plus long que large; 2*
moins epais, environ une fois et demie plus long que large; 3«
grele environ aussi long que 3^; 4« et 5« subegaux, un peu allonges;
6« a 8® subcarres; 9* a 11* formant une massue bien accentuee,
542 The Philippine Journal of Science
environ une fois et demie plus longue que large, dont le 1«^* article
transversal est en forme de tronc de cone renverse, le 2« est
tres transversal et le 3« subegal au 2« mais un peu plus etroit
et termine par un bouton acumine a peine saillant. Tete arrondie
en avant, plus de deux fois plus large que longue, densement
pointillee; marge anterieure inflechie, subtronquee; labre cache,
yeux non saillants. Prothorax retreci en avant, arrondi sur les
cotes, legerement retreci vers Tavant, dans la partie basilaire,
tres nettement plus de deux fois plus large a la base que long,
a peu pres ponctue comme la tete ; bord anterieur vu de dessous
largement et peu prof ondement echancre, arrondi dans le milieu ;
angles anterieurs, vus de dessous, un peu aigus, saillants en avant,
vus de face egalement aigus, finement rebordes comme les cotes ;
angles posterieurs saillants en arriere, vus de dessus un peu aigus,
vus de face presque droits ; base subtronquee en dedans des angles
posterieurs, brievement sinuee de chaque cote de Tecusson.
Ecusson tres transversal, largement arrondi au sommet, tres
finement alutace. Elytres arques a la base, en angles obtus, a
peine emousses aux epaules, retrecis vers le sommet, arrondis
ensemble a Textremite, brievement dehiscentes, converts de points
subrapeux, un peu plus forts et plus serres a la base que ceux
du prothorax, attenues vers le sommet; stries suturales effacees
sur la moitie basilaire de la longueur. Pattes larges. Dernier
segment de Tabdomen du male releve dans la partie mediane de sa
marge apicale; avant-dernier legerement impressionne.
INDEX
[New names are printed in heavy-faced type ; numbers in italic indicate synonyms or refer-
ences of minor importance.]
Aban, organization of, 517.
Acanthocepola krusensternii (Temm. and
Schleg.), 69.
Acanthocera Melichar, 435.
punctifrons Melichar, 436.
Acarua, 2S1.
Achilinae, 176.
Acidopria monachanta Kieffer, 287.
tetratoma Kieffer, 287.
tricornuta Crawford, 287.
variicornis Kieffer, 287.
Aclista punctulata Kieffer, 287.
Acmaeodera luzonica Nonfr., 83.
Aeolus luteipes Crawford, 286.
Acromitus, 210.
maculosus Light, 195, 197, 212.
^^gle sepiaria DC, 250.
^olus beccarii Candeze, 441.
multilineatus, 44i.
Agaua barrio, 506.
Ageha, 250.
Agrilus atomus Kerremans, 87.
bakeri Kerremans, 85.
balnearis Kerremans, 87.
discicollis H. Deyr., 85.
fontanus Kerremans, 86.
luzonicus Kerremans, 84.
monticola Kerremans, 85.
nigrocinctus Saund., 85.
vilis Saund., 85.
Agrypnus bifoveatus Candeze, 441.
Alacan, old name for Ampusungan, 471.
Alaus scytale Candeze, 441.
Albatross collection, 196.
Alcyonaria, Philippine, notes on, part II, 233.
Alcyonium ramosa Q. and G., 237.
Allocynips Kieffer, 185.
ruficeps Kieffer, 186.
Alpheus, 324.
Alseodaphne, 254.
Ambassida?, 65.
Amblygaster clupeoides (Bleeker), 11.
perforatum (Cantor), 11.
sirm (Riippell), 11.
Amia bifasciata (Riippell), 63.
doderleini Jordan and Snyder, 64.
elizabethsB Jordan and Seale, 63.
frsenata Valenciennes, 64-
kiensis Jordan and Snyder, 64.
lineatus (Schlegel), 64.
marginatus Doderlein, 64.
semilineatus (Schlegel), 64.
trimaculatus Richardson, 6S.
Ammothea (Alcyonium) ramosa (Q. and G.),
237.
carnosa KUken., 239.
digitatum May, 237, 238.
Ampusungan, manuscript from, 471.
Amystrops bakeri Grouvelle, 536.
Anasis Isevicollis Raffray, 454.
Anchastus rufangulus Candeze, 446.
unicolor Candeze, 446.
vittatus Fleut., 445.
Anchovia dussumieri Cuv. and Val., 59.
indica (Van Hasselt), 59.
Anchovies, 11, 59.
Angaki, barrios of, 473.
manuscript from, 473.
Anito, 472.
Anopedias luzonicus Ashmead, 286.
Anteris atriceps Kieffer, 286.
Ao-gashi, 255.
Aosuji-ageha, 252.
Ao-tsuzura, 256.
Aparamesius carinatus Kieffer, 287.
depressus Kieffer, 287.
filicornis Kieffer, 287.
levistilus Kieffer, 287.
Apegus I'oerster, 295.
maquilingensis Kieffer, 295.
Aphanisticus bodongi Kerremans, 88.
Aphenolia bakeri Grouvelle, 539.
Apobletes corticalis Lewis, 423.
difficile Schm., 424.
feriatus Lewis, 423.
fictitius Lewis, 424.
platysomoides Lewis, 424'
schaumi Mars, 423.
semperi Lewis, 424-
tener Marseul, 423.
Apobletus diosipygus Marseul, 426.
Apocryptes bato (Hamilton-Buchanan), 77.
Apogonichtyidse, 63.
Aristolochia debilis S. and Z., 256.
Arius falcarius Richardson, 60.
Ashmeadopria Kieffer, 308.
bakeri Kieffer, 287, 308.
bipunctata Kieffer, 287, 308,
309.
luzonica Kieffer, 308.
nigriventris Kieffer, 287, 308.
subcarinata Kieffer, 308, 309.
(?) trichota Kieffer. 309.
Atherina bleekeri Gunther, 60.
forskilii Ruppell, 60.
Atherinidae, 60.
Atholus torquatus Mars., 428.
543
544
Index
Atolla bairdii Fewkes forma valdivise Van-
hoffen, 196.
wyvillei Haeckel, 196.
Atya. 324.
Augila St^l, 278.
Augilina Melichar, 276, »78,
longipes Melichar, 276.
Aurantiacese, 254.
solida Browne, 200.
Aureliia labiata Chamisso and Eysenhardt,
195, 197, 200.
BacJad, used in catching crustaceans, 320.
Bagnen. description, religion, and customs of,
481.
Bagoong, 4.
BAKER, C. F., Studies in Philippine Jas-
soidea: 1, Some remarkable Tettigoniellidae,
409.
Bamboo grass, 260.
Bambusaria Melichar, 274.
picta Melichar, 274.
Banaao, barrios of, 484.
climate of, 488.
Banak, 4.
Banded barracuda, 61.
Bandfishes, 69.
Banguitan barrio, 507.
BANKS, CHARLES S., A new Philippine ma-
laria mosquito, 405.
Barbus bantolanensis Day, 188.
ivis Seale, 191.
manguaoensis Day, 189.
palawanensis Boulenger, 191.
Barracuda, 7, 61.
banded, 61.
Batraxis hirtella Raffray, ^52.
nitidula Raffray, 452.
pubescens Raffray, 452.
sinensis Raffray, i5S.
Batrisocenus clavipes Raffray, 452.
hamatipes Raffi-ay, 452.
squamiceps Raffray, 452.
tumidipes Raffray, 451.
Batrisodes cavicola Raffray, 451.
clavipes Raffray, ASH.
hamatipes Raffray, 452.
squamiceps Raffray, 452.
tumidipes Raffray, 451.
verticinus Raffray, 451.
Batrisus cavicola Raffray, 451.
verticinus Raffray, 451.
Bauco, barrio of, 493.
customs in, 494.
its barrios and general history, 492.
marrying children in, 493.
Belionota fallaciosa H. Deyr., 84.
Belonidse, 60.
Belytidse, 287» 310.
Benna Walker, 176.
sinuata Melichar, 269.
Bennaria Melichar, 175.
bimacula Melichar, 175.
Besao, barrios of, 498.
history of, 498.
Bethylidae, 285.
Bhooria, 410.
BICKHARDT, H., Philippinische Histeriden :
I, 423.
Birth of a child, Igorot customs in connec-
tion with, 508.
Bloaters, 8.
Bobo, used in catching crustaceans, 320.
Bolarge, 4.
Boleophthalmus boddaerti Schlegel, 74.
chinensis (Osbeck), 74.
glaucus Day, 74.
Bostrychus sinensis (Lacep^de), 74.
Brachypeplus ornatus Grouvelle, 535.
Bryaxis dama Raffray, 454.
laevicollis Raffray, 454.
laticollis Raffray, 45S,
manillensis Raffray, 45S.
Buprestides recueillis aux iles Philippines par
C. F. Baker, 83.
Butis butis (Hamilton-Buchanan), 74.
caperata Cantor, 74.
Butterfishes, 63.
Butterfly fishes, 71.
C
CAIN, ANDREW W., History of the Spanish
normal school for men teachers in Manila,
1865-1906, 123.
Callinesia fimbriolata Melichar, 17H.
philippina Melichar, 178.
Callionymidae, 79.
Callionymus curvicornis Cuv. and Val., 79.
hindsii Richardson, 79.
Calliscelio philippinensis Kieffer, 286.
Callyodon dubius Bennett, 70.
limbatus (Richardson), 70.
Carama Distant, 434.
dilatata Distant, 434.
Camphora officinalis, 254.
Camptoteleia Kieffer, 296.
carinata Kieffer, 286, 296.
cupularis Kieffer, 296, 298.
excavata Kieffer, 286, 296.
flavipennis Kieffer, 296, 297.
magna Kieffer, 296.
Cafiao, 472.
planting and harvesting, 525.
Caiiaos, descriptions of various kinds of, 489,
613.
Carangidae, 62.
Caranx boops Cuv. and Val., 62.
calla Cuv. and Val., 62.
djeddaba (Forsk&l), 62.
malabaricus (Bloch and Sch.), 62.
ophthalmotaenia (Bleeker), 62.
Caranx, young of, living in medusae, 221, 230.
Cardinal fishes, 63.
Cardiophorus bakeri Fleut., 446.
elegans Cand^ze, 446.
Carp, 60.
Carybdea alata Reynaud. var. moseri Mayer.
196.
rastonii Haacke, 196.
Index
545
Cassiopea medusa Light, 195, 197, 204.
ornata Haeckel, 197.
polypoides Keller (?), 195, 197, 203.
var. culionensis Light,
195, 197, 201.
xamachana, 206.
Catfish, smoked, 9.
Catfishes, 60.
Catostylus purpurus Mayer, 195, 197, 207,
Cavalla, 7, 62.
Cayen, barrios of, 509.
customs of people in, 510.
Centrophthalmus clavatus Raff ray, 454,
philippinensis Raffray, 454.
Cephalacanthidse, 78.
Cephalacanthus orientalis Cuv. and Val., 78.
Cephalopholis beenack (Bloch), 65.
Cephea cephea (Forsk&l) Mayer, 195, 197, 206.
octostyla L. Agassiz, 197.
Cepolidae, 69.
Ceraphron manilae Ashmead, 287.
Ceraphronidae, 287.
Ceratopsilus rufipes Kieffer, 286.
Cercocephala bakeri Crawford, 460.
(Chajtospila) elegans Westwood,
i61.
Cervantes, barrios of, 512.
Cluptodon aureus Giinther, 71.
aureus Temm. and Schleg., 71.
bella-maris SeaJe, 72.
collaris Bloch, 71, 72.
coUaris Day, 72.
collaris Giinther, 72.
^ collaris Jordan and Fowler, 71.
desmotes Jordan and Fowler, 72.
fasciatus Bleeker, 73.
lunula Lacepede, 73.
modestus Temm. and Schley., 72.
praetextatus Cantor, 71.
rafflesii Bennett, 72.
reticulatus Cuv. and Val., 71, 72.
Chaitodontidae, 71.
Chalcididte, 457.
Chal yu, 61.
Charibdis (Gonionemus) crucifera (Fabr.) M.
Edwards, 230.
Charybdea philippina Haeckel, 196.
Chiropsalmus quadripratus Haeckel, 195, 196,
197, 199.
Chick yu, 60.
Chi yu, 62.
Chlorepyris flavipennis Kieffer, 285.
Chrerops ommopterus Richardson, 70.
Chrestoteleia bakeri Kieffer, 286.
CHRISTIE, EMERSON B., Notes on irriga-
tion and cooperative irrigation societies in
Ilocos Norte, 99 ; Notes on the pottery in-
dustry in San Nicolas, Ilocos Norte, 117.
"Chrysaora stage" of Dactylometra quinque-
cirrha, 195, 196.
Chrysobothris bistripunctata H. Deyr., 84.
Chrysodema adjuncta Saund., 83.
eximia Cast, et Gory, 83.
Cinetus maquilingensis Kieffer, 311.
Cinnamomeum, 254-
Cirrhitidae, 69.
130429 6
Cirrhtities aureus (Temm. and Schleg.). 69.
oxycephalus Bleeker, 69.
Citrus nobilis Lour., 251.
Cixiinaj, 174, 269.
Cleistepyris minimus Kieffer, 285.
minor Kieffer, 285.
philippinensis Kieffer, 285.
Clothes, material used by Igorots, 525.
Cocculus thunbergii DC, 250.
Cologlyptus kiefferi Crawford, 287.
Complaints, Igorot manner of settling, 625.
Concepcion, barrios of, 515.
people of, their customs and life,
515.
Concubinage among Igorots, 516.
Copper, discovery of, by Igorots, 519.
Cornet fishes, 62.
Corvina catalea Richardson, 68.
Corymbites, US.
Cosmodesmus Haase, 252.
Cothonaspis (Hexaplasta) minima Kieffer, 184.
COWLES, R. P., Palaemons of the Philippine
Islands, 319.
Crabs, salted, 4.
Crambione, 211.
CRAWFORD. J. C, New Philippine Hy men-
op tera, 457.
Croakers, 68.
Crocodile, nesting of, 313.
Crocodilus palustris Lesson, notes on a nest-
ing place of, 313.
porosus Schneid., 315.
Cinistacean, flying, in the Philippine Islands,
57.
Crustaceans of the genus Palaemon, 319.
Cryptarcha bakeri Grouvelle, 541.
Cryptocentrus filifer (Cuv. and Val.), 76.
venustus Seale, 76.
Cryptodactylus philippinensis Saund., 84.
Ctenophores, 196.
Cynanchum caudatum Maxim., X56,
Cynipides, nouveaux, des Philippines, 183.
Cynoglossus abreviatus Gray, 78.
melanopterus Richardson, 78.
Cyprinidas, 60.
Cyprinoid fishes of the genus Barbus, from
Lake Manguao, Palawan, 187.
Cyprinus carpio (Linn.), 60.
Cypsilurus simus (Cuv. and Val.), 60.
1)
Dacnotillus simoni Raffray, 455.
Dactylometra quinquecirrha L. Agassiz, 195,
196, 198, 221.
Dala, used in catching crustaceans, 320.
Dalchina teredon Felder, 253.
DAY, ARTEMAS L., The osseous system of
Ophiocephalus striatus Bloch, 19 ; Two new
cyprinoid fishes of the genus Barbus from
Lake Manguao, Palawan, P. I., 187.
Dead, canao for the, 524.
Death among Igorots, customs at, 508.
Debis diana Butler, 261.
sicelis Hewitson, 260.
Delphacinae, 273.
546
Index
Dendrokara Melichar, 272.
monstrosa Melichar, 272.
torva Melichar, 273.
Derbinse, 269.
Diapriidae, 287, 301.
Dicercomorpha argenteoguttata Thorns., 83.
Dicronychus baker! Fleut., 449.
cinnamomeus Cand^ze, U9.
Digalesus Keiffer, 803.
flavipes Kieffer, 303.
Dilapitha Keiffer, 293.
albipes Kieffer, 293.
nitida Kieffer, 294.
Diploconus bakewellii Fleut., 447.
erythronotus Candeze, 447.
obscurus Fleut., 447, US.
philippinnensis Fleut., 447.
politus Candeze, 447.
umbilicatus Candeze, 446, U7.
Diploprion bifasciatum (Kuhl and Van Has-
selt), 66.
Discomedusa philippina Mayer, 197.
Dissomphalus tibialis Ashmead, 285.
Dragonels, 79.
Drasterius sulcatulus Candeze, 442.
Drepana punctata Giinther, 71.
Drepane punctata (Gmelin), 71.
Drepanidae, 71.
DryinidsB, 285.
Dryinus, 285.
Dussumiera acuta Cuv. and Val., 11.
elopsoides Bleeker, 11.
hasseltii Bleeker, 11.
Duymairia aurigaria Giinther, 69.
flagellifera Cuv. and Val., 69.
flagellifera Jordan and Snyder, 69.
Dystheatias fuscovenosa Melichar, 174.
punctata Melichar, 174.
Eels, smoked, 9.
Elasmidae, 461.
Elasmus ashmeadi Crawford, 462.
elegans Crawford, 461.
lutens Crawford, 461
philippinensis Ashmead, ^61.
Elateridae des iles Philippines, 441.
Eleotridse, 74.
Eleotrids, 74.
Endelus bakeri Kerremans, 88.
Engraulidse, 11, 59.
Engraulis russellii Giinther, 59.
Entedon magnus Crawford, 462, 1^6S.
manilensis Crawford, 463.
Enumeration des Serp hides (Proctrotrupides)
des iles Philippines, avec description de
genres nouveaux et d'especes nouvelles, 285.
Ephippidse, 71.
Ephippus orbis (Bloch), 71.
Epidelus wallacei Thorns., 83.
Epierus nasicornls Bickh., 429.
Epinephelus boenack (Bloch), 65.
dermopterus (T. and S.), 65.
gilberti Richardson, 66.
merra Bloch, 65.
moara (Schlegel), 65.
septemfasciatus Thumb., 65.
Epyris Westwood, 288.
apertus Kieffer, 285.
ftliformis Kieffer, 288.
philippinensis Kieffer, 285.
Equula insidiator (Bloch), 63.
iniconia (Hamilton-Buchanan), 63.
Equulida, 63.
Eucoelidea mactuilingensis Kieffer, 184.
Eulophidse, 462.
Eupilis hyalinocosta Melichar, 279.
nigrinervis St&l, 278.
rubrovenosa Melichar, 278.
Euplectrus bussyi Crawford, 4^4.
flavescens Crawford, 463.
rugosus Crawford, 464.
Euplectus crassipes Raffray, 451.
Eurynomeus Kirk., 176.
Exoccetidse, 600.
F
Fa paw poong, 60.
Fenuahala maculipennis Melichar, 436.
Filefishes, 73.
Fish, and fishery products, preservation in
the tropics, 1.
drying, 1.
marinated, 9.
pickling, 2.
preparing for shipment, 14.
preserving by smoking, 5.
refrigeration of, 12.
salting, 1.
Fishes, clupeoid, in Philippine waters, 11.
of Hongkong, 59.
Fistularia serrata Cuv., 62.
Fistulariidae, 62.
Flatheads, 77.
FLEUTIAUX, ED., Elaterid^ des iles Philip-
pines, 441.
Flying crustacean, 57.
fishes, 60.
gurnards, 78.
Foenobethylus gracilis Kieffer, 285.
Fosforo, 199.
Fulgoridon, neue, 433.
von den Philippinen, 269.
Galesus Curtis, 303, 306.
clavaticornis Kieffer, 287, 306.
crawfordi Kieffer, 287, 306.
curticeps Kieffer, 287, 306.
luzonicus Ashmead, 287, 306.
manilae Ashmead, 287, 306.
philippinensis Kieffer, 306.
(Schizogalesus) lineatus Kieffer, 306.
Garfishes, 60.
Garoupa, 65.
Geijera salicifolia, 254.
Gerridas, 67.
Glossogobius giuris (Hamilton-Buchanan), 75.
Glyphonyx erraticus Candeze, 449.
var, attonitus Candeze,
U9.
posticus ( ?) Candeze, 449.
Gobies, 74.
Index
547
Gobiichthys tentacularis (Cuv. and Val.), 76.
Gobiidae, 74.
Gobius pectinirostris Gmelin, 74.
poecililicthys Jordan and Snyder, 75.
Gold, discovery of, by Igorots, 520.
Goniozus Foerster, 288.
depressus Kieffer, 285, 288.
philippinensis Ashmead, 285, 288.
triangulifer Kieffer, 288.
GROUVELLE, A., Nitidulidae des Philippines
recoltes par C. F. Baker, 535.
(brunts, 66.
H
Habroteleia browni Crawford, 286.
Hadronotus flavipes Ashmead, 286.
philippinensis Ashmead, 286.
Hagmulidse, 67.
Hak chong, 63.
Halfbeak, 60.
Halichoeres dussumieri (Cuv, and Val.), 70.
javanicus Sleeker, 70.
nigrescens Bleeker, 70.
poecilopterus (Schlegel), 70.
Haploneus latter Grouvelle, 538.
lotrolus Er., 589.
Harima Moore, 263.
Harvesting, canao for, 525.
Hemigalesus Kieffer, 304.
auriculatus Kieffer, 304, S06,
brevicornis Kieffer, 287, 304.
dentatus Kieffer, 304, 305.
gracilis Kieffer, 287, 304.
longirostrum Kieffer, 304, 305.
niger Kieffer, 287, 304.
rufus Kieffer, 287, 304.
Hemiops semperi Candeze, 449.
Hemiramphus cantoris Bleeker, 60.
Hemisphaerius af&nis Melichar, 279.
chlorophanus Melichar, t79.
rufus Melichar, 280.
triangularis Melichar, 279.
Herring, 6.
kippered, 8.
smoked, 8.
Heteroderes, 4U.
drasterioides Fleutiaux, 442.
intermedins Candeze, M^.
proximus Fleutiaux, U2.
triangularis Esch., US.
Hih pe yang, 73.
Hikage-cho, 260.
Hime-janome, 264.
Hime-kimadara-kikage, 263.
Hister (Antholus) bakeri Bickh., 428.
Histeriden, Philippinische, 423.
History of the Spanish normal school for men
teachers in Manila, 1865-1905, 123.
Holocentridae, 62.
Holocentrus ruber Lac6pede, 62.
Hololepta elongata Erichson, 423.
Homopteren von den Philippinen, 173.
Hongkong, fishes of, 69.
Hoplogryon fiiaviclava Kieffer, 286.
longispina Kieffer, 286.
roberti Crawford, 286.
striaticeps Crawford, 286.
Hoploteleia Ashmead, 292.
carinata Kieffer, 286, 292.
pacifica Ashmead, 286.
philippinensis Kieffer, 286.
unidens Kieffer, 286.
Houses, Igorot method of building, 617.
Hymenoptera, new Philippine, 457.
Hypnoidus bakeri Fleutiaux, 446.
I Igorots, Christians and, enmity between, 602.
I custom of dressing, 486.
I customs of, 494.
i discovery of copper by, 619.
! gold by, 620.
I Lepanto, 466.
I manner of settling complaints, 625.
I working, 488.
marrying customs, 487, 523.
I materials used for clothes by, 625.
superstitions of, 486, 626.
thieves among, 516.
Ikema, 256.
Ikisha hoevenii (Bleeker), 11,
Hocos Norle, irrigation and cooperative irri-
gation societies in, 99.
the pottery industry in San Ni-
colas, 117.
Imperata arundinacea Cyr., £60.
Indian spadefishes, 71.
Intempus punctatissimus Reitter, 461.
Inu-gusu, 255.
Inu-zansho, 260.
Irrigation and cooperative irrigation societies
in Hocos Norte, 99.
Jako-ageha, 255.
Japanese Lepidoptera and their larvae, notes
on, 247.
Jassoidea, studies in Philippine, 409.
Jelly-fish, poisoning by, 199.
Julis exornatus Richardson, 70,
K
Kaga-imo, 256.
Kai kung yu, 70.
Karatachi, 250.
Kasserota, S8J.
Kaya, 260.
KERREMANS, CH., Buprestides recueillis aux
lies Philippines par C. F. Baker; I, 88.
KIEFFER, J. J., Nouveaux Cynipides des
Philippines, 183 ; Enumeration des Serphides
(Proctotrupides) des iles Philippines avec
description de genres nouveaux et d'esp^ea
nouvelles, 285.
Kimakara-hikage, 268.
Kirbyana Melichar, 174.
Kirrodesa Moore, 260.
Kiwada, 250.
Kolla Distant, 419.
548
Index
Kuro-hikagre, 261.
Kuro-hikage-modoki, 262.
Kuro-taimai, 252.
Labridae, 69.
Lacon cervinus Erichson, 441.
Lamenia flavescens Melichar, 179.
Lanerosta del mar, 324.
Lapithasa Malichar, 281.
bakeri Malichar, 281. |
Lap yu, 66. j
Larvae of Japanese lepidoptera, 247.
Lasiommata epimenides Men., 26J^. \
firaschkevitschii Felder, 259. \
goschkevitschii Men., t59. !
maacki Bremer, 262. \
Lauraceae, 253. \
Laurus camphora, 253.
Legrislation relating to Mountain Pix)vince,
466.
Leiognathus daura (Cuvier), 63.
edwardsi Evermann and Scale, 63.
virgatus Fowler, 63.
Lemnalia Gray, 2SJt, 242.
afrieana May, 236.
armatum Kukenthal, 236.
brassica May, 236.
elegans May, 286.
flava May, 236.
Lemnalioides kUkenthali Light, 283.
Lepanto, general history of, 470.
Igorots of, 465, 471.
people of, 467.
subprovince, manuscrips from, 466.
Lepidoptera and their larvae, notes on Jap-
anese, 247.
Leptaleocera bakeri Melichar, 271.
Lestodryinus browni Ashmead, 285. j
luzonicus Kieffer, 285. \
perkinsi Kieffer, 285. j
Lethe Hiibner, 260, 263. \
callipteris Butler, 264. j
celeja Fruhst., 262. !
consanguis Butler, 261, 262. \
diana Butler, 262. \
fixseni Butler, 262.
(H^ma) callipteris Butler, 263. I
(Kirrodesa) sicelis Hewitson, 260. |
labyrinthea Leech, 264. \
(Rangbia) diana Butler, 261.
sicelis Pryer, 260. \
var. vanelia Fruhst., 261.
(Tansima) marginalis Motschulsky, 262. ;
whitelyi Butler, 26U 262. j
Lethrinus mahsenoides Ehrenberg, 67. |
Leucospis bakeri Crawford, 457. j
pulchellus Crawford, 457.
LIGHT, S. F., Some Philippine Scyphomedusae,
including two new genera, five new species,
and one new variety, 195 ; Notes on Phil-
ippine Alcyonaria, Part II: Lemnalioides
ktikenthali, a new genus and species of
Alcyonaria from the Philippines and a dis-
cussion of the systematic position of the
new genus, 233.
Linuche aquila (Haeckel) Mayer, 196.
Liopteninae, 185.
Liopygus diopsipygus Marseul, 426.
Lipoglyptus primus Crawford, 287.
Lithophytum africanum, 239.
arboreoum (Q. and G.), 237.
armatum Kukenthal, 236.
brassica Kukenthal, 236.
carnosum (Kiikth.), 239.
elegans Ktikenthal, 236.
flavum, 239.
Litsaea, 25It.
Li yo, 60.
Lizard fishes, 59.
Lobonema Meyer, 216.
mayeri Light, 195, 197, 217, 221,
230.
smithii Mayer, 197, 199, 219, 221.
Lobonemoides gracilis Light, 195, 197, 222.
Loboscelidia rufescens Westwood, 287.
?Lophatherum elatum Zoll., 259, 260, 261, 263.
Lorifera flagellata (Haeckel) Mayer, 197.
Loxotropa philippinensis Kieffer, 287.
Ludius hirsutus Candeze, 448.
Lutianidse, 66.
Lutianus annularis (Cuv. and Val.), 66.
erythropterus Bloch, 66.
erythropterus Day, 66.
monostigma (Cuv. and Val.), 66.
Lychnorhyza, 212.
bartschi Mayer, 197.
M
Mababili barrio, story of, 478.
Machilus japonica S. and Z., 255.
odoratissima, 254.
thunburgii S. and Z., 253, 25i.
Mackerel family, 11.
Mackerels, 62.
Macroteleia Westwood, 298.
cavifrons Kieffer, 298, 299.
crawfordi Kieffer, 286, 298.
flaviceps Kieffer, 300.
kiefferi Brues, 286.
kiefferi Crawford, 286, 289.
manilensis Ashmead, 286, 298.
philippinensis Kieffer, 286, 298.
striativentris Crawford, 286, 298.
superans Kieffer, 293, 299.
Majella majella Kirk., 178.
philippina Melichar, 177.
Makilingia Baker, 409.
colorata Baker, 411, 413.
maculata Baker, 411, 412.
nigra Baker, 410, 411.
pallida Baker, 411, 414.
pruinosa Baker, 410, 412.
Malaria mosquito, a new species, 405.
Malay pangolin, Mania javanica Desmarest,
notes on the, 93.
Malaxa Melichar, 275.
acutipennis Melichar, 275.
Malideg barrio, customs of, 475.
Mancayan, barrios of, 517.
Manis javanica Desmarest, notes on, 93.
Index
549
Marriage customs of Igorols, 508, 523.
Mastigias ocellata Haeckel, 197.
papua L. Agassiz, 195, 197, 209.
var. sibogae Maas, 208.
McGregor, RICHARD C, Description of a
new species of Prinochilus from the high-
lands of Luzon, 531.
Mecynorhynchus hyalinus Melichar, 437.
kershawi Kirk., J^S7.
Medusae, 196.
Megapenthes angulosus Candeze, 442.
fulvus Fleut., 443.
inconditus Candeze, 442.
junceus Candeze, 442, MS.
var. candezei, 442.
luzonicus Fleut., 442.
Megatropis interruptolineata Melichar, 271.
obliquefasciata Melichar, 271.
Melanotus ebeninus Candeze, 448.
scribanus Candeze, 448.
Melanoxanthus affinis Fleutiaux, 444.
ater Fleut., 445.
bakeri Fleut., 443.
bicolor Candeze, U4'
carbunculus Candeze, U5.
cniciellus Candeze, U5.
crucifer Fleutiaux, 445.
exclamationis Candeze, 4U.
infimus Candeze, 445.
luzonicus Fleutiaux, 444.
promecus Candeze, 443.
sanguinicollis Schw., 4U.
Melibseus ajneifrons H. Deyr., 84.
bakeri Kerremans, 84.
MELICHAR, L., Neue Homopteren von den
Philippinen, 173 ; Neue Fulgoriden von den
Philippinen : L Theil, 269 ; Neue Fulgoriden
von den Philippinen: II, 433.
Meristhus nigritulus Candeze, 441.
Microcanthus strigatus (Cuv. and Val.), 73.
Mikan, 251.
Mileewa Distant, 415.
gillavryi, 417.
luzonica Baker, 415, 417.
var. decolorata Baker, 416.
Miscanthus sinensis Anders., 262.
Misepyris exaratus Kieffer, 285.
longiceps Kieffer, 285.
Mojarras, 67.
Monacanthidse, 73.
Monacanthus chinensis (Bloch), 73.
chinensis Giinther, 7S.
lineolatus Richardson, 74.
setifer Bennett, 73.
setifer Giinther, 7S.
Months, Igorot names for, 495.
Mosquito, malaria, a new species, 405.
Mountain Province, evolution of, 466.
legislation relating to, 466.
Mugil cephalus Linn., 61.
longimanus Giinther, 61.
macolipidotus Richardson, 61,
oeur Forskal, 61.
planiceps Cuv. and Val., 61.
Mugilidae, 61.
Mullet roes, 4.
Mullets, 7, 61.
Mullidae, 67.
Murder of a young boy, Igorot account of, 503.
Mycalesis Hiibner, 264.
borealis Feld. and Rogen., i69, t66.
charaka Moore, 266.
fulginia Fruhst., 268,
gotama Moore, 264f 265.
madjicosa Butler, 266.
nanda Fruhst., 266.
oculata Moore, 266.
(Sadarga) gotama Moore, 264.
seriphus Fruhst., £66.
Myzomyia febrifera Banks, 405.
funesta Giles, 405.
rossii Giles, 405.
N
Naked catfishes, 60.
Nemipterus japonicus (Bloch), 66.
Neocamma Melichar, 434.
trifasciata Melichar, 435.
Neope Butler, 258.
callipteris Butler, 26S.
goschkevitschii M6netries, 258.
japonica Butl., 259.
niphonica Butl., 259.
watanabei Mats., 259.
Nephthyidae, 2J6, 239.
Nesting place of Crocodilus palustris Lesson,
notes on, 313.
Neue Fulgoriden von den Philippinen : I.
Theil, 269 ; II, 433.
Neurepyris tagala Ashmead, 285.
Neurocacus philippinensis Kieffer, 286.
Neuroteleia Kieffer, 29S.
NitidulidfiB des Philippines, 535.
Normal school for men teachers in Manila,
history of, 123.
Nysia alba Melichar, 178.
atrovenosa Leth., 178.
Ophiocephalus striatus Bloch, the osseous sys-
tem of, 19.
Opisthacantha nigriclavata Ashmead, 286.
Origin of the world, Igorot legend of, 523.
Orthopagus (Udugama, Anagnia) philippinus
Melichar, 173.
Osseous system of Ophiocephalus striatuR
Bloch, 19.
Oxyurichthus amabalis Scale, 76.
cristatus (Day), 75.
P
Padangaan barrio, 505.
Pak chong, 63.
Palaemon acanthurus Wiegmann, S56.
carcinus Fabricius, 322, 324, S47,
S49, S50, 851.
dispar von Martens, 848, 866.
elegans de Man, 841* 871, 879.
esculentus Thallwitz, 897.
grandimanus Randall, 885, 892.
hilgendorfi H. Courti^re, 885, 888,
550
Index
Palaemon idae Heller, S65.
jamaicensis, SS9.
jaroensis Cowles, 385.
lanceifrons Dana 364, S71, S79.
V a r. montalbanensis
Co wles, 371.
lar Fabricius, SS9, 380.
latidactylus Thallwitz, 392, 400-
lepidactylus Hilgendorf, S85, S88,
389, S95, JtOO.
nipponensis de Haan, S4i% 5^6, S51.
oenone de Man, S97, 398.
philippinensis Co wles, S30, S39, 340.
placidus de Man, S85, S88.
ritsemae de Man, S41, S52.
rosenbergii de Man, 385.
rudis Heller, 3^1.
sp., 397.
sundaicus Heller, 355, 365.
weberi de Man, 3j^1, 348,
Palaemons of the Philippine Islands, 319.
Palinurus, 32 4.
Pan us, 78.
Pangolin, Malay, Manis javanica Desmarest,
93.
Papilio Doubleday, 250.
agamemnon, 854.
alcinous Klug, 255, 257.
var. mansonensis Fruhst., 258.
bianor Cramer, 251.
bradanus Fruhst., 257.
colus Fruhst., 255,
confusus Rothsch., 257.
connectens Fruhst., 255.
(Cosmodesmus) sarpedon Linnaeus,
262.
daenionius Alpher, 257,
decora Oberth., 257.
demetrius Cramer, 251.
demophon Meerb., 255.
demophoon Shaw, 255.
eurypilus Linn., 253.
fatuus Rothsch., 257.
febanufl Fruhst., 258.
hsematostictus Butl., 257.
hasrus Fruhst., 255.
helenus Linn., 251.
impedens Rothsch., 257.
intermedia Oberth., 257.
koannania, 258,
loochooanus Rothsch., 257,
luctatius Fruhst., 255.
mansonensis Fruhst., 257.
mencius Feld., 257.
morius Fruhst., 255.
nasrasakii Fruhst., 257.
nipponus Fruhst., 253, 255.
(Pharmacophagus) alcinous Klusr.,
255.
plutonius Oberth., 257,
sarpedon Davidson and Aitken, 253.
sarpedon Linnaeus, 252, 255.
sarpedonides Fruhst., 253 255.
semifasciatus Honr., 255.
spathatus Butl., 257.
teredon Feld., 254.
I Papilio xanthus Linn., 250.
1 xuthulus Brem., 250.
! xuthus Linnaeus, 250.
j PapiJionidae, 250.
I Paralemnalia, 236, 242.
' eburnea Kiiken., 237.
flabellum Q. and G., 287,
thrysoides (Ehrbg.), 236, 237.
I Puramesius Westwood, 301.
luzonicus Kieffer, 301.
; Parupercis cylindrica (Bloch), 79.
' pulchella (Temm. and Sehleg.), 79.
I Paratangia, 178.
Pareniaca bakeri Crawford, 459.
I browni Crawford, 458.
I Pjiromatus sp., 429.
Parrot fishes, 70.
' Payeo, barrio, origin and life of first man
j and woman inhabiting, 502.
' Pelagia panopyra Peron and Lesueur var.
placenta (Haeckel) Mayer, 196.
Pelagidaj, 196.
Penaeus, 319, 324.
Percia sexfasciatus Tenim. and Schleg., 79,
Pevilampidae, 459.
Perilumpus luzonensis Crawford, 459.
punctiventris Crawford, 460.
; Periphylla hyacinthina Steenstrup forma dode-
cabostrycha (Haeckel) Mayer, 196.
i Pharmocophagus Haase, 255.
Phellodendron amurense, 250,
: Philanthaxia lata Kerremans, 83.
Philippine Scyphomedusae, including two new
I genera, live new species, and one new va-
riety, 195.
I*hamopria exilis Kieffer, 287.
nigriceps Kieffer, 287.
rufa Kieffer, 287.
Phyllorhiza, 212.
Pistol crab, 324.
Plaice, 78.
Planting and harvesting, canao for, 525.
Platycephalidse, 77.
Platycephalus insidiator (Forskal), 77.
Platygasteridse, 286.
Platylister binnanum Mars., 425.
contiguum Mars., 4^5.
emptum Mars., 425.
jobiense Mars., 425.
pini Lew., 425.
sesquistriatum Mars., 425.
Platyscelio abnormis Crawford, 286.
punctatus Kieffer, 286.
Platysoma abruptum Erichson, 4ii5.
(Cylistosoma) dufali Marseul, 426.
dufali Marseul, 426,
gorhami Lewis, 425.
luzonicum Erichson, 425.
ovatus Erichson, 425.
(Platylister) abruptum Erichson,
425.
charrali Marseul, 424.
cortlcinus Bickhardt,
424.
ovatum Erichson, 425.
Index
551
Platysoma (Platylister) striatiderum Marseul,
425.
ramoicola Mars., 425.
scitutum Lewis, 426.
striatiderum Marseul, 425.
uniforme Lewis, 426.
Pleuronectidae, 78.
Plotosidfe, 60.
Plotosus arab (Forsk&l), 60.
Pochazia marginalis Melichar, 179.
Pochazina bakeri Melichar, 180.
handlirschi Mel., 180.
Poisoning by jellyfish, 199.
Polydactylus plebeius (Broussonet), 62,
tetradactylus Shaw, 61.
Polynemidae, 61.
Pomfret, black, 63.
white, 63.
Porgies, 7, 67.
Pottery industry in San Is^colas. Ilocos Norte,
notes on the, 117.
Prawns, salted, 3.
Prionochilus anthonyi McGregor, 531.
Priopis urotaenia (Bleeker), 65.
Pristapoma hasta Bloch, 67.
Procinetus rectinervis Kieffer, 287.
Proctotrupides, 285.
Prodryinus ( ?) stantoni Ashmead, 285.
Promiomcera ruflthorax Kieffer, 183.
Prosacantha, 286.
Prosparasion coeruleum Kieffer, 286.
Protective coloration, 248.
Pselaphides des lies Philippines, 451.
Pseudorhiza, 212,
I*seudorhombus misakius Jordan and Starks,
78.
olegolepis Bleeker, 78.
russellii (Gray), 78.
Pseudoscarus aeruginosa Giinther, 70.
Pteromalidse, 460.
Pteropsaridae, 79.
Pterosparids, 79.
Ptoleria Stal, 175.
Puffers, 74.
Pukot, used in catching crustaceans, 320.
Q
Quarrels of husband and wife among Igorots,
516.
Questions and complaints, Igorot methods of
settling, 511.
R
RAFFRAY, A. Catalogue des Pselaphides
(Coleoptftres) des iles Philippines, 451.
Rangbia Moore, 261.
Raphitreus bakeri Raff ray, 455.
dentimanus Raffr., 455.
speratus Sharp, 455.
Refrigeration of fish, 12.
Reichenbachia dama Raffray, 454.
laticollis Raffray, 453.
manillensis Raffray, 453.
rufa Schmidt-Goebel, 453.
Rhabdepyris luzonicus Kieffer, 285.
Rhizostomse, 196, 201.
Rhizostomata dichotoma, 206.
pinnata, 201.
triptera, 216.
Rhinogobius hongkongensis Scale, 74.
Rhopalocera, 250.
Rhopilema esculenta Kish., 230.
hispidum Maas, 2S0.
visayana Light, 195, 197, 227, 230.
Rhotana basipunctulata Melichar, 438.
excelsa Melichar, 437.
latipennis Walk., 437.
punctovenosa Melichar, 437.
Ricaniinse. 179.
ROBERTSON, JAMES A., The Igorots of
Lepanto, 465.
Rybaxis gladiator Rraffray, 454.
simoniana Raffray, 454.
S
Sabangan, barrios of, 522.
Sadarga Moore, 264.
Salt water shrimps, S19, 324.
Sambus auricolor Saund., 84.
lugubris Saund., 84.
Sanderia malayensis Goette, 196.
San Emilio, barrios of, 526.
Santalus congruens Mars., 427.
elongatulus Mars., 427.
latitibius Mars., 427.
mandibularis Schmidt, 427.
parallelus Redt., 427.
philippinarum Bickhardt, 426, 428.
piraticus Lewis, 426.
rupestris Mars., 428.
tabellio Mars., 428.
Sardinella fimbrata (Cuv. and Val.), 11.
gibbosa (Bleeker), 11.
klunzi (Bleeker), 11.
longiceps (Cuv. and Val.), 11.
melanostica (Schleg.), ii.
moluccensis (Bleeker), 11.
sundaica (Bleeker), 11.
vancibris (Jordan and Snyder), //.
zunazi (Bleeker), 11.
Sardines, 6.
canning, 10.
Sasagusa, 259, 260, 261, 263.
Satyridae, 258.
Satyrus marginalis Motschulsky, 262.
Scapopria atriceps Kieffer, 287, 310.
Scarichthyidae, 70.
Scelio Latreille, 289.
aratigena Kieffer, 286, 590.
bisectus Kieffer, 290.
consobrinus Kieffer, 286, 290.
luzonicus Kieffer, 290, 291.
philippinensis Ashmead, 286, 289.
variicornis Kieffer, 286, 290.
Scelionidse, 286, 289.
Schizosema cellularis Kieffer, 183.
SCHULTZE, W., Notes on the Malay panga-
lin, Manis javanica Desmarest, 93 ; Notes
on a nesting place of Crocodilus palustris
Lesson, 313.
Sciaena aneus Bloch, 69.
diacanthus (Lac^pede), 68.
552
Index
Scisenidse, 68.
Scisenoides biauritus Cantor, 69.
Scolopsis vosmeri Bleeker, 66.
Scomberoides lysan (Forsk&l), 62.
Scomberomorus guttatum (Bloch), 62.
ScombridfiB, 62.
Scorpaenidaj, 77.
Scorpion fishes, 77.
Scyphomedusae, some Philippine, 195.
Sea bass, 7.
crawfish, 324.
goldfishes, 69.
SEALE, ALVIN, Preservation of commercial
fish and fishery products in the tropics, 1 ;
Fishes of Hongkong, 59.
Sebastopsis marmorata (Cuv. and Val.), 77.
Sek pan, 65.
Semaeostomeae, 200.
Serphides, 285.
Serranidse, 65.
Shiro-gusu, 255.
Shrimps, salted, 3.
Sick, caiiao for, 524.
Sickness, Igorot customs during, 510.
Siganidse, 73.
Siganids, 73.
Siganus oramin (Bloch and Schn.), 73.
Sillaginidae, 69.
Sillago maculata Quoy and Gaimard, 69.
sihama (Forsk&l), 69.
Siluridae, 60.
Silversides, 60.
Sinchula Moore, 26S.
Slip months, 63.
Snappers, 7, 66.
Soldier fishes, 62.
Solea ovata Richardson, 78.
Soleidae, 78.
Soles, 78.
Soles faleacea Richardson, 78.
Spadefishes, 71.
Spanish normal school for men teachers in
Manila, 1865-1905, history of, 123.
Sparasion philippinense Kieffer, 286.
Sparidse, 67.
Sparus berda Forskil, 67.
datnia (Hamilton), 67.
Spheroides spadiceus (Richardson), 74.
Sphyraena jello Cuv. and Val., 61.
obtusata Cuv. and Val., 61.
Sphyraenidae, 61.
Spilomicrus Westwood, 302.
carinifrons Kieffer, 287, 302.
consobrinus Kieffer, 287.
dispansus Kieffer, 287, 302.
nitidicornis Kieffer, 287, 302.
opertus Kieffer, 287, 302.
philippinensis Kieffer, 302.
variicomis Kieffer, 287, 302.
Spiny lobster, 324.
Stethojulis kalosoma Bleeker, 70.
Striped mullet, 61.
Stolephorus delicatulus (Bennet), 11.
gracilis (Temm. and Schleg.), 11.
Stromateidae, 63.
Stromateus argenteus Bloch, 63.
niger Bloch, 63.
Stylopria Kieffer, 307.
rufa Kieffer, 307.
Suagayan barrio, customs of, 480.
Superstitions of Igorots, 526.
Surmullets, 67.
Susuki, 262.
Symplana Kirby, 277.
viridinervis Kirby, 278.
Synaptura orientalis Bloch and Schneider, 78
pan Bleeker, 78.
Synodontidae, 59.
Synodus japonicus (Houttuyn), 59.
Syntames tubulifer Melichar, 269.
Tabu-no-ki, 253, 255.
Talabog, used in catching crustaceans, 320.
Tangina bipunctata Melichar, 176.
Quadrilineata Melichar, 177
quadripunctulata Melichar, 176.
Telenomus catacanthae Ashmead, 286.
Tephritis sinensis (Lacepede), 78.
Termites, nests of, 94.
Tetraodontidae, 74.
Tettigoniella Jacobi, 418.
differentialis Baker, 420.
kinbergi, Jt20.
makilingensis Baker, 419.
quinquenotata Stil, 420.
spectra var. nigrilinea St&l, 418.
unimaculata Sign., J^20.
whiteheadii Distant, 418.
Tettigoniellidae, new species of, 409.
Thalassoma lunare (Linn.), 69.
Therapon cuvieri (Bleeker), 66.
jarbua (Forsk&l), 67.
theraps (Cuv. and Val.), 67.
Theraponidae, 66.
Thesiastes crassipes Raff ray, 451.
Thieves, Igorot, 516.
Threadfins, 61.
Thysanophrys bataviensis (Bleeker), 78.
neglectus (Troch.), 78.
Thysanostoma thysanura Haeckel, 197.
Tmesiphorus simoni Raffray, 455.
Torreya nucifera S. and Z., 260.
Trachinocephalus myops (Forster), 59.
Trachurus trachurus Linn., 62.
Trachys bakeri Ker remans, 90.
cornuta Kerremans, 89.
dubia Saund., 89.
formosana Kerremans, 90.
Trichopria Ashmead, 310.
analis Kieffer, 287, 310.
caudata Kieffer, 287, 310.
insulse Kiefferj 287.
maquilingensis Kieffer, 310.
semirufa Kieffer, 287, 310.
Tridentiger bifasciatus Steindachner, 77.
Tristilophus luzonicus Cand^ze, 448.
Tropidocephala philippina Melichar, 273.
Trypauchen vagina Bloch and Schn., 77.
Tsubana, 260.
Index
553
Tsuzura-fuji, 256.
Two new cyprinoid fishes of the genus Barbus
from Lake Manguao, Palawan, P. I., 187.
Tylosurus caudimaculatus (Cuvier), 60.
Tyraphus baeri Raffray, 454.
IT
Ugyops granulatus Melichar, 175.
Ujna Sikh 416.
consors Distant, 417.
delicatula Distant, 417.
pMlippinensis Baker, 416, U7.
Upeneoides moluccensis Bleeker, 68.
sulphureus (Cuv. and Val.), 68.
tragula (Richardson), 68.
Upeneus bensasi (Temm. and Schleg.), 68.
displunis Playfair, 67.
Uroscelio Kieffer, 291.
luteipes Kieffer, 291.
Vanessa io Linn., 264.
Varuna litterata (Fabr.), 4.
Vekunta lineata Melichar, 270.
Verrilliana, 237.
Versura, 212.
maasi Mayer, 197.
w
Wedding feasts of Igorots, 508.
Wharf fishes, 65.
Whitings, 69.
WILEMAN, A. E., Notes on Japanese Lepi-
doptera and their larvae: Part I, 247.
Wong fa yu, 69.
WORCESTER. DEAN C, Note on the occur-
rence of a flying crustacean in the Philip-
pine Islands, 57.
Wrasse fishes, 69.
X
Xanthoxylon schinnifolium S. and Z., 250.
Xenepyris compressicornis Kieffer, 285.
Xenotoleia flavipennis Kieffer, 286.
Xenotoma Foerster, 310.
philippinensis Kieffer, 287, 310.
soror Kieffer, 310.
Xytffima punctatum (Cuv. and Val.), 67.
Y
Yama-joro, 255.
Yat sa yu, 78.
Ying kung, 71.
Z
Zoraida dorsopunctata Melichar, 434.
flavicornis Melichar, 433.
puncticosta Melichar, 433.
O
If
X
^
•;<.,^i^i^«c
-^v:^<^
i/
l« 2
1315
Vol. IX, Sec. D, No. 6 J 'J*- " ' November, 1914
THE PHILIPPINE
JOURNAL OF SCIENCE
ALVIN J. COX, M. A., Ph. D.
GENERAL EDITOR
Section D
GENERAL BIOLOGY, ETHNOLOGY,
AND ANTHROPOLOGY
EDITED WITH THE COOPERATION OF
M. L. MILLER, Ph. D.; R. P. COWLES, Ph. D.; C. S. BANKS. M. S.
ALVIN SEALE, A. B.; C. F. BAKER, A. M.
RICHARD C. MCGREGOR, A. B.
MANILA
BUREAU OF PRINTING
1914
PUBLICATIONS FOR SALE BY THE BUEEAU OF SCIENCE,
MANILA, PHILIPPINE ISLANDS
ETHNOLOGY
A VOCABULARY OF THE IGOROT LAN-
GUAGE AS SPOKEN BY THE
BONTOC IGOROTS
By Walter Clayton Clapp
Order No. 408. Paper, 89 pages, $0.75,
postpaid.
The vocabulary is given in Igorot-English
and English-lgorot.
THE NABALOI DIALECT
By Otto Scheerer
and
THE BATAKS OF PALAWAN
By Edward Y. Miller
Order No. 403. Paper, $0.25; half mo-
rocco, $0.75; postpaid.
The Nabaloi Dialect (65 pages, 29
plates) and the Bataks of Palawan (7
pages, 6 plates) are bound under one cover.
THE BATAN DIALECT AS A MEMBER
OF THE PHILIPPINE GROUP
OF LANGUAGES
By Otto Scheerer
and
*T" AND "V" IN PHILIPPINE
LANGUAGES
By Carlos Everett Conant
Order No. 407.
These two papers are issued under one
cover, 141 pages, paper, $0.80, postpaid.
ETHNOLOGY— Continued
STUDIES IN MORO HISTORY, LAW,
AND RELIGION
By Najeeb M. Saleeby
Order No. 405. Paper, 107 pages, 16
plates, 5 diagrams, $0.25; half mo-
rocco, $0.75; postpaid.
This volume deals with the earliest
written records of the Moros in Mindanao.
The names of the rulers of Magindanao are
recorded in five folding diagrams.
NEGRITOS OF ZAMBALES
By William Allan Reed
Order No. 402. Paper, 83 pages, 62
plates, $0.25; half morocco, $0.75;
postpaid.
Plates from photographs, many of which
were taken for this publication, show orna-
ments, houses, men making fire with bamboo,
bows and arrows, dances, and various types
of the people themselves.
INDUSTRIES
PHILIPPINE HATS
By C. B. Robinson
Order No. 415. Paper, 66
plates, $0.50 postpaid.
This paper is a concise record of the
history and present condition of hat making
in the Philippine Islands.
pages, 8
THE SUBANUNS OF SINDANGAN BAY
By Emerson B. Christie
Order No. 410. Paper, 121 pages, 1
map, 29 plates, $1.25, postpaid.
Sindangan Bay is situated on the north-
ern coast of Zamboanga Peninsula. The Su-
banuns of this region were studied by Mr.
Christie during two periods of five and six
weeks, respectively.
The 29 plates illustrate the Subanuns at
work and at play; their industries, houses,
altars, and implements; and the people
themselves.
THE SUGAR INDUSTRY IN THE
ISLAND OF NEGROS
By Herbert S. Walker
Order No. 412. Paper, 145 pages, 10
plates, 1 map, $1.25, postpaid.
Considered from the viewpoint of prac-
tical utility, Mr. Walker's Sugar Industry
in the island of Negros is one of the most
important papers published by the Bureau
of Science. This volume is a real contribu-
tion to the subject; it is not a mere com-
pilation, for the author was in the field and
understands the conditions of which he
writes.
THE HISTORY OF SULU
By Najeeb M. Saleeby
Order No. 406. Paper, 275 pages, 4
maps, 2 diagrams, $0.75, postpaid,
in the preparation of his manuscript for
The History of Sulu, Doctor Saleeby spent
much time and effort in gaining access
to documents in the possession of the Sultan
of Sulu. This book is a history of the
Moros In the Philippines from the earliest
times to the American occupation.
A MANUAL OF PHILIPPINE SILK
CULTURE
By Charles S. Banks
Order No. 413. Paper, 53 pages, 20
plates, $0.75, postpaid.
In A Manual of Philippine Silk Culture
are presented the results of several years'
actual work with silk-producing larvae to-
gether with a description of the new Philip-
pine race.
PUBLICATIONS FOR SALE BY THE BUREAU OF SCIENCE,
MANILA, PHILIPPINE ISLANDS— Continued
BOTANY
A FLORA OF MANILA
By Elmer D. Merrill
Order No. 419. Paper, 490 pages, $2.50,
postpaid.
Practically a complete flora of the cul-
tivated areas in the Philippines. Descrip-
tions, with keys, of over 1,000 species, 590
genera, and 136 families, with native names,
glossary of technical terms, etc.
ZOOIiOGY— Continued
A MANUAL OF PHILIPPINE BIRDS
By Richard C. McGregor
Order No. 103. Paper, 2 parts, 769
pages, $4, postpaid.
A Manual of Philippine Birds contains
In compact form descriptions of all the
known species of Philippine birds. The
usual keys and diagnoses of orders, families,
and genera help the novice In identification.
THE COCONUT PALM IN THE PHIL-
IPPINE ISLANDS
Order No. 37. Paper, 149 pages, 30 plates,
$1, postpaid.
The reprint contains the following arti-
cles: On the Water Relations of the Coconut
Palm (Cocos nucifera). The Coconut and its
Relation to Coconut Oil, The Keeping Quali-
ties of Coconut Oil and the Causes of its
Rancidity, and The Principal Insects Attack-
ing the Coconut Palm.
A CHECK-LIST OF PHILIPPINE
FISHES
By David Starr Jordan and Robert Earl
Richardson
Order No. 102.
postpaid.
This list will be found a convenient guide
to the synonymy of Philippine ichthyology.
The nomenclature is thoroughly revised, and
the distribution of each species within tho
Philippine Islands is given.
Paper, 78 pages, $0.75,
INDO-MALAYAN WOODS
By Fred W. Foxworthy
Order No. 411. Paper, 182 pages, 9
plates, $0.30, postpaid.
In Indo-Malayan Woods, Doctor Fox-
worthy has brought together a large amount
of accurate information concerning trees
yielding woods of economic value.
ZOOIjOGY
A LIST OF THE MAMMALS OF THE
PHILIPPINE ISLANDS, EXCLU-
SIVE OF THE CETACEA
By Ned Hollister
Order No. 418. Paper, 64 pages, $0.50,
postpaid.
This is the only recent attempt to enu-
merate the mammals of the Philippine
Islands. The distribution of each species
is given, and the original descriptions are
cited.
MEDICINE
REPORT OF THE INTERNATIONAL
PLAGUE CONFERENCE
Held at Mukden, April, 1911, under the
auspices of the Chinese Government,
Edited by Erich Martini, G. F. Petrie,
Arthur Stanley, and Richard P.
Strong
483 pages, 18 plates (2 colored, 4 half-
tones, 12 charts and maps)
Order No. 416. Paper, $2.50; cloth,
$3.50; postpaid.
The proceedings of this International^ Con-
ference and information gained therefrom, to-
gether with the results of certain bacte-
riological investigations, constitute the pres-
ent report.
The Bureau of Science of the Govern-
ment of the Philippine Islands has been
appointed sole agent for the distribution
of the printed proceedings of the Interna-
tlonal Plague Conference.
PRICES ARE IN UNITED STATES CURRENCY
Orders for these publications may "be sent to the BUSINESS MANAGER
PHILIPPINE JOTJRNAI OF SCIENCE, BUREAU OF SCIENCE, MANILA, P. I.)
or to any of the agents listed below. Please give order number.
The MacmiUan Company, 64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York, U. S. A.
Wm. Wesley & Son, 2 8 Essex Street, Strand, London, W. C, England.
Martinus Nijhoff, Lange Voorhout 9, The Hague, Holland.
Mayer & Miiller, Prinz Louis Ferdinandstrasse 2, Berlin, N. W., Germany,
Kelly & Walsh, Ltd., 32 Raffles Place, Singapore, Straits Settlements.
A. M. & J. Ferguson, 19 Baillie Street, Colombo, Ceylon.
Thacker, Spink & Co., P. O. Box 54, Calcutta, India.
CONTENTS
Page.
ROBERTSON, JAMES A. The Igorots of Lepanto 465
McGregor, RICHARD C. Description of a New Species of
Prionochilus from the Highlands of Luzon 531
GROUVELLE, a. Nitidulidae des Philippines recoltes par C. F.
Baker 535
Index 543
^ u. s.
The ^'Philippine Journal of Science'* is issued as follows: currency
Section A. Chemical and Geological Sciences and the Industries.. $2.00
Section B. Tropical Medicine 3.00
Section C. Botany 2.00
Section D. General Biology, Ethnology, and Anthropology (Sec-
tion D began with Volume V) 2.00
Entire Journal, Volume II, III, IV, or V .. 5.00
Entire Journal, beginning with Volume VI 7.00
Single numbers of Volume I _ ,75
Single numbers (except of Volume I) - - .50
Volume I, 1906 (not divided Into sections) and supplement, sold
only with a complete file of section A, B, or C 10.00
Supplement to Volame I (ik>(any) * S.50
Volume I (without supplement), sold only with a complete file of
section A, B, or C 6.50
Euch section is separately paged and indexed.
Publications sent in exchange for the Philippine Journal of Science
should be addressed: Library, Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I.
Subscriptions may be sent to the Business Manager, Philippine Jour-
nal of Science, Bureau of Science, Manila, P. I., or to any of the agents
listed below:
AGENTS
The Macmillan Company, 64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York City, U. S. A.
Wm. Wesley & Son, 28 Essex Street, Strand, Ijondon, W. C, England.
Martinus Nijhoff, Lange Voorhout 9, The Hague, Holland..
Mayer & Miiller, Prinz Louis Ferdinandstrasse 2, Berlin, N. W., Ger-
many.
Kelly & Walsh, lilmited, 32 Raffles Place, Singapore, Straits Settlements.
A. M. <& J. Ferguson, !• Baillie Street, Colombo, Ceylon,
Thackefr, Spink & Co., P. O. Box 54, Calcutta, India.
Entered at the post-office at Manila, P. I., as second-class matter
Oi
NOV ].iiS15 .
MNiv. OF r/ilCH.
LIBRARY
">
- if
/
/
/
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11